Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12t

SOLUTIONS

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition by George Belch, Michael Belch

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition by George Belch, Michael Belch

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition by George Belch, Michael Belch Chapter 1-22

CHAPTER 1 AN INTRODUCTION TO INTEGRATED MARKETING COMMUNICATIONS Learning Objectives 1. Describe the role of advertising and other promotional elements in marketing.

2. Discuss the evolution of the integrated marketing communications (IMC) concept.

3. Explain the increasing value of the IMC perspective in advertising and promotional programs.

4. Identify the elements of the promotional mix.

5. Identify the contact points between marketers and their target audiences.

6. Describe the steps in the IMC planning process.

Chapter and Lecture Outline I.

INTRODUCTION TO ADVERTISING AND PROMOTION

The chapter begins with a brief discussion of the changing roles of advertising and promotional strategy in modern marketing. Specifically, it offers a case study from Nike about their willingness to take a risk and utilize Colin Kaepernick in their anniversary campaign. The case shows that Nike was willing to change their marketing strategy in order to adapt to the new ways in which companies and brands communicate with consumers. Instructors should discuss how increases in audience fragmentation and a shift to digital media have spearheaded this change in brand/consumer communication. Consumers no longer just passively receive messages, but serve as content creators as well. Brands must be willing to adapt their strategies, moving away from solely an advertising focus to a holistic approach that attempts to engage consumers in a conversation: an IMC approach. Instructors should also stress the difference between IMC, advertising, and public relations.

II.

THE GROWTH OF ADVERTISING AND PROMOTION

Advertising and promotion are integral parts of our social and economic systems. Advertising has evolved into a vital communication system for both consumers and businesses. In market-based economies, consumers rely on advertising and other forms of promotion to provide them with information they can use in making purchase decisions. Corporations rely on advertising and promotion to help them market their products and services.

Evidence of the increasing importance of advertising and promotion in the marketing process comes from the growth in expenditures in these areas over the past decade. In 1980, advertising expenditures in the U.S. were $53 billion and $49 billion was spent on sale promotion. In 2019, $240 billion was spent on

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

advertising. Of that, $110 billion was spent on traditional advertising media such as TV, radio, magazines, newspaper, and OOH. Digital/online advertising accounted for the other $130 billion. Billions more are spent by both domestic and foreign companies in other promotional areas such as direct marketing, event sponsorship, interactive marketing, sponsorships, consumer and trade promotions, and public relations efforts. The tremendous growth in expenditures for advertising and promotion reflect the growth of the U.S. and global economies. Expansion-minded marketers are taking advantage of growth opportunities in various regions of the world and taking advantage of integrated marketing opportunities through methods such as event sponsorship and the use of the Internet. Particularly noteworthy is the increase in the amount of marketing communications dollars being spent online. For the first time ever, in 2019, digital ad dollars in the U.S. surpassed those dollars spent on traditional advertising media.

Specifically, 54 percent of advertising dollars in the U.S. went to digital advertising efforts while 46 percent went to traditional advertising media. By 2023, it is expected that digital advertising will account for more than two-thirds of all advertising spending. These upward trends in ad spending, and particularly digital ad spending, are seen globally, although U.S. advertising spending accounts for nearly a third of the world‘s advertising expenditures.

Professor Notes:

III.

THE ROLE OF MARKETING

Many students may already have had a marketing course; however, it is still helpful to define marketing and stress that it involves more than just selling or other promotion functions. For more than two decades, the American Marketing Association, the association that represents marketing professionals in the United States and Canada, defined marketing as: the process of planning and executing the conception, pricing, promotion, and distribution of ideas, goods, and services to create exchanges that satisfy individual and organizational objectives.

This definition of marketing focused on exchange as a central concept in the various activities involved in the marketing process. Many experts argue that exchange is the core phenomenon or domain for study in marketing. The discussion can focus on the nature of exchange and what is needed for this process to occur including: two or more parties with something of value to one another; a desire and ability to give up their something of value to the other party; and a way for the parties to communicate with one another.

In 2007, the AMA adopted a revised definition of marketing: Marketing is the activity, set of institutions, and processes for creating, communicating, and delivering exchange offerings that have value for customers, clients, partners and society at large.

This definition of marketing is more reflective of the role of non-marketers to the marketing process. It also focuses on the important role marketing plays in developing and sustaining relationships with customers and delivering value to them.

Value is the customer‘s perception of all of the benefits of a product or service weighed against all the costs of acquiring and using it. Benefits can be functional (focusing on the performance of the product), experiential (focusing on what it feels like to use the product), or psychological (feelings that result from

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

owning a particular brand). Costs include the money paid for the product or service as well as other factors such as acquiring information, making the purchase, learning how to use a product/service, maintaining the product, and disposing of it.

A.

The Marketing Mix—The four elements of the marketing mix (product, price, place, and promotion) can be introduced and the task of combining these elements into an effective marketing program for facilitating exchange with a target audience should be noted. The instructor should point out that while this course focuses on the promotion element of the marketing mix, the promotional program must be part of a viable marketing strategy and coordinated with other marketing mix variables. This leads into a discussion of the concept of integrated marketing communications.

Professor Notes:

IV.

INTEGRATED MARKETING COMMUNICATIONS

A.

The Evolution of IMC—In the past, many marketers built strong barriers around the various marketing and promotional functions, planning and managing them separately with different budgets, different views of the market and different goals and objectives. In the 1980s, however, many companies began moving toward the concept of integrated marketing communications (IMC), which involves coordinating the various promotional elements along with other marketing activities that communicate with a firm‘s customers. As marketers embraced the concept of IMC, they began asking their ad agencies to coordinate the use of a variety of promotional tools rather than relying primarily upon media advertising. A number of companies began looking beyond traditional advertising agencies, using other types of promotional specialists to develop and implement various components of their promotional plans. As the advertising industry recognized that IMC was more than just a fad, terms such as new advertising, orchestration, and seamless communication were used to describe the concept of integration. A task force from the American Association of Advertising Agencies (4As) developed one of the first definitions of integrated marketing communications (MC) defining it as: a concept of marketing communications planning that recognizes the added value of a comprehensive plan that evaluates the strategic roles of a variety of communication disciplines—for example, general advertising, direct response, sales promotion, and public relations- and combines these disciplines to provide clarity, consistency, and maximum communications impact.

Integrated marketing communications calls for a ―big picture‖ approach to planning marketing and promotion programs and coordinating various communication functions. With an integrated approach, all of a company‘s marketing and promotional activities should project a consistent and unified image to the marketplace. However, advocates of IMC have argued for an even broader perspective that considers all sources of brand or company contact that a customer or prospect has with a company, product, or service.

An example of this unified communication approach is provided of Montblanc, a luxury leather goods, tech, watch, and other accessory brand. The brand recognized that each interaction consumers have with their brand serves as an opportunity for the brand to deliver on their brand promise of quality products, to strengthen relationships with their customers, and deepen loyalty.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

The example of Montblanc‘s IMC approach provided discusses their ―The Spirit of Mountain Exploration‖ campaign, which uses imagery of mountain exploration in the 1920s and 30s to promote their chronographs and pocket watches. The campaign is an attempt by Montblanc to engage younger consumers who value exploration. This campaign features actor Hugh Jackman as the brand‘s ambassador and utilizes print, digital, and social media to communicate the brand‘s message. This example highlights the advertising industry‘s recognition that a broader perspective of the advertising discipline was needed to involve a more strategic perspective that would open up more opportunities for brands to engage with consumers.

B.

A Contemporary Perspective of IMC—As IMC evolves and marketers develop a better understanding of the concept, they are recognizing that it involves more than just coordinating the various elements of the marketing and communications program to reflect ―one look, one voice.‖ IMC is being recognized as a business process that helps companies identify the most appropriate and effective methods for communicating and building relationships with customers and other stakeholders. Don Schultz of Northwestern University, who has been one of the major proponents and thought leaders in the area, developed a new definition of IMC which is as follows: Integrated marketing communications is a strategic business process used to plan, develop, execute and evaluate coordinated, measurable, brand communications programs over time with consumers, customers, prospects, employees, associates and other targeted relevant external and internal audiences. The goal is to generate both short-term financial returns and build long-term brand and shareholder value.

This definition views IMC as an ongoing strategic business process rather than just tactical integration of various communication activities. It also recognizes that there are a number of relevant audiences that are an important part of this process beyond just customers such as prospects, suppliers, investors, interest groups, and the general public. This definition also shows the increasing emphasis being placed on accountability and measured outcomes of marketing communication programs.

C.

Reasons for the Growing Importance of IMC—There are a number of reasons why marketers are adopting the concept of IMC. A very fundamental reason is that they recognize the value of strategically integrating the various communication functions rather than having them operate autonomously, taking advantage of synergy among promotional tools. The move also reflects an adaptation by marketers to a changing environment, particularly with respect to consumers, technology, and media consumption behavior. One of the major developments that has led to the adoption of IMC is the fragmentation of media and the shift from mass to micromarketing. The IMC movement is also being driven by a ―marketing revolution‖ that is changing the ways companies market their products and services. Major characteristics of this marketing revolution include: •

The use of the Internet in marketing efforts allows advertisers to reach consumers in a much more targeted way than traditional media ever allowed for.

•

Audiences are more fragmented than ever before, leaving media planners and buyers with much more difficult decisions to make when it comes to ad placement.

•

Consumers are finding more ways to avoid marketers advertising messages as consumers, particularly young consumers, have grown skeptical of advertising. Advertisers and those selling advertising space on the Internet have become gravely aware of the use of ad blockers, which could limit their success in digital spaces.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

D.

•

Marketers can no longer be tied to a specific communication tool (such as media advertising) but should instead use the best contact methods for delivering their message to target audiences.

•

Agencies strive to show their value to clients by repositioning themselves as specialists in all IMC efforts, not just advertising, and work to show their expertise in digital marketing.

The Role of IMC in Branding—One of the major reasons for the growing importance of integrated marketing communications over the past decade is that it plays a major role in the process of developing and sustaining brand identity and equity. Brand identity is a combination of many factors including the name, logo, symbols, design, packaging, and performance of a product or service as well as the associations that come to mind when consumers think about a brand. It is the sum of all points of encounter or contact that consumers have with a brand, which includes the various forms of integrated marketing communication used by a company. Figure 1-1 shows the world‘s 10 best global brands from the 2018 Interbrand rankings.

McGraw-Hill Connect ®: IMC for Bee & Gee's Shampoo Products Type of Activity: Case Analysis Activity Summary: Bee & Gee is a multi-product, multi-brand, packaged goods company with a significant presence in the personal care and grooming category. Within each product category, it has numerous brands that sometimes compete with each other in the same geographical markets. Each year, the brand managers of each individual brand at Bee & Gee review the marketing communications elements used for the brand during the current year and start the planning process for next year's promotion. In this activity, students will answer questions about IMC elements and planning.

Activity Learning Objective: 01-02 Discuss the evolution of the integrated marketing communications (IMC) concept.

Concept Review: Though advertising has been the dominant form of marketing communication, a variety of other elements such as direct response, sales promotions, public relations, interactive marketing, and event sponsorships have become an increasingly important part of a firm's promotional portfolio. Most marketers began moving toward the process of integrated marketing communications (IMC), which involves coordinating the various promotional elements and other marketing activities that communicate with a firm's customers. As marketers embraced the concept of integrated marketing communications, they began asking their ad agencies to coordinate the use of a variety of promotional tools rather than relying primarily on mass media advertising. Many agencies responded by acquiring PR, sales promotion, and direct-marketing companies and touting themselves as IMC agencies that offer one-stop shopping for their clients' promotional needs.

Difficulty: 2 Medium Bloom‘s: Analyze AACSB: Analytical Thinking

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

V.

THE PROMOTIONAL MIX: THE TOOLS FOR IMC

Promotion is defined as the coordination of all seller-initiated efforts to set up channels of information and persuasion to sell goods and services or promote an idea. It should be noted that promotion is best viewed as the communication function of marketing. The discussion of integrated marketing communications should point out how other marketing elements such as brand name, package design, price, or retail outlets implicitly communicate with consumers. However, most of an organization‘s communication with the marketplace takes place through a carefully planned and controlled promotional program which utilizes elements of the promotional mix. The promotional mix is defined as the basic tools or elements that are used to accomplish an organization‘s objectives. The role and function of each promotional mix element in the marketing program can be discussed along with its advantages and limitations.

A.

Advertising—Any paid form of nonpersonal communication about an organization, product, service, or idea by an identified sponsor.

Each element of this definition is described in the text and it would be beneficial for instructors to break down the definition for students. Advertising is a paid form of communication, meaning that it almost always purchased (except PSAs). The nonpersonal element indicates that advertising involves mass media that transmit a message to a large group of people at the same time with little to no opportunity for immediate feedback. Advertising is done for organizations, produces, services, and ideas and is typically most beneficial for products and services targeted at a mass consumer audience. Finally, advertising comes from an identified sponsor.

Advantages: •

Cost-effective way for communicating, particularly with large audiences.

•

Ability to create images and symbolic appeals and for differentiating similar products and services.

•

Valuable tool for creating and maintaining brand equity.

•

Ability to strike responsive chord with audience through creative advertising.

•

Opportunity to leverage popular advertising campaigns into successful IMC programs which can generate support from retailers and other trade members.

•

Ability to control the message (what, when and how something is said and where it is delivered).

Disadvantages: •

Cost of producing and placing ads can be very high, particularly television commercials.

•

Can be difficult to determine the effectiveness of advertising.

•

Credibility and image problems associated with advertising.

•

Vast number of ads has created clutter problems and consumers are not paying attention to much of the advertising they see and/or hear.

The nature and purpose of advertising differs from one industry to another and across various situations as does its role and function in the promotional program. The common classifications of advertising to the consumer market include national, retail/local and direct-response

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

advertising as well as primary versus selective demand advertising. Classifications of advertising to the business and professional market include industrial, professional and trade advertising.

These classifications are described in Figure 1-4.

Professor Notes:

McGraw-Hill Connect ®: WPU's Competitive Promotional Mix Analysis Type of Activity: Click and Drag Activity Summary: The newly appointed president of a university in the Midwest wants to propose an IMC campaign to attract the best student prospects and their parents to the university. He hires an independent marketing consulting firm to conduct a competitive analysis of the promotional mix by examining IMC elements used by peer/competitor universities. From the descriptions of the competitive IMC activity, students will identify the specific subtype of promotional mix element and match those with the six broad types of promotional mix elements.

Activity Learning Objectives: 01-04 Identify the elements of the promotional mix.

01-05 Identify the contact points between marketers and their target audiences.

Concept Review: Promotion has been defined as the coordination of all seller-initiated efforts to set up channels of information and persuasion in order to sell goods and services or promote an idea. Most of an organization's communications with the marketplace take place as part of a carefully planned and controlled promotional program. The basic tools used to accomplish an organization's communication objectives are often referred to as the promotional mix.

The promotional mix includes six elements: advertising, sales promotion, publicity/public relations, personal selling, direct marketing and digital/interactive media. Each element of the promotional mix is viewed as an integrated marketing communications tool that plays a distinctive role in an IMC program.

Each may take on a variety of forms. And each has certain advantages.

Difficulty: 2 Medium Bloom‘s: Understand AACSB: Analytical Thinking

B.

Direct Marketing—A system of marketing by which organizations communicate directly with target customers to generate a response and/or a transaction. Direct marketing has not traditionally been considered an element of the promotional mix. However, because it has

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

become such an integral part of the integrated marketing communications program of many organizations, this text views it as a component of the promotional mix.

Advantages: •

Changes in society (two-income households, greater use of credit) have made consumers more receptive to the convenience of direct-marketed products.

•

Direct marketing allows a company to be very selective and target its marketing communications to specific customer segments.

•

Messages can be customized to fit the needs of specific market segments.

•

Effectiveness of direct-marketing efforts is easier to assess than other forms of promotion.

•

Many companies now have extensive databases that can be used to target current and prospective customer, particularly through digital media.

Disadvantages: •

Consumers and businesses are being bombarded with unsolicited mail and phone calls which makes them less receptive to direct marketing.

•

Direct marketing has image problems.

•

There can be problems with clutter as there are too many direct-marketing messages competing for consumers‘ attention.

One of the major tools of direct marketing is direct-response advertising. This is when a product is promoted in an ad that urges consumers to purchase the product directly from the manufacturer.

Direct mail, television, and Internet advertising are the primary platforms through which directresponse ads are placed. Some companies that distribute their products through traditional distribution channels or have their own sales force are also now engaging in omnichannel retailing where their products are sold through multiple distribution channels such as in retail stores, online, in catalogs, and in mobile apps. This type of strategy uses a combination of offline and online channels to influence customer‘s shopping experience and often involves the use of direct-marketing tools as part of the IMC mix.

C.

Digital/Internet Marketing—Digital media, specifically interactive media, allow for a two-way flow of communication whereby users can participate in and modify the content of the information they receive in real time. The major interactive medium is the Internet, which is a global collection of computer networks linking both public and private computer systems. While the most prevalent perspective on the Internet is that it is an advertising medium, it is actually a medium that can be used to for other elements of the promotional mix as well including sales promotion, direct marketing, and public relations. The proliferation of the Internet has also given rise to the development and growth of social media. Social media are online means of communication and interactions among people that are used to create, share, and exchange content such as information, insights, experiences, perspectives, and even media themselves.

Nearly three-quarters of Americans have a social media profile with usage of social media being highest among young adults (18–29). For many years, consumers accessed the Internet and even social media through their personal computers, but with the growth of smartphones and tablets, many consumers shifted to the use of their mobile phones to access the Internet/social media.

This extensive penetration of smartphones led to a rapid growth in mobile marketing, whereby marketing messages are designed for and sent directly to these devices. Mobile advertising saw

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

spending of nearly $87 billion in 2019 and now accounts for more than two-thirds of digital advertising spending. Digital and Social Media Perspective 1-1 discusses how the digital revolution has impacted integrated marketing communication since the beginning of the new millennium and given rise to the growth of social media and mobile marketing.

Advantages: •

The Internet can be used for a variety of integrated marketing communication functions including advertising, direct marketing, sales promotion, public relations and selling. The Internet is also the foundation for social media sites such as Facebook and Twitter, which are becoming an integral part of many marketers IMC programs, as well as mobile marketing.

•

Messages can be tailored to appeal to the specific interests and needs of the target audience.

•

The interactive nature of the Internet leads to a higher degree of customer involvement when customers are visiting a website.

•

The Internet makes it possible to provide customers with a great deal of information regarding product and service descriptions and specifications, purchase information and more. Information provided by marketers can be updated and changed continually.

•

The Internet has tremendous creative potential as a well-designed website can attract a great deal of attention and interest among customers and be an effective way to generate interest in a company as well as its various products and services.

Disadvantages:

D.

•

The Internet is not yet a complete mass medium as some U.S. households do not have access to the Internet and many do not have broadband access. In some countries this percentage is much higher.

•

There are problems with the Internet as an advertising medium as many Internet users do not pay attention to banner ads and the click-through rate on most is extremely low.

•

There is a great deal of clutter on the Internet which makes it difficult for advertising messages to be noticed and/or given attention.

Sales Promotion—Marketing activities that provide extra value or incentive to the sales force, distributors, or the ultimate consumer and can stimulate immediate sales. Sales promotion is generally broken into two major categories: consumer-oriented and trade-oriented activities.

Consumer-oriented sales promotions are targeted to the ultimate user of a product or service (i.e. coupons, sampling, premiums, rebates, contests, sweepstakes). Trade-oriented sales promotion is targeted toward marketing intermediaries (i.e. wholesalers, distributors, and retailers). Examples of this include price deals, merchandising allowances, and trade shows.

Advantages: •

Provides extra incentive to consumer or middlemen to purchase or stock and promote a brand.

•

Way of appealing to price sensitive consumer.

•

Way of generating extra interest in product or ads.

•

Effects can often be more directly measured than those of advertising.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

•

Can be used as a way of building or reinforcing brand equity.

Disadvantages: •

Many companies are becoming too reliant on sales promotion and focusing too much attention on short-run marketing planning and performance.

•

Many forms of sales promotion do not help establish or reinforce brand image and short-term sales gains are often achieved at the expense of long-term brand equity.

•

Problems with sales promotion clutter as consumers are bombarded with too many coupons, contests, sweepstakes and other promotional offers.

•

Consumers may become over-reliant on sales promotion incentives which can undermine the development of favorable attitudes and brand loyalty.

•

In some industries, promotion wars may develop whereby marketers sales promotion incentives extensively, which results in lower profit margins and makes it difficult to sell products at full price.

It is important to address the potential terminology problem concerning the use of the terms promotion and sales promotion. In this text, the term promotion represents an element of the marketing mix by which firms communicate with their customers and includes the various promotional mix elements. However, many marketing and advertising practitioners use the term promotion in reference to sales promotion activities. We use the term promotion in the broader sense. When discussing sales promotion activities, we are referring to this one specific element of the promotional mix.

E.

Publicity/Public Relations 1. Publicity—nonpersonal communications about an organization, product, service, or idea that is not directly paid for nor run under identified sponsorship. Examples include news stories, editorials, or announcements about an organization or its products/services.

2. Public Relations—a strategic communication process that builds mutually beneficial relationships between organizations and their publics.

The distinction should be made between publicity and public relations noting that public relations generally has a broader objective than publicity, as its purpose is to establish and maintain a positive image of the company among its various publics. Publicity is an important communications technique used in public relations; however other tools may also be used.

Public relations has become an integral part of many companies‘ IMC strategy. Additionally, a distinction should be made between advertising and publicity. While publicity involves nonpersonal communication to a mass audience, it is not paid for directly by the company.

Instead, the company attempts to get the media to run favorable stories about them.

Advantages of publicity: •

Credibility of publicity is usually higher than other forms of marketing communication.

•

Low cost way of communicating.

•

Often has news value and generates word-of-mouth discussion among consumers.

Disadvantages of publicity:

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

F.

•

Lack of control over what is said, when, where and how it is said.

•

Can be negative as well as positive.

Personal Selling—direct person-to-person communication whereby a seller attempts to assist and/or persuade prospective buyers to purchase a company‘s product or service or act on an idea.

Personal selling is the final element of an organization‘s promotional mix but is not a direct part of the IMC program of most companies and is often not in the control of the advertising or marketing communications manager.

Advantages: •

Direct contact between buyer and seller allows for more communication flexibility.

•

Can tailor and adapt message to specific needs or situation of the customer.

•

Allows for more immediate and direct feedback.

•

Promotional efforts can be targeted to specific markets and customers who are best prospects.

Disadvantages: •

High cost per contact.

•

expensive way to reach large audiences.

•

Difficult to have consistent and uniform message delivered to all customers.

Professor Notes:

McGraw-Hill Connect ®: Charmin Toilet Tissue IMC Elements Type of Activity: Case Analysis Activity Summary: Charmin, an American brand of toilet paper that is nearly a century old, relied on strong advertising and consumer promotions to make a consumer-packaged good into a more exciting product/brand. One of their infamous campaigns was the Mr. Whipple ―Please don‘t squeeze the Charmin‖ campaign, which was followed after years of success by campaigns incorporating their cute and likeable (and now very recognizable) bears. Charmin shifted from a focus solely on consumer promotions and traditional advertising such as television commercials to a strategy in which they engaged consumers on social media, on mobile apps, and through cause-related marketing. Charmin is a brand that has managed to stay relevant and maintain market share as a stand-out in their product category by developing and adapting their IMC strategy over the years.

Activity Learning Objectives: 01-01 Describe the role of advertising and other promotional elements in marketing.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

01-03 Explain the increasing value of the IMC perspective in advertising and promotional programs.

Concept Review: This is a good opportunity to review the differences between advertising and integrated marketing communications and outline why the shift from strictly advertising efforts to an IMC strategy has occurred. Additionally, it is beneficial to review the definition of marketing and reinforce that exchange lies at the heart of all marketing transactions. It is also beneficial to outline and review the four elements of the marketing mix (product, price, place, and promotion), reiterating that IMC is just one element of the marketing mix—the promotional variable.

Difficulty: 1 Easy; 2 Medium Bloom‘s: Remember; Understand AACSB: Analytical Thinking

VI.

IMC INVOLVES AUDIENCE CONTACTS

The various promotional mix elements are the major tools that marketers use to communicate with current and/or prospective customers as well as other relevant audiences. Many companies are taking an audience contact or touch point perspective in developing their IMC programs whereby they consider all of the potential ways of reaching their target audience with their messages. A touch point is every opportunity the customer has to see or hear about the company and/or its brands or have an encounter or experience with it. The various ways that a customer can come into contact with a company or brand are shown in Figure 1-5. It is the responsibility of those involved in the marketing communications planning process to determine how each of these contact tools can be used to communicate with the target audience and how they can be combined to form an effective IMC program. Tom Duncan notes that there are four basic categories of contact or touch points which include:

A.

•

Company-created touch points are planned marketing communication messages such as advertisements, websites, news/press releases, packaging, sales promotion offers and point-ofpurchase display.

•

Intrinsic touch points are interactions that occur with a company or brand during the process of buying or using a product or service such as discussion with retail sales personnel or customer service representatives. These are not always under the direct control of the marketing department or IMC program.

•

Unexpected touch points are unanticipated references or information about a company or brand that a customer or prospect receives that is beyond the control of the organization. This includes word-of-mouth messages as well as information from various media sources.

•

Customer-initiated touch points are interactions that occur whenever a customer or prospect contacts a company. These contacts often involve inquiries or complaints that must be handled properly by the company such as through customer service departments.

Paid, Owned, and Earned Media—Another categorization of the various types of customer touch points that has become very popular is that of paid, owned, and earned media as shown in Figure 1–7. Marketers making effective use of IMC today will use a combination of all three forms of media and must determine how valuable each of the various forms of media and contact tools are

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

for communicating with their current and prospective customers and how these can best be combined for the creation of an effective IMC program.

VII.

•

Paid media refers to channels a marketer pays to leverage and includes traditional advertising media such as television, radio, print, outdoor, and direct mail as well as various forms of digital advertising such as paid search and online display and video ads.

•

Owned media refers to channels of marketing communication that a company controls, such as its websites, blogs, and mobile apps as well as social media channels such as Facebook, Twitter, Instagram, and YouTube.

•

Earned media is exposure for a company or brand that it did not have to pay for and is generated by outside entities such as the media or the general public. Earned media has traditionally been viewed as exposure for a company or brand generated by its public relations/publicity efforts or through favorable word of mouth.

THE IMC PLANNING PROCESS

Integrated marketing communications management is defined as the process of planning, executing, evaluating, and controlling the use of the various promotional-mix elements to effectively communicate with target audiences. It involves coordinating the promotional mix elements to develop a controlled and integrated program of effective marketing communication. It involves various decision areas such as: •

Which promotional tools to use and how to combine them effectively.

•

Determining the size of and distributing the advertising and promotional budget.

•

Determining the influence of various factors on the promotional mix including the type of product, target market, decision process of the buyer, stage of the product life cycle, and channels of distribution.

•

What percentage of the budget should be allocated to advertising, sales promotion, online efforts, sponsorships, and personal selling.

This process is guided by the development of the integrated marketing communications plan, which provides the framework for developing, implementing, and controlling an organization‘s IMC program and activities. At this point it is helpful to go through the Integrated Marketing Communications Planning Model presented in Figure 1-8 of the text.

The steps in the Integrated Marketing Communications Planning Model include: A.

Review of the Marketing Plan—The first step in the IMC planning process is to review the marketing plan, which is a document that describes the overall marketing strategy and programs developed for an organization, a product/service line, or an individual brand. The marketing plan generally includes five basic elements: 1) a detailed situation analysis, 2) specific marketing objectives, 3) a marketing strategy that includes selection of target market(s), 4) a program for implementing the marketing strategy, and 5) a process for monitoring and evaluating performance.

B.

Promotional Program Situation Analysis—After the development of the marketing plan, a situation analysis is conducted to assess the factors that influence or are relevant to the development of the promotional strategy. This includes both an internal and external analysis.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

1. Internal analysis—Assesses relevant areas involving the product/service offering and the firm itself. This involves assessing the company‘s performance, the strengths and weaknesses of the company as well as its products, and reviewing their previous promotional efforts.

2. External analysis—Focuses on factors such as characteristics of the firm‘s customers, market segments, positioning strategies and competitors. Figure 1-9 outlines the important questions to address in both an internal and external analysis.

C.

Analysis of the Communication Process—This involves determining how the company can effectively communicate with customers in the target market. An important part of this stage of the IMC planning process is developing communication objectives which refer to what the firm seeks to accomplish with its promotional program. It is also important during this stage to establish communication goals and objectives. Distinguish with students the difference between marketing objectives and communication objectives.

Marketing objectives are what is to be accomplished by the overall marketing program. Often stated in terms of sales, market share, or profitability.

Communication objectives are what the firm seeks to accomplish with its promotional program.

Often stated in terms of the nature of the message to be communicated or what specific communication effects are to be achieved.

D.

E.

F.

Budget Determination—Two basic issues must be addressed with regard to the IMC budget while keeping in mind what needs to be done to accomplish communication objectives: •

How much money will be spent on marketing communication.

•

How the money will be allocated across the various IMC tools.

Developing the Integrated Marketing Communications Program—The most involved and detailed part of the promotional planning process occurs at this stage as decisions have to be made regarding the role and importance of each IMC tool and their coordination with one another. Each IMC tool has its own set of objectives, budget, messaging, and media strategy, as shown in Figure 1-8. These include: •

Advertising message and media strategy and tactics.

•

Direct marketing message and media strategy and tactics.

•

Interactive/Internet Marketing message and media strategy and tactics.

•

Sales promotion message and media strategy and tactics.

•

Public relations/publicity strategy and tactics.

•

Personal selling—sales strategy and tactics.

Monitoring, Evaluation, and Control—The final stage of the IMC planning process involves monitoring, evaluating, and controlling the promotional program. At this stage, the marketer should be gathering feedback concerning how well the IMC program is working and whether it is meeting its objectives. It is important to note that information regarding the results achieved by the IMC program is used in subsequent IMC planning and strategy development.

Professor Notes:

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

McGraw-Hill Connect ®: SaGa's IMC Planning Process Type of Activity: Click and Drag Activity Summary: SaGa is a European fashion store chain that specializes in accessible, trendy clothes and accessories for men and women. SaGa is getting ready to launch in the U.S., and their advertising agency is developing the promotional plan by using the Integrated Marketing Communications Planning Model. Students will match the actions of SaGa and its ad agency with the stage they correspond to in the Integrated Marketing Communications Planning Model.

Activity Learning Objective: 01-06 Describe the steps in the IMC planning process.

Concept Review: Integrated marketing communications management involves the process of planning, executing, evaluating, and controlling the use of the various promotional-mix elements to effectively communicate with target audiences.

Planning plays an important role in the development and implementation of an effective integrated marketing communications program. This process is guided by an integrated marketing communications plan that provides the framework for developing, implementing, and controlling the organization's IMC program. Those involved with the IMC program must decide on the role and function of the specific elements of the promotional mix, develop strategies for each element determine how they will be integrated, plan for their implementation, and consider how to evaluate the results achieved and make any necessary adjustments.

Difficulty: 2 Medium Bloom‘s: Understand AACSB: Analytical Thinking

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Teaching Suggestions This initial chapter is designed to provide the student with an overview of the field of advertising and promotion and a brief look at the role of IMC in the marketing process. The instructor should be careful not to go into an in-depth discussion of marketing since this is covered in detail in Chapter 2. You should introduce the concept of integrated marketing communications discuss its evolution, and note how this approach differs from more traditional perspectives of advertising and promotional planning. In this edition, we have provided an updated perspective of IMC which recognizes that it involves more than just coordinating the various elements into a ―one look, one voice‖ approach. It is important to define the six elements of the promotional mix, discuss their role as marketing communication tools, their advantages and limitations. Note that our view of the elements of the promotional mix goes beyond the traditional communication tools of advertising, sales promotion, publicity/public relations and personal selling, as we also include direct marketing and digital/Internet marketing as part of the mix. Direct marketing and digital/Internet have become major methods by which modern-day marketers communicate with their target audiences and we feel they are best viewed as distinct IMC tools.

You should also emphasize that there are a variety of ways by which customers come into contact with a company and/or its brands. There is a discussion of IMC involving audience contacts and Figure 1-5 of the text is an excellent way of showing the various contact tools. A discussion of the categorization of the type of contact points into paid, owned and earned media is provided. When discussing these various types of contact points, you might use Figure 1-7 to explain what is included under each category such as what is in a company‘s ability to control or influence. It is important to review the various factors that underlie the adoption of an IMC approach to advertising and promotion by many companies. You might also spend some time discussing the pros and cons of IMC. Although we advocate the IMC approach in this text, the discipline is still evolving. Excellent articles regarding the role and status of IMC can be found in special issues of the Journal of Advertising Research (March 2004, Volume 44. No. 1) and the Journal of Advertising (Winter 2005, Volume 34, No. 4).

During an introductory lecture, there is latitude to discuss various issues and aspects concerning each promotional mix variable. For example, various perspectives regarding advertising such as its social and economic effect might be noted along with common complaints and criticisms of advertising. We do not suggest going into a detailed discussion of these charges at this early stage of the course. We feel that students are best able to evaluate and appraise various arguments for and against advertising and other promotional mix elements toward the end of the course. Thus, the final chapter of the text evaluates the social and economic aspects of advertising.

We feel that it is important in either the first or second lecture to cover the integrated marketing communications planning model shown in Figure 1-8 in some detail. This text is built around this model and it provides the student with the ―big picture‖ as to the decision sequence and various considerations involved in the development of an advertising and promotional program. It is also important to communicate to students that advertising and promotion management is a process. A great deal of internal and external analyses, as well as the coordination of the promotional mix elements, is required to develop an effective program of marketing communications that can be integrated into an organization‘s overall marketing strategy and tactics.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Answers to Discussion Questions 1. Discuss the role of integrated marketing communications in the marketing program for a company such as Nike. Discuss how Nike uses various IMC tools to market its athletic shoes and apparel and maintain its position as the market leader. (LO 1-2, 1-5) Nike, like other successful brands, recognized that in order for them to reach their target consumers, they needed to adapt and shift away from strictly advertising in traditional platforms and learn to have a conversation with their consumers when and where the consumer was ready to have a conversation about the brand. Consumers are no longer passive audience members and no brand can simply throw out a television commercial and expect that consumers will buy a product simply because of this ad.

This does not mean that Nike no longer uses traditional advertising platforms—it simply means they have learned to use the best mix of communication platforms to reach their target audience members.

Nike uses more traditional advertising platforms such as television, magazine ads, and out-of-home media but also utilizes various forms of digital advertising such as social media, mobile apps, websites, microsites, etc. They have successful, active, and well-maintained social media pages where the content is curated for their target audience members. Nike also utilizes public relations in corporate social responsibility efforts along with promotional efforts such as major event sponsorships and point-of-purchase displays and offers. All of these components are integrated so seamlessly together and work to best reach target audience members when and where they are ready to have a conversation about the Nike brand or about specific Nike products.

2. Evaluate Nike’s decision to run the ―Dream Crazy‖ ad featuring former NFL quarterback Colin Kaepernick. Why do you think the company was willing to take the risk of running this controversial ad? Do you agree with Nike’s decision? (LO 1-2, 1-5) Nike knew exactly who their target audience was for the ―Dream Crazy‖ commercial. They likely saw who was responding most positively to the actions of Colin Kaepernick and realized that it was young consumers such as Millennials and Gen Zers who were liking tweets about Kaepernick or speaking out in support of his efforts. They likely also recognized that they were young people in particularly urban areas. Thus, these young people who were responding so positively to the efforts of Kaepernick became Nike‘s target audience for the ―Dream Crazy‖ campaign. They saw that their market share was slipping and likely that their earned media efforts were paling in comparison to their competitors.

The release of this advertisement not only engaged their target audience members, but also gained them an immense amount of earned media. Additionally, taking a stand and continuing to utilize Kaepernick as an endorser of the brand helped to strengthen the brand‘s position and with all of the earned media, it helped to set the brand apart in a positive way, particularly among target audience members. Finally, consumers, particularly young consumers, are now more conscious than ever before about the socially responsible actions of brands. By taking a stand on this issue, Nike was also able to improve their perception among young consumers. For these reasons, it was a smart business move for Nike to run this campaign.

3. Discuss the role integrated marketing communications plays in the marketing program of companies and organizations. Discuss how the use of the various promotional mix tools has changed over the past decade and factors drive these changes. (LO 1-1, 1-4) Integrated marketing communications plays a critical role in the marketing program most companies and organizations as it provides them with a way to communicate with consumers and help them influence their purchase decisions or other types of behavior. IMC differs from traditional advertising and promotion in that it recognizes the value of using a variety of communication tools rather than just relying primarily on media advertising, which might be supplemented with tactical promotions.

IMC involves coordinating all a company‘s promotional elements, as well as marketing activities, in a

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

synergistic manner to send a consistent message to the target audience. While traditional advertising relies primarily upon the use of ads through the mass media to communicate with the target audience, IMC recognizes that consumers‘ perceptions of a company and/or its brands are a synthesis of the bundle of messages or contacts they have with the firm. These contacts include media advertisements, packaging, sales promotion, messages received through interactive media such as websites and other digital media, point-of-purchase displays, and other forms of communication. The IMC approach seeks to have all of a company‘s marketing and promotional activities project a consistent, unified message and/or image to the market and consider which particular element of the promotional mix is the most effective way to communicate with customers in the target audience.

There are many reasons why the IMC approach is becoming so popular among marketers. Probably the most fundamental reason is that marketers are recognizing the value of strategically integrating the various communication functions rather than having them operate autonomously. By coordinating their marketing communication efforts, companies can avoid duplication, take advantage of synergy among various communication tools, and develop more efficient and effective marketing communication programs. The movement toward IMC is also being driven by changes in ways companies market their products and services. As discussed in the text, there is an ongoing revolution that is changing the rules of marketing and the role of traditional media advertising. Important aspects of this revolution include: a shifting of marketing dollars from media advertising to other forms of promotion, a movement away from relying on advertising-focused approaches (which rely on mass media such as television and magazines) to solve communication problems, a shift in marketplace power from manufacturers to retailers, the rapid growth of database marketing, demand for greater accountability from advertising agencies and the way they are compensated, and the rapid growth of the Internet.

The growth of the integrated marketing communications is very likely to continue as it is being driven by fundamental changes in the way companies market their products and services. Moreover, many marketers and advertising agencies recognize the importance of taking an IMC approach and are becoming advocates of integration. The move to integrated marketing communications also reflects an adaptation by marketers to a changing environment, particularly with respect to consumers, technology and media. Major changes are occurring among consumers, particularly with respect to media use and buying and shopping patterns. Many consumers are turned off by traditional advertising which is leading marketers to look for alternative ways to communicate with their target audiences. The continued fragmentation of media markets and rapid growth of interactive media and online services are also creating new ways for reach consumers. While IMC will continue to have its critics and may undergo some changes, it is very unlikely that we will see a return to the traditional system where advertising in mass media dominates and advertising and other forms of promotion function autonomously.

4. Spending by marketers on digital advertising has now surpassed spending on traditional media such as television, radio, magazines, and newspapers. Discuss the reasons marketers are spending more on digital than traditional media. Do you expect this trend to continue? (LO 1-2, 1-3, 1-4) Marketers have recognized that there has been a shift in consumer‘s media consumption. Consumers are increasingly leaving traditional forms of media consumption in favor of online or digital experiences. Now, because of the proliferation of digital media, instead of being passive viewers of media, consumers are extremely involved and content creators themselves. Therefore, advertisers have had to shift from using primarily push media (i.e. television, radio, newspapers) to pull media (websites, social media, and other sources where two-way dialogue can be initiated with consumers) in order to actually reach consumers in the digital age. Additionally, with increased Internet availability, consumers almost cannot function without their mobile phones. There are more app

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

options, websites, and social media platforms than ever before where advertisers can attempt to engage with consumers. With more and more consumers in these platforms, advertisers are constantly looking for ways to engage with them in these new ways. This trend will likely continue. Consumers who say they hate advertising likely just mean that they hate being yelled at by a brand and told what and how to think about things and what to buy. Advertisers will continue to look for ways to have authentic communication experiences with consumers and where those conversations are increasingly happening is in online platforms.

5. Why has sustainability become an important consideration for many companies? Discuss some of the ways companies are integrating sustainability into their marketing programs. (LO 1-1, 12).

More consumers now consider their impact on the environment. Because of this, more and more businesses now strive to show their commitment to sustainable business practices to meet this consumer need. Many companies now build sustainability efforts into their marketing strategy.

Consumers then reward brands for their sustainability efforts. In fact, some studies have shown that younger consumers make sustainability efforts their primary deciding factor when choosing which brand to purchase a product from. Levi Strauss, an American clothing company known for their jeans, is a good example of a brand making strides in sustainability efforts. For example, the company created a clothing line that utilized recycled plastic bottles to create 20 percent of the clothing. Other apparel brands such as Madewell, a J. Crew brand, teaches consumers how to use their old jeans in new ways within their homes. Even ―fast-fashion brands‖ such as H&M, Zara, and Uniqlo have been prioritizing sustainable practices. Other brands outside of the realm of apparel are also engaging in sustainable practices and have been for decades. Johnson and Johnson practices more sustainable efforts in their production of consumer products, medical devices, and pharmaceuticals and Procter and Gamble has expended a great deal of time and money to ensure that their product lines are sustainable and that they are making strides in working to end poverty and hunger. Consumers are also holding brands accountable to the sustainable practices that they preach, ensuring that they actually engage in sustainable practices. For this commitment to sustainability, brands are rewarded with consumer dollars and affinity.

6. Digital and Social Media Perspective 1-1 discusses how Google, Facebook, and Amazon dominate the market for digital advertising. Why have each of the companies become so dominant? Discuss their importance to marketers using digital advertising as part of their IMC program. (LO 1-4, 1-5) Google is, and always has been, an easy-to-use and organized way of helping consumers get to the information they want or need very quickly. From its beginnings, Google quickly realized the benefits of allowing advertisers on the platform. Google is likely such a dominant force in the realm of digital advertising because of the plethora of options available for advertising on the platform. From display ads, to videos, to sponsored posts and highly targeted search ads, Google is able to provide advertisers with an efficient space to reach consumers and provides advertisers with highly customized data about consumers. Facebook was one of the first platforms that allowed consumers to be content creators and with its sleek design and optimized user-interface, Facebook quickly rose to success.

Facebook also quickly recognized the benefits of allowing advertisers on the platform where users were coming for enjoyment and connection with friends that quickly becoming enjoyment and connection with friends, family, and brands. Advertisers are also drawn to Facebook as they‘re able to reach attractive, younger audiences than other platforms would allow for. Amazon is another major player in the digital advertising realm. From sponsored posts, sponsored products, digital television streaming service ad capabilities, Amazon provides advertisers with a plethora of options for reaching consumers ranging in age from 10 to 100. These platforms really must be considered as part of an IMC program for consumer-facing products. With their targeting abilities, data provisions upon

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

placement of an ad, and quick results, these three companies will continue to be digital advertising giants in the future as well.

7. What is meant by a customer contact or touch point? Choose a specific company or brand and discuss how it is using the four categories of contact points discussed in the chapter. (LO 1-5) Customer contact points are each and every opportunity the consumer has to see or hear about the company‘s product/brand or have an experience or encounter with it. These contact points can be created by the company and include planned messages delivered through media advertising, packages, collateral materials, in-store displays, and public relations activities. They also can come from interactions with the brand that occur during the process of buying or using the brand as well as from information that consumers receive from word-of-mouth messages. Marketers must determine how important the various contact tools are for communicating with their target audience and how they can be combined to form an effective IMC program.

Students should be encouraged to select a company or brand and discuss the various ways consumers come into contact with it. They might use IMC Contact tools shown in Figure 1-5 of the chapter as a framework for conducting the contact point analysis. You might also ask them to discuss which contacts points are most effective or influential in shaping consumers‘ impressions of the company or brand. For example, media advertising may be the most important influence for an image-laden product such as clothing or cosmetics while information from a website may be the most important influence for a high-tech brand such as a consumer electronics product.

8. What is meant by the categorization of touch points into paid, owned, and earned media?

Choose a specific company or brand and discuss how it is using these three categories of media.

(LO 1-5) Paid media refers to channels a marketer pays to leverage and includes traditional advertising media such as television, radio, print, outdoor, and direct mail as well as various forms of digital advertising such as paid search and online display and video ads. Owned media refers to channels of marketing communication that a company controls, such as its websites, blogs, and mobile apps as well as social media channels such as Facebook, Twitter, Instagram, Snapchat, and YouTube. Earned media is exposure for a company or brand that it did not have to pay for and is generated by outside entities such as the media or the general public. Earned media has traditionally been viewed as exposure for a company or brand generated by its public relations/publicity efforts or through favorable word of mouth. However, with the growth of digital media, earned media exposure is taking place online through social media and the viral marketing efforts of marketers.

Students should be asked to choose a company or brand and analyze how it is using the three categories of touch points as part of its Integrated Marketing Communications program.

9. Find an example of company or brand that has reduced its spending on traditional mass-media advertising and is allocating more of its IMC budget to digital media. Do you agree with this decision or do you think this company or brand should be maintaining its spending on traditional media advertising? (LO 1-3, 1-5, 1-6) There are many example of companies and brands that have reduced their spending on traditional mass media advertising and have shifted these monies to digital media. Student should be able to find examples in industry publications such as Advertising Age or AdWeek or by researching a company or brand through other sources available online.

A very good example of a company that has made a major shift from mass media advertising to digital is Nike. For decades Nike relied primarily on mass-media advertising as their primary way to

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

communicate with consumers and deliver its marketing messages. However, Nike is moving away from the use of mass-media advertising as they feel there are other IMC tools that may be more effective and provide a better return-on-investment for their marketing expenditures. Nike now views digital media as a more cost effective way to reach its target audience of younger consumers as they can be reached more easily online rather than through traditional media. Moreover, it is often very difficult to measure the return-on-investment for mass media advertising, as there is no direct way to determine who is viewing, hearing, or reading a television, radio or print ad. Nike, like many other companies, prefers to use more targeted integrated marketing tools such as the Internet and social media where it is easier to measure response to an ad using various measures such as page views, click throughs, and other analytics. Nike is also using digital media to conduct direct marketing as well as build online communities of customers with whom they can interact on a regular basis. The use of social media has also become very important to Nike as they now have social media sites for nearly all of their brands which can be used to communicate with consumers and engage them in various ways. Rather than relying on traditional media, Nike often will release new commercials and other types of videos through various forms of social media such as Facebook as well as on their YouTube channel. Nike also recognizes that the use of social media is important is maintaining its image as a cool, interesting, innovative, and relevant brand among younger consumers.

Most students will agree with the decision by Nike to allocate most of their IMC budget to digital media. However, there are also strong arguments as to why Nike should continue to use traditional media such as television and magazine advertising. Nike built its brand through the effective use of television and print advertising developed by its long-time agency Wieden+ Kennedy. For several decades W+K developed very powerful and impactful TV commercials that used some of the world‘s top athletes such as Michael Jordan, Bo Jackson, Tiger Woods, Kobe Bryant, Lebron James, and others. One can argue that Nike should not totally abandon the approach that was very successful in making it the world‘s most valuable sports brand. There is also a great deal of selectivity available today for traditional media through cable television, sports programming and magazines that reach various segments of the athletic and fitness market. Nike may be able to reach the younger consumer through traditional media and do so in an impactful way.

10. Assume a company is developing an IMC plan for a new product that will compete in the beverage market. Discuss some of the factors that should be considered as part of the external analysis when developing the IMC plan. (LO 1-6) Information from the competitive analysis would be very beneficial for a new beverage brand. They would need to consider direct and indirect competitors, what their beverage offers that their competitors‘ does not, how their competitors are promoting themselves, how they can differentiate themselves in their marketing efforts, and how their marketing budget compares with competitors‘.

Additionally, an analysis of any environmental factors that could impact the beverage‘s success in the market should be considered. For example, would health trends in society potentially hurt the brand?

Are there any policies on promoting certain beverages in certain places or in certain ways that the brand should be aware of? Finally, the brand should consumer who customers are for their competitors and how consumers consider beverages and how they make decisions in the beverage market.

Additional Discussion Questions (not shown in text) 11. Compare the definition of integrated marketing communications developed by Don Schultz with the original definition developed by the American Association of Advertising Agencies.

How do they differ? (LO 1-2)

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

The new definition of IMC developed by Don Schultz of Northwestern University is as follows: ―Integrated marketing communications is a strategic business process used to plan, develop, execute and evaluate coordinated, measurable, brand communications programs over time with consumers, customers, prospects, employees, associates and other targeted relevant external and internal audiences. The goal is to generate both short-term financial returns and build long-term brand and shareholder value.‖ This definition differs from the seminal definition of IMC developed by the 4As in several ways. It views IMC as an ongoing strategic business process rather than just tactical integration of various communication activities. It also recognizes that there are a number of relevant audiences that are an important part of the marketing communications process. These include customers, prospects suppliers, investors, interest groups, and the general public as well as internal audiences such as employees. The definition also reflects the increasing emphasis that is being placed on the demand for accountability and measurement of the outcomes of marketing communication programs. The original definition developed by the 4As has been criticized for focusing primarily on coordinating the various communication tools with the goal of making them look and feel alike. Both academicians as well as practitioners are recognizing that the broader perspective of IMC offered in the definition by Schultz is needed as it views the discipline from a more strategic perspective.

12. Choose a company and discuss how it communicates with its customers at the corporate, marketing, and marketing communications levels. (LO 1-1) Messages can originate at all three levels since all of a company‘s corporate activities, marketing mix activities, and marketing communications efforts have communication dimensions and play a role in attracting and maintaining their customers. Students should be encouraged to choose a company and analyze how it communicates with its customers at each of these levels. At the corporate level the analysis should focus on how a firm‘s business practices and philosophies, policies and procedures, hiring practices, corporate culture, and other factors communicate with customers and other relevant stakeholders. At the marketing level, the analysis should focus on how the company communicates through various elements of the marketing mix. The physical product communicates a great deal to consumers through elements such as shape, design or appearance of the actual product or the packaging. The price of a product may also send a message about quality. The brand name of a brand also is a form of communication. Companies also communicate with consumers through the choice of retail outlets where they choose to sell their products. Selling a product only through upscale specialty or department stores may communicate that it is a high-quality item. On the other hand, selling a product through discount stores or mass merchandise outlets may send a cue of lower quality.

There are many examples of how consumers communicate with consumers through their marketing activities. You might talk about products such as expensive watches (Concord, Movado, or Rolex) and how they are priced high, sold only through jewelry store or high-end department stores, and designed to reflect an image of quality, prestige and style. On the other hand, brands such as Timex and Casio are designed more for function or sport, are priced lower, and sold in drug stores, sporting goods stores and mass merchandise outlets. At the marketing communications level, the analysis should focus on the various IMC tools the company uses such as advertising, direct marketing, its website, sales promotion messages, publicity/public relations activities such as event sponsorships, and personal selling efforts. The analysis of the company should consider whether all of these IMC tools communicate with one look, voice, and image and position and identify the company and/or brand in a consistent manner.

13. Why are marketers putting so much emphasis on developing strong brands? Choose one of the Best Global Brands listed in Figure 1-1 and discuss how the company has used integrated marketing communications to build a strong brand image. (LO 1-3)

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

There are a number of reasons why marketers are putting so much emphasis on building strong brands. Consumers have a tremendous number of choices available in nearly every product or service category and are have less time available to make purchase decisions. Thus they are putting a great deal of emphasis on well-known and trusted brand names to help simplify their decision making process. Also, consumers are often willing to pay a price premium for well-known brands which provides marketers with higher profit margins and helps them avoid price competition. Consumer product companies, as well as business-to-business marketers, recognize that brand equity is a very important asset and they are taking steps to build and maintain brand equity. Students should be encouraged to select one of the top 10 brands listed in Figure 1-1 and analyze how the company has used IMC to build a strong image. This analysis might include examination of the company‘s advertising, sales promotion programs, product and service quality, public relations efforts, sponsorships, website and other communication elements.

14. The various classifications of advertising to consumer and business-to-business markets are shown in Figure 1-4. Choose one category of advertising to consumer markets and one to the business-to-business market and find an ad that is an example of each. Explain the specific goals and objectives each company might have for the ad. (LO 1-4) Students should be encouraged to choose one of the various classifications of advertising to consumer and business-to-business and professional markets, find an ad that they feel is an example of each and explain the company, association or organization‘s goals and objectives for the ad. Basic descriptions of each classification of advertising is provided in Figure 1-4 along with insight as to what the goals or objectives might be for using this type of advertising.

This assignment is helpful in getting students to recognize that the nature and purpose of advertising varies from one industry to another and/or across situations. For example, you might encourage them to find an example of advertising done either by a company or an industry trade association where the focus is on primary demand stimulation. Advertising campaigns by the Beef Board, National Pork Producers Council, or Potato Board are all very good examples of primary demand advertising.

Students might also be encouraged to look in some industry or trade publications for examples of business-to-business or advertising targeted at retailers. Publications such as Progressive Grocer or Drug Store News are a good source of trade advertising.

15. What is meant by primary versus selective demand advertising? Provide examples of each.

Discuss when a marketer might focus on primary demand stimulation versus selective demand stimulation. (LO 1-4) Primary demand advertising is designed to stimulate demand for the general product class or entire industry. Selective demand advertising focuses on creating demand for a specific company‘s brand or a product or service. Primary demand advertising is often done by industry trade associations to generate demand for the product category. This is often done for commodity products where it is difficult to differentiate an individual brand or association members recognize the value of promoting the product category. Examples include products such as milk, orange juice, pork, beef, potatoes, avocados and raisins. Primary demand advertising is sometimes done by a company whose brand(s) dominates the market and will benefit the most from demand generation. For example, Gatorade has over 70 percent of the sports drink market and its ads often promote the value of its products for hydration versus water. Most advertising focus on selective demand as the goal is to create demand for a specific brand. Thus the advertising will emphasize reasons for purchasing a particular brand and focus on differentiating a particular brand of a product or service from the competition.

16. Discuss some of the ways technology is making it possible for consumers to avoid advertising messages and the impact this is having on the advertising and media industries. (LO 1-2, 1-3)

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

As discussed in Digital and Social Media Perspective 1-1, consumers have been avoiding advertising messages for years simply by using a remote control to change channels during the commercial break of a television show or switching radio stations in their cars during a commercial break. Digital video recorders (DVRs) have given consumers yet another way to avoid TV ads by allowing consumers to fast-forward through the ads during playback of a recorded show. As marketers shift more of their advertising spending online, they must deal with another weapon used by consumers to avoid advertising, which is ad-blocking software. Most consumers have installed ad blocking software on their desktops and laptops and many on now doing so on their mobile devices such as smartphones and tablets. Apple began adding ad-blocking software to the operating system for its Safari mobile browser in 2015 and a few months later ad-blocking capabilities became available for mobile devices using the popular Android operating system.

The ability of consumers to avoid advertising messages is having a significant impact on the advertising and media industries. Radio stations rely almost entirely on advertising as a source of revenue while TV stations get the majority of their income from the monies marketers pay to air their commercials. Without advertising, television networks and local stations would have to rely almost entirely on viewers for revenue and the average household would have to pay much more for subscription TV service and get fewer channels. The television industry has already modified its measurement audience measurement system to account for delayed viewing that occurs when people play back recorded TV shows. In addition to the television industry, web publishers (including online magazines and newspapers) and social media sites would be devastated if they lost most of their advertising revenue. Most newspapers and magazines have been unsuccessful in getting people to pay for subscriptions to their digital editions and/or they find a way around their firewalls. Digital advertising is critical to the survival of companies such as Google, Facebook, and Snapchat, all of which generate nearly all of their revenue from advertising. Although consumers may not like being bombarded by advertising messages, it is important for them to realize that the revenue generated by these ads, which in turn depends on the size of the audience they can deliver, is what allows these companies to survive.

17. Discuss how the digital revolution is impacting the way marketers plan and implement their integrated marketing communications programs. Identify three specific technological developments and discuss how each is affecting the IMC program of companies. (LO 1-3, 1-4) There are many technological developments that are impacting IMC. Cable and digital satellite systems have vastly expanded the number of channels available to television viewers, which is contributing to the fragmentation of media markets. The average household in the U.S., as well as many other countries, now receives 135 television channels versus 60 at the beginning of the new millennium. The proliferation of channels as well the penetration of new technologies such as DVRs, video-on-demand, and shows that can be streamed to HDTV sets, personal computers or tablets via Netflix or Hulu Plus is also impacting television. The long-predicted convergence of television with computers has become a reality as consumer now have many other viewing options beyond the programming offered by the television networks. The rapid penetration of the Internet is another development as it has led to media fragmentation as hundreds of millions of consumers are now online and can visit a myriad of different websites. However, time spent online, particularly on social media, competes for time spent with traditional media such as television, radio, newspapers and magazines. One of the most significant changes is the penetration of smartphones as more than half of U.S. adults now own one and are using them to access the Internet. The growth in tablets such as the iPad and various devices using Google‘s Android operating system are also bring yet another type of screen into the lives of many consumers. Most magazines and newspapers have developed digital versions of their publications for consumers who want to read them online as well as on their mobile devices. Marketers are responding to these changes by increasing their spending on highly targeted media that reach specific market segments. Monies once spent in broadly targeted mass media are

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

now being allocated to more websites and social media that reach specific market segments.

Marketers are developing mobile marketing applications that can deliver messages and promotional offers directly to consumer‘s mobile devices and can be targeted to specific locations or consumption situations. They are also recognizing that it has become increasingly difficult to reach consumers through the mass media and are using a variety of other IMC tools such as sponsorships, branded entertainment, publicity/public relations, digital and social media (such as Facebook and Twitter) and in-store media to reach consumers.

The Internet is another technological development having a tremendous impact on the way companies design and implement their entire business and marketing strategies as well as their integrated marketing communications programs. Companies ranging from large multinational corporations to small local firms have developed websites to promote their products and services by providing current and potential customers with information, building images for their companies and brands and even selling their products or services directly over the Internet. While many view the Internet as an advertising or promotional medium, it really is a marketing communications tool that can be used to execute all elements of the promotional mix. Companies can advertise on the Internet by running banner ads or sponsorships on the websites of other companies or organizations. Marketers can offer sales promotion incentives such as coupons over the Internet and they can offer contests and sweepstakes online and encourage consumers to visit their websites to enter them. Many companies are using the Internet for direct marketing. Many companies have made the Internet a major part of their direct-marketing efforts and encourage consumers to visit their websites to view their merchandise and to place orders online. Companies are also using the Internet for publicity and public relations activities as many activities such as the sending of press releases can now be done online.

Many companies also maintain press releases on their websites, which can be accessed by the media and other relevant publics to learn more about these companies and their products and services.

18. Discuss the opportunities and challenges facing marketers with regard to the use of mobile marketing. What are some of the ways marketers can use mobile marketing as part of their IMC program? (LO 1-4, 1-5) The Mobile Marketing Association defines mobile marketing a set of practices that enables organizations to communicate and engage with their audience in an interactive and relevant manner through any mobile device or network. It includes promotional activity designed for deliver to cell phones, smartphones, tablets and other handheld devices and includes apps, messaging, commerce and customer relationship management. The growing popularity of smartphones, tablet PCs, and other handheld mobile devices along with the decision of the various wireless carriers to open their mobile phones services to these messages has opened up new marketing opportunities. Marketers are already sending interactive messages to consumers that contain promotional offers such as coupons that can be redeemed at the point-of-purchase. Many of these mobile messages are specific to a consumers‘ location or consumption context. One of the major factors driving the growth of mobile marketing is the development of shopping services and apps that consumers can use to make shopping more efficient, productive and fun. Marketers are also developing their own brand specific applications such as games, video, and promotional offers as part of their mobile marketing programs.

One of the challenges marketers will face with mobile marketing is possible resistance from consumers. Many consumers do not want to be bombarded with messages to their smartphones or other mobile devices. Thus, marketers will be dependent upon consumers ―opting in‖ to receive these messages. However, it is likely that most marketers will tie-in their mobile marketing efforts to other components of their IMC programs such as sales promotions or incentives to visit a website. Thus, mobile marketing will become yet another way for marketers to deliver messages to consumers and get them to take some form of action that helps in the marketing process. Another challenge for mobile marketing is the small screen size of mobile devices, particularly smartphones, which limits

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

the type of messages that be sent to mobile devices. Marketers must also develop responsive websites that can be adapted to smaller screens found on mobile devices.

19. Why is it important for those who work in marketing to understand and appreciate all the various integrated marketing communication tools and how they can be used effectively? (LO 1-6) In today‘s business world, marketers use a variety IMC tools to communicate with their customers.

The various promotional mix elements have to be viewed as component parts of an integrated marketing communications program. An individual IMC activity such as advertising or sales promotion cannot be managed without considering its relationship to other promotional mix elements.

Individuals working in various areas of advertising and promotion are expected to understand and use a variety of marketing communication tools, not just the one in which they specialize. For example, advertising agencies no longer confine their services to creating and placing ads. Many agencies are involved in sales promotion, public relations, Internet/interactive media, direct marketing, event sponsorship and other communication areas. Thus, it is important for those who work in advertising and promotion, either on the agency or client side, to understand and appreciate the value and limitations of all the promotional mix elements and how they can be combined to develop an effective program of integrated marketing communications.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

CHAPTER 2 THE ROLE OF IMC IN THE MARKETING PROCESS Chapter Overview The purpose of this chapter is to examine the marketing process and the role of advertising and promotion in an organization‘s integrated marketing program. A basic model of the marketing and promotional process is presented, which can be used as a framework for analyzing how advertising and promotion fit into a company‘s marketing program. The chapter examines the various decision areas under each element of the marketing mix and how they influence and interact with advertising and promotional strategy. The chapter also introduces and/or refreshes the student on the concepts of target marketing, segmentation, and positioning. The target marketing process is introduced, and the specific elements of this process—identifying markets with unfulfilled needs, market segmentation, selection of a target market, and positioning—are described in detail.

Learning Objectives 1. Describe the role of advertising and promotion in an organization‘s integrated marketing program.

2. Define target marketing.

3. Discuss the role of market segmentation in an IMC program.

4. Describe positioning and repositioning strategies.

5. Identify the marketing-mix decisions that influence advertising and promotional strategy.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Chapter and Lecture Outline I.

INTRODUCTION

A model is presented at the beginning of the chapter (Figure 2-1) which is a useful framework for analyzing how promotion fits into an organization‘s marketing program. The model consists of four components: •

The organization‘s marketing strategy and analysis.

•

The target marketing process.

•

Marketing planning program development (which includes promotional decisions).

•

The target market.

The first part of the chapter is devoted to examining the four components of this model and the role advertising and promotion play in each. As noted in the text, it is important to note that a firm‘s promotional program is directed not only to the final buyer but also to channel or trade members who distribute its products/services to the ultimate customer. This point is stressed in Figure 2-1 where promotion to trade and resellers is positioned directly between promotional decisions and the target market. The role of promotion is discussed for building and maintaining demand not only in the consumer market, but among the trade as well.

Professor Notes:

II.

MARKETING STRATEGY AND ANALYSIS

The marketing process actually begins with the development of a marketing strategy whereby the company determines the product or services area and particular markets in which it wants to compete. A strategic marketing plan usually evolves from an organization‘s overall corporate strategy and serves as a guide for specific marketing programs and policies. The development of a marketing strategy is based on a situation analysis (as discussed in Chapter 1) from which a firm develops an understanding of the market, the opportunities it offers, the competition, and various market segments or target markets the company may wish to pursue. Steps in the development of a marketing strategy include the following.

A.

Opportunity Analysis—A careful analysis of the marketplace should lead to alternative market opportunities or areas where the company feels there are favorable demand trends, where customer needs and/or wants are not being satisfied, and where it could compete effectively.

Market opportunities are usually identified by examining demand trends in various market segments. The discussion can focus on how market opportunities are identified and can work to determine recent examples of companies finding and exploiting them. The chapter lead-in discusses how online dating sites have become the ultimate example of audience segmentation with sites that could meet any target market‘s needs. IMC Perspective 2-1 discusses Buick‘s attempt to reposition themselves to appeal to millennial audiences while IMC Perspective 2-2 discusses the generational differences between millennials and gen Zers and what these differences mean for marketers, which could be an interesting point of departure for a discussion about the opportunity created by new and growing segments.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

B.

Competitive Analysis—In developing marketing strategies and programs, a company must analyze the competition its products or services face in the marketplace. Competition can range from direct brand competition to other products and services that satisfy consumers‘ needs and/or compete for their dollars. Competitors‘ marketing programs have a major impact on a firm‘s marketing strategy and must be carefully analyzed and monitored. Various aspects of advertising and promotion such as promotional spending, media and creative strategy, and sales promotion are often directly affected by competitors.

An important aspect of marketing strategy development is the search for an advantage over the competition. A competitive advantage refers to something unique or special a firm does or possesses that gives it an edge over competitors. Competitive advantage can be achieved in a variety of ways, including having quality products that are differentiated from the competition and command premium prices, providing superior customer service, having the lowest production costs or dominating channels of distribution. Competitive advantage can also be achieved through having excellent advertising and promotion that creates and maintains product/service differentiation and brand equity. You might want to discuss how many companies have used advertising to achieve brand equity. Some examples of brands that have utilized advertising to achieve a competitive advantage and brand equity include Apple, Coke, Samsung, Nike, BMW, and McDonald‘s. It is also important to note the concerns of many advertisers and marketers that reductions in media advertising and increased spending in trade promotions may lead to losses in brand equity and competitive advantage.

C.

Target Market Selection—After evaluating marketing opportunities for products/services in various market segments, a company selects one or more as a target market for which it will develop a marketing program(s). This target market becomes the focus of the company‘s marketing efforts. Selection of the target market is not only a very important part of a firm‘s marketing strategy, but also has implications for advertising and promotional strategy and tactics.

Professor Notes:

McGraw-Hill Connect ®: Marketing and Promotions Process Model Type of Activity: Click and Drag Activity Summary: In this activity, students are tasked with placing the stages in the marketing and promotions process in the correct order.

Activity Learning Objective: 02-01 Describe the role of advertising and promotion in an organization‘s integrated marketing program.

Concept Review: An opportunity analysis is part of the marketing strategy and analysis should always lead a strategic marketing plan. This is followed by an analysis of a brand‘s competition and researching and segmenting the target market. The Marketing and Promotions Process Model is outlined in Figure 2-1.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Difficulty: 1 Easy Bloom‘s: Understand AACSB: Analytical Thinking

III.

THE TARGET MARKETING PROCESS

Almost no products satisfy the needs of all consumers. Thus, companies must develop marketing strategies to reach and satisfy different consumers. In this section, the concept of target marketing is introduced, noting that there are four distinct steps involved in this process—identifying target markets with unfulfilled needs, market segmentation, selecting a target market, and positioning through marketing strategies. From this point, the chapter will go on to discuss in detail the processes required in each step.

A.

Identifying Markets—Target marketing involves the identification of the needs and wants of specific groups of people (or segments), selection of one or more of these groups as targets, and the development of marketing strategies aimed at each. This approach has found increased applicability for a number of reasons.

•

The diversity of consumers‘ needs.

•

Increasing use of segmentation by competitors.

•

More managers are trained in segmentation and realize its advantages.

The instructor should note that this process leads to a more homogeneous grouping of potential customers, which allows the marketer to develop more precise strategies designed to reach them.

B.

Market Segmentation—Once the marketer has identified who it is that is to be targeted, these potential customers are grouped based on similar needs and/or behaviors that are likely to cause them to respond similarly to marketing actions. This division of the market into distinct groups is referred to as the market segmentation process.

1. Bases for segmentation—A number of bases for segmentation are available to the marketer including the following: (Figure 2-4 will be helpful here.)

•

Geographic segmentation—The market is divided into geographic units (i.e. nations, states, counties, or even neighborhoods) with alternative marketing strategies targeted to each.

•

Demographic segmentation—Division involves demographic variables such as age, sex, family size, income, education, and social class, among others.

•

Psychographic segmentation—Markets are divided based on the personalities and/or lifestyles of consumers. (The instructor should note that lifestyles have become a commonly employed segmentation strategy.) Programs such as VALS and PRIZM are commonly employed by marketers for this purpose.

•

Behavioristic segmentation—This form of segmentation divides consumers into groups according to their usage, loyalty, or buying behaviors. These characteristics are then usually combined with demographic and/or psychographic criteria to develop profiles of market segments. When considering consumer usage and loyalty, marketers consider the

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

80-20 rule, which proposes that 20 percent of buyers account for 80 percent of their sales volume. Therefore, it is beneficial for marketers to attempt to reach that loyal 20 percent.

•

Benefit segmentation—Specific benefits offered by a product or service may also constitute a basis for segmentation. In many instances a variety of benefits may be derived for the same product among different groups. (For example, the instructor might ask students to suggest benefits to be derived from the purchase of a watch, noting that at certain times of the year these benefits will change based on the recipient of the watch!)

2. The Process of Segmenting a Market—This section concludes by reminding the student that market segmentation is indeed a process that develops over time and is a critical part of the situation analysis.

C.

Selecting a Target Market—Having conducted the segmentation analysis, the marketer will be faced with two subsequent decisions: 1. Determining how many segments to enter—Three market coverage alternatives are available in this step: •

Undifferentiated marketing would involve the decision to ignore the segment differences and develop one product for the entire market. It should be noted that few firms pursue this strategy today.

•

Differentiated marketing involves the decision to compete in a number of segments, developing different marketing strategies for each.

•

Concentrated marketing takes place when a firm decides to concentrate its efforts on one specific segment in an attempt to capture a large share of that market. (The examples of Volkswagen and Rolls Royce provided in the book will illustrate this point well.)

2. Determining which segments offer the most potential—This involves determining which of the markets is most attractive by examining the sales potential of the segment, the opportunities for growth, the competition, and a brand‘s own ability to compete.

D.

Market Positioning 1. Approaches to Positioning—This section discusses the approaches to positioning as well as a number of strategies for developing a position. Positioning has been defined as ―the art and science of fitting the product or service to one or more segments of the broad market in such a way as to set it meaningfully apart from the competition.‖

IV.

DEVELOPING A POSITIONING STRATEGY

This section outlines a number of positioning strategies that can be employed in developing a promotional program, including: A.

Positioning by Product Attributes and Benefits—Setting a product apart by stressing a specific characteristic or benefit offered. Marketers attempt to identify salient attributes that are important to consumers and are the basis for making a purchase decision.

B.

Positioning by Price/Quality—In this strategy, price/quality characteristics are stressed. For example, some products set themselves apart by assuming a very high price/quality association, while others become affordable products. While the price element is important, the quality

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

element of price/quality positioning is just as important as the product quality must be comparable to, or even better than, competing brands in order for the positioning strategy to be effective.

C.

Positioning by Use or Application—How a product is to be used may in itself lead to a positioning strategy. The Arm & Hammer and Black & Decker examples offered in the text have capitalized on this strategy.

D.

Positioning by Product Class—The Amtrak example provided in the text reflects this strategy in which the product is positioned against others that, while not exactly the same, provide the same class of benefits. The California Avocado Commission is another example that might be cited, as well as the Dole campaign cited in the text.

E.

Positioning by Product User—In this strategy the product is positioned at a particular group of users. The Globe Shoes example in Exhibit 2-19 demonstrates this strategy in practice.

F.

Positioning by Competitor—in many cases the competition may be used to define the positioning strategy. Companies can position their products to set themselves apart from the competition, show superiority, etc. The Samsung ad shown in Exhibit 2-5 is an example in the text that provides an example of positioning a brand against the competition.

G.

Positioning by Cultural Symbols—The Jolly Green Giant, the Pillsbury Doughboy, the Keebler Elves, and Chicken of the Sea‘s mermaid are all examples of cultural icons, as are the Wells Fargo stagecoach and Ronald McDonald.

H.

Repositioning—Declining sales or changes in market conditions may lead a firm to engage in repositioning. Companies such as Sears and J.C. Penney are a few of the examples of companies that have attempted (both successfully and unsuccessfully) to assume a new position in the market.

Repositioning occurs because of declining or stagnant sales or because of other recognized opportunities in the marketplace. La-Z-Boy and MTV examples provide more current examples.

Professor Notes:

McGraw-Hill Connect ®: Selecting Target Markets Type of Activity: Click and Drag Activity Summary: In this activity, students will match the various segmentation strategies with the examples of brands using those strategies.

Activity Learning Objectives: 02-02 Define target marketing.

02-03 Discuss the role of market segmentation in an IMC program.

02-04 Describe positioning and repositioning strategies.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Concept Review: It is not possible to develop marketing strategies for every consumer. Rather, the marketer attempts to identify broad classes of buyers who have the same needs and will respond similarly to marketing actions.

Market segmentation is dividing up a market into distinct groups that (1) have common needs and (2) will respond similarly to a marketing action. The more marketers segment the market, the more precise is their understanding of it. But the more the market becomes divided, the fewer consumers there are in each segment. Thus, a key decision is: How far should one go in the segmentation process?

Difficulty: 2 Medium Bloom‘s: Understand AACSB: Analytical Thinking

V.

DEVELOPING THE MARKETING PLANNING PROGRAM

The next stage of the marketing process involves combining the various elements of the marketing mix into a cohesive and effective marketing program. This requires that all elements of the marketing mix be combined effectively and that they be consistent with one another. It is important to stress that each element of the marketing mix is multidimensional in nature and includes a number of decision areas. In discussing the various elements of the marketing mix attention should be given to how each influences and interacts with promotion.

A.

Product Decisions—An organization exists because it has some product, service, idea or cause to offer customers. Discussion can focus on benefits or values offered by the product and the fact that products and services satisfy not only functional but social and psychological needs as well.

Product decision areas of branding and packaging are particularly important from a promotional perspective because of the role the brand name and package play in communicating attributes, information, and meaning to the consumer. Product symbolism is the term for what a product or brand means to a consumer and what they experience in purchasing and using it.

1. Branding—Choosing a brand name for a product is important from a promotional perspective because brand names communicate attributes and meaning. The goals of branding are threefold: 1) to build and maintain brand awareness and interest; 2) develop and enhance attitudes toward the company, product, or service; and 3) build and foster relationships between the consumer and the brand. The combination of a brand‘s name, logo, symbols, design, packaging, and overall image comprise the brand identity. One important role of advertising in respect to branding strategies is creating and maintaining brand equity. Brand equity can be thought of as an intangible asset of added value or goodwill that results from the favorable image, impressions of differentiation, and/or the strength of consumer attachment to a company name, brand name, or trademark.

2. Packaging—The role and function of packaging has changed because of the self-service emphasis of many stores and the fact that as many as two-thirds of all purchases made in the supermarket are unplanned. The WD-40 advertisement in Exhibit 2-22 is an excellent example of how packaging can create new opportunities—sometimes for existing products.

B.

Price Decisions—The price variable of the marketing mix refers to what the consumer must give up in exchange for a product or service, Marketing managers must be concerned with establishing a price level, developing pricing policies and monitoring consumers‘ and competitors‘ reactions to price in the marketplace. Factors a firm must consider in determining price levels include:

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

•

Costs.

•

Demand.

•

Competition.

•

Perceived value.

1. Relating price to advertising and promotion—Factors such as product quality, competition, and advertising all interact in determining what price a firm can and should charge. Studies have shown that pricing and advertising strategies go together.

C.

Distribution Channel Decisions—Marketing channels or the place element of the marketing mix refers to the set of interdependent organizations involved in the process of making a product or service available to customers. Differences in direct versus indirect channel arrangements should be discussed. In discussing the latter, the importance of resellers in marketing and promotional strategy should be introduced. The Internet has become a new channel for most companies, and has had a demonstrable impact on the distribution system. Attention should be given to the need to develop promotional programs for the trade or resellers to encourage them to stock and promote a product.

D.

Developing Promotional Strategies: Push or Pull?—When a promotional push strategy is used, the goal is to push the product through the channels of distribution by aggressively selling and promoting the item to the resellers, or trade. This can be done by having the company‘s sales representatives call on resellers and offering special programs such as promotional allowances and cooperative advertising. Trade advertising in publications that serve the industry such as Progressive Grocer or Drug Store News may also be used as part of a push strategy. When a promotional pull strategy is used, the goal is to create demand among end users which will in turn encourage retailers to carry a brand. Heavy spending on consumer advertising and sales promotion is an important part of a pull strategy.

Professor Notes:

McGraw-Hill Connect ®: Positioning Strategies for Multiple Brands Type of Activity: Click and Drag Activity Summary: In this activity, students will match the various positioning strategies with the examples of brands using those positioning strategies.

Activity Learning Objective: 02-05 Identify the marketing-mix decisions that influence advertising and promotional strategy.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Concept Review: Positioning has been defined as "the art and science of fitting the product or service to one or more segments of the broad market in such a way as to set it meaningfully apart from competition." The position of the product or service is the image that comes to mind and the attributes consumers perceive as related to it.

Difficulty: 2 Medium Bloom‘s: Understand AACSB: Analytical Thinking

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Teaching Suggestions This chapter is designed to provide the student with an overview of the overall marketing process and the role advertising and promotion play in the marketing program. The chapter may be a review for some students, particularly those who have had a basic marketing course. However, we feel that this chapter is more than just a review of marketing principles or fundamentals. We have written the chapter to show the role advertising and promotion play in the marketing process as well as how promotional strategy is influenced by and interacts with marketing strategy and the various elements of the marketing program.

Students will benefit from the discussion of the marketing mix from a promotional strategy perspective even if they have had an introductory marketing course.

We have found that the model of the marketing and promotion process is a very good framework for analyzing how promotion fits into an organization‘s marketing program. The components of the model cover the basic areas of marketing and the model shows that promotional programs must be developed for the trade as well as for the ultimate customer in the target market. It is important to stress to students the important role resellers play and the need to develop promotional programs to motivate the trade to get them to stock, merchandise and promote a company‘s products. You might point out to students that the recent trends in the allocation of promotional budgets have seen a shift in monies away from media advertising and toward trade promotions. Another shift in budgets has been affected by the advent of the Internet. Students will see that the Internet has both benefited and negatively impacted traditional media.

These issues are discussed is considerable detail in the sales promotion and Internet chapters.

Answers to Discussion Questions 1. The lead-in to this chapter discusses segmentation in the online dating market. Pick any three online sites and discuss the target market these sites are trying to appeal to. Provide examples to support your position. (LO 2-4) The coffee industry has seen significant growth in the past decade, particularly in the U.S. Three major brands tend to vie for the spot of consumer‘s morning coffee stop: Starbucks, Dunkin', and McDonald‘s. While these three companies may be direct competitors, each brand appeals to very different people. Starbucks appeals to men and women, likely ages 25-40, who likely have higher incomes. Their website offers a sleek, contemporary design that appeals to this age group‘s need to have products act as status symbols. They attempt to garner customer loyalty through the promotion of their loyalty program.

Dunkin' appears to target more working-class or lower-income audiences as their prices are significantly lower. The site/brand in general utilizes much brighter colors that make it appear more affordable and approachable than the dark colors Starbucks utilizes. Dunkin' wants to be an all-day coffee supplier. They promote their breakfast sandwiches, coffee, and donuts in the morning, their teas and iced coffees for the afternoon, and decaf options and food in the evenings, likely to appeal to the working class who may be working non-traditional hours.

McDonald‘s appears to cater to working-class consumers who just want to grab an affordable cup of coffee on their way to work in the morning. They appear to cater to people who enjoy a good cup of coffee but those who do not necessarily need a great deal of customization or flavor variety. Their prices range from $1.00 to $4.00, and they only have about 10 flavor varieties, whereas Starbucks and Dunkin' offered endless options for drink customization.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

2. IMC perspective 2-2 discusses the differences between millennials and gen Z. Discuss some of the ways these cohorts differ and how they are also the same. Cite some implications for marketers. (LO 2-3) Millennials and members of the gen Z cohort tend to differ in a number of ways. Gen Zers tend to be more individualistic and respond well to brands that recognize this and make the effort to appreciate their individuality. This individualism is not as high of a priority/need for millennials. Additionally, as they have never known a life without technology, gen Z tends to be less focused because they process information more quickly and thus get bored more quickly. Again, because of their life lived with technology, gen Zers are also better at multitasking. In terms of spending, millennials tend to be more thrifty whereas gen Zers are less conscious of price and prefer to support brands with highquality products or brands that stand on social issues. For marketers, this means that to appeal to gen Zers, it would be beneficial to focus on product quality, corporate social responsibility efforts of the brand, and create shortened messages that quickly grab consumer‘s attention. For millennials, marketers should focus on price/value and do not need to focus as much of their efforts on promoting CSR efforts or individualism.

3. Discuss some examples of companies’ positioning strategies. Who do you think these companies are targeting? Explain your reasoning. (LO 2-4) 5-hour Energy, an energy-boosting shot, promotes that the products contain vitamins, have zero sugar, and are low calorie. The brand is positioning based on product attributes and benefits and is likely attempting to reach more health-conscious consumers who need an energy-boost or want a healthier energy supplement. Other brands choose to position themselves based on price/quality characteristics. Kohl‘s is a department store that positions itself as a family-friendly store that offers quality products at affordable prices. Kohl‘s is attempting to target families. Their promotions highlight the fact that they are a one-stop shop for both parents and children‘s clothing as well as home goods. Rolex is a luxury watch brand that positions itself based on price/quality. A basic Rolex can start around $10,000, and their watches are only sold in very exclusive, high-end locations. They are trying to reach extremely wealthy target markets who have the ability to splurge on a $10,000 or more watch. Shark vacuums is a brand that positions itself based upon use or application. Their advertisements often show a consumer getting the tough stains out of their carpet by using their Shark vacuum. They are likely trying to reach middle-class consumers who own homes and are concerned with keeping their carpets clean or pet owners who are concerned with the same thing.

4. Discuss the difference between a push and a pull strategy. How do these strategies differ in advertising and promotional strategies? (LO 2-5) In a push strategy, the communication and selling emphasis targets the channel of distribution members. Thus, programs are designed to persuade the trade to stock, merchandise, and promote manufacturers‘ products. The goal of the strategy is to push the product through the channels by promoting them to the trade. In a pull strategy, the target audience is the end buyer and/or consumer.

The goal is to create demand among consumers and have them demand the product from middlemen.

Once retailers see the demand, they will request the product from the wholesaler or manufacturer directly.

Companies may employ either a push or pull strategy. Proctor & Gamble—a perennial leader in advertising to consumers—learned years ago that it must get the products on the shelves to be sold.

Thus, the company shifted much of its consumer targeted advertising to the trade to ensure that it was stocked—thus, pursuing both a pull and push strategy. Others have used a pull strategy—for example, the Philadelphia Magazine ran an advertising campaign urging consumers to visit a newsstand to demand their magazine be carried. Companies pursuing a push strategy tend to rely more on their

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

relationships with the trade, using IMC tools such as advertising, sales promotions, etc. that reach the middlemen. It is not at all uncommon for companies to incent sales employees to push their brands at the retail level.

Decisions as to whether to emphasize a push or pull strategy depend on a number of factors including the company‘s relation with the trade, the promotional budget, and demand for the product.

Companies with favorable channel relationships often use a promotional push strategy and work closely with channel members to encourage them to stock and promote their products. Firms with limited promotional budgets may not have the funds for advertising and promotion that are required for an effective pull strategy and may find it more feasible to target their efforts to the trade. Products with favorable demand resulting from unique benefits, superior advantages, and/or popularity among consumers may use a pull strategy.

5. What is the difference between product symbolism and functional product attributes? Give examples of brands that reflect each of these in their marketing strategies. (LO 2-5) Product symbolism is a description of what a product or brand means for consumers and what they experience in purchasing and using it. High-end designer handbag brands such as Kate Spade or Coach provide the symbolic image of status, wealth, and high fashion. A protein bar brand such as CLIF bars provides the symbolic image of someone who cares about their health but wants a convenient, on-the-go snack. Functional product attributes are those attributes of a product that appeal to the functionality of the product rather than focusing on the social or psychological benefits of the product such as status symbols. Tire brands such as Michelin promote the quality of their tires and their good value as well as their performance of durability. A brand such as Jiffy Lube, a car repair and oil change shop, stresses the time-saving aspects of their services while also stressing that they are fast and still high-quality.

6. IMC Perspective 2-1 discusses Buick’s attempt to reposition its car to a younger audience.

Explain why this may or may not work. (LO 2-4) The Buick brand attempted to reposition themselves to reach and appeal to a millennial aged audience. They created new product lines and a number of marketing and advertising efforts that attempted to position the Buick brand as a new, fun brand that wasn‘t like the old Buick brand at all.

These efforts might not be successful if the already-held perceptions of the brand cannot be erased or altered. Buick could spend all of their time and efforts on attempting to reposition the brand to appeal to millennials and then survey a large sample of millennials after the campaign has run and determine that perceptions of the Buick brand among millennials are exactly the same as they were prior to these efforts. It is important for brands to assess ahead of repositioning efforts whether or not this perception of their brand could actually be altered.

7. Many companies compete in a number of market segments. Discuss an example of one such company and describe how it communicates with its customers in different market segments.

(LO 2-4) Perhaps the best example might be an automobile company like Toyota. First of all, Toyota makes cars, trucks, SUVs and vans, offering a vehicle for the needs and wants of a variety of segments. The car segment offers a range from its low-priced entry the Yaris to the higher end Avalon. In between are sports oriented vehicles, family vehicles and, of course, the hybrid Prius.

Toyota also offers six varieties of SUVs again, reaching various segments based on price as well as lifestyle, as the selection ranges from a small fuel-efficient RAV 4 to the large V8 Land Cruiser.

Models at various prices offering specific benefits are offered in between. Lexus, made by Toyota, is targeted to the luxury car market. Another good example is the Marriott hotel chain. A visit to the

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Marriott website shows that the chain includes offerings from over 15 brands ranging from economy pricing to luxury suites, and appealing to pleasure travelers, business travelers, families, and long-stay occupants. The Marriott products reach a variety of segments based on a number of segmentation criteria.

8. Discuss the role that IMC assumes in the marketing mix. That is, how is this element of the mix coordinated with pricing, distribution, and product functions? (LO 2-5) IMC can be used to develop a brand image by focusing on the source, message, and media available to create the image sought. The source of the message (consider the use of Tiger Woods or Lance Armstrong as a spokesperson before and after their problems) creates an image of the type of person that might use the brand. The message—that is, what is said about the brand—positions the brand the way the marketer wants it to be perceived. Is it a luxury brand (Jaguar) or a low-cost brand (Walmart) or a combination (Kohls, Target). The photography, the background and the message all contribute to the brand‘s overall image.

Advertisers have discovered a new-found emphasis on media in developing a brand image. As one might expect, the medium in which the ad appears impacts the perception of the brand. An ad appearing in Vogue or GQ will be impacted differently than one in Time or The Economist. Ads appearing in or on different websites will be impacted by that medium as well.

Recently, an ad featuring U2‘s Bono appeared in a number of upscale print media including Vogue and Vanity Fair. The clothing ad had a setting with a small aircraft in the background in what appeared to be Africa. As one might imagine the ad was designed to create a high-class image for the brand by using well known and liked celebrities in an image that spoke to high class. At the same time, ads for other brands may use non-celebrities such as everyday looking people to create their own image of being for everyone not just beautiful people. The Dove campaigns targeted to women are a classic example of successfully employing this strategy.

9. As the media environment changes, explain how this impacts the role of advertising and promotion. Why is the IMC process different than it was, say, 20 years ago? (LO 2-1) A careful analysis of the marketplace should lead to alternative market opportunities for existing product lines in current or new markets, new products for current markets, or new products for new markets. Market opportunities are areas where there are favorable demand trends, where the company believes customer needs and opportunities are not being satisfied, and where it can compete effectively. The Manischewitz company—you may have heard the ad slogan ―Man-O-Manischewitz!

What a wine!‖—a marketer of kosher foods, has revived its decades-old slogan to take advantage of a new marketing opportunity. Based on research that showed that four out of five buyers of kosher foods are not traditional Jewish consumers, Manischewitz has increased its marketing efforts in an attempt to capture more of the mainstream market. Knowing that there has been an increase in interest in ethnic foods and health consciousness and that, as a result of the recession, more consumers are eating meals at home, the company hopes to reach more consumers (Exhibit 2-1). The company‘s new IMC program includes a multimillion-dollar advertising budget, web programs, in-store promotions, a ―Cook Off,‖ and public relations activities designed to promote its kosher food line.

One of the major changes from 20 years ago is in media. The Internet, social media, and mobile, of course, have changed everything, and public relations now plays a much more important role in the IMC program. Traditional media, while still important, seems to be getting much less attention.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

10. Discuss the difference between benefit and demographic segmentation. Give examples of companies employing each. Is it possible for a company to employ both forms of segmentation simultaneously? (LO 2-4) Demographic segmentation is the segmenting of markets based on age, income, sex, race, etc.

Clearly, there are products targeted to the sexes. Those marketed to men and women, including media as well as products themselves. We have shown in the text that the teenage market is much different than those in midlife and those in older age brackets. Higher income groups are marketed to differently than lower income groups. Think of the strategies for Jaguar, Mercedes, and Bentley versus those for VW, Kia, and Hyundai. The pricing is different, the product quality is different, and certainly the IMC strategies are different. Remember that Lexus and Infinity are distributed in different dealerships. Benefit segmentation relates to the development of segments based on the specific benefits sought. Think about low-fat or gluten-free products, electric cars, or high gas mileage cars versus SUVs and sports cars—what benefits drive the sale?

Additional Discussion Questions (not in text) 11. Marketers continue to increase their marketing efforts to the Hispanic market, while at the same time evidence suggests that younger Hispanics are becoming more integrated into the mainstream. What are the implications of these acculturation issues for the future of marketing? (LO 2-3) As shown in the text, the Hispanic market—already very substantial in some areas of the country— continues to grow in size. This alone makes it an attractive market segment.

While many of the younger Hispanics become more and more a part of the overall market in respect to values, lifestyles, etc., some will do so to a lesser degree. What this means is multiple market opportunities. For those who emulate the overall market, products and services that are adopted by the ―mainstream‖ will become more desirable to the Hispanic market. Evidence of this exists, as many of the high-end name brands now have high adoption rates among Hispanics. In addition, many of the media adopted by the mainstream market will now experience higher rates of adoption among Hispanics, including those who communicate in English.

At the same time, there will always be those who do not assimilate into the ―mainstream,‖ continuing to hold on to their cultural heritage as opposed to becoming ―like everyone else.‖ For this group, brands that are targeted to Hispanics, rather than the mainstream market, will achieve success as Hispanics maintain their identity, and use products and brands that appeal to them on this basis.

Overall, the growth of the Hispanic segment, and the increases in socioeconomic status that are also occurring make the Hispanic market attractive to many marketers. Marketers will have to determine which of the sub-segments of this market they wish to target—those who will attempt to integrate into the mainstream and purchase products and brands associated with that group, or those who will maintain their own identities and use brands more associated with them. The likelihood is that marketers will attempt to do both, as both are likely to increase in attractiveness.

12. As noted, packages are now becoming communications tools, serving as advertising vehicles. At the same time, packages are changing the other marketing mix elements as well. Discuss how packages are being used to impact price and distribution strategies as well as promotional strategies. (LO 2-2)

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

One such example is that of Coors Light‘s cans, which change colors when the product is at the preferred drinking temperature. This is just one of many examples, of the use of packaging more effectively in the marketing mix. In the Coors case, the uniqueness of the package design is, in itself, a potential selling point. As the same time, it is a beneficial package element that helps insure that the product is consumed at the point at which it will have the most flavor.

From a promotional standpoint, packages can be effective in attracting attention, differentiating the product, and creating a brand image. The role of the package is to communicate and establish a position for the product and/or brand.

Packages are also being used to make the product more convenient. Think about how lids have changed. Plastic is becoming more popular than cans, tuna can now be carried in an easy-open pouch instead of a can. Separate tops for consuming drinks while participating in sports, walking, etc. have now become more attractive. Package sizes are used to differentiate—family size bottles, to regular size cans, to half-cans, or mini-cans make consumption more convenient.

Ultimately, the different packages impact the price variable. Sticking with the drink example, the sports packaged drinks cost more than the same amount of beverage in a non-sports package.

Convenience packages of potato chips, cookies, etc. used for school children‘s lunches cost more than larger bags, etc. Typically, larger size containers cost less (on a relative basis) than do these convenience packaged items.

Many companies have changed their package designs to accommodate retailers. With the enormous battle for shelf space comes a marketing opportunity or necessity. Uniquely designed packages that do not fit or take up too much room on the shelves must give way to those that do. Packages that are more durable are also being required in an attempt to eliminate or reduce breaking or spilling.

Finally, from an IMC perspective, the package communicates a lot about the brand. The examples of Heinz or Arm & Hammer baking soda immediately communicate about what is inside of the package, its quality, and it‘s longevity. Expensive brands rely on packaging as much as do the inexpensive ones in informing the consumer as to what to expect inside.

13. The text describes a number of different positioning strategies. Give examples of products and/or brands that utilize each of these different strategies. (LO 2-5) The text lists a number of ways that companies can position their products. These include: a. Positioning by product attribute and benefits—In this case, a company differentiates itself based on specific characteristics and/or benefits that it offers. Apple has positioned itself on its‘ innovative technology and exciting products. BMW on its handling capabilities. b. Positioning by price/quality—Companies like Bose and Bang & Olefsen position themselves as very high-quality brands that are worth the extra expense associated with their purchase. While not irrelevant, the companies want to communicate that price should not be the major factor considered in their purchase. Motel 6, on the other hand, positions itself as low cost, while still stressing the fact that they have not sacrificed quality in their motel rooms. c. Positioning by use or application—Again using Bose as an example, the company advertises its expensive headset as the best for listening to music, and also as the best for its technological capabilities for noise reduction (for example when riding on an airplane). The company‘s print campaign ―Use it as a sanctuary or…. Reflects this positioning well. d. Positioning by product class—The now famous ―Pork, the other white meat‖ is an excellent example of positioning by product class. A number of juice companies position themselves as a

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

substitute for eating fruit, and V8 says to ―drink your vegetables.‖ Yogurt has positioned itself as a fruit. e. Positioning by product user—Canon positions its cameras as being the best for the serious picture taker. The University of Phoenix positions itself as a college for working persons—not ―your typical four year school.‖ f.

Positioning by competitor—Credit card companies like Discover position themselves as offering more services than their competitors with no fees. Others credit card companies compare their rewards programs directly to competitors‘.

g. Positioning by cultural symbols—The Jolly Green Giant, the Keebler elves, and the Pillsbury Doughboy are all examples of companies that have cultural symbols. Speedy Alka-Seltzer, Ronald McDonald, and the Wells Fargo stagecoach are other examples of this form of positioning.

14. IMC Perspective 2–1 discusses Buick's attempt to reposition its cars to a younger audience.

Explain why this may or may not work. (LO 2-4) A number of General Motors cars are no longer being sold new—Oldsmobile, Pontiac, and Saturn for example. The average age of Buick and Cadillac owners skews high (high 50s to low 60s). GM knows that if they don‘t attract more younger buyers, Buick and maybe eventually Cadillac may soon be gone. As a result, Buick has embarked on this campaign to attract younger buyers. The Buick campaign features young and attractive actors in a variety of settings ranging from small gatherings to formal meetings to baby showers. The idea is to show that younger people buy Buick—not just grandfathers and grandmothers. In addition, a number of new Buick models have been introduced, that, in general, are smaller and sportier than the previously ―boat size‖ automobiles on the market.

Even a convertible has been re-introduced—clearly, a car for younger people. As a result, there is evidence that Buick is being successful as the average age of the buyer has dropped from 64 to 57.

On the other hand, images don‘t change over night. If you ask younger people today, many (if not most) still perceive the brand as ―their grandfather‘s car‖ and would not consider it in their consideration set. It may take a generation for this image change to occur. The question is, can GM wait that long?

15. What is meant by repositioning? Discuss some companies that have successfully employed this strategy. (LO 2-4) Sometimes due to a downturn in sales, changing marketing conditions, or other reasons, companies may need to change their positioning strategy, also known as re-positioning. Perhaps the most often cited example of this is Rolling Stone magazine, which changed from a predominantly music-oriented medium to include articles that reach a broader audience. Another example is MTV, which started as a channel playing music to one that now contains much broader programming and only a small portion of music playing.

It is not difficult to find companies that have repositioned themselves in recent years. A few of these include: •

Cadillac—the flagship of the GM line has tried to move away from the image of ―my grandfather‘s car" to attract a younger market. Using rock stars, young athletes, entertainment stars, and product placements are just a few strategies Cadillac has employed.

•

IBM—once a computer company, IBM now has a completely different image as a solutions provider.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

•

Xerox—the copy machine company has almost no identity with copying services.

•

Kia and Hyundai—these Korean manufactured automobiles have been forced to reposition from a low-price positioning to one of higher quality. Both are doing so quite successfully.

•

Abercrombie—the difference between the Abercrombie of today and 20 years ago is worlds apart.

While many companies successfully re-position, many others are less fortunate. To successfully reposition, brands must commit to the strategy in total. Failure to do so, will lead to failure in the marketplace.

16. Many companies have maintained their same brand identity for years by keeping the same logos, packaging, and so on, while others have made changes. Give examples of companies employing both of these strategies and discuss their results. (LO 2-5) What comes to mind when you see the package or logo of Coke, Jaguar, Budweiser, Target, or the Penn State football team? Each of these brands is clearly identifiable, with strong recognition and image identification. (In 2012, Penn State changed its uniform for the first time in over 50 years by putting names on the back of the players‘ jerseys.) When a consumer sees a Target store logo, it is clear as to what it means and what is inside of that store. The BMW and Jaguar logos are clearly recognizable. UPS has extended its brown label to their packaging and shipping stores.

On the other hand, what comes to mind when you see the package or logo of less well known and identifiable brands? Can you describe what the Xerox logo looks like? What about Duracell batteries?

Do you easily recognize a Postal Annex sign? While the first group sends a clear signal about what they stand for through their packages and or logos, the latter does not—either as a result of not building the brand image or changing it too often.

To establish a strong brand image, brands must promote and establish their logos and packages to add an extra communications contact point. They must also stick with this position and identity and not change it too often. In 2013, Saab, American Airlines, VH1, and the Miami Dolphins NFL team all changed their logos—some drastically, others minimally. Time will tell how this works out.

17. Some marketers feel that grouping consumers into age cohorts like millennials, baby boomers, and so forth, results in unreliable generalizations and that such strategies might not be successful. Give the pros and cons of this argument. (LO 2-2) This chapter discusses the strategy of segmentation, whereby groups exhibiting common characteristics (demographic, psychographic, etc.) are targeted with similar marketing and IMC strategies. Simply put, the assumption is that the commonalities between the groups allow for efficiencies in implementation, cost savings, and more effective strategies overall.

Some believe that this strategy may not be as effective—particularly if taken to the extreme. We already noted in the chapter that not all Hispanics are the same and that stereotyping them as such could backfire on the marketer. Likewise, all millennials are not the same. While you may be very similar to your friends, for example, you no doubt know many others who are in your age range, in your college, etc, who are very different from you. Their lifestyles, values, interests, etc. make them seem almost alien, and you share nothing in common.

When marketers segment, they are stereotyping to an extent. And while this strategy has been proven to be effective, it can also be dangerous if the marketer is to assume that by segmenting on any particular basis leads to one homogenous group that requires only one marketing strategy.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

IMC Exercise The text discusses a number of efforts by marketers to reach diverse market segments by targeting various ethnic groups and subcultures such as teenagers. Have students find ads targeted to specific market segments and have them bring these ads to class and discuss which market segment is being targeted, the type of appeal used in the ad, and whether they feel the targeting effort will be successful.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

CHAPTER 3 ORGANIZING FOR ADVERTISING AND PROMOTION: THE ROLE OF AD AGENCIES AND OTHER MARKETING COMMUNICATION ORGANIZATIONS Chapter Overview The purpose of this chapter is to familiarize the student with the various ways that organizations might organize for purposes of developing and executing integrated marketing communications programs.

Students often have little or no idea of the roles of various participants in the advertising and promotional program and how the IMC function is organized and coordinated. The chapter begins with a presentation of the various participants involved in the promotional planning process—advertisers, advertising agencies, media organizations, marketing communication specialist organizations, and collateral service organizations. This is followed by a discussion of the various organizational systems and the advantages and disadvantages of each. An in-depth discussion of the role and functions of advertising agencies is provided, as is an explanation of how agencies are compensated and evaluated. The chapter also discusses organizations that provide specialized integrated marketing communication services including directresponse, sales promotion, and interactive agencies as well as public relations firms. It is very important for students to understand that a variety of different organizations may play a role in the development of various aspects of a company‘s integrated marketing communications program.

Learning Objectives 1. Describe how companies organize for advertising and integrated marketing communications functions.

2. Compare the advantages and disadvantages of different ways to organize for advertising and promotion.

3. Identify the types of advertising agencies and the roles they play.

4. Explain how to select, compensate, and evaluate advertising agencies.

5. Identify the role and functions of specialized marketing communication organizations.

6. Compare the pros and cons of using an integrated marketing services agency.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Chapter and Lecture Outline I. PARTICIPANTS IN THE INTEGRATED MARKETING COMMUNICATIONS PROCESS This chapter examines the various organizations that participate in the integrated marketing communications process, their roles and responsibilities, and their relationship to one another. Some companies choose to handle advertising, media buying and other parts of their IMC programs in-house.

However, most major marketers use advertising agencies and other types of promotional specialist organizations to handle the various areas of their IMC programs as they do not have these capabilities internally. Marketers are always searching for creative ways to communicate with their customers and are looking for agencies that can offer a range of integrated marketing communication capabilities and help them compete in the rapidly changing world of advertising and promotion. The opening section provides an overview of the various participants in the integrated marketing communications process. The student should become familiar with the various players including clients, advertising agencies, media organizations, specialized marketing communications specialists, and those who provide collateral services. It is particularly important to note that with the movement toward IMC, marketing communication specialist organizations such as direct response agencies, sales promotion agencies, public relations firms, and digital/interactive agencies are playing an increasingly important role in the development and implementation of programs in their areas of expertise. However, decisions also have to be made regarding the coordination and control of the IMC program and whether this should be the responsibility of the client or turned over to the control of an outside agency.

II. ORGANIZING FOR ADVERTISING AND PROMOTION IN THE FIRM: THE CLIENT’S ROLE How a firm organizes for advertising and promotions is a function of a number of factors including (1) the size of the organization, (2) the number of products it markets, (3) the role that advertising and promotion assume in the product mix, (4) the advertising and promotions budget, and (5) the structure of the firm.

Three organizational designs are discussed: A.

The Centralized System—In a centralized system, marketing activities are organized along functional lines. A common form is to have an advertising manager (or marketing communications manager) responsible for all advertising and promotions activities including planning and budgeting, administration and execution, and coordination with other departments and outside agencies.

B.

The Decentralized System—In a decentralized system, individual products or brands are the responsibility of the brand manager (or product manager). All advertising and promotion for the brand or product will be this person‘s responsibility (including responsibilities for working with all external agencies) and s/he will be in charge of all planning, implementation and control for that product or brand.

C.

In-House Agencies—Some companies develop their own internal ad agencies. The design of these agencies may vary from small advertising departments to operations as large as an external agency. In the latter case, the in-house agency will operate as a separate entity and control advertising and promotional expenditures in millions of dollars. Large companies that use inhouse agencies include Hyundai, Land Rover, Benetton and Revlon. The advantages and disadvantages associated with each of these organizational systems are shown in Figure 3-4. This exhibit can be used as an effective slide for class discussion purposes. Digital and Social Media Perspective 3-1 discusses why more companies are bringing advertising in-house.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Professor Notes:

McGraw-Hill Connect ®: Advertising Organization Systems Type of Activity: Click and Drag Activity Summary: In this activity, students will match the advertising organization system with the advantages and disadvantages associated with it.

Activity Learning Objectives: 03-01 Describe how companies organize for advertising and integrated marketing communications functions.

03-02 Compare the advantages and disadvantages of different ways to organize for advertising and promotion.

Concept Review: Many companies have an advertising department headed by an advertising or communications manager operating under a marketing director. An alternative used by many large multiproduct firms is a decentralized marketing (brand management) system. A third option is to form a separate agency within the firm, an in-house agency.

Difficulty: 2 Medium Bloom‘s: Understand AACSB: Analytical Thinking

III.

ADVERTISING AGENCIES

Many large companies employ the services of an external advertising agency. More than 14,000 U.S. and international agencies are listed in the Advertising Red Books (the ―Red Book‖ can be accessed at www.redbooks.com); however, most are individually owned small businesses employing fewer than five people. The U.S. ad agency business is highly concentrated. Nearly two-thirds of the domestic billings are handled by the top 500 agencies.

A.

Agency Consolidation—There are four large agency holding companies including WPP, Omnicom Group, Interpublic Group, and Publicis Groupe. These four holding companies own multiple advertising agencies, media specialist companies, public relations firms, digital agencies, and other types of marketing communication organizations. The top ten U.S. advertising agencies are shown in Figure 3-5 of the text. An updated version of this is made available each year by Advertising Age and is available on the adage.com website.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

B.

The Ad Agency‘s Role—External agencies provide a variety of services to their clients, including those discussed in the previous section. Though many clients have the capabilities of performing these roles themselves, they elect to use outside agencies for the following reasons: (1) the skills offered, (2) objectivity, and (3) experience.

C.

Types of Ad Agencies—All agencies are not the same of course. This section discusses the various types of agencies including the following: 1. Full-Service Agencies—These agencies offer their clients a full range of services including account services, marketing planning and research, media planning and buying, sales promotion, creative services, and interactive media. The various departments of a full-service agency include: 2. Account Services—The link between the advertising agency and its clients. Account executives serve as the liaison between the agency and client and are responsible for coordinating the agency's efforts in planning, creating and producing ads.

3. Marketing Services—Many full-service agencies provide a variety of marketing services to their clients and maintain departments such as research, strategy and planning and media. In many agencies the marketing services department may include account planners who are individuals that gather information that is relevant to the client‘s product or service and can be used in the development of the creative strategy as well as other aspects of the IMC campaign. The research and media department provides important services that full-service agencies need to plan and execute their client‘s advertising programs.

4. Creative Services—Agency personnel in this department include artists and copywriters who are responsible for the creation and execution of the clients advertising messages. Creative services may also include print and broadcast production departments, which are responsible for actually producing the advertising messages and putting them into final form. The traffic department coordinates all phases of production and sees that all ads are completed on time and deadlines for submitting the ads to the media are met.

5. Management and Finance—Like any other business, an advertising agency must be managed and must perform basic operating and administrative functions such as accounting, finance, and human resources.

6. Agency Order and Structure—Attention should also be given to the two basic types or agency organization structures used by agencies. Under the departmental system, each of the agency functions is set up as a separate department and is called upon to perform its specialty for all of the agency‘s clients. Many agencies use the group system in which individuals from each department work together as teams to service a particular account. Many clients prefer the group system because agency employees become very familiar with their business and it ensures continuity in servicing the account.

D.

Other Types of Agencies and Services—Many small advertisers are interested in specific services other agencies offer. Several alternatives to full-service agencies have evolved, including the following: 1. Creative Boutiques—These types of agencies specialize in and provide only advertising creative services. They have creative personnel such as writers or artists on staff but do not have media, research or account planning capabilities. Many creative boutiques are formed by members of the creative departments of full-service agencies who leave the firm and take with them clients who want to retain their creative talents. IMC Perspective 3-1 provides

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

some interesting insights into one agency where they are creatively led, but strategically driven.

2. Media Specialist Companies—These are independent companies that specialize in media planning and buying. Many companies use independent media buying services to plan and purchase media and an advertising agency to handle their creative work. A major development in the purchasing of advertising media in recent years has been the rapid growth of programmatic buying, which refers to wide range of technology. Many of the major agencies have formed independent media services companies that handle the media planning and buying for their clients. Media specialist companies have become very important since many clients are consolidating their media buying to save money and improve media efficiency.

Professor Notes:

McGraw-Hill Connect ®: Agency Functions Type of Activity: Click and Drag Activity Summary: In this activity, students will match the advertising agency personnel with the relevant job descriptors.

Activity Learning Objective: 03-03 Identify the types of advertising agencies and the roles they play.

Concept Review: A full-service advertising agency offers its clients a full range of marketing, communications, and promotions services, including planning, creating, and producing the advertising, performing research, and selecting media. A full-service agency may also offer nonadvertising services such as strategic market planning, sales promotions, direct marketing, interactive capabilities, package design, and public relations and publicity. A full-service agency is made up of departments that provide the activities needed to perform the various advertising functions and serve the client, such as Account Services, Marketing Services, and Creative Services.

Difficulty: 2 Medium Bloom‘s: Understand AACSB: Analytical Thinking

IV.

AGENCY COMPENSATION

Agency agencies may be compensated in a variety of ways, including:

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

A.

Commissions from Media—The agency is compensated based on the time or space it purchases for its client. The commission has traditionally been 15 percent (16 2/3 percent for outdoor), but now is often negotiated downward. The commission system has been the target of criticism for a number of years as critics argue that it ties agency compensation to media costs and encourages agencies to rely too much on expensive, commissionable media such as network television and avoid noncommissionable media. Many advertisers have moved to a negotiated commission system that takes the form of reduced percentage rates, variable commission rates, and minimum and maximum compensation rates. The most recent survey commissioned by the Association of National Advertisers found that 12 percent of clients pay a commission to their agencies.

However, most clients do use the 15 percent commission as a benchmark to evaluate their current agency compensation agreement.

B.

Fee, Cost, and Incentive-Based Systems—In situations where billings are low, and/or the client does not wish to pay a direct commission, an agreement may be reached in which the agency is compensated in the way of a fee, cost-plus, or incentive-based compensation system.

1. Fee Arrangement—There are two types: A fixed-fee method is when the agency charges a basic monthly fee for all of its services and credits to the client any media commissions earned. Under a fee-commission combination, the media commissions received by the agency are credited against the fee. If commissions are less than the agreed-on fee, the client must make up the difference.

2. Cost-Plus Agreement—Under a cost-plus system, the client agrees to pay the agency a fee based on costs of its work plus some agreed-on profit margin. This system requires the agency to keep detailed records of costs incurred in working on a client‘s account.

3. Incentive-Based Compensation—While there are many variations on this system, the basic idea is that the agency‘s compensation level will depend upon how well it meets predetermined performance goals for its clients such as sales or market share. Figure 3-8 shows some of the criteria used for incentive-based compensation systems. Incentive-based compensation systems are becoming more prevalent as marketers strive to make their agencies more accountable and reduce costs.

Professor Notes:

C.

Percentage Charges—When agencies purchase services from other outside agencies, they typically add a percentage in the form of a markup charge as their compensation. These markups usually range from 17.65 to 20 percent.

D.

The Future of Agency Compensation—Companies have continued to make significant changes in their agency compensation systems, including increased use of the commission system and valuebased compensation systems. More companies are changing their compensation systems as they move away from traditional mass media advertising and turn to a wider array of marketing communication tools.

Professor Notes:

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

McGraw-Hill Connect ®: AdCreates Client Portfolio Type of Activity: Case Analysis Activity Summary: AdCreate is a full-service advertising agency with several high-profile marketing firms as clients. Given their vast client list and the varied services they provide to different clients, they are compensated differently by different clients. This activity will have students select the best answer for each question related to compensation.

Activity Learning Objective: 03-04 Explain how to select, compensate, and evaluate advertising agencies.

Concept Review: The type and amount of services an ad agency performs varies from one client to another. As a result, agencies use a variety of methods to get paid for their services. Agencies are typically compensated in three ways: commissions, some type of fee arrangement, or percentage charges.

Difficulty: 3 Hard Bloom‘s: Analyze AACSB: Analytical Thinking

V.

EVALUATING AGENCIES

Given the substantial amounts of money being spent on advertising by many companies, demands for accountability are increasing. The agency evaluation process generally involves two types of assessments—financial audits and qualitative audits. The financial audit focuses on how the agency conducts its business including verification of costs and expenses, the number of personnel hours charged to an account and payments to media and outside suppliers. The qualitative audit involves the agency‘s efforts in planning, developing and implementing the client‘s advertising programs and the results achieved. An increasing trend among larger firms is to formalize this process.

A.

Gaining and Losing Clients—Agencies are like their clients in the sense that they must solicit business, and they often gain and lose business. The text offers a variety of reasons as to why agencies gain and lose clients, as well as some of the activities they perform in seeking new business. Current issues of Advertising Age or AdWeek will be useful in providing the instructor with examples of recent account changes and some of the reasons clients decided to change agencies.

1. Why agencies lose clients: •

Poor performance or service.

•

Poor communication.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

•

Unrealistic demands by the client.

•

Personality conflicts.

•

Personnel changes.

•

Changes in size of the client or agency.

•

Conflicts of interest.

•

Changes in the client‘s corporate and/or marketing strategy.

•

Declining sales.

•

Conflicting compensation philosophies.

•

Changes in policies.

•

Disagreements over marketing and/or creative strategy.

•

Lack of integrated marketing capabilities.

2. How agencies gain clients: •

Referrals.

•

Solicitations.

•

Presentations.

•

Public relations.

•

Image and reputation.

Professor Notes:

VI.

SPECIALIZED SERVICES

In addition to advertising agencies, other outside organizations may provide marketers with specialized services that are important in developing and executing integrated marketing communication programs.

A.

Direct-Marketing Agencies—One of the fastest growing areas in IMC is direct marketing, where companies communicate with their customers through telemarketing, direct mail, and other forms of direct-response advertising. Direct response agencies provide their clients a variety of services, including database analytics and management, direct mail, research, media services, and creative and production capabilities.

B.

Sales Promotion Agencies—There are many companies specializing in the provision of sales promotions such as contests, games, sweepstakes, and refund and rebate offers. Services provided by large sales promotion agencies include promotional planning, creative research, tie-in coordination, fulfillment, premium design and manufacturing, catalog production, and

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

contest/sweepstakes management. Some time might also be spent discussing how promotional agencies are becoming important participants in the development of integrated marketing communications strategies for various companies.

C.

Public Relations Firms—Many large companies use both advertising agencies and public relations (PR) firms. Public relations firms develop and implement programs to manage an organization‘s publicity, image, and affairs with consumers and other relevant publics, including employers, suppliers, stockholders, government, labor groups, citizen action groups, and the general public. The role of PR firms is examined in more detail in Chapter 17.

D.

Digital Agencies—With the rapid growth of the Internet and other forms of interactive media, a new type of specialized marketing communication organization has evolved—the digital agency.

Many marketers are turning to digital agencies for their expertise in digital media, content marketing, e-mail marketing and lead generation, database and customer relationship management, measurement, and analytics. The growth of social media and the increase in the number of marketers using them is giving rise to companies that specialize in developing applications and campaigns for platforms such as Facebook, Twitter, Instagram, and Snapchat.

Professor Notes:

VII.

COLLATERAL SERVICES

The final group of participants in the promotional process is those organizations that provide collateral services, such as marketing research, package design, consulting, photography, graphic design, talent selection, video production, and event marketing services. One of the more widely used collateral service organizations is market research firms that conduct both qualitative research such as focus groups and quantitative studies such as market surveys.

McGraw-Hill Connect ®: Role and Functions of Specialized and Collateral Services Type of Activity: Click and Drag Activity Summary: This activity provides students with a specialized or collateral service (i.e., direct marketing firm, sales promotion agency, public relations firm, etc.) and tasks students with identifying the functions of, or services provided by, these types of firms.

Activity Learning Objective: 03-05 Identify the role and functions of specialized marketing communication organizations.

Concept Review: More and more clients now seek the expertise of firms other than traditional advertising agencies to complement the efforts of their advertising agency. Five types of organizations offering specialized services were discussed in the text. Direct marketing agencies, while traditionally utilized primarily for assistance with direct mail campaigns, now specialize in database analytics and management, research,

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

and creative and production services such as the development of infomercials. Sales promotion agencies focus specifically on developing and managing promotional programs such as sweepstakes or contests, manage rebates, and create sampling activities or promotions. Public relations firms implement programs to protect, manage, or build the organizations‘ image with invested publics. They do so through dealing with the press, generating publicity, and becoming involved in community activities and events. Digital agencies specialize in all things digital including website design, social media management, mobile marketing management, and online advertising such as the creation and use of banner ads or SEO, all with the goal of optimizing a brand‘s digital presence. Finally, collateral services are employed by companies for their expertise or specialization in things such as photography, talent acquisition, and market research to best inform their IMC efforts.

Difficulty: 2 Medium Bloom‘s: Apply AACSB: Analytical Thinking

VIII.

INTEGRATED MARKETING COMMUNICATION SERVICES

Companies must decide whether to use a different organization for each marketing communications function or consolidate them with a large advertising agency that offers all of these services under one roof.

A.

Pros and Cons of Integrated Services—It has been argued that IMC is nothing new, particularly in smaller companies and communication agencies that have been coordinating a variety of promotion tools for years. However, in the past, the various services were run as separate profit centers.

Proponents of integrated marketing services contend that: • Greater control of the promotional process allows for more synergy among each of the communication program elements.

• It offers convenience for clients to coordinate all promotional efforts with one agency.

• Agencies with IMC capabilities can more easily create a single, unified image for the client.

Opponents argue that:

B.

•

Controlling all aspects of the promotional program is only an attempt to hold on to business that might otherwise be lost to independent providers.

•

Synergy and economies of scale are often not achieved by a single agency handling all communication areas.

•

Competition and conflict among agency subsidiaries have been a major problem.

Responsibility for IMC: Agency versus Client—A final area covered in this section is a discussion of whether the client or advertising agency should have the primary responsibility for planning and coordinating the IMC process. Most marketers believe it is their responsibility to set strategy for and coordinate integrated campaigns, while agency executives see this as their domain. The major barrier is a lack of people in agencies with the broad perspective and skills needed to make IMC work effectively. Internal turf battles, agency egos, and fear of budget

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

reductions are also cited as major barriers to successful integrated marketing campaigns. A study by the Corporate and Executive Board‘s Advertising and Marketing Roundtable found that for many companies, the traditional static model of a single ad agency or fixed roster of agencies working on a brand is being replaced by an open-source model whereby marketers hire multiple partners to leverage their talents and expertise in various areas. However, there is still the issue of who will coordinate the efforts of the various specialist organizations as lead agencies prefer to handle many of these services themselves rather than overseeing the work of others.

C.

Preparing for the Future—Traditional advertising agencies are facing competition from a variety of specialist companies, particularly in the areas of digital marketing and information technology, as well as the clients themselves who are bringing more of their IMC functions in-house.

Therefore, agencies must be able to prove their value to clients and show how they are providing not just services, but solutions to their marketing communication problems.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Teaching Suggestions As noted earlier, the student is usually unfamiliar with how companies organize for advertising and promotion and the role that various organizations play in this process. While most students are somewhat familiar with advertising agencies, they are less likely to know anything about direct-response and sales promotion agencies, public relations firms, and digital agencies. You might note that there are some excellent career opportunities available in these areas, as students are often interested in working for an advertising agency. This chapter will help to familiarize them with other major participants in the IMC process and the important role they play. You might encourage students to visit the websites of a promotion agency such as Aspen Marketing Services (www.aspenms.com) or a digital agency such as Digitas (www.digitas.com).

Because of the rapidly changing advertising environment, it is important for the instructor to keep up-todate with events that are taking place. Good sources of information on advertising are publications and their companion websites such as Advertising Age (www.adage.com) and AdWeek (www.adweek.com).

Another excellent source of information on promotion is the Brand Activation Association (BAA) (formerly the Promotion Marketing Association) which is the world‘s leading non-profit promotion marketing trade association. The BAA is now part of the Association of National Advertisers (www.ana.net/content/show/id/brand-activation-info). Your lecture can be supplemented by articles from the sources listed above. We have also found strong student interest in identifying current ad campaigns that have been created by various agencies. Most major agencies have excellent websites that contain client rosters, examples of their advertising, information about their advertising philosophy, approaches to branding, and content related to other areas IMC areas.

Answers to Discussion Questions 1. Discuss how disruptions being created by digital media and other technologies are impacting advertising agencies. What changes do agencies need to make to respond to these disruptions?

(LO 3-3, 3-5) The disruptions being created by digital media are squeezing agencies from all sides. Media buying is becoming automated and done by software, particularly for digital and social media, and big data are driving the planning and evaluation of the advertising strategies and tactics used by marketers.

Companies that provide digital advertising platforms such as Google and Facebook are becoming very powerful players in the marketing communication ecosystem as are data/customer relationship marketing companies such as Epsilon, Axciom, and Experian Marketing. Information technology service companies such as IBM, Accenture, McKinsey, and Deloitte are also providing advertising and media-related services for marketers. In addition to their advertising agencies, marketers are using a multitude of vendors and technology providers. One report found that marketers are using as many as 30 different tools to help them plan, manage, and evaluate their IMC campaign and the data associated with them.

As the Internet and social media become increasingly important marketing tools, more companies will be turning to digital agencies to help them develop successful interactive marketing programs.

The growth of social media and mobile marketing is also giving rise to companies that specialize in developing applications and campaigns for Facebook, Twitter, Instagram, Snapchat, and other social platforms. For example, there are a number of companies that help marketers build, monitor, manage, and measure their social media efforts across a variety of social and mobile platforms. These companies work with marketers to develop various ways to engage consumers, including various types of promotions as well as through user-generated photo, essay, and video contests.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Advertising agencies must adapt to these changes and continue to develop more digital marketing capabilities such as website development, search engine optimization, mobile marketing, social media, and analytics. Most agencies have expanded their capabilities by adding digital personnel and departments while some have acquired digital agencies.

2. Who are the various participants in the integrated marketing communications process? Discuss the roles and responsibilities of each and how they are changing, given developments occurring in the advertising industry. (LO 3-1) Advertisers or clients are the key participants. It is their product or service that is being offered and that must be marketed. The advertiser is responsible for all marketing aspects and will ultimately have the final say regarding approval of the proposed integrated marketing communications program. It is the advertiser/client who ultimately must provide the budget and pay the bills as well. The advertising agency is an external organization specializing in the planning, creation, and production of the marketing communication messages. They may also provide additional services designed to facilitate the integrated marketing effort such as media planning and buying, research, strategic marketing planning, directing marketing, and digital marketing.

Media organizations provide the advertiser with a channel for their communications. Media may include traditional forms such as print, broadcast, and outdoor, as well as new digital media. Media organizations attempt to provide the advertiser with the proper environment for the message.

Marketing communication specialist organizations provide services in specific areas of marketing communications. They include direct-response agencies, sales promotion agencies, public relations firms, and digital agencies. Collateral services participants are those who provide a wide range of support services including marketing research, package design firms, consultants, photographers, event sponsorship firms, and the like. Their functions will vary in accordance with the needs of the integrated marketing communications program.

3. It has been argued that the traditional model of a full-service, lead advertising agency is becoming obsolete. Discuss the changes occurring in the industry and how they are affecting the traditional lead agency model. (LO 3-3, 3-5, 3-6) Traditional advertising agencies have been developing more IMC capabilities because their clients are shifting more and more of their promotional dollars away from mass media advertising to other areas of marketing communication such as direct marketing, public relations, sales promotion, digital media, and event marketing and sponsorships. By expanding their capabilities, traditional agencies can offer a full range of IMC services and provide a total communications solution to their clients. By expanding their IMC capabilities and services, traditional agencies can also make money from other areas of their clients‘ promotional spending such as direct marketing, interactive, sales promotion, and public relations. The greatest change that traditional agencies have to make to improve their IMC capabilities is to develop or acquire expertise in these other areas. Traditionally, agencies have been experts in areas related to advertising including creative and media. To expand their IMC capabilities, agencies have to offer a broader range of services and develop expertise in areas such as direct marketing, event marketing, sales promotion, digital and social media, and public relations. Many agencies have been acquiring these capabilities by purchasing companies such as interactive agencies, public relations and direct marketing firms, or promotional agencies. Others have been working to develop these IMC skills internally through their hiring and training processes.

Many companies are moving away from the model of using a full-service lead agency and prefer to use more of an open-source model whereby they use a number of specialist partners to leverage their talents and expertise as needed. However, many marketers still prefer to use a full-service agency that understands their needs, customers, and the markets in which they compete. Using a full-service

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

agency also make it easier to manage the IMC program rather than having to work with a number of different agency partners.

4. Discuss the various challenges faced by companies that use the brand management system when organizing for advertising and promotion. What are some of the things that marketers can do to address these problems and ensure that their brand managers are keeping abreast of external changes occurring in the market? (LO 3-2) Advantages of a decentralized or brand management system include the following: (1) the product or brand receives more concentrated managerial attention; (2) problems and opportunities may be responded to more quickly; (3) the product or brand has an advocate; and (4) the system offers increased flexibility. Under a decentralized system, the product manager has the primary responsibility for the planning, implementation, and control of marketing programs for a specific product. S/he will also be responsible for sales projections, budgeting, and profit performances. An important part of the product manager‘s responsibility is to work with the advertising agency and other marketing communication organizations in developing promotional plans and programs for the brand. Product managers may have input into the advertising campaign, including the creative strategy, media plan, and evaluation of effectiveness.

There are, however, drawbacks to the decentralized approach, as brand managers may often lack experience and expertise as well as an understanding of the various IMC tools and how they can be used effectively. This system has also come under attack recently by those who argue that brand managers spend too much time on internal issues such as planning and budgeting and do not devote enough time to external matters or to creativity and problem solving. It has been suggested that companies do away with the formal annual planning and budgeting process that consumes much of the time of brand managers in favor of more frequently updated and spontaneous plans that can be adapted as market conditions change. Companies will also have to allocate more resources to training brand managers on the rapidly developing world of digital and social media so they can better understand the capabilities of these tools and how they can be used to communicate with consumers.

5. Discuss the pros and cons of using an in-house advertising agency. Why are many companies moving their advertising in-house rather than using an outside agency? (LO 3-2) Some of the reasons why firms use in-house agencies include: (1) cost savings; (2) control; and (3) increased ability to coordinate marketing and promotional activities. Negative aspects include: (1) internal employees may have less experience and inferior skills than their external counterparts; (2) they may be less objective about the product and its capabilities; and, (3) they may be less flexible with respect to what they are willing and able to do with the product and/or brands programs.

Companies often use an in-house agency when they have sufficient and capable staff to conduct the advertising and promotional activities themselves; they have a very large advertising and promotional budget and wish to save the costs of fees and commissions; and/or when they believe that the ability to coordinate and control the promotional activities is more feasible with this design.

Companies change from using an in-house agency and hire an outside agency for various reasons.

Many marketers feel that the use of an outside agency provides greater objectivity with respect to the advertising. When an in-house agency is used, management may get too close to the advertising process and product and will lose its objectivity when evaluating the ads. Outside agencies can provide a more objective perspective on the market and business that is not subject to internal biases and politics. Companies often move from in-house to outside agencies as they become larger and their advertising and other marketing communication needs become greater. Rather than continuing to expand the in-house agency, many companies will move to using an outside agency that has the various services and expertise needed by the company. It should be noted that perhaps the major

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

reason why outside agencies are used is that they provide the client with the services of highly skilled individuals who are specialists in the advertising area. Outside agencies also offer more flexibility to an advertiser as they can always switch agencies and hire a new one if they are dissatisfied with the work being done. It is much more difficult to terminate an in-house agency and hire new personnel to replace them.

6. IMC Perspective 3-1 discusses the outstanding creative work done by the Wieden + Kennedy agency. Find an example of an award-winning advertising W+K has created for a company or brand such as Nike, KFC, Bud Light or Old Spice. Discuss why this advertising has been recognized for its creative excellence. (LO 3-3) W+K continues to create advertising that people not only care about, but also want to share and talk about. For example, the agency created the ―Dilly Dilly‖ campaign for Anheuser Busch‘s Bud Light brand, and the catchphrase used in the commercials quickly became part of popular culture. The campaign centers around a medieval Game of Thrones–type universe where a loyal subject is praised by the king for bringing a six-pack of the beer to a banquet as everyone raises a bottle of Bud Light and cheers ―dilly dilly.‖ The campaign has been a pop-culture coup for Bud Light as the ads have been viewed millions of times on YouTube, generated tremendous buzz on social media, had several follow-up iterations, and the brand has even created merchandise such as t-shirts featuring the catchphrase. W+K also created the ad featuring NFL quarterback turned activist Colin Kaepernick (discussed in Chapter 1) to mark the 30th anniversary of Nike‘s ―Just Do It‖ campaign. W+K is known for their disruptive, engaging, and highly creative advertising that aids well-known or familiar brands in standing out from the crowd.

7. Discuss the various ways agencies are compensated and how they are changing. Which type of agency compensation model is likely to become dominant, given the changes occurring in the industry? (LO 3-4) As more marketers adopt an integrated marketing communication perspective and move away from traditional mass media, changes in compensation systems are taking place. These changes are taking place to encourage agencies to look beyond expensive commissionable media such as television and magazines and to make use of other IMC tools such as events, the Internet, and direct marketing. advertising in developing IMC programs. Many companies are also demanding more accountability from their agencies and are moving away from the traditional commission system and using incentive-based systems where agency compensation is tied to performance. The performance measures may include objective measures such as sales and/or market share as more subjective measures such as evaluations of the agency‘s creative work. Companies feel that if agencies really want to be true partners, they will be willing to share in the sales performance of the product or service with them. Demands for accountability are also resulting in more scrutinizing of agency‘s labor and other costs incurred in serving the account. Agencies are being viewed like other suppliers who are asked to continually lower their costs as clients are unwilling to compensate agencies for expenses that cannot be directly related to the performance of the advertising program.

8. Figure 3-5 shows that more than half of the largest advertising agencies are now consultancies such as Accenture Interactive, Deloitte Digital and IBM iX. Discuss the reasons marketers are using consultancies to handle their advertising and other areas of marketing communication versus traditional advertising agencies. How might traditional agencies respond to the threats they are facing from consulting companies? (LO 3-6) The growth of digital marketing, automation of media selling and buying, and the need for abilities in big data interpretation and processing have all led brands to question the need for traditional advertising agencies and instead turn to consulting firms who specialize in data analytics, digital

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

media, or the use of ad technology in buying and selling ad space. Advertising agencies may respond to this shift by engaging in convergence or purchasing smaller, more specialty consulting firms and offering and promoting more tailored or specialized services to their clients. They may also begin to seek out employees who can offer a more diverse skillset—those who are capable of offering skills in research and strategy development, who are also strong in managing client relationships and data analysis, and who also offer skills in creative for digital spaces.

9. Discuss the reasons why advertising agencies lose accounts. Find an example of a company that changed advertising agencies and identify the factors that led them to switch to another agency.

(LO 3-4) The relationship between a client and an agency is influenced by a variety of factors. An advertiser may decide to switch agencies for a number of reasons. Some of the most common reasons why clients switch agencies are discussed in the Gaining and Losing Clients section of the text. These include perspectives on compensation policies, the demands clients place on agencies, the level of service the agency provides, the personalities of agency and client personnel, the performance of the client‘s product or service, the perceived quality of the agency work in various areas (including account planning and management, creative, media, use of non-traditional media), and changes in the competitive situation. Changes in top management of a client may also affect the agency-client relationship. New management may prefer a particular agency or certain approach to advertising and promotion, which can affect the client‘s relationship with the agency. These reasons can apply to long-term clients as well. When marketers are having problems such as stagnant or declining sales or losses in market share, they will often look to advertising. Often the problems are blamed on advertising agencies. In the competitive world of advertising, agencies are always looking for new business and major advertisers know they can attract a great deal of interest and attention when they put their accounts up for review. Students should be encouraged to find an example of a company that recently changed advertising agencies and identify the specific factors that led them to do so.

Publications such as Advertising Age, AdWeek, and BrandWeek often have stories about companies that change agencies and can be used to find specific examples to analyze.

10. Discuss the pros and cons for a marketer having one agency handle all of its integrated marketing communication needs versus using specialized marketing communication firms to handle various components of it. (LO 3-6) Some marketers prefer to have all of their IMC activities performed by one agency rather than using multiple agencies that specialize in various areas such as direct marketing, sales promotion, digital marketing, and public relations. These companies feel that by having all of the IMC functions performed by one agency makes it easier to develop and implement a consistent and uniform program where everyone is working with the same information and toward the same goals and objectives.

They also feel that giving one agency control of entire IMC program achieves greater synergy among each of the communication elements. It also makes it easier for the client when all of the promotional elements such as advertising, direct mail, event marketing, sales promotion, digital marketing, and public relations are handled by one large agency.

However, some companies prefer to use companies that specialize in specific areas of integrated marketing communications such as sales promotion, public relations, direct marketing, and digital marketing. These agencies are important because they are specialists in planning, developing and implementing these various IMC functions and can provide a great deal of expertise to these areas.

For example, an interactive agency is an organization that specializes in the development and strategic use of various interactive marketing tools such as websites for the Internet, banner ads, social media sites, and other forms of digital media. Many marketers are using digital agencies because they are specialists in field of digital media and have capabilities beyond what might be

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

found in a full-service advertising agency. Companies that are making the Internet and social media a major part of their IMC programs may use a digital agency that has strategy, creative, and technology capabilities and can help these companies integrate the Internet into various aspects of their business such as brand building, communications, transactions, and customer service. Companies may choose to use these specialized agencies rather than having one agency handle all of its IMC needs as they feel that they offer more expertise in a particular marketing communications area. These specialized agencies are often smaller and companies may feel that their account is getting more attention or is being handled by more talented individuals. The specialized agencies may also cost less since they may be smaller and thus have less overhead and other costs to cover.

Additional Discussion Questions (not in text) 11. Why might a company choose to use a creative boutique rather than a larger, full-service agency? Find an example of a company that uses a creative boutique and discuss why the decision to use a smaller agency may be appropriate for this firm. (LO 3-3) Creative boutiques are agencies that provide only creative services and have developed in response to some companies‘ desires to use only the creative talent of agency. There are a number of reasons why marketers use creative boutiques. These smaller agencies often turn out excellent creative work and do not have the bureaucracy and politics of larger agencies. Many companies also feel that by working with a smaller creative boutique, they can get more attention and better access to creative talent than they would at a larger agency. Many creative boutiques are formed when creative people leave large agencies and form their own agencies. Often they take with them a client with whom they have worked closely and developed a strong relationship. Another reason why a company might use a creative boutique is that there are companies available to handle other parts of the advertising and promotional program. Independent media buying companies can be used to develop and implement the media strategy and plan, while other types of companies can provide specialized services in other areas such as direct response, sales promotion, and digital agencies, as well as PR firms. Students should be encouraged to identify a company that uses a creative boutique and evaluate why they do so rather than using an outside agency. Articles often appear in publications such as Advertising Age or Adweek that discuss agencies used by various companies. Alternatively, students might identify a creative boutique and look at the client list on the agency‘s website.

12. Discuss the changing role of account representatives in advertising agencies. Discuss how the role of account representative is changing and the developments that underlie these changes. Do you think account representatives will become obsolete in the future? Why or why not? (LO 33) Account representatives or executives are individuals who work in an advertising agency and serve as the liaison between the agency and the client. They are responsible for understanding the client‘s marketing strategy as well as its advertising and promotion needs and interpreting and explaining them to agency personnel such as the creative department. Traditionally, their positions have involved working with the client to formulate the advertising plan, coordinating the agency‘s services, and representing the client‘s point-of-view to those in the agency. The role of account representatives is changing as they are now required to have a broader range of skills that they can use in interacting with the client. Agencies want account representatives who are good strategic thinkers and have a broad-based marketing and business perspective that extends beyond media advertising. As other integrated marketing communications tools such as direct, digital, and non-traditional media become more widely used, they are expected to have an understanding of their value and how they can be used as part of an IMC program. Many agencies are facing increasing pressure from their clients to

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

keep costs under control and to justify the number of individuals assigned to work on their account.

Thus, the number of account representatives assigned to work for a client is being reduced and those who handle the account are being asked to do more. It is unlikely that account representatives will become obsolete as they still play an important role in serving as the link between the agency and its clients. However, the skill set required to be an account representative is changing and the position is likely to become more demanding as marketers continue to move away from traditional media advertising and utilize a variety of IMC tools. Thus, agencies are developing training programs for their account executives to better educate them in a variety of areas and provide them with the skills needed to interact with clients who are becoming increasingly demanding of them.

13. Discuss the responsibilities and duties of an advertising or marketing communications manager in a company that uses a centralized organizational system versus a company that uses a decentralized system. (LO 3-2) The specific duties of the advertising or marketing communications manager will vary depending upon the size, organization, and makeup of the firm. In a centralized system, the manager may have responsibilities for all promotional functions except sales. These responsibilities may include planning and budgeting, administration and execution of the promotional program, coordination with other departments and outside agencies, and program evaluation. An advertising or marketing communication manager is usually needed even if an outside agency is used, as the agency may not perform all of the marketing tasks required. There is also still a need for someone to plan and coordinate the IMC program internally as well as to serve as the liaison between the agency and the firm. In addition, the ad manager will be responsible for evaluating the external agency‘s performance. Under a decentralized system, a product or brand manager has responsibility for total management of the brand, which includes planning, budgeting, sales, and profit performance. The brand manager‘s responsibilities will be similar to those of the advertising or marketing manager in a centralized system as s/he will work closely with the outside advertising agency and other marketing communication specialists such as promotion or digital agencies to develop budgets, define strategies, and oversee the implementation of the marketing program.

14. Discuss how technology and the emerging role of digital and social media are impacting the role of brand managers. What types of skills are needed to be a successful brand manager today?

What can companies do to train brand managers so they can keep up with the changes occurring in digital and social media? (LO 3-2) Middle-aged brand managers who are not digital natives may be particularly challenged to understand the role of social media and the important role they play in the lives of younger consumers. The increasing use of social media such as Twitter, Facebook, YouTube, Pinterest, and a myriad of blogs is changing the way brands communicate with their customers. Many brand managers spend much of their time on internal issues such as planning and budgeting and do not have ample time to devote to managing the social identity of their brands. Companies can address these problems by developing training programs for brand managers to help them better understand the role of various social media and how they can be used as part of the IMC program for the brands they manage. Many digital media companies such as Facebook, Twitter, and Google also provide online courses and tutorials that managers can take to enhance their knowledge and understanding of digital and social media.

15. Discuss the role of specialized marketing communication organizations such as sales promotion, public relations, and digital agencies in the IMC process. Why are marketers likely to use these specialists rather than a full-service agency? (LO 3-3, 3-5) These organizations provide services in their areas of expertise. A direct-response agency develops and implements direct-marketing programs, while sales promotion agencies develop promotional

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

programs such as contests and sweepstakes, premium offers, or sampling programs. Digital agencies are being retained to develop websites and help marketers as they navigate the realm of digital media.

Public relations firms are used to generate and manage publicity for a company and its products and services as well as to focus on its relationships and communications with its relevant publics.

Probably the main reason outside agencies are used is that they provide the client with the services of highly skilled individuals who are specialists in their chosen fields. An advertising agency staff may include artists, writers, media analysts, researchers, and others with specific skills, knowledge, and experience who can help market the client‘s products or services. Many agencies specialize in a particular type of business and use their knowledge of the industry to assist their clients with strategic marketing as well as branding. An outside agency can also provide an objective viewpoint of the market and its business that is not subject to internal company policies, biases, or other limitations.

The agency can draw on the broad range of experience it has gained while working on a diverse set of marketing problems for various clients.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

CHAPTER 4 PERSPECTIVES ON CONSUMER BEHAVIOR Chapter Overview The purpose of this chapter is to examine the field of consumer behavior and to demonstrate how knowledge and understanding of the consumer can be used in developing promotional strategies and programs. This chapter utilizes the basic consumer decision-making process model as a framework for examining consumer behavior. The chapter takes the student through the various stages of this model and discusses what occurs at each and how advertising and other forms of promotion can be used to influence consumer decision making. The influence of various psychological concepts or influences such as motivation, perception, attitudes, and integration processes are examined at the appropriate stages of the decision process model. Attention is also given to the three major variations in the consumer decisionmaking process: routine response behavior, limited problem solving, and extended problem solving.

Consideration is given to how advertising and promotional strategies may differ depending on the type of decision-making process consumers are likely to be using.

Learning Objectives 1. Discuss why an understanding of consumer behavior is valuable in developing advertising and promotional programs.

2. Describe the steps in the consumer decision-making process.

3. Explain the influence on consumer behavior of psychological processes like perception and motivation.

4. Discuss behavioral learning theory and cognitive learning theory.

5. Explain the influence of external factors like culture and subculture.

6. Identify new ways to study consumer behavior.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Chapter and Lecture Outline I.

AN OVERVIEW OF CONSUMER BEHAVIOR

A brief introduction to the field of consumer behavior and an indication of the increased importance that this domain of study has assumed in marketing would be a good starting point. The instructor should discuss the fact that to operationalize the marketing concept and effectively design advertising and promotions programs, it is critical that the marketer have an understanding of consumer decision-making processes. It is important to point out that the development of successful marketing communication programs begins with understanding why consumers behave as they do. Those who develop advertising and other promotional strategies begin by identifying relevant markets and then analyzing the relationship between target consumers and the product/service or brand.

Consumer behavior can be defined as the process and activities that people engage in when searching for, selecting, purchasing, using, evaluating and disposing of products and services to satisfy their needs and desires.

The decision process model should be introduced and a brief description given of the five stages: •

Problem Recognition

•

Information Search

•

Alternative Evaluation

•

Purchase Decision

•

Postpurchase Evaluation

You should let the students know that this model will be used as a framework for analyzing the consumer decision-making process. You will be going through the various stages of the model, discussing what occurs at each stage and how advertising and promotion can be used to influence consumer decisionmaking.

Professor Notes:

II.

THE CONSUMER DECISION-MAKING PROCESS

The consumer purchase decision-making process is generally viewed as consisting of sequential steps or stages through which the buyer passes in purchasing a product or service. Figure 4-1 of the text shows the various steps in this process as well as the relevant internal psychological processes that occur at each stage such as motivation, perception, attitude formation, integration, and learning.

A.

Problem Recognition—The first step in the consumer decision-making process is that of problem recognition, which is caused by a difference between the consumer‘s ideal state and actual state.

There are various sources of problem recognition which include: 1. Out of stock—Consumers must replenish stock, typically selecting a familiar brand or one to which they feel loyal.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

2. Dissatisfaction—Dissatisfied with current state of affairs or product being used. Advertising can help consumers recognize when they have a problem or need and need to make a purchase.

3. New needs/wants—Lifestyle changes can trigger problem recognition and elicit new consumer wants and needs. A want is a desire for something one does not have. Many products advertised and sold satisfy consumer wants but not needs.

4. Related products/purchases—The purchase of one product (an iPhone) may trigger the want or need for related products (ear buds, charger, case, etc.).

5. Marketer-induced problem recognition—Advertisements can make consumers discontent with their current state and spurn a desire to change their current state.

6. New products—When innovative and new products are introduced, consumers can also recognize new problems that this product can fix.

B.

Examining Consumer Motivations—The way a consumer perceives a need and becomes motivated to solve a consumption problem will influence the remainder of the decision-making process. To better understand the reasons underlying consumer purchases, marketers pay considerable attention to examining motives or factors that compel or drive a consumer to take a particular action.

1. Hierarchy of needs—One of the most basic and popular approaches to understanding consumer motivation is the classic theory of human motivation popularized by psychologist Abraham Maslow. His hierarchy of needs postulates five basic levels of human needs: •

Physiological—Things required to sustain life.

•

Safety—Need for security and safety from physical harm.

•

Social/love and belonging—Satisfying relationships with others; feeling loved, accepted, affection, and a sense of belonging.

•

Esteem—Feeling a sense of accomplishment and recognition; raising status and gaining respect from others.

•

Self-actualization—Realizing one‘s potential; self-fulfillment.

The implications of Maslow‘s hierarchy for developing advertisements that appeal to different types of needs should be discussed.

2. Psychoanalytic theory—One of the initial approaches to the study of consumer behaviors in marketing used Freud‘s psychoanalytic theory as its basis. This approach viewed consumers as having complex, subconscious motivations for purchasing and is a somewhat more controversial approach to studying consumer motives.

3. Motivation research in marketing—While very popular in the late 1950s, this area of study— known as motivation research—received much less attention through the 1960s and 1970s.

The text brings up several associations related to products and brands.

4. Problems and Contributions of Psychoanalytic Theory and Motivation Research—Because of problems with reliability and validity, and the fact that consumers were often considered as unaware and unable to control their motivations, this area has received substantial criticism.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

C.

Information Search—The second step in the consumer decision making process is information search. Once a problem is recognized that can be solved by a product or service, consumers then search for information needed to make a purchase decision. Internal search involves a scan of information stored in memory to recall past experiences or knowledge regarding purchase alternatives. External search involves going to outside sources to acquire information and include personal sources, marketer controlled sources, public sources, or personal experiences such as examining or handling a product.

D.

Perception—Perception is the process by which an individual receives selects, organizes, and interprets information to create a meaningful picture of the world. Perception depends on internal factors such as a person‘s beliefs, experiences, needs, moods, and expectations. There are a number of processes involved in perception that determine how marketing information will be received: •

Sensation—the immediate and direct response of the senses (taste, smell, sight, touch, and hearing) to a stimulus such as an advertisement.

•

Selecting information—determining whether incoming information will be attended to and how much attention it will be given.

•

Interpreting the information—the process by which incoming information is interpreted and assigned meaning.

•

Selective perception—a filtering or screening of messages may occur at various stages of the perceptual process such as exposure, attention, comprehension, and retention.

•

E.

•

Selective exposure—occurs as consumers choose whether or not to make themselves available to information.

•

Selective attention—occurs when consumers choose to focus attention on certain stimuli while ignoring or excluding others.

•

Selective comprehension—occurs when consumers interpret information based on their own attitudes, beliefs, motives, and experiences, often interpreting information in a way that supports their own position.

•

Selective retention—occurs when consumers do not remember all of the information they see, hear, or read even after attending to it and comprehending it.

•

Advertisers want to ensure that consumers remember the information they see, hear, or read so the use of mnemonics are often utilized by advertisers. These are symbols, rhymes, association, and images that assist in the learning and memory process.

Subliminal perception—refers to the ability of an individual to perceive a stimulus that is below the level of conscious awareness. The possibility that marketers could use subliminal advertising to influence consumers at a subconscious level has very strong ethical implications.

Alternative Evaluation—After acquiring information during the information search stage, the consumer moves to alternative evaluation. At this stage, the consumer compares the various brands and services he or she has identified as being capable of solving the consumption problem and satisfying the needs or motives that initiated the decision process.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

1. The evoked set—The evoked set is a subset of all the brands of which the consumer is aware and actively considering in the decision process. A goal of marketers is to ensure that their brands are included in the evoked set of consumers.

2. Evaluative criteria and consequences—Evaluative criteria are the dimensions or attributes of a product or service that are used to compare different alternatives. Consumers tend to think about products in terms of their consequences or outcomes. They tend to distinguish between two broad types of consequences. Functional consequences are tangible and can be experienced directly by consumers. Psychosocial consequences are more intangible, subjective, and personal.

During the alternative evaluation stage, two subprocesses are very important: 1) the process by which consumer attitudes are created, reinforced, and changed, and 2) the decision rules or integration strategies consumers use to compare brands and make purchase decisions.

F.

Attitudes—Attitudes refer to a summary construct that represents an individual‘s overall feelings or evaluation of an object such as a brand, a company, another person, a retail store, or even an advertisement. Attitudes are one of the most heavily studied concepts in consumer behavior.

Marketer‘s keen interest in attitudes is based on the assumption that they are related to purchase behavior. Advertising and promotion are used to create favorable attitudes toward new products/services, reinforce or maintain existing favorable attitudes, and/or change negative attitudes.

1. Multiattribute attitude models—Multiattribute attitude models have been used by marketers to study consumer attitudes for the past two decades. These models view an object such as a product as possessing a number of attributes that provide the basis on which consumers form their attitudes. According to this model, consumers have beliefs about specific brand attributes and attach different levels of importance to these attributes. Beliefs concerning specific attributes or consequences that are activated and form the basis of an attitude are referred to as salient beliefs.

2. Attitude change strategies—The multiattribute model focuses on the underlying structure or basis of an attitude and provides insight into ways marketers can influence or change consumers‘ attitudes such as:

G.

•

Increasing or changing the strength or belief rating of a brand on an important attribute (frequently used by advertisers).

•

Changing consumers‘ perceptions of the importance or value of an attribute.

•

Adding a new attribute to the attitude formation process.

•

Changing perceptions of belief ratings for a competing brand.

Integration Processes and Decision Rules—An important aspect of the alternative evaluation stage is the way consumers integrate or combine information to evaluate alternatives and arrive at a purchase decision. Integration processes are the way product knowledge, meanings, and beliefs are combined to evaluate two or more alternatives. Consumers may use formal integration rules which require examination and comparison of alternatives on specific attributes. These include both compensatory and non-compensatory integration strategies. Consumers may also use informal integration rules which are often referred to as heuristics. One type of heuristic is the affect referral decision rule, where consumers make a selection based on an overall impression or summary evaluation of the various alternatives under consideration. Promotional planners need

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

to understand consumers‘ integration processes and the types of decision rules they might use in a situation. Advertising messages can be constructed to be consistent with these decision rules or to suggest how consumers might go about making a decision. It is also important for marketers to recognize that some purchase decisions are the result of a constructive process that occurs at the time of purchase.

H.

Purchase Decision—As an outcome of the alternative evaluation stage the consumer may develop a purchase intention or predisposition to buy a certain brand. Once a purchase intention has been made and an intention formed, the consumer must still implement it and make the actual purchase. Many purchase decisions are made on the basis of brand loyalty, which is a preference for a particular brand that results in its repeated purchase. Many purchase decisions for nondurable, low-involvement items take place in the store and decision and purchase occur almost simultaneously. For these types of decisions, top-of-mind awareness of a brand is important as is the influence of packaging, shelf displays, point-of-purchase materials, and various sales promotion tools.

I.

Postpurchase Evaluation—The consumer decision process does not end once the product or service has been purchased. After using a product or service the consumer compares the level of performance with expectations. Satisfaction occurs when the consumer‘s expectations are either met or exceeded, while dissatisfaction results when performance is below expectations. Another possible outcome of purchase is cognitive dissonance, which refers to a feeling of psychological tension or postpurchase doubt a consumer may experience after making a difficult purchase choice. Consumers often look to advertising for supportive information regarding the choice they have made.

J.

Variations in Consumer Decision Making—Consumers do not always engage in all five steps of the purchase decision-making process nor proceed in the sequence presented. There are three major variations of the consumer decision-making process: •

Routine response behavior—Many purchase decisions for low-priced, frequently purchased products are based on a habitual or routine choice process consisting of little more than recognizing the problem, engaging in brief internal search, and making the purchase.

Marketers of products characterized by routine response behavior must get and/or maintain their brands in the consumers‘ evoked set and encourage brand loyalty. Those not in the evoked set must encourage trial and brand switching.

•

Limited problem solving—Often a consumer has a limited amount of experience in purchasing a product or service but is somewhat aware or knowledgeable of the brands available and/or the criteria to use in making a purchase decision. When consumers purchase a product through limited problem solving, marketers should make information available to consumers that will help them make their decision.

•

Extended problem solving—The most complex and detailed form of decision making occurs when consumers have little, if any, knowledge regarding the criteria to use in making a purchase decision or the various brands available. As with limited problem solving, marketers of products characterized by extensive problem-solving must provide consumers with detailed information that helps them in making their purchase decision.

Professor Notes:

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

McGraw-Hill Connect ®: Problem Recognition Type of Activity: Click and Drag Activity Summary: In this activity, students are tasked with matching a problem-recognition trigger with an example that best describes the situation. The goal of the activity is to help students understand the first step in the consumer decision-making process (recognizing that there is a problem) and to help them recognize the importance for both buyers and marketing managers to be able to identify these triggers.

Activity Learning Objective: 04-02 Describe the steps in the consumer decision-making process.

Concept Review: The first stage in the consumer decision-making process is problem recognition. This occurs when a consumer perceives a need and becomes motivated to solve the problem. Problem recognition is triggered by a difference between the consumer‘s ideal state and actual state. There are a number of both internal and external factors that could contribute to problem recognition: being out of stock, being dissatisfied, developing new needs or wants, needing or wanting other new products to complement the purchase of the original item bought, the marketer induces problem recognition, or the availability of new/innovative products causes a consumer to recognize a new need or want.

Difficulty: 2 Medium Bloom‘s: Understand AACSB: Analytical Thinking

McGraw-Hill Connect ®: Consumer Decision-Making Process Type of Activity: Click and Drag Activity Summary: In this activity, students will identify the correct sequence of the various stages in the consumer decisionmaking process as well as match statements to the appropriate stage of the internal psychological process.

Activity Learning Objective: 04-01 Discuss why an understanding of consumer behavior is valuable in developing advertising and promotional programs.

Concept Review: Marketers' success in influencing consumers‘ purchase behavior depends in large part on how well they understand consumer behavior and the consumer decision-making process. The decision process is viewed as consisting of stages through which the buyer passes in purchasing a product or service. The decision process involves various internal psychological processes. Understanding the different stages in

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

the consumer decision-making process, and the corresponding psychological processes, will help marketers plan promotions that can influence buyer behavior.

Difficulty: 2 Medium Bloom‘s: Understand AACSB: Analytical Thinking

McGraw-Hill Connect ®: Evaluating Brands of LCD HDTVs Type of Activity: Case Analysis Activity Summary: Sarah is planning to purchase a LCD HDTV for the living room in her new one-bedroom downtown apartment. This activity will have the students select the best answer for each question related to their understanding of consumer behavior.

Activity Learning Objective: 04-03 Explain the influence on consumer behavior of psychological processes like perception and motivation.

Concept Review: ―Attitude Formation‖ is the internal psychological process that corresponds to the ―Alternative Evaluation‖ stage of the consumer decision-making process. In this stage, consumers compare brands in their evoked set, and in doing so, form attitudes towards each of those brands. Researchers and marketers have been using multiattribute attitude models to study consumer attitudes. A multiattribute attitude model views an attitude object (for example, a product or service brand) as a bundle of attributes that provide the basis on which consumers form their attitudes.

Difficulty: 3 Hard Bloom‘s: Analyze AACSB: Analytical Thinking

III.

THE CONSUMER LEARNING PROCESS

Up to this point of the chapter, the focus on consumer behavior has been from a cognitive orientation. The decision process model looks at the consumer as a problem solver and information processor who engages in a variety of mental activities in evaluating and choosing among alternatives. There are, however, alternative perspectives regarding how consumers acquire the knowledge and experience they use in making purchase decisions. To examine some of these perspectives, we look at various approaches to the consumer learning process and their implications for advertising and promotion. Consumer learning is the process by which individuals acquire the purchase and consumption knowledge and experience they apply to future related behavior.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

A.

Behavioral Learning Theory—Behavioral learning theories emphasizes the role of external or environmental stimuli in causing behavior while minimizing the significance of internal psychological processes. Traditionally, there are two behavioral learning theory approaches: 1. Classical conditioning—This approach assumes that learning is essentially an associative process whereby the relationship between an unconditioned stimulus and conditioned stimulus develops through repetition and contiguity. Classical conditioning has many applications in advertising as products and services become associated with perceptions, images, and emotions that evoke favorable reactions from consumers. Pavlov‘s dog experiment is the example of classical conditioning provided in the text. Classical conditioning can easily be applied to the practice of marketing. Consumers can be conditioned to form favorable impressions and images of various brands through associative processes and advertisers constantly strive to associate their products with images, emotions, and perceptions that are known to evoke positive consumer reactions.

2. Operant conditioning—This approach, which is sometimes called instrumental conditioning, requires the individual to operate or act on some aspect of the environment for learning to occur. Learning occurs as a result of the outcomes or consequences associated with a particular response. Reinforcement refers to a reward or favorable consequence associated with a behavior and is an important element of instrumental conditioning. Many advertisements emphasize the benefits or rewards a consumer will receive from using a product or service or encourage a consumer to use a brand to avoid unpleasant consequences.

There are a number of operant conditioning concepts that are particularly relevant to marketers such as schedules of reinforcement and shaping. Schedules of reinforcement result in varying patterns of learning and behavior. Learning occurs more quickly when every response is rewarded (continuous reinforcement schedule), but the behavior is likely to stop when the reinforcement stops. Learning occurs more slowly but lasts longer under a partial/intermittent reinforcement schedule where only some of the individual‘s responses are rewarded. Shaping is particularly relevant to the introduction of new products through the use of sales promotion tools and techniques.

B.

Cognitive Learning Theory—Figure 4-9 outlines the cognitive learning process. In contrast to behavioral learning theory perspectives, cognitive orientations emphasize internal processing or thinking. Many consumer researchers disagree with the simplified explanations of behavior offered by behavioral learning theories and are more interested in examining the complex mental processes that might underlie consumer decision-making. Thus the cognitive approach to studying learning and consumer decision-making has dominated the field of consumer behavior.

The various processes examined during the discussion of the consumer decision-making process are all relevant to a cognitive learning approach to consumer behavior.

Professor Notes:

McGraw-Hill Connect ®: Consumer Learning Processes Type of Activity: Worksheet Activity Activity Summary:

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

In this activity, students are provided with a review of behavioral and cognitive learning and are tasked with selecting the most appropriate learning theory that defines the process they are provided with and to describe the purchase behavior presented in the choices provided.

Activity Learning Objective: 04-04 Discuss behavioral learning theory and cognitive learning theory.

Concept Review: Consumer learning is defined as the process by which individuals acquire the purchase and consumption knowledge and experience they apply to future related behavior. The two basic approaches to learning include behavioral approaches and cognitive learning approaches. Behavioral learning theories emphasize the role of external, environmental stimuli in causing behavior. Cognitive learning theories emphasize the role of internal stimuli in causing behavior. The consumer thinks through the task and experiences a fourstep sequence: identifying a goal, constructing purposive behavior, insight, and goal achievement.

Difficulty: 2 Medium Bloom‘s: Understand AACSB: Analytical Thinking

IV.

ENVIRONMENTAL INFLUENCES ON CONSUMER BEHAVIOR

Consumers do not make purchase decisions in isolation as there are various external factors that may influence their purchase decisions. These include: A.

Culture—Culture refers to the complexity of learned meanings, values, norms, and customs shared by members of a society. The importance of understanding the impact of culture on consumer behavior has become increasingly important both in the U.S. and as marketers expand their international marketing efforts.

B.

Subcultures—Subcultures refer to smaller groups or segments in a society that possess similar beliefs, values, norms, and patterns of behavior that set them apart form the larger cultural mainstream. Subcultures may be based on age, geography, race, religion, racial, lifestyles, and ethnicity. Subcultures are important to marketers because of their size, growth, purchasing power, and distinct purchasing patterns.

1. Social Class—Social class refers to relatively homogenous divisions in a society into which people sharing similar lifestyles, values, norms, interests, and behaviors can be grouped.

Social class structures in the United States are generally based on occupational status, educational attainment, and source of income. Social class is important to marketers because consumers within various social strata often exhibit similar values, lifestyles, and buying behaviors, thus providing a natural basis for market segmentation.

C.

Reference Groups—A reference group is a group whose perspective or values are being used by an individual as the basis for his/her judgments, opinions, and actions. Marketers utilize reference group influences in developing advertisements by associating, or sometimes disassociating, products, services, or certain behaviors with certain types of groups.

1. Family decision making—Many purchase decisions are made by families rather than by individuals. Marketers must understand the various roles in the family decision-making

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

process such as initiator, information provider, influencer, decision maker, purchaser, and user or consumer. They must also determine who in the family is responsible for the various roles in the decision-making process so messages can be targeted to them. Messages must also be designed so as to appeal to the appropriate family member(s).

D.

Situational Determinants—Another type of external factor that promotional planners must consider is that of situational determinants on consumer behavior. Three types of situational determinants may have an effect—the specific usage situation (the circumstance in which the product will be used), the purchase situation (the environment operating at the time of purchase), and the communications situation (the conditions in which an advertising exposure occurs).

Professor Notes:

McGraw-Hill Connect ®: External Influences on Consumer Behavior Type of Activity: Click and Drag Activity Summary: In this activity, students will read a scenario about two European fashion store chains, SaGa and RaZa, that are planning to enter new markets. They will then match the various external (or environmental) influences on consumer behavior to the relevant situations in SaGa‘s promotional decisions, then match these external influences to examples found in RaZa‘s decisions.

Activity Learning Objective: 04-05 Explain the influence of external factors like culture and subculture influences.

Concept Review: The consumer does not make purchase decisions in isolation. A number of external factors have been identified that may influence consumer decision-making, such as culture, subcultures, social class, reference groups, and situational determinants.

Difficulty: Medium Bloom‘s: 2 Understand AACSB: Analytical Thinking

V.

ALTERNATIVE APPROACHES TO CONSUMER BEHAVIOR

In the past decade or so, a growing number of consumer researchers have examined this process from a different perspective, often referred to as alternative, interpretive, postmodern, or post-positivist.

Regardless of the name, alternative ways of attempting to understand consumer behavior assume a crossdisciplinary approach. Those who conduct research from this perspective believe that consumers‘ decision-making processes do not occur in isolation. Rather, they view consumer decision-making as influenced by cultural, linguistic, and historical factors. In examining the significance of communications,

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

they have adopted three perspectives: socio-cultural, structural, and semiotic. Many consumer researchers believe that cross-disciplinary research is better suited for the study of consumers because it takes into account their complexity and multidimensionality.

A.

New Methodologies—The studies of economic, neurosciences, and cultural anthropology have also had an impact on our understanding of consumer behaviors. New methodologies have led to new insights into consumer‘s decision-making processes. Research methods such as semiotic and structural analyses examine symbolic meanings of advertising and various factors of consumption.

B.

New Insights—Marketers now have a better understanding of how advertising campaigns become popular and help shape our culture. Some consumer researchers believe that cross-disciplinary research is better suited for the study of consumers because it takes into account their complexity and multidimensionality. When considered along with psychological research, these alternative approaches help us better understand the impact of communications and have particularly made us more aware of the influence advertising images have on society.

Professor Notes:

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Teaching Suggestions Because of the consumer emphasis dictated by the marketing concept, consumer behavior has increased in importance and has found its way into virtually every aspect of marketing. Of course, advertising and promotion are no exception. As a result, it is very important for the student to understand that advertising and promotion strategies are designed for the purpose of influencing customer behavior. Thus, it is important for promotional planners to have some understanding of consumer behavior including the way consumers relate to products and services, the goals and motives they seek to achieve and satisfy, and the process by which they make purchase decisions. You should emphasize that the success marketers have in influencing the purchase behavior of their target customers depends in large part on how well they understand their purchase patterns and behavior.

This is one of the longer chapters in the text as it covers an extensive amount of material. Some students may have covered some of this material in a basic marketing or consumer behavior class. However, this chapter will still be valuable to them since it discusses how this material is used in the development of advertising and promotional programs. You may wish to divide the topics into two lectures to reduce the possibility of information overload.

Answers to Discussion Questions 1. The chapter discusses the use of storytelling in research to better understand consumer behaviors.

Describe what storytelling entails. What are some of the advantages of storytelling over survey research? (LO 4-6) Market researchers aim to determine what make a consumer more or less apt to listen and respond to a branded message. One effective method for exploring this is storytelling. The use of storytelling by brands stems from the recognition that stories have always been effective in getting people to attend to a message, even as children listening to their parents‘ bedtime stories. While brands have long focused on communicating the most important information in a quick, 30-second commercial, brands now recognize that they can instead tell a story or series of stories in their messaging, providing them with much more branded content while also keeping them engaged with the message. This ability to communicate a branded story over time allows marketers to develop a deeper connection with the audience rather than focusing solely on one attribute or key takeaway.

Other advantages of branded storytelling include that the encourage consumers to engage with and remember a message by engaging different parts of the brain as consumers continue to engage with the story and place themselves in the story. Additionally, it facilitates a deeper connection between the consumer and brand as brands communicate continuously over time rather than once. Finally, storytelling allows brands to communicate a more involved explanation of the brand‘s attributes and benefits rather than having to focus solely on one attribute.

2. What is marketer-induced problem recognition? Give examples of how marketers have created demand for a product or service. (LO 4-2) As noted in the text, problem recognition occurs when the consumers‘ actual and ideal states are different. There are a variety of reasons this may occur: •

Out of stock—perhaps the simplest form of problem recognition occurs when one is out of a needed product—for example, being out of salt or sugar;

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

•

Dissatisfaction—the product or service no longer meets consumer‘s expectations. For example, the product or service provider doesn‘t perform to the degree wanted, prices increase, leading to lesser satisfaction, etc.

•

New needs or wants—sometimes changes in one‘s lifestyle—finding a new job, having a baby, etc. may lead to the creation of new needs or wants (buying a new suit, diapers, etc.)

•

Related products/purchases—purchasing a new computer will require purchasing additional items. For example, software, a laptop carrying bag, etc. Companies have become quite adept at cross-selling additional add-on purchases.

•

Marketer induced problem recognition—by changing styles or models, adding upgrades, etc., marketers can make one feel like they need to make a purchase. Apple is quite good at doing this as they keep modifying their products to make one want the ―latest and greatest.‖

•

New products—the introduction of a new product—for example, a new technology—will often lead to problem recognition. Products that do things better, faster or less expensively often lead to demand by consumers.

3. Explain the difference between a culture and a subculture. Provide examples of how both cultures and subcultures can affect consumer behaviors. (LO 4-5) A culture is a much broader group than a subculture. Culture signifies the complexity of learned meanings, values, norms, and customs shared by members of a society. A subculture is a smaller group found within a culture which exhibits beliefs, values, norms, and patterns of behavior that distinguish them from the broader cultural group. Subcultures can be based on age, other demographics, religious affiliations, or racial or ethnic differences. Both culture and subculture impact consumer behavior. Cultural norms and values can impact consumption behaviors. For example, in the United States, our culture is built around convenience and speed thus making fast food restaurants, particularly those with a drive-thru option, a popular dining choice for Americans.

However, there are certain subcultures within the United States such as younger, more healthconscious cohorts that are extremely health-conscious and refrain from frequenting fast food restaurants, despite their relevance in the overarching culture. This contrast between culture and subculture is certainly something that advertisers need to acknowledge and confront in order to adapt their messaging strategies appropriately.

4. Marketers have studied family decision making processes for decades. Why is it important to understand family decision making? How does family decision making impact purchase decisions?

(LO 4-1) Reference groups can be extremely influential in consumer purchase decision-making. Reference groups are people whose presumed perspectives or values are used by an individual as the basis for their judgments, opinions, and actions. Marketers often use reference group influences when developing advertising and promotional messages. Family members can serve as an extremely relevant reference group. Families are important to acknowledge and understand in terms of purchase decisions because they can serve as a reference group for individuals, but also because families often act as an individual buying unit. There are several roles that family members may take on in a product decision-making scenario including the initiator, information provider, influencer, decision maker, purchasing agent, and consumer. Advertisers must determine which family members assume each role so their messages can be targeted to those specific individuals. Understanding these roles is also important because these various target audiences will impact advertisers‘ media choices and strategies as well as the design of messages to reach these audiences.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

5. What are schedules of reinforcement? Why are they important for advertisers to understand? Give an example of the use of schedules of reinforcement in advertising. (LO 4-4) Reinforcement is the reward or favorable consequence associated with a participant/consumer giving a certain response. A behavior that is reinforced strengthens the bond between a stimulus and response. This can be easily seen in the context of advertising. If a consumer buys a product in response to an advertisement and has a positive outcome from the purchase, this reinforces the purchase behavior and makes it more likely that the consumer will buy the product again. The opposite is true if the outcome of buying the product is a negative experience.

Schedules of reinforcement is a method for advertisers to implement this concept of reinforcement in their advertising and promotional messaging. In a continuous reinforcement schedule, every response is rewarded. While learning the desired behavior happens quickly in this type of reinforcement schedule, the behavior is likely to cease when the reinforcement is taken away. One example of this in advertising would be the use of a promotional deal or coupon to introduce a new product. When new products are introduced, marketers often provide coupons which tempt consumers to try the product at a reduced cost than the norm. If advertisers gave out the coupon to consumers each time they bought the new product so they would continuously receive their next purchase of the product at a reduced cost, consumers would get used to receiving the product at the discounted price. If advertisers suddenly took the coupons away when the new product has been on the market for a while, the consumer may cease to buy the new product at the higher price without the coupon discount.

Advertisers also engage in partial or intermittent reinforcement schedules. This involves only rewarding some of consumer‘s responses, but not all. An example of this might be the use of promotional buy one get one free initiatives. While marketers certainly don‘t offer these promotional deals all of the time, offering it intermittently rewards those who purchase the products regularly and encourages purchase by those consumers who do not purchase as frequently. Another example of this would be reward or loyalty programs that offer consumers a free or discounted item after a certain number of purchases. Consumers do not receive the reward each time but receive it intermittently which encourages them to keep coming back in the hopes of receiving the next reward.

6. Describe the steps in the consumer decision-making process and provide an example as to what marketers might do at each step to influence the consumer. (LO 4-2) The first step in the consumer decision-making process is problem recognition. Problem recognition occurs when a consumer recognizes a need and becomes motivated to solve the problem and meet the need. Ultimately, a discrepancy exists between what the consumer wants a situation to be like and what the situation is actually like. An example of this would be if a consumer‘s cellphone bill kept unexpectedly increasing each month. The consumer would be unhappy with the higher bill and either seek reparations with their current cellphone provider or, more than likely, seek other providers who could provide the service at a lower cost. Messaging in this instance could come from a competing phone company and could focus on how they realize other phone companies charge consumers too much or tack on unexpected fees that continuously leave consumers unsure of their monthly charges and show how their brand has a flat rate where no added fees are ever added on without prior communication.

The second stage is the information search. After recognizing a problem, consumers begin a search for information needed to make their purchase decision. In the cellphone service example, consumers might turn to friends and family to discuss their current providers, search on the internet for the best providers in their area, go to a local store to look at phones and discuss plan options, or they might encounter messaging from competitors in any number of outlets (i.e. television, radio, social media, online, etc.). Marketers attempting to reach people at this stage would want to ensure that their messaging is everywhere that someone might go to look for new phone plan information. They could

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

promote themselves on family and friend‘s social media accounts, when they search online, or on their TVs; they could ensure that their stores came up first in online searchers for phone providers; and they could promote themselves on TV/radio ensuring that wherever this consumer goes to look for information on phone options, that their name comes up first and most often.

The third stage is alternative evaluation during which consumers evaluate and compare all of the options that they have identified would be capable of solving their problem. During this stage, marketers should seek to stand out among the alternatives the consumer is considering. This might involve offering a promotion for a certain phone or plan or having point-of-purchase materials in stores that encourage consumers to select their brand over others.

In the purchase decision stage, consumers stop looking for information and evaluating options and select a product/brand. At this stage, advertisers want to ensure that they actually get consumers to follow through and purchase their brand. Advertising for their brand might increase and the brand might encourage one of the salespeople at their local store to reach out to the consumer and ask if they answer any questions about the phone/plans available from this provider.

The final stage is the postpurchase evaluation. This stage involves consumers evaluating their purchase decision against their expectations for the product‘s performance. In the case of the cellphone service provider, the consumer might wait to get their first bill to ensure that no added or unexpected charges were seen and that the phone and plan itself were performing as well as, or outperforming, their old phone/provider. Advertisers could again encourage salesperson contact through phone or email at this point to ensure the customer was happy. They could also send the consumer a survey to gauge their happiness with the plan/product as well as the buying process.

7. The chapter discusses marketers' use of multiattribute attitude models. Explain what a multiattribute model is and how a marketer might use to reach the consumer. (LO 4-3) A multiattribute attitude model views an attitude toward an object, such as a product or brand, as possessing a number of attributes that provide the basis on which consumers form their attitudes.

According to this model, consumers have beliefs about specific brand attributes and attach different levels of importance to these attributes.

n

AB = ∑ Bi x Ei i=1 where AB = attitude toward a brand Bi = beliefs about the brand‘s performance on attribute i Ei = importance attached to attribute i n = number of attributes considered For example, a consumer may have beliefs (Bi) about various brands of toothpaste on certain attributes. One brand may be perceived as having fluoride and thus preventing cavities, tasting good, and helping control tartar buildup. Another brand may not be perceived as having these attributes, but consumers may believe it performs well on other attributes such as freshening breath and whitening teeth.

To predict attitudes, one must know how much importance consumers attach to each of these attributes (Ei). For example, parents purchasing toothpaste for their children may prefer a brand that

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

performs well on cavity prevention, a preference that leads to a more favorable attitude toward the first brand. Teenagers and young adults may prefer a brand that freshens breath.

Marketers can change attitudes by focusing on the beliefs and/or the importance of these beliefs.

8. Explain what is meant by cognitive dissonance. Why is this concept important to marketers? (LO 4-3) Cognitive dissonance is a feeling of psychological tension or post-purchase doubt that a consumer experiences after making a difficult purchase choice. Dissonance is more likely to occur in important decisions where the consumer must choose among close alternatives (especially if the unchosen alternative has unique or desirable features that the selected alternative does not have).

Consumers experiencing cognitive dissonance may use a number of strategies to attempt to reduce it.

They may seek out reassurance and opinions from others to confirm the wisdom of their purchase decision, lower their attitudes or opinions of the unchosen alternative, deny or distort any information that does not support the choice they made, or look for information that does support their choice. An important source of supportive information is advertising as consumers tend to be more attentive to advertising for the brand they have chosen. Thus, it may be important for companies to advertise to reinforce consumer decisions to purchase their brands.

9. In attempting to segment the market, marketers often will segment on the basis of subcultures.

Citing the chapter, explain the advantages and potential pitfalls of this strategy. (LO 4-5) Cultural norms and values offer direction and guidance to members of a society in all aspects of their lives, including their consumption behavior. It is becoming increasingly important to study the impact of cultures and subcultures on consumer behavior as marketers expand their international marketing efforts. Each country has certain cultural traditions, customs, and values that marketers must understand as they develop marketing programs. Each culture may consist of a number of subcultures (millennials, generations, etc.)

Marketers must also be aware of changes that may be occurring in a particular subculture and the implications of these changes for their advertising and promotional strategies and programs. The American culture continually goes through many changes that have direct implications for advertising. Marketing researchers monitor these changes and their impact on the ways companies market their products and services.

The three largest racial/ethnic subcultures in the U.S. are African Americans, Hispanics, and various Asian groups. These racial/ethnic subcultures are important to marketers because of their size, growth, purchasing power, and distinct purchasing patterns. Marketers develop specific marketing programs for various products and services for these target markets.

10. Figure 4–1 presents a basic model of consumer decision-making. Describe the model, and explain what happens at each step of the process. (LO 4-3) a. The first stage in the consumer decision-making process is problem recognition, which occurs when the consumer perceives a need and becomes motivated to solve the problem. The problem recognition stage initiates the subsequent decision processes. b. The second stage in the consumer decision-making process is information search. Once consumers perceive a problem or need that can be satisfied by the purchase of a product or service, they begin to search for information needed to make a purchase decision.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

c. After acquiring information during the information search stage of the decision process, the consumer moves to alternative evaluation. In this stage, the consumer compares the various brands or products and services he or she has identified as being capable of solving the consumption problem and satisfying the needs or motives that initiated the decision process. This typically results in an evoked set of brands to consider. d. As an outcome of the alternative evaluation stage, the consumer may engage in the purchase decision or predisposition to buy a certain brand. Purchase intentions are generally based on a matching of purchase motives with attributes or characteristics of brands under consideration.

Their formation involves many of the personal subprocesses discussed in this chapter, including motivation, perception, attitude formation, and integration.

e. The consumer decision-making process does not end with the purchase. After using the product or service, the consumer engages in postpurchase evaluation, comparing the level of performance with expectations and is either satisfied or dissatisfied (cognitive dissonance), storing this information for the future.

Additional Discussion Questions (not in text) 11. Neuroscience has been attacked by many as an invasion of privacy. Describe how marketers are using neuroscience research and discuss the pros and cons of this ethical argument. (LO 4-4) Using technologies originally developed for the medical sciences, marketers are now studying physiological responses to advertising. By scanning the brain and observing chemical activity or changes in the magnetic fields of the brain, these researchers are observing how consumers respond to ads or even make purchase decisions. These methodologies have been used to view consumers‘ responses to brand names, advertisements, and even spokespersons. In addition, the studies show promise for determining store layouts and assessing consumers‘ opinions of innovations. Given that these responses are involuntary responses, it is argued that the responses are more credible as they are uncontrollable. Thus, while one might respond to a survey with a socially desirable response or one that reflects a testing effect, involuntary responses are not subject to these biases.

The use of neuroscience—a brain scan imaging technique that maps physiological reactions within the mind—has had the majority of its applications in the medical field. Now, marketers have discovered that there are research applications in consumer behavior as well. By mapping viewers‘ physiological reactions to commercials and brands, scientists can help marketers better understand consumers‘ behaviors and assist them in the development of more effective marketing strategies.

For marketers, the use of neuroscience allows them to more effectively design ads, recognize the impact that brands have on consumers. Advertisers claim that this will allow them to create more effective advertising, break through the clutter of bland commercials, and ultimately have a positive effect on users‘ businesses as well as benefiting consumers by giving them what they want—not what advertisers think they want. Boring and tedious advertising, for example, will be reduced or eliminated, based on more effective research than the traditional methods previously employed.

Traditional methods, neuroscience using marketers argue, are obsolete and do not directly benefit the advertiser or the consumer. Just like everything else, they say, ―you can‘t stop progress.‖ Opponents of the use of neurosciences have a different perspective. Calling the technique ―Orwellian,‖ they contend that probing our minds is an unfair invasion of privacy. While some argue that the technique does not work and that the results are being blown out of proportion, others are concerned that they work too well. If so, there is a potential that advertising could become too

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

effective, and that consumers could be manipulated—a similar argument to those provided by opponents of subliminal advertising usage. At particular risk, they say, are unsuspecting children, though increased consumption of alcohol, cigarettes, and gambling may also result. They see the research as contributing to the social ills of societies, through the manipulation of effective marketing strategies.

12. Why is understanding consumer behavior of such importance to marketers? Give examples of how marketers apply their understanding of consumer behavior to their marketing strategies.

(LO 4-1) When marketers moved from a sales orientation to a marketing orientation, it became necessary to have a more in-depth understanding of the consumer. Rather that developing products and then trying to push them onto consumers, marketers shifted their focus more to understanding consumers‘ needs and wants and developing products and services to satisfy them.

As the field of consumer behavior has expanded, marketers have increased their efforts by including different forms of psychology (social, physiological, etc.) into their studies as well as sociology, cultural anthropology and geography, among others. Simply put, the more we can understand consumers, the better we can successfully develop products and services to better meet their needs and wants.

An excellent example of this lies in the fact that many of today‘s consumers are ―money rich and time poor.‖ That means that they have disposable income, but less time as a result of their busy lifestyles, changing family structures, etc. By understanding this, marketers have been able to better develop products and services that meet the new needs of consumers, and a profit to them.

13. Recently there has been a great deal of attention paid to environmental issues resulting in a number of companies embarking on ―green‖ campaigns. Discuss some of the reasons as to why companies are developing such campaigns. Do you think these campaigns will change consumers’ attitudes toward the environment and/or these companies? (LO 4-5) It seems these days that everyone is trying to convince the consumer that they are green. From the oil companies to beverage companies, green is in. There is even a green cable TV network devoted to showing interested parties how to be green.

Of course a large part of the green movement comes from the realization that the world must begin to take care of the environment. Global warming is no longer a potential, it is reality. This, of course, will cause many consumers to consider their actions and their options. For many, green has become a cause, not just a convenience. More people now recycle. More think about the impact their consuming behaviors have on the market (see the bottled water example in the chapter), and many more try to conserve. Given the choice between a product that is good or bad for the environment, many more are taking this into consideration in their purchase decisions.

Companies have joined the green crusade as well—some seeing it as a marketing opportunity, others a necessity, and still others because they are genuinely concerned. Companies now realize it is not good to be perceived as unfriendly to the environment, while others see an opportunity to position themselves as such to gain a competitive edge. The degree to which they are actually ―green‖ varies as well.

Clearly, the appearance of being green will have an impact on consumers‘ attitudes. For those who want the companies to be environmentally conscious, such actions will reinforce their positive attitudes toward these companies. At the same time, not being concerned will reflect negatively on

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

those companies. While having green attitudes does not always translate into buying green, one can only expect that it will certainly have an impact, particularly given a choice of options.

14. The text discusses the use of cultural anthropology to understand consumer behaviors. Why is it necessary for marketers to use alternative approaches to consumer behavior? (LO 4-6) Once marketers recognized the necessity of understanding consumers‘ behaviors and the fact that not all decisions are based on rational economic bases, they turned to psychology to gain insights. The early days of research in consumer behavior, therefore, was dominated by psychological research. As consumer behavior matured, those in the discipline recognized the fact that external factors such as social class, family, cultural, and subcultural factors also influenced the purchase decision process.

Research from different areas of study such as sociology and anthropology provided valuable insights. The groundbreaking research of a French medical anthropologist, G. Clotaire Rapaille, who employed a research methodology known as archetype research to assist Chrysler (in the design of the PT Cruiser) and other clients demonstrated the contribution value and applicability of these other areas of research.

Cultural anthropology, which involves the observation of people in their natural environments, has also been proven to be useful for understanding consumer behaviors. While much of the research conducted in psychology requires a controlled environment for conducting experiments and/or observing consumer behaviors, ethnography—a methodology employed by cultural anthropologists— watches the behaviors of individuals and groups as they ―act normal‖ in their day to day environments. As a result, some of the testing effects and criticisms of artificial environments are eliminated. Further, researchers know that situational and environmental factors may play an important role on consumer decision making, and this area of research attempts to take into account these factors.

As consumer behavior studies continue to advance, new disciplines, theories and methodologies will offer valuable insights into the reasons why consumers purchase, how they do so, and the impact of their purchases. Cultural anthropology is just one more contributor to this process.

IMC Exercise Have the class go to YouTube and find commercials that reflect various concepts of consumer behavior discussed in the text such as psychological theories, and/or those that depict stages of consumer decision making. They should explain how the ads/commercials they have selected relate to a specific consumer behavior concept or theory and/or how the ad is designed to appeal to the consumer.

CHAPTER 5 THE COMMUNICATION PROCESS Chapter Overview The purpose of this chapter is to examine the communication process by introducing the student to the fundamentals of communication and examining various models and perspectives of how consumers respond to advertising messages. A basic model of communication is presented which introduces the

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

controllable elements of the communications process—source, message, channel, and receiver. Source, message, and channel factors are discussed in Chapter 6 and the remainder of this chapter is devoted to examining the target audience or receiver and the process by which consumers respond to advertising and other promotional messages. The growing importance of word-of-mouth influence as well as how it has led to the increased use of viral marketing techniques are covered in the chapter. The response process is analyzed in terms of traditional response hierarchy models as well as alternative response models.

Attention is given to comparing alternative response models such as the standard learning versus low involvement models. The Social Consumer Decision Journey is used as a framework to discuss how the environment in which consumers evaluate brands and make purchase decisions has changed as digital and social media become more pervasive. The chapter also examines the cognitive response approach and elaboration likelihood model to show how more detailed analyses can be made of receivers‘ cognitive processing of marketing communications.

Learning Objectives 1.

Describe the communication process and its role in IMC.

2.

Describe the basic model of the communication process.

3.

Discuss the role of word-of-mouth influence and viral marketing.

4.

Analyze receivers' responses to marketing communications and their implications for promotional planning and strategy.

5.

Describe the influence of social media on the consumer decision process.

6.

Discuss consumers' cognitive processing of marketing communications.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Chapter and Lecture Outline I.

INTRODUCTION

A commonality shared by all elements of the promotional mix is that their function is to communicate.

Thus, it is important that advertising and promotional planners have an understanding of the communication process. This chapter reviews the fundamentals of communication and examines various perspectives regarding how consumers respond to promotional messages.

II.

THE NATURE OF COMMUNICATIONS

Communication has been variously defined as the ―passing of information,‖ the ―exchange of ideas,‖ or the ―process of establishing a commonness or oneness of thought between a sender and a receiver.‖ For communication to occur, there must be some common thinking or ground between the two parties and a passing of information. The communications process is often very complex with success depends on many factors such as the nature of the message, audience interpretation, and the environment in which it is received along with the receiver‘s perception of the source and medium. The challenge of developing effective marketing communications becomes particularly evident when companies are developing advertising and promotional messages for foreign markets or for certain ethnic markets. Examples of communication problems that have been encountered by marketers who are promoting their products and services in international markets are discussed in-depth in Chapter 19.

Professor Notes:

III.

BASIC MODEL OF COMMUNICATION

Over the years, a basic model of communications has evolved that represents the various elements of the communications process. This model is shown as Figure 5-1 in the text. The elements of the model include: A.

Source Encoding—The sender or source of a communication is the person or organization that has information to share with another person or group. It should be noted that the source could be an individual (e.g., salesperson or hired spokesperson) or a nonpersonal entity such as the corporation or organization itself. The receivers‘ perception of the source influences the manner in which the communication is received, interpreted, and responded to.

Encoding is the process of putting together thoughts, ideas, and information into a symbolic form to communicate a message. The sender‘s goal is to encode the message in such a manner so as to ensure that it will be understood by the receiver. This involves using words, signs, or symbols familiar to the target. Marketers should pay special attention to symbols associated with their company/brand as these become a shorthand way for consumers to identify brands.

B.

Message—The encoding process leads to the development of a message that contains the information or meaning the source or sender hopes to convey. Messages can take a variety of forms such as verbal or nonverbal, oral or written, and may include symbolic forms or signs. The message must be put into a transmittable form that is appropriate for the channel of communication being used. Marketers are the ones that must make decisions about the content,

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

structure, and design of these messages. Advertising messages range from simply written words or copy that will be read or heard as a radio message to the expensive production of elaborate television commercials with a great deal of visual impact and imagery.

C.

Channel—The channel is the method or medium by which the communication travels from source or sender to receiver. At the broadest level, channels of communication exist as two types: •

Nonpersonal channels are those that carry a message without involving interpersonal contact between sender and receiver. These channels are often referred to as the mass media or mass communications, as messages transmitted through them are sent to many individuals at one time. The two major categories of nonpersonal channels are print and broadcast media.

•

Personal channels involve direct interpersonal contact with target individuals or groups. For example, a salesperson serves as a personal channel of communication when delivering a sales presentation. Members of one‘s social networks (friends, family, neighbors, coworkers, etc.) also serve as personal channels of communication. These groups are often an important source of word-of-mouth (WOM) influence, which can be a very powerful form of communication and has been used by marketers for many years. There are many forms that word-of-mouth-influence takes such as electronic word-of-mouth, online reviews, or engineered word-of-mouth.

Marketers have become much more sophisticated, organized, and systematic in the ways they go about encouraging speak favorably about their company, brand, organization, or issue and to recommend it to their social network. Today, many marketers are using engineered WOM through digital and social channels to bring attention to or generate discussion about their company or brands. Buzz marketing is the term used to describe WOM communication about a company, its products/services, and/or brands as well as its advertising messages that is often encouraged by a marketer.

1. Viral marketing—In the digital age, more traditional and buzz marketing techniques have been replaced by more systematic and organized efforts to encourage consumers to speak favorably about a company or brand and recommend it to others. Viral marketing refers to the act of propagating marketing-relevant messages through the help and cooperation of individual consumers. Many marketers, along with their advertising, PR, and/or digital agencies use a variety of tools and techniques to generate viral buzz about their brands, many of which involve the use of online communities and social media such as Facebook, Twitter, Instagram, and YouTube. The structure of networks through which a message spreads and the consumers‘ position in the social network can influence diffusion of a viral message. Seeding is another important aspect of viral marketing and involves identifying and choosing an initial group of consumers who will be used to start the diffusion or spreading of a message.

2. Integrating word-of-mouth with IMC—Viral marketing techniques should be integrated with the IMC program as research by the Keller Fay Group has shown that nearly 90 percent of conversations about products, services, and brands take place off-line and face-to-face interactions account for the vast majority of word-of-mouth communications. The role of advertising in WOM is very important, as Keller Fay has found that a quarter of all consumer conversations about a brand involve discussions about advertising. Additionally, Keller Fay found that word-of-mouth conversations influenced by advertising are significantly more likely to involve recommendations to buy or try a brand when compared to other WOMinduced discussions about brands. Consumers also ascribe high credibility to information they receive from others. Most importantly, a quarter of all consumers conversations about brands are said to involve discussions about advertising.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Concern has been expressed over the use of buzz and viral marketing techniques as they become more prevalent. The Word of Mouth Marketing Association was formed in 2004 to promote and improve the use of word-of-mouth marketing and protect consumers and the industry by providing ethical guidelines for its use.

With the growth of social media and consumers‘ disinterest in more traditional forms of media advertising, marketers will likely attempt to seek new ways to develop branded messages that consumers will share with one another.

D.

Receiver/Decoding—The receiver is the person(s) with whom the sender shares thoughts or information. Receivers are generally viewed as the consumers in the target audience for the firm‘s marketing and promotional program. Decoding is the process of transforming and interpreting the sender‘s message back into thought and is heavily influenced by the receiver‘s frame of reference or field of experience, which refers to the experiences, perceptions, attitudes, and values he or she brings to the communication situation. Effective communication is more likely when common ground or shared meaning or understanding exists or has been established between the sender and receiver. Exhibit 5-6 shows an advertisement that utilizes the concept of common ground to communicate an important environmental message. Instructors should discuss the difficulty often found in establishing common ground in advertisements as those who serve as advertising practitioners are often very different than those in the mass market they are attempting to reach.

E.

Noise—Throughout the communications process the message is subject to noise, which refers to factors that can distort or interfere with adequate reception or comprehension. Noise can occur during the encoding, transmission, or decoding of a message. Noise can also occur because of a lack of common ground or understanding between the sender and receiver. Over the past decade, a new type of noise has become prevalent in the television-viewing environment as many viewers now multitask on their laptops, tablets, and smartphones while watching TV. Recent research revealed that nearly half of marketing executives surveyed felt that consumers being distracted by a second screen was one of the top factors limiting the effectiveness of the TV advertising, noting that it has become extremely difficult to capture consumers‘ attention solely through television advertising. This is why more and more marketers are devoting more of their budgets to digital and social media.

F.

Response/Feedback—Response refers to the reaction the receiver has after seeing, hearing and/or reading the message. These responses can range from nonobservable actions such as storing information in memory to taking immediate actions such as ordering a product seen in a direct response ad. Feedback is the part of the receiver‘s response that is communicated back to the sender and takes a variety of form and is of particular interest to marketers. Feedback provides the sender with a way of monitoring how the message is being decoded and received by the target audience.

IV.

ANALYZING THE RECEIVER

To communicate effectively, marketers must have an understanding of who their target audience is and how they need to be communicated with to influence their decision-making process. The relevant audience as well as the process consumers go through in responding to a promotional message must be

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

identified and understood. Understanding the target audience and their response process serves as an important foundation for evaluating decisions regarding the controllable communication variables (source, message, and channel) that are covered in Chapter 6.

A.

Identifying the Target Audience—The marketing communications process begins with the identification of the audience that will be the focus of the firm‘s advertising and promotional efforts. The target audience can be viewed as consisting of: •

Individuals—The target audience for some products and services can be viewed as consisting of individuals for whom communications must be specifically tailored. Life insurance, financial services, and real estate are often promoted through individualized sales presentations.

•

Groups—A second level of audience aggregation is the group. Organizational purchasing often involves buying centers or committees and requires communication with multiple parties. Decision making in the consumer market can include a group when various family members become involved in the purchase process.

•

Market segments—Marketers look for customers who have similar needs and wants and thus represent market segments that can be reached via the same basic communication strategy.

Very small, well-defined groups of customers are often referred to as market niches and can usually be reached through highly targeted media such as direct mail.

•

Mass markets—The situation facing most marketers is that of communicating with large numbers of consumers or mass audiences through one-way communication via the mass media.

McGraw-Hill Connect ®: The Role of Word-of-Mouth Type of Activity: Matching Activity Summary: Students are provided with a list of channels of communication (mass media, personal channels, seeding, buzz marketing, and viral marketing). They are then tasked with matching these channels of communication to the most appropriate definition of this type of communication channel.

Activity Learning Objective: 05-03 Discuss the role of word-of-mouth influence and viral marketing.

Concept Review: Mass media is a nonpersonal form of communication that reaches many members of the audience.

Seeding involves marketers actively identifying the initial group of consumers who will be used to start the diffusion or spreading of a message. Viral marketing is communication that originates from the brand or firm that employs the online communities and social networks that exist on media such as Facebook,

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Twitter, or Snapchat. Buzz marketing is consumer-generated personal communication that is usually organized and instigated by the brand, company, or organization. Finally, personal channels of communication include direct exchanges between individuals, such as salespeople and consumers or consumer to consumer.

Difficulty: 2 Medium Bloom‘s: Analyze AACSB: Analytical Thinking

V.

THE RESPONSE PROCESS

An important aspect of developing effective communication involves having an understanding of the response process the receiver may go through and how the promotional efforts of the marketer might influence this process. This section begins by covering three traditional response hierarchy models and then discussing alternative models of the response process.

A.

Traditional Response Hierarchy Models—Three of the best-known response hierarchy models are discussed in this section, giving attention to their origin and implications. The models are: •

AIDA model—Attention, interest, desire, and action.

•

Innovation adoption model—Awareness, interest, evaluation, trial, and adoption.

•

Hierarchy-of-Effects Model—Awareness, knowledge, liking, preference, conviction, and purchase Figure 5-5 in the text shows the best -known response hierarchies, the hierarchy-ofeffects model.

McGraw-Hill Connect ®: Traditional Response Hierarchy Models Type of Activity: Click and Drag Activity Summary: PlanRight is a financial services company planning to launch its own app. The company has hired a promotions firm to help make strategic promotional decisions. The firm decides to recruit a group of consumers in PlanRight's target market and expose them to a series of IMC elements. Students will match the various stages in two traditional response hierarchy models—the AIDA model and the Hierarchy of Effects Model—with the responses of target consumers to the IMC mix.

Activity Learning Objective: 05-04 Analyze receivers' responses to marketing communications and their implications for promotional planning and strategy.

Concept Review:

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Consumers may pass through various stages of response, from a state of not being aware of a company or product to actual purchase behavior. Traditional response hierarchy models follow a hierarchy of moving from the cognitive stage, to the affective stage, and then to the behavioral stage.

Difficulty: 2 Medium Bloom‘s: Understand AACSB: Analytical Thinking

B.

Alternative Response Hierarchies—The more traditional responses models assume a cognitive → affective → behavioral sequence. In recent years, this sequence had been called into question and several other configurations of the response hierarchy have been theorized. The two discussed in this text include the standard learning model and low-involvement models.

1. The standard learning hierarchy—In many purchase situations, consumers go through the response process depicted by traditional communication models, referred to as the standard learning model, which consists of a learn, feel, do sequence. In this sequence, consumers acquire information and knowledge or learn about various brands. This information and knowledge forms the basis for developing affect or feelings that guide what a consumer will do. The consumer is thus viewed as an active participant in the communication process, gathering information through active learning. This type of process is likely when the consumer is highly involved in the purchase process and when there is much differentiation between competing brands.

2. The low-involvement hierarchy—In the low-involvement hierarchy, the receiver is viewed as passing from cognition, to behavior, to attitude change. This type of process is likely when the consumer‘s involvement in the purchase decision is low, there are few differences among brand alternatives, and mass media advertising is important. In this low-involvement hierarchy, consumers engage in passive learning and random information catching rather than active information-seeking. The chapter provides examples of advertisements utilizing a more standard learning model approach as well as a low-involvement hierarchy approach.

C.

Implications of the Response Process Models—The hierarchy models are useful to promotional planners from several perspectives. They delineate the series of steps or stages potential purchasers often must be taken through to move them from a state of no or little awareness to the point where they are ready to purchase. The hierarchy models can also be useful as ―intermediate‖ measures of communication effectiveness. Knowing where potential buyers are with respect to the various stages of the hierarchy helps the marketers know the specific communication task that must be performed. The text discusses how marketers of high-tech products are developing profiles of digital adopters who are among the first to use various digital products and services.

All four of these models view the response process as consisting of movement through a sequence of stages and assume a similar ordering whereby cognitive development precedes affective reaction, which in turn precedes behavior. While this is a logical progression that may be accurate in many situations, the response sequence may not always operate this way. Thus, attention needs to be given to alternative orderings of the response hierarchy.

D.

The Social Consumer Decision Journey—The model shown in Figure 5-6 has five basic stages: consider, evaluate, buy, experience, and enjoy-advocate-bond. This framework recognizes that consumers connect with large numbers of brands through digital and social media channels,

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

which are a unique component of the consumer decision journey as they are the only form of marketing that can touch and influence consumers at each and every stage. Marketers often allocate much of their IMC budget to influencing consumers at the consider and buy stages.

However, consideration should also be given to influencing them during the evaluate, experience, and enjoy-advocate-bond stages, as the most important incentive to buy or repurchase may be another person‘s advocacy or recommendation or the brand‘s follow-up with the consumer after purchase. It is important for marketers to focus on the portion of their IMC budget allocated to paid or “working” media as well as owned media that a brand controls (websites, Facebook, and Twitter pages) and earned media generated through various forms of social media or WOM. A major study by the Advertising Research Foundation (ARF) examined how digital and social media are used in the purchase decision process and how consumers turn to them to help manage this process. One of the conclusions of this study was that consumers are ―always on‖ as they are constantly considering and evaluating the various providers of products and services. Another important conclusion from this study, as well as research conducted by McKinsey & Company‘s Global Digital Marketing Strategy practice group, is that consumers do not make purchase decisions in the linear manner depicted by the various traditional hierarchy of effects and purchase funnel models. Researchers at McKinsey have proposed a ―consumer decision journey‖ as a framework for understanding how consumers interact with companies and brands during the purchase decision process.

Professor Notes:

McGraw-Hill Connect ®: The Communication Model Type of Activity: Matching Activity Summary: This activity asks students to place the elements of the communication model in the order in which the initial message might flow from the first element to the last (from sender to receiver through encoding, channel, and decoding).

Activity Learning Objective: 05-02 Describe the basic model of the communication process.

Concept Review: The sender or source is the person or organization with information to share with another person. The source determines the message that will be delivered to the receiver and encodes the message in a way that will be understood by the receiver. The message contains the information the source hopes to convey to the receiver and the channel is the method by which the communication travels from sender to receiver.

The receiver is the person with whom the sender is sharing thoughts or information. The receiver decodes the sender‘s message back into thought.

Difficulty: 2 Medium Bloom‘s: Apply

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

AACSB: Analytical Thinking

VI.

COGNITIVE PROCESSING OF COMMUNICATIONS

For many years, the hierarchical response models were primary focus of approaches to studying receivers‘ responses to marketing communications. However, the inability of these approaches to explain what might be causing or determining these reactions to the message has led to an interest in understanding the nature of cognitive processing of advertising and other persuasive communications.

Cognitive processing concerns how external information (such as an advertising message) is transformed into meanings or patterns of thought and how these meanings are combined to form judgments. Several approaches and models have been developed to examine the nature of consumers‘ cognitive processing of advertising messages.

A.

The Cognitive Response Approach—A commonly used method for examining consumers cognitive processing of advertising messages is through the assessment of their cognitive responses or thoughts that occur to them while reading, viewing, and/or hearing the communication. The focus of this approach, which is commonly used by academic researchers as well as practitioners, is to determine the types of thought evoked by an advertising message and how these responses relate to traditional ―outcome‖ measures such as attitude toward the ad, brand attitudes, and purchase intention. The model shown in Figure 5-7 depicts the three basic categories of cognitive responses identified by researchers and their relationship to attitude and intention constructs. These include: 1. Product/message thoughts—These are thoughts directed at the product or service and/or the claims being made in the communication. Attention has focused on two types of responses: counterarguments and support arguments. Counterarguments are thoughts recipients have that are opposed to the position taken in the message. Support arguments are thoughts that affirm the claim(s) made in the message.

2. Source-oriented thoughts—These are thoughts directed at the source of the communication.

Source derogations are one of the most important types of responses in this category and refer to negative thoughts about the spokesperson or organization making the claims.

Conversely, receivers who react favorably to the source generate favorable thoughts, or source bolsters.

3. Ad execution thoughts—These are thoughts individuals have toward the ad itself. These thoughts can be either positive or negative. Ad execution-related thoughts may include reactions to ad execution factors such as the creativity of the ad, the quality of the visual effects, colors, and voice tones and are important because they are related to attitude toward the ad, which represents the receivers‘ feelings of favorability or unfavorability toward the ad. A→ ad is an important construct as the consumers‘ affective reactions to a message are an important determinant of advertising effectiveness.

B.

The Elaboration Likelihood Model—The elaboration likelihood model (ELM), developed by Cacioppo and Petty, has become a very popular way of analyzing differences in the way consumers process and respond to persuasive messages. The ELM is presented in Figure 5-8 of the text. According to the ELM, there are two basic processes or routes to persuasion, which are based on motivation and ability to process the message.

Under the central route to persuasion, the receiver is viewed as a very active and involved participant in the communications process whose ability and motivation to attend, comprehend

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

and evaluate a message are very high. Under the peripheral route to persuasion, the receiver is viewed as lacking motivation or ability to process information and is not likely to engage in detailed cognitive processing. The receiver may use ―peripheral cues‖ such as focusing on the message source or executional elements of the ad rather than message content. The Pantene shampoo ad in Exhibit 5-12 featuring singer Selena Gomez contains several peripheral cues such as an attractive and relevant celebrity endorses as well as imagery that is consistent with the brand positioning.

1. Implications of the ELM—The ELM has important implications for marketing, particularly with respect to involvement. Messages should vary based upon the involvement level of consumers. While the ELM is one of the most frequently cited theories of how advertising impacts consumers, the model has been subject to criticism including that the replication of its use has been mixed in prior research and some have said that the development and proliferation of digital and social media call the theory‘s validity to today‘s advertising climate into question.

Professor Notes:

McGraw-Hill Connect ®: ELM: Plant-Based Burgers Type of Activity: Case Analysis Activity Summary: Students are provided with a case regarding plant-based burgers and are asked to consider how consumers work through the elaboration likelihood model when it comes to making decisions about plant-based burgers. They are tasked with answer questions relating to consumer‘s decisions about plant-based burgers through the ELM. Activity Learning Objectives: 05-05 Describe the influence of social media on the consumer decision process.

05-06 Discuss consumers‘ cognitive processing of marketing communications.

Concept Review: The ELM primarily explains the two different ways of processing stimuli and the possible outcomes on the buyer‘s attitude change. The two different routes to persuasion are the central route and the peripheral route. Under the central route, persuasion will likely result from logical, cognitive thinking and clear scrutiny of content, features, and attributes. This central route depends on a high level of message elaboration resulting in attitude change that is usually enduring, resistant to attitude change and, consequently, is fairly predictive of behavior. The second path of the ELM is the peripheral route by which persuasion results from the consumer‘s association with positive or negative cues in the stimuli.

The consumer usually makes a simple inference about the merits of the advocated position.

Difficulty: 2 Medium Bloom‘s: Apply

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

AACSB: Analytical Thinking

VII.

SUMMARIZING THE RESPONSE PROCESS AND THE EFFECTS OF ADVERTISING

Professors Demetrios Vakratsas and Tim Ambler reviewed more than 250 journal articles and books to better understand how advertising works and affects consumers. They concluded that there is little support for the concept of a hierarchy of effects in the sense of a temporal sequence. They note that in trying to understand the response process and the way it works there are three critical intermediate effects between advertising and purchase including cognition, affect, and experience. They also conclude that individual responses to advertising are mediated or filtered by factors such as motivation and ability to process information, which can radically alter or change the individual‘s response to advertising. They suggest that the effects of advertising should be evaluated using these three dimensions with some intermediate variables being more important than others. This suggests that marketers should focus on knowledge, liking and trial or usage as critical variables that advertising may affect. Attention should be given to how advertising and other forms of promotion may affect these variables in various product market situations.

While a number of issues regarding hierarchy of effects models have been noted, they are still of value to advertising practice and research as they provide insight into whether advertising strategies need to focus on impacting cognition, affect and/or behavior. It has also been noted that consideration should be given to how all of the various IMC tools, not just advertising, influence the response hierarchy. The chapter concludes with a discussion over the debate over the value of hierarchical response models of advertising effects. While a number of issues and concerns over the use of hierarchy of effects models have been noted, many feel that they are still of value to advertising practice and research. They provide insight into whether advertising strategies need to focus on influencing cognition, affect, and/or behavior. It is important to note that marketing communications programs include more than just media advertising and consideration needs to be given to how other components of the IMC program such as sales promotion activities, publicity, online, and direct marketing activities, and event sponsorships can move consumer through the response hierarchy.

Professor Notes:

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Teaching Suggestions This chapter is designed to introduce the student to the fundamentals of communication and is the first of two chapters devoted to this topic. The opening vignette to the chapter discusses the explosion of the use of influencer marketing, which presents a good opportunity for instructors to discuss the potential new ways that consumers can respond to marketing communications with the new communication outlets such as influencers. This is the most theoretical chapter in the text. However, we feel this material is very important as it presents the basic elements of communication and provides a detailed examination of the process by which consumers respond to marketing communications. The material also provides the student with a foundation that is important for subsequent chapters of the text. For example, the discussion of controllable elements of the communications process in Chapter 6 (source, message, and channel factors) builds on this chapter. We feel it is very important to stress to students that communication is the common goal of all promotional mix elements. They must have a solid foundation in this area if they are to evaluate other areas of advertising and promotion such as creative strategy, media strategy and alternatives and effectiveness measurement.

We have found that it is helpful to emphasize to students that decisions regarding the controllable elements of the communication program, such as selecting a source, developing a message strategy and appeal, and selecting advertising media, cannot be made unless the promotional planner has some insight into how members of the target audience will respond to these factors. Students need to have some understanding of the traditional hierarchical models including their implications and limitations. It is also important to point out the limitations of the traditional cognitive → affective → behavioral sequence assumed by these models and to cover the alternative response hierarchies. After reviewing the alternative models of the response process, it should be apparent to the student that the traditional standard learning hierarchy may not be appropriate in many communication situations. From a promotional planning perspective, it is important that the marketer be able to examine the communications situation and determine what type of response hierarchy is most likely to occur.

Of particular importance is the low-involvement hierarchy as a great deal of attention has been given to the involvement issue. It is important to show how the concept of alternative response hierarchies, involvement and rational versus emotional processing can be combined for advertising strategy purposes.

The article by Vakratsas and Ambler ―How Advertising Works: What Do We Really Know?‖ (Journal of Marketing, January 1999) provides an excellent summary of response hierarchy models. This article might be assigned to a graduate level class or be useful in preparing a lecture on the response process.

Interesting articles regarding the hierarchy of effects might also be reviewed. These include an article by William M. Weilbacher, ―Point of View: Does Advertising Cause a ―Hierarchy of Effects‖ (Journal of Advertising Research, November/December 2001, pp. 19–26) and a reply by Thomas E. Barry, ―In Defense of the Hierarchy of Effects: A Rejoinder to Weilbacher‖ (Journal of Advertising Research, (May/June 2002, pp. 44–47).

Note that the discussion of the Social Consumer Decision Journey in this edition can be used to discuss how social media influences the consumer decision process. Instructors may find it helpful to read the article by Todd Powers et. al that summarizes the results from the ARF study (―Digital and Social Media in the Purchase Decision Process,‖ Journal of Advertising Research, December 2012, pp. 470–489) as well as the article by David Court and his associates (―The Consumer Decision Journey‖ McKinsey Quarterly, June 2009).

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Answers to Discussion Questions 1. Discuss the reasons why more marketers are using influencers as part of their integrated marketing communications strategy. Why might a marketer choose to use mirco-influencers rather than a popular macro-influencer such as a popular celebrity? (LO 5-3) Advertisers have traditionally utilized famous spokespersons to aid in reaching consumers and selling products. Today, marketers are utilizing them in different ways. Instead of paying them to appear in a TV spot or in print ads, marketers are now using these influencers to post messages about their brand on social media. Today, nearly 90 percent of marketers utilize at least one viral or influencer marketing campaign each year, and many plan to increase their budgets for influencers in coming years. Marketers are now using influencers because it has become increasingly difficult to reach consumers through traditional media as well as online. With an increase in the number of consumers using ad blockers, marketers are having to look to other online spaces such as social media and influencers to reach consumers. Influencers provide marketers with targeted exposure to consumers who are likely already interested and ready to pay attention. Today, many marketers are turning their attention away from personalities with millions of followers to micro-influencers with fewer followers (anywhere from 1,000 to 100,000). Marketers choose to utilize these micro-influencers because they often have higher engagement rates and their content often performs better than that of macro-influencers. Micro-influencers also have a more niche audience than the wide fan base of macro-influencers. Additionally, because they have fewer followers, they are able to engage with their consumers more often and thusly tend to appear more trustworthy, authentic, and relatable.

Finally, marketers choose to utilize micro-influencers because they are much more affordable than macro-influencers.

2. Discuss the importance of logos. Why have logos for brands such as Nike, Apple, McDonald’s, and Coca-Cola become so widely recognized and memorable? (LO 5-1, 5-2) The communication process begins when the source (a company/organization/brand) selects words, symbols, and pictures to represent the message that is to be delivered to the receiver. This encoding process involves putting thoughts, ideas, or information into symbolic form. The sender‘s goal is to encode the message in an understandable way for the receiver. This involves using words, signs, and symbols (such as logos) that are familiar to the target audience. Logos from Nike, Apple, McDonald‘s, and Coca-Cola are highly recognizable, making it much more likely that the consumer will remember the message and attend to it. Marketers have to pay particularly close attention to the symbols that are associated with their company and brand, including their logos. Logos have become a short-hand way for consumers to identify brands. Logos can be used by brands to communicate certain things about the brand and marketers sometimes choose to change logos in order to send a different message to consumers about the brand or organization.

3. Discuss the role of logos for digital technology companies such as Uber, Amazon, Airbnb, and others. Why is the design of a logo for these companies so important? (LO 5-1, 5-2) Marketers, particularly those working for digital technology companies, have to think about logos in different ways today. Services such as Facebook, Snapchat, Uber, or Amazon are primarily accessed through apps on consumer‘s smartphones. Thus, these companies have become interaction-designcentric in developing their logos and other visual symbols that represent the brand. The logo on a digital device must be designed for, and easy to recognize, on a digital device. The use of a logo in the context of advertising messages is what makes it recognizable and meaningful to consumers.

Digital and Social Media Perspective 5-1 provides examples from Uber and Mastercard on the importance of the design and redesign of logos for digital spaces.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

4. Discuss the four types of word-of-mouth communication and how they are used by marketers.

(LO 5-3) There are four different forms of word-of-mouth communication in marketing that are discussed in this chapter: WOM conversations, electronic word-of-mouth, online reviews, and engineered WOM. WOM conversations involved an interactive dialogue between two or more consumers about a marketing-relevant topic without an apparent motive for either party. Marketers engage in WOM conversations in social media platforms such as when they address consumer questions or comments about their product or brand. Electronic word-of-mouth is the transmission of marketing-relevant information using a digital device like a computer or smartphone. An example of this would be marketers utilizing mobile specific advertisements to reach consumers. Online reviews include consumers‘ evaluations of a marketplace offering that is submitted in an online platform that is purposefully designed to aggregate these consumer evaluations. Marketers use online reviews to gauge consumer satisfaction with the product/brand and to address consumer concerns and questions.

Engineered WOM happens when there is a commercial motive to engage in a word-of-mouth conversation such as a consumer receiving products in exchange for positive reviews. Influencers are an example of the use of engineered WOM. 5. Discuss the factors that influence the effectiveness of a viral marketing campaign. Find an example of an effective viral marketing campaign and discuss the reasons it was successful. (LO 5-3) Viral marketing refers to the act of propagating marketing relevant messages through the help and cooperation of individual consumers. It is sometimes referred to as buzz marketing whereby marketers try to make their brands and/or marketing messages part of popular culture and consumers themselves are lured into disseminating information through word-of-mouth. In many cases, marketers may even hire individual opinion leaders and trendsetters, such as DJs, waiters and waitresses, bartenders, and other influential people to talk about their companies and/or brands and create excitement and interest in them. Many of the buzz marketing techniques used by marketers have now gone viral as marketers are using social media such as Facebook, Twitter, and YouTube to encourage consumers to share messages about their brands with friends and associates. There are several reasons why marketers are using buzz marketing techniques. First, they recognize that consumers are becoming very skeptical of media advertising and it becoming more difficult to penetrate this skepticism and capture their attention with overt advertising messages. By using buzz marketing techniques, consumers are often not even aware of the persuasive intent behind the messages. Word-of-mouth information also tends to be more reliable and trustworthy than information or recommendations received through more formal marketing channels that help make buzz marketing very effective. Buzz marketing may also be more cost-effective as it does not require expensive media buys or the creation of advertising messages. However, consumers are becoming somewhat skeptical of these techniques if they recognize that companies are behind them and they are artificially trying to generate buzz to promote their brands. Students should be encouraged to find examples of companies that have used viral marketing successfully as well as those that have encountered problems in using it. Viral marketing can backfire, particularly when consumers recognize marketers are trying to generate buzz for their brands and view the effort as contrived or manipulative.

6. It is recognized that an age bias exists in the advertising industry and digital agencies against older people who may not be as digitally savvy as younger generations. Do you think it is acceptable for agencies to favor younger people in the hiring process? How might an older person address the age bias problem? (LO 5-1, 5-3)

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

There are a number of reasons why agencies are focusing their hiring on younger workers. One reason is that they are cheaper to hire as the weak economy has made it difficult for young people to find jobs, and they are often willing to work for less, particularly, in advertising and digital agencies as they view these jobs as a way to break into the industry. However, digital agencies often prefer young people because they are digital natives who have grown up with the Internet and social media and have thoroughly immersed themselves in the digital world. They are much more in touch with the various digital platforms that have become very important to marketers as they strive to engage consumers and require less time and effort to train. Older employees may argue that they understand digital media as they have taken it upon themselves to learn about social media and other digital platforms. However, they often do not have the innate understanding of digital and social media as the young people who use them on a regular basis.

The ageism problem in advertising has come about for other reasons. Marketers are very interested in younger consumers as this age group spends more on a variety of products including automobiles, electronics, appliances, and other items and are more willing to switch brands and try new products and services. The 18 to 49 demographic market is highly coveted for this reason. Also, by targeting younger people with their advertising messages and media buys, marketers can also reach older consumers who aspire to be young. However, the opposite is rarely the case, as younger consumers do not want to be old before their time. Students should be asked to take a position as to whether young professionals can create advertisements that connect with older consumers. Since most students taking this course will be in their late teens or early 20s, it should be interesting to hear their perspective as to whether their generation understands the over 50 crowd. It is often said that older people do not understand or relate to Generations X or Y. This question turns the tables and asks whether the younger generation has the empathy and understanding needed to develop effective advertising for older consumers. The young creative staff in an agency is likely to want to create ads that are reflective of their own life phase. They will want to create ads that are hip, cools, impressive to their peers, and award-winning. This is more fulfilling than creating ads for older consumers with whom they have little in common.

Older people looking to work in advertising and digital agencies as well as other areas of marketing must determine what digital skills they are lacking and take steps to address the deficiency. There are a number of online courses and tutorials that are available from major companies such as Facebook, Google, and Twitter that can be taken to improve one‘s knowledge and understanding of these platforms. Middle-aged and older employees might also emphasize the experience and expertise they offer to advertising and digital agencies that goes beyond digital media. Skills such as managing other employees, leadership, project management, planning, and budgeting are still very important to agencies and can be a way for them to market themselves. However, the reality is that the digital and advertising agencies are likely to favor young people and this is unlikely to change until the new generation of workers becomes older themselves.

7. What is meant by noise in the marketing communications process? Discuss how mobile devices such as laptops, tablets and smartphones are contributing to the noise problem and the effectiveness of television advertising. What are some of the ways advertisers can deal with the noise distractions created by these devices? (LO 5-1, 5-2) Noise is defined as the extraneous factors that create unplanned distortion or interference in the communications process. Over the past decade, a new type of noise has become prevalent in the television-viewing environment, which is the distraction of technology such as laptops, tablets, and mobile phones/smartphones. As shown in Figure 5-3, many people now multitask while watching television. They may be online surfing the Internet, using apps, participating in social media, or texting. Because advertisers are not in direct contact with the customers, they must use other means to determine how their messages have been received. While the ultimate form of feedback occurs

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

through sales, it is often hard to show a direct relationship between advertising and purchase behavior. Therefore, marketers use other methods to obtain feedback, among them customer inquiries, store visits, coupon redemptions, and reply cards. Research-based feedback analyzes readership and recall of ads, message comprehension, attitude change, and other forms of response.

With this information, the advertiser can determine reasons for success or failure in the communication process and make adjustments. Also, rather than competing against the noise from social media, many marketers are embracing it and adding content in their TV spots encouraging viewers to visit their owned media sites such as Facebook, Twitter, Snapchat, and YouTube as well as their websites. Since TV viewers are often already online via their laptops, tablets and smartphones, it is quite easy to do so.

8. Discuss how the implications of the social consumer decision journey might differ for a marketer of a high-involvement product such as an automobile or consumer electronic device versus a company marketing a low involvement product such as a soft drink or paper towels.

(LO 5-5) For a company selling a high-involvement product such as a tablet computer, the consumer is likely to go through a standard learning or learn → feel → do response hierarchy. The ARF study found that the purchase journey of consumers varies by product or service category as high risk/involvement products have longer cycles than lower-risk/involvement products. Offline advertising may still be very important in driving consideration, evaluation, and brand selection throughout the consumer decision journey. Advertisements for high-involvement products are usually very detailed and informative and provide the consumer with a great deal of information that can be used for decisionmaking purposes. Informational displays at point-of-purchase or presentations by salespersons in the store can also be valuable and effective sources of information. Marketers of high-involvement products may also want to encourage consumers to visit their websites where more detailed information about the product can be presented and consumers can select information that is of particular relevance or interest to them. They may also be likely to visit product review sites where they can compare brands and see how others evaluate them. Marketers might encourage consumers to visit these sites and post favorable reviews of their products or share their experiences with others through social media such as Twitter or Facebook.

For a company selling a low-involvement product such as a soft drink or paper towel, the consumer is likely to go through a learn → do → feel response hierarchy whereby some minimal level of awareness or passive learning may precede purchase and attitudes are formed after using the product.

Many packaged goods products are low-risk/reward types of products that are characterized by shorter purchase cycles and lower levels of involvement in the decision-making process. Thus, marketers may spend a larger amount of their IMC budget on traditional media such as TV and print to build and maintain brand awareness as well as on consumer and trade promotions that provide an extra incentive to buy. An advertiser of a low-involvement product must recognize that consumers are less likely to give attention to actual message content and may focus more on non-message elements such as music, characters, slogans or jingles. Advertisers may want to use catchy slogans or jingles that will stick in consumers‘ minds and become salient when they are in the actual purchase situation.

The use of short messages and heavy repetition schedules will also be important. Sales promotion techniques such as sampling and coupons may also be used to encourage first-time trial. Point-ofpurchase displays and advertising might also be used to encourage trial of the brand. If the product performs well, the consumer should form a favorable attitude the probability of repurchasing it will increase. However, marketers may be able to use digital media a way to extend the reach and frequency of their offline advertising and as a way to deliver promotional offers to consumers.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

9. Discuss Procter & Gamble’s decision to make digital and social media an important part of the IMC program for Charmin. Why has P&G been successful in using social media for the brand?

(LO 5-4, 5-5) While Charmin is not a brand that would be expected to have an active social media and digital presence, P&G made great strides to make the Charmin brand one of the most active brands on social media. The Charmin brand has more than 1 million fans on Facebook, more than 80,000 Twitter followers, and an active presence on YouTube. Charmin uses humorous content that is both relevant, engaging, and entertaining. Rather than focusing solely on the product, Charmin‘s social media focuses on the human experience of everything bathroom related. They use humorous hashtags and mobile marketing efforts to engage consumers in a conversation. Charmin acquired the SitOrSquat app, which helps consumers find clean public restrooms nearby. Charmin continues to develop its IMC and specifically its digital and social media efforts to maintain relevant in platforms where toilet paper brands would not otherwise be expected to be.

10. Discuss how marketers can use the cognitive response approach to analyze consumers' reactions to and processing of their advertisements. Choose a print ad or TV commercial and discuss the types of cognitive responses that it might generate using the model shown in Figure 5-7. (LO 5-6) Students should be encouraged to find a print ad or commercial and evaluate it using the cognitive response model shown in Figure 5-7. Many television commercials can be found on YouTube and/or on websites for various companies and/or brands. They might show the ad to their friends or fellow students and have them write down what thoughts they were having as they looked at the ad. They might then try to analyze these cognitive responses by categorizing them as product/message-related thoughts (counterarguments or support arguments), ad execution-related thoughts, or source-oriented thoughts (bolsters or derogations). You might have a few students show the examples of ads they have chosen and present their analysis of the cognitive responses given in reaction to these ads. They might also discuss why these responses were generated. For example, source bolsters might be given to a trustworthy or likeable spokesperson while source derogations might occur if the source is not liked or is unattractive. Message-related thoughts might be generated if there is a lot of information presented in the ad or the position advocated is not agreed upon by the message recipient. Ads that use a great deal of imagery might generate more execution-related thoughts.

11. Explain the differences between the central versus peripheral route to persuasion and the factors that determine when each might be used by consumers in response to an advertisement or other form of marketing communication. (LO 5-6) Under the central route to persuasion, the message recipient is viewed as a very active and involved participant in the communications process whose ability and motivation to process a message are very high. The recipient will pay close attention to message content and will carefully scrutinize the communication for the cogency or quality of the message claims. Under the peripheral route to persuasion, the message recipient is viewed as lacking the motivation or ability to process the message and is not likely to engage in any detailed level of cognitive processing. Rather than thinking about or evaluating the information content of the message, the receiver will rely on ―peripheral cues‖ such as an attractive source or other executional factors. There are a number of factors that determine when each might be used by consumer in response to an advertisement. These include the involvement level of the consumer, which will be a function of the nature of the product being purchased, the importance of the product/service being purchased to the individual, the needs of the individual, and the motivation and ability of the consumer to process the message.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Additional Discussion Questions (not in text) 12. Discuss the various elements of the communications process. Find an example of an advertising campaign being used by a company and analyze this campaign in terms of these elements of the communications process. (LO 5-1) The various elements of the communications process include the sender or source, the message, the channel, the receiver, noise and feedback. The sender or source of a communication is the person or organization that has information to share with another person or group. The source may be an individual such as a salesperson or spokesperson who appears in a company‘s advertisements or a nonpersonal entity such as a company or organization itself. The message is the information or meaning the source hopes to convey and may be verbal or nonverbal, oral, written or symbolic. The channel is the method by which the communication travels from the source or sender to the receiver.

At the broadest level, there are two types of channels, personal and nonpersonal. Personal channels generally involve direct interpersonal contact with the receiver while nonpersonal channels carry a message without interpersonal contact between the sender and receiver. Nonpersonal channels are generally referred to as the mass media. The receiver is the person(s) with whom the sender shares thoughts or information. Generally, receivers are the customers in the target market or audience who read, hear, and/or see the marketer‘s message. Noise refers to extraneous factors in the communications process that can distort or interfere with the communication of a message. Errors or problems in that occur in the encoding of the message, distortions in the transmission of the message, and distractions at the point of reception are possible sources of noise. Feedback refers to the part of the receiver‘s response that is communicated back to the sender and may take a variety of forms such as response hierarchy measures including awareness, knowledge, attitudes, purchase intentions, preferences, and behavior. The form of feedback of ultimate interest to marketers is, of course, sales.

Students should be encouraged to find an example of a current advertising campaign and to analyze it with respect to various elements of the communications process. They might evaluate the source being used as a spokesperson in the campaign, the type of message being used, the various channels or media where the ads appear, the target audience for the campaign, and the type of feedback that might be used to monitor the effectiveness of the campaign.

13. Those responsible for most of the advertising and promotion decisions for consumer products are brand managers (client side) and account executives (agency side). These individuals are usually well-paid, well-educated marketing professionals living in urban areas. Consider the typical consumer for a brand such as Budweiser beer or Mountain Dew soft drinks. What problems could these differences present in developing an IMC program for these brands? How might these problems be overcome? (LO 5-1) The brand managers and account executives are likely to be very different from the heavy users of brands such as Budweiser or Mountain Dew. The marketing and advertising executives will, as noted, be highly educated with a college degree and perhaps a graduate degree such as an MBA while the users of these brands are more likely to be blue-collar types who have a high school education and perhaps some college. The marketing and advertising executives will probably have higher paying jobs and have different lifestyles, values, and interests than the consumers who are heavy users of these brands. These differences may make it difficult for the marketing and advertising personnel to develop advertising and promotional messages that appeal to these consumers and communicate effectively with them. These problems can be overcome by conducting marketing research on the users of these brands to gain insight and understanding into factors such as their lifestyles, values, interests, opinions, and the like. Advertising and promotional messages can also be pretested to ensure that the re understood by these consumers and interpreted in the manner intended.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

14. What is meant by encoding? Discuss how encoding differs for various types of advertising messages such as radio and television commercials, print ads, and digital/online ads. (LO 5-2) Encoding refers to the process by which the sender of a communication puts thoughts, ideas, or information into a symbolic form using words, symbols, pictures, and the like. The encoding of a television commercial involves the use of visual images, sound, motion, color, and words, which provide advertisers with the opportunity to develop very creative messages. The encoding of a radio commercial is limited to the use of sound, which usually comes in the form of words read by an announcer and/or music. However, some astute advertisers may use a process called image transfer whereby the images from a TV commercial are planted in a radio spot by using similar, or even the same, audio portion. The idea is that when consumers hear the radio message, they will make the connection to the TV commercial thus reinforcing the video images. This process is discussed in Chapter 11. Encoding of a print ad is done using visual images such as pictures as well as written information in the form of advertising copy. Many print ads for fashion brands such as clothing and cosmetics as well as luxury brand contain very few words and rely primarily upon the visual image to deliver their message. However, ads for products such as automobiles or consumer electronics may use a larger amount of copy to explain the product as well as its features and benefits. Because message recipients control the processing rate for print messages, it is possible to communicate more information to them since they can take as long as they need or want to read the copy portion of the ad.

15. Discuss some of the reasons consumer packaged goods (CPG) marketers are allocating more of their IMC budgets to digital and social media versus traditional media such as television and print. Do you think marketers run any risks in allocating more of their budgets to digital and social versus traditional media? (LO 5-3) A number of industry experts predict that digital spending by CPG firms will continue to increase for a number of reasons. Many companies believe that the return on investment for monies spent on digital advertising media may be just as good as television or print. One reason for this is the conventional wisdom that digital is cheaper than traditional media since there is a vast supply of inventory and digital display space is relatively inexpensive, particularly ads purchased programmatically through real-time biding on ad exchanges. P&G is now purchasing 70 percent of its digital advertising through programmatic buying. Many CPG marketers are either cutting, or trying to control, the size and growth in their ad spending and feel that digital ads are a more efficient way to reach specific market segments. Another reason is that companies such as Nielson and ComScore have developed measurement systems for digital display advertising and online video viewing using some of the same metrics television which CPG marketers and their agencies are accustomed to using. Advanced analytics are now available for digital media that allow CPG marketers, many of whom are highly data-driven, to identify target audiences based on their purchase or other behavior.

CPG marketers are also allocating more of their marketing budgets to digital media since they are conduits for sales promotion tactics, particularly price promotions. In addition, marketers recognize that consumers are spending more time online, particularly on mobile devices, and thus digital is the best medium to reach them.

CHAPTER 6 SOURCE, MESSAGE, AND CHANNEL FACTORS

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Chapter Overview This chapter is a continuation of the discussion of communications theory and focuses on the controllable variables that are a part of this process including source, message and channel factors. The chapter builds on the material in Chapter 5, as decisions regarding each of these communication variables should take into account how they affect various stages or steps of the response process of the receiver. The persuasion matrix (Figure 6-1) is presented at the beginning of the chapter to provide a framework for analyzing how decisions regarding individual communication variables might influence steps in the response hierarchy. The primary goal of this chapter is to provide an in-depth examination of source, message, and channel factors and the various considerations involved in making advertising and promotional decisions for each of these communication components.

Learning Objectives 1.

Discuss the variables in the communication system and how they influence consumers‘ processing of promotional messages.

2.

Identify decision factors involved in selecting a source for a promotional message.

3.

Compare the different types of message structures and appeals.

4.

Explain how different types of channels influence the marketing communications process.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Chapter and Lecture Outline I.

INTRODUCTION

This chapter analyzes the major controllable variables in the communications process—source, message, and channel or medium. Characteristics of the source are examined along with how they affect cognitive processing. Attention is also focused on the message itself, including how structure and type of appeal influence communication effectiveness, and on issues related to the channel or medium by which the message is communicated. Source, message, and channel factors were introduced in the previous chapter as controllable elements in the communications model, and it was noted that decisions regarding each of these components must take into account how they interact with the response process.

II.

PROMOTIONAL PLANNING THROUGH THE PERSUASION MATRIX

A useful approach for combining the communication components and the stages of the response process is the persuasion matrix (see Figure 6-1). The persuasion matrix helps marketers to see how each controllable elements in the communication model interacts with the consumer response process. In the persuasion matrix, there are two sets of variables of interest including independent variables representing the controllable elements of the promotional program and dependent variables representing the response hierarchy or steps a receiver goes through in being persuaded. A major consideration facing the promotional planner is how decisions regarding each independent variable will influence the various stages of the response process. The text provides several examples of how the persuasion matrix can be used to evaluate how decisions regarding various controllable communication elements will affect the response process.

Professor Notes:

III.

SOURCE FACTORS

The source of a marketing communication can be viewed as a multifaceted concept as many types of sources can be included in a promotional situation. We will use the term source to mean the person who is involved in the communication of a promotional message in either a direct or an indirect manner. A direct source is a spokesperson that delivers a promotional message, demonstrates a product or service, and/or endorses a product or service. Spokespeople used in advertisements or a company‘s sales representatives are examples of direct sources. An indirect source does not actually deliver a message but rather is used to draw attention to or enhance the appearance of a promotional message. Decorative models are a good example of an indirect source. Most of the theory and research associated with the study of source factors deal with the characteristics of individuals as communicators of a persuasive message and how they influence communication effectiveness. This is the approach used to examine source characteristics.

The characteristics of the source often have a significant impact on the effect of their sales and advertising message. A useful framework for examining source characteristics is the classification scheme developed

by Herbert Kelman, shown in Figure 6-2. This scheme recognizes three basic categories of source attributes with each involving a different process by which the source influences attitudinal or behavioral change in the message recipient.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

A.

Source Credibility—Credibility refers to the extent to which the source is perceived as having knowledge, skill, or experience relevant to the communication topic and can be trusted to give an unbiased opinion or present objective information on the issue. Information from a credible source can influence beliefs, opinions, attitudes, and/or behavior through a process known as internalization, which occurs when the receiver adopts the opinion of the credible communicator since he or she believes the information from this source is accurate. There are two important dimensions to credibility—expertise and trustworthiness.

1. Applying expertise—Marketers always strive to utilize communicators with high credibility.

Spokespeople are often chosen because of their expertise, knowledge, or experience in a particular product or service category. Research has found that the perceived expertise of celebrity endorsers is more important in explaining purchase intentions than the source‘s attractiveness or trustworthiness.

2. Applying trustworthiness—While expertise is important, it is also important that target audiences find the source believable or trustworthy. Finding figures with a trustworthy image can be difficult to do. Each year, E-Poll Market Research conducts consumer surveys regarding the trustworthiness of celebrities. Some of the high-scoring celebrities as of late include Betty White, Tom Hanks, and Dwayne ―The Rock‖ Johnson. Many celebrities choose not to endorse products out of fear of how it might impact their image. However, these fears dissipate when abroad, as many more celebrities choose to endorse products internationally.

Examples are provided regarding the application of expertise and trustworthiness to promotional situations. Global Perspective 6-1 discusses how some celebrities do not endorse products or appear in commercials in the U.S. so they can protect their credibility. However, many of them such as Leonardo DiCaprio, Kevin Costner, Brad Pitt, and others do endorse companies and brands in foreign countries such as Japan.

3. Using corporate leaders as spokespeople—Many companies believe the use of their president or CEO is the ultimate expression of the company‘s commitment to quality and customer service. Some examples are given in the text such as Virgin founder and CEO Richard Branson, Boston Beer Company‘s Jim Koch, and Dyson CEO spokesperson, Sir James Dyson. Marketing and advertising experts question the efficacy of using CEOs and see it more as an ego-serving move rather than a logical marketing and advertising move. Experts suggest that businesspeople should only get in front of the camera when they exude credibility and evoke positive emotions with consumers. It should be noted that the owners and/or presidents of smaller companies often appear in commercials as a spokesperson as well.

4. Limitations of credible sources—Marketers generally seek to use credible sources to deliver their promotional messages. However, in some situations a high-credibility source may be less effective than a moderate- or low-credibility source such as when the receiver has a favorable initial attitude or opinion. In this situation, the use of a highly credible source may lead the receiver to attribute his or her opinion to the source rather than the message being communicated. However when a moderate- or low-credibility source is used, the receiver cannot really attribute his or her attitude or opinion to the source. The sleeper effect phenomenon is another reason why a low-credibility source may be just as effective as a source high in credibility.

B.

Source Attractiveness—A commonly used source characteristic in advertising and personal selling is that of attractiveness. Attractiveness also has several sub-components including similarity, familiarity, and likability. The process through which attractiveness leads to persuasion is identification whereby the receiver seeks some type of relationship with the source by

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

adopting a similar position. Examples are provided of the application of source attractiveness in the selection of sales representatives, as well as in advertising through the use of celebrities and decorative models.

1. Applying similarity—Marketers recognize that people are more likely to be influenced by a message coming from someone with whom they feel a sense of similarity. Similarity is used in various ways in marketing communications: selecting salespeople, using former athletes to promote beer, and in slice-of-life commercials. Many brands attempt to create a personality figure for the company or brand that consumers will find likable. A good example of this is Progressive Insurance‘s spokesperson Flo who has become one of the most popular advertising personalities over the past decade. Many companies feel that the best way to connect with consumers is by using regular-looking, everyday people with whom the ―average‖ consumer can identify.

2. Applying likability: Using celebrities—Advertisers have long recognized the value of using celebrities such as television and movie stars, athletes, musicians, or other popular figures to endorse their products and services. Celebrities are used because they have ―stopping power‖ and draw attention to advertising messages. Another reason is the expectation that the respect, popularity, and/or admiration the celebrity enjoys will influence consumers‘ feelings and, of course, their purchase behavior toward the brand the celebrity is endorsing. However, a number of factors must be considered in using celebrities as a spokesperson or endorser such as: •

Overshadowing the product—While a celebrity may draw attention to an ad, consumers may focus on the celebrity rather than the product or service and the advertising message, thus having a negative impact rather than the positive intended one.

•

Overexposure—Consumers generally recognize that celebrities endorse a product or service because they are paid to do so. When a celebrity endorses a number of products s/he may become overexposed and lose credibility.

•

Target audiences‘ receptivity—This is one of the most important considerations for marketers selecting a celebrity endorses—does this celebrity resonate with the target audience? Attention should be given to the target audience and whether the celebrity is appropriate for the consumers in this market. For example, younger consumers may be more impressed by celebrities than older people. A number of marketers have chosen not to utilize celebrity endorsers because they have determined that they do not influence the markets they are targeting.

•

Risk to the advertiser—Marketers must consider whether there is any risk involved in having their company or products associated with a celebrity. Several well-known entertainers and athletes who were being used as advertising spokespersons have been involved in activities that were potentially embarrassing to the companies whose products they were endorsing such as pro basketball star Kobe Bryant (McDonald‘s, Coca-Cola, Spalding, and Nutella), cyclist Lance Armstrong, golfer Tiger Woods, tennis player Maria Sharapova, Papa John‘s founder John Schnatter, or celebrity Lori Loughlin who was charged with paying a large sum of money to get her children into a particular university.

•

Return on investment—Perhaps the most important factor a company must consider regarding the use of a celebrity endorser is the return on investment (ROI) from using them. Marketers use celebrities to increase awareness of, and attention to, their company

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

and/or brands as well as their advertising. However, all of these factors must result in higher sales in order to get a positive ROI from an endorsement deal. Many companies have seen positive results from the use of a celebrity endorser, which is why brands will likely continue to use them, despite any potential drawbacks.

3. Understanding the meaning of celebrity endorsers—Advertisers should use celebrities who are connected in some way to the product or services they are endorsing. This means that marketers must understand the image and meaning celebrities project to consumers.

Grant McCracken has developed a very insightful perspective on celebrity endorsement based on meaning transfer. His model, which is shown in Figure 6-3 of the text, suggests that credibility and attractiveness don‘t sufficiently explain how and why celebrity endorsements work and offers a model based on meaning transfer. A celebrity‘s effectiveness as an endorser depends on the culturally acquired meaning he or she brings to the endorsement process. Celebrities draw these meanings from the roles they assume in their entertainment or athletic careers. The model suggests that celebrity endorsers bring their meanings into the advertisement and transfer them to the products they are endorsing. These meanings are then in turn transferred to the consumer when they purchase a product or service. The implications of the meaning transfer model should be discussed. Current examples of celebrities whose image is capitalized on by marketers who use them in their ads should be noted. Actress Zooey Deschanel, known for her role as the cute, quirky, and offbeat but loveable roommate on the TV sitcom New Girl, has been a spokesperson for companies/brands such as Apple, Rimmel, PopChips, and Pantene shampoo, which capitalize on her attractiveness. The text also discusses how actresses/comedienne Tian Fey has developed cultural meaning through her the various roles and characters she has plaid on Saturday Night Live as well in numerous movies. American Express uses her cultural meaning in the advertising campaign for the Amex EveryDay Credit Card.

IV.

CHOOSING A CELEBRITY ENDORSER

Marketers must consider a number of factors when choosing a celebrity to serve as an advertising spokesperson for the company or a particular brand. Some advertising and marketing executives rely on their own intuition and feelings when choosing a celebrity endorser. However, many companies and ad agencies use research data such as Q-scores and other metrics, such as consumer research firm GfK MRI and market research firm E-Poll‘s service, MRI/E-Poll Celebrity Fusion, which provides detailed insight into consumer/celebrity compatibility. These types of tools measure a celebrity‘s level of familiarity and appeal among the target audience.

A.

Applying Likability Decorative Models—A common technique used by advertisers to draw attention to an ad and enhance its effectiveness involves using a physically attractive model.

Often these models are used in a passive or ―decorative‖ manner rather than as active communicators. A number of factors must be considered in using decorative models, such as whether they are appropriate or relevant to the product or service being advertised and whether they will draw attention to the ad but not the product or advertising message. An interesting study is noted which found that some women actually experience negative feelings when comparing themselves with beautiful models used in ads and the images of physical perfection they represent. This might make for an interesting class discussion as to whether a marketer may not want to use a highly attractive model in its advertising. Dove‘s ―Campaign for Real Beauty‖ is an excellent example of how some companies are using everyday women in their ads rather than supermodels.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

B.

Source Power—Source power is the final characteristic in Kelman‘s classification scheme. A source has power when he or she can actually administer rewards and punishment to the receiver.

Perceived power depends on several factors such as perceived control, concern and scrutiny.

Power influences persuasion through the compliance process whereby the receiver accepts the persuasive influence of the source and yields to the advocated position to obtain favorable reactions or avoid punishment. It is important to note that persuasion induced through the use of a communicator who relies on power may be superficial and last only as long as the receiver perceives that the source can administer rewards or punishment. The use of source power is difficult to apply in a nonpersonal influence situation such as that found in advertising. Source power has greater application to situations involving interpersonal influence such as in personal selling.

McGraw-Hill Connect ®: Source Characteristics and the WPU Campaign Type of Activity: Click and Drag Activity Summary: In this activity, students will match the five sources being considered to the respective source characteristics, the process of influence involved, and possible outcomes of using that source.

Activity Learning Objective: 06-02 Identify decision factors involved in selecting a source for a promotional message.

Concept Review: A source is a person involved in communicating a marketing message, either directly or indirectly.

Companies are very careful when selecting individuals to deliver their selling messages. Many firms spend huge sums of money for a specific person to endorse their product or company. They also spend millions of dollars recruiting, selecting, and training salespersons to represent the company and deliver sales presentations. They recognize that the characteristics of the source affect the sales and advertising message. Sources vary in their characteristics and the process through which they influence consumers.

Understanding these characteristics and processes helps marketers invest in sources that will maximize message influence.

Difficulty: Medium Bloom‘s: 2 Understand AACSB: Analytical Thinking

V.

MESSAGE FACTORS

The manner in which marketing communications are presented is very important in determining their effectiveness. Consideration must be given not only to message content, but also to how the information will be structured for presentation and the type of appeal that will be used. This section of the chapter examines the structure of messages and considers the effects of different types of appeals used in advertising.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

A.

Message Structure—An important consideration in the development of a promotional message is the manner or framework used for structuring or communicating the information. An important aspect of message strategy is knowing the best way to communicate message points or elements.

A number of message structure considerations are discussed in the text including: 1. Order of presentation—Should important message points or arguments be placed at the beginning of the message, in the middle or at the end? A primacy effect suggests that the information placed at the beginning of the message is most effective while a recency effect suggests that the arguments at the end are most effective. Determining whether to place the strongest selling points at the beginning or end of a message depends on if the target audience is opposed to the communicator‘s position, if the audience is interested in the topic, and if the message is long and detailed and presenting many arguments, among a number of other factors.

2. Conclusion drawing—Should a message draw an explicit conclusion for the audience or allow them to form their own conclusions? Research has shown that, in general, messages with explicit conclusions are more easily understood and effective. However, some studies show that the effectiveness of conclusion drawing may depend on the target audience, the type of issue or topic, the complexity of the topic, and nature of the situation.

3. Message sidedness—Should a marketing communication use a one-sided message, whereby only positive attributes or benefits of a product or service are mentioned, or a two-sided message where both strong and weak points or attributes are presented. The text discusses how Domino‘s Pizza effectively used a two-sided message whereby the company acknowledged problems with the taste and quality of its product as part of its ―Pizza Turnaround‖ strategy (Exhibit 6-13).

4. Refutation—A special type of two-sided message whereby both sides of an issue are presented and arguments are offered to refute the opposing viewpoint or negative information is referred to as a refutational appeal. Refutational messages can be useful when marketers wish to build attitudes that resist change and/or must defend against attacks or criticism of their products or the company (see the SeaWorld ad in Exhibit 6-14).

5. Verbal versus visual messages—Both the verbal and nonverbal or visual portions of an advertisement influence the way an advertising message is processed. Verbal or copy aspects of the message are important in conveying rational or factual messages, while nonverbal or visual elements of an ad are important for developing emotional and image-based associations. Imagery can have a significant impact on the way consumers process any subsequent or accompanying copy.

B.

Message Appeals—Another important aspect of message strategy concerns the manner or style used to communicate the promotional message. One of the most important creative strategy decisions involves the choice of an appropriate appeal. Some promotional messages use rational appeals and are designed to communicate information regarding a product or service and appeal to the logical aspects of the consumer decision-making process. Other messages appeal to feelings in an attempt to evoke some type of emotional reaction. Many advertising professionals believe that effective advertising combines the practical reasons for purchasing a product with emotional values. Three types of appeals are discussed in the text: 1. Comparative advertising—Comparative advertising refers to the practice of either directly or indirectly naming one or more competitors in an ad and usually making a comparison on one or more specific product or service attributes. This form of advertising became a

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

legitimate and popular practice after the Federal Trade Commission began advocating its use in 1972 and the networks lifted their ban on comparative advertising.

A number of factors must be considered in using comparative advertising such as consumers‘ response to the ad, perceptions of credibility, characteristics of the target audience, and the company‘s position in the market. Comparative messages are often used by new brands to position themselves against established brands or by smaller market share brands to compare themselves against market leaders. Market leaders, on the other hand, are often hesitant to use comparison ads as they feel they have little to gain by showing competitor‘s products in their ads. Comparative advertising has become common in the mobile phone industry as the four major providers (Verizon, AT&T, T-Mobile, and Sprint) often run ads comparing themselves against one another on key attributes such as network coverage, signal quality, and price.

Another good example of the use of comparative advertising by sports drink, Body Armour, is provided in the text.

2. Fear appeals—Fear appeals are used to create anxiety in the audience and arouse individuals to take action. Fear can stress negative consequences that may occur if behavior is not altered such as ads that warn people not to smoke, use drugs, or drink and drive. Exhibit 6–18 provides a good example of the use of fear appeals as it shows an ad created by the Ad Council to discourage buzzed driving by showing how getting arrested for a DUI can cost nearly $10,000 in legal fees. Fear can also be used through the threat of social disapproval or rejection that an individual might suffer if s/he does not use a particular product or service (such as deodorant, mouthwash, or dandruff shampoo).

•

How fear operates—Advertisers should consider how fear operates, what level to use, and how target audiences may respond before deciding to use a fear appeal message. Fear appeals can have facilitating effects by attracting attention and interest to a message and motivating the receiver to act to resolve the problem presented in the ad. However, high levels of fear can have inhibiting effects whereby the receiver may emotionally block out the message by tuning it out, selectively perceiving it or counterarguing against it. The nonmonotonic relationship between fear and persuasion is shown in Figure 6-5 and should be discussed. Attention is also given to an alternative approach to the curvilinear explanation of fear—the protection motivation model.

3. Humor appeals—Humorous ads are among the most popular and best remembered of all advertising messages. Advertisers use humor for a number of reasons including attracting and holding consumers‘ attention, putting them in a favorable mood, creating affect that may transfer to the product or service being advertised, and reduce counterarguing by serving as a distractor. A problem with humorous appeals includes the possibility of drawing attention to the ad at the expense of message content. Effective humor is also difficult to create and execute. Additionally, advertisers are often concerned that humorous advertisements will wear out faster than serious appeals. Wearout refers to the tendency of a television or radio commercial to lose its effectiveness when it is seen and/or heard repeatedly. Because of this potential, many advertisers prefer to use hard-sell, rational appeals rather than spend their ad budgets to entertain consumers.

Professor Notes:

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

McGraw-Hill Connect ®: Message Options for Natur-O-Rush Type of Activity: Click and Drag Activity Summary: Natur-O-Rush is a new energy drink with all-natural ingredients that is entering a market filled with multiple caffeine-based energy drink brands. The brand manager for Natur-O-Rush, Jessica Reynolds, is working with an ad agency to determine the communications for the launch campaign. Students will match the five creative options presented by the ad agency to the message factor that they correspond to, and things to consider (or related phenomena) for each of those message factors.

Activity Learning Objective: 06-03 Compare the different types of message structures and appeals.

Concept Review: The way marketing messages are presented is very important in determining their effectiveness.

Marketers must consider not only the content of their persuasive messages but also how this information will be structured for presentation (message structure) and what type of message appeal will be used (message appeals).

Difficulty: 2 Medium Bloom‘s: Understand AACSB: Analytical Thinking

VI.

CHANNEL FACTORS

The final controllable variable of the communications process is the channel, or medium, used to deliver the message to the target audience. Some general considerations regarding channel factors are presented here.

A.

Personal versus Nonpersonal Channels—Effective communication also depends on the channel or medium used to deliver the message to the target audience. While there are a variety of methods available for communicating a promotional message, they can be classified into two broad categories—personal and nonpersonal channels. Differences between these two types of influence channels are discussed.

B.

Effects of Alternative Mass Media—Most promotional efforts such as advertising involve nonpersonal communication through the mass media. The mass media that advertisers use to transmit their messages differ in many ways including the number and type of consumers they reach, their costs, their information-processing requirements, and qualitative characteristics.

These factors will be covered in detail in subsequent media chapters.

1. Differences in information processing—There are very basic differences among alternative mass media in terms of the manner and rate at which information is transmitted and can be processed by the message recipient. Information from the print media is self-paced while

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

information from broadcast media of radio and television is externally paced. There are important implications for advertising via each type of medium. For example, self-paced print media make it easier for the message recipient to process a long, complex message.

Advertisers often use print ads when they want to present a detailed message with a lot of information. Broadcast media are more effective for transmitting shorter messages or, in the case of TV, presenting image along with words.

C.

Effects of Context and Environment—Reactions to and interpretation of an advertising message can be a function of not only message content, but also the context or environment in which the ad appears. A qualitative media effect refers to the positive or negative influence the medium may contribute to the message. For example, an ad seen in a high prestige publication such as Travel & Leisure or The New Yorker may be perceived differently than one in a low prestige magazine or paper such as the Star or National Enquirer. Media reception environments are created by the nature of the television program in which a commercial appears. Consumers may be in a more receptive mood when watching an upbeat situation comedy versus a news program or documentary.

D.

Clutter—Another aspect of the media environment that is important to advertisers is the problem of clutter, which refers to all the non-program material that appears in the broadcast environment including commercials, promotional messages for shows, public service announcements, and the like. Clutter has become a major concern to advertisers as there are too many messages competing for viewers and listeners‘ attention. Studies have shown that the amount of clutter on the four major networks during prime time is running at around 13 minutes per hour, which is down from around 17 minutes a few years ago. However, the amount of clutter is higher on cable channels, with an average of around 15 and a half minutes, with some networks averaging more.

In response to this, for many advertisers, 15-second commercials have become the new norm.

Professor Notes:

McGraw-Hill Connect ®: Channel Factors for Bee & Gee's Product Portfolio Type of Activity: Case Analysis Activity Summary: Bee & Gee is a multi-product, multi-brand, packaged goods company with a significant presence in the personal care and grooming category. Within each product category, it has numerous brands that sometimes compete with each other in the same geographical markets. In the shampoo category, Bee & Gee has four different brands, each targeted towards a different consumer segment, but available in the same geographic markets. This activity will have the students select the best answer for each question related to their marketing channel choices.

Activity Learning Objective: 06-04 Explain how different types of channels influence the marketing communications process.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Concept Review: A channel, or medium, is used to deliver the message to the target audience. A variety of channel factors affects the extent to which the message influences receivers' behavior. Channel factors to consider include personal versus nonpersonal nature of the channel, qualitative differences across channel types, the context and environment of a channel, and clutter in the channel.

Difficulty: 2 Medium Bloom‘s: Analyze AACSB: Analytical Thinking

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Teaching Suggestions The material in this chapter is generally very well received by students as most of them have opinions regarding whom they consider a good or bad advertising spokesperson or the type of message appeals they like or dislike. This chapter is designed to build on the material in Chapter 5 by discussing how decisions regarding source, message and channel factors affect the various stages of the response process.

We have found that the persuasion matrix is a very effective way of showing how decisions regarding controllable communication elements interact with the various steps in the response process. It may be useful to pick a few current examples of advertising campaigns using various spokespersons such as entertainers or athletes and different types of message appeals (fear, humor, comparisons) and analyze them using the persuasion matrix. This chapter has a detailed discussion of issues regarding the use of celebrities in advertising, which is a very popular issue among students. You might engage students in a discussion of why marketers pay such large sums of money to celebrities including athletes, entertainers, and TV/movie stars to appear in their commercials. You might also encourage students to consider the risks involved in the use of celebrities. The coverage of message structure and appeals also lends itself to interesting discussions regarding the use of various types of messages such as fear and humorous appeals.

You might want to visit the website for the Montana Meth project (www.methproject.org), which has examples of many different television and print ads that utilize many of the different message structure and appeals used in the chapter.

It is important to note that message appeals are discussed in more detail in Chapters 8 and 9, which cover creative strategy and execution while media strategy and specific characteristics of the media are discussed in Chapters 10 through 14. These communication elements are introduced in this chapter to provide the student with an understanding of how decisions regarding these factors fit in with the overall communications process. This will provide the student a strong foundation for evaluating media and creative decisions when this material is covered in subsequent chapters.

Answers to Discussion Questions 1. The chapter opener discusses the controversies involving professional golfer Tiger Woods and tennis star Maria Sharapova. Discuss how these controversies have impacted the two athletes as potential endorsers for companies such as Nike and others. Do you think marketers should continue to use them as endorsers? Why or why not? (LO 6-2) Marketers choose to use celebrity spokespersons, including athletes, for a number of reasons.

Consumers often see them as experts who reassure them of the quality of the athletic product or other type of product being sold. Consumers often idolize athletes and thus view their own use of the product as a way to connect with the athlete/celebrity spokesperson. Tiger Woods and Maria Sharapova both faced controversies in their personal lives, which were quickly brought into the public eye. Both of the athletes quickly addressed their personal problems and sought help for them. Despite these controversies, some of the brands that the athletes represented chose to still continue their partnerships with the athletes while others discontinued their partnerships. Marketers should consider how the athletes decide to handle their controversy and consider consumer‘s perceptions of the athletes after the controversy. If the athletes apologize and address the issue head-on and consumer perceptions of the athlete have not changed in a negative way, it would still be beneficial for the brand to continue their partnership with the athlete. However, ultimately, the brand would need to determine if their continued partnership with the athlete would be harmful to their brand.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

2. Discuss how marketers can use the persuasion matrix shown in Figure 6-1 to plan their integrated marketing communication programs. Choose a TV commercial, online video, or print ad and use the persuasion matrix to evaluate how it might influence consumers’ response processes. (LO 6-1) The persuasion matrix helps promotional planners see how each controllable element in the communications process (source, message, channel, and receiver) interacts with the consumers‘ response process. Marketers must consider how decisions regarding these controllable elements of communication will affect the various stages in the response process. For example, the use of a highly attractive model may attract attention to the ad but have a negative impact on comprehension if the information presented by the model is not processed.

This assignment gives the student an excellent opportunity to analyze an advertisement in terms of various communication components and how they interact with the steps of the response process. The students‘ analysis of the ad they choose should address factors such as the type of source used, the message structure or appeal, the media vehicle where the ad was seen (e.g., the magazine or newspaper or specific television program) and the target audience they think it was directed towards.

They can then analyze these individual variables in terms of their impact on the various steps of the response process as shown in the persuasion matrix (Figure 6-1) such as message presentation, attention, comprehension, yielding, retention, and behavior.

3. Discuss the three primary source attributes shown in Figure 6-2 and the processes by which they can influence attitude and/or behavior change. Find an example of an advertisement or other type of promotional message that uses each source attribute. (LO 6-2) The three primary source attributes noted by Kelman are credibility, attractiveness, and power.

Credibility influences attitudes and/or behavior through a process known as internalization whereby the receiver adopts the opinion of the credible communication because s/he feels it is accurate and integrates it into his or her belief system. The two basic components of source credibility are expertise and trustworthiness. Expertise refers to the extent to which the source is perceived as having knowledge, skill, or experience relevant to the communication topic. Many ads use expert sources such as doctors and dentists to endorse products. Athletes also are examples of expert sources when they are endorsing a product or service related to their sport. For example, racecar drivers often endorse automotive products while golfers and tennis players endorse equipment related to their respective sports. Trustworthiness refers to the honesty, integrity, and believability of the source and the extent to which he or she can be trusted to give an unbiased opinion or present objective information on the issue. Expertise is used in many ways in marketing communications.

Trustworthiness is also very important and advertisers usually attempt to find spokespersons with a trustworthy image and who are not endorsing too many products. Advertisers can also use techniques such as hidden-cameras or unsolicited testimonial as a way of increasing the receivers‘ perceptions of trustworthiness of the source. Students should be asked to find an example of advertisements that use an expert source and one who is used based on his/her level of trustworthiness.

The source characteristic of attractiveness operates through the process of identification whereby the receiver is motivated to seek some type of relationship with the source and thus adopts similar beliefs, attitudes, preferences, or even behavior. The components of source attractiveness include similarity, familiarity, and liking. Similarity is based on the sharing of interests, lifestyles, opinions, needs, goals and the like. Similarity is used in advertising by choosing spokespersons or individuals to appear in the ads who are similar on these dimensions to receivers in the target audience. The use of slice-oflife executional appeals are also a way of attempting to create empathy between the person in the commercial and the viewer. Another very common way of using attractiveness in advertising is through the use of celebrities from the sports and entertainment fields. In addition to their ability to

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

attract attention to an ad, another reason for using celebrities is the liking consumers may have for them and the assumption that the respect, popularity, and/or admiration the celebrity enjoys will favorably influence consumers‘ attitudes and, hopefully, their purchase behavior. Student should have no trouble finding examples of ads that use the source characteristic of attractiveness such as those featuring celebrities including entertainers, actor/actresses, and athletes Power is a source characteristic when the source can actually administer rewards and punishments to the receiver and operates through a process known as compliance whereby the receiver accepts the persuasive influence of the source and acquiesces to his or her position in hopes of obtaining some type of reward or avoiding punishment. As a result of his/her power, the source may be able to induce another person to respond to the request or the position s/he is advocating. Power is a source characteristic that is difficult to apply in a nonpersonal influence situation such as advertising since a communicator in an ad generally cannot apply any sanctions to the receiver or determine whether compliance actually occurs. Thus, students may find it difficult to find an example of advertising that relies on power as a source characteristic.

4. Global Perspective 6-1 discusses how many celebrities appear in commercials in Japan and other countries but not in the United States. Do you think celebrities hurt their image by endorsing companies or brands and appearing in advertisements for them? Why are they willing to appear in ads in other countries but not the U.S.? (LO 6-2) Celebrities appearing in commercials was perceived to be a method of celebrities ―selling out‖ for a long time. Rather than them appearing in a new film or television show, they were viewed as taking a hit to their careers and again ―selling out‖ by appearing in commercials and promoting products.

However, over the past several years, this perception of commercials being a bad career move for celebrities has begun to disappear in Hollywood. Being in a television commercial no longer carries the same stigma that it once did. Celebrities were more willing to appear in commercials internationally because they believed those commercial messages would less likely be seen in the U.S. and thus wouldn‘t taint their reputation in the U.S. However, with increased Internet use, celebrities commercials are no longer simply staying in the international country they were shot in.

Consumers in the U.S. are easily able to find and view these commercials. Perhaps because of this, celebrities recognize that they can no longer hide their international commercials so they should simply give in and endorse products in the U.S. as well to make more money since their fans in the U.S. would see the messages regardless of where they were shot and broadcast.

5. Find a celebrity who is currently appearing in an advertising campaign for a specific company or brand and use McCracken’s meaning transfer model (shown in Figure 6-3) to analyze the use of this individual as a spokesperson. (LO 6-2) McCracken‘s meaning transfer model provides a very interesting perspective on celebrity endorsements. According to this model, a celebrity‘s effectiveness as an endorser depends on the culturally acquired meaning s/he brings to the endorsement process. Celebrities acquire these meanings from the roles they assume in their careers as entertainers, athletes, politicians, and other areas. They then bring these meanings into the advertisements in which they appear and transfer them to the product or service they are endorsing. Students should be asked to find a celebrity who is currently endorsing a product, service or company and analyze his or her endorsement effectiveness in terms of McCracken‘s model. They should discuss how the celebrity acquired his or her meaning and whether it transfers well to the company or brand they are endorsing. For example, actor Paul Hogan was a spokesperson for the Subaru Outback SUV when it was introduced to the U.S. market in the late ‘90s. Hogan acquired his cultural meaning primarily from the role he played in the Crocodile Dundee movies as a rugged, tough guy from the Australian Outback (Stage 1 of the model). He was an excellent choice as a spokesperson for the Outback as Subaru wanted to position the new vehicle

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

as a vehicle that combines rough-terrain driving capability with the ride and comfort of a passenger car, and the use of Hogan helps create this image. Subaru‘s use of Hogan provides a clever play off of the Outback name as well as an opportunity to transfer Hogan‘s tough and rugged image to the vehicle (Stage 2 of the model). Consumers may choose the Outback since they may be looking for these attributes when they purchase a new car, particularly if they internalize the image of the vehicle as durable and rugged (Stage 3 of the model). Students should be encouraged to choose a current example of a celebrity who is a popular endorser and analyze the use of this person as an advertising spokesperson by using the meaning transfer model.

6. Discuss the rise in popularity of YouTube stars such as Smosh, the Fine Brothers, and Dude Perfect among young people. Do you think these YouTube personalities can replace more traditional celebrities such as athletes, actor, and entertainers as advertising spokespersons?

(LO 6-2) It is not surprising that YouTube stars have become very popular among young people, given the amount of time they spent watching videos on the site. A 2017 study commissioned by AwesomenessTV, which produces video for 31 different platforms, found that on average, teens spend 34 percent of their video time watching YouTube, compared to 27 percent watching Netflix, and 14 percent watching live TV. Young people enjoy watching comedy videos, which explains the popularity of Smosh, the Fine Brothers, and Nighahiga. Many young people also enjoy playing video games and watching gamers such a PewDiePie in action.

It is unlikely that YouTube personalities will completely replace traditional celebrities as advertising spokespersons for companies targeting young people as actors and entertainers are still popular among this age group. However, research conducted by brand strategist Jeetender Sehdev found that YouTube celebrities score significantly higher than traditional celebrities do across a number of characteristics that influence the purchase behavior of teens. The YouTube personalities were found to be perceived as more engaging, extraordinary, and relatable than mainstream celebrities. He also found that teens have a more intimate authentic experience with YouTube personalities, as they do not feel that public relations professionals orchestrate their images. While the use of endorsements in advertisements is unlikely to go away, it is likely that marketers will make more use of social stars and personalities versus traditional celebrities, particularly since young people are spending more time with social media than traditional media.

7. Discuss the pros and cons of marketers using a two-sided message as well as a refutational appeal as the basis for their advertising messages. Find an example of an advertisement that uses one of these types of message appeals and discuss why the marketer might be using it. (LO 6-3) A two-sided message presents both good and bad points with the thought that acknowledging a shortcoming can be a way to increase message or brand credibility. A two-sided message is more effective when the target audience holds an opposing opinion or is highly educated. Two-sided messages can enhance the credibility of the source. Many brands choose not to use a two-sided message as they are concerned with the potential negative impacts that could stem from them acknowledging a flaw or weakness of their brand or product. A refutational appeal involves the communicator presenting both sides of an issue and then refuting the opposing viewpoint. Because refutational appeals tend to ―inoculate‖ the target audience against a competitor‘s counterclaims, they can be more effective than one-sided messages in making consumers resistant to an opposing message. Refutational messages may be useful when marketers wish to build attitudes that resist change and/or must defend against attacks or criticism of their products or the company. Domino‘s ―Oh Yes We Did‖ campaign provides a good example of a two-sided message. This campaign showed the Domino‘s CEO listening to focus groups regarding consumer‘s issues or concerns about

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

the Domino‘s brand. By acknowledging their shortcomings, Domino‘s showed consumers that the company was listening to consumers and changing their performance based on consumer feedback.

While some brands are concerned with the potential negative coming from acknowledging their weaknesses, the Domino‘s brand saw positive results from this campaign and likely chose this approach as their competitors could have been criticized for not listening to consumers and not acknowledging their pitfalls.

8. Go to the website for the Montana Meth Projects (http://www.montanameth.org) and choose three ads that use various levels of fear in the message. Discuss why each ad may or may not be effective. (LO 6-3) The Montana Meth project website contains may example of print and television commercials that utilize fear appeals. The level of fear used in these ads varies and student should be able to find examples of ads with low, medium, and high levels of fear that can be analyzed for this assignment.

Fear can affect persuasion in both a positive and negative manner. A message with a low level of fear can have facilitating effects if it attracts the attention and interest of the consumer and motivates them to consider how they might try to resolve the threat. This suggests that a mild fear appeal may be effective in changing attitudes and behavior of as it may get them to think about the negative consequences involved and think about how they might avoid them. Fear appeals can also have a negative or inhibiting effect, and a message that uses too much fear may cause people to tune it out, perceive it selectively, counterargue against it, or discount the likelihood of the negative consequences happening to them. One potential problem with anti-messages targeted at young people is that they tend to perceive themselves as invulnerable, and thus they may discount any negative outcomes shown in the message as unlikely to occur to them.

A number of factors should be taken into consideration in developing a fear appeal message. Young people are a market segment that may require special consideration when using a fear appeal message. This audience may be likely to discount fear appeal messages that are too strong or seen as too unrealistic. The credibility of the source used in the message may be very important and consideration given to using a source with whom this group identifies and might not easily derogate.

Research on fear appeals has shown that they are more effective among nonusers of a product than users. Thus, it may be more effective to target fear appeals at those peers who are not using drugs and encourage them to take responsibility for their friends who might do so. An example of this is the designated driver program and responsible drinking campaigns used by liquor and beer companies.

9. Discuss the pros and cons of using humor as the basis for an advertising appeal. Find an example of an advertising message that uses humor and evaluate it effectiveness. (LO 6-3) Humorous ads are often the best known and best remembered of all advertising messages. Many advertisers, including FedEx, GEICO, Old Spice, Snickers, Budweiser, and Bud Light use humor appeals effectively. Humor is usually presented primarily through TV commercials and online video and to a lesser extent through radio as these media lend themselves to the execution of humorous messages. However, humor is occasionally used in print ads as well, as agency creatives can use images in combination with clever headlines and ad copy to develop humorous messages. The sermon ad for Listerine mouthwash shown in Exhibit 6–21 is a very good example of how humor is used effectively in print media.

Humorous messages attract and hold consumers‘ attention. They enhance effectiveness by putting consumers in a positive mood, increasing their liking of the ad itself and their feeling toward the product or service. In addition, humor can distract the receiver from counterarguing against the message. A meta-analytic test of various models of how humor works in advertising showed that its effects are primarily based on affective processes and that it can distract from the processing of

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

cognitive information such as brand beliefs and benefits. This suggests that the peripheral processing of humorous messages is dominant and that effort devoted to processing of ad-related affective elements comes at the expense of attention to brand-related cognitions.

Critics argue that funny ads draw people to the humorous situation but distract them from the brand and its attributes. Also, effective humor can be difficult to produce and some attempts are too subtle for mass audiences. In addition, there is concern that humorous ads may wear out faster than serious appeals. Wearout refers to the tendency of a television or radio commercial to lose its effectiveness when it is seen and/or heard repeatedly. Wearout may occur if consumers no longer pay attention to a commercial after several exposures or become annoyed at seeing or hearing an ad multiple times.

Some experts argue that humorous ads wear out faster than other formats because once the consumer gets the joke, the ad becomes boring. However, advocates of humor argue that funny ads are effective longer as consumers will respond more favorably to a well-executed humorous ad than a serious message. One way marketers deal with this problem is by creating "pool-outs" or multiple executions around a campaign theme that can be rotated so no one ad airs repeatedly during a short time period.

For example, large advertisers such as GEICO, FedEx, and Anheuser-Busch InBev generally have a number of commercials available to rotate. However, this can be a problem for smaller companies that do not have a large enough budget to produce multiple commercials.

10. IMC Perspective 6-1 discusses the comparative advertising battle between AB InBev and MillerCoors over the use of corn syrup in Miller Lite and Coors Light beer. Do you think the Bud Light ads that accuse Miller Lite and Coors Light of using corn syrup are misleading?

Which company do you side with in this controversy? (LO 6-3) The Bud Light advertisements which accuse Miller Lite and Coors Light of using corn syrup are not misleading. They are accusatory, but the Miller Lite and Coors Light brands could have responded saying that corn syrup has been a staple in the beer industry for decades and it is what makes their beer better tasting than Bud Light‘s. Bud Light is within its rights to highlight differences between the brands. The presence of corn syrup and high fructose corn syrup would be something consumers would want to be made aware of and if the Bud Light brand does not use this ingredient and their competitors do, this is a key difference between the brands that the brand should be able to highlight.

As consumers are becoming more health-conscious and want to know what ingredients are in the products they consume, this could be a major transparency issue for the beer industry as a whole that Bid Light has brought to light and Bud Light will have a major advantage over those competitors that do use corn syrup in their recipes.

11. What is meant by a qualitative media effect? Choose a television program or magazine and discuss the reception environment created by the show or publication. What type of companies or brands might be interested in advertising on this program or in this magazine? (LO 6-4) A qualitative media effect refers to the positive or negative influence a media vehicle has on an advertising message as a function of its quality, image, prestige, and the reception environment it creates. Media vehicles such as magazines and television programs have qualitative effects since the environment they create may have an impact on readers‘ or viewers‘ mood states and the way they might process and respond to an advertisement. Students should be encouraged to choose a specific magazine and analyze the media environment created by that publication or a television program. A publication such as Cosmo or Vogue will be very different from Good Housekeeping or McCall’s in terms of layout, articles, photographs, and the various products and services that are advertised.

Students should be asked to describe these differences and how they might influence the way readers might respond differently to ads in these publications. For television, a popular sitcom such as The Big Bang Theory or Modern Family provides a much different reception environment than a drama or serious news program such as 60 Minutes. Viewers of a sitcom are likely to be in a more light-hearted

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

mood and respond more favorably to advertising than consumers watching more serious programming. Marketers recognize the value of this and often will pay higher CPM rates for ad time on sitcoms.

Additional Discussion Questions (not in text) 12. Most marketers choose an advertising spokesperson or source with high credibility. Discuss some reasons why it may be unnecessary, or even detrimental, to use a source who is high in credibility. (LO 6-2) There are some situations where high source credibility may not be necessary and may even be a liability. A high credibility source is likely to be most effective when message recipients are opposed to the position advocated in the message, as the credible communicator will inhibit counterarguing and source derogation. However, a high-credibility source may not be needed when the audience has a neutral position and may even be less effective than a moderately credible source when the receiver‘s initial attitude is favorable. The reason for this is that when a low credibility source is used, the message recipients are encouraged to review personal thoughts that are supportive of their favorable position rather than attributing their feelings to the highly credible communicator. Studies have also shown that high- and low-credibility sources are equally effective when they are arguing for a position opposing their own best interest. Another reason why a low-credibility source may be as effective as a high-credibility source is the sleeper-effect phenomenon. While the immediate impact of a persuasive message may be inhibited because of its association with a low-credibility source, the association of the message with the source diminishes over time and the receiver‘s attention focuses on the information in the message. Thus, the positive effects of using a high-credibility source will diminish over time as will the initial negative impact of using a low-credibility source.

13. What is meant by a primacy versus recency effect? When might an advertiser want to try and achieve each type of effect? (LO 6-3) Primacy and recency effects deal with the order of argument placement in a persuasive message.

Research on learning and memory generally indicates that items presented at the beginning or end of a message are remembered better than those presented in the middle. Presenting the strongest arguments at the beginning of the message assumes a primacy effect whereby information presented first is most effective. Putting the strongest points at the end of the message assumes a recency effect, whereby the last arguments presented are most effective. The decision to place strong arguments at the beginning or end of a message often depends on several factors including the initial position of the target audience and the length of the message. If the audience is opposed to the advertiser‘s position, it may be best to put the strongest arguments first to reduce the level of counterarguing. It may also be best to put strong arguments first if the audience has a low level of interest in the topic. However, if the audience is predisposed toward the communicator‘s position or is highly interested in the product or issue, strong arguments can be saved for the end of the message.

The order of presentation can be critical when a long, detailed message with many arguments is being presented. This may be the case for ads for high involvement products where a great deal of ad copy is used or for sales presentations. However, for short messages such as a 15-second commercial, the order of presentation may be less critical. Order of presentation is also of interest in placement of spot during a commercial break. Most advertisers prefer to have their commercials appear at the beginning or end of a pod rather than in the middle.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

14. Find examples of an advertising message or campaign that uses the company CEO, president, or founder as the spokesperson. Do you think this individual is an effective spokesperson for the company? Why or why not? (LO 6-2) There are several reasons why CEOs are used as an advertising spokesperson. First, they have very pleasant personalities and come across as authentic and genuine in the commercials for their companies. CEOs who are dull, boring, or fail to positively differentiate a company or brand are not very effective as consumers are looking for the CEO to be interesting, relevant, and truly understand consumer desires. The success of both Schnatter and Koch may also be due to the way they are used in the advertising for their companies. Both companies have adopted the CEO as ―front man‖ strategy and use their CEOs in most of their ads rather than just using them occasionally, which helps make the public more familiar with them. Consumers also may like the execution of the ads in which these corporate leaders appear. For example, Boston Beer runs commercials for its Samuel Adams brand that feature Jim Koch‘s commentary and tour of the beer brewing process, which resonates well with viewers. Schnatter appeared alongside of NFL star quarterback Peyton Manning who comes across very well in commercials, which may add to his popularity as an endorser.

Some companies feel that the use of a corporate leader as an advertising spokesperson is a way of expressing the company‘s commitment to the customer with respect to areas such as quality and customer service. The use of an owner or CEO of a company is seen as a way of giving a company a favorable image or identify among consumers. In some cases, a corporate leader may be very well known and respected and his or her popularity and/or favorable reputation may help enhance the image of the company. There are a number of potential problems associated with the use of a corporate leader as an advertising spokesperson. Many business leaders are not very good in front of a camera and do not make effective advertising spokespeople. They may not exude credibility or possess the type of image needed to be a good spokesperson for their company. Thus, the company may be spending money on advertising that is ineffective, or may even be perceived very negatively by consumers. Another problem with using a business leader as a spokesperson is that the image of the company may be tied too closely to that person and may create problems if this individual leaves the company or encounters some negative publicity.

Students should be encouraged to find an example of a current advertising campaign that uses the company CEO, president or founder as a spokesperson and evaluate whether s/he is effective. This strategy is very common in local marketers where retailers and automotive dealers often have their owners or CEOs appear in commercials.

15. The chapter opener discusses the series of problems Nike has had with some of its endorsers because of controversies that have arisen in their personal lives. Discuss how the problems surrounding these endorsers might impact the image and reputation of Nike. How long do you think Nike should stand by endorsers when they run into personal problems? (LO 6-2) Nike has had its share of problems with controversies involving its endorsers in recent years such as Kobe Bryant, Lance Armstrong, Tiger Woods, and Maria Sharapova. Some marketing experts note that the problems Nike has encountered with endorsers is not surprising given that it has so many athletes under contract around the globe, including the superstars in most sports. While the controversies involving these individuals are problematic, it is unlikely that they will have a significant impact on the company since Nike uses a myriad of athletes as endorsers and its image is not tied to just one of them. While problems with endorsers may not do too much damage to larger companies that have a stable of athletes endorsing its products, the effects can be very damaging to smaller companies whose brand is closely tied to, and often defined by, an athlete endorser. In an age where athletes and other celebrities have a myriad of platforms on which to speak such as Facebook and Twitter and the media are dedicating more resources than ever toward uncovering their

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

transgressions, what can companies do to protect themselves? Aside from language in the contract barring such behavior, the simplest answer is—very little. No matter how much money a company pays endorsers, it cannot monitor them around the clock. Instead, companies must be very selective in selecting endorsers and in how much they pay them.

The question of how long Nike should stand by endorsers when they run into personal problems is difficult to answer. The company has a policy of standing by its athlete endorsers for a long time— except in the most extreme cases—and the brand is strong enough to withstand these setbacks. For example, Nike continued to use Lance Armstrong for many years until he admitted to using performance enhancing drugs. Another example is professional golfer Tiger Woods who has had a number of personal problems that began in 2009 following a car accident after an argument with his wife, which led to intense media scrutiny and revelations of infidelity that resulted in a divorce. In 2017, Woods was arrested for driving under the influence of drugs that he was taking to relieve pain from several back surgeries. Thus far, Nike has continued to support Woods, although he is no longer the face of its golf division.

Decisions regarding when to terminate a relationship with an endorser often depend on the nature of the controversy involving the athlete. One such extreme case occurred in early 2016 when Nike terminated its relationship with Filipino boxing champion Manny Pacquiao one day after he made extremely derogatory statements about people in gay relationships during a media interview while he was running for political office in the Philippines. Pacquaio had won world championships in eight weight classes and was revered in the Philippines, as well as many other countries, for both his athletic success and his personal story, having risen from poverty to international stardom and political office. Nike announced that it found his comments abhorrent since the company opposes discrimination of any kind and has a history of supporting and standing up for the rights of the LGBT community.

16. Evaluate Domino’s decision to run an advertising campaign acknowledging the problems with the taste of its pizza as a way to promote its new recipe. Do you think this strategy was an effective way to promote its reformulated product? (LO 6-3) Domino‘s decision to use advertising acknowledging the problems with the taste of its pizza is an example of the use of a two-sided advertising message whereby a marketer presents both positive and negative information about a product or service. Most marketers use a one-sided message mentioning only positive attributes or benefits associated with a product/service or a particular issue whereas a two-sided message presents both favorable and unfavorable information and arguments. The advantages of using a two-sided versus one-sided advertising message are that it may enhance perceptions of an advertiser‘s credibility. One-sided messages are most often used since a company may only want to mention positive attributes, benefits or features or present only favorable arguments about its product or service. Many marketers feel it is too risky to say anything negative about their own company or brands. One-sided messages are most effective when the target audience already holds a favorable position toward the topic and will not hear opposing arguments. They may also work better with less educated audiences. For those individuals with an opposing viewpoint or a better-educated audience, a two-sided message may be seen as less biased, more credible, and thus more effective.

Domino‘s use of a two-sided message appears to have been a very effective strategy. The company knew there were problems with the quality and taste of its pizza, which was why they were reformulating the product. Rather than just announcing that it had changed its pizza, Domino‘s and its agency felt that it could get more attention and be perceived as more honest and sincere by acknowledging the problems. The company did take somewhat of a risk as consumers could focus only on the negative part of the message rather than hearing how they were improving the taste of

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

their pizza. This was not the case, however, as the Pizza Turnaround campaign worked very well and led to increased sales. Studies conducted on the two-sided messages showed that consumer reactions were very positive. The two-sided messages also generated a great deal of positive publicity as Dominos was praised for conceding the shortcomings of its product and taking steps to improve the taste.

17. Discuss the problem of advertising clutter and how it is a problem in various media such as magazines, television, and radio. What are some of the ways the media can address the clutter problem? (LO 6-4) An aspect of the media environment of importance to advertisers is the problems of clutter, which is the amount of advertising that appears in a medium. However, for television, clutter is often viewed as including all the nonprogram material that appears in the broadcast environment—commercials, promotional messages for shows, public service announcements (PSAs), and the like. Clutter is of increasing concern to advertisers since there are so many messages in various media competing for the consumer‘s attention. Half of the average magazine‘s pages contain ads, and in some publications the ratio of ads to editorial content is even higher. On average, around a quarter of a broadcast hour on TV is devoted to commercials, while most radio stations carry an average of 10 to 12 minutes of commercial time per hour. The average length of a commercial break during prime time on the major networks is just over three minutes, which means viewers are exposed to a large number of ads in a short time period, making it difficult for commercials to attract and hold the attention of viewers as well as communicate effectively.

Clutter has become a major concern among television advertisers as a result of increases in nonprogram time and the trend toward shorter commercials. While the 30-second commercial replaced 60-second spots as the industry standard in the 1970s, many advertisers are now using 15second spots. The advertising industry continues to express concern over the highly cluttered viewing environment on TV; the amount of clutter increased as much as 30 percent during the 1990s and has continued to increase over the past two decades. Several factors are causing the increased clutter including lower rating for TV shows as consumers spend more time online and the fact that many marketers are reducing their spending on television advertising and shifting these monies into digital ads. Thus, TV networks are inserting more commercials into programs to offset these factors and avoid revenue declines.

Clutter levels have been increasing as the four major broadcast networks and cable networks increased the amount of time allocated to commercials. Broadcast networks average just over 13 minutes of commercial time per hour, while cable averages nearly 15 minutes, with some networks higher. Thus, a viewer watching three hours of prime-time programs on the major networks would be exposed to more than 100 commercials in addition to programming promotions and PSAs. The problem is even greater during popular shows, to which the networks add more commercials because they can charge more. In addition, of course, advertisers and their agencies perpetuate the problem by pressuring the networks to squeeze their ads into top-rated shows with the largest audiences.

The clutter problem is even higher on many cable networks and during daytime programs. Recently some cable networks such as TBS and TNT have been using compression technology to speed up the transmission of programs and allow more time for commercials, which is adding to the clutter problem. Advertisers and agencies want the networks to commit to a minimum amount of program time and then manage the nonprogram portion however they see fit. If the networks wanted to add more commercials, it would come out of their promos, PSAs, or program credit time. The problem is not likely to go away, however, and advertisers will continue to search for ways to break through the clutter, such as using humor, celebrity spokespeople, or novel creative approaches.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

CHAPTER 7 ESTABLISHING OBJECTIVES AND BUDGETING FOR THE PROMOTIONAL PROGRAM Chapter Overview This chapter focuses on the process of setting objectives and budgeting for the IMC program. The major emphasis is on determining advertising objectives, as they are often the lead element in the promotional mix, particularly in consumer products marketing. This chapter stresses the value and importance of setting specific advertising objectives and the role they play in guiding decisions and evaluating performance. The chapter also focuses on the importance of knowing what to expect from advertising and the differences between sales versus communication objectives. The DAGMAR model is discussed as a viable approach to setting objectives with attention being given to the characteristics of good advertising goals and objectives. Limitations of DAGMAR are also discussed along with other problems firms encounter in setting objectives. The chapter then presents students with an understanding of the advertising and promotions budgeting process. The chapter discusses the theories underlying budgeting decisions and examines the various approaches to budgeting. The chapter concludes with an examination of budget allocation decisions.

Learning Objectives 1.

Discuss the value of setting objectives for advertising and promotion.

2.

Describe the relationship between promotional objectives and marketing objectives.

3.

Discuss sales versus communications objectives.

4.

Compare the value of sales objectives and communications objectives as goals for promotional programs.

5.

Describe the process of budgeting for IMC.

6.

Compare the economic and sales response perspectives on budgeting.

7.

Compare different methods of setting budgets.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Chapter and Lecture Outline I.

INTRODUCTION

The lead-in to this chapter discusses how the changing media environment is forcing marketers to reallocate their advertising expenditures. The chapter then moves into a discussion of the value of setting objectives. It is important to communicate to the student that while setting good objectives can be complex and difficult, it is important for this to be done properly as specific goals and objectives are the foundation upon which all promotional decisions are made. Despite the importance of setting specific advertising and promotional objectives, many companies fail to do so or set them in a manner that is inappropriate or inadequate for guiding the development of the promotional program and measuring its effectiveness. Part of the problem stems from the fact that many marketers are uncertain as to what advertising and promotion can or should do and/or prefer to use sales as an objective.

II.

THE VALUE OF OBJECTIVES

One of the reasons many companies fail to set specific objectives for their advertising and promotional programs is that they fail to recognize the value of doing so. There are several important reasons for setting advertising and promotional objectives: A.

Communications—Specific objectives serve as communication devices and facilitate the coordination of the various groups working on the campaign on both the agency and the client side. Problems can be avoided if all parties involved have a set of written and approved objectives to guide their decisions and actions.

B.

Planning and Decision Making—Specific objectives can be useful as a guide or criterion for decision making. Advertising and promotion planners are often faced with a number of strategic and tactical options in areas such as creative, media, budgeting, and sales promotion. Choices among these options should be made on the basis of how well a strategy or tactic matches the promotional objective.

C.

Measurement and Evaluation of Results—A very important reason for setting specific objectives is that they provide a benchmark or standard against which success or failure of the campaign can be measured. When specific objectives are set it becomes easier for management to measure what has been accomplished by the campaign. This has become more important as most organizations are concerned about the return on their promotional investment, so it is vital that marketers are able to set realistic objectives and then compare actual performance against measurable objectives to prove that the return justifies the expense.

Professor Notes:

III.

DETERMINING INTEGRATED MARKETING COMMUNICATION OBJECTIVES

The determination of objectives for integrated marketing communication occurs after a thorough situation analysis has been conducted and the marketing and promotional problems and opportunities have been identified. A thorough situation analysis is critical as this becomes the foundation upon which marketing

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

objectives are determined and the marketing plan is developed. Promotional objectives in turn evolve from the overall marketing plan and are rooted in the firm‘s marketing objectives.

A.

Marketing versus Communications Objectives—It is very important to emphasize to students the differences between marketing objectives versus communications objectives. Marketing objectives are generally stated in the firms marketing plan and are statements of what is to be accomplished by the overall marketing program within a given time period. Marketing objectives are usually defined in terms of specific, measurable outcomes such as sales volume, market share, profits, or return on investment. Objectives should be SMART (specific, measurable, attainable, realistic, and time-bounded). The achievement of marketing objectives will depend upon the proper coordination and execution of all the marketing mix elements, not just promotion.

Integrated marketing communications objectives are statements of what various aspects of the IMC program will accomplish. They should be based on the particular communication tasks that are required to deliver the appropriate message to the target audience. This requires the translation of general marketing goals into communication goals and specific objectives. Many promotional planners approach promotion from a communication perspective and view the objective of advertising in particular as that of communicating information or a sales message about a product or service. However, this is not always the case and leads to the debate over sales versus communication objectives.

Professor Notes:

IV.

SALES VERSUS COMMUNICATION OBJECTIVES

A.

Sales-Oriented Objectives—Many marketing managers view their advertising and promotional programs from a sales perspective and argue that sales or some related measure such as market share is the only meaningful goal for advertising and thus should be the basis for setting objectives. They take the position that the basic reason a firm spends money on advertising and promotion is to sell its products or services. Thus they argue that any monies spent on advertising should produce measurable sales results.

1. Problems with sales objectives—Problems with this approach include: •

Problems in achieving sales could be a function of other marketing mix variables such as product design or quality, packaging, distribution, or price.

•

Problems in achieving sales could be due to other macro factors such as the economy, competition, or consumer trends.

•

The carryover effect, which suggests that the effects of advertising on sales are not always immediate and occur over an extended time period.

•

Sales objectives offer little guidance or direction to those responsible for planning, developing and executing the promotional program.

2. Where sales objectives are appropriate—While there are problems in attempting to use sales as objectives for an advertising and promotional campaign, there are situations where they may be appropriate, such as:

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

•

When the promotional efforts are action-oriented in nature and are designed to induce a more immediate response. For example, many sales promotion programs have sales objectives since their goal is often to generate trial or short-term sales increases.

•

Direct response advertising which measures success of a campaign in terms of the sales response generated by an ad.

•

Retail advertising where short-term or direct action is sought such as during sales or special promotions.

•

In situations where advertising plays a dominant role in the marketing program and other factors are relatively stable.

Overall, advertising and promotional programs tend to be evaluated in terms of sales, particularly when expectations aren‘t being met. Thus, many marketing and brand managers under pressure to show positive sales results opt for short-term perspectives in evaluating advertising and sales promotion programs. While sales may not be an appropriate objective in many advertising situations, managers are likely to always keep a close eye on sales and market share and thus change a promotional program when those numbers decline.

B. Communications Objectives—Many marketers take the perspective that the primary role of promotional mix elements such as advertising is to communicate and effects should be based on communication objectives, recognizing the problems associated with sales-oriented objectives.

Advocates of communication objectives generally use some form of the hierarchical models discussed in Chapter 5 as a basis for setting advertising objectives. The underlying logic of these models is that as consumers pass through successive stages of the response hierarchy, they move closer to purchase, and advertising‘s purpose is to help move them through.

1. Communications effects pyramid—The text uses the communication effects pyramid (Figure 7-2) as a way of understanding the communication tasks to be performed by advertising and promotion. The marketer must accomplish lower level objectives such as awareness and knowledge/comprehension, which builds a strong foundation or base. Subsequent tasks involve moving consumers to higher levels in the pyramid in order to get them to the top where trial and regular use/repurchase occur. It is important, however, to point out that the percentage of prospective customers moving to each level will decline in most instances.

2. Problems with communications objectives—It should be noted that not all marketing and advertising managers accept the idea of using communication objectives. Accomplishing communication objectives is seen as being of value only if this results in sales. Moreover, translating a sales goal into communication objectives can be difficult. For example, you might discuss what constitutes an adequate level of awareness, knowledge, liking or conviction. The text provides a number of examples of communication objectives. While there are problems with communication-oriented objectives, it should be pointed out that at some point a company must determine what it hopes to communicate and to whom.

Communication objectives are the criterion used in the DAGMAR model, which has become one of the best known and most influential approaches to advertising planning.

Professor Notes:

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

V.

DAGMAR: AN APPROACH TO SETTING OBJECTIVES

DAGMAR (Defining Advertising Goals for Measured Advertising Results) is a model developed by Russell Colley for setting advertising objectives and measuring the results of a campaign against these objectives. Under DAGMAR, an advertising goal involves a communications task that is specific and measurable. A communications task involves something that can be performed by and attributed to advertising. Communication tasks in DAGMAR are based on a hierarchical model similar to those discussed in Chapter 5. While hierarchical communication effects form the basis of DAGMAR, there are other specific communications tasks that advertising might be expected to perform or help accomplish.

Colley proposed that the communications task be based on hierarchical model of the communication process with four stages:

A.

•

Awareness—making the consumer aware of the existence of the brand or company.

•

Comprehension—developing an understanding of what the product is and what it will do for the consumer.

•

Conviction—developing a mental disposition in the consumer to buy the product.

•

Action—getting the consumer to purchase the product.

Characteristics of Objectives—A major contribution of DAGMAR to the advertising planning process was Colley‘s specification of what constitutes a good objective. Four requirements or characteristics of good objectives were noted: 1. Concrete, measurable tasks—The communications task or objective should be a precise statement of what appeal or message the advertiser wants to communicate to the target audience. The objective should be measurable in that the method and criteria used for determining if it has been properly communicated should be specified.

2. Target audience—A good objective should specify a well-defined target audience. The target audience is usually identified in the situation analysis and may be based on the variables discussed in Chapter 2.

3. Benchmark and degree of change sought—Another important part of setting objectives is having benchmark measures to determine where the target audience stands at the beginning of the campaign with respect to various communication response variables such as awareness, knowledge, attitudes, image, etc. The objectives should also specify how much change or movement is being sought such as increase in awareness levels, creation of favorable attitudes or number of consumers intending to purchase the brand, etc.

4. Specified time period—A final characteristic of good objectives is the specification of the time period during which the objective is to be accomplished. The time period should be appropriate for the communication objective, as simple tasks such as increasing awareness levels can be accomplished much faster than a complex goal such as repositioning a brand.

B.

Assessment of DAGMAR—There are certain problems and limitations to DAGMAR that have prevented DAGMAR from being accepted by everyone in the advertising field. These include: ●

Problems with the response hierarchy—Reliance on traditional hierarchical type response models is a problem in the original version of DAGMAR. However, the updated version of the model, DAGMAR MOD II, recognizes the need for a modified response hierarchy that is appropriate to the buying situation such as in high- versus low-involvement purchases or generally identifying the sequence of decision-making steps that apply in a buying situation.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

●

Sales objectives—Proponents of sales objectives argue that communication objectives advocated by DAGMAR are a ―cop-out‖ and a way of ignoring the basic goal of advertising which is to generate sales. They argue that since a communication objective is of interest only if it can be shown to be related to sales, why not simply use sales as the objective?

●

Practicality and costs—DAGMAR is criticized for being difficult to implement and practical only for big companies with large marketing and advertising research budgets who can afford to establish quantitative benchmarks and measure communication results.

●

Inhibition of creativity—DAGMAR is also criticized on the grounds that it can inhibit creativity by imposing too much influence or structure on creatives. The creative department may become too concerned with ―passing the numbers test‖ rather than developing great ideas that result in unique and effective advertising. Many advertising people have blamed the lack of great creative ideas and campaigns in the U.S. in recent years on an overquantification of advertising objectives.

Professor Notes:

McGraw-Hill Connect ®: Communication Effects Pyramid Type of Activity: Click and Drag Activity Summary: In this activity, students will identify the correct sequence of the various stages in the consumer decisionmaking process. They will then read about the Sunday Motor Corporation, an Asian automaker launching a new SUV. To track the effectiveness of the IMC campaign, Sunday Motor Corporation hired AutoSmart, a research and consulting firm that specialized in the automotive industry. Students will match the research findings from AutoSmart‘s reports to the corresponding stages in the Communications Effects Pyramid and the GfK Purchase Funnel.

Activity Learning Objective: 07-03 Discuss sales versus communications objectives.

Concept Review: Advertising and promotion perform communications tasks in the same way that a pyramid is built, by first accomplishing lower level objectives and subsequently moving to higher level objectives. The initial stages are easier to accomplish than those towards the top, and hence the percentage of prospective consumers will decline as one moves up the pyramid. The communications effects pyramid can also be used to determine promotional objectives for an established brand.

Difficulty: 2 Medium Bloom‘s: Analyze AACSB: Analytical Thinking

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

McGraw-Hill Connect ®: Employing the Dagmar Model in Setting and Measuring Objectives for Ready Rovers Type of Activity: Case Analysis Activity Summary: In this activity, students will read a case about the Ready Rover puppy training service, which is attempting to set its communication objectives using DAGMAR. They are then tasked with answering questions relating to objective-setting using DAGMAR. Activity Learning Objective: 07-04 Compare the value of sales objectives and communications objectives as goals for promotional programs.

Concept Review: The DAGMAR model proposes a communication process with four stages: Awareness (making the consumer aware of the existence of the brand or company); Comprehension (developing an understanding of what the product is and what it will do for the consumer); Conviction (developing a mental disposition in the consumer to buy the product); and Action (getting the consumer to purchase). Good objectives propose concrete, measurable tasks, have a well-defined target audience always in mind, have benchmarks and descriptions of the degree of change sought, and are proposed to be accomplished during a specified time period.

Difficulty: 1 Easy; 2 Medium; 3 Hard Bloom‘s: Apply AACSB: Analytical Thinking

VI.

PROBLEMS IN SETTING OBJECTIVES

Most advertisers and their agencies fail to follow the basic principles and guidelines set forth in DAGMAR. They often fail to set specific objectives for their campaigns and/or do not have the proper evidence to determine the success of their promotional programs.

A.

Improving Promotional Planners‘ Use of Objectives—Advertisers and their agencies should strive to set specific and measurable objectives that serve as a guide to promotional planning and decision making. Part of this problem stems from a lack of understanding of the role and function of advertising. It is unlikely that most firms are going to set objectives following all of the criteria set forth in DAGMAR. However, promotional planners should set objectives that are specific and measurable and go beyond simple sales goals.

B.

Setting Objectives for the IMC Program—Most of the attention in the promotional area has focused on advertising since it is often the lead element in the promotional mix and advertising has traditionally been the major way of communication with target audiences. Other promotional mix elements such as sales promotion, direct marketing, and publicity are used to support and complement the advertising program. Advertising-based views of marketing communications planning, such as DAGMAR, have dominated the field for many years. However, as more companies adopt IMC, they are considering how the various promotional mix tools can be used to communicate with their customers.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Advocates of IMC have called for new approaches to promotional planning and IMC. For example, Professor Don Schultz of Northwestern University advocates the use of an outside-in planning process to IMC that starts with the customer and builds backwards to the brand rather than inside-out planning. Professor Tom Duncan argues that IMC should use zero-based communications planning, which involves determining what tasks need to be done and which marketing communications functions should be used and to what extent. This approach focuses on the task to be accomplished and searches for the best ideas and ways of accomplishing it.

Duncan suggests that an effective IMC program leads with the marketing communication function that most effectively addresses the company‘s problem or opportunity.

It should be noted that the criteria discussed in determining advertising objectives are relevant to other promotional mix elements as well. A more thorough discussion of objectives for promotional mix elements such as sales promotion, publicity/public relations, and personal selling is provided in the chapters where these topics are covered.

The consumer decision journey (as discussed in Chapter 5) is again addressed here. This journey necessitates the establishment of communications objectives, and Figure 7-5 shows the consumer decision journey as well as the objectives that marketers need to accomplish at each stage and the marketing responses necessary to help achieve those objectives.

Professor Notes:

VII.

ESTABLISHING AND ALLOCATING THE PROMOTIONAL BUDGET

As noted in the text, the budgeting decision is not a trivial matter. Whether the firm is spending millions of dollars or thousands, this decision will have a direct impact on the success of the communications program. As can be seen by examining the decision sequence model presented in Chapter 1, budgeting decisions are not made in isolation. These decisions require an interactive process in which the communications objectives must be taken into consideration. Likewise, the budget directly impacts the promotional mix strategies that are to be developed. The flow between the communications analysis and budget determination is a two-way interaction, meaning that while establishing objectives is an important part of the planning process, recognizing the limits of one‘s budget is important as well. Thus, both the size of the budget, and the way that it will be allocated must be given much attention.

A.

Establishing the Budget—One of the most critical decisions facing the marketing manager is determining how much to spend on the promotional effort. However, many marketing managers fail to recognize the value of advertising and promotion and treat promotional efforts as an expense rather than as an investment. Because of this, when times are tough, the advertising budget is often the first to be cut. While budgeting is one of the most critical decisions, it has been the most resistant to change in the advertising industry. In fact, budgeting approaches have changed little in the past 10 years, often following an approach based on contribution margin— the difference between the total revenue generated by a brand and its total variable costs.

1. Theoretical issues in budget setting—Most of the models used to establish advertising budgets can be categorized as taking an advertising or sales response perspective. In this section, we discuss some of them.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

o

Marginal analysis—Figure 7-8 in the text illustrates the concept of marginal analysis.

As the figure indicates, as advertising/promotional efforts increase, sales and gross margins will also increase to a point and then level off. In using marginal analysis, the firm would continue to spend promotional dollars so long as the marginal revenues created by these expenditures exceeded the incremental costs. When the dollar expenditures exceed the returns, the budget should be scaled back. In other words, the optimal budget would be at that point where marginal revenues are equal to marginal costs. While this economic model seems logical intuitively, in fact, there are two major weaknesses that limit its applicability: (1) The assumption that sales are a direct measure of advertising and promotions efforts, and (2) the assumption that sales are determined solely by advertising and promotions. Today, because of the difficulties associated with determining the effects of the promotional effort on sales and revenues, the applicability of marginal analysis is limited and is seldom used as a basis for budgeting (except for direct-response advertising).

o

Sales response models—Two budgeting models based on sales response are discussed in the text. The first of these—the concave-downward function model—is based on the microeconomic theory of the law of diminishing returns. Essentially, the model states that as the amount of advertising expenditures increases, its incremental value decreases. The basic argument is that those most likely to buy the product are likely to do so as a result of the earliest exposures to the advertising. Additional exposures are not likely to increase the probability of their purchasing, nor is it likely to have an effect on those who are undecided or unlikely to buy. Thus, the effects of advertising would rapidly diminish.

The second model—the S-shaped response curve—takes a very different approach. In this model, it is argued that initial outlays of promotional dollars will have very little impact on sales. As indicated in Figure 7-9B, in Range B an impact will begin to be noticed, carrying through to Range C, where additional expenditures have again very little impact. This S-shaped curve suggests that there are incremental values to be accrued from additional dollar outlays, but only to a point. For example, it would be argued that a certain level of expenditures is necessary to make an impact. However, after a certain point (beginning of Range C) these dollars are unlikely to be of value. In other words, no matter how much I spend, if you don‘t want the product, advertising isn‘t going to make you buy. As with marginal analysis, the marketer would want to establish the budget at the point where s/he gets the optimal value for the outlay.

Weaknesses in these sales response models render them of limited use to practitioners for direct application. The measurement problems, use of sales as a dependent variable, and other issues limit these models‘ usefulness.

o

Additional factors considered in budget setting—In addition to considering the theoretical aspects of budget setting, a number of other factors must be taken into consideration including: situational factors; customer factors; the competitive environment; etc. Figures 7-10 and 7-11 can be used to demonstrate this point quite effectively and are useful to provide a perspective of what advertisers and their agencies consider the most important factors to consider in setting the budget.

Professor Notes:

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

B.

Budgeting Approaches—This section discusses the variety of approaches that marketers use in establishing their budgets. These approaches can be classified as either top-down or build-up approaches (see Figure 7-12).

1. Top-down approaches—In these methods of budgeting, the budget is established at the ―top‖ by management and is passed down to various departments. Top-down approaches generally include the following: •

The affordable method—(Also called the ―all-you-can-afford method.) In this approach, the firm determines what level of advertising and promotions expenditures they feel they can afford, and set this amount as the ad budget. This approach is quite common among small firms but is also be used by large firms. The logic of this approach stems from ―We can‘t be hurt with this method.‖ While this may be true, often times when this approach is used, firms do not allocate enough money to get the product off the ground and into the market.

•

Arbitrary allocation—When budgets are set through arbitrary allocation, there is no real rhyme or reason for the amount established. Management establishes the budget on the basis of what is felt to be necessary. Sad as this may seem, the truth is that for many firms this is the method employed.

•

Percentage of sales—Perhaps the most commonly employed method of setting budgets in large firms is the percentage-of-sales method. As noted in the text, there are a number of variations on this method, as some firms use a flat percentage of sales figure, while others may assign a percentage of the product cost to advertising with the budget based on the number of units sold (see Figure 7-13). In addition, another variation stems from which year is considered the base year for sales. One approach uses past sales histories, while the second—a percentage of projected future sales—uses projected sales figures.

Many firms employ both methods, with a projection used for planning, and the final budget adjusted according to actual sales. Figure 7-14 provides advertising-to-sales ratios by industry sector. The pros and cons of the percentage of sales approach are discussed in the text.

•

Competitive parity—In the competitive parity method, budgets are set by matching the percentage advertising/sales ratios of competitors. There are a number of ways that managers find this information. Schonfeld and Associates publishes the percentage of sales figures by product type, and this method would be easily demonstrated in the classroom. Figure 7-14 can be used to show some percentage of sales figures, and the instructor can explain that in using a competitive parity method, companies competing in the same industries would have equal or nearly equal ratios. Smaller companies often use a clipping service, which clips competitors‘ ads from local print media allowing companies to work backwards to determine the cost of ads placed.

•

Return on investment (ROI)—One of the most discussed topics in recent years is that of how to determine ROI. The basis of the ROI budgeting method approach is that advertising expenditures should be considered as an investment, returning sales as a result. Unfortunately, for many of the reasons cited in the text, the ability to demonstrate this relationship is very difficult.

•

Summary of Top-Down Budgeting Methods—While many of the budgeting methods discussed have serious drawbacks, it is important for students to still understand these

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

budgeting methods as these are the budgeting methods most often employed by marketers. In fact, the affordable, competitive parity, percentage of sales, and objective and task methods are those most commonly employed.

2. Build-up approaches—The major flaw of top-down methods is that they are often not linked to objectives. A more effective method of budgeting is that offered by build-up approaches.

In build-up approaches, specific objectives are established, and budgets are determined based on the costs required to attain these goals. Three such approaches are discussed in the text.

C.

o

Objective and task method—Figure 7-18 demonstrates the steps required in using the objective and task approach. As can be seen, the process involves using a build-up approach consisting of three steps: establishing objectives, determining the specific tasks associated with attaining these objectives, and determining the costs associated with these tasks. Monitoring and re-evaluation of these steps is critical to the success of this method.

The major advantage of this approach is that the budget is driven by the objectives. The major disadvantage is the difficulty of determining which tasks will be required and how much those tasks will cost.

•

Payout planning—By projecting the revenues that a product is expected to return over a period of two to three years, the marketer can develop a payout plan. Based on this expected rate of return, the marketer can assist in the determination of the advertising expenditures necessary. An example of a payout plan is presented in Figure 7-20. The use of the payout planning method in conjunction with the objective and task method provides managers with a much more logical approach to setting the budget than the topdown approaches.

•

Quantitative models—As noted in the text, quantitative models have not met with the success that might have been expected of them. Most of these models have employed computer simulation models using statistical techniques such as the use of multiple regression analysis using sales as the dependent variable, which may account for much of the problem.

•

Summary of Budgeting Methods—Figure 7-21 provides the results of a study by Low and Mohr regarding the advertising budget setting process. As can be seen, the nature of the decision process and a variety of factors have been shown to come into play in this decision.

Allocating the Budget—A number of factors influence marketers in their determinations as to how the budgets will be allocated. Recent years have seen a shifting of advertising dollars to other media including the Internet and nontraditional media. A variety of factors must be considered in determining how advertising and promotional dollars will be allocated.

1. Allocating to IMC elements—Many advertisers are now shifting their budget dollars away from traditional ad media to digital and social media. Marketers have also used the allocation decision to stretch advertising dollars such as to consolidate and cut division expenditures, reduce agency fees, produce fewer campaigns, and rely more on targeted media.

2. Client–agency policies—Corporate politics, policies, etc. may all impact the allocation of advertising and promotions dollars. As noted, agencies and advertisers may both have their preferences as to how monies will be spent.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

3. Market size—The size of the market will often determine how much money needs to be allocated therein. For example, smaller markets may charge less for media time, may be more easily covered, etc. than larger ones.

4. Market potential—Certainly the potential of the market must be considered. The previously discussed concept of target marketing would dictate that market potential should be considered in the budget allocation decision.

5. Market share goals—The market share goals established by the firm—that is, increasing or maintaining share—will impact the allocation decision. A study by John Jones concluded that (1) new brands generally receive higher than average advertising support; (2) older, more mature brands are often ―milked‖—that is, advertising expenditures are reduced; and (3) there is an advertising economy of scale operating.

In another study, James Schroer suggests that to have a growing market share marketers should: •

Segment markets and focus on those where competition is weak.

•

Determine competitors‘ cost positions (how long can competitors spend at current or increased rate).

•

Resist the lure of short-term profits that result from ad budget cuts.

•

Consider niching strategies rather than long-term wars.

6. Economies of scale in advertising—Some practitioners believe that there are economies of scale that accrue to marketers holding large market shares, which allows them to spend less money due to their past successes. As noted in the text, there is little or no evidence to support this theory, and some studies show that an opposite effect may occur.

7. Organizational characteristics—After reviewing the literature, Low and Mohr conclude that a number of organizational factors influence the budget allocation decision. These factors include: •

The organization‘s structure.

•

Power and politics in the organizational hierarchy.

•

The use of expert opinions such as consultants.

•

Characteristics of the decision maker.

•

Approval and negotiation channels.

•

Pressure on senior managers to arrive at an optimal budget.

Professor Notes:

McGraw-Hill Connect ®: Budgeting Approaches

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Type of Activity: Click and Drag Activity Summary: In this activity, students will match the budgeting approaches with the disadvantages associated with each of the methods.

Activity Learning Objective: 07-07 Compare different methods of setting budgets.

Concept Review: There are two broad budgeting approaches for setting advertising and promotions budgets—top-down and build-up. In top-down budgeting methods, a budgetary amount is established, usually at an executive level, and then monies are passed down to form the promotional budget. These budgets are predetermined and have no true theoretical bases. In contrast, build-up budgeting methods are those in which the firm's communications objectives are considered, the strategies and tasks needed to achieve them are identified, and the estimated total cost for those strategies and tasks forms the promotional budget.

Difficulty: 2 Medium Bloom‘s: Understand AACSB: Analytical Thinking

McGraw-Hill Connect ®: Allocating the Promotional Budget Among Brand Managers Type of Activity: Case Analysis Activity Summary: Bee & Gee is a multi-product, multi-brand, packaged goods company with a significant presence in the personal care and grooming category. Within each product category, it has numerous brands that sometimes compete with each other in the same geographical markets. Bee & Gee allocates its annual promotional budget for each product category using a top-down budgeting approach, after which brand managers of brands in each product category compete for promotional dollars for their own brand by submitting budget proposals. This activity provides students with a case about the Bee & Gee brand and a summary of four brands in the shampoo category at Bee & Gee. They are then asked to answer questions where they select the best answer for each question related to their promotional budget.

Activity Learning Objectives: 07-05 Describe the process of budgeting for IMC. 07-06 Compare the economic and sales response perspectives on budgeting.

Concept Review: Once the promotional budget has been set, the next step is to allocate it. The allocation decision involves determining which markets, products, and/or promotional elements will receive which amounts of the funds appropriated. Some factors that influence budget allocation are—IMC element mix, client–agency

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

policies, market size, market potential, market share goals, economies of scale in advertising, and organizational characteristics of the marketer's firm.

Difficulty: 3 Hard Bloom‘s: Apply AACSB: Analytical Thinking

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Teaching Suggestions We feel that from an integrated marketing communications planning perspective, this is one of the most important chapters in the text. It is very important for students to understand the importance of setting good objectives to guide the planning and development of an advertising campaign. Objectives are also important for providing a benchmark or standard against which performance can be measured and evaluated. This chapter builds on material in previous chapters, particularly Chapters 2 and 5, as it stresses the difference between marketing and sales versus communication objectives and the role of advertising in influencing sales. The DAGMAR model relies heavily on the response hierarchy models discussed in Chapter 5. Students should recognize that the specific communication objectives that are appropriate will vary depending on the buying situation.

The DAGMAR model is discussed in detail as a viable approach to setting advertising objectives. A very valuable aspect of Colley‘s work on DAGMAR is the specification of the characteristics of good objectives which are discussed in the text. While most companies are not going to meet all of the criteria set forth in DAGMAR, it is important that students recognize the characteristics of good objectives.

Another important issue to address in discussing this material is the difference between sales versus communication objectives. We discuss the basic characteristics of each, when they are appropriate, and problems with using sales and communication objectives. The instructor may want to find some examples of campaigns that have won awards and/or have been very effective from a communications perspective but not in terms of sales. The discussion can focus on the role of advertising and whether there are other problems or factors that may be inhibiting sales. A very good and interesting example which might be used here is to demonstrate that an advertising campaign can impact sales is presented in the discussion on GEICO. Some instructors may wish to divide the lecture into two sessions. The first can be devoted to discussing the objective setting process and the second on budgeting. In the budgeting session, we usually start the lecture with the theoretical perspective, explaining the two advertising/sales response models discussed in the text. A discussion and evaluation of each of the budgeting methods usually follows. (For example, Figure 7-13 can be very useful in demonstrating the percentage-of-sales method. It could also be noted that many companies use this as a guide in setting their budgets to remain at competitive parity.) The budget allocation decision is illustrated very well by showing Competitive Media Reporting examples of monies and percentages of budgets assigned to the media this service tracks.

It is important for the instructor to demonstrate some of the strengths and weaknesses associated with both the theoretical models and the budgeting methods themselves. The major problem with the former is the fact that sales are used as the dependent variable. Students need to know that while it is sales (or some other behavior) that is ultimately sought, it is often very difficult to demonstrate directly the advertising/sales relationship—which to a large degree explains why regression-based models have also had limited success. The chapter‘s discussion of ROI demonstrates both the importance and frustration involved in attempting to make this determination. Likewise, the budgeting methods discussed are also fraught with weaknesses the student must be aware of. An effective way of demonstrating this for the bottom-up methods is to ask students to prepare a fictional budget for a product. They will very quickly realize the problems associated with trying to determine payouts and assigning costs to the tasks required to attain specific objectives.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Answers to Discussion Questions 1. The chapter lead-in discusses the state of some companies that have been around for seemingly forever. Kraft Heinz, J.C. Penney and Kmart are all experiencing difficulties right now. Discuss some of the mistakes companies like Kraft Heinz have made in budgeting and what they might do to turn their lost sales around. (LO 7-4) The Kraft Heinz brand uses a somewhat controversial toll called zero-based budgeting (ZBB), which the brand claims helps to keep costs low and profit margins high. With ZBB, managers have to justify their spending each year, making it much more difficult for them to allocate to growth and innovation. Additionally, the Kraft Heinz brands allocates much less of their budget to advertising and marketing when compared to their competitors. The brand has also cut back on in-store promotions and discounts. Heinz, like a lot of companies, undervalued the benefits of advertising and promotional marketing efforts and cut back on these efforts in a cost-saving effort. In order to correct this budget mishap, managers for Kraft Heinz should, along with a percentage-of-sales approach, work to 1) employ a comprehensive strategy to guide the process, avoiding the piecemeal approach often employed, (2) develop a strategic planning framework that employs an integrated marketing communications philosophy, (3) build in contingency plans, (4) focus on long-term objectives, and (5) consistently evaluate the effectiveness of programs.

2. Some very successful companies have gained sales and market share by increasing their advertising budgets during a recession. Explain why this could be a successful strategy. (LO 77) Companies like P&G and Kraft are successful for a reason. That reason is making sound marketing decisions. Many companies treat advertising and promotions as an expense rather than an investment, with the first budgets to get cut when sales begin to decline are those of marketing. While common, this is not likely to be an effective strategy. Companies like P&G and Kraft have determined this and typically do not make cuts.

If one recognizes that advertising as an investment rather than in expense, it would make more sense to increase expenditures during a downturn. In fact, that is what advertising is supposed to do—help sell the product. Reducing the budget is likely to lead to even further sales declines, given the reduction in support. It seems illogical to think, ―sales are going down, so let‘s cut our marketing efforts,‖ but that is what most companies do.

In addition, if competitors reduce their budgets, those who continue to allocate, or increase allocations, will experience a greater share of voice, as there will now be less advertising clutter in the marketplace. Kraft and P&G‘s ads will be even more likely to be seen. Many successful companies actually increase their advertising expenditures in hard times for these very reasons.

3. As more and more advertising dollars move to digital media, traditional media are losing revenue. Will traditional media no longer exist in the future? (LO 7-5) By 2019, digital‘s share of total advertising expenditures surpassed that of television. This shift has been led by younger generations (millennials and gen Zers) preferring digital and social media to traditional platforms. While this shift is occurring, it is unlikely that this will mean the end of traditional media. Advertising growth on traditional media may slow, but will still continue to grow, just at slower rates than digital and social spending. Another contributor to this shift to digital has been the growth of mobile marketing, which has been called the ―king of the digital world‖ with mobile ad expenditures predicted to exceed all traditional media ad spending by 2020. Some predict that this move to digital may be a bit pre-emptive as advertisers are still only experimenting with

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

digital and not certain that it works. For these reasons, it is unlikely that traditional media and advertising on traditional media will go away any time soon.

4. Discuss an example of how a company’s media strategy might change as they progress through a hierarchy of effects model (funnel). Choose any model you wish to use. (LO 7-4) Russell Colley proposed that communication tasks be based on a hierarchical model of the communication process that has four stages including: •

Awareness—making the consumer aware of the existence of the brand or company.

•

Comprehension—developing an understanding of what the product is and what it will do for the consumer.

•

Conviction—developing a mental disposition in the consumer to buy the product.

•

Action—getting the consumer to purchase the product.

In the awareness stage, a company would likely want to utilize mass media platforms in order to make the most consumers aware as possible. National television campaigns or radio advertisements would be good strategies to increase awareness. To move consumers to comprehension, media might be more focused on providing more product-relevant information and might take the form of longform copy magazine advertisements or the like. In conviction, strategies might focus their advertising efforts on showing consumers the benefits of their product over a competitors and providing them with a promotional incentive such as a coupon or point-of-purchase material. Finally, in the action stage, the company could use action advertising, which emphasizes that the consumer needs to act right away to not miss out on the opportunity.

5. Explain why it is so difficult to use sales as an indicator of advertising effectiveness and why communications objectives may work better. (LO7-3) Perhaps one of the most common questions to which marketers seek an answer (and are asked by stockholders, accountants, and others) is whether the money being spent on advertising are leading to sales and is being spent wisely. Thus, there has always been an attempt to relate advertising to sale, primarily be economists, without any concrete conclusions forthcoming.

The problem with establishing this relationship is that a number of other factors affect sales, including environmental effects, other marketing variables, etc.

For example, if one has good advertising and draws customers to the stores, but the store is out of inventory, it is possible to get a good assessment of the advertising? Or, what if the product is of poor quality? The advertising may have drawn people to the product, but once they tried it, they refused to buy it again? What if the advertisement leads to wanting a Rolls Royce? If the price is too high, was it the fault of the advertising that the consumer did not buy?

Sometimes advertising can be effective at creating sales but at a later date. In advertising, this is referred to as the ―lag‖ effect. What if the consumer sees the ad now, but doesn't buy until later? Is it possible to measure the impact of the advertising directly on the sales?

Many factors impact the advertising-sales relationship, making it difficult to isolate the impact of only the advertising. While marketers have made great strides in this regard, unless there is testing in a controlled environment, the exact relationship will not be known.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

6. Explain some of the factors that might lead to success in increasing sales and achieving communications when competitors decrease their budgets. (LO 7-7) Product factors such as focusing on their basis for differentiation or hidden product qualities, and appealing to emotional buying motives are some factors that might lead to success in increasing sales when competitors decrease their budgets. Additionally, a consideration of where the product is in the product life cycle would dictate strategy and could increase sales when compared to competitors who are decreasing their promotional budgets. It might also be beneficial for advertisers to focus their efforts on early exposures of their advertisements and promotions to those most likely to buy their product.

7. Discuss why some marketers consider the allocation of media dollars to digital and social media at the expense of traditional media to be a ―knee-jerk reaction‖—that is, a reaction without much forethought. (LO 7-5) The monies previously allocated to traditional media are increasingly being moved to digital media.

At the same time, not everyone is on board with what they consider to be more of a knee-jerk reaction than a sound strategy, as many managers admit they don't yet know if their digital expenditures are paying off. Those managers who have been hesitant to move strongly into digital argue that it is necessary to establish concrete communications objectives to guide their media strategies. These objectives should be based on purchase decision models that guide the budget allocation to various media, and not just the fact that a particular media category is trending. Many large companies have been using these purchase decision models for a number of years, and continue to do so. At the same time, not everyone agrees with their use or their validity, arguing that the models are either outdated or should never have been used in the first place. As the media environment continues to change, marketers continue to examine these models and their value in guiding the IMC program. The success of a program can and should be measured by both marketing and communications objectives.

8. Why are the affordable and arbitrary allocation budgeting methods considered to be very poor budgeting methods? (LO 7-5) In the affordable method, the firm determines what level of advertising and promotions expenditures they feel that they can afford, and set this amount as the ad budget. This is not an ideal way to set budgets. The task to be performed by the advertising/promotions function is not considered, and the likelihood of under- or overspending is high, as no guidelines for measuring the effects of various budgets are established.

In the arbitrary allocation method, the budget is determined by management solely on the basis of what is felt to be necessary. When budgets are set through arbitrary allocation, there is no real rhyme or reason for the amount established. The arbitrary allocation approach has no obvious advantages. No systematic thinking has occurred, no objectives have been budgeted for, and the concept and purpose of advertising and promotion have been largely ignored.

9. Explain why communications measures may be better to use than sales or market share objectives when developing the IMC plan. (LO 7-1) Specific objectives for the IMC program facilitate coordination of the various groups working on the campaign. Many people are involved in the planning and development of an integrated marketing communications program on the client side as well as in the various promotional agencies. The advertising and promotional program must be coordinated within the company, inside the ad agency, and between the two. Any other parties involved in the promotional campaign, such as public relations and/or sales promotion firms, research specialists, and media buying services, must also know what the company hopes to accomplish through its marketing communications program. Many

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

problems can be avoided if all parties have written, approved objectives to guide their actions and serve as a common base for discussing issues related to the promotional program.

In regard to marketing versus communications objectives, it is well known that sales and marketing objectives have too many other variables influencing their outcome. What if the communications strategy attained the sought purchase intention, but the product was not found in the distribution channel? Did the communications strategy work? Yes. Distribution failed to achieve the marketing and sales goals. Achieving communications objectives can be more precisely measured and their attainment will contribute to the achievement of marketing and sales objectives.

10. Explain the S-shaped response curve and the concave-downward curve as they relate to budget setting. What are the differences in these two curves? Give examples of how each might be more appropriate for different products. (LO 7-6) The s-shaped response curve makes the assumption that certain levels of advertising expenditures must be reached before any noticeable impact on sales will occur. According to this model, initial outlays will have little or no noticeable impact on sales, then additional outlays will have a very noticeable effect to a point at which sales will level off and additional expenditures will again have little or no impact.

The concave-downward model follows the economic model of the law of diminishing returns. That is, as the amount of advertising increases, its incremental value decreases. thus, the effects of advertising would almost immediately begin to decrease.

As can be seen, the models differ substantially in respect to the impact of advertising expenditures. In the former model, the impact of advertising will not even begin to be felt until a certain level of expenditures has been reached. Those who believe that advertising spending has a cumulative effect would adhere to this mode. In the concave downward model, the impact takes place almost immediately, with incremental expenditures having less and less value.

The models would also differ in respect to their appropriate us based on the types of products being advertised. For example, the S-shaped response curve would seem to indicate an ability of the advertising to stimulate sales, both through the provision of information and throughout persuasive capabilities. As noted, it would support the fact that ads have a cumulative effect, and the additional ad spending may lead to additional sales. The concave-downward model, on the other hand, would argue that consumers are already in a mindset to buy or not buy, and the value of the advertising is primarily to inform not to persuade. Additional levels of ad spending will not be effective in changing one‘s mind, or motivating them to purchase. If these assumptions are true, it would seem that for high-involvement products, the concave downward model would be more likely to be operating, while the S-shaped response might better explain products for which the consumers‘ mind has not already been made up. In other words, the concave model assumes there will be little or no search, or that this search has been concluded. the ads primary impact is on the decision to buy. (Otherwise, additional expenditures would be likely to be effective at the search stage.) The S-shaped model would seem to be more effective when the decision hasn‘t yet been made, and the consumer can still be impacted by the ads.

Additional Discussions Questions (not in text) 11. As noted in the chapter, there is an increased emphasis on the determination of ROI. Discuss some of the reasons leading to this increase in attention. Why is it so difficult to measure ROI? (LO 7-7)

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

For years marketers have wondered about the impact of their promotional expenditures. While some media, like direct marketing and sales promotion, could demonstrate some of the impact of their investments, others—particularly advertising—had a much more difficult time doing so. Many advertisers recognized the difficulties associated with measuring effectiveness, and as a result, made little or no attempts to do so.

However, as the media landscape changed, particularly with the growth of direct marketing and the Internet, the importance of being able to determine which media would provide the greatest ROI increased significantly. As direct marketers were able to show the returns through measures such as cost per order, etc. the pressure on demonstrating the returns of other media naturally increased.

When companies invest millions of dollars in their IMC programs, the need for accountability seems obvious.

Unfortunately, the measure that most marketers want to see is the impact on sales. Thus, for the most part, when companies attempt to measure ROI, they attempt to look at the impact of various media expenditures on sales (or other marketing objectives). Because there are other factors beyond advertising and promotions that impact sales, it is often difficult to isolate the ROI of the communications programs specifically. For example, what if the IMC program is very effective, but the consumer doesn‘t like the product? What if the price is too high? What if the product is not available when the consumer goes to make a purchase? Using sales as the criterion for determining ROI, could lead to the conclusion that the communications program didn‘t work, when in fact it did.

Certainly sales is the critical element that marketers want to see. However, achieving one‘s communications objectives will likely lead to increases in sales (all other factors such as price, product and distribution being in place). Thus, marketers need to understand that they must measure communications objectives and not just drop to the bottom line (sales, marketing objectives) to determine IMC effectiveness. By measuring communications objectives, the marketer may be able to isolate the contributions of the IMC program, as well as determine what other factors might be impacting.

12. Chapter 7 differentiates between communications objectives and sales objectives. Explain the difference. What are examples of communications objectives? From where are these objectives derived? (LO 7-3) As noted in the text, marketing objectives are stated in the marketing plan and refer to what is to be accomplished by the overall marketing program. These objectives are derived from the marketing situation analysis, and typically relate to sales, market share, and similar goals. Communications objectives are specifically related to what the organization will attempt to achieve with the promotional program. While these objectives are designed to assist in the achievement of the overall marketing objectives, they are not the same (though some companies may treat them as such).

Communications objectives, while designed to help achieve overall marketing objectives, are those sought in the development of the communications program. Awareness, knowledge, interest, and attitude change are just a few examples of communications objectives. As with marketing objectives, communications objectives must meet the same criteria of effective objectives, e.g., measurability, attainability, and the like.

Communications objectives are often derived from response hierarchy models (see Chapters 5 and 6).

As noted in the text, these models may vary somewhat depending upon their original intent (to determine advertising effects, adoption, etc.), but they still meet the criteria for sound objectives, and focus on the necessity for the communications program to move potential consumers through a series of steps toward the ultimate goal. These hierarchies are supported by years of studies demonstrating their validity. As such, they serve as excellent measures of communications impact.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

13. The chapter discusses the results of a study conducted by Yoo and Mandhachitara that shows that advertising spending and effects may differ in different competitive environments. Explain each of the four scenarios presented in Figure 7-16 and give examples of brands in each of these cells. (LO 7-5) The study focuses on the fact that advertising by competitors may not always be to the detriment of one‘s brand. In fact, there may be cumulative gains to both competitors when both advertise. Figure 7-1 provides some examples.

Advertiser’s Advantage—In this case, one‘s brand is stronger than that of the competition. Given the competitive advantage, the brand should focus on advertising versus other promotional tools.

The reason for this is that advertising serves as a reminder as well as an introduction to the brand.

Given the brand‘s strength, incentives—some of which may be costly—are not required. Rather, keeping the brand in front of the consumer and maintaining a brand image may be most important. An example may be the Apple iPod versus other MP3 players. Apple is clearly the dominant brand, and should focus on communicating its brand image and benefits. There is no need to offer discounts.

Symbiotic competition—Brands competing in a growing market that complement each other should still focus on advertising, according to Figure 7-16. The adoption of satellite radio by auto manufacturers offers consumers an attractive option to enhance their driving experience, and a competitive advantage to competitors not offering such an option. For both the automobile and the satellite radio company (i.e., BMW and Sirius), continued advertising of the brand is likely to benefit both.

Zero-Sum Competition—In a mature market, one of the ways to gain market share is by taking it from the competition. Thus, increases in advertising may lead to gaining share, and may have to be matched to ward off the competition by others. Consider the competition between Energizer and Duracell, while the market for batteries is growing very slowly or may even be flat, both companies will continue to advertise in attempts to gain share and defend against the other as well.

Competitor’s Advantage—In a market situation in which a company‘s brand is inferior to the competition, head to head advertising may not be the best strategy. By gaining a niche position, and focusing on promotional tools as opposed to advertising, some share may be gained. Using batteries as an example, again, consider the smaller share brands such as Panasonic, EverReady, etc. Head to head advertising battles are not likely to be effective. On the other hand, offering coupons, sweepstakes, etc. may entice the consumer to try the brand, and sales may increase.

14. Different companies believe that various media are more important than others for their marketing purposes. Discuss the various perspectives taken by these companies, and explain why everyone may not agree on the same level of importance for media. (LO 7-6) As Chapter 7 demonstrates, there are a number of factors that influence the media strategy.

Communications objectives, corporate policies, politics, and the size of the budget are just a few of these. Because of the difficulty in determining a precise ROI for media, the decision is often subjective, and may not always achieve consensus. Jaguar prefers a method of tracking prospects that respond to their advertising, then providing the contact information to dealers for follow up through direct marketing, etc. Jaguar believes that this method leads to a better determination of media efficiencies.

Other companies focus on other media. For example, more and more companies are spending more monies on public relations. Many marketers believe that PR may be the best medium to employ. Ries

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

& Ries, previously published a book specifically to this point, noting that numerous companies now employ PR strategies prior to advertising, and that this medium may be more effective.

As will be clearly demonstrated in Chapters 13 and 15, other media—many not traditional—are favored by some companies. The rapid growth of the Internet and Interactive media appeals to many companies, while others like the new media such as product placements, branded entertainment, etc., and are spending more and more monies in these areas.

One of the basics of an IMC orientation is the effective and efficient uses of media. As will be evidenced throughout the remainder of this text, each medium has its advantages and disadvantages.

The astute marketer will learn and understand the uses of these media for various marketing situations, adopting an integrated marketing communications strategy for the specific market situation.

15. Why is it important for marketers to set specific objectives for advertising and promotion?

What criteria must these objectives meet to be valid? (LO 7-1) Objectives are necessary to effectively plan and evaluate the communications program. Think about it as taking a trip. The roadmap serves as the plan, and specific objectives are set in regard to where you want to be and when. Your progress is measured by the attainment of these objectives.

It is important for marketers to set objectives for proper coordination of the promotional program elements. What is the message going to achieve? How will various media like advertising, public relations, and the Internet be used? How much money is to be spent in each medium? Secondly, as noted, the communications are part of the strategic map as to what is to be accomplished, and when.

Without these communications, there is no plan. Finally, communications objectives serve as a basis for evaluation of the success or failure of the program. Too many marketers fail to measure the effectiveness of their programs because they do not know what to measure. Once they understand the value of communications programs, they will be more effective in determining the proper metrics for this purpose.

To serve as valid objectives, specific criteria must be met. These include (1) they must be concrete and measurable, (2) they must include and define a specific target audience, (3) they must establish a benchmark and specify the degree of change sought, and (4) they must be time specific. In addition, objectives must be realistic and attainable. By adhering to these criteria, the objectives will be useful in developing the overall IMC plan.

16. Some marketers feel that the hierarchy of effects models may no longer reflect the characteristics of the consumer decision-making process. Discuss the pros and cons of these arguments. (LO 7-4) A study published in McKinsey Quarterly claimed the purchase funnel dead, arguing that consumers no longer make decisions in a linear fashion and have changed the way they go about making purchase decisions. The report states that decision making has become more complex and dynamic, and the stages have become interdependent and consumers are influenced at any time during the process. Likewise, Sue Unerman, chief strategy officer at MediaCom, claims that the purchasing funnel is not dead but pregnant. She contends that the traditional model must be adapted to account for new media. Unerman notes that the traditional funnel shape is being replaced by one that shows the traditional narrowing at the consideration stage but then bulges when the known and trusted brands are joined by new ones found on Internet searches, blogs, Facebook, and other new media. Yet another nonbeliever in consumer funnels is Joseph Jaffe, president of Crayon, who thinks funnels need to be flipped. According to Jaffe, the traditional funnel is outmoded, as marketers spend too much money trying to funnel the consumer universe (many of whom don‘t care about the product or

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

service) down to a handful. He says monies should be spent on this handful to get more out of them, resulting in a more efficient, effective, and profitable strategy. By focusing on establishing a strong relationship with customers after the sale, companies can take advantage of the new viral world as consumers interact with and influence many other consumers, each of whom may make multiple transactions.

Not everyone is convinced that employing a funnel is no longer a viable strategy. In a study designed to determine if the purchase funnel still works, the Television Bureau of Advertising (TVB) was more interested in how media impacts consumers in the decision-making process. Yankelovich (a research company) and TVB examined how 3,002 consumers employed traditional and new media at each step in the process. The results indicated that media had an influence on 80 percent of the consumers at the awareness phase, declining to 53 percent at the transaction stage, and that the impact varied depending upon the product category, but the funnel approach still made sense. The Advertising Research Foundation (ARF) found data to support both sides of the argument, again concluding it varies by product category.

17. Explain some of the reasons marketers are shifting their budget allocations from traditional to digital and social media. What are some of the advantages and disadvantages with this reallocation? (LO 7-5) The world is becoming—or already has become—a digital world. Almost everyone is on the Internet, and the majority of the population in the U.S. and first world countries are involved with social media. Children are learning in school on iPads. High schoolers can only get assignments and grades online ins some schools and digital toys have become the new babysitters replacing television.

With the coming of the digital age is the demise of many traditional media. Younger people rarely read a newspaper, and if they do, it is probably online. Programming is watched on mobile devices almost as much as TV. General news magazines are struggling to survive—Newsweek hasn‘t. Mobile is the fastest growing medium and is not only enjoyed, but relied upon, by the younger generation.

The result of all of this is that many marketers have shifted their advertising allocations to digital media, at the expense of traditional media.

But traditional media are not dead yet. Numerous studies have indicated that at the top of the funnel (awareness and interest), television is still the main source of information for consumers. Magazine ads have also been shown to drive search, as have newspapers (to a lesser degree). While digital media have taken over at the later stages of the response hierarchies, they are not as effective as some traditional media at earlier stages.

More than one company, for example P&G and GM, have moved advertising dollars from traditional media to digital only to move them back again. While both had discontinued ads on the Super Bowl, they have both come back, recognizing the reach from this event as well as the ability for these media to generate interest.

IMC Exercise Students should find examples of advertisements for several products or services and discuss the specific types of objectives the marketer may have for these ads. They should explain why sales objectives may be appropriate for some ads while communications objectives are most relevant for others. Have the students attempt to determine the percentage of sales ratios for the product categories they have ads for and explain why these ratios may be as they are.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

CHAPTER 8 CREATIVE STRATEGY: PLANNING AND DEVELOPMENT Chapter Overview This is the first of two chapters devoted to the area of creative strategy in advertising. This chapter focuses on the planning and development of the creative strategy. We will examine the concept of creativity and the process that guides the creation of the advertising campaign as well as various types of research and information that can provide input and insight into the creative process of advertising. We discuss the concept of copy platforms that are used to guide the development of advertising campaigns.

Attention is also given to various approaches used for determining major selling ideas that form the basis of an advertising campaign.

Learning Objectives 1.

Describe the role of creative strategy in advertising.

2.

Discuss the creative process for advertising and inputs to this process.

3.

Describe the development of creative strategy.

4.

Examine approaches to developing the major selling ideas that are used as the basis for an advertising campaign.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Chapter and Lecture Outline I.

INTRODUCTION

One of the most important components of an integrated marketing communications program is the advertising message. It will be obvious to students that there are a myriad of ways to convey an advertising message. However, underlying all of these messages is a creative strategy that involves determining what the advertising message will say or communicate and creative tactics dealing with how the message strategy will be implemented or executed. The focus of this chapter is on the development of creative strategy while tactical issues are covered in Chapter 9. Attention is given to the creative strategy development process and various approaches to developing the big idea that will be used as the central theme of the advertising campaign and translated into messages. The opening vignette to the chapter discusses how Geico‘s agency of record has created a number of amusing commercials for the brand using a number of different creative strategies over the years. The brand even had a campaign where consumers could vote on their favorite creative execution by Geico.

II.

THE IMPORTANCE OF CREATIVITY IN ADVERTISING

The creative side of advertising is one of its most interesting aspects. The creative strategy used to communicate an advertising message is an integral part of the promotional process and is often critical to the success or failure of the campaign. Numerous examples or cases can be cited of how a good creative strategy was an important factor in determining the success of a product or service or reversing the fortunes of a struggling brand. Of course, there are also many situations where companies struggle to find a creative formula that works effectively. These companies change their creative strategy frequently in hopes of finding a campaign theme or tagline that strikes a responsive chord with consumers. It is important to understand that just because an advertisement is creative or popular among consumers does not mean it will increase sales or revive a declining brand. Attention must also be given to the issue of creative versus effective advertising, as many ads may be critically acclaimed from a creative perspective but fail to help the sales of the brand.

III.

ADVERTISING CREATIVITY

It is important to examine the concept of creativity, how it applies to advertising, and the challenge marketers face in developing creative and effective advertising. Good creative strategy and execution can be very important in determining the success of a product/service or reversing the fortunes of a struggling brand. Marketers must also consider how creative strategy can be leveraged across paid, owned, and earned media.

A.

What Is Creativity?—Creativity is one of the most commonly used terms in advertising as those who develop advertising messages are often referred to as ―creative types‖ and agencies develop reputations for their creativity. It is the creative‘s job to turn all of the information regarding product features and benefits, marketing plans, consumer research, and communication objectives into a creative concept that brings the advertising message to life. So much attention is focused on the concept of creativity because the major challenge given to those who develop advertising messages is to be creative. Creativity has been defined as ―a quality possessed by persons that enables them to generate novel approaches in situations, generally reflected in new and improved solutions to problems.‖

B.

Different Perspectives of Advertising Creativity—Perspectives of what constitutes creativity in advertising vary. At one extreme are the ―suits‖ or ―rationalists‖ who argue that advertising is

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

creative only if it sells the product or service. At the other end of the continuum are the ―poets‖ who judge creativity in terms of its artistic or aesthetic value and argue that creative advertising must be novel, original, and unique. The answer as to what constitutes creative in advertising is probably somewhere between these two extreme positions.

C.

Determinants of Creativity—We are concerned with advertising creativity, which refers to ―the ability to generate fresh, unique and appropriate ideas that can be used as solutions to communications problems.‖ This perspective recognizes that creative advertising ideas are those that are novel, original, and appropriate. To be appropriate, a creative idea must be relevant or have some importance to the target audience. It is generally agreed upon that there are two central determinants of creativity, which are divergence and relevance. Divergence refers to the extent to which an ad contains elements that are novel different or unusual. Some of the ways divergence can be achieved in advertising include the following: 1. Originality—ads that contain elements that are rare, surprising, or move away from the obvious and commonplace.

2. Flexibility—ads that contain different ideas or switch from one perspective to another.

3. Elaboration—ads that contain unexpected details or finish and extend basic ideas so they become more intricate, complicated, or sophisticated.

4. Synthesis—ads that combine, connect, or blend normally unrelated objects or ideas.

5. Artistic value—ads that contain artistic verbal impressions or attractive shapes and colors Relevance reflects the degree to which the various elements of the ad are meaningful, useful, or valuable to the consumer and can be achieved in two ways. Ad-to-consumer relevance refers to situations where the ad contains execution elements that are meaningful to consumers. For example, advertisers may use celebrities which whom consumers identify, music that they like, or visual images and other execution techniques that capture their interest and attention. Brand-toconsumer relevance refers to situations where the advertised brand of a product or service is of personal interest to consumers. Relevance or appropriateness can also be viewed in terms of the degree to which an advertisement provides information or an image that is pertinent to the brand.

The ad for KFC Hot and Spicy chicken in Exhibit 8-3 provides a very good example of creative advertising that relies on the divergence criterion of originality. A number of studies have been conducted showing that advertising creativity impacts consumers‘ responses to advertising messages across various stages of the response hierarchy, including cognitive, affective, and behavioral responses.

Professor Notes:

IV.

PLANNING CREATIVE STRATEGY

A.

The Creative Challenge—Those who work on the creative side of advertising often face a major challenge. They must take all the research, creative briefs, strategy statements, communication objectives, and other inputs and transform them into an advertising message. Their job is to write copy, design layouts and illustrations, and produce commercials that communicate effectively.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Marketers usually hire advertising agencies to develop and implement their advertising campaigns because they are specialists in the creative function of advertising. However, it is important to point out that the development of creative strategy also involves representatives from the client side and other people in the agency as well as the creative staff. Creatives have the ultimate responsibility of developing an effective way of communicating the marketer‘s message to their customers. The creative person or team is often provided with a great deal of input and background information on the target audience, such as their demographics, needs and motives, and communication objectives. However, every marketing situation is different and requires a unique approach.

B.

Taking Creative Risks—Many creative people in agencies argue that they often follow proven approaches or formulas when creating ads because they are safe and less likely to fail. They note that their clients are very often risk averse and feel uncomfortable with advertising that is too different. It is important to note that companies who have very creative advertising are more willing to assume some risk. However, many managers are more comfortable with advertising that is straightforward in communicating with customers and gives them a reason to buy.

Examples of agencies known for taking creative risks, such as Wieden+Kennedy, TBWA/Chiat/Day, and Crispin Porter + Bogusky might be noted.

C.

The Perpetual Debate: Creative versus Hard-Sell Advertising—The issue of how much latitude creative people should be given and how much risk the client should be willing to take is open to considerable debate. However, clients and agency personnel generally agree that the ability to develop novel yet appropriate approaches to communicating with the customer makes the creative specialist valuable—and often hard to find.

D.

Creative Personnel—A fairly common perception is that those individuals who work on the creative side of advertising tend to be somewhat unique and different from those working on the managerial or business side. It is worthwhile to discuss some of the characteristics of creative personnel in advertising and the need to create an environment that fosters, and is conducive to, the development of creative advertising. Some studies have even shown that creatives are in fact no more creative than their account-side counterparts. It is a position whose success relies on a creative environment where ideation can flow freely.

McGraw-Hill Connect ®: Advertising Creativity in the Craft Beer Industry Type of Activity: Matching Activity Summary: This activity provides students with a case about the craft brewing industry and helps students differentiate between divergence and relevance. Students are tasked with selecting the most appropriate description of the source of creativity for a list of brewers from the seven primary determinants of novel and innovative IMC appeals.

Activity Learning Objective: 08-01 Describe the role of creative strategy in advertising.

Concept Review: Five major factors have been identified which could account for the ways divergence can be achieved in advertising, including: 1) Originality—Ads that contain elements that are rare, surprising, or move away

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

from the obvious and commonplace; 2) Flexibility—Ads that contain different ideas or switch from one perspective to another; 3) Elaboration—Ads that contain unexpected details or finish and extend basic ideas so they become more intricate, complicated, or sophisticated; 4) Synthesis—Ads that combine, connect, or blend normally unrelated objects or ideas; 5) Artistic value—Ads that contain artistic verbal impressions or attractive shapes and colors. Divergence refers to the extent to which an ad contains elements that are novel, different, or unusual. Relevance reflects the degree to which the various elements of the ad are meaningful, useful, or valuable to the consumer.

Difficulty: 2 Medium Bloom‘s: Apply AACSB: Analytical Thinking

V.

THE CREATIVE PROCESS

A number of advertising people have argued that creativity in advertising is best viewed as a process and that creative success is most likely when some organized approach is followed. While most advertising people reject and/or resist attempts to standardize creativity or develop rules or guidelines to follow, most creative people do follow some type of process when approaching the task of developing an advertisement. There are several models or approaches to the creative process including those of James Webb Young, a former creative vice president at the J. Walter Thompson agency, which is similar to the approach of English sociologist Graham Wallas. Young‘s model of the creative process contains five steps: 1.

Immersion—Gathering raw material and information through background research and immersing yourself in the problem.

2.

Digestion—Taking the information, working it over, and wrestling with it in the mind.

3.

Incubation—Putting the problems out of your conscious mind and turning the information over to the subconscious to do the work.

4.

5.

Illumination—The birth of an idea.

Reality or verification—Studying the idea to see if it still looks good or solves the problem; then shaping the idea to practical usefulness.

Wallas suggests that creative thought evolves in four stages: 1.

A.

Preparation—Getting background information that‘s needed to solve the problem through research and study.

2.

Incubation—Allowing ideas to develop.

3.

Illumination—Determining the solution.

4.

Verification—Refining and polishing the idea.

Account Planning—To facilitate the creative process, many agencies now use account planning, which is a process that involves conducting research and gathering all relevant information about a client‘s product or service, brand, and consumers in the target audience. Account planning plays an important role during creative strategy development by driving the process from the customers‘ point of view. Planners work with the client as well as agency personnel, such as the

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

creative team and media specialists, to discuss how information they have gathered can be used in the development of the creative strategy as well as other aspects of the advertising campaign.

B.

Inputs to the Creative Process: Preparation, Incubation, Illumination—These models of the creative process offer an organized way of approaching an advertising problem. Both models stress the need for preparation or gathering of background information that is relevant to the problem as the first step in the creative process. Various types of research and information can provide input to the creative process of advertising at each stage. There are numerous ways the creative specialist can acquire background information that is relevant to the advertising problem, including: 1. Background research—Informal fact-finding techniques and general preplanning input.

Various ways of gathering background include: •

Reading anything related to the product or market. This often involves the use of general preplanning input, which includes books, periodicals, trade publications, websites, scholarly journals, pictures, and clipping services, which gather and organize magazine, newspaper, and online articles on the product or service, the market, and the competition, including the latter‘s ads.

•

Asking everyone involved with the product for information.

•

Listening to what people are talking about in stores, restaurants, malls, etc.

•

Using the product and become familiar with it.

•

Working in and learning about the client‘s business.

2. Product- or service-specific research—This involves different types of studies such as attitude, market structure and positioning, perceptual mapping, and psychographic studies. In this area of research, creative people receive product- or service-specific preplanning input, which comes in the form of studies conducted on the product or service, target audience, or a combination of the two. Many of these types of studies use a variation of an approach called problem detection for finding ideas around which creative strategies could be based. This technique involves asking consumers familiar with a product (or service) to generate an exhaustive list of things that bother them or problems they encounter when using it and how often they arise.

3. Qualitative research input—This type of input includes techniques such as in-depth interviews focus groups, or ethnographic studies. Qualitative research can provide the creative team with valuable input, particularly in the early stages of the creative process. As discussed in the chapter, creative personnel in agencies often feel that their creativity can be stifled by research techniques such as focus groups and consumer surveys. Focus groups are a research method in which consumers from the target market discuss a particular topic.

Many marketers and agencies prefer to use observational or ethnographic research to gain insight into consumers. This involves observing consumers in their natural environment. A good example of how research can be used to inform creative is provided in the text about Procter & Gamble‘s character Mr. Clean.

C.

Inputs to the Creative Process: Verification, Revision—The purpose of the verification and revision stage of the creative process is to evaluate ideas that come from the illumination stage, reject any that may be inappropriate, and refine those that remain and help give them final expression. Some of the techniques used at this stage include:

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

•

Directed focus groups.

•

Message communication studies.

•

Portfolio tests.

•

Pretesting of ads in storyboard or animatic form.

At this stage of the creative process, members of the target audience may be asked to evaluate rough creative layouts and to indicate what meaning they get from the ad, what they think of its execution, or how they react to a slogan or theme. They may be asked to evaluate a storyboard, which is a series of drawings used to present the visual plan or layout of a proposed commercial.

It contains a series of sketches of key frames or scenes along with the copy or audio portion for each scene (see Exhibit 8-11). Or they may evaluate an animatic, which is a videotape of the storyboard along with an audio soundtrack.

Professor Notes:

McGraw-Hill Connect ®: The Creative Process for the WPU Campaign Type of Activity: Click and Drag Activity Summary: The newly appointed president of West Park University (WPU) has hired an advertising agency to develop an IMC campaign designed to attract the best student prospects and their parents to the university. Students will match the various steps in the creative process undertaken by the ad agency for developing the campaign for WPU to the steps in Young‘s model of the creative process.

Activity Learning Objective: 08-02 Identify inputs to the creative process.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Concept Review: The creative personnel in an advertising agency take all the research, creative briefs, strategy statements, communications objectives, and other input and transform them into an advertising message. Their job is to write copy, design layouts and illustrations, or produce commercials that effectively communicate the central theme on which the campaign is based. The job of the creative team is challenging because every marketing situation is different and each campaign or advertisement may require a different creative approach.

Some say creativity in advertising is best viewed as a process and creative success is most likely when some organized approach is followed. This does not mean there is an infallible blueprint to follow to create effective advertising. However, most do follow a process when developing an ad. One of the most popular approaches to creativity in advertising was developed by James Webb Young, a former creative vice president at the J. Walter Thompson agency. Young's process of creativity is similar to a four-step approach outlined much earlier by English sociologist Graham Wallas in his classic book The Art of Thought.

Difficulty: 2 Medium Bloom‘s: Understand AACSB: Analytical Thinking

VI.

CREATIVE STRATEGY DEVELOPMENT

The creative process is guided by specific goals and objectives and requires the development of a creative strategy or plan of action for achieving the goal. Creative strategy development actually begins with a thorough assessment of the marketing and promotional situation and a determination of what needs to be communicated to the marketer‘s target audience. Creative strategy should, however, also be based on a number of other factors that are stated in the creative brief or copy platform.

A.

Advertising Campaigns—Most advertisements are part of a series of messages that make up an IMC or advertising campaign, which consists of a set of interrelated and coordinated marketing communication activities that center on a single theme or idea that appears in different media across a specified time period. The determination of a strong idea for the campaign theme is very important, as it is the central message that will be communicated in all of the advertising and other promotional activities and thus set the tone or direction for the development of the individual ads that make up the campaign. The theme or idea for the campaign is usually expressed through a slogan (tagline), which reduces the key idea into a few words or a brief statement.

B.

Creative Brief—The creative brief (which some agencies refer to as a creative platform or work plan, creative blueprint, or creative contract) is a written document that provides a plan or checklist that is useful in guiding the development of an advertising message or campaign. This document is prepared by the agency team or group assigned to the account and may include creative personnel as well as the account coordinator and representatives from media and research. The advertising manager and/or the marketing and product manager from the client side will also be involved in the process and must approve the copy platform. Figure 8-3 provides the ―must have elements‖ of a creative brief and developments to the creative brief creation process are also discussed in the text.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

C.

The Search for the Major Selling Idea—An important part of creative strategy development is determining the central theme that will become the major selling idea or big idea for the ad campaign. Big ideas are important in business-to-business advertising as well as advertising targeting consumers. Exhibit 8-1 discusses how Wieden+Kennedy developed a big-idea-led campaign for Intuit‘s TurboTax software as part of the company‘s strategy to attract consumers by showing them how they can use its software to file their taxes for free. A number of examples of campaigns with a consumer focus with effective big ideas are also provided in the text.

D.

Developing the Major Selling Idea—It is often difficult to pinpoint the inspiration for a big idea.

However, there are several different approaches that can be used for developing major selling ideas and as the basis of creative strategy. Some of the best known and most discussed approaches include: 1. Unique selling proposition—This concept was popularized by the famous copywriter Rosser Reeves in his book Reality in Advertising. Its three characteristics include: •

Each advertisement must make a proposition to the consumer—show consumers the benefit.

•

The proposition must be one that the competition either cannot or does not offer.

•

The proposition must be strong enough to pull over new customers to your brand. It must be unique either in the brand or claim.

2. Creating a brand image—Some competing brands are so similar it is difficult to find or create a unique attribute or benefit so the creative strategy is based on the development of a strong, memorable identity for the brand through image advertising. Image advertising has become increasingly popular and is used as the main selling idea for a variety of products and services, including soft drinks, liquor, cigarettes, cars, airlines, financial services, perfume/colognes, and clothing.

3. Finding the inherent drama—The famous ad man Leo Burnett, founder of the Leo Burnett agency in Chicago, believed that advertising should be based on a foundation of consumer benefits with an emphasis on the dramatic element in expressing these benefits. Inherent drama involves finding the characteristic of the product that makes the consumer purchase it.

This type of advertising bases the creative strategy on presenting the message in a warm and realistic way.

4. Positioning—The basic idea is that advertising is used to establish or position the product or service in a particular place in the consumer‘s mind. Various approaches to positioning a brand are discussed in Chapter 2 and might be reviewed again here. Many of the top brands in various product or service categories have retained their leadership position because they have established and maintained a strong position or identity in the minds of consumers.

E.

Contemporary Approaches to the Big Idea—These approaches to determining the major selling ideas discussed above (USP, brand image, inherent drama, and positioning) are very popular and are often used as the basis of the creative strategy for advertising campaigns. These creative approaches represent specific ―creative styles‖ that have become associated with some of the most successful advertising creative minds and their agencies. However, it should be noted that many other creative approaches and styles are available and are often used in advertising. Some of the creative styles associated with more contemporary advertising visionaries, such as Lee Clow of TBWA/Chiat/Day and Rich Silverstein of Goodby Silverstein & Partners, are worth

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

noting. The challenge to the creative team is to find a major selling idea and use it as a guide to the development of an effective creative strategy.

McGraw-Hill Connect ®: Creative Strategy for WPUs Advertising Campaign Type of Activity: Click and Drag Activity Summary: In this activity, students will match the various portions of the creative brief developed by the ad agency for the campaign for WPU to the basic elements of a creative brief.

Activity Learning Objective: 08-03 Describe the development of creative strategy.

Concept Review: The written creative brief specifies the basic elements of the creative strategy for an advertising campaign or for any advertising and promotion activity. It is also referred to as the creative platform, the work plan, the creative blueprint, or the creative contract. The creative brief is developed by executives in the account management and account planning departments in an ad agency. Other ad agency executives from the group assigned to the account, such as creative personnel and media personnel, also give their input. This document is shared with the client (the advertising manager, or brand manager), who often approves the brief. The creative brief is then shared with/presented to the creative group assigned to the account, who develop the ads and other IMC items for the campaign.

Difficulty: 2 Medium Bloom‘s: Understand AACSB: Analytical Thinking

McGraw-Hill Connect ®: Creative Ideas for Four Shampoo Brands Type of Activity: Case Analysis Activity Summary: Bee & Gee is a multi-product, multi-brand, packaged goods company with a significant presence in the personal care and grooming category. Within each product category, it has numerous brands that sometimes compete with each other in the same geographical markets. Bee & Gee has four different shampoo brands that it markets to consumers in multiple countries. This activity will have the students select the best answer for each question related to the ―big idea‖ for each of their brands.

Activity Learning Objective: 08-04 Examine approaches to developing the major selling ideas that are used as the basis for an advertising campaign.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Concept Review: An important part of the creative strategy is determining the central theme or the major selling idea of the ad campaign. According to A. Jerome Jeweler , the major selling idea is the strongest singular thing you can say about your product or service. This claim should contain the most meaningful appeal to your target audience and should be strong enough to remain the central issue in every ad and commercial in the campaign.

Difficulty: 2 Medium Bloom‘s: Analyze AACSB: Analytical Thinking

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Teaching Suggestions For many students, the most interesting aspect of advertising and promotion is the creative side. Most students really do not have an appreciation for what is involved in the development of an advertising campaign. They may think that the development of a campaign and individual messages involves only the agency creative department. It is important to stress the fact that the development of a campaign involves numerous individuals from both the other departments of the agency as well as on the client side. Many students will not end up being directly involved in the design and creation of advertisements. However, creative strategy is often critical to the success of the firm‘s integrated marketing communications efforts.

Thus, it is important that everyone involved with the marketing and promotional program have some understanding of the creative process that underlies the development of advertising messages, as well as the creative options available to the advertiser.

Some interesting discussion can be generated over the issues of what constitutes creative advertising.

Students might be asked to debate the different perspectives of advertising creativity. One side can take the ―its only creative if it sells‖ position versus the ―aesthetic, novelty/uniqueness‖ perspective. Some interesting discussions can also be generated over the issue of creative risk taking and just how much latitude the client should give the agency when it comes to creating the advertising message. For a very interesting discussion and still relevant debate over different perspectives on creativity, we suggest an article on ―Creative Differences‖ by Anthony Vagnoni, which appeared in Advertising Age on November 17, 1997. You may also want to update students on the advertising that wins the Lions awards at the Cannes International Advertising Film Festival each year. Advertising Age and AdWeek have articles covering the Lions awards toward the end of June each year. You can also direct your students to the festival‘s official website at www.canneslions.com. Students should be encouraged to research advertising that has won creative awards from other organizations. For example, the Clio Awards is an international awards competition that recognizes outstanding creative work done by agencies and winners can be found on the website at clios.com/awards. Effie Worldwide sponsors the Effie Awards, given each year to marketing communication campaigns based on their proven success for a company or brand.

Information about the Effie Awards can be found at www.effie.org.

It is also important to discuss how research is used as an input to the creative process of advertising. Time might be spent discussing the value of both qualitative and quantitative research techniques and how they can be used to provide the creative department information that gives them more insight into the consumer. It is also interesting to spend some time discussing advertising campaign themes currently being used by various advertisers. This discussion can focus on the creative strategy being used by the advertiser, the image or position they are trying to establish for the company or brand, and what type of analysis or background research might have been used in developing the campaign. It is important to stress that advertising campaigns are often the result of extensive planning and research provided to the creative team by marketing planners and researchers on both the client and/or agency side. The text also has a brief discussion of account planning, which is becoming an important function in many advertising agencies. If you would like further information on account planning, we recommend the book Truth, Lies & Advertising by Jon Steele, who was the Vice Chairman and Director of Account Planning for Goodby, Silverstein & Partners in San Francisco. This book provides an excellent discussion of the account planning and how the Goodby, Silverstein & Partners agency has used the process in the development of many successful advertising campaigns for clients such as Adobe, Norwegian Cruise Lines, Frito-Lay, and the ―got milk?‖ campaign for the California Fluid Milk Processors Advisory Board.

A discussion of a Model of Marketing Information flow developed by John Sutherland, Lisa Duke, and Avery Abernethy is presented and warrants discussion. This model shows the flow of marketing information regarding customers, the product or service, and the market from clients to agency creative staff and the major interfaces and decision points where gatekeepers can impede the flow of information to agency creatives. Their research has found that agency personnel often lack the information needed to

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

effectively design and execute creative strategies. Time can be spent discussing this model and ways of improving the flow of important information to agency creatives.

Answers to Discussion Questions 1. The chapter opener discusses the various creative approaches used by GEICO in its television advertising over the past 25 years. What is the goal of advertising for an auto insurance company such as GEICO? Why has the company used a variety of creative messages for its TV commercials rather than staying with one consistent approach? (LO 8-1) The goal (and challenge) of advertising for a brand like GEICO, or any auto insurance brand, is to reach a very broad range of consumers from various age groups, education levels, and income backgrounds. Many other insurance brands rely on one type of creative campaign that attempts to catch the attention of consumers and encourages them to compare their policies and rates. GEICO stands out from the norm in the industry by often times running as many as five campaigns all at once. Despite the variation of the creative execution that is often targeted at a specific group, the same core message is applied from one campaign to the next. Research from their agency of record found that consumers hated shopping for car insurance and wanted it to be as short of a process as possible, which is why GEICO boasts its 15 minutes or less shopping/comparing experience. The agency also recognized that most of its competitors utilized emotional appeals. To stand out, the brand decided to instead use humor. Overall, GEICO‘s campaign works so well because while their creative execution might differ from campaign to campaign, the overarching message that focused on and highlighted what consumers wanted from a campaign stayed consistent across the board.

2. Discuss the role and importance of creativity in advertising. Do you think advertising agencies often emphasize creativity at the expense of developing ads that can help generate sales for a product or service? What can clients do to avoid this problem? (LO 8-1) Perspectives on what constitutes creativity in advertising differ. At one extreme are people who argue that advertising is creative only if it sells the product. An advertising message or campaign‘s impact on sales counts more than whether it is innovative or wins awards. At the other end of the continuum are those who judge the creativity of an ad in terms of its artistic or aesthetic value and originality.

They contend creative ads can break through the competitive clutter, grab the consumer‘s attention, and have some impact.

As you might expect, perspectives on advertising creativity often depend on one‘s role. A study by Elizabeth Hirschman examined the perceptions of various individuals involved in the creation and production of TV commercials, including management types (brand managers and account executives) and creatives (art director, copywriter, commercial director, and producer). She found that product managers and account executives view ads as promotional tools whose primary purpose is to communicate favorable impressions to the marketplace. They believe a commercial should be evaluated in terms of whether it fulfills the client‘s marketing and communicative objectives.

Everyone involved in planning and developing an advertising campaign must understand the importance of balancing the ―it‘s not creative unless it sells‖ perspective with the novelty/uniqueness and impact position. Marketing and brand managers or account executives must recognize that imposing too many sales- and marketing-oriented communications objectives on the creative team can result in mediocre advertising, which is often ineffective in today‘s competitive, cluttered media environment. At the same time, the creative specialists must recognize that the goal of advertising is to assist in selling the product or service and good advertising must communicate in a manner that helps the client achieve this goal. Despite having different perspectives on creativity, both sides are

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

likely to agree that creative advertising is important because it often garners more attention and can lead to deeper processing by consumers. Marketing professor Scott Koslow also notes that ―creativity gives permission to consumers to be open to what appears to be new information about a brand and brings a fresh perspective—the ultimate ‗new-news.‘‖ 3. Advertising creativity is viewed as the ability to generate unique and appropriate solutions to communication problems. This definition suggests that a creative ad is one that is novel but also relevant or appropriate. Find an example of an advertisement (either a print ad, TV commercial, or online ad/video) that is novel but not necessarily relevant to the product or services. Discuss why the client would have approved this ad. (LO 8-1) For an ad or campaign to be considered creative, it should meet the criteria of being both a unique and appropriate solution to a communication problem. Creative specialists have the responsibility of developing advertising messages that capture the attention of and persuade the target audience to consider a brand. While many ads are entertaining, they do little to contribute to the brand. Students should find a print ad or TV commercial that is novel or unique but does not contain a relevant message that encourages consumers to consider purchasing the product or service. Many of the ads that appear in magazines or TV shows targeting young people fit into this category as the focus of the advertisement is on being different or unique and breaking through all of the advertising clutter.

However, these ads often communicate very little about the product or service or give consumers little, if any, reason to purchase the brand. Creative personnel are often able to convince the client that something novel or unique needs to be done to get the attention of consumers and break through the clutter. Many marketing mangers defer to the judgment and expertise of agency creative personnel and give their approval for these ads.

4. Discuss the various factors that account for the way divergence can be achieved in advertising creativity. Find an example of an advertisement that reflects these various factors and explain how it does so. (LO 8-1) Divergence is viewed as one of the two key determinants of creativity (along with relevance) and refers to the extent to which an ad contains elements that are novel, different, or unusual. Robert Smith and Xiaojang Yang have identified five factors that could account for the ways divergence can be achieved in advertising, which they describe as follows. These include: •

Originality: Ads that contain elements that are rare, surprising, or move away from the obvious and commonplace.

•

Flexibility: Ads that contain different ideas or switch from one perspective to another.

•

Elaboration: Ads that contain unexpected details or finish and extend basic ideas so they become more intricate, complicated or sophisticated.

•

Synthesis: Ads that combine, connect, or blend normally unrelated objects or ideas.

•

Artistic value: Ads that contain artistic verbal impressions or attractive shapes and colors

Students should find examples of ads that reflect one of more of these characteristics and explain how it does so. They should be able to find examples of print ads that are high in artistic value or TV commercials that reflect characteristics such as originality or flexibility.

5. What are the various stages in the creative process for developing advertising messages?

Discuss how an advertising agency developing an ad campaign for a consumer product or service might go through the creative process and what would be done at the various stages.

(LO 8-2)

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

The first stage in the creative process is immersion. This involves gathering raw material and information through background research and immersing yourself in the problem. This would involve a creative working to learn everything they can about the client and problem. They should speak with the research and strategy team and develop a good understanding of the problem. The second stage is digestion, which involves taking the information, working it over, and wrestling with it in the mind.

This would involve creative stepping back from the research and thinking about different approaches to solve the problem. The third step is incubation, which involves putting the problems out of your conscious mind and turning the information over to the subconscious to do the work. This would involve creatives completely stepping back from the problem and allowing their creative juices to begin to flow. The next step is illumination, which involves the birth of a creative idea. This is when the creative or creative team determines a way in which they can work to solve the problem in an advertisement and has an ideation of what they will do. The final step is verification. This involves refining and polishing the idea and seeing if it is appropriate. This would likely involve discussing the idea with the creative team, with account, with research and strategy, and with the creative director to ensure that the direction is appropriate given the campaign‘s objectives.

6. Assume that you have been hired as an account planner by an advertising agency and assigned to work on the development of an advertising campaign for a new brand of bottled water.

Describe the various types of general and product-specific preplanning input you might provide to the creative team. (LO 8-2) General preplanning input includes overall information on trends, developments and conditions in the marketplace that would be relevant to the marketing of the product. In the case of a new brand of bottled water, the advertiser would want to know about a number of trends and developments affecting the beverage market such as the increasing popularity of new age drinks and environmental concerns over the use of plastic bottles. Information on the changing lifestyles of consumers and how this might affect their beverage consumption would also be relevant, as would product specific information on the bottled water segment of the beverage market.

Product-specific preplanning input includes information that is directly relevant to the product or service. Usage and attitude studies regarding bottled water users and nonusers in particular, could be performed, as well as psychographic studies. Problem detection studies could be performed to determine what changes or improvements consumers would like to see in bottled water (e.g., taste, flavors, nutritional supplements, packaging changes). The outcome of a problem detection study may provide input for product improvements, reformulations, or new brands. It would also be important to have information on the type of advertising being used by competitors such as Evian, Dasani, Arrowhead, Propel, and other brands.

7. Digital and Social Media Perspective 8-1 discusses the pros and cons of pretesting advertising creative work and how it is being impacted by the digital revolution. Discuss the pros and cons of the pretesting of creative work done by agencies and how the shift to digital media is impacting the pretesting of advertising messages. (LO 8-2, 8-3) Copy or pretesting has long been a research stalwart for marketers and many companies such as FritoLay still pretest TV commercials or videos that will be used online, particularly those backed by large media budgets. However, copy testing, like so many other areas of advertising and marketing communication, is changing as a result of the digital revolution and marketers‘ desire to move more quickly and keep pace with the new media consumption patterns of consumers. Many marketers feel that today‘s digital and social media environment requires them to create multiple executions of TV commercials, videos, and other content to keep pace with consumers who are spending more time online and can easily avoid or skip their ads and other messages. Some are also critical of traditional copy testing methods arguing that it they are based on outdated thinking regarding how advertising

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

works and no longer valid. They note that while pretesting methods may be effective for evaluating informational ads, it does not work well for emotional messages, as most only scratch the surface of which emotions an ad can evoke and how a consumer will respond after viewing it.

Resistance to pretesting of advertising messages is nothing new; many advertisers have respected their ad agencies' request not to subject their creative ideas and work to the metrics that copy-testing services churn out. For example, Wieden+Kennedy has a reputation for resisting copy testing, and the former director of global marketing for Nike claimed that he had an agreement with W+K‘s founder Dan Kennedy not to pretest its ads noting that ―It makes you dull. It makes you predictable. It makes you feel safe.‖ The former brand manager for Old Spice also notes that the popular ―The Man Your Man Could Smell Like‖ spot was not copy tested. Other popular campaigns that have gone live without pretesting include the ―Mayhem‖ ads for All State Insurance, which are very popular with young people. The campaign has used a number of different executions featuring a villainous character who wreaks havoc on cars and property as a way of showing that many accidents involve more than your average fender bender. Allstate‘s senior VP of marketing noted that while there was some internal pressure to kill the ads, the company did not do any market testing or focus groups; she just asked herself, ―Would I want to watch those ads?‖ The debate over the value of pretesting TV commercials as well as videos and other types of digital content is likely to continue. Leading market research companies such as Ace Metrix, Ipsos, and Millward Brown are adapting their testing methods and developing ways to pretest commercials and videos more quickly online as well as incorporating new types of measures such as biometrics and online behavioral data. However, as more marketers feel the need for speed in developing content, they are likely to forego copy testing and use tools such as social media monitoring to decide whether their messages are resonating with consumers and then respond accordingly.

8. Discuss the role an advertising slogan in plays in the development of an advertising campaign as well as some of the factors that should be considered in developing an effective slogan. Find an example of a good tagline as well as one that does not communicate effectively. Discuss the reasons why you view these as either good or bad examples of advertising slogans. (LO 8-3) An advertising slogan or tagline is used to express the central theme or message that is being communicated in an advertising campaign. The slogan should serve as a summation line that succinctly expresses the company or brand‘s positioning, as well as the message it is trying to deliver to the target audience. Marketing experts note that a good tagline must break through the advertising clutter, differentiate the company or brand, and be memorable. The tagline is a hardworking collection of words that should give you that ‗aha‘ moment every time you see or hear it. A slogan or tagline is the brand‘s sound bite and is often all you can expect consumers to remember. Long-time marketing executive Steve Cone argues that creating strong slogans is a marketer‘s most important job but today is a forgotten part of marketing planning. He suggests that advertising messages should contain ―powerlines,‖ or powerful taglines, which he describes as ―words that are well-chosen and have the power to awe, inspire, motivate, alienate, subjugate, and in a marketing context, change the buying habits of consumers.‖ He argues that since we are bombarded by so many advertising messages, a powerline can do the heavy lifting and break through all of the sensory overload.

Students should find examples of slogans or taglines that they think are very good or effective in meeting these criteria, as well as those that do a poor job of communicating because they use meaningless phrases that do little, if anything, to differentiate the brand or company using it from their competitors or providing an identity for the brand.

9. What is a creative brief? Discuss the various elements that should be included in a creative brief and why they are important. (LO 8-3)

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

The creative brief is a document which specifies the key elements of the creative strategy for an advertising campaign and serves as the basis for communication between a client and the ad agency.

While creative briefs vary from agency to agency, there are a few key elements which are generally included in each one. These include a brief description of the issue or problem the communication must address or solve. Perhaps it is that consumers are not aware the brand or product exists. This would be important for creative to know. It should also include communication objectives. Along the same lines as above, creative should have a clear picture of what the communication must achieve. It should also have a clear description of the target audience. This will dictate a lot about the creative elements of the advertisement. It could also provide any relevant insights that could drive creative work. It would also likely include a description of the key benefits of the product or service and the major selling idea that must be communicated. This would likely impact the copy as well as the visual elements of the ad. It should also include a description of the reason to believe/supporting information—why should consumers believe that this product does what you say it will do?

Additionally, it should provide a description of the tone of the advertising and a description of the brand‘s personality. This certainly impacts the types of visuals, fonts, and copy used. Finally, it should describe deliverables (is it a print ad that‘s needed? If so, what size and when is it needed by?) and a description of the measures of success or how will we know that the creative achieved what we wanted it to do. This should be tied back to objectives.

10. Discuss the creative challenges Intuit and the Wieden+Kennedy agency face in developing advertising campaigns for a tax preparation software product such as TurboTax. Evaluate the creative strategy W+K used for the ―It Doesn't Take a Genius to Do Your Taxes‖ and ―Power of Free‖ campaigns that are discussed in IMC Perspective 8-1. (LO 8-2, 8-3, 8-4) Tax preparation software is not an easy product to advertise as filing taxes creates anxiety in most people, as they fear making a mistake, not getting a full refund, or paying too much in taxes, not to mention the fear of being audited by the IRS. While tax preparation software has made tax filing much easier, fear, uncertainty and doubt persist. During the 2016 tax season, Intuit decided it was time to take the next step in its journey to disrupt people‘s notion and communicate how it was delivering superior value through its product innovation. Intuit developed an insight-driven, integrated marketing campaign designed to reinforce the positioning of TurboTax as the smarter way to do taxes. The campaign dramatized and celebrated ―ownable moments‖ in the TurboTax experience that demonstrate key customer benefits in ways that change people‘s current beliefs about and expectations of TurboTax. To execute on its strategy and show how TurboTax has transformed the tax filing process into something anyone can do, Wieden+Kennedy created a big idea–led campaign titled ―It Doesn‘t Take a Genius to Do Your Taxes.‖ The campaign included seven 30-second TV spots featuring some of the world‘s greatest minds appearing in amusing commercials showing that TurboTax is so simple and intuitive that even real-life geniuses can‘t make it any easier to use or understand. Among the brainiacs appearing in the spots are a physicist, a mathematician, and a computer scientist.

TurboTax‘s integrated marketing campaign not only leveraged the product innovation in its TV campaign, but also promoted the ―ownable moments‖ on the TurboTax.com website and the payoff people experience from using the product.

Another important goal of the campaign was to prove that Intuit has transformed the tax filing process into something anyone can do by promoting how TurboTax was giving 60 million Americans with simple tax returns the ability to file their federal and state states for free by using its Absolute Zero service. For example, one commercial features theoretical physicist Michio Kaku explaining the concept of ―absolute zero‖ as it applies to TurboTax—which charges nothing for its basic, easy-filing service—by noting that ―Nothing is the absence of something. Zero is absolute nothing.‖

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

At the peak of the tax season, Intuit ran a clever commercial on the 2016 Super Bowl featuring Sir Anthony Hopkins being interviewed as an award-winning actor who has resisted the temptation to sell out in his illustrious career. However, as Hopkins explains that he would never impugn his integrity or tarnish his name by selling a product, he lifts a teacup to his mouth with the TurboTax logo. He is also wearing blue slippers promoting the tax service and his dog is wearing a TurboTax sweater. Hopkins notes that he has ―way more integrity‖ than to sell out and rationalizes that he really is not doing so since it is free to file taxes with TurboTax Absolute Zero, noting, ―It‘s free, there‘s nothing to sell.‖ To leverage its Super Bowl ad message, Intuit also utilized digital and social media to extend the Absolute Zero message across online channels and keep it in the forefront of consideration during the offer period. TurboTax took home the 2016 Merkle Digital Bowl crown, which is given each year to the brands that best leverage digital marketing tools such as social media, SEO, paid search, and email marketing to support their Super Bowl advertising. Intuit is well on its way to repositioning the TurboTax brand and building meaningful connections with the core target of On My Way consumers.

The company plans to continue to disrupt people‘s notions of with it is like to do their own taxes with TurboTax, supporting its brand purpose of putting hardworking Americans in charge of their money, starting with taxes.

In the past three years, Intuit has continued to target those do-it-yourself filers in their ―Power of Free‖ campaign. This campaign sought to drive home the point that the service is, in fact, free and featured a number of different situations such as a spelling bee and game show where the only word ever spoken was ―free.‖ This was an effective way to continue reaching this relevant segment with a consistent brand message using a different creative execution.

11. Find an example of an ad or campaign that you think reflects one of the approaches used to develop a major selling idea such as unique selling proposition, brand image, inherent drama, or positioning. Discuss how the major selling idea is used in this ad or campaign. (LO 8-4) Jeweler refers to the major selling idea as ―the strongest singular thing you can say about your product or service. This should be the claim with the broadest and most meaningful appeal to your target audience.‖ O‘Toole describes the big idea as the insight that synthesizes the product benefit with consumer needs or desires. Major selling or big ideas should attract the consumers‘ attention, get a reaction, and differentiate the advertiser‘s product or service from the competition. There are four approaches discussed in the text for developing major selling ideas that can serve as the basis of the creative strategy. These include the unique selling proposition, creation of a brand image, the use of inherent drama, and positioning. Students should bring in examples of ads that they feel are examples of each approach to developing a major selling idea and describe the logic of their selection.

Additional Discussion Questions (not in text) 12. Explain what is meant by creative strategy and creative tactics in advertising. Find an example of an advertising campaign and evaluate the creative strategy and tactics used in the ads. (LO 8-1) Creative strategy determines what an advertising campaign and messages will say or communicate. It is best viewed as a process designed for determining what the advertising should communicate about the product or service and the big idea that will be used as the central theme of the advertising campaign. Creative tactics focus on how the advertising campaign and messages will be communicated with regard to areas such as various appeals and execution styles as well as the tactical issues involved in the design and production of advertising. Students should find an example of a

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

current advertising campaign and evaluate the creative strategy and tactics used in the ad. They should analyze the creative strategy in terms of the big idea used as the central theme of the advertising campaign as well as the type of appeal, execution style, and tactical elements used in the individual ads that are part of the campaign.

13. Television commercials are often developed that rely on unusual creative tactics and have very little relevance to the product or service being advertised. Creative personnel in agencies defend the use of the strange messages by noting that they are novel and break through the clutter.

Evaluate the pros and cons of this argument. (LO 8-1) Creative personnel do face a major challenge, as they must develop ads that will break through the clutter that occurs in various media such as television, radio, online, magazines and newspapers and grab the attention of the viewer, listener or reader. This can be particularly difficult in the broadcast media and online as consumers watching TV, listening to radio, or surfing the Internet are often trying to avoid ads rather than pay attention to them. While consumers may be more receptive to advertising in magazines or newspapers, the vast numbers of ads that appear in most publications makes it very challenging an ad to be noticed. Thus, creative personnel argue that they must use novel tactics such as startling images, sexual or suggestive appeals, or very irreverent ads that can break through the clutter and be noticed by consumers. It often appears that the goal of these ads is to entertain the viewer or listener rather than to deliver a strong message to them. These types of ads often do not contain a message that is relevant to the product or service but do manage to be noticed and register a brand name or attribute association. Creative personnel will also argue the main goal of advertising is to create and maintain top-of-mind awareness and novel or unusual ads are an effective way of doing this.

Those who are from the ―it is not creative unless it sells‖ school of advertising argue that the goal of advertising should be to deliver relevant information that helps sell the brand. They do not accept the breaking through the clutter, capturing attention, or creating controversy argument as viable excuses for developing ads that do not deliver a relevant message or communicate a selling point. They expect advertising to do more than maintain brand awareness and feel that creative personnel must be challenged to do more than develop irreverent or unusual messages.

14. Evaluate the debate over creative versus hard-sell advertising. Discuss the arguments for and against each perspective. Who should be responsible for judging the creativity of an ad—clients or agency creative personnel? (LO-8-1) There has been an ongoing battle in advertising between those who believe ads should move people and those who feel they should just move product. The ―suits‖ or ―rationalists‖ on the hard-sell side argue that the primary function of advertising is to sell the product or service. They take the position that advertising is not creative unless it sells and should be driven by sales results rather than creative awards. They argue that the high costs of commercial production and media time are making it more important than ever for advertising to produce measurable results. They also note that there is tremendous financial pressure on businesses to produce results so they are looking for campaigns that can move the sales needle. Those advocating the hard-sell approach often feel that the more selling points or information in an ad, the better its chances of moving the consumer to make a purchase.

They argue that the goals of an advertising message or campaign should be to deliver relevant and favorable impressions to consumers, which will help sell a product or service. The impact of advertising on sales is the real measure of its creativity and is more important than whether it is innovative or wins awards.

On the other side are the ―poets‖ or proponents of creativity, who argue that advertising has to build an emotional bond between consumers and brands or companies rather than focusing on product

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

features and benefits. They feel that it has become very difficult to differentiate a company or brand based on functional features, as most products have become indistinguishable from their competitors.

They argue that in today‘s highly competitive marketplace where many companies offer high-quality products at similar prices, strong brand images are the key to differentiating a product or service.

Their perspective is that consumers are tired of seeing traditional forms of advertising for products such as automobiles that focus on sleek appearances and advanced features. They argue that consumers want to see ads that are more entertaining, fun and make them feel good. The ―poets‖ also defend the advertising as art and entertainment approach by noting that this type of advertising is needed to break through the clutter as well as the consumers‘ boredom barrier. Moreover, they note that highly creative ads are often effective, even though it is difficult to quantify their impact on sales.

They argue that creativity cannot be judged solely based on sales since and might argue that advertising that is unique or different is often needed to break through the competitive clutter, grab the consumer‘s attention, and have some impact. They are more likely to view creativity in terms of the ad‘s ability to generate an emotional response and create certain feelings or images that can be transferred to the brand.

Those involved with an advertising campaign must understand the importance of balancing these two perspectives. The position of creative personnel must be respected and they should be given some latitude in developing advertising messages. However, the creative team should recognize that ads that are creative only for the sake of being creative often fail to communicate a relevant or meaningful message that will help sell a product or service. There are numerous examples of advertising campaign that have won awards for creativity but failed to sell the product (e.g., Alka-Seltzer). When this occurs, the agency usually loses the account and the client looks for a new approach that will help move the sales needle. Students can be asked to debate these two perspectives on advertising creativity.

There is no easy answer to the second part of this question as ideas and perceptions regarding what constitutes a creative ad vary among those who are involved with and evaluate advertising. The issue of who should have the responsibility for judging the creativity of an advertisement is debatable.

Obviously creative personnel are probably best able to evaluate an ad in terms of criteria such as its novelty, uniqueness, and artistic merits. However, the client may be in the best position to evaluate the ad in terms of its ability to communicate the intended sales message to the target audience.

Ideally, there should be agreement between the creative specialists and client. The client does not want creativity for creativity‘s sake but rather a creative message that effectively communicates with consumers. On the other hand, the client must respect the creative insight and background of the agency.

15. Discuss the key characteristics of a unique selling proposition. What are some of the factors an advertiser must consider in developing an advertising campaign that uses a USP as the basis for the major selling idea? (LO 8-4) The famous advertising copywriter Rosser Reeves developed the concept of the unique selling proposition (USP). The concept of a USP is that it offers the consumer a specific feature or benefit that is important to them and unique to this particular brand. The three characteristics of a USP are that each ad must make a proposition to the consumer that tells them the benefit they will get by buying the brand; the proposition must be one that the competition either cannot or does not offer; and the proposition must have motivating power and thus be able to convince consumers to buy the brand. Students should be encouraged to find an example of an advertisement that they feel uses a USP as its major selling proposition. The ad should be evaluated against the three characteristics of USPs discussed here and in the chapter.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

16. The chapter discusses how advertising agencies are sometimes fired even though they create award-winning ads and campaigns for their clients. Evaluate the decision by companies such as AB InBev to dismiss their ad agency and hire a new one even though the agency has done award-winning creative work for the company/brand. (LO 8-1) DDB had been the agency for Anheuser Busch‘s two major brands, Budweiser and Bud Light, for 30 years before AB InBev terminated the relationship in 2011. The decision by AB InBev to switch agencies came as somewhat of a surprise given the excellent creative work DDB had done for the two agencies over the past three decades. In 1981, the agency helped launch Bud Light, which is now the leading brand of beer in the U.S. market, and developed a number of award-winning campaigns such for the brand such as the ―Real Men of Genius‖ radio campaign and ads featuring the Spuds McKenzie mascot dog. DDB also created the popular ―Whassup?‖ campaign for Budweiser as well as numerous commercials featuring the iconic Clydesdales. Commercials for Budweiser and Bud Light developed by DDB were among the most popular on the Super Bowl each year as Anheuser Busch has been the major advertiser on the big game. One of the reasons AB InBev may have switched agencies is that while Bud Light and Budweiser are the two leading brands of beer in the U.S., both brands have struggled to increase their sales during the economic downturn that began in 2009. Thus, AB InBev decided it was time to change its creative direction for both brands. The company had begun using other agencies for Budweiser in countries such as Brazil even though DDB was the global agency of record and had an office in the country. AB InBev also began asking other agencies to submit creative ideas for its U.S. advertising for the brands, which was a sign of a strained relationship with DDB. As discussed in Chapter 3, marketers often will consider changing agencies when sales are struggling and they feel that a fresh creative approach is needed. AB InBev had relegated DDB to the sidelines several years ago and decided to use a campaign developed by the agency Anomaly as its main creative campaign called ―Grab Some Buds.‖ In early 2012, DDB was replaced by the two agencies on the Bud Light account, McGarry Bowen and the independent agency Translation. However, McGarry Bowen lasted only eight months before begin terminated with more of the creative work going to Translation. In 2013, AB InBev changed agencies for Bud Light once again, moving to BBDO, which positioned it as a brand for spontaneous fun with the ―Up for Whatever‖ campaign. However, two years later, as sales continued to decline, the Bud Light account was moved from BBDO to Wieden+Kennedy. A spokesperson for AB InBev suggested that BBDO was trying too hard to appeal to young adult drinkers, noting that Bud Light is a brand that appeals to everyone and that everybody who is young at heart should be attracted to the brand, not just young adults.

17. Discuss the types of research that can be used by an advertising agency during the preparation, illumination, and incubation stages of the creative process. Find an example of an advertising campaign that has used research as input to the creative process and discuss how they have done so. (LO 8-2, 8-3) Many agencies, particularly larger ones with strong research departments, have their own research programs and specific techniques they use to assist in the development of creative strategy and provide input to the creative process. In addition to the various quantitative research studies, qualitative research techniques such as in-depth interviews or focus groups can provide the creative team with valuable insight at the early stages of the creative process. Focus groups are a research method whereby consumers (usually 10 to 12 people) from the target market are led through a discussion regarding a particular topic. Focus groups give insight as to why and how consumers use a product or service, what is important to them in choosing a particular brand, what they like and don‘t like about various products or services, and any special needs they might have that aren‘t being satisfied. A focus group session might also include a discussion of types of ad appeals to use or evaluation of the advertising of various companies.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Ethnographic research involves studying consumers by observing or interacting with them in their natural environment such as in their homes, at work, or at play. This type of research can be very valuable as input to the creative process as it provides insight into the behavior patterns, purchase motives and idiosyncrasies of consumers that are gained by observing or interacting with them. For example, researchers at Procter & Gamble used ethnographic research whereby they observed consumers in their homes during the early morning hours when they were preparing and enjoying a cup of coffee. Insight was gained into the importance of the ritual of having a cup of coffee by observing how consumers enjoy the experience. The popular campaign for Folgers coffee that utilizes the tagline ―The best part of waking up is Folgers in your cup‖ evolved from ethnographic research done by P&G researchers. P&G sold Folgers to the J.M. Smucker Co. in 2008, which still uses the tagline in advertising for the brand. Students should be encouraged to find other examples of advertising campaigns that have used ethnographic research as input to the creative process. Sources of information for this assignment might include Advertising Age, AdWeek, or the Effie or Clio Awards case studies.

18. Many advertising creative personnel are opposed to focus group research as they argue that they may inhibit the creative process. Discuss the problems, as well as the value, of using focus groups to evaluate advertising creative work. (LO 8-2) Focus groups are a qualitative research method whereby a small group of consumers are led through a discussing regarding a particular topic or issue. They can be used to gather detailed insight as to why and how consumers use a product or service, problems they might have and are looking to resolve as consumers, what is important to them in choosing a particular brand, and what they like or dislike about various brands. They can also be used to evaluate advertisements as consumers can be shown examples of current or proposed ads and asked to evaluate them. All of this information can be useful to those involved in the creative process as input gathered from focus groups provides creative specialists with a better sense of who the target audience is, what they are like, their purchase motives, and what they like and dislike about various types of advertising.

Malcolm Gladwell has been critical of focus groups as he argues that there is very little psychological justification for the notion that you can find out what people think about an idea, particularly a revolutionary new idea, by asking them. In his book, Blink: The Power of Thinking Without Thinking, Gladwell examines the content and origin of instantaneous impressions and argues that decisions made quickly can be as good as those made after much deliberation. Agency creative personnel have long been critical of the idea of having their ideas and work critiqued by consumers as they argue that it limits their ability to develop innovative and breakthrough advertising. Recently, focus groups have been criticized for a number of reasons. Many advertising creative people insist that good ideas do not need to be tested and that testing can weaken a creative execution. They note that focus group participants often have difficulty expressing how they feel about a commercial and often mimic the responses of a dominant member of the group. It has also been argued that focus groups do not provide enough insight into consumer‘s emotional responses to an ad and may encourage consumers to think too much rather than respond the way they might while watching television. While creatives may be opposed to the use of focus groups, it is very unlikely that clients will allow them to produce ads without some early indication of how consumers will respond to them. There are many examples of situations where the testing of creative concepts and even finished commercials has provided very valuable input that was used to make modifications to an ad or campaign before it ran. Companies that are spending millions in production and media costs want to be confident that their ads are going to effectively communicate with consumers and will want to test them either through focus groups or some other type of testing method. A very good article on this issue titled ―Why the Traditional Focus Group is Dying‖ can be found in the October 31, 2005 issue of AdWeek, pp. 24–25, 32.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

CHAPTER 9 CREATIVE STRATEGY: IMPLEMENTATION AND EVALUATION Chapter Overview In the previous chapter, the importance of advertising creativity was examined along with the creative process of advertising. Attention was also given to various approaches for determining the big idea that will be used as the central theme of the advertising campaign. This chapter continues the discussion of creative strategy by turning attention to how these big ideas are developed into advertising messages. We will examine various appeals and execution styles that can be used in developing an advertisement along with tactical issues involved in the design and production of advertising messages. The chapter concludes with a discussion of some guidelines for evaluating the creative work of the advertising agency.

Learning Objectives 1.

Compare the different types of appeals used in advertising.

2.

Identify creative execution styles and their most appropriate applications.

3.

Compare tactics for the creation of print ads and TV commercials as well as online advertising.

4.

Discuss guidelines for clients to evaluate creative work.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Chapter and Lecture Outline I.

APPEALS AND EXECUTION STYLES

Once the major selling idea and the advertising campaign theme has been agreed upon, the creative team then turns its attention to determining the specific type of appeal and execution style that will be used to carry out the creative concept. The advertising appeal refers to the basis or approach used in the advertisement to elicit some consumer response or to influence their feelings toward the product, service, or cause. The focus in this chapter is on how the advertising message will be executed and considers the various appeals or approaches used to as well as the creative execution styles that can be used to turn the appeal into an actual advertisement. This is the way a particular appeal is turned into an advertising message presented to the consumer.

A.

Advertising Appeals—Many different appeals can be utilized as the bases for advertising messages. At the broadest level, these approaches can be broken down into two categories or classes, which are informational/rational appeals and emotional appeals.

1. Informational/rational appeals—Informational/rational appeals focus on the consumer's practical, functional, or utilitarian need for the product or service and/or specific reasons for owning a particular brand. These types of messages emphasize facts, learning, and the logic of persuasion. The Honda SUV ad shown in Exhibit 9-1 provides an example of a rational appeal. Examples of a number of product- or service-related appeals that would fall under the category of rational appeals are discussed including: ●

Feature appeals—these focus on the dominant traits of the product or service, tend to be highly informative, and present the customer with a number of important product attributes or features that will lead to favorable attitudes and can be used as the basis for rational purchase decisions. Exhibit 9-2 provides an example of this type of appeal.

●

Competitive advantage appeals—the advertiser makes either a direct or indirect comparison to another brand or brands and is usually claiming superiority on one or more attributes.

●

Favorable price appeals—makes the price offer the dominant point of the message. It is most often used to announce sales, special offers, or low prices.

●

News appeals—a news or announcement about the product, service, or company dominates the ad. It is often used for a new product or service or to inform consumers about major changes or improvements to a product or service.

●

Product/service popularity appeals—stress the popularity of a product by pointing out the number of consumers who use the brand, the number who have switched to it, the experts that recommend it, or the like.

2. Emotional appeals—Emotional appeals relate to consumers' social and/or psychological needs for purchasing a product or service. Emotional appeals have become very popular in advertising as marketers recognize that many purchase decisions are made based on feelings and emotions since rational, functional-based differentiation is often very difficult and dull.

Examples of psychological states or feelings that can serve as a basis for emotional appeals are shown in Figure 9-1 of the text. The effectiveness of emotional appeals has been documented in a number of research studies by Pringle and Field, which are discussed in their book Brand Immortality. A key finding from their research is that advertising campaigns with purely emotional content are nearly twice as likely to generate large profit gains versus

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

campaigns using only rational content. The emotional only campaigns were also more effective than those that used a combination of emotional and rational content. One of the reasons given for why emotional campaigns work so well is that they reduce price sensitivity and strengthen the ability of brands to charge a price premium, which contributes to profitability. While emotional appeals are often executed through television commercials, many marketers are now using online videos to portray emotional appeals, which often leads to popular messages going viral.

Another reason for using emotional appeals is to influence consumers' interpretations of their product usage experience through the use of transformation ads. This type of ad associates the experience of using or consuming the advertised brand with a unique set of psychological characteristics that would not typically be associated with the brand experience to the same degree without exposure to the advertisement. Advertisements using this appeal create feelings, images, meanings, and beliefs about the product that are activated when consumers use it. A transformational ad has two characteristics: 1) it must make the experience of using the product more exciting and enjoyable than that obtained simply from a description of the brand, and 2) it must connect the experience of the advertisement so tightly with the experience of using the brand that consumers cannot remember the brand without recalling the experience generated by the advertisement. The ―Find Your Beach‖ campaign for Corona Extra beer found in Exhibit 9-7 is a very good example of transformational advertising.

3. Combining rational and emotional appeals—Many purchase decisions are made based on both rational and emotional motives. Thus, rational and emotional appeals may be combined in the advertisement to attempt to influence both types of purchase motives. The strongest relationship between a consumer and a brand is based on feeling or emotional attachment to the brand, and marketers are constantly searching for ways to connect with consumers on an emotional level. IMC Perspective 9-1 provides an example of Subaru of America making a decision to change its creative strategy from rational- to emotional-based advertising with their ―Love‖ campaign.

4. Additional types of appeals—Other appeal types discussed in the text include: reminder advertising, which has the objective of building brand awareness and/or keeping the brand name in front of consumers; teaser advertising, which is used to build curiosity and interest or excitement for a product or brand by talking about it but not showing it; and usergenerated content (UGC) whereby ads are created by consumers rather than by the company and/or its agency. The Frito Lay Doritos campaign ―Crash the Super Bowl‖ campaign was based on user-generated content as the various TV spots used in the campaign were created by consumers rather than an advertising agency. The increasing use of social media such as YouTube and Facebook is likely to result in greater use of user-generated content by marketers as a way of getting consumers more engaged with their brands.

B.

Advertising Execution—Creative execution refers to the manner in which an advertising appeal is carried out or presented. A particular advertising appeal can be executed in a variety of ways and a particular means of execution can be applied to a variety of advertising appeals. Some of the more commonly used execution techniques include: 1. Straight-sell or factual message—This type of execution relies on a straightforward presentation of information about the product or service such as specific attributes or benefits.

It is one of the most basic types of creative executions and is commonly used in print ads.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

2. Scientific/technical evidence—A variation of the straight sell where scientific or technical evidence or information is presented in the ad to support a claim. Advertisers use support from doctors or other trusted agencies to support their claims.

3. Demonstration—This type of execution is designed to illustrate the key advantages or benefits of a product or service by showing it in actual use or in some contrived or staged situation.

4. Comparison—This type of execution involves a direct or indirect comparison of a brand against the competition. This has become an increasingly popular approach among advertisers.

5. Testimonial—Many advertisers present their advertising messages in the form of a testimonial whereby a person speaks on behalf of the product or service based on his or her personal use of and/or experiences with it. This is a popular approach used by marketers such as weight-loss companies as shown in Exhibit 9-15.

6. Slice of life—This type of execution is often based on a problem/solution type of format. The ad attempts to portray a real-life situation involving a problem, conflict or situation consumers may face in their daily lives. The ad then focuses on showing how the advertiser's product or service can resolve the problem. Slice-of-life executions are also becoming very common in business-to-business advertising as companies use this approach to demonstrate how their products and services can be used to solve business problems.

7. Animation—This technique uses animated characters or scenes drawn by artists or on a computer. Animation is often used as an execution technique for advertising targeted at children, such as in toys and cereal commercials. Animated characters have been used in many campaigns, including Green Giant vegetable (the Jolly Green Giant) and Keebler cookies (the Keebler elves). Some advertisers use ads that mix animation with real people.

For example, Star-Kist tuna often uses commercials featuring Charlie the Tuna that mixes animation with real people. Kraft Foods recently revitalized its Mr. Peanut character to make him more appealing to younger consumers. Many advertisers now rely on computergenerated animation, such as the award-winning ―Back to the Start‖ short film for Chipotle‘s Cultivate Foundation, which is shown in Exhibit 9-17.

8. Personality symbol—This type of execution involves the use of a central character or personality symbol to deliver the advertising message and with whom the company or brand can be identified. The personality symbol can take the form of an actual person who is used as a spokesperson, animated characters or even animals. For example, AFLAC has made effective use of this execution style by developing commercials that have made a duck a popular personality symbol for the company. The chapter opener discusses how the Wieden+Kennedy agency created a campaign for KFC that resurrected Colonel Harlan Sanders, who founded the company (originally known as Kentucky Fried Chicken) in 1940 and appeared in ads for decades for the chicken restaurant chain. The campaign harkens to the company‘s past by using comedians Darrell Hammond and Norm Macdonald playing the founder as well as actor George Hamilton. Dos Equis also used this technique by creating a popular personality symbol for the brand with ―The Most Interesting Man in the World‖ campaign.

Imagery—This type of appeal is used when the goal is to encourage consumers to associate the brand with the symbols, characters, and/or situation shown in the ad. An imagery execution may be based on usage imagery by showing how a brand is used or performs and the situation in which it is used. It can also be based on user imagery where the focus is on

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

the type of person who uses the brand. For example, ads for cosmetics and clothing often use very attractive models in the hope of getting consumers to associate his or her physical attractiveness with the brand.

10. Dramatization—This execution technique creates a suspenseful situation or scenario in the form of a short story and is particularly well-suited to television. Dramatizations often use the problem/solution approach as they show how the advertised brand can help resolve a problem. The challenge that faces the creative team when using a dramatic execution is how to encompass the various elements and tell the story effectively in 30 seconds, which is the length of the typical commercial. Dramatization is also now a large part of short films posted on websites and social media platforms.

11. Humor—Humor can be used as the basis for an advertising appeal. However, humor can also be used as a way of executing the message and presenting other types of advertising appeals.

Humorous executions are particularly well suited to television or radio, although some print ads attempt to use this style.

12. Combinations—Many of these execution techniques can be combined in presenting an advertising message. For example, slice-of-life ads are often used to demonstrate a product and make brand comparisons. IMC Perspective 9-2 shows a variety of execution styles utilized by DASANI that helped make them a leading brand of bottled water.

Professor Notes:

McGraw-Hill Connect ®: Appeals Used in WPU's Campaigns Type of Activity: Click and Drag Activity Summary: In this activity, students will match the various campaign options developed by the ad agency for WPU‘s campaign with the type of advertising appeals used.

Activity Learning Objective: 09-01 Compare the different types of appeals used in advertising.

Concept Review: The advertising appeal refers to the approach used to attract the attention of consumers and/or to influence their feelings toward the product, service, or cause. An advertising appeal can also be viewed as something that moves people, speaks to their wants or needs, and excites their interest. Many different appeals can be used as the basis for advertising messages. At the broadest level, these approaches are generally broken into two categories: informational/rational appeals and emotional appeals.

Difficulty: 2 Medium Bloom‘s: Understand AACSB: Analytical Thinking

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

McGraw-Hill Connect ®: Bee and Gee Ad Executions Type of Activity: Case Analysis Activity Summary: Bee & Gee is a multi-product, multi-brand, packaged goods company with a significant presence in the personal care and grooming category. Within each product category, it has numerous brands that sometimes compete with each other in the same geographical markets. Bee & Gee has four different shampoo brands that it markets to consumers in multiple countries. This activity will have the students select the best answer for each question related to their execution techniques.

Activity Learning Objective: 09-02 Identify creative execution styles and their most appropriate applications.

Concept Review: Once the specific advertising appeal that will be used as the basis for the advertising message has been determined, the creative specialist or team begins its execution. Creative execution is the way an advertising appeal is presented. While it is obviously important for an ad to have a meaningful appeal or message to communicate to the consumer, the manner in which the ad is executed is also important.

Difficulty: 2 Medium Bloom‘s: Analyze AACSB: Analytical Thinking

McGraw-Hill Connect ®: DASANI: Implementation of Creative Strategy Type of Activity: Case Analysis Activity Summary: Students are asked to watch a video about DASANI‘s creative strategy. They are then tasked with answering questions relating to their creative strategy and repositioning Activity Learning Objectives: 09-01 Compare the different types of appeals used in advertising.

09-02 Identify creative execution styles and their most appropriate applications.

Concept Review: Ads that use a feature appeal focus on the dominant traits of the product or service and tend to be highly informative and present the customer with a number of important product attributes or features that will lead to favorable attitudes and can be used as the basis for a rational purchase decision. Some of DASANI‘s executions utilized a demonstration. Demonstration advertising is designed to illustrate the key advantages of the product/service by showing it in actual use or in some staged situation.

Difficulty: 1 Easy; 2 Medium; 3 Hard

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Bloom‘s: Remember; Understand; Apply AACSB: Knowledge Application; Communication

II.

CREATIVE TACTICS

Once the creative approach, type of appeal, and execution style has been determined, attention turns to creating the actual advertisement. The design and production of an advertising message involves a number of activities such as writing copy, developing illustrations and other visual elements of the ad and bringing all of the pieces together in a finished product.

A.

Creative Tactics for Print Advertising—There are four basic components of a print ad including the headline, body copy, the visual elements or illustrations, and the layout, which brings the headline, body copy, and visuals all together.

1. Headlines—The headline refers to the words in the leading position of the advertisement— those that are likely to be read first or are positioned to draw the most attention. The most important function of a headline is to attract the readers‘ attention and make them interested in the remainder of the advertising message. In general, only about 20 percent of readers go beyond the headline and read the body copy below it so headlines are very important and are judged on their ability to draw readers in. There are various types of headlines including: ●

Direct headlines—straightforward and informative in terms of the message presented.

●

Indirect headlines—provoke curiosity and intrigue by using questions, challenges, provocations, and other methods.

●

Subheads—Many ads also contain a main headline and one or more secondary headlines or subheads. These subheads usually appear in a smaller type size than the main headline and are generally larger than the type size used for the body copy. They are used to break-up or section off large amounts of body copy and highlight key sales points in the ad.

●

Body copy—The main text portion of a print ad is referred to as the body copy. Body copy content depends on the type of advertising appeal and/or execution style being used.

It is the heart of the advertising message but can often be quite difficult to get the target audience to read. In an attempt to get them to read it, the body copy often flows from the points made in the headline and subheads.

2. Visual elements—Another major component of a print ad is the visual elements or illustrations. Visual components often dominate print advertising and play a very important role in determining effectiveness. Visuals must attract attention, communicate an idea or image, and work in a synergistic fashion with the written portions of the message.

3. Layout—A layout refers to the physical arrangement of the various parts of the ad including the headline, subheads, illustrations, body copy, and any identifying marks. The layout shows where each part of the ad will be placed and gives guidelines to the various people working on the ad.

B.

Creative Tactics for Television—TV is a unique and powerful advertising medium because it contains the elements of sight, sound, and motion, which can be combined to create a variety of advertising appeals and executions. As with print ads, television commercials have several

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

components which must work together to create the right impact to communicate the advertiser's message.

1. Video—The video or visual elements are what is seen on the television screen. Decisions have to be made regarding the main focus of the visual components of a television commercial, such as the product, the presenter, scenery, action sequences, lighting graphics, color and other factors.

2. Audio—The audio portion of a commercial includes several elements such as voice, music, and sound effects. Voices may be heard in several ways such as through the direct presentation of a spokesperson or as a dialogue or conversation among people in the commercial. A common method for presenting the audio portion of a commercial is through a voiceover, whereby the message is delivered, or action on the screen is narrated, by the voice of an announcer who is not visible. A trend among major advertisers is to hire celebrities with distinctive voices to do the voiceovers for their commercials. Some examples of famous celebrity voiceovers are provided in the text.

Another very important part of many television commercials is music, which plays various roles and functions such as providing a pleasant background or helping create the appropriate mood or setting. Some artists are concerned about the backlash they might get when their songs are used in commercials. Many advertisers choose to use what is referred to as needledrop music. This is music that is prefabricated, multipurpose, and highly conventional.

It is essentially the music equivalent of stock photography. Another important musical element in both television and radio commercials is jingles, which are catchy songs about a product or service that usually carry the advertising theme and a simple message.

3. Planning and production of television commercials—One of the primary decisions that must be made when planning a television commercial includes determining the type of appeal and execution style to be used. Television is suited to both rational and emotional advertising appeals or a combination of the two. Commercials on television are an integral part of the IMC program for most marketers but particularly larger companies that are advertising to mass markets. ●

Planning the commercial—The script is a written version of a commercial that provides a detailed description of its video and audio content. The script indicates the various audio components of the commercial such as the copy to be spoken by voices, music, and sound effects. The video portion of the script provides the visual plan of the commercial.

Once the basic script has been conceived, the writer and art director get together to produce a storyboard or a series of drawings used to present the visual plan or layout of a proposed commercial. Once the client approves the storyboard, the commercial is ready to move to the production phase.

●

Production—The process for commercial production involves three phases: 1. Preproduction—all the work and activities that occur before the actual filming of a commercial.

2. Production—the period during which the commercial is filmed or videotaped and recorded.

3. Postproduction—activities and work that occur after the commercial has been filmed and recorded.

The activities at each stage of commercial production are shown in Figure 9-3.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

C.

Creative Tactics for Online Advertising—Marketers are allocating more of their media budgets to digital ads that appear on websites, social media, and mobile devices, which are creating a new set of challenges from a creative perspective. Compared to traditional media such as television or magazines, the Internet is a more goal-oriented medium. Getting consumers to pay attention to, let alone engage or interact with, a digital ad is very difficult since doing so takes them away from the content on the web page or social media site they are visiting on their computers, tablets, or phones. Online ads often interrupt our viewing sessions, and unless they are providing relevant information and/or are very creative or entertaining, it is likely they will be ignored.

1. Role of digital ads—A variety of digital advertising formats are available to marketers including banner ads, search ads, interstitials, native ads, and videos. The type of online ad used by marketers will vary depending on the goal(s) they are trying to achieve. The goal of digital concept ads is to drive top-of-the-funnel goals such as awareness and interest, which can be achieved through banner ads, or videos such as commercials. Content ads typically have a mid-funnel goal of enhancing consumers‘ knowledge or understanding of a product or service, which can be done by providing high-quality content with which the viewer can engage. Different types of online ads can be used to provide content such as videos, webisodes, in-feed ads to Facebook or Twitter with sponsored content, and native ads. Native advertising is a type of paid placement designed to fit seamlessly into the content that surrounds it. The design, content, and writing style of a native ad mirrors the nonpaid content around it, giving the user the impression that it really belongs. Native advertising is becoming a dominant form of content advertising, particularly in digital editions of magazines and newspapers.

The third form of digital advertising is commerce ads, which primarily have a bottom-of-thefunnel goal of getting consumers to take action and make a purchase. Commerce ads are the dominant form of display advertising, particularly retargeting types that follow consumers across the Web, and typically are not visually rich as their success is based on serving the right offer to consumers and can be easily measured in terms of clicks and conversions. ●

Display ads—Many online display ads use large-size ad formats such as rectangular ads, horizontally oriented leaderboards, or skyscrapers that are vertically oriented and give advertisers the ability to place an ad adjacent to the website content. In terms of effective online ad formats, a study found that the best performing ad unit in terms of metrics such as brand awareness, recall, and purchase intent was the traditional pixel rectangular banner ad, noting that ads surrounding content, such as well-worn skyscraper and leaderboard units, are the least effective, as people have developed ―banner blindness.‖

●

Online video—The use of online video advertising is growing rapidly and is part of the tremendous growth in the viewing of videos across all online platforms including websites, YouTube, Facebook, Twitter, Snapchat, and other popular social media sites.

The use of video for online advertising can include multiple formats ranging from the airing of a digital video or commercial in a program streaming online to more customized formats for viewing on mobile devices. The text discusses the award-winning ―Unskippable‖ campaign the Martin Agency developed for GEICO, which consisted of a series of ads created specifically for use as pre-roll to YouTube videos.

Professor Notes:

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

McGraw-Hill Connect ®: Sunday Motor's Creative Tactics Type of Activity: Click and Drag Activity Summary: An advertising agency is currently in the process of planning and developing television ads for the Sunday Santa Barbara, an SUV made by the Sunday Motor Corporation, an Asian automaker. Students will identify the correct sequence of the various stages in the planning and development process of a television commercial. They will then match activities with the corresponding stage of the commercial planning and development process for the Sunday Santa Barbara TV commercial.

Activity Learning Objective: 09-03 Compare tactics for the creation of print ads and TV commercials as well as online advertising.

Concept Review: Once the creative approach, type of appeal, and execution style have been determined, attention turns to creating the actual advertisement. The design and production of advertising messages involve a number of activities, among them writing copy, developing illustrations and other visual elements of the ad, and bringing all of the pieces together to create an effective message. The verbal and visual elements of an ad are part of the tactical considerations in creating print ads and TV commercials.

Difficulty: 3 Hard Bloom‘s: Understand AACSB: Analytical Thinking

III.

CLIENT EVALUATION AND APPROVAL OF CREATIVE WORK

While the creative specialists determine the advertising appeal and execution style that will be used in the campaign, the client must evaluate and approve the creative approach before any ads are actually produced. A number of different people on the client side may be involved in evaluating and approving the creative work of the agency. The amount and influence of these individuals will depend on the company's organization and policies, the importance of the product to the company, the role of advertising in the marketing program, and the nature of the advertising approach being recommended.

There are two basic stages in the development of advertising—creation and production. Most of the attention in this chapter has focused on the creation stage and creative process. Once the creative approach has been determined and approved, the attention turns to the production process, which involves a variety of functions needed to produce the ad or commercial and put it into a finished form suitable for use by the media. The client will have the opportunity to review the final version of the advertisement after the production stage. However, it is important that a careful evaluation be made before the ad actually enters production, as this stage requires a substantial investment of time and money.

A.

Guidelines for Evaluating Creative Output—There are a number of guidelines that personnel on the client side might use to evaluate the creative approaches suggested by the agency. Some of the most important and basic criteria or guidelines that might be used in evaluating creative approaches are discussed in the text and include the following:

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

●

Is the creative approach consistent with the brand's marketing and advertising objectives?

●

Is the creative approach consistent with the creative strategy and objectives? Does it communicate what it is supposed to?

●

Is the creative approach appropriate for the target audience?

●

Does the creative approach communicate a clear and convincing message to the customer?

●

Does the creative execution keep from overwhelming the message?

●

Is the creative approach appropriate for the media environment in which it is likely to be seen?

●

Is the ad truthful and tasteful?

Professor Notes:

McGraw-Hill Connect ®: GECKO: Evaluating Creative Output Type of Activity: Matching Activity Summary: This activity provides students with a case providing information on the development of the famous GECKO character for insurance provider GEICO. Students are then tasked with answering questions relating to GEICO‘s creative strategy.

Activity Learning Objective: 09-04 Discuss guidelines for clients to evaluate creative work.

Concept Review: This provides a good opportunity to review the criteria for evaluating creative approaches. These include asking: Is the creative approach consistent with the brand‘s marketing and advertising objectives?; Is the creative approach consistent with the creative strategy and objectives? Does it communicate what it is supposed to?; Is the creative approach appropriate for the target audience?; Does the creative approach communicate a clear and convincing message to the customer?; Does the creative execution keep from overwhelming the message?; Is the creative approach appropriate for the media environment in which it is likely to be seen?; and Is the ad truthful and tasteful?

Difficulty: 2 Medium Bloom‘s: Apply AACSB: Analytical Thinking

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Teaching Suggestions Nearly every student has an opinion about the quality and effectiveness of various ads and those they feel are particularly good or bad. Students should enjoy reading this chapter and learning about the various creative appeals and execution styles that can be used by advertisers. An interesting way of beginning the lecture on creative strategy is to ask students to name the TV commercial or print ad they would rate as the "most outstanding" one they have seen lately. You might then ask them how they think their list of top commercials would compare against that of ad critics. Publications such as Advertising Age and AdWeek pick the best ads each year and feature them in special editions. For example, the Advertising Age Best Awards are given each year in various product and service categories and for various media including television, radio, newspapers magazines, out of home and interactive. There are a few very interesting websites that you may want to visit and direct your students to including Ad Forum (www.adforum.com), Advertising Age’s Creativity Online (https://adage.com/creativity), and iSpot TV (www.ispot.tv/browse), which provides television commercial examples along with their performance metrics. Commercials currently running can be viewed on these sites and they also include reviews of spots, industry news, and many other interesting features. A number of marketers now have their own YouTube channel where they make their commercials available as well as other videos used. For example, Nike‘s channel can be found at www.youtube.com/user/nike.

This chapter does not go into a great amount of detail regarding the process of creating and producing the advertisement. If more detail is desired on areas such as art and layout, copywriting, or print and broadcast production students might be referred to a more traditional advertising principles book such as Contemporary Advertising by William F. Arens, Michael Weigold, and Christian Arens. There are also numerous books available on the creative process such as Creative Strategy in Advertising by A. Jerome Jeweler and Bonnie L. Drewniany and Creative Advertising: Theory and Practice by Sandra E. Moriarty.

Students interested in specific areas of the creative process such as copywriting or layout can be referred to books such as Creative Advertising by Mario Pricken, The Design of Advertising by Roy Paul Nelson, Advertising Copywriting by Philip Ward Burton and Fundamentals of Copy & Layout by Albert C. Book and C. Dennis Schick.

The chapter opener discusses Wieden+Kennedy‘s campaign for KFC that resurrected Colonel Harland Sanders who originally founded the company. Since the resurrection of Colonel Sanders, KFC sales have continued to increase for five straight years and dozens of celebrities have portrayed the Colonel including Rob Lowe, George Hamilton, and country music star Reba McEntire. Another example of successful, creative advertising is provided of Dos Equis‘ ―The Most Interesting Man in the World‖ campaign.

Answers to Discussion Questions 1. Discuss some of the reasons a marketer might choose to create a personality symbol or character to represent the company or brand. Choose one of the personality symbols discussed in the chapter opener and discuss the company’s decision to use this individual as a personality symbol for the brand in its advertising. (LO 9-2) Marketers might choose to create a personality symbol or character for their company or brand for a number of reasons. One of the major reasons is that a personality symbol or character can be an effective way to draw attention to a company‘s advertising and a way to break through the clutter of competing ads. They can also be a way to build and maintain an identity for a company or brand, particularly when the character is well-liked by consumers. They can also bring some continuity to an advertising campaign as consumers will be seeing the person or character regularly and thus can associate him/her or the character with the company or brand. A campaign created by the

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Wieden+Kennedy agency for KFC resurrected Colonel Harland Sanders, who founded the company (originally known as Kentucky Fried Chicken) in 1940 and appeared in ads for decades for the popular chicken restaurant chain. Although Sanders died over 35 years ago, KFC decided to harken back to its past by having comedians Darrell Hammond and Norm Macdonald play the bespectacled founder. In 2017 George Hamilton, the handsome actor best known for his extreme suntans, was added to play the Colonel. Hamilton appears as an extra bronzed colonel in commercial for Extra Crispy Colonel, making him KFC‘s first product-specific colonel. A major goal of the campaign is to appeal to millennials, many of whom have never tried KFC, by adding a modern, comedic twist to his character. The integrated campaign included new packaging, menu items, websites, and social media and helped increase KFC sales since its launch. Some store sales at KFC locations have increased every quarter since the campaign reintroducing the Colonel began in May 2015. The campaign has also generated a considerable amount of earned media, as the commercials are very popular on YouTube and other social media platforms.

2. IMC Perspective 9-1 discusses the success of the ―Love‖ campaign used by Subaru for the past decade. Why do you think this campaign has been more successful than some of the other creative appeals used in advertising for Subaru? (LO 9-1) The ―Love‖ campaign likely broke through the clutter of other car ads as the campaign chose to use emotional appeals rather than logical ones. While other brands focus on the fuel efficiency, lower cost, or enhanced features of the vehicle itself, this campaign focused on consumers. Specifically, this campaign helped tie together Subaru‘s attributes, which they had been attempting to communicate for years, and help resonate with consumers. The campaign also likely saw such success as it was based on consumer insights. When asked why they purchased their Subarus, nearly all participants responded that they ―loved‖ their Subaru. Armed with this insight, the Subaru brand knew that it was not the logical appeals that would resonate with consumers, but an emotional one that showed them how and why they would also love their Subaru. The brand determined that it was ―Love that makes a Subaru a Subaru‖ and that was what made people buy them.

3. Explain the concept of transformational advertising. Find an example of a company that is using transformational ads and discuss how the ads might enhance the experience of using the product or service. (LO 9-1) A transformational ad associates the experience of using (consuming) the advertised brand with a unique set of psychological characteristics that would not be typically be associated with the brand experience to the same degree without exposure to the advertisement. Transformational ads create feelings, images meanings, and beliefs about the product or service that may be activated when consumers use it and thus "transforms" their interpretation of the usage experience.

There are many good examples of how companies use transformational advertising to enhance the consumption experience of consumers. McDonald‘s has used TV commercials showing parents or grandparents enjoying the experience of taking their children or grandchildren to the fast food restaurant and enjoying a bonding experience with them. These types of commercials can be very effective as they can make the experience of a trip to McDonalds with a child richer, warmer and more enjoyable. The ―Find Your Beach‘ campaign for Corona Extra beer that is discussed in the chapter is also a very good example of transformational advertising as the ads are designed to preserve Corona‘s iconic beach image while extending the Corona state of mind beyond the sun, sand, and surf.

4. Choose three of the advertising execution techniques discussed in the chapter and find examples of advertisements that are using them. Discuss why these companies or brands might be using these particular ad execution techniques. (LO 9-2)

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

A number of advertising execution techniques are discussed in the chapter and students should be encouraged to select three of them to analyze and find examples of their use. We discuss two of them here to as an example of how this question might be answered.

The slice-of-life format relies on a problem–solution approach that is often presented with a little drama. These spots usually begin by showing consumers facing or talking about a problem such as bad breath, dingy laundry, dandruff, headaches, or dry skin. The short drama always ends with the problem being resolved by the advertiser‘s product. Many advertisers feel that the slice-of-life format is a more interesting and effective way to present their message than just making performance or efficacy claims. The slice-of-life execution format is very popular among packaged-goods companies such as Procter & Gamble, because it is an effective way of connecting with consumers by showing common situations or problems they encounter in their everyday lives.

Some business-to business marketers use a variation of the slice-of-life technique known as slice-ofdeath advertising, which involves showing the negative consequences that can result when companies make the wrong decision in choosing a vendor or service provider. B2B marketers use this advertising execution technique to demonstrate how their products and services can be used to solve their customers‘ business problems and how they are better than their competitors‘ products or service. This execution style is often used in conjunction with a fear appeal although some companies, such as FedEx, also integrate humor into their slice-of-death commercials.

Another execution technique is dramatization, where the focus is on telling a short story with the product or service as the star. The approach is similar to a slice-of-life execution in that it usually relies on a problem/solution approach but uses more excitement and suspense in telling the story.

Products and services for which there are significant consequences or outcomes associated with their use or performance are good candidates for the use of dramatization executions. Dramatization is an effective way to draw the viewer into the action and hopefully to get them to experience the feelings and concerns of the characters. For example, Exhibit 9-21 shows some images from the TV commercial for Rhode Island Department of Health‘s ―Truth About Opioids‖ campaign, which uses dramatization to educate young people about the opioid crisis.

5. IMC Perspective 9-2 discusses how DASANI was able to use creative advertising to reposition the brand and make it the leading brand of bottled water. Evaluate the creative strategy used to position DASANI in the bottled water. Why do you think the advertising was so effective? (LO 9-1, 9-2) DASANI recognized how its competitors were positioning themselves and recognized where they fell in the market. Research that was conducted with consumers who identified as heavy bottled water users found that these consumers didn‘t think about water in terms of a bottled beverage, but thought of it as something that invigorates their minds, bodies, and souls. Armed with this consumer insight, DASANI‘s agency of record was able to develop a campaign that encapsulated this thought. This is a similar situation to the case presented by Subaru‘s ―Love‖ campaign. It wasn‘t assumptions about product consumption that informed the creative for the campaign, it was insights about why consumers used the product and about how they thought of the product that led to the most effective and well-developed campaign. The creative for this campaign helped to turn DASANI from a struggling brand to the highest-ranked branded water in dollar volume. Brands need to recognize that it is not simply an Aha! moment that leads to great creative, but solid research about consumer insights that helps to provide the most innovative and well-informed creative ideas.

6. Discuss the role of headlines in a print advertisement. What is the difference between a direct headline and an indirect headline, and when might each type be used? (LO 9-3)

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

The most important function or role of the headline is to attract the readers' attention and make them interested in the remainder of the message. Headlines can also perform a segmentation function by engaging the attention and interest of consumers who may be most likely to buy a particular product or service. Some ads use little or no body copy so the headline must work with the illustration or visual portion of the ad to communicate the entire advertising message. Subheads are secondary headlines that are usually smaller than the main headline but larger than the body copy. Subheads are often used to enhance the readability of the message by breaking up large amounts of body copy and highlighting key sales points. Their content often reinforces the headline and advertising slogan or theme.

A direct headline is very straightforward and informative in terms of the message presented and the audience the ad is targeting. Examples are headlines that make an announcement or provide news or information to the reader. Indirect headlines are not straightforward but rather may be designed to create attention, interest or curiosity with questions, provocations, or challenges. Direct headlines are often used when marketers have a specific product attribute or benefit they want to communicate or are making a promise or offering something that is very likely to be of interest to the reader. Indirect headlines are often more effective at attracting readers‘ attention and interest because they provoke curiosity, which can be a way to motivate readers to become more involved with the advertisement.

Students should find an example of ads that use direct and indirect headlines.

7. Discuss the role of music in advertising. Find an example of a television commercial that is using a specific song and discuss the role the music plays in delivering the message. (LO 9-3) Music can play a variety of roles and functions in commercials. In many spots, the role of music is primarily to provide a pleasant background or to help create the appropriate mood or setting for the commercial. In some ads, the role of music is much more central to the delivery of the advertising message. It can be used to break through clutter, help establish an image or position, or add emotion or feeling. Music can work through a classical conditioning process whereby it creates positive feelings or affect that become associated with the company or brand being advertised. Music can also create a positive mood state that can make the consumer more receptive toward the advertising message.

Companies/brands pay large sums of money for the rights to use these songs such as because they feel the music is central to the feeling or image they want to create in the commercial. For example, Google has used Lady Gaga‘s hit song ―Edge of Glory‖ in commercials for its Chrome web browser while Citibank has used Alicia Keys‘ song ―Girl on Fire‖ in its commercials. General Motors used the music from Led Zeppelin‘s hit song ―Rock and Roll‖ in its commercials for Cadillac as part of its effort to attract baby boomers by creating a more hip image for the brand. Microsoft licensed the rights to use the classic Rolling Stones song ―Start Me Up‖ in ads for its Windows 95 operating system as the music helped deliver a message regarding the integral role the operating system plays in the functioning of a personal computer. The company also licensed the rights to Madonna‘s hit song ―Ray of Light‖ for use in ads introducing its new XP operating system as the company felt that the lyrics were very appropriate for promoting a technology product. Other example of how music has played a very effective role in TV commercials is Meghan Trainor‘s hit song ―Lips Are Movin,‖ which resulted in a 26 percent increase in sales for the HP x360 tablet among teens and young adults.

Ford also had great success with the use of Rachel Platten‘s hit ―Fight Song‖ in commercials for its Edge SUV in 2015.

Students should be encouraged to find an example of a current advertising campaign that is using a song and analyze the role the music plays in delivering the message. There are a number of advertisers that are rely heavily on the use of music in their advertising such as Kia, Apple, Nike, Coca Cola, PepsiCo, and many others.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

8. Discuss the challenges marketers face in developing online advertising messages. How will the creative strategy for online advertising differ depending on whether the goal is for concept, content, or commerce types of online advertising? (LO 9-3) Online advertising can take various forms including various types of banner ads such as skyscrapers and leaderboards, text-only ads used for paid search, webisodes and video. Many online video ads are similar to or the same as the commercials that are aired on television. One of the challenges face when using online advertising is that getting consumer to attend to and engage with an online ad can be very difficult as doing so takes them away from the content on the website or social media page.

Television and radio ads air during commercial breaks and do not compete for viewers‘ attention during a program while print ads often appear on separate pages of a magazine or newspaper and can be easily attended to or ignored. The clutter problem that traditional media advertising faces is also an issue for online advertisers, as consumers are bombarded by online ads and often annoyed by them.

As discussed in Chapter 1, most consumers are using some type of ad-blocking software to prevent ads from appearing on their computers, tablets, and smartphones.

A variety of digital advertising formats are available to marketers including banner ads, search ads, interstitials, native ads, and videos. The type of online ad used by marketers will vary depending on the goal(s) they are trying to achieve. Peter Minnium of the Internet Advertising Bureau notes that digital advertising is trifurcating into three types of advertising—concept, content, and commerce ads—and their use varies based on the goals and/or objectives the marketer is trying to achieve all along the purchase funnel. The goal of digital concept ads is to drive top-of-the-funnel goals such as awareness and interest, which can be achieved through banner ads, or videos such as commercials.

Content ads typically have a mid-funnel goal of enhancing consumers‘ knowledge or understanding of a product or service, which can be done by providing high-quality content with which the viewer can engage. Different types of online ads can be used to provide content such as videos, webisodes, in-feed ads to Facebook or Twitter with sponsored content, and native ads. Native advertising is a type of paid placement designed to fit seamlessly into the content that surrounds it. The design, content, and writing style of a native ad mirrors the nonpaid content around it, giving the user the impression that it really belongs. Native advertising is becoming a dominant form of content advertising, particularly in digital editions of magazines and newspapers.

The third form of digital advertising is commerce ads, which primarily have a bottom-of-the-funnel goal of getting consumers to take action and make a purchase. Commerce ads are the dominant form of display advertising, particularly retargeting types that follow consumers across the Web, and typically are not visually rich as their success is based on serving the right offer to consumers and can be easily measured in terms of clicks and conversions.

Critics argue that one of the major problems with online advertising is that it has been too focused on ubiquitous banner ads as marketers often try to build awareness and/or brand identity by simply buying large amounts of banner ads across a myriad on online platforms. A great deal of time and effort is devoted to optimizing media placement, retargeting, and measuring the effects of digital advertising campaigns, but less attention is given to creative considerations and the fundamentals of great advertising. However, the domination of banner ads at the top or side of a page is weakening as new online display formats are being developed that are larger, richer, and take up more of a page, either initially or upon expansion. The Internet Advertising Bureau refers to these new formats as ―Rising Stars,‖ which include ad unit formats such as billboard sidekicks and sliders as well as various video formats. One format that has become very popular is expanding pushdown ad units that push page content down rather than expanding over it, which helps address the annoyance issue.

9. This chapter discusses the ―Unskippable‖ online advertising campaign created by the Martin Agency for GEICO. Why do you think this campaign was so popular among consumers? Do

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

you think the technique used for the GEICO campaign can be used by other marketers as a way to draw attention to their online video ads? (LO 9-3) The "Unskippable" online campaign for GEICO was very effective as it was able to avoid the problem that most pre-roll ads face, which is getting consumers not to skip out of it. The Martin Agency, which handles all of GEICO‘s advertising, was well aware of research showing that more than 90 percent of people skip online pre-roll ads because they fail to hook them before they press the skip button. The agency knew it was important to get the attention of consumers in the first few seconds of the spots, which they did by freezing the video and having a voiceover tell viewers ―You can‘t skip this GEICO ad because it is already over." As the Cannes Jury president noted in discussing its selection of the family dinner spot for its top honor: ―Instead of begging you to watch this ad, it challenges you not to watch it. Instead of a long story with a tenuous link to the brand at the end, there is a gigantic logo of the brand in the middle of the screen the entire time. To us it‘s a deceptively simple piece of communication and really showed us how film can reinvent the way we look at media, even the least-sexy media in the world, which is pre-roll.‖ Consumers are very likely to continue watching online videos and marketers will keep trying to get them to watch their pre-roll ads before doing so. Perhaps more will follow the lead of GEICO and create pre-roll ads that are worth watching. However, it will be important that advertiser find creative ways to grab the attention of online viewers in the first 5 seconds of an online video if they are going to get them to watch it. This will continue to be a major challenge for marketers using pre-roll and other forms of online video advertising.

10. Choose a current advertising campaign and analyze it with respect to the creative guidelines discussed in the last section of the chapter. Identify any areas where you feel the campaign does not meet the guidelines and discuss why this is so. (LO 9-4) The last section of the chapter discusses criteria or guidelines that can be used for evaluating the output from the creative process of advertising. Some of these factors are not directly accessible and thus more difficult to evaluate, such as consistency with marketing and advertising objectives.

However, answers to many of these questions are judgmental in nature and can be evaluated such as appropriateness for the target audience, communication of a clear and convincing message, whether the creative overwhelms the message, appropriateness for the media environment, and whether the ads are truthful and tasteful. Students should be encouraged to choose a particular campaign, conduct some research on it in the business press or trade publications, and then evaluate the creative approach as well as some of the individual ads against these guidelines. Excellent sources of information that can be helpful to students in this assignment are the ad reviews that appear in publications such as Advertising Age and AdWeek.

Additional Discussion Questions (not in text) 11. Discuss the difference between an advertising appeal and a creative execution style. Find several ads and analyze the particular appeal and execution style used in each. (LO 9-1) An advertising appeal refers to the basis or approach used in the advertisement to elicit some consumer response or influence feelings toward the product, service, or cause. The creative execution style refers to the way in which a particular appeal is turned into an advertising message and presented to the consumer. A particular appeal can be executed in a variety of ways and a particular means of execution can be applied to a variety of advertising appeals. For example, an informational appeal that focuses on a product's features or advantages can be executed through a straight-sell or factual message, a demonstration or a comparison. A particular execution technique such as

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

animation could be used for an informational/rational appeal or for an emotional appeal. Students should be encouraged to analyze the particular appeals and execution styles used in selected ads.

12. Discuss how teaser advertising might be used to introduce a new product or brand or to reposition an existing brand. What factors should marketers take into consideration when using a teaser campaign? (LO 9-1) Teaser advertising is designed to build curiosity, interest, and/or excitement about a product/service or brand by talking about it but not actually showing it. Teasers can also be used to draw attention to upcoming advertising campaigns and generate interest and publicity for them. Teaser ads are often used to introduce a new product or brand such as automobiles, movies or television shows. They can also be used to reposition an existing brand as the curiosity and interest they generate can create some excitement and intrigue that can help increase consumer involvement and make them more receptive to subsequent advertising. When using a teaser campaign marketers will have to consider several factors. They must make sure the teaser generates enough interest and/or curiosity among the target audience to be effective. If the message is too subtle, consumers may not even attend to it. Marketers must also be careful not to extend their teaser campaigns too long as this can create confusion among consumers or even generate negative reactions. As noted in the text, you have to give consumers enough information to hold their attention and interest yet maintain some level of mystery, intrigue, and/or curiosity.

13. Why do many advertisers pay large sums of money to celebrities to do the voiceovers for their commercials? Do you think consumers recognize the voices of the celebrities doing the commercials? Is it necessary that they recognize them for the commercials to be effective? (LO 9-3) Advertisers will often pay as much as $500,000 to celebrities just to have them do the voiceovers for their commercials. Some celebrities prefer this more subtle form of product endorsement as they do not have to appear in the ads and thus can avoid the potential negative image of being perceived as ―selling out‖ and pitching products. Advertisers and agencies that pay these large sums of money for celebrity voiceovers argue that a voice consumers have heard before is reassuring and makes the message more effective. They also argue that some celebrities have very distinctive and engaging voices that communicate very effectively.

It is difficult to say whether consumers recognize the celebrities doing the voiceovers in many commercials. Actors who have very distinctive voices may be recognized such as Donald Sutherland (Volvo), Morgan Freeman (VISA), Demi Moore (Verizon Wireless), and Jeff Goldblum (Apple).

However, most consumers probably do not recognize the celebrities doing the voiceover in many commercials. It is not necessary that consumers recognize the celebrity‘s voice for the commercial to be effective. Distinctive voices are often part of the talent offered by actors and actresses as they may be help them be perceived a certain way (honest, humble, sincere, funny, and the like). The voice characteristics that help make them popular entertainers may also be effective for television commercial voiceovers.

14. Discuss some of the reasons why emotion-based advertising appeals are effective. Find an example of a company or brand that is using an advertising campaign based on emotional appeals and analyze its effectiveness. (LO 9-1) Emotional appeals relate to the consumer's social and/or psychological needs for purchasing a product or service. Emotional appeals are most appropriate for products and services where social and/or psychological needs and feelings are important or where consumers need to be reached on an emotional level. Many consumer products are difficult to differentiate on a functional/utilitarian basis and advertisers often turn to appeals to emotions to create feelings, images, and beliefs that can be

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

activated when the consumer uses the product. Moreover, marketers recognize that commercials must be meaningful to consumers, as well as entertaining, and emotional appeals are often the best way to touch the consumer and hold their interest. Emotional appeals are not, however, limited to consumer products that are difficult to differentiate. Appeals to emotions are also used for major purchases such as automobiles, financial investments, and many other purchases. Figure 9-1 lists various personal psychological states (safety, security, fear, joy, nostalgia, pride) as well as social-based feelings or needs (recognition, status, respect, approval) that can be used as the basis for emotional advertising appeals. Students should have no trouble finding ads that use social and psychological needs as the basis for their appeal. However, they should be encouraged to discuss whether the needs appealed to in the ad are appropriate for the product or service they are analyzing.

CHAPTER 10 MEDIA PLANNING AND STRATEGY Chapter Overview Chapter 10 introduces the concepts involved in media planning. The chapter begins with an overview of media planning by introducing some key terms and concepts. At this point, the text points out that media planning is as much an art as it is a science. A number of problems associated with the planning process are discussed. The role and purpose of the media plan follows with a presentation of the steps required in developing this plan. After an in-depth discussion of the elements of the media plan, the chapter presents information regarding the use of computers in the planning process. The characteristics of various media and sources of media information are presented at the end of the chapter.

Learning Objectives 1.

Define the key terminology in media planning.

2.

Explain how to develop a media plan.

3.

Describe the purpose of media objectives.

4.

Describe how to develop and implement media strategies.

5.

Compare the characteristics of various media.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Chapter and Lecture Outline I.

AN OVERVIEW OF MEDIA PLANNING

This overview presents a brief discussion of the factors involved in the media planning process and illustrates the fact that media planning is an involved process influenced by a variety of factors including the nature of the media, the overall marketing strategy, and the product or service being advertised.

A.

Some Basic Terms and Concepts—Some of the critical terms necessary for understanding media planning are presented including: ●

Media planning—the series of decisions involved in delivering the message to the target audience.

●

Media objectives—the goals sought by the media plan.

●

Media strategies—the plans of action designed to attain the media objectives.

●

Medium—the general category of media channels such as broadcast, print, outdoor, etc.

●

Media vehicle—the specific carrier in a media category (television, magazines, etc.).

●

Reach—the number of potential audience members exposed once to a media vehicle in a given period of time.

●

Coverage—the potential audience that might receive a message through a vehicle.

●

Frequency—the number of times the receiver is exposed to the media vehicle in a given time period.

B.

The Media Plan—The goal of the media plan is to find a combination of media that will enable the marketer to communicate the message in the most effective manner possible at minimum cost. The activities involved in this plan are detailed in Figure 10-2.

C.

Problems in Media Planning—A number of problems are identified, each of which directly impacts the planning process. These include: ●

Insufficient information—Certain data that could be of use to media planners simply is not always available to media planners. In addition to insufficient measures, the timing of measurements is also a problem. For example, sweeps periods in February, May, July, and November are used for measuring TV audiences and setting advertising rates. This information is then generalized to succeeding months, so future planning decisions must be made on past data that may not reflect current behaviors.

●

Inconsistent terminologies—Different media present different standards of measurement for costs and in reporting data. Additionally, terms that actually mean different things are sometimes used synonymously, adding to the confusion.

●

Time pressures—Often in advertising, a false sense of urgency dictates time pressures resulting in decisions made on improper planning and analysis of the markets and/or media.

●

Difficulty measuring effectiveness—Since it is often quite difficult to measure the effectiveness of advertising and promotions in general, it is often also quite difficult to determine the relative effectiveness of various media or media vehicles.

An understanding of these problems is critical to the proper design of the media plan.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Professor Notes:

McGraw-Hill Connect ®: Activities Involved in Developing the Media Plan Type of Activity: Timeline (Click and Drag) Activity Summary: In this activity, students will identify the correct sequence of the various activities involved in developing a media plan for the new product launch of a new smartphone.

Activity Learning Objective: 10-01 Define the key terminology in media planning.

Concept Review: The media plan determines the best way to get the advertiser's message to the market. In a basic sense, the goal of the media plan is to find that combination of media that enables the marketer to communicate the message in the most effective manner to the largest number of potential customers at the lowest cost.

Difficulty: 2 Medium Bloom‘s: Understand AACSB: Analytical Thinking

II.

DEVELOPING THE MEDIA PLAN

The process of developing the media plan involves a series of stages (see Figure 10-4). These stages are essentially the same as those presented in the decision sequence model presented in Chapter 1, except now they are involved directly with media decisions. These stages include: 1. Market analysis 2. Establishment of media objectives 3. Media strategy development and implementation 4. Evaluation and follow-up.

Professor Notes:

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

III.

MARKET ANALYSIS AND TARGET MARKET IDENTIFICATION

A.

To Whom Will We Advertise?—The discussion of target marketing is reviewed, though now the emphasis is on media, and some of the sources of information that are available to assist in making this decision. Secondary sources of information such as Experian Simmons Market Research and GfK Mediamark Research, Inc. (GfK MRI) are described. A brief discussion of the use of index numbers and their use in determining target markets is also provided. The index number is considered a good indicator of the potential of a market. It is a measure of the percentage of users in a demographic segment divided by the percentage of the population in the same segment multiplied by 100.

B.

What Internal and External Factors Are Operating?—As in the overall situation analysis, both internal and external factors will directly influence the media decisions. Competitrack is a service that provides media spending figures for various industries down to the campaign or product level. Competitive information is also available from many other sources.

C.

Where to Promote?—The decision as to where to promote at this point involves geographical considerations. Once again, the discussion turns to the use of secondary information and indices as aids in making this decision.

1. Using indexes to determine where to promote—A number of critical terms are introduced including: •

Survey of buying power index—This index charts the potential of a particular metro area, county, or city relative to the United States as a whole. When used in combination with other market information, the survey of buying power index helps the marketer determine which geographic areas to target.

•

Brand development index (BDI)—This index helps marketers factor the rate of product usage by geographic area into the decision process.

•

Category Development Index (CDI)—This index provides information on the potential for development of the total product category rather than specific brands. When this information is combined with the BDI, a much more insightful promotional strategy may be developed.

The calculation of both BDI and CDI is provided, based on actual examples. Figures 10-9 and 10-10 are useful ways of presenting strategies evolving around BDI and CDI. Professor Notes:

IV.

ESTABLISHING MEDIA OBJECTIVES Media objectives relate to the goals to be attained by the media program, and as such should be limited to those that can be accomplished through media strategies. Such objectives are often expressed in terms of coverage, reach, frequency, scheduling, etc.

Professor Notes:

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

McGraw-Hill Connect ®: Sriracha: Developing the Media Plan Type of Activity: Case Analysis Activity Summary: Students are tasked with reading a case about Sriracha and the differing uses of condiments in various regions of the United States. They are then asked to answer questions relating to the development of a media plan for Sriracha.

Activity Learning Objective: 10-02 Explain how to develop a media plan.

Concept Review: The process of developing a media plan involves four steps: 1) conducting a market analysis, 2) establishing media objectives, 3) developing a media strategy and implementation plan, and 4) evaluating and following-up.

Difficulty: 1 Easy; 2 Medium; 3 Hard Bloom‘s: Apply AACSB: Analytical Thinking

V.

DEVELOPING AND IMPLEMENTING MEDIA STRATEGIES

After determining what is to be accomplished (media objectives), planners must determine how to achieve those objectives.

A.

The Media Mix—Many media strategies require a combination of media to be used. The media mix involves the determination of the various channels to be used. The objectives of the plan, the budget, and other factors, will directly impact this decision. By employing a media mix, advertisers can add more versatility to their media strategies, since each medium contributes its own distinct advantages.

B.

Target Market Coverage—Figure 10-12 provides a graphic illustration of market coverage possibilities.

Of course, the marketer would like to achieve full coverage through a combination of media. As noted, this is not a likely outcome, and decisions have to be made that involve trade-offs between less than full market coverage and over coverage or waste coverage in which the media coverage exceeds the target audience. Figure 10-13 shows how information from GfK MRI can be used to match media to target markets.

C.

Geographic Coverage—The strategy of geographical weighting, in which geographic areas receive differential amounts of media emphasis, is discussed.

D.

Scheduling—The primary objective of scheduling is to time promotional efforts so they will coincide with the highest potential buying times. Because it may not be feasible (or necessary) to maintain a constant advertising schedule, marketers will typically employ one of three scheduling alternatives:

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

E.

•

Continuity refers to a continuous pattern of advertising—that is every day, week, or month (food products, laundry detergents, etc.). The key is that a regular/continuous pattern is developed.

•

Flighting is a scheduling method in which there are intermittent periods of advertising and nonadvertising (employed by banks, snow skis, or seasonal products, etc.)

•

Pulsing is a combination of the two previous methods, in which a continuous schedule is used, though the amount of monies spent will vary throughout the time period (beer).

Reach versus Frequency—Given that advertisers have differing objectives, and are constrained by budgets, the media decision usually involves a trade-off between reach and frequency. This decision is essentially one of exposing more persons to the ad, or exposing fewer persons more often. In making this decision, the media planner must take into consideration a number of factors involving reach and frequency including: 1. How much reach is necessary?—As described in the hierarchies in Chapter 5, the first stage of each model requires awareness of the product and/or brand. The more people are aware, the more they are likely to move to each subsequent stage. Achieving awareness requires reach—that is, exposing potential buyers to the message.

2. What frequency level is needed?—Frequency is the number of times one is exposed to the media vehicle in a specified time period (usually 13 weeks). Decisions on frequency are often not made on hard data as data on frequency can often be misleading.

3. Establishing reach and frequency objectives—If one ad is placed on one TV show one time, the number of people exposed is the reach. If the ad is placed on two shows, the total number exposed once is unduplicated reach. The reach of two shows includes a number of people who were reached by both shows. This overlap is referred to as duplicated reach. Both unduplicated and duplicated reach figures are important. Unduplicated reach indicates potential new exposures, while duplicated reach provides an estimate of frequency. A measure of potential reach in the broadcast industry is the TV (or radio) program rating.

4. Using gross ratings points—To determine how much advertising volume or weight is necessary to accomplish advertiser‘s objectives, marketers rely on ratings (the number of people reached) and frequency (the average number of times exposed) figures. A summary measure that combines the program rating and the average number of times the home is reached during this period (frequency of exposure) is a commonly used reference point known as gross ratings points (GRPs), which equals reach times frequency. GRPs are based on the total audience the media schedule may reach using a duplicated reach estimate. Target ratings points (TRPs) refer to the number of people in the primary target audience the media buy will reach—and the number of times. Unlike GRP, TRP does not include waste coverage.

5. Determining effective reach—Effective reach is the percentage of a vehicle‘s audience reached at each effective frequency increment. This concept is based on the assumption that one exposure to an ad may not be enough to convey the desired message. Average frequency is another calculation used by advertisers that represents the average number of times the target audience reached by a media schedule is exposed to the vehicle over a specified period.

6. Effective frequency—It is also necessary to know how much frequency is necessary to impact other communications objectives.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

7. Recency—Recency refers to how recently a consumer is exposed to a message, particularly after a purchase. Some campaigns employ recency planning—which focuses on short interval reach at minimum frequency levels as close to the purchase decision as possible.

F.

Creative Aspects and Mood—In developing a media strategy, marketers must consider both creativity and mood factors.

1. Creative aspects—Creative aspects of the ad may require the use of specific media. For example, television may be required to implement certain types of creative campaigns.

2. Mood—The mood that a medium creates may carry over to the ad itself. For example, certain magazines may create various moods as they are being read. The message may require a specific medium and a certain media vehicle to achieve its objectives.

G.

H.

Flexibility—The media strategy must be flexible enough to respond to marketing threats and opportunities, as well as to adjust for changes regarding availability and/or in the media themselves.

Flexibility may need to address the following: ●

Market opportunities—Have new market opportunities arisen that the advertiser needs to take advantage of or leverage?

●

Market threats—Have internal or external factors posed a threat to the firm and changed the media strategy originally dictated?

●

Availability of media—Is a desired medium not available? Is there desired space and time in the medium?

●

Changes in media or media vehicles—A change in the medium or in a particular vehicle may require a change in the media strategy

Budget Considerations—It is obvious that costs must be considered in the determination as to which media will be employed. Two types of costs must be addressed—absolute cost—which is the actual cost to place the ad in the medium—and relative cost—or the relationship between the price paid for advertising time or space and the size of the audience delivered.

1. Determining relative costs of media—A comparison of media vehicles is usually necessary.

These are some cost bases used: ●

Cost per thousand (CPM)—The cost to reach 1,000 people.

●

Cost per ratings point (CPRP)—Used in broadcast media, it provides information on the cost efficiency of one program over another.

●

Daily inch rate—For newspapers, cost-effectiveness is based on the daily inch rate, which is the cost per column inch of the paper.

●

Target CPM (TCPM)—Calculates CPMs based on the target audience, not the overall audience.

●

Readers per copy—Many advertisers and platforms want to use the number of readers per copy as the true circulation.

●

Pass-along rate—Included in the readers per copy, this is a measure of those besides the original purchasers who have also read the paper or magazine.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Professor Notes:

VI.

EVALUATION AND FOLLOW-UP

As with other elements of the advertising/promotional program, the media program also requires evaluation to determine its effectiveness. Essentially, two questions need to be answered: (1) How well did these strategies perform the media objectives established; and (2) How well did this media plan contribute to the attainment of the overall marketing and communications objectives?

Professor Notes:

McGraw-Hill Connect ®: Scheduling for Different Products Type of Activity: Click and Drag Activity Summary: In this activity, students will select the advantages, disadvantages, and a sample product category for each of the three scheduling methods: continuity, flighting, and pulsing.

Activity Learning Objective: 10-04 Describe how to develop and implement media strategies.

Concept Review: Obviously, companies would like to keep their advertising in front of consumers at all times as a constant reminder of the product and/or brand name. In reality, this is not possible for a variety of reasons (not the least of which is the budget). Nor is it necessary. The primary objective of scheduling is to time promotional efforts so that they will coincide with the highest potential buying times. For some products these times are not easy to identify; for others they are very obvious. Three scheduling methods are available to the media planner—continuity, flighting, and pulsing.

Difficulty: 2 Medium Bloom‘s: Understand AACSB: Analytical Thinking

VII.

CHARACTERISTICS OF MEDIA

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

There are a number of sources of information available that define the various advantages and disadvantages of media. Figure 10-26 lists the major media and the characteristics or advantages and disadvantages of each.

VIII.

APPENDIX A

Appendix A provides an example of a media flow chart of ASICS shoes.

Professor Notes:

McGraw-Hill Connect ®: Pros and Cons of Various Media Type of Activity: Click and Drag Activity Summary: In this activity, students will match each IMC medium (television, radio, newspapers, magazines, Internet and interactive media, direct mail, and outdoor) with its characteristics.

Activity Learning Objectives: 10-04 Describe how to develop and implement media strategies.

10-05 Compare the characteristics of various media.

Concept Review: One of the most basic elements in this process is the matching of media to markets. Each medium has its own characteristics that make it better or worse for attaining specific objectives. Various media options must be analyzed for each situation.

Difficulty: 2 Medium Bloom‘s: Understand AACSB: Analytical Thinking

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Teaching Suggestions Both the length and complexity of this chapter make it a difficult one for students to comprehend. The chapter contains a large number of terms, definitions, and formulas. Unfortunately, there is no way to ignore all of these, as they are critical to the students' learning of media planning and strategy and are the ―buzzwords‖ with which they will need to become familiar to participate in the advertising world, regardless of which side of the buying-selling process they may be on. One suggestion is to break the chapter into two lectures. In the first, the terms, formulas, etc., as well as an overview of the planning process can be discussed. The second lecture can be more specific, focusing on some of the objectives to be accomplished, discussing reach and frequency trade-offs, effective reach, and the like.

Answers to Discussion Questions 1. If you still watch television you can relate to the fact that after seeing a commercial too many times it becomes irritating to watch. Why are advertisers engaging in a strategy where we see the commercials too often? (LO 10-4) There are no concrete statistics on the number of advertisements that the average person is exposed to in a given day. However, advertisers know that it is a lot. Marketers have long wrestled with how much is too much and how many exposures of a message are too much for a consumer. For many years, the optimal number of exposure to a television commercial was 3 times with 10 exposures being seen as excessive and ineffective. Recent research has shown that advertisers may want to reconsider this reliance on the rule of three as researchers have determined that those seeing an advertisement 10 or more times actually reported higher purchase intentions than those seeing the ad less often. Another recent study showed that the level of optimal exposure depended on what media the ad was in, viewing habits, time and programs watched, and other factors. Since advertisers can no longer rely on a hard-and-fast number of optimal exposures to an ad, and these studies suggest that more exposures could be better, advertisers may likely simply continue to determine if that higher exposure is actually better.

2. Explain what a GfK MRI report is. How do advertisers use this report? Pick any product and discuss what the report would tell you about that product’s users. (LO 10-2) GfK MRI provides consumer information and media usage characteristics of the population. Often, numbers provided by GfK MRI are used in combination with the media planner‘s own figures. These reports provide information on which consumer groups are more or less likely to engage in a certain activity or buy a certain product. Using White Claw Hard Seltzer as an example, the base total column in the MRI table would tell us the projected population. The ‗000 column could provide the number of adult women (ages 21+) who drank hard seltzer in the past 6 months. The % detail column tells us that 64% of adults (ages 21+) who drank hard seltzer in the last 6 months are women. The % target column would tell us that 63% of women 21+ drank hard seltzer in the last 6 months. The Index column tells us that women 21+ are 10% more likely than the general population 21+ to drink hard seltzer in the last 6 months.

3. Given that we know that sometimes print media may be passed on to more than one viewer (for example more than one member of a household may read the newspaper), why don’t advertisers rely more on the readers-per-dollar figure than CPM? (LO 10-1) Using the number of pass-along or secondary readership has the potential to be extremely inaccurate.

The pass-along or secondary readership rate is quite difficult to accurately determine. For example, how many people read a copy of Marie Claire magazine left in a doctor‘s office? Or how many

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

people in a household read a magazine only for it to then be passed along to even more readers in their extended family? While there is some research that attempts to estimate this, the numbers provided about pass-along rates are quite subjective and to utilize them would be inaccurate and inappropriate to fully rely on. While CPM has its flaws in audience measurement (over or underestimating cost-efficiencies, only provided quantitative estimates of the value of media, not good for intermedia comparisons), CPM is still helpful in assisting planners and buyers in comparing media vehicles and is a much more accurate number than readers-per dollar or copy rates.

4. Figure 10–10 in the text discusses how to use BDI and CDI indexes. Give an example of products that may be at each of the four positions described in the Figure. Explain your reasoning. (LO 10-2) The four positions discussed in the text and shown in Figure 10-10 include High BDI and High CDI, High BDI and low CDI, Low BDI and High CDI, and Low BDI and Low CDI. In High BDI and High CDI, the market represents good sales potential for the product category and brand. An example of this would be BudLight‘s new Hard Seltzer alcoholic beverage. Hard Seltzers represent good market potential at the moment and the BudLight brand is well-established in the alcohol industry, providing a good support for the success of this new product. In High CDI and Low CDI, the category is not selling well but the brand is. It likely represents a good market to advertise in but should be monitored for declining sales. An example of this would be CocaCola. The soft drink industry overall has seen small declines. However, the CocaCola brand is still quite strong. In Low BDI and High CDI, the product category shows high potential, but the brand is not doing well and the reasons should be determined and explored. An example of this would be a cauliflower crust frozen pizza. This is a category with high potential but there are a number of brands in the category that are underperforming. In Low BDI and Low CDI, both the product category and brand are doing poorly.

This is not likely to be a good place for advertising. An example of this would be Kmart. A number of department stores are closing their doors and Kmart has not been immune to these closures.

5. Explain the meaning of reach and frequency as it may relate to digital media. Are these traditional measures of any value to digital advertisers? Explain your answer. (LO 10-1) Reach is a measure of the number of different audience members exposed at least once to a media vehicle in a given period of time. While it might appear that reach would be a number of use to advertisers in digital spaces as they could potentially measure how many times someone saw an ad, this is impossible to do in a digital space as it is a click that advertisers care about and count in digital spaces. It is much more relevant to an advertiser to know that a consumer clicked on an ad that would take them to a page where they could take action rather than simply knowing that they saw an ad.

Frequency refers to the number of times the receiver is exposed to the media vehicle in a specified time period. While a measure of frequency might be beneficial to advertisers, the much more detailed analysis that programmatic ad buying software can provide about viewership of an ad are overall much more informative than reach and frequency.

6. Discuss some of the advantages of using programmatic media buying. Given that the majority of digital display ads are purchased this way, do you think this will be the only method media buyers use in the future? (LO 10-1) Basically programmatic is computer-based advertising buying using a real-time bidding process.

When an opening is available the software advises advertisers which page it is, and supplies demographic and behavioral data about the user. Each advertiser‘s software puts in its bid and in real time the transaction is completed along with the ad of the winning bidder. While originally used to buy and sell online display advertising, and used primarily by direct marketers, programmatic is now commonly used to buy mobile and video display advertising, and many expect that it will become the

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

way to purchase ads on television as well. It is considered highly targeted resulting in improved results and efficiencies, and because it is automated it makes the buyer‘s life easier. Proponents believe that it will replace all other types of ad buying in the not-too-distant future.

7. There is new research that indicates that the number of ads one is exposed to in a day may be much lower than the thousands previously reported. Which numbers do you consider correct and why? (LO 10-4) Optimal frequency is that point at which the number of exposures is the exact amount necessary to communicate one‘s message. Research conducted years ago has placed this number at a frequency level of three. Less than that number leads to the potential for the communication to fail. More than three results in overexposure and waste coverage. Thus the marketer would like to have the receiver receive exactly three exposures—nothing more, nothing less.

Of course, in reality, this optimal exposure may be impossible to achieve, for a variety of reasons.

One, no one truly knows how many times a receiver is exposed to the message. As an example, watch a college or pro football game. You will see the same commercials so many times that you become sick of them. Clearly, this is not in the advertiser‘s best interest, as the commercial can actually become irritating and start to negatively impact the receiver. In addition, dollars are being wasted on ads that are clearly having no positive effect.

At the time of this study, there was much less media proliferation than now. As a result there was less distraction, and less commercials. It has been estimated that at the time of the study one might be exposed to 1,500 ads a day. Now the estimate is somewhere between 3,000 and 5,000 a day. As you can imagine, there is much more clutter in the environment, leading to less likelihood that one will pick up on any specific message. As a result, some media buyers argue that optimal exposure is at least 5 but perhaps as many as 12—though they have no research to back this position.

The fact is that as we don‘t know how many times an ad is seen, and despite the enormous number of ads out there, three remains the number based on scientific research. Until new research is conducted, we pretty much need to live with this number.

8. Marketers rely heavily on demographics when purchasing media. This chapter talks about additional factors that may be important. Discuss some of these factors and why they might impact media usage. (LO 10-4) While social media usage takes away time that one might be watching TV, it can also drive others to watch. A study from ShareThis shows a strong correlation between social engagement and higher tune-in rates. The study shows that social media users who click on shared content about a particular TV series are nearly 2.5 times more likely to become viewers. The study also indicated that the genre of the show will impact social engagement rates, with reality and variety shows generating the most social sharing and comedy shows the least. The timing of the sharing also differs, with reality and variety show sharing most often taking place during the show (70 percent), while drama fans share about 24 hours later.

Being cosmopolitan can also make a difference. Recent studies have shown that cosmopolitan consumers are especially receptive to ads that signal the advertiser is addressing them. They are more likely to engage with communications that are consistent with their cosmopolitan values and lifestyles. Not only are they more likely to be reached through upscale magazines like Luxury and Cosmopolitan, but they are also more likely to use media that report on social causes, environmental issues, and so on. More than one study has shown that lifestyles are a much better predictor of consumer behaviors that demographics, many marketers are now focusing on this factor.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

9. What are GRPs and target GRPs? Explain what these terms mean and discuss some of the strengths and weaknesses of using them. (LO 10-1) A summary measure that combines the program rating and the average number of times the home is reached during this period (frequency of exposure) is a commonly used reference point known as gross ratings points (GRPs). GRPs are based on the total audience the media schedule may reach using a duplicated reach estimate. Target ratings points (TRPs) refer to the number of people in the primary target audience the media buy will reach—and the number of times. Unlike GRP, TRP does not include waste coverage. As noted in the text, there are numerous problems associated with using either figure.

10. The media landscape is rapidly changing. Explain what is meant by this statement. Then discuss some of the reasons why this is occurring. What can traditional media do to continue to exist? A number of studies have examined the role that personality and/or other personal characteristics may have on consumers’ media usage. Discuss some of these studies. Do you think that these characteristics may have an impact, or should marketers rely primarily on demographic characteristics? (LO 10-5) What this statement means is that markets are changing in media usage, moving from traditional media like TV, print, radio, etc. to more digital and social media. Figure 10-26 provides an overall comparison of media and some of the characteristics by which they are evaluated. This is a very general comparison, and the various media options must be analyzed for each situation. While some predict that traditional media will eventually go away, this chart demonstrates that traditional media still have advantages over new media in some areas. Traditional media like TV and magazines have proven to drive people to the Internet much more effectively than and digital or social media.

Additional Discussion Questions (not in the text) 11. Some business to business advertisers (for example, copy machine companies) advertise on NFL Sunday and/or Monday Night football games. As might be expected, such a buy would lead to a high level of waste coverage. Explain what is meant by waste coverage. Discuss whether this might or might not be a good media buy. (LO 10-3) Waste coverage refers to overexposure, in which the media coverage exceeds the target audience. If the media reaches people who are not sought as buyers and are not potential users, then it is potentially wasted, and of little or no value to the marketer.

At first glance, an ad for a copy machine that is used in business markets (as opposed to home use) may seem like a lot of money. How many of those people watching a pro football game are now, or ever will be, in the market for purchasing such an expensive machine? In fact, it may not be such a bad buy after all. While there certainly will be a large amount of waste coverage, many marketers are willing to live with that due to the fact that to reach the same amount of members of the target audience through more targeted media might be even more expensive. In other words, buying ads in Office Management magazine and other business related periodicals may actually cost more than the television ad to reach the same amount of people. Thus, the large waste coverage is acceptable.

In addition, one never knows when new buyers may enter the market, and the exposure would not hurt. Finally, word of mouth, or reaching influencers or users (not necessarily buyers), may also be of value.

12. Explain the differences between CPM and TCPM. Give examples of a company or product that might select one of the methods versus the other. (LO 10-1)

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

As products and brands become more and more targeted, the use of CPM has been on the decline. As you can imagine, years ago with less market differentiation and more use of mass media, CPM was a good standard by which to compare the relative costs for various print media. However, as markets continue to be segmented into smaller and smaller segments, the marketing strategies of companies have led to more and more targeting. TCPM is considered by many to now be the more relevant relative cost measure.

Nevertheless, there are companies who may still make use of the CPM measure. Companies that reach very broad audiences, and those with offerings to a variety of target segments—for example, automobiles, and furniture stores, CPM may have more relevance. That is not to say that these companies do not also employ TCPM, just that the broader cost comparison may still be of benefit.

For companies targeting specific markets, such as 18 to 24 year olds, males versus females, etc., TCPM will have more relevance. The question is which medium will most cost efficiently deliver the message to these segments—as opposed to the general reading audience.

13. The text lists both internal and external factors that might impact the media strategy. Provide examples of each and discuss how they might impact the media plan. (LO 10-3) Both internal and external factors may affect the development of the media plan. Internal factors include the size of the media budget, managerial and administrative capabilities or the organization of the agency. External factors include the economy, changes in technology, competitive factors, and the like. The size of the media budget will obviously impact the number of media vehicles that the buyer can consider. Obviously, the larger the budget, the more options that can be considered. Managerial factors may include the number of employees and the experience and/or expertise that they have regarding media strategy development. Should there not be enough managerial talent to develop a media plan, outside agencies may be required. The organization of the external agency may also have an impact on the media plan. Larger, IMC oriented agencies are more likely to be involved with more media options. Smaller agencies may focus attention of advertising and/or public relations or other media with which they feel comfortable.

Changes in the economy may directly impact the media plan. As the economy improves or recesses, media costs may rise and/or fall, making some media cost prohibitive. In addition, more advertisers may result in less media available. Changes in technology—for example, the advent of cable television and the Internet—may make more options available to the media planner. Finally, the competition may also force the planner to reconsider his/her media strategy.

14. As noted in the chapter, there is a trade-off between reach and frequency for advertisers with a limited budget. Explain what this means. Under which circumstances would a planner wish to emphasize reach? Frequency? (LO 10-3) In an ideal world, advertisers would like to maximize reach and frequency. Unfortunately, in the real world, they are faced with budgetary constraints. Given budget limitations, the media planner is forced to choose between reach and frequency. Given specific objectives of the plan, one or the other may be emphasized. Maximizing reach at the expense of frequency is more logical when the message is simple and easily understood, the receiver is in the early stages of the response hierarchy (for example, awareness and/or interest) and the target audience is broad. For example, campaigns targeting cola users use very simple messages and are targeted to a broad audience. Thus reach is important.

When the consumer is at a higher level in the response hierarchy, for example, comprehension, retention, etc., or the message is more complex, and/or the target audience is narrowly defined, frequency may be a more important objective. For example, messages that have a lot of copy, and

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

may be more difficult to comprehend must consider the importance of effective frequency. One or two exposures may not be enough to achieve the media objectives. Likewise, a narrowly defined target market may allow for an emphasis on frequency, and the minimization of waste coverage, thus placing less emphasis on reach.

15. Describe the three methods of promotional scheduling. Give examples of products and/or services that might employ each method. (LO 10-3) The text discusses the various scheduling options available to the marketer. Given the fact that there are always budgetary constraints, and that some products/services do not need to be marketed yearround, scheduling allows for more efficient allocation of advertising and promotional dollars. The scheduling options available are: Continuity—A continuous schedule refers to constant advertising throughout the year, either daily, weekly or monthly. Products that would be most likely to employ this scheduling method include products that would be used consistently throughout the year with no seasonal variations. For example, toothpaste, mouthwash, laundry detergent, etc.

Flighting—This schedule has intermittent periods of advertising, with times when there is advertising and others when there is none. The ―on‖ advertising time is referred to as flights. Seasonal products (snow skis), swim wear and other products primarily consumed at some times of the year but not all year round would employ this method. Banks have used flighting, recognizing that consumers are much less involved in making banking decisions around the holiday season in November and December. One of the advantages of flighting is the ability to extend the limited ad budget.

Pulsing—A combination of the previous two methods, pulsing employs a continuous schedule with periods of increased advertising to take advantage of intermittent opportunities. A good example of this is beer advertising, which takes place continuously, but increases at holiday times, particularly Memorial Day, The 4th of July, and Labor Day. 16. Explain the differences between CPM and readers per dollar. Which is the most valuable relative cost comparison for advertisers to use? Why? (LO 10-1) Cost per thousand (CPM) is a computation used in evaluating the relative cost of various media vehicles that represent the costs of exposing 1,000 members of a target audience to an advertising message. Readers per copy is a cost comparison used for magazines that estimates audience size based on pass-along readership.

While the number of readers per copy makes intuitive sense, it has the potential to be extremely inaccurate. The actual number of times the magazine changes hands is difficult to determine. How many people in a fraternity read each issue of Sports Illustrated or GQ that is delivered? How many people in a sorority or on a dorm floor read each issue of Cosmopolitan or Vanity Fair? How many of either group read each issue of Bloomberg Businessweek? While research is conducted to make these determinations, pass-along estimates are very subjective and using them to estimate reach is speculative. These figures are regularly provided by the media, but managers are selective about using them. At the same time, the art of media buying enters, for many magazines‘ managers have a good idea how much greater the reach is than their circulation figures provided.

In addition to the potential for over- or underestimation of cost-efficiencies, CPMs are limited in that they make only quantitative estimates of the value of media. Although they may be good for comparing very similar vehicles (such as Time and The Week), they are less valuable in making intermedia comparisons, for example, CPM for magazines versus Internet banner ads.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

17. Figure 10–26 discusses the advantages and disadvantages of media. Describe any factors that may be taking place that might change the disadvantages or advantages of various media. (LO 10-5) As you can see from this figure, each medium has advantages and disadvantages that it offers.

For example, think about TV. Clearly, one of the advantages of TV is its wide exposure, ability to achieve reach. But trends show that younger audiences are moving away from watching TV, preferring YouTube and videos, etc. As the audience‘s viewing habits change so too will the advantages of various media.

Another example is newspapers. Newspaper readership is on a major downward trend. Less and less young people are reading papers, particularly in print. As a result, coverage may no longer be an advantage. While students say they read the news online (if you believe that!), this is a different form of newspaper. Now a digital version, there may be no coupons to cut, the versions may be shorter, and the ―art of newspaper reading‖ is going away (browsing, etc.). Advertisers have learned this, which is why newspapers are in trouble financially.

You can take every medium in that list in Figure 10-26, and recognize changes that are occurring that will alter their advantages and disadvantages (radio versus Pandora). As the new digital media mature, they will change as well—Facebook now takes ads. Instagram is more useful to marketers than Facebook. YouTube will someday overtake CBS, and on and on.

18. One of the more popular metrics now being used in nontraditional media (Internet, social media, etc.) is engagement. This term has also been used in evaluating traditional media.

Explain what is meant by engagement. Is this term being used the same in referring to both traditional and nontraditional media way? (LO 10-1) The term engagement is nothing new to media planners and has been discussed for the past few years but with still no agreement as to exactly what it means. The reason for such attention stems from the fact that current traditional metrics, while still useful, are considered insufficient for today‘s media planners, who are inundated with media options from which to choose. One of the terms that they have not only settled on, but have become fixated upon is engagement.

For the most part, engagement refers to the degree of involvement the viewer demonstrates with the message. Others have also considered relevance, intent, etc. In fact, at last count, there were no less than 28 different definitions of engagement being offered. The basic concept is that more involved readers, watchers, and/or users will be more interested in the communication than will those merely exposed. For example, if I am in the market for a car, I may spend more time ―engaged‖ with the ad.

On the internet, if I spend more time on a page, I may be considered as more engaged. More engaged consumers are supposed to remember and prefer the brand.

While certainly relevant, engagement has not yet shown to be as important as one might expect.

While some research studies show that engaged viewers may demonstrate higher recall and like the ad better, as well as take some behavioral action after exposure to the ad, skeptics say ―so what‖?

They argue that engagement may be explained by mere involvement with the product or service category, and of course involved consumers would be more inclined to reflect the same results. They argue that engagement is nothing new.

Whether it is engagement or involvement, or relevance, or others on the list, all of these terms reflect the assumption that more interest in the ad is likely to occur. While this is certainly an advantage over mere exposure, it does not mean that engagement has provided some major breakthrough.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

19. Discuss the differences between CDI and BDI. When would an advertiser use these indexes?

(LO 10-2) BDI compares the percentage of the brand's total US sales in a given market area with the percentage of the total population in the market. The resulting BDI indicates the sales potential for that brand in that market area. CDI provides information on the potential for development of the total product category rather than specific brands.

Figures 10-8, 10-9, and 10-10 provide an excellent summary of how BDI and CDI can be calculated and used to develop marketing strategies. The use of these indices provides marketers with insights into the market potential for the product or brand. This, in turn, provides information regarding the amount of media emphasis, weighting, etc. to be allocated.

Of particular value is Figure 10-10. This figure essentially sums up the value of BDI and CDI to marketers in developing their marketing strategies.

20. A number of studies have examined the role that personality and/or other personal characteristics may have on consumers’ media usage. Discuss some of these studies. Do you think that these characteristics may have an impact, or should marketers rely primarily on demographic characteristics? (LO 10-2) IMC Perspective 10-1 reports on a number of studies that seem to indicate that personality characteristics may be useful for developing media strategies. While not suggesting that these traits will replace demographics, the researchers believe that they may contribute to more effective media buying.

Reading IMC Perspective 10-1, one can see that stages in one‘s family lifecycle and degree of social interactions may affect media usage. In addition, heavier users of the Internet exhibit different personality traits than light or moderate users, liberals may be heavier users than conservatives.

Newspaper readers are more likely to be optimists, while magazine readers may be more openminded.

Going the other way, the study of Facebook users demonstrating correlations between what they ―liked‖ and personality and preferences for programming. The Pew Study offers additional insights into the personalities of Facebook users.

While personality characteristics provide additional insights into users programming and media habits, one has to be careful not to put too much faith into these findings. Like demographics, it is often difficult to generalize personality traits to behaviors. The best thing to do at this point is use these traits with demographics to enrich the media buy.

IMC Exercise Have students access MRI online and examine the profiles and media usage characteristics for a particular product. Have them review the indices and to examine them carefully to determine if they seem logical.

Have them present their findings to the class, describing the media strategy that should be employed to reach them.

CHAPTER 11 EVALUATION OF MEDIA: TELEVISION AND RADIO

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Chapter Overview The purpose of this chapter is to examine the media of television and radio. We examine the general characteristics of television and radio as well as their advantages and limitations as advertising media.

Attention is given to how advertisers use TV and radio as part of their media strategy, how they buy television and radio time, how audiences are measured and evaluated for each medium, and how rates are determined. Recent developments in the area of audience measurement for television are examined.

Various factors and developments that are likely to change the future role of television and radio as advertising media vehicles are also discussed.

Learning Objectives 1.

Describe the role of television as an advertising medium and its advantages and limitations.

2.

Discuss how television advertising time is purchased for network and local television as well as cable television.

3.

Discuss how television viewing audiences are measured and developments in audience measurement.

4.

Discuss the role of radio as an advertising medium and its advantages and limitations.

5.

Discuss how radio advertising time is purchased.

6.

Discuss how radio audiences are measured and developments in audience measurement.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Chapter and Lecture Outline I.

TELEVISION

Television has virtually saturated households throughout the United States and many other countries and has become a mainstay in the lives of most people. They rely on TV for news and information, and it is their primary form of entertainment. The penetration and popularity of television makes it the predominant form of mass media. It has often been noted that television represents the ideal advertising medium with its ability to combine visual images, sound, motion, and color that allow advertisers to develop the most creative and imaginative appeals. While television has numerous advantages, it also has some problems and limitations as an advertising medium.

A.

Advantages of Television 1. Creativity and impact—The interaction of sight and sound offers tremendous creative flexibility and makes possible dramatic, lifelike representations of products and services. TV commercials can be used to convey a mood or image for a brand as well as to develop emotional or entertaining appeals that help make a dull product appear interesting.

2. Coverage and cost-effectiveness—Nearly everyone, regardless of age, sex, income, or educational level, watches at least some TV and most do so on a regular basis. Marketers selling products and services that appeal to broad target audiences find that TV lets them reach mass markets, often very cost effectively.

3. Captivity and attention—Television commercials are intrusive in that they impose themselves on consumers. Unless we make a special effort to avoid commercials, most of us are exposed to thousands of them each year. The increase in viewing options and the penetration of DVDs, DVRs, remote controls, and other automatic devices have made it easier for TV viewers to avoid commercial messages. However, while some of the viewing audience may be lost during commercial breaks, most viewers are likely to pay some attention to commercials.

4. Selectivity and flexibility—TV has often been criticized for being a nonselective medium, since it is difficult to reach a precisely defined market segment. However, some selectivity is possible due to variations in the composition of audiences because of program content, broadcast time, and geographic coverage. Sports programming has become particularly popular among advertisers since they attract the difficult to reach, younger, male audience and are usually watched live. A number of companies and brands are also using sponsorship deals with the networks that broadcast the games as a way to reach college students, as well as football and basketball fans.

B.

Limitations of Television 1. Costs—The absolute costs for commercial time can be very high, particularly on the major networks. Production costs for quality commercials can also be prohibitive. The production costs for a national brand commercial average nearly $350,000 and can be much higher for spots that are more elaborate. Major companies with national brands will produce several commercials as part of their advertising campaigns which increases production costs.

2. Lack of selectivity—Advertisers who are seeking a very specific, often small, target audience find the coverage of TV extends beyond their geographic market, reducing its cost effectiveness particularly within a local market area. Audience selectivity is improving as advertisers target certain groups of consumers through the type of program or day and/or time

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

when they choose to advertise. However, TV still does not offer as much audience selectivity as radio, magazines, direct mail, or online ads for reaching precise segments of the market.

3. Fleeting message—Most TV commercials are only 15- or 30-second spots and leave nothing tangible for the viewer to examine or consider. Fifteen-second spots have become more prevalent over the past five years and now account for just over half of the commercial activity on network TV, while 30-second spots account for 40 percent. Fifteen-second spots are even more popular on cable networks and represent 50 percent of the commercials versus 33 percent for 30-second ones. Increasing media costs have contributed to shortened commercials and 15-second spots are considered to be just as effective as longer ones.

4. Clutter—The problems of fleeting messages and shorter commercials are compounded by the fact that the advertiser‘s message is only one of many spots and other non-programming material seen during a commercial break. Clutter also increases when the networks and individual stations run promotional announcements for their shows, make more time available for commercials, and redistribute time to popular programs.

5. Limited viewer attention—The increased penetration of DVRs and prevalence of remote control channel changing or zapping is creating a major problem for advertisers. Studies have shown that nearly a third of a TV program‘s viewing audience is lost during commercial breaks as they stop watching television or switch to another channel. Another major problem for advertisers is when viewers bail out during a commercial break by changing channels or fast-forwarding (zipping) through ads and promotion spots. Thus, the challenge facing networks, as well as advertisers, is how to discourage viewers from changing channels during commercial breaks and be more receptive to the advertising.

6. Distrust and negative evaluation—TV commercials are probably the most criticized form of advertising because of the intrusiveness of the medium. Studies have shown that of the various forms of advertising, distrust is generally the highest for TV commercials.

Professor Notes:

II.

BUYING TELEVISION TIME

There are a number of options available to advertisers purchasing television time. The instructor should point out that the purchase of television advertising time is a very specialized part of the advertising business, particularly for large companies spending huge sums of money and advertising on a national or regional basis. The various considerations involved in the purchase of television time are examined.

A.

Network versus Spot—A basic consideration that faces all advertisers is the allocation of their television media budget among network versus local or spot announcements. It is important to cover each of the ways television time can be purchased including: 1. Network advertising—A common way by which advertisers disseminate their messages is by purchasing airtime from a television network, which assembles a series of affiliated stations or affiliates to which its supplies programming. A major advantage of network advertising is that it simplifies the purchasing process for advertisers who want to reach broad target audiences. Most prime-time commercial spots, particularly on the popular shows, are sold

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

during the up-front market while time can also be bought during the scatter market that runs throughout the TV season. The major networks as well as their cable counterparts often reserve at least 10 percent or more of their inventory of advertising time rather than offering all of it for sale during the up-front market. Spanish-language television networks such as Univision and Telemundo are becoming increasingly popular and provide advertisers a way to reach the rapidly growing Hispanic market.

2. Spot and local advertising—Spot advertising refers to commercials shown on local television stations, with the negotiation and purchase of time being made directly from the individual stations. All non-network advertising done by a national advertiser is known as national spot advertising, whereas airtime sold to local firms is known as local advertising.

A major problem for national advertisers is that spot advertising can be more difficult to acquire, since the time must be purchased from a number of local stations. Additionally, there are more variations in pricing policies and discount structures of individual stations than networks. However, this problem has been reduced somewhat by the use of station reps, individuals who act as sales representatives for a number of local stations in dealings with national advertisers.

3. Syndication—Advertisers may also reach television viewers by advertising on syndicated programs which are sold or distributed to local stations. There are three basic types of syndicated programs: ●

Off-network syndication—reruns of network shows that are bought by individual stations (The Big Bang Theory, Family Guy). Off-network syndication shows are very important to local stations because they provide quality programming with an established audience.

●

First-run syndication—shows produced specifically for the syndication market (The Ellen DeGeneres Show, Dr. Phil, TMZ)

●

Advertiser-supported or barter syndication—both off-network and first-run syndicated programs offered free or for a reduced rate to local stations but with some advertising time pre-sold to national advertisers and the remainder available for sale by the local station.

Syndication now accounts for more than a third of the national viewing audience on traditional networks and generates advertising revenue comparable to any of the big four networks. Syndicated shows have become more popular than network shows in certain dayparts such as daytime, early prime time and late fringe.

B.

Methods of Buying Time—Television advertisers must also make decisions regarding the method by which they will advertise on a program. The options to be discussed include: 1. Sponsorships—Under a sponsorship arrangement, an advertiser assumes responsibility for the production and content of the program as well as the advertising that appears within it.

Companies choose to sponsor programs for a variety of reasons discussed in the text.

2. Participations—Most advertisers either cannot afford the costs of sponsorship or want greater flexibility than sole sponsorship permits. More than 90 percent of network advertising time is sold as participations, with multiple advertisers buying commercial time or spots on a program produced by the network or an outside production company that sells the show to the network.

3. Spot announcements—Spot announcements are bought from the local stations and generally appear during the adjacent time periods of network programs (hence the term adjacencies).

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Spot announcements are most often used by purely local advertisers but are also utilized by companies with no network schedule or by large advertisers that make dual use of network and spot advertising.

C.

Selecting Time Periods and Programs—Another consideration in buying television time is the selection of the particular time period and program during which the commercial will be shown.

Considerations here include the selection of a specific time period or daypart segment and audience size and demographic composition. Common television dayparts are shown in Figure 11-2 of the text. The different dayparts are important to advertisers because they attract different demographic groups.

D.

Cable Television 1. The growth of cable—Cable television or CATV (community antenna television) is probably the most significant development in the broadcast media. In 2019, 78 percent of the nation‘s 120 million television households watched TV through a pay subscription service, with nearly 60 percent doing so through cable and a quarter through DBS (direct broadcast satellite). Cable subscribers receive and average of more than 200 channels, including the local network affiliates and independent stations in various markets. Many cable and ADS also carry superstations, independent local stations that send their signals nationally via satellite to cable operators to make their programs available to subscribers. Programming on superstations such as TBS and WGN generally consists of sports, movies, and reruns of network shows. Figure 11-3 shows the most popular cable channels along with the type of programming they carry.

2. Advertising on cable—As with broadcast TV, cable can be purchased on a national, regional, or local (spot) basis. Many national advertisers are turning to spot advertising on local cable systems to reach specific geographic markets. Spot cable is also becoming very popular among local advertisers since they find it very affordable. The growth in spot cable advertising is also being facilitated by the use of interconnects, where a number of cable systems and networks in a geographic area are joined for advertising purposes. These interconnects increase the size of the audience an advertiser can reach with a spot cable buy.

3. Advantages of cable—Cable television has some important advantages including the opportunities it offers for narrowcasting or reaching very specialized markets though stations such as ESPN (sports), MTV (music/reality shows), or CNN (news) and the various other channels. Cable TV also offers lower rates and greater flexibility in the types of commercials that can be used. The low costs of cable make it a very popular advertising medium for local advertisers such as retailers.

4. Limitations of cable—Limitations of cable include the fact that it is still overshadowed by the major networks as it has less desirable programming and production than broadcast television. Another drawback is audience fragmentation as the ratings for most cable channels is very low. The prime-time program rating for most cable programs is only about a 1 or 2.

Lack of penetration is also a problem, particularly in some major market areas.

5. The future of cable—Cable television faces a number of challenges over the next decade such as competition from new channels, continued fragmentation, and changes in government regulation. However, as cable penetration increases and its programming quality continues to improve, more advertisers are discovering its efficiency and ability to reach targeted market segments.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

McGraw-Hill Connect ®: Characteristics of Television Type of Activity: Click and Drag Activity Summary: Students will match the various characteristics of television with their implications for advertisers or media planners of various brands currently using TV as a medium as part of their IMC. Activity Learning Objective: 11-01 Describe the role of television as an advertising medium and its advantages and limitations.

Concept Review: Television is the primary form of entertainment in most households as well as the largest advertising medium in the United States and in the world. TV has virtually saturated households throughout the United States and most other countries and has become a mainstay in the lives of most people. The average American viewer watches nearly five hours of TV a day.

Difficulty: 2 Medium Bloom‘s: Understand AACSB: Analytical Thinking

E.

Measuring the TV Audience—One of the most important considerations in using television advertising concerns the size and composition of the TV viewing audience. Audience measurement is critical to the advertiser since they want to know the size and characteristics of the audience they are reaching when they buy time on a particular program. Audience size and composition are important to the network or station as these figures determine the amount they can charge for commercial viewing time. Programming decisions are made based on audience size and composition.

1. Audience measures—A major source of network TV and local audience information is Nielsen Media Research since Arbitron exited the TV ratings business at the end of 1993 due to steep financial losses. There are some important terms and various types of information the rating services provide, which should be covered: a. Television households—the number of households in a market with at least one operable TV or monitor. Nielsen estimates that 120 million U.S. households that own at least one television set or monitor that can be used to watch TV. b. Program rating—probably the best known of all audience measurement figures—the percentage of TV households in an area that are tuned to a specific program during a specific time period. c. Ratings point—a figure that represents 1 percent of the TV households in a particular market tuned to a specific program. d. Households using television (HUT)—the percentage of homes in a given area where TV is being watched during a specific time period. This figure is sometimes referred to as sets in use and is always expressed as a percentage.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

e. Share of audience—the percentage of households watching TV in a specified time period that are tuned to a specific program. Share figures are important because they reveal how well a program does with the available viewing audience. f.

Total audience—the total number of homes viewing any five-minute part of a program.

2. National audience information—Nielsen provides daily and weekly estimates of the size and composition of the national viewing audiences for programs aired on the broadcast and major cable networks. To measure the viewing audience, Nielsen uses the people meter, which is an electronic measuring device that records not only what is being watched but also by whom in the sample of 40,000 Nielsen households used to determine the national ratings. Exhibit 1110 shows Nielsen‘s people meter.

3. Local audience information—Information on local television audiences is provided by the Nielsen Station Index (NSI). These measures are taken using the national audience measurement and a measure of TV viewership in the 56 largest local markets using electronic or metered technology. This includes people meters as well as a Portable People Meter (PPM), which is a wearable, page-size device that electronically tracks exposure to cable and satellite television; terrestrial, satellite, and online radio; as well as cinema advertising and many types of placed-based digital media. Nielsen provides NSI measures in 210 local markets known as designated market areas (DMAs). DMAs are non-overlapping areas used for planning, buying and evaluating TV audiences and are generally a group of counties in which stations located in a metropolitan or central area have the largest audience share. The ratings period when all 210 DMAs are surveyed is known as the sweeps periods. As discussed in the chapter, there are many problems with the audience estimates gathered during the sweeps periods and advertising people are calling for changes in this system.

4. Developments in audience measurement—The advertising industry is likely to see changes in the way viewing audiences are measured. A major issue in television audience measurement over the past decade has been the need to move beyond linear TV where the viewer has to watch a scheduled TV program at the particular time it‘s offered, and on the particular channel it‘s presented on.

In 2007 Nielsen began providing commercial ratings data, known as ―C3,‖ which includes measures of the average viewership of the commercials in a program, both live and up to three days after the ads on played back on a DVR. The new ratings did not track individual ads or specific time slots, but rather offered an average viewership of all the national commercial minutes in a program. The reasons behind the move to this new system and the ongoing issues associated with measurement of TV commercials are discussed in the chapter.

Many television network executives began pushing for ―C7‖ ratings, which include viewership of programs and commercials up to seven days after the airing of a show. This will allow for inclusion of viewers who may record a shown on a DVR and watch it during this time period. By 2014, Nielsen was providing C3 as well as C7 viewership numbers; however, the industry continued to argue that better measurement was still needed to account for viewership across all platforms to determine total viewership of a program as well as viewing patterns.

In 2016 Nielsen began rolling out its Total Audience Measurement system, which is a singlesourced platform that accounts for all viewing across linear TV, DVRs, video-on-demand, connected TV devices including streaming video devices and game consoles, enabled smart TVs, tablets, smartphones, and personal computers. The new measurement system accounts for viewers currently overlooked by current C3 and C7 metrics and also provides more insight into viewing patterns for television shows. The new system will be able to determine

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

how much time people spend with devices overall and link program viewing to those specific devices. Nielsen is also developing a new metric called Total Use of Television (TUT), which adds connected TV usage to linear viewing to provide a complete view of TV usage.

Professor Notes:

McGraw-Hill Connect ®: TV Commercials for Various Brands Type of Activity: Click and Drag Activity Summary: Students will match the various media concepts related to buying television time with their implications for advertisers or media planners of various brands currently using TV as a medium as part of their IMC. Activity Learning Objective: 11-02 Discuss how television advertising time is purchased for network and local television as well as cable television.

Concept Review: A number of options are available to advertisers that choose to use TV as part of their media mix. They can purchase time in a variety of program formats that appeal to various types and sizes of audiences.

They can purchase time on a national, regional, or local basis. Or they can sponsor an entire program, participate in the sponsorship, or use spot announcements during or between programs.

Difficulty: 2 Medium Bloom‘s: Understand AACSB: Analytical Thinking

McGraw-Hill Connect ®: Bee & Gee's TV Audience Measures Type of Activity: Case Analysis

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Activity Summary: Bee & Gee is a multi-product, multi-brand, packaged goods company with a significant presence in the personal care and grooming category. Within each product category, it has numerous brands that sometimes compete with each other in the same geographical markets. This activity will have the students select the best answer for each question related to audience measurement.

Activity Learning Objective: 11-03 Discuss how television viewing audiences are measured and developments in audience measurement.

Concept Review: One of the most important considerations in TV advertising is the size and composition of the viewing audience. Audience measurement is critical to advertisers as well as to the networks and stations.

Advertisers want to know the size and characteristics of the audience they are reaching when they purchase time on a particular program. And since the rates they pay are a function of audience size, advertisers want to be sure audience measurements are accurate.

Difficulty: 3 Hard Bloom‘s: Analyze AACSB: Analytical Thinking

III.

RADIO

The role of radio as an entertainment and advertising medium changed dramatically with the rapid growth in the popularity of television. Radio has evolved primarily into a local advertising medium characterized by highly specialized programming which appeals to very narrow segments of the population. Radio has survived and actually grown as an advertising media vehicle because it offers advertisers certain advantages. However, radio does have certain limitations that affect its role as an advertising medium.

A.

Advantages of Radio.

1. Cost and efficiency—Radio commercials are inexpensive to produce and the absolute and relative costs for radio advertising time is generally lower than for television. The low cost of radio means advertisers can build more reach and frequency into their media schedule within a certain budget. They can use different stations to broaden the reach of their messages and multiple spots to ensure adequate frequency.

2. Receptivity—Radio often provides advertisers with a very receptive environment for their advertising messages. Consumers perceive radio advertising to be more personally relevant to them than ads on television or the Internet.

3. Selectivity—Radio allows marketers to focus their advertising on specialized audiences such as certain demographic and lifestyle groups. For example, talk radio reaches the adult market effectively while top 40 music reaches teens and young adults. Most areas have radio stations with formats such as adult contemporary, easy listening, classical music, country, news/ talk shows, jazz, and all news, to name a few.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

4. Flexibility—Radio is probably the most flexible of all the advertising media because it has a very short closing period, which means advertisers can change their message almost up to the time it goes on the air. Radio ads can be produced and scheduled on very short notice. Radio advertisers can easily adjust their messages to local market conditions and marketing situations.

5. Mental imagery—Radio encourages listeners to use their imagination when processing a commercial message. Radio can also reinforce TV messages through a process called image transfer where the visual elements of TV commercials are implanted in a radio spot.

6. Integrated marketing opportunities—Radio provides marketers with a variety of integrated marketing opportunities such as event marketing and point-of purchase promotions.

Advertisers often use radio stations and personalities to enhance their involvement with a local market and to gain influence with local retailers.

B.

Limitations of Radio.

1. Creative limitations—Radio is an advertising medium without a visual image. The radio advertiser cannot show the product, demonstrate it, or use any type of visual appeal or information. Because of these creative limitations many companies tend to ignore radio, and agencies often assign junior people to the development of radio commercials.

2. Fragmentation—The percentage of the market tuned to any particular station is usually very small.

3. Difficult buying procedures—Acquiring information, evaluating, and contracting for radio time with even a fraction of the nearly 11,300 commercial stations that operate across the country can be difficult and time consuming. This problem has diminished somewhat in recent years as the number of radio networks and of syndicated programs offering a package of several hundred stations increases.

4. Limited research data—Audience research data on radio are often limited, particularly compared with TV, magazines, and newspapers.

5. Limited listener attention—Radio programming particularly music, is often the background to some other activity and may not receive the listeners‘ full attention. Many people who listen in their cars preprogram their radios and change stations during commercial breaks. Another factor that is detracting from radio listening in motor vehicles is the rapid growth of mobile telephones. Studies have found that commuters surveyed who own a mobile phone reported listening to less radio. Many consumers spend time on their phones while driving and also can listen to music stored on their phones or through streaming services.

6. Competition from digital media—Commercial radio faces competition from several digitalbased technologies that are affecting the listening audience such as satellite radio. The major satellite radio companies, Sirius and XM, merged in 2008 and now have nearly 30 million subscribers. SiriusXM has also been adding more locally tailored programming such as traffic and weather reports, which make them more competitive against terrestrial stations in local markets. In addition to satellite, terrestrial radio is also being impacted by the popularity of music services that are being streamed over the Internet such as Pandora, Spotify, and Apple Music.

7. Clutter—Most radio stations carry an average of nearly 10 minutes of commercials every hour. During the popular morning and evening rush hours, the amount of commercial time

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

may exceed 12 minutes. In 2010 Clear Channel, which is now known as iHeartMedia, Inc., began offering advertisers a new service known as contextual radio ads that can automatically insert radio commercials immediately after specific programming or certain kinds of content, including other ads. A number of companies have been using the service to better target their radio advertising messages.

McGraw-Hill Connect ®: Features of the Radio as a Communication Tool Type of Activity: Matching Activity Summary: Students are asked to consider the features of radio broadcasting and to match the correct feature as part of IMC efforts with the strengths that marketing managers enjoy.

Activity Learning Objectives: 11-04 Discuss the role of radio as an advertising medium and its advantages and limitations.

11-05 Discuss how radio advertising time is purchased.

11-06 Discuss how radio audiences are measured and developments in audience measurement.

Concept Review: This is an opportunity to review the advantages of radio. Radio has many advantages over other media, including cost and efficiency, receptivity, selectivity, flexibility, mental imagery, and integrated marketing opportunities.

Difficulty: 2 Medium Bloom‘s: Analyze AACSB: Analytical Thinking

C.

Buying Radio Time—The purchase of radio time is similar to that of television in terms of purchasing options as advertisers can make either network, spot or local buys during various time periods or dayparts. Various options should be discussed including: 1. Network radio—There are seven major national radio networks, such as CBS Radio, Cumulus, Westwood One, and Premiere. Advertisers can reach a national audience by advertising on one of the networks. There are also more than 100 regional radio networks across the country. An important trend is the number of syndicated radio programs that offer advertisers a package of several hundred stations. The Dan Patrick Show is an example of a popular syndicated program.

2. Spot radio—National advertisers can use spot radio to purchase airtime on individual stations in various markets. The purchase of spot radio provides greater flexibility in selecting markets, individual stations, and airtime and adjusting the message for local market conditions.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

3. Local radio—Most radio advertising is done by local companies who purchase advertising time from stations in local markets.

D.

Time classifications—The broadcast day for radio is divided into various time periods or dayparts. The size of the radio listening audience varies widely across the dayparts, and advertising rates follow accordingly. The largest audiences (and thus the highest rates) occur during the early morning and late afternoon weekday drive times. Various dayparts for radio are shown in Figure 11-7.

E.

Audience Information—One problem with radio is the lack of audience information that results from the vast number of radio stations with small, fragmented audiences. Developing precise measures of radio listenership is difficult because of the nature of the medium and the many station options available. Two major radio rating services should be discussed: 1. Nielsen audio—This measurement covers nearly 265 local radio markets with two to four ratings reports per year by having a sample of representative listeners in each market maintain a diary of their radio listening for seven days. Various figures measured by Nielsen Audio include person estimates, ratings, and share. Nielsen Audio also recently began measuring listenership to webcasts of radio stations. The three basic estimates in the radio ratings report are 1) person estimates—the estimated number of people listening, 2) rating— the percentage of listeners in the survey area population, and 3) share—the percentage of the total estimated listening audience. These three estimates are further defined by using quarterhour and cume figures. The average quarter-hour (AQH) figure expresses the average number of people estimated to have listened to a station for a minimum of five minutes during any quarter-hour in a time period. Cume stands for ―cumulative audience,‖ the estimated total number of different people who listened to a station for at least five minutes in a quarter-hour period within a reported daypart. The average quarter-hour rating (AQH RTG) expresses the estimated number of listeners as a percentage of the survey area population. The average quarter-hour share (AQH SHR) is the percentage of the total listening audience tuned to each station.

2. RADAR—Another rating service now owned by Nielsen is RADAR (Radio's All Dimension Audience Research). RADAR measurements are based on information collected throughout the year by means of diary interviews from a probability sample of 400,000 respondents age 12 and older.

Professor Notes:

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Teaching Suggestions This chapter is designed to provide the student with a general understanding of the media of television and radio. Radio and television are probably the most pervasive media in the lives of most American consumers. The instructor may want to direct the students‘ attention to the statistics cited in the text regarding penetration of radio and television and the amount of time spent with these media. It is important for students to understand the general characteristics of television and radio including their specific strengths and weaknesses, the role they play as advertising media vehicles, how television and radio time is purchased and how audiences are measured and evaluated for each medium. For nearly 80 years, the broadcast media of radio and television have been a dominant part of the lives of most Americans. Radio was a major news, information and entertainment medium from the 1920s to the early 1950s. The introduction of television as a mass medium began in 1950 and has seen unprecedented growth over the past three decades, both as an entertainment and advertising medium. Much of the growth in the popularity of television has come at the expense of radio, although the latter has been experiencing a resurgence in popularity. As we enter a new millennium, television is changing as an advertising medium as the growth of cable has led to a fragmentation of viewing audiences and the major networks are facing a decline in the size of the viewing audiences they attract. An interesting and informative website that you may want to visit is that of the Television Advertising Bureau which can be found at www.tvb.org.

The nature of television as an advertising medium has changed dramatically in recent years and will continue to do so with the evolution of digital technology. The trend toward shorter commercials and the resulting clutter problem, the growth of cable and concomitant decrease in network viewing audiences, the continued penetration of digital video recorders (DVRs), video on demand (VOD), and Internet streaming services such as Netflix, Hulu, and Amazon Prime are likely to have a profound impact on television as an advertising medium. Advertisers are increasingly calling for more precision in audience measurement such as measures of commercial viewing rather than simply program viewership. The instructor should encourage the student to explore these changes and consider their impact on advertising in terms of not only media planning, but also creative strategy and sales promotional programs. It is important to keep informed about the changes occurring in the areas of audience measurement as well.

The chapter discusses the ongoing battle between the television networks and advertisers over the measurement of television viewing audiences and how they are being impacted by new technologies such as digital video recorders.

When teaching this chapter, we encourage you not to contribute to the ―Rodney Dangerfield‖ problem of radio by giving it only limited attention. Radio has become a very viable media option for national as well as local advertisers. Examples of the creative and effective use of radio are readily available just by spending some time listening to the medium. Since students tend to be heavy listeners of radio, you might ask them to record some radio ads that could be discussed in class. The Radio Advertising Bureau has a very informative website (www.rab.com) which you may want to visit for some interesting material and information on the effective use of radio by various advertisers. There are several interesting developments in radio that can be discussed including the growing popularity of various formats such as talk radio and webcasts of radio stations. Radio is facing more competition from cable television as advertising rates on local cable stations are often comparable to radio and there is the added advantage of TV‘s visual impact and creative options. Attention should also be given to the growth of satellite radio and SiriusXM, which was formed by the merger of the two companies. While satellite radio offers more options to listeners, both companies are finding it difficult to attract subscribers.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Answers to Discussion Questions 1. The chapter opener discusses the major developments impacting the television industry. Discuss these developments and how they are likely to impact TV’s role as an advertising medium. How might these factors impact the way marketers use television as part of their IMC programs?

(LO 11-1, 11-2, 11-3) Television has long been the medium of choice for marketers who want to reach large audiences and deliver an impactful message; the TV commercial has been considered the quintessential form of advertising by many marketers. The most significant development in the television industry prior to the turn of the century was the increasing penetration of cable TV and alternative delivery systems (ADS) such as direct broadcast by satellite, which dramatically increased the number of channels available to viewers.

One of the most significant factors affecting the television industry, as well as its use as an advertising medium, is the fragmentation of the viewing audience that has occurred with the increase in channels available through cable and ADS. Total viewership of the four major networks has declined dramatically over the past two decades and collectively accounts for less than 25 percent of the prime-time viewing audience. Many viewers are being lost to streaming services such as Netflix, Amazon Prime, and YouTube, as well as cable channels that offer programs that appeal to more specific audiences interested in news, sports, fashion, music, cooking, travel, entertainment, and other areas.

The greatest impact on television currently is the use of technology. More than half of TV households now have a digital video recorder (DVR), which means they can record a show and watch it whenever they want while fast-forwarding through the commercials. This also means that viewers are not watching TV in the traditional linear fashion whereby they view a scheduled TV program at the specific time it is offered, and on the particular channel it is presented on. In addition to time-shifted viewing on DVRs, TV shows are being streamed online over personal computers, tablets, and smartphones as well as through connected streaming video devices and gaming consoles such as Apple TV, Amazon Fire TV, Google Chromecast, Xbox, and PlayStation—as well as smart TVs. Compounding the problem facing the television and cable networks is concern over cord cutting, which refers to households that are dropping their traditional pay-TV services such as cable or satellite TV. Moreover, many of the pay-TV providers offer subscribers ―skinny bundles,‖ which include fewer channels so they save money on their monthly bills.

Whereas all of these factors have led to predictions of television‘s imminent demise as a major advertising medium, many experts are much more positive about it future. Many advertisers are shifting more of their media budgets to online and social media where they can reach younger consumers with highly targeted video ads on Google, Facebook, YouTube, and Instagram. The broadcast and cable networks recognize that competing against streaming services requires quality programming, as well as finding ways to reduce the number of commercials in TV shows while maintaining revenue and profits.

The networks must also move more quickly toward making addressable TV advertising, which is the industry‘s term for commercials that can be targeted to specific audiences, more available to marketers. It is estimated that there are 60 million households in the United States that can be serviced via addressable ads on traditional cable and satellite TV, and the number will increase.

2. Discuss the advantages and limitations of television as an advertising medium and how these factors affect its use by major national advertisers as well as smaller local companies. (LO 11-1, 11-2)

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Television has often been described as the ideal advertising medium because of the many advantages it offers. These include the opportunity TV offers for developing creative and imaginative messages with high impact; its wide coverage and ability to reach large audiences in a cost-effective manner; the captive nature of the TV viewing audience which usually results in attention to commercials; and the selectivity and flexibility television offers for reaching various types of target audiences, particularly with the growth of cable television. These factors are very important to major advertisers such as automobile companies or packaged goods marketers. These companies are generally trying to reach mass audiences with their advertising messages and television is an excellent media vehicle for doing this. However, they can also take advantage of the selectivity TV offers through various programs or cable channels to reach more targeted audiences. Automobile companies and packaged goods marketers also rely heavily on the creativity and impact that is possible through TV commercials. These companies use the sight, sound, and visuals offered through television to create high impact ads, develop images for their brands, and develop emotional or entertaining appeals.

Television advertising can be particularly valuable for creating emotional or entertaining appeals that help make a low involvement product more exciting or interesting.

Of course, there are limitations to television as an advertising medium, even for major advertisers with large budgets. Television can be a very expensive medium for national advertisers and production costs for high quality commercials are also very high. The viewing audience for television programs is becoming increasingly fragmented with the increase in the number of channels available to viewers. Clutter also continues to be a problem as the average amount of non-programming time averages more than 15 minutes during prime time and even more during the daytime. The increase in the number of homes with digital video recorders has also become a problem as many households are recording shows and skipping through commercials when playing them back.

For smaller local companies, television has become a more viable medium in recent years. Local companies such as retailers, car dealers, restaurants, and other merchants are spending a greater portion of their media budget on TV, particularly on local cable where the rates are low and they can target a specific market segment. Being able to use TV allows them to take advantage of the creative power of television. However, local companies also face some of the same problems as national advertisers such as audience fragmentation and competition from other media. Local companies also often lack the budget to produce high-quality TV commercials, which can limit the effectiveness of the commercials they run on television.

3. Discuss the reasons behind the popularity of sports programming on television and why television networks are willing to pay such large sums of money for the rights to televise collegiate and professional sports. Do you think collegiate and professional sports will continue to be popular among television viewers as well as advertisers? (LO 11-1, 11-2) Sports programming in general has become particularly important to advertisers as sporting events are often watched live. Because viewers are watching live, there is a higher likelihood that the viewer will see the advertiser‘s commercial rather than simply fast-forwarding through them or subscribing to a viewing service that is commercial-free. Advertisers are particularly attracted to advertising on sporting events because they are a good way to reach young men who are very valuable and elusive target audience, meaning it is very hard to reach this audience on such a large scale with any other programming. Sports will continue to be popular among television viewers and thus continue to be popular with advertisers as well. Very few streaming services offer sports content, therefore many people maintain their cable and satellite television subscriptions solely to view sports. Additionally, new opportunities for advertising in sports and sponsorships through newer, more popular sports such as soccer continue to provide lucrative opportunities for marketers.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

4. IMC Perspective 11-1 discusses how major media companies are planning to reduce the number of commercials shown during network TV shows. Discuss why major broadcast and cable networks are considering reducing the number of commercials and the pros and cons of doing so. (LO 11-1, 11-2) Television networks hope that their plans to reduce the number of commercials and offering new, more limited pod formats will provide a more positive viewing experience for television viewers.

They also hope that advertisers will pay more for the opportunity to advertise during shorter breaks with less clutter. This would ideally result in a more attentive and receptive audience. The pros of reducing commercials include less clutter for both viewers and advertisers, less frustration from consumers about being exposed to too many ads, and a more attentive audience. The cons include that advertisers will have to be willing to pay more for the advertisements to make it worthwhile for the network to have fewer commercials. Additionally, while an overhaul of the industry may need to happen, it might be quite complex for advertisers and networks to reconfigure a system that has been in place for many years.

5. What are the various options available to advertisers for purchasing advertising time on television? How does the use of these options differ for national versus local advertisers? (LO 11-2) A number of options are available for purchasing advertising time on television. Advertisers can purchase time in a variety of program formats and it can be purchased on a national, regional, or local basis. Advertisers can also sponsor an entire program, participate in the sponsorship of a program, or use spot announcements between programs. For national advertisers, one of the basic decisions is whether to purchase network versus local or spot announcements. Most national advertisers purchase advertising on the major networks to provide national coverage and supplement this with regional or local spot purchases. When network advertising is purchased, the commercial is shown on all of the affiliated stations in all designated market areas. National advertisers will also use spot advertising (also referred to as national spot advertising), which refers to commercials shown on local TV stations with time purchased directly from the individual stations. Spot advertising offers the national advertisers flexibility in adjusting to local market conditions as they can purchase more time in areas where market potential is greatest or where additional advertising support is needed. Local advertisers want to purchase television time on stations whose coverage is limited to the geographic markets in which they do business. This is done by purchasing spot ads on local network affiliates, independent stations or local cable networks.

6. Choose one of the major cable networks listed in Figure 11-3 and analyze it as an advertising medium. Discuss the audience profile for viewers of programming on this cable network and the type of advertisers that might want to reach them. You might visit the website of the cable network for information on its viewing audience. (LO 11-2) There are many advantages to advertising on cable TV including the opportunity for narrowcasting or reaching a very specialized target market. Students should select a cable network from the list shown in Figure 11-4 and develop a profile of it by visiting the chosen cable network's website. Using the information provided, they can discuss the target audience reached by this network, the programming, and the types of companies that might choose to use it as part of their television advertising media plan. They also might watch some shows on the network and discuss the types of commercials used by the advertisers with respect to factors such as creative style and execution, length and format.

7. Discuss recent developments in the measurement of television viewing audiences and their implications for advertisers. Do you think advertisers should have to pay for viewers who watch TV shows on a time-shifted basis on their DVRs or video on demand? (LO 11-3)

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

The major television and cable networks have been battling with Nielsen Media Research for years over the best way to measure the television viewing audience, particularly given the number of TVs, delivery systems, program options, and viewing platforms available. In 2007 Nielsen began making commercial ratings available, known as C3, that includes measures of the average viewership of the commercials both live and up to three days after the ads are played back on a DVR. Nielsen also provides C7 ratings that measure viewership of programs and commercials up to seven days after the airing of a show.

Television and cable networks use rating data from Nielsen to set prices for television advertising time and changes in that data can have a major impact on the prices advertisers ultimately pay.

Nielsen‘s C3 ratings mean the networks now have to negotiate with advertisers based on smaller live viewing audience numbers. However, in exchange for letting Madison Avenue have its commercial ratings, the networks are now paid for the DVR-enabled viewers who may watch the programs and the ads from 3 to 7 days later. They note that the Nielsen data refutes the myth that nearly all DVR viewers skips the ads when they playback a show and that those who watch the ads raise the program‘s total commercial audience. However, many advertising and media executives still disagree with the networks over the value of the DVR viewers. They point to research showing that while the viewing audience may grow over time, viewership of commercials still lags significantly behind viewership of programs.

While Nielsen‘s current C3 ratings are seen as an improvement over the old measurement system, many are still dissatisfied with the system since it is based on an average of all national commercial minutes in a program. Marketers argue that payment should be based on the viewership of each individual commercial rather than an average across all the commercial minutes. They argue that there is a substantial amount of research data available showing that viewership of commercials during a break depends on position as the first or second commercial may have more viewers than spots aired during the middle of a two- or three-minute pod. As DVRs become more pervasive along with Internet Protocol TV, the viewing patterns of consumers will continue to change and Nielsen will have to continue to adapt its measurement of the television viewing audience. In 2016 Nielsen began rolling out its Total Audience Measurement system, which is a single-sourced platform that accounts for all viewing across linear TV, DVRs, VOD, and connected TV devices including streaming video devices and game consoles, enabled smart TVs, tablets, smartphones, and personal computers. The new measurement system accounts for viewers currently overlooked by current C3 and C7 metrics and also provides more insight into viewing patterns for television shows. The new system will be able to determine how much time people spend with devices overall and link program viewing to those specific devices.

8. What are the advantages and disadvantages of advertising on radio? Discuss how radio advertising can be used by national versus local advertisers. (LO 11-4) Advantages of advertising on radio include its low cost and efficiency. Radio commercials are inexpensive to produce and the cost of advertising time on most stations is relatively low. This allows advertisers the opportunity to build more reach and frequency into their media schedules. Another major advantage of radio is the high degree of audience selectivity available through various program formats and geographic coverage of the numerous stations. Radio is also a very flexible medium with very short closing periods for running a spot and also offers the potential for mental imagery in the creation of a commercial. Many radio stations also offer valuable merchandising assistance and support to advertisers.

Disadvantages of radio include creative limitations due to the absence of a visual image, a high level of audience fragmentation because of the large number of stations, chaotic buying procedures for purchasing radio time, limited amount of research data on radio audiences, and limited listener

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

attention (particularly in cars where station changing occurs frequently or where commuter are talking on cellular telephones). Radio is most likely to be used by local advertisers such as retailers who are trying to reach consumers in their trade area. However, radio has also become a popular medium for national advertisers, particularly those with products and/or services which appeal to hard-to-reach audiences such as teenagers. National advertisers can purchase time on network radio and the growing number of nationally syndicated programming such as sporting events and talk radio shows.

9. Discuss some of the ways advertisers and marketers are planning to take advantage of the digital dashboard displays that are being put in new automotive vehicles. Do you think regulations are needed to limit the use of digital technology in automobiles? (LO 11-4) There are a number of new technologies in automobiles that are of interest to advertisers. One in particular is the display screen that now exists in a number of new vehicles. Advertisers hope to utilize these screens to display visual images to provide branded content along with a commercial message. This ability to combine audio with visuals allows advertisers to make a deeper connection with consumers. The efficiency of this technology has already been shown as participants who were exposed to an audio message paired with a visual on the screen had higher brand awareness than those who solely heard the audio. There are a number of issues with this new technology that would warrant regulation. First, the privacy rights of vehicle owners would need to be considered such as how vehicle owner‘s data is being used by marketers. Additionally, overly complex dashboard displays have become a major complaint for many vehicle owners and the potential for distracted driving caused by these screens. These concerns would warrant the regulation of this new technology.

Additional Discussion Questions (not in text) 10. Television is often described as a mass medium that offers little selectivity to advertisers. Do you agree with this statement? What are some of the ways selectivity can be achieved through TV advertising? (LO 11-2) For many years, television was essentially a mass medium as there were only three major networks, which accounted for over 90 percent of the prime-time viewing audience. However, some selectivity has always been available due to variations in program content, broadcast time and geographic areas.

For example, Saturday morning cartoon shows appeal primarily to children while weekend sports programs are watched primarily by males. Geographic selectivity is possible through local of spot ads in specific markets. With the growth of cable TV, television has become less of a mass medium. The major networks now account for less than 50 percent of the prime-time viewing audience and the market has become very fragmented. The selectivity of TV has increased significantly, as advertisers can reach groups with specific interests such as sports, news, music, the arts or business on cable channels. There is even greater segmentation within these television programming categories. For example, the Golf Channel is a new cable network devoted entirely to the sport. There are cable networks devoted to a variety of music genres, such as MTV, VH1, and Country Music Television, as well as to business and financial news (CNBC) and home decorating and gardening (HGTV).

11. Discuss how the growth of Spanish-language television networks in the United States such as Univision and Telemundo affects the media strategy of marketers targeting the Hispanic market. (LO 11-2) As discussed in the chapter, the Hispanic market is very large as there are now 56 million Hispanics living in the U.S., which is 17 percent of the population. The availability of Spanish-language TV stations is important to marketers who want to reach this segment. Language usage has an important impact on their impact of TV programs and a substantial amount of the TV viewing in these homes

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

goes to Spanish language shows. Moreover, Hispanics tend to be younger, have larger families, and watch nearly two hours more of television per day than non-Hispanics. Thus, television is a very important medium for reaching this market. A number of marketers have recognized the importance of the Hispanic market and have developed IMC programs specifically for this market. These companies recognize that Spanish language TV networks such as Univision and Telemundo are the best way to reach the Hispanic market as these networks have larger viewing audiences than network shows in a number of big city markets with large Hispanic populations. As more companies develop marketing programs and commercials specifically for the Hispanic market, Spanish language television networks will become increasingly important as a way to advertise to this market segment.

Spanish-language networks are becoming increasingly popular among young bilingual Hispanics and are gaining on the four major networks. This is leading many marketers to allocate a greater portion of their media budget to Spanish language networks, as they have become an efficient and effective way to reach the growing Hispanic market.

12. Discuss how the concept of imagery transfer can be used in radio advertising. Find an example of a radio campaign that is using this concept and evaluate it. (LO 11-2) Imagery transfer refers to a technique whereby the images of a TV commercial are implanted into a radio spot. This can be done by establishing the video image of a TV commercial and then using the audio portion as the basis for the radio message so that consumers hearing the radio spot will make the connection to the television ad. Large national advertisers who are running integrated campaigns using both media often do coordination of radio and television commercials. Students should be encouraged to find and evaluate current examples of campaigns using image transfer techniques.

13. Discuss some of the factors that media buyers should take into consideration when buying advertising time on radio. (LO 11-3) Media buyers take a number of factors into consideration when buying advertising time on radio.

First, they must decide whether they want to make a network, spot or local buy. National advertisers such as automobile companies or major business-to-business marketers are likely to purchase time on one of the three major radio networks since they are generally trying to reach a national audience.

Companies who are interested in buying time in certain geographic markets would make a spot buy while local companies such as retailers will be the major purchasers of radio time on local stations. A second major factor to consider is the audience that can be reached through various radio stations.

Radio allows companies to focus their advertising on certain demographic and lifestyle groups.

Various radio formats vary in popularity among different age groups. Radio stations also can appeal to listeners with various interests through programming that focuses on specific topics such as news, sports, finance and investments, computers, cars, and many other areas. Cost factors are also taken into consideration when buying radio time. As with any other type of media, media planners consider both the absolute and relative cost of advertising time on radio. Radio stations generally promote their ability to reach specific target audiences, which increases the efficiency of an advertiser‘s budget.

14. Discuss how digital and social media are influencing the way people watch television. What are some of the ways television advertisers can leverage social media to work to their advantage?

(LO 11-2) Developments in digital technology over the past decade or so have had a profound impact on the way people watch TV and are challenging its role as the quintessential advertising medium. For nearly 60 years, consumers watched TV on huge, boxlike tube sets with screen sizes that slowly evolved from 19 to 36 inches in size. However, today nearly 90 percent of homes have highresolution, pixel-perfect HDTVs and as the prices decline, the size of the television in many homes gets larger; the average screen size today is 42 inches. Over 80 percent of homes also have broadband

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

wireless Internet, and many have video gaming consoles or other connected devices such as Apple TV, Roku, Amazon Fire TV, or Google Chromecast that help them stream video content to their televisions. There are other ways TV viewing is being affected by technology. Today most people watch television while spending time on their computers, tablets, and smartphones. A recent study by Nielsen and Yahoo! study found that 86 percent of viewers multitask on their computers or mobile device while watching television. Within that group, 40 percent use their mobile devices for social networking, 33 percent utilize various apps, and over half text family and friends.

The widespread multitasking and social media consumption during TV viewing is having a major effect on the television industry. One way is by bringing eyeballs to shows that otherwise would not be there. A Nielsen study showed that 46 percent of TV watchers started watching a show after hearing about it through Facebook while Twitter came in second at 14 percent, websites of TV shows at 9 percent, and online discussion boards at 8 percent. Additionally 70 percent indicated that they talked about a show through social media while it was on the air. Most television shows also have a Facebook page where fans can read up on the latest episodes, learn more about the actors, and enter to win prizes related to the show. This keeps fans more interested in the shows. Some television shows even provide sneak-peak videos through Facebook to get fans excited about upcoming episodes.

15. Evaluate the use of sweeps ratings periods as a method for measuring local television viewing audiences. Do you feel think sweeps ratings provide reliable and valid estimates of local television viewing audiences? How might they be improved? (LO 11-3) As discussed in the chapter, there are a number of problems with the sweeps ratings periods used to measure local TV viewing audiences. One of the major concerns is over the tactics used by the networks and their local affiliates to bolster their ratings during the sweeps periods such as special programming, contests games, and other promotional gimmicks. These extraordinary programming and promotional efforts during the sweeps periods pull in extra viewers and negatively affect the validity of audience measurements for the remainder of the year. They may inflate the size of the viewing audience for a particular network show or a local newscast and result in advertisers having to pay higher rates for advertising time during other nine months of the year. The advertising industry argues that the only real solution to the problems associated with the use of the sweeps is to do away with the ―sweeps period‖ and move to a system of continuous audience measurement. However, a continuous measurement system like that used for the national ratings would be very expensive and the television and advertising industry would have to be willing to pay a higher price for local ratings information.

16. What is a commercial rating and how does this measure differ from a program rating? Discuss why advertisers and media planners prefer commercial ratings rather than program ratings.

(LO 11-3) A commercial rating is a measure of the number of viewers of actual commercials in a program rather than the program itself. Traditionally, Nielsen provided advertisers and media planners with program ratings, which are a measure of the percentage of households in an area tuned to a specific television program during a specific time period. However, the advertising industry has long argued that there is a need to measure the viewing audience of the commercials rather than just the program since many TV viewers switch channels when commercials come on or fast-forward through them if the show was recorded on a DVR. In 2007, Nielsen began providing commercials ratings known as C3, which includes measures of the average viewership of the commercials both live, and up to three days after the ads are played back on a DVR. The new ratings do not track individual ads or specific slots in the commercial pod, but rather offer an average viewership of all the national commercial minutes in a program. Obviously, advertisers and media planners prefer commercial ratings since they have

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

always argued that viewership of commercials is much lower than viewership of programs and they do not want to pay for eyeballs that are not watching their advertising messages.

17. Discuss the way Nielsen measures the listening audience for radio stations. Do you think the rating methods are providing reliable measures of radio audiences? (LO 11-6) The listening audience for radio is measured by Nielsen Audio, which covers over 250 local radio markets with two to four ratings reports per year. Nielsen has a sample of representative listeners in each market who maintain a diary of their radio listening for seven days. Audience estimates for the markets are based on these diary records and reported by time period and for selected demographics in the Radio Market Report. In the top 50 markets, Nielsen Audio uses the Portable People Meter (PPM), which is a wearable device that electronically tracks what consumers listen to on the radio by detecting identification codes embedded in the programming.

There is considerable concern over the validity of the audience measurement numbers gathered by Nielsen, particularly in markets that rely on the diary method. Critics argue that most panelists do not fill out the diaries on a regular basis and often do not provide accurate reports of their listening behavior. The estimates of listenership by demographic groups can also be unreliable as the number of panelists in specific demographic segments is often small and only a few listeners can influence the ratings numbers. The Portable People Meter provides more accurate and reliable measurement and advertisers are pushing Nielsen to expand the use of PPMs beyond the top 50 markets.

18. Discuss how radio stations, as well as advertisers, can deal with the clutter problem on radio and draw attention to their commercials. (LO 11-5) One of the problems facing radio, like most other advertising media, is clutter as most radio stations carry an average of nearly 10 minutes of commercials each hour and during the popular early morning and evening drive times, the amount of commercial time may exceed 12 minutes. Some stations have begun offering ―commercial free‖ blocks of programming time (such as music) but this often results in listeners switching to another station when they begin airing commercials. The clutter problem for radio is compounded by the fact that many people listen to radio in their cars and can easily change channels or may choose to listen to music on their phones rather than radio. Advertisers deal with this problem by trying to develop creative commercials (often by using humor) or may hire a local celebrity to help attract the attention of listeners. Some radio stations have addressed the clutter problem by reducing the number of commercials aired each hour, which is more appealing to both listeners as well as advertisers.

The radio industry is looking for other ways to make radio advertising more valuable to marketers. In 2010 Clear Channel, which is now known as iHeartMedia, Inc., began offering advertisers a new service known as contextual radio ads that can automatically insert radio commercials immediately after specific programming or certain kinds of content, including other ads. A number of companies have been using the service to better target their radio advertising messages. Students should be asked to identify examples of an advertiser who might benefit from the contextual programming service.

CHAPTER 12 EVALUATION OF MEDIA: MAGAZINES AND NEWSPAPERS

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Chapter Overview This chapter continues the analysis of the major media of advertising by examining the two primary types of print media—magazines and newspapers. The characteristics of each medium are examined including the different types of magazines and newspapers and their advantages and limitations as advertising media. Attention is given to audience measurement for magazines and newspapers, their rate structures, and the purchase of advertising space in each. The discussion of each medium concludes with a discussion of future developments that will influence their role and the nature of magazines and newspapers as advertising media.

Learning Objectives 1.

Compare magazines and newspapers in terms of their value as advertising media.

2.

Discuss magazine circulation and readership as well as audience information and research for magazines.

3.

Describe how advertising space is purchased for magazines.

4.

Discuss future trends and developments for magazines and how they will influence their use as an advertising media.

5.

Describe the newspaper audience and audience information and research for newspapers.

6.

Discuss how advertising space is purchased for newspapers and rates are determined.

7.

Discuss future trends and developments for newspapers and how they will influence their use as an advertising media.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Chapter and Lecture Outline I.

INTRODUCTION

Magazines and newspapers have been in existence as advertising media for more than two centuries and until the 1920s were the only major media available to advertisers. Despite the growth and competition of the broadcast media, newspapers and magazines have remained important to both their readers and advertisers. Magazines have become a highly specialized medium that reaches specific target audiences in both consumer and business markets. Newspapers are still one of the primary advertising media in terms of both ad revenue, as well as number of advertisers, and are particularly important to local advertisers.

Advertising revenue is extremely important to magazines and newspapers as few, if any, could survive without it.

II.

THE ROLE AND VALUE OF MAGAZINES AND NEWSPAPERS

Magazine readership has remained strong despite the growth of new media options; over 90 percent of adults 18+ read print and digital editions of magazines, and they read an average of seven issues per month. Additionally, the vast majority of U.S. adults read a newspaper each week across a variety of technology platforms. In a typical week, nearly 70 percent of adults read newspapers in print or online, whereas 59 percent of young adults aged 18 to 24 read newspaper content.

The role of magazines and newspapers differs from broadcast media in that they are high-involvement media, which allow the presentation of detailed information that can be processed at the readers‘ own pace. However, the characteristics of each medium, their advantages and limitations as advertising media vehicles, and their role in the media mix are quite different.

Professor Notes:

III.

MAGAZINES

Magazines serve the educational, informational, and entertainment needs and interests of a wide range of readers in both the consumer and business markets. Magazines rank second only to television as a medium for national advertisers. While some magazines are general mass-appeal publications, most target specific types of audiences in both the consumer and business markets. The wide variety makes magazines an appealing medium to a vast number of advertisers. Although TV accounts for the largest dollar amount of advertising expenditures among national advertisers, more companies advertise in magazines than in any other medium.

A.

Classifications of Magazines—A useful way of classifying magazines is provided by SRDS, the primary reference source on magazines for media planners, which divides the publications into three broad categories based on the audience to which they are directed.

1. Consumer magazines—Those bought by the general public for information and/or entertainment. Kantar Media SRDS divides more than 2,800 domestic consumer magazines into 80 classifications or groupings such as general interest, news, sports, travel, and fitness.

Consumer magazines represent the major portion of the magazine industry in terms of

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

advertising revenue, accounting for nearly two-thirds of all advertising dollars spent in magazines.

Farm publications—The consumer SRDS category consists of magazines directed to farmers and their families. There are approximately 300 publications targeted to nearly every possible type of farming or agricultural interest. These are broken down into nine classifications ranging from general-interest magazines for all types of farmers to those in specialized agricultural areas. Farm publications are not classified with business publications because historically farms were not perceived as businesses.

2. Business and health care publications—These are magazines or trade journals published for specific businesses, industries, or occupations. Kantar Media SRDS breaks down nearly 5,000 print and 4,800 digital U.S. magazines and trade journals into nearly 200 market classifications. There are also approximately 2,700 publications in the health care category, of which 1,225 are digital. Major categories of business publications include those directed to specific professional groups, industrial magazines directed to various manufacturing and production industries, trade magazines, and general-business publications.

B.

Advantages of Magazines 1. Selectivity—One of the main advantages of using magazines as an advertising medium is their selectivity, or ability to reach a specific target audience. Most magazines are published for special interest groups or activities. Magazines also offer selectivity through specific demographic and geographic editions that they publish. Thus, magazines can play an important role in the media plan for companies that want to reach a specific target market.

Magazines also offer demographic selectivity through special editions and geographic selectivity through purchasing ad space in specific geographic editions of national or regional magazines.

2. Reproduction quality—One of the most valued attributes of magazine advertising is the reproduction quality of the ads. Magazines are generally printed on high-quality paper stock and use printing processes that provide excellent reproduction, in black and white or color.

The reproduction quality of magazines provides an opportunity for innovative creative work by advertising agencies, which is also being done in digital versions of magazines as well.

3. Creative flexibility—Some magazines offer a variety of special options that can enhance the creative appeal of the ad and increase attention and readership. Examples include gatefolds, which enable advertisers to make a striking presentation by using a third page that folds out and gives the ad an extra-large spread; bleed pages, which are those where the advertisement extends all the way to the edge of a page with no white space around the ad; inserts; pop-ups; and creative space buys such as half or quarter page ads.

4. Permanence—Magazines are often kept for reference and/or read over several days giving them a longer shelf life than other media. One benefit of the longer life of magazines is that reading occurs at a less hurried pace and there is more opportunity to examine ads in considerable detail. Studies have found that nearly 75 percent of consumers retain magazines for future reference.

5. Prestige—Companies whose products rely heavily on perceived quality, reputation, and/or image often buy space in prestigious publications with high-quality editorial content whose consumers have a high level of interest in the advertising pages. While most media planners recognize that the environment created by a magazine is important, it can be difficult to

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

identify it. Subjective estimates based on media planners‘ experience are often used to assess a magazine‘s prestige, as are objective measures such as reader opinion surveys.

6. Consumer receptivity and engagement—Magazines are generally purchased because the information they contain interests the reader, and ads provide additional information that may be of value in making a purchase decision. Consumers consider magazines to be the primary source of information for a variety of products and services and they are very receptive to advertising in magazines. Media planners recognize that one of the major advantages of advertising in magazines is the ability of the medium to engage readers and hold their attention. Research has shown that engagement with an advertising medium is important because it is directly related to increased ad recall and specific actions taken such as searching for additional information about an advertiser‘s brand, visiting its website, saving an ad for future reference, and purchasing a product or service, as well as recommending it to others.

7. Services—Some magazines have merchandising staff that call on trade intermediaries like retailers to let them know a product is being advertised. Magazines also offer services such as split runs whereby two or more versions of an ad are printed in alternate copies of a particular issue of a magazine.

C.

Disadvantages of Magazines 1. Costs—The absolute cost of advertising in large mass-circulation magazines like Reader’s Digest, Time, or People can be very expensive, particularly for popular positions such as back covers or inside front covers. However, like any medium, magazines are usually evaluated on a relative cost perspective using cost per thousand (CPM) or target CPM measures, which were discussed in Chapter 10.

2. Limited reach and frequency—Magazines are generally not as effective as other media in offering reach and frequency. The percentage of adults reading any individual publication tends to be much smaller, so magazines have a thin penetration of households. Thus, companies who want to reach mass markets have to buy space in a number of magazines.

3. Long lead time—Most major publications have a 30- to a 60-day lead time, which means space must be purchased and the ad must be prepared well in advance of the actual publication date. However, with improvements in technology such as the use of electronic images, some magazines will accept ads with a much shorter lead-time.

4. Clutter and competition—Clutter is a problem for magazines as the average consumer magazine contains ads on 38 percent of its pages, while some magazines contain ad content on more than half of their pages. The clutter problem for magazines is something of a paradox: the more successful a magazine becomes, the more advertising pages it attracts, which leads to greater clutter. Clutter is often less of a problem for magazines versus other media since consumers tend to be more receptive and tolerant of ads. They also can control their exposure to a magazine ad simply by turning the page. Some advertisers combat this by creating their own custom magazines to sidestep the advertising clutter problem as well as to have control over editorial content.

McGraw-Hill Connect ®: Differentiating Print Media

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Type of Activity: Click and Drag Activity Summary: In this activity, students will match the type of magazine or newspaper with the relevant description.

Activity Learning Objectives: 12-01 Compare magazines and newspapers in terms of their value as advertising media.

12-04 Discuss future trends and developments for magazines and how they will influence their use as an advertising media.

Concept Review: The role of magazines and newspapers in the advertiser's media plan differs from that of the broadcast media because they allow the presentation of detailed information that can be processed at the reader's own pace. There are several types of magazines and newspapers each with different values as an advertising medium. The media research company Kantar SRDS, the primary reference source on periodicals for media planners, divides magazines into three broad categories based on the audience to which they are directed: consumer (which include farm), health care, and business publications. The vast majority of newspapers are daily publications serving a local community. However, weekly, national, and special-audience newspapers have special characteristics that can be valuable to advertisers. The ads appearing in newspapers can also be divided into different categories. The major types of newspaper advertising are display and classified. Other special types of ads and preprinted inserts also appear in newspapers.

Difficulty: 2 Medium Bloom‘s: Understand AACSB: Analytical Thinking

D.

Magazine Circulation and Readership—Two of the most important considerations in deciding whether to utilize a magazine in the media plan are the size and characteristics of the audience reached by the publication. Important considerations include the circulation of the publication as well as its total readership.

1. Circulation—Circulation figures represent the number of individuals who either receive a publication through subscription or store purchase. The number of copies distributed to original subscribers or purchasers is known as primary circulation and is used as the basis for the magazine‘s rate structure. Many publications base their rates on guaranteed circulation and provide rebates if the number of delivered magazines fall below the guarantee. Many publishers became unhappy with guaranteed circulation since it requires them to provide refunds if guarantees are not met but results in a bonus for advertisers when circulation exceeds the guarantee.

2. Circulation verification—These services are provided by several companies to ensure circulation figures for magazines are accurate. This is a very important service since circulation figures are the basis for magazine advertising rates. Consumer magazines and farm publications are audited by the Alliance for Audited Media (formerly known as the Audit Bureau of Circulations) while certain business publications are audited by the Business Publications Audit (BPA) of Circulation. Many business magazines are published on a

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

controlled-circulation basis, which means that copies are sent (usually free) to individuals the publisher believes can help build an audience and have influence on a company‘s purchase decisions. Circulation verification services provide media planners with reliable figures regarding the size and distribution of a magazine‘s circulation that help them evaluate its worth as a media vehicle.

3. Readership and total audience—In addition to primary circulation figures, advertisers may be interested in the number of people that a publication reaches as a result of secondary or passalong readership, which occurs when the primary subscriber gives a magazine to another person or when the magazine is read in a doctor‘s office, beauty salon, etc. Total audience/ readership of a magazine can be determined by taking the readers per copy (primary and secondary) and multiplying this figure by the circulation of an average issue.

E.

Audience Information and Research for Magazines—Media planners are interested in the match between a magazine‘s readers and the advertiser‘s target audience. Information on readers' demographic, lifestyle, and product usage characteristics are available from studies conducted by the magazines themselves as well as from syndicated research studies. The primary sources of information concerning magazine audiences are: ●

SRDS Consumer Media Advertising Source

●

Experian Simmons

●

GfK Mediamark Research & Intelligence (GfK MRI)

These studies provide a broad range of information on the audiences of major national and regional magazines including demographic, lifestyle characteristics, and product purchase and usage data. Audience information for business publications is generally more limited than for consumer magazines.

McGraw-Hill Connect ®: IMC Manager’s Evaluation of Magazines and Newspapers Type of Activity: Case Analysis Activity Summary: This exercise provides students with a case of an IMC manager trying to determine how to allocate funds to different print media. Students are then asked to identify why an IMC manager would choose one media over another.

Activity Learning Objectives: 12-01 Compare magazines and newspapers in terms of their value as advertising media.

12-03 Describe how advertising space is purchased for magazines 12-04 Discuss future trends and developments for magazines and how they will influence their use as an advertising media.

Concept Review:

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Instructors should review the advantages and limitations of newspapers and magazines, which are discussed throughout Chapter 12.

Difficulty: 2 Medium Bloom‘s: Understand AACSB: Analytical Thinking

McGraw-Hill Connect ®: Characteristics of Print Media Type of Activity: Click and Drag Activity Summary: In this activity, students will match the print media, magazines or newspapers, with the advantages and limitations associated with advertising in each.

Activity Learning Objectives: 12-01 Compare magazines and newspapers in terms of their value as advertising media.

12-04 Discuss future trends and developments for magazines and how they will influence their use as an advertising media.

Concept Review: Magazines and newspapers, the two major forms of print media, play an important role in the media plans and strategy of many advertisers. Trends toward market segmentation and regional marketing are prompting many advertisers to make more use of newspapers and magazines. Both magazines and newspapers are working to improve the quality of their circulation bases, offer database marketing services, and initiate cross-media deals. There are specific advantages and limitations unique to either magazine or newspaper advertising, which are important in helping marketers, decide which form of print media advertising to choose.

Difficulty: 1 Easy Bloom‘s: Understand AACSB: Analytical Thinking

McGraw-Hill Connect ®: Features of Newspapers Type of Activity: Matching Activity Summary: In this activity, students are provided with a case about a fictitious automobile dealership. They are asked to match the correct feature of the medium with the descriptions of the newspaper as a tool for the Kia dealership.

Activity Learning Objectives:

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

12-05 Describe the newspaper audience and audience information and research for newspapers.

12-06 Discuss how advertising space is purchased for newspapers and rates are determined.

12-07 Discuss future trends and developments for newspapers and how they will influence their use as an advertising media.

Concept Review: This is a good opportunity to review the advantages and disadvantages of newspapers. These include preferred position rates available, audience data is provided through reliable sources, differing local and general rates, and disadvantages such as declining readership and clutter.

Difficulty: 1 Easy Bloom‘s: Apply AACSB: Analytical Thinking

F.

Purchasing Magazine Advertising Space 1. Cost elements—While magazine rates are primarily a function of the circulation and readership of the publication, rates will vary in response to a number of other variables including size of the ad, position, particular editions chosen (geographic, demographic), any special mechanical or production requirements and the number and frequency of insertion.

An important consideration for advertisers when buying space in a magazine is whether they want some type of preferred placement or pay for a run-of-book ad that can appear anywhere in the magazine, at the discretion of the publisher. There are a few preferred positions magazines make available to advertisers including first cover (outside front), second cover (inside front), third cover (inside back), and fourth cover (outside back), which are considered to be very desirable positions in the magazine, particularly the back cover for which there is often a waiting list.

Advertising space is generally sold based on space units such as full page, half page and quarter page, although some publications quote rates based on column inches. Ads can be produced in black and white, black and white plus one color, or four colors. Magazine networks offer the advertiser the opportunity to buy space in a group of publications in a package deal. Exhibit 12-14 shows an ad promoting the Ivy League Magazine Network, which is a consortium of alumni magazines for Ivy Leagues schools along with Stanford and the University of Chicago. Rate comparisons for magazines are generally made based on the cost per thousand (CPM) criterion along with targeted CPMs.

G.

The Future for Magazines—Many publications have seen their number of advertising pages decline and have found it difficult to raise rates to offset the reduction in ad pages. And while advertising revenue has been decreasing, publishers‘ other major revenue stream, circulation, has also been declining for most magazines. Magazines are also facing challenges such as rising costs of ink and paper and increases in postal rates. They also face strong competition from other media such as TV, Internet, social media, and direct mail.

1. Stronger editorial platforms—Magazines with strong editorial platforms that appeal to the interests, lifestyles, and demographics of consumers and market trends will have the best chance of attracting readers and advertisers. Fashion magazines and lifestyle publications

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

targeting women have been experiencing strong growth in circulation and advertising revenue, as are well-targeted men‘s publications.

2. Circulation management—Circulation maintenance and attempts to increase circulation have become major challenges in the magazine publishing industry. Circulation is the second major source of revenue for most publications, and they must carefully consider the costs of attracting and maintaining additional readers or subscribers. Some publications have begun selling magazine subscriptions on Facebook by allowing users of the social media site to expand blurbs of magazine content that are common in news feeds into full articles that contain ads as well as options to subscribe.

Digital magazines—Many magazines are keeping pace with the digital revolution and the continuing consumer interest in technology by making their publications available online.

They can integrate animation, video, audio, graphics, and text to provide an interactive medium. As more magazines become available online, the industry will have to address important issues regarding audience measurement and readers‘ exposure to and interactions with online advertising. Marketers are also recognizing that there are opportunities to integrate their advertising in online publications with the environment and editorial content by using native advertising, which is an ad that takes the look and feel of the surrounding content. The magazine industry recognizes that it must continue to respond to the changes in media consumption patterns and the challenges it faces as more marketers shift their advertising monies to digital. However, publishers still feel there are inherent advantages of traditional print magazines to advertisers and have gone on the offensive to promote them.

Professor Notes:

IV.

NEWSPAPERS

Newspapers are the second major form of print media and represent the largest of all advertising media in terms of total advertising volume. In 2018, an estimated $16 billion was spent on newspaper advertising which represents about 8 percent of the total advertising expenditures in the United States. Newspapers are an especially important advertising medium to local advertisers such as retailers. However, newspapers can also be a valuable medium to national advertisers as well.

A.

Types of Newspapers—The vast majority of newspapers are daily publications serving a local community. However, there are other types of newspapers with special characteristics that make them valuable to advertisers. Classifications of newspapers include: 1. Daily newspapers—Published each weekday and found in larger cities and towns across the country. Daily newspapers can further be classified as morning (70 percent) and evening (30 percent). Many daily newspapers also publish Sunday editions.

2. Weekly newspapers—Most weekly newspapers originate in small towns or suburbs where the volume of news and advertising is not adequate to support a daily paper. Weeklies appeal primarily to local advertisers in the community because of their limited geographic focus.

3. National newspapers—Newspapers in this with national circulation including The Wall Street Journal, The New York Times, and USA Today. National newspapers appeal primarily to large national and regional advertisers who use specific geographic editions.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

4. Special-audience newspapers—There are a variety of papers that offer specialized editorial content and target specific groups. Advertising Age and Marketing News are examples of special-audience newspaper as are college newspapers. Newspapers targeting various religious groups compose another large class of special-interest papers.

5. Newspaper supplements—Although not a category of newspapers per se, many papers include magazine type supplements, primarily in their Sunday editions. These include syndicated magazines such as Parade as well as local supplements produced and distributed by the paper itself.

B.

Types of Newspaper Advertising—Advertising in newspapers can be divided into different categories which include: 1. Display advertising—Display advertising is found throughout the paper and generally use illustrations, headlines, white space and other visuals in addition to copy text. The two types of display advertising in newspapers are local and national (general) are discussed in the text.

2. Classified advertising—Classified advertising is arranged under subheads according to the product, service, or offering being advertised and run in the classified section of the newspaper. Major categories include employment, real estate, and automotive. Many papers have moved classified ads online, no longer publishing in their print editions or doing so sparingly.

3. Special ads and inserts—Special ads in newspapers include a variety of governmental and financial reports and notices and public notices. Preprinted inserts do not appear in the paper itself but are printed by the advertiser and then distributed with the newspaper. These include circulars, catalogs, brochures, and free standing inserts (FSIs), which are popular for distributing coupons.

C.

Advantages of Newspapers 1. Market penetration—In most areas, 40 percent or more of households read a daily newspaper, and the reach figure may exceed 50 percent among households with higher incomes and education levels.

2. Flexibility—Newspapers are flexible in terms of requirements for producing and running the ads and from the creative options they make available to advertisers.

3. Geographic selectivity—Advertisers can vary their coverage by choosing a paper that reaches the areas with the greatest sales potential. Most major newspapers offer advertisers various geographic or zone editions within their market. Local advertisers are also very interested in the geographic selectivity of newspapers.

4. Reader involvement and acceptance—An important feature of newspapers is consumers‘ level of acceptance and involvement with the paper, including the ads it contains. Consumers are generally very familiar with the various sections of the newspaper and knowledgeable about the types of ads they contain. Many consumers actually purchase a newspaper because of the advertising it contains. Consumers use retail ads to determine product prices and availability and to see who is having a sale.

5. Services offered—Many newspapers offer merchandising services and programs to manufacturers that make the trade aware of ads being run for the company‘s product and help convince local retailers they should stock, display and promote the item. Many newspapers are also excellent sources of local market information through their knowledge of market

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

conditions and research like readership studies, consumer surveys, and various reports and market studies. Newspapers can also assist small companies through free copywriting and art services. Small advertisers without an agency or advertising department often rely on the newspaper to help them write and produce their ads.

D.

Limitations of Newspapers 1. Poor reproduction—The coarse paper used for newspapers, absence of color, and the lack of time papers has available to achieve high-quality reproduction limits the quality of most newspaper ads. Many newspapers are now offering four-color ads but advertisers must pay a premium for them. Generally, if the visual appearance of the product is important, the advertiser does not tend to rely on newspaper ads.

2. Short life span—Because a newspaper is generally kept for less than a day, an ad is unlikely to have any impact beyond the day of publication and repeat exposure is unlikely. Consumers also spend just a short amount of time with the newspaper and may not even open certain sections.

3. Lack of selectivity—While newspapers can offer advertisers geographic selectivity, they are generally not a selective medium in terms of demographics or lifestyle characteristics. There is some selectivity available, however, with regard to the type of consumers who read various sections of the newspaper such as sports, business, entertainment, and travel.

4. Clutter—Many newspapers are now offering advertisers the opportunity to use innovative shape-based ads that use unconventional sizes and formats as those shown in Exhibit 12-24, which are offered by the Los Angeles Times.

E.

The Newspaper Audience—As with any medium, the media planner must understand the size and characteristics of the audience reached by a newspaper. Basic sources of information concerning the audience size of newspapers come from circulation figures available on newspaper rate cards, on publisher‘s statements, or through SRDS‘s Newspaper Advertising Source. Newspaper circulation figures are generally reported for total circulation and three additional categories including city zone, the retail-trading zone, and all other areas. National advertisers often buy newspaper space on the basis of the size of the market area they cover.

1. Audience information—Circulation figures provide basic data for assessing newspaper audience size and their ability to cover various market areas. However, the media planner also wants to match the characteristics of a newspaper‘s readers with those of the advertiser‘s target audience. Information on the circulation, characteristics, and ad rates are available from SRDS Newspaper Advertising Source. Information on audience size and characteristics are available from commercial research services such as Experian Simmons and GfK Mediamark Research, Inc., as well as through studies conducted by the papers themselves.

F.

Purchasing Newspaper Space—The cost of advertising space in newspapers depends not only on the paper‘s circulation but also on factors such as premium charges for color or special sections as well as discounts available. Rates paid for newspaper space also differ for national versus local advertisers.

1. General versus local rates—General advertising rates apply to display advertisers outside the newspapers designated market area or to any classification deemed by the publisher to be ―general‖ in nature. Retail or local advertising rates apply to advertisers that conduct business or sell goods or services within the DMA. The rates paid by general advertisers are, on average, 75 percent higher than those paid by local advertisers. Newspapers offer several

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

reasons for the rate differential including added costs of serving general advertisers, the method by which general advertisers purchase ad space, and the inelastic nature of demand for national advertising space. National advertisers who constitute most of the companies paying general rates do not view these arguments as valid justification for the rate differential charged by newspapers. Many marketers sidestep the higher rates by channeling their newspaper ads through special category plans, cooperative advertising deals with retailers and local dealers and distributors.

2. Rate structures—While the column inch and standard advertising unit (SAU) are used for determining basic newspaper advertising rates, there are other options and factors which must be considered. Mention should be made of flat rates versus open-rate structures, run-ofpaper (ROP) versus preferred position rates, and combination rates for using several newspapers as a group.

G.

The Future for Newspapers—Newspapers remain an important advertising medium; however, advertising revenue for traditional print papers has declined dramatically over the past several years. Some specific issues regarding the future of newspapers that should be discussed include: 1. Competition from other media—Newspapers will continue to battle for advertising dollars from national advertisers as problems with reproduction quality and the rate differential continue. Newspapers are concerned with competition from other media and the increasing potential to lose advertising dollars to digital media. Local radio and television stations (particularly cable) are also pursuing local advertisers who traditionally relied heavily on newspaper advertising.

2. Circulation—Most of the major newspapers in the United States have been experiencing a decline in circulation and are seeking ways to respond to the problem, such as by emphasizing readership measures and developing online versions of their papers. Circulation revenue for newspapers has held steady over the past few years, as many publishers are pursuing a ―subscription-first model‖ by growing the number of subscribers rather than focusing on advertising revenue. However, gains in circulation revenue have not been nearly enough to make up for losses in advertising revenue—a pattern that holds true even at the large newspapers and major chains.

3. Attracting and retaining readers—The decline in readership of newspapers can be attributed to the fast-paced, time-poor lifestyle of the modern, dual-income household and popularity of TV and Internet viewing options. Of particular concern to publishers is the decline in newspaper readership among important market segments such as women and young adults.

H.

Online Delivery and Multiple Platforms—As discussed in Digital and Social Media Perspective 12–2, the digital transformation of media has hit the newspaper industry particularly hard and resulted in newspaper publishers broadening their portfolios well beyond the traditional print editions. Nearly every major newspaper now has a website, and most make their papers available online and through apps for mobile devices. The number of daily and weekly U.S. newspapers available online increased from less than 100 in 1995 to more than 3,200 in 2019. The digital newspaper audience increased from 70 million unique users per month in 2007 to just over 200 million per month, with half of the newspaper digital audience composed of those using mobile devices (smartphones and tablets) to access newspaper content.

Professor Notes:

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Teaching Suggestions This chapter is designed to provide the student with a general understanding of the two major types of print media: magazines and newspapers. As with television and radio, it is important for students to understand the general characteristics of magazines and newspapers including the different types or classifications of each medium, their specific advantages and limitations as advertising media, how readership is measured, how rates are determined, and how advertising space is purchased. The instructor should call students‘ attention to the wide variety of magazines available and their ability to reach nearly every consumer interest, lifestyle, and activity as well as most businesses. You might ask your students if there is any segment of the consumer or business market that does not have one or more magazines targeted towards it. One interesting point of discussion is whether there are too many magazines on the market and whether it is possible for the highly specialized publications to survive. A very interesting website that you may want to visit for some interesting information on magazines is that of the Association of Magazine media (formerly known as the Magazine Publishers of America [MPA]). Their site can be found at www.magazine.org.

With regard to newspapers, it is important to cover the challenges facing the industry which has seen its total advertising revenue decline dramatically over the past several years. Circulation and readership of traditional newspapers continues to decline in most major markets and publishers are now making their papers available online to retain readers and ad revenue. Newspapers are likely to continue to be an important advertising medium for local advertisers and attention might be given to how national advertisers can be encouraged to allocate more of their budgets to newspapers. Attention should also be given to the problem of declining newspaper readership, particularly since young people spend more time online and are less likely to read a newspaper. You might ask students how many of them read a newspaper on a daily basis and what particular sections they read. It is likely that many of them do not read a newspaper regularly. The implications for advertisers can be discussed. The Newspaper Media Alliance also has an excellent website that contains a great deal of information that can be helpful in discussing trends and development affecting newspapers, both in general and as an advertising medium.

The site can be found at www.newsmediaalliance.org.

Answers to Discussion Questions 1. The chapter opener discusses the challenges facing the magazine industry and how they have affected iconic publications such as Time, Fortune, and Sports Illustrated. Discuss the challenges facing the magazine industry. Do you think magazines can survive the changes occurring in the media industry? (LO 12-1, 12-4) The magazine industry is no longer in its glory days. Some of the top magazines have seen declining circulation rates and revenue year after year. One of the problems facing publishers is that magazine ad spending by a number of the largest advertisers has also been declining. Year after year, the major advertisers have spent significantly less on magazine ads. In addition to advertisers leaving, readers are also leaving magazines behind. The combined print and digital audience for all magazines has remained flat while the audience for men‘s and women‘s lifestyle magazines has been declining, as has the number of readers of pop culture and entertainment publications. While magazines have seen significant declines, some publishers are making swift changes to make up lost revenue from advertising. Some of these strategies include lowering the frequency of publication, increasing quality of print ads, and catering to very niche audiences. These new strategies coupled with the advantages print media have to offer will likely sustain the magazine industry for the near future.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

2. Discuss the role of magazines as part of an advertiser’s media strategy. What are the advantages and limitations of magazines? (LO 12-1, 12-2) Traditional print magazines play an important role as advertising media in an integrated marketing communications program. They allow the presentation of detailed information that can be processed at the receiver‘s own pace whereas TV and radio are externally paced media, which means the receiver cannot control the rate at which the information is processed. Magazines are more suitable than the broadcast media for delivering detailed ads with a great deal of information or visuals that the reader needs time to study or examine. However, magazines are not as effective as television for reaching mass audiences and they do not offer advertisers the same creative options that are available through TV commercials.

There are numerous advantages of magazines as advertising media. These include their selectivity or ability to reach specific target audiences; reproduction quality; creative flexibility in terms of the type, size, and placement of advertising material; permanence or long life span; the prestige associated with advertising in some publications; consumer receptivity to and involvement with magazine advertising; and the special services offered by some publications. Limitations of magazines include the high costs for advertising in some publications, the limited reach and frequency of magazines, the long lead-time required to place an ad, and the high clutter level in many magazines, which makes it difficult for an ad to be noticed and read.

3. Find an example of a business or health care magazine and analyze the market that reads this publication. Discuss the types of companies that might advertise in this magazine. (LO 12-1, 122) One example of a healthcare magazine is Dynamic Chiropractor. This magazine has a print and digital version. The site describes that the target audience or the readers of the publication are ―welleducated, influential buyers in their professions and households. Our brands and our services provide them with the information they need to make important purchasing decisions.‖ The site also addresses their advertisers saying that they, ―...deliver access to the content-driven environment necessary to reach and engage their most sought after audiences, helping them drive sales growth for their companies.‖ It is likely that certain medication brands would advertise in the publication as well as producers and distributors of certain medical equipment. Additionally, journals might advertise in the magazine to solicit publication submissions from readers.

4. If you were purchasing magazine advertising space for a marketer of running shoes such as Nike, ASICS, or New Balance, what factors would you consider? Would your media plan be limited to running magazines or would you run ads in other types of publications? Explain. (LO 12-3, 12-5) In purchasing magazine space to advertise running shoes, the media planner would obviously want to know what publications are best suited for reaching runners and their advertising space rates.

Consideration should also be given to the amount of advertising for running equipment that appears in these publications and the problem of getting the company‘s ad noticed among all the competing ads.

Many marketers of running shoes limit their advertising to publications that focus specifically on this market such as Runner’s World since virtually all of the readers of these publications are runners and there would be very little, if any, wasted circulation. They might also advertise in magazines that reach members of running associations. Consideration also must be given to the number of runners who may be viable prospects for running shoes but do not read any of these running publications. To broaden its reach, the company might want to look at other magazines that reach runners such as general sports publications (e.g., Sports Illustrated or ESPN The Magazine), travel magazines, business magazines, or other publications that reach this age and lifestyle group. A problem marketers

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

face in advertising in these general publications is that of wasted coverage as many of the readers may not be runners. Thus, advertising in general sports, business, or travel magazines may not be as costeffective as the more narrowly targeted running publications.

5. What are the different factors advertisers must consider in purchasing advertising space in magazines and newspapers? (LO 12-3, 12-6) For magazines, advertisers must consider the cost of the type of ad they want to place and where they want to place it. Another important consideration for advertisers considering magazines is their circulation of the publication or the number of individuals who receive a publication through subscription or store purchase. They are also concerned with readership and total audience of the magazine. They would need to know how many people are reading and characteristics of those audience members. Advertisers in newspapers should also consider circulation numbers and the characteristics of their readers. Additionally, they should consider the geographic reach of the newspaper.

6. The Association for Magazine Media promotes the value of advertising in traditional print magazines by citing research showing that print advertising is superior to online ads with regard to its ability to deliver a reading experience that supports comprehension of and connection with an advertiser’s message. Discuss some of the reasons why print ads may be superior to online ads. (LO 12-4) Many print ads use strong visual images, catchy headlines, or some of the creative techniques discussed earlier to grab the interest of magazine readers. The reproduction quality of most magazines is far superior to that offered by the other major print medium of newspapers, particularly when color is needed. The use of color has become a virtual necessity in most product categories, and more than two-thirds of all magazine ads now use color. The excellent reproduction quality of magazines provides the opportunity for innovative creative work by agencies. Advertisers generally prefer color ads because they have greater visual impact and are superior for attracting and holding attention.

Roper Starch Worldwide analyzed the effect of various factors on the readership of magazine ads.

The ―noted‖ scores (the percentage of readers who remember seeing the ad in a publication they read) are anywhere from 6 to 59 percent higher for a four-color full-page ad than for a black-and-white ad, depending on the product category. ―Read-most‖ scores (the percentage who say they read more than half of the copy of an ad) are also higher for four-color versus black-and-white ads, by about 25 percent on average. Other studies have examined the impact of size and color and found that a fourcolor spread (two facing pages) outperforms a one-page color ad by 30 percent and a black-and-white spread by 35 percent in terms of ad recall. Ads requiring special mechanical production such as bleed pages or inserts may also cost extra.

7. Discuss the digital disruption that is impacting the traditional print media of newspapers and magazines. Do you think magazine and newspaper publications can respond to these changes and attract and retain readers and in turn advertisers? (LO 12-1, LO 12-7) The increasing use of mobile devices such as smartphones and tablets to access the Internet has had a major impact on traditional print media. One of the major problems facing the print media is that more consumers are now going online to get their news and information as well as to read magazines and newspapers. Moreover, most are unwilling to pay for online subscriptions to digital versions of magazines and newspapers. Some major publications, such as The Wall Street Journal, The New York Times, and The Economist have been successful in creating paywalls that require subscriptions to access digital content. However, since many newspapers and magazines have been unable to get readers to pay for online subscription, they are not getting an important source of revenue. Moreover, the rates for banners and other forms of online advertising they sell to marketers cannot match what

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

they can charge for traditional print advertising, which is also resulting in revenue reductions. It should be noted that online ad revenue is based on page views, which means that publishers attempting to charge for access run the risk of reducing web traffic, which would be self-defeating.

Newspapers have also been impacted by online sites that have taken away much of their revenue from classified advertising in categories such as automobiles, real estate, rentals, and employment. The newspaper industry‘s initial response to the digital disruption was to put their content online free, which lead to an increase in the number of digital readers. However, as noted above, revenue from online advertising has not been able to compensate for the decline in monies received for print ads as online advertising rates are significantly lower. Moreover, newspapers must compete against search advertising sites such as Google, Yahoo, and Bing as well as social media sites such as Facebook and YouTube that offer advertisers very sophisticated ad-targeting techniques. Many newspaper publishers are now implementing paywalls and charging for their digital editions as well as transforming their business models to generate revenue from new products and services.

Magazines and newspapers still play an important role in the media strategy of many advertisers as they have a number of important characteristics, which they must continue to promote. Print media allow the presentation of detailed information that can be processed at the receiver‘s own pace, whereas TV and radio are externally paced media which means the receiver cannot control the rate at which the information is processed. Magazines offer excellent reproduction quality and high selectivity as they reach very targeted audiences. Newspapers are important to both national and local advertisers. They are often used to reach consumers who are looking for information as to where they might purchase a product locally and when it might be on sale at a local retailer. They have a number of advantages that make them popular among both local and national advertisers. These include their extensive penetration or market coverage, their flexibility in terms of production requirements and short closing times, the geographic or territorial selectivity of newspapers, the high level of involvement and acceptance consumers have with newspapers and the advertisements therein, and the valuable services many papers offer. However, both of the major print media may find it difficult to survive in the future unless they are able to adapt to the new digital world and find ways to charge for their content.

8. Discuss some of the reasons why marketers advertise in college newspapers. Analyze the types of companies that advertise in the newspaper published by your university. (LO 12-1, LO 12-3) Many companies are now advertising in college newspapers because they view them as an excellent way to reach a very coveted but elusive target market. More than 17 million full- and part-time students (undergraduate and graduate) are enrolled in U.S. colleges and universities and they spend an estimated $200 billion a year on a variety of products and services. Moreover, studies show that students read college newspapers, as 76 percent of full-time students read at least one of the last five issues of their school paper and 38 percent of students regularly read the online edition. College students are a very attractive demographic group that spends a lot of money for various products and services including clothing, computers, mobile phones, iPads, and other electronic products as well as entertainment. Local merchants and retailers in college towns also find collegiate newspapers a very effective way to target students and attract their business. Students should be asked to analyze the companies that advertise in the newspaper published by their school and be encouraged to classify these advertisers by type of product or services and whether the advertiser is a local, regional, or national company.

9. What are the major challenges facing the newspaper industry and the use of newspapers as advertising medium? How can newspapers respond to these challenges? (LO 12-5, 12-7)

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Newspapers face challenges from other media such as direct mail, television, and the Internet. Many advertisers are already spending more of their media budgets online as they can target their messages more precisely through digital media. Newspapers also face challenges from local cable stations, which are attracting more advertising revenue from local advertisers such as retailers. The growth of the Internet is a major concern for newspapers as consumers are spending more and more time online, which means they have less time available to read newspapers and magazines. The Internet has become an important source of information for many purchases and competes directly against magazines and newspapers, which have traditionally played this role. More people are spending time surfing the Internet and on social media, which means they may be spending less time reading magazines and newspapers. People only have so much time available for leisure activities such as reading or watching TV and the Internet is likely to cannibalize some of the time that might have been spent reading a magazine or newspaper. Newspapers are responding to this challenge by making their publications available online.

Newspapers are likely to remain an important advertising medium in the future, particularly for local advertisers. However, newspapers‘ battle to win more ad dollars from national advertisers will continue to present a challenge. Newspapers must also continue to expand services and efforts to both local and national advertisers to encourage them to continue to use the paper as an advertising medium. Cross-media buys are another area where newspapers might focus their efforts to help increase their advertising revenue. Newspapers can also take advantage of their distribution system and the fact that they reach a large number of households. Many papers are collecting information from their readers and building databases that can be made available to marketers who want to target consumers with direct-marketing efforts.

Newspapers are dealing with the problem of declining readership by making their papers more interesting as well as faster and easier to read. Many papers are using better graphics and shorter articles to attract readers and including special sections on travel, lifestyle, business, and other topics that will appeal to their readers.

10. What are some of the advantages online magazines and newspapers offer for advertisers? Find the online media kit of a magazine or newspaper and analyze how the publisher is promoting the digital edition to prospective advertisers. (LO 12-4, 12-7) Many magazines and newspapers are keeping pace with the digital revolution by making their publications available online. They are doing so as consumers‘ media consumption patterns show they are spending more time online than with traditional media. Younger consumers in particular spend a great deal of time surfing the Internet and are very comfortable reading magazines and newspapers online rather than in traditional print form. Some of these online readers are crossover users who read both the print and online versions, which expands the overall audience for the magazine or newspaper. However, in many cases, the online readers are choosing to read the publication online as they can get the same information as well as additional stories of interest to them. Magazine publishers in particular have to decide if they want the online version of their publication to mirror what is in print to build the overall brand or make the online version different.

Many publishers are viewing the online version of their magazines and newspaper as an opportunity to attract more advertising as they can provide marketers with a variety of advertising options including video and banner ads, sponsorships, and other interactive based tools. Magazine and newspaper publishers recognize more and more consumers prefer to consume media online and thus they are going to have to adapt their publications to the online environment if they are to survive.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Additional Discussion Questions (Not in text) 11. Discuss how advertisers deal with the clutter problem in both magazines and newspapers.

Explain why advertisers of products such as cosmetics or women’s clothing would choose to advertise in a publication such as Vogue or Elle, which devote most of their pages to advertising rather than articles. (LO 12-1, LO 12-2) Clutter is a serious problem in both magazines and newspapers as the ratio of advertising to editorial content is very high in both. The main way for advertisers to deal with the clutter problem is through creative advertising and space buys. Ads with strong visual images, catchy headlines and copy, or very creative approaches such as ―pop-ups,‖ gatefolds, or special inserts are ways of breaking through the clutter. Creative space buys such as ―island ads‖ or consecutive page space buys may also help ads be noticed. Of course, it is also important to remember the basic advertising principle of developing an ad that offers a benefit or promise to the readers and invites them to explore it further.

The clutter level that results from the high number of advertising pages in magazines such as Vogue or Elle is clearly a problem for advertisers. However, they must weigh the clutter problem against the fact that women are very likely to be receptive to ads for cosmetics or clothes in these publications. In fact, one might argue that one of the reasons women buy fashion magazines such as Vogue or Elle is to see the ads. For example, clothing ads give provide some insight into new styles and fashions and will be of great interest to many of the magazine readers. Advertisers will tolerate the high number of ads in these publications because they create a very favorable environment that includes high-quality photography and artwork as well as articles that are of interest to women.

12. Why are young males such a difficult market to reach through magazines? What types of magazines might be effective in reaching the young male market? (LO 12-1, LO 12-2) The teen male market is a very difficult market segment to reach through magazines, as this group spends a lot of their free time socializing with friends on social media, listening to music, watching television, and surfing the Internet. Many older teens also have a part-time job, which means they have less free time to devote to reading magazines. Another reason for the low readership of magazines among young males is that there really are not that many publications that are of interest to this group. Older teens may be interested in some of the ―lad mags‖ such as Maxim, as these publications do cover many of the things of interest to teenage boys. Several magazines published by TransWorld Media such as Skateboarding, Surf, Motocross, and ridebmx have also been successful in reaching young males as their editorial content deals with extreme sports which are of interest to many young males today. Advertisers would like to see more magazines that are successful in attracting young male readers and provide them with more media opportunities to reach this elusive market segment.

13. Choose a specific target market that an advertiser might want to reach. Discuss how magazines and/or newspapers could be used to reach this particular market segment in a cost-effective manner. (LO 12-1) First, it should be noted that selectivity is an inherent advantage of advertising in many magazines.

Most magazines target special-interest groups and allow advertisers to target segments of the population that are of interest to them. In addition to selectivity based on interests or topic, magazines can also provide demographic and geographic selectivity. This is done through editorial content as well as through special demographic and geographic editions offered by many publications. Many magazines are also offering greater selectivity through processes such as selective binding and ink jet imaging. Readers can be targeted by zip code, metropolitan area, region, or demographics. Students should be asked to choose a product or service targeted at a specific market and discuss how magazines are an effective way to reach this group. They might find an online media kit for a

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

magazine, which usually provides very detailed information on how the magazine can reach specific target audiences and users of various products and services.

Newspapers offer the advantage of offering advertisers geographic selectivity since they can reach areas or cities of specific interest to them. However, newspapers are not a selective medium in terms of demographics or lifestyle characteristics. One way advertisers can increase selectivity of newspapers is by advertising in certain sections of the paper such as the sports, food, entertainment, or business section. Within a local market area advertising in specific geographic or zone editions of a paper can enhance selectivity. Many newspapers in large metropolitan areas offer zone editions so local retailers can reach readers in their trading area. Again, students might be encouraged to contact a local newspaper (even the college paper) and request information about advertising in the publication as well as information on advertising rates. They should analyze how effective the newspaper is at reaching a target market for a specific product or service 14. Discuss how circulation figures are used in evaluating magazines and newspapers as part of a media plan and setting advertising rates. (LO 12-3) Circulation figures represent the number of individuals that receive a publication, through either subscription or store/newsstand purchase. Total audience or readership refers to the total number of individuals who read a magazine or newspaper and is determined by taking the readers per copy and multiplying this figure by the circulation of the average issue. Magazines and newspapers use circulation figures and readership estimates to set their advertising rates. The greater the number of readers the publication can deliver, the more than can charge for advertising space. Media buyers often prefer to use circulation figures of a publication in making their purchases since they are more verifiable. Total audience or readership figures rely on estimates of pass-along readership, which occurs when the publication is read by individuals other than the primary subscriber or in places out of the home such as waiting rooms, airplanes, etc. Media buyers generally attach greater value to the primary in-home reader versus the out-of-home or pass-on reader as the former generally spends more time with the publication, picks it up more often and is thus more likely to be attentive and responsive to advertising.

15. Discuss how the role of newspapers as an advertising medium would differ for national versus local advertisers. Do you feel that the rate differential newspapers charge national versus local advertisers is justified? (LO 12-3) Newspapers have become primarily a local advertising medium as nearly 85 percent of newspaper revenue comes from local advertising. However, more several billion dollars are spent in newspapers each year by national advertisers. Much of this money is spent in national newspapers such as USA Today, The Wall Street Journal, and The New York Times. However, national advertisers advertise in local newspapers, particularly the larger metropolitan publications that reach the top 50 or 100 markets. Automobile companies, movie studios, and national retailing chains are heavy users of newspaper advertising as consumers rely on newspapers to get timely information about these product/service categories. Many national advertisers are using newspapers more since advancements have made it easier and less expensive to use four-color for newspaper ads. To attract more business from national advertisers, newspapers must sell them on the advantages of advertising in newspapers.

They have to point out the various advantages of advertising in newspapers such as extensive penetration, geographic selectivity and reader involvement and acceptance. They also need to coordinate promotional programs between national advertisers and local retailers to encourage them to use newspapers more. Newspapers must convince them of the value of advertising in their publications and work to improve relations with national advertisers. Newspapers need to become more flexible to attract national advertisers. Some ideas may include guaranteeing specific positions

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

in newspapers in multiple markets, offering creative space options such as ―island ads‖ amidst stock tables, and making color more readily available and less expensive.

Local advertisers account for the vast majority of newspaper advertising as the medium is used heavily by retailers in a variety of product and service categories. Local retailers know that consumers rely heavily on newspapers for information regarding sales, special promotions, and to determine availability of products and services. The value of newspapers as a source of information is a major reason why they are used so heavily by local advertisers. Students should be encouraged to find some ads used by a national advertiser such as an automobile company as well as some used by local advertisers and compare them with regard to factors such as the type of message used, the information provided and the use of price or other promotional incentives. The rate differential most newspapers have for national versus local advertising is a very controversial issue. Those supporting the differential argue that it is justified because the way newspaper ad space is purchased by national advertisers often requires the paper to pay commissions to both sales reps and agencies. They also argue that national advertisers are less dependable than local advertisers and that demand for national advertising is inelastic and thus will not increase if rates are lowered. National advertisers do not view these arguments as valid justification for the rate differential. They argue that the costs of handling their advertising business are not greater than that of local advertisers since their ads are prepared by agencies and they are less likely to request special services such as the design and preparation of their ads. They also note that many national advertisers do use newspapers on a regular basis.

16. What is meant by native advertising? Do you think it is appropriate for advertisers to run native ads that appear to be editorial content rather than sponsored advertising? Why or why not? (LO 12-4) Native advertising has been defined in various ways but generally refers to a form of paid media where the ad takes on the look and feel of the surrounding content and follows the natural form and function of the user experience in which it is placed. Advertorials in magazines and newspapers are a form of native advertising and have been around for many years. However, native advertising has become a major issue in recent years with the growing popularity of digital media as many marketers are using ad formats whereby they integrate their message seamlessly into the editorial content of a web site or an online publication. Thus, their ad takes on the look and feel of the surrounding content and its visual design, which makes it look less like an ad and more like editorial content.

Concerns have been expressed over the use of native ads as critics argue that they are threating one of the most important assets of a magazine, which is its relationship with readers. The church-and-state divide of editorial versus advertising has always been important and the American Society of Magazine Editors (ASME) has maintained guidelines upholding that separation. ASME guidelines state that ad pages should not be related to editorial material in a manner that implies endorsement ad that advertiser-provided content should be clearly labeled as advertising. Readers of a web site or online magazine are likely to attribute more credibility to information that they view as editorial content rather than advertising. However, the ASME really has little power to enforce its guidelines and there is pressure on the magazines to find ways to increase revenue. However, the print media must be careful not to go too far with this practice as it may undermine the integrity of the publications, which could in turn lead to even fewer readers as well as advertisers.

17. Find a copy of a national newspaper such as USA Today or your local newspaper and analyze the types of companies that are advertising in it and how they vary by section. Why do you think these companies are advertising in this newspaper? (LO 12-5) Students should purchase a national newspaper such as USA Today or The Wall Street Journal as well as the local newspaper in your area and analyze the types of companies advertising in each

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

publication. Obviously, national newspapers are going to contain ads primarily for large national advertisers who want to reach consumers across the country or in a particular region as national newspapers will offer regional editions in which companies can advertise. A publication such as The Wall Street Journal will have large number of ads targeting individuals of high socio-economic status such as ads for automobiles and luxury brands such as watches. There will also be a large number of business-to-business ads, particularly for financial services and technology products and services.

Local newspapers will primarily contain ads from local merchants such as automotive dealers, retailers, merchants and service providers. Depending on the size of the market the local newspaper serves, there may be ads run by national advertisers, particularly if the newspaper serves one of the top 50 or 100 markets in the country.

18. What are some of the reasons there has been such a dramatic decline in the readership of newspapers? What might newspaper publishers do to address this problem? (LO 12-5, 12-7) Declining readership is also a serious problem for newspapers, particularly among certain groups such as young people and women. There are several reasons for the decline in circulation and readership including the fast-paced, time-poor lifestyle of the modern dual-income household and competition from the Internet. Newspapers have been impacted by the Internet, as the content they provide has been unbundled with the explosion of news and information sources available online through various websites, as well as aggregation sites. There also has been a tremendous increase in the amount of news programming available on television through sources such as CNN, CNBC, MSNBC, and many other cable networks. Many local stations are now offering 24-hour broadcasts of their news on local cable channels. There is also very thorough coverage of sports on television with programs such as ESPN‘s SportsCenter, a one-hour sports news show aired numerous times throughout the day. In 2013 Fox launched Fox Sports 1, which is another major cable sports network that offers hourly coverage of sports, and a news show, Fox Sports Live, aired multiple times per day.

Many young people are simply more likely to get their news online or through broadcast media rather than newspapers. Moreover, if they do not see their parents reading a newspaper regularly, it is less likely they will become regular readers. The obvious problem of the decline in readership is that newspapers must lower their advertising rates if they attract fewer readers. Young people and women are very important target audiences to advertisers since they are heavy users of many products and services. If newspapers cannot reach these audiences on a regular basis, advertisers will turn to other media vehicles that can such as radio or cable TV. There is no easy answer to the question of what newspaper publisher can do to address the problem of declining readership. The Newspaper Association of America, which is now part of the News Media Alliance, has developed a number of marketing campaigns in recent years that have targeted young people to encourage them to get into the habit of reading a newspaper. The newspaper industry will continue to develop digital versions of their papers which a way to attract more readers. The industry‘s efforts might focus on retaining the subscribers and readers they currently have and showing the value of these readers to advertisers.

CHAPTER 13 SUPPORT MEDIA Chapter Overview In addition to the broadcast and print media discussed in the two previous chapters, marketers have a variety of alternative media from which to choose. In fact, the number of support media continues to increase almost daily, with advertisements appearing almost everywhere. In addition to the familiar outdoor ads and transit ads, a number of new media have recently appeared. Parking meters, trash cans, restroom walls, parking garages, sidewalks, and shopping carts are just a few of the many places now

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

carrying ads. These media, often referred to as support media, are assuming an increasing role in the media mix. In this chapter, we distinguish between traditional and nontraditional support media—the former having been around a lot longer than the new media now appearing. The purpose of this chapter is to familiarize the student with some of these media, and to discuss the advantages and disadvantages of each.

Learning Objectives 1.

Describe the role of support media in an IMC program.

2.

Identify traditional and nontraditional support media in the development of an IMC program.

3.

Compare the advantages and disadvantages of support media.

4.

Describe how audiences for support media are measured.

5.

Describe how to measure the effectiveness of support media.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Chapter and Lecture Outline I.

THE SCOPE OF THE SUPPORT MEDIA INDUSTRY

Support media are referred to by several titles, among them alternative media, below-the-line media, nonmeasured media, and nontraditional media. Many advertisers, as well as the top 100 advertising agencies, have increased their use of both traditional and nontraditional support media, and as new alternatives are developed, this use will continue to grow.

Professor Notes:

II.

TRADITIONAL SUPPORT MEDIA

A variety of out of home (OOH) advertising media are available to the marketer. Outdoor billboards and signs, street furniture, place-based media, and transit ads are just a few of the alternatives that can be used.

A.

Out of Home Advertising (OOH)—Out of home (OOH) advertising media encompass many advertising formats found out of the home. Figure 13-1 shows the many of these ad formats.

While one of the oldest advertising mediums, outdoor advertising has come under attack by environmentalists, city governments, and the public as a whole. The net result has been a decline in the number of billboards across the nation.

At the same time, the outdoor advertising industry continues to grow and be successful as the amount of dollars billed in this medium has increased continuously since 1982. OOH advertising has continued to grow in revenues to $8 billion in 2018. Much of the reason for this success can be attributed to the ability of the industry to become more creative and innovative through the design of billboards as well as new media such as inflatables, rolling boards, and point-ofpurchase materials. In addition, an increasing focus on keeping the advertising message in front of the consumer has contributed to the increased adoption of this medium. As digital outdoor options increase, advertisers are finding this medium even more attractive.

1. Digital out of home (DOOH)—Digital out of home (DOOH) media is one of the fastestgrowing out of home industries and takes three forms: ●

Video advertising networks, which include digital video screens that appear in offices, stores, theaters, inside transit networks, and entertainment venues such as health clubs, sporting arenas, bars, and restaurants

●

Digital billboards, or screens that transmit in LED (light-emitting diode) or LCD (liquid crystal display) technologies. Digital billboards include large boards found at sports and entertainment venues, retail locations (like malls), in transit locations (terminals, etc.), and at roadsides or large traffic locations.

●

Place-based advertising, which is not a purely DOOH medium, often uses digital technology to send its messages. These typically include smaller signs that appear in restrooms, on stairs, on personal vehicles, and on specialty items.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

The global DOOH signage segment is expected to reach $29.6 billion by 2024 due to its ability to be creative, attract attention, and engage the consumer B.

Place-Based Out of Home Media—As noted, the outdoor advertising industry has been able to remain successful through the development of new outdoor media, as well as innovations in existing ones. Digital outdoor is one of the fastest growing areas in all outdoor advertising.

1. Aerial advertising—Airplanes pulling banners, skywriting (in letters as high as 1,200 feet), and blimps all constitute another form of outdoor advertising available to the marketer.

Generally these media are not expensive in absolute terms and can be useful for reaching specific target markets.

2. Mobile billboards—Some companies paint their cars with ads; others paint trucks and vans.

Still others put ads on small billboards, mount them on trailers, and drive around and/or park in the geographic areas being targeted.

C.

In-Store Media—Advertisers use in-store media to promote their products in supermarkets and other stores with atypical media like in-store ads, aisle displays, store leaflets, shopping cart signage, and in-store TV. These point of purchase materials include video displays on shopping carts, kiosks that provide recipes and coupons at counters and cash registers, LED boards, and ads that broadcast over in-house screens. Many advertisers are spending more of their dollars where decisions are made now that they can reach consumers at the point of purchase, providing additional product information while reducing their overall marketing efforts.

D.

Miscellaneous Out of Home Media—Figure 13-4 lists a number of additional OOH media available.

E.

Transit Advertising—Another form of out-of-home advertising is transit advertising. While similar to outdoor in the sense that signs and electronic billboards are often employed, transit differs in that these ads are oriented around transportation. Buses, taxis, commuter trains, airplanes, and subways are some of the transit forms employed.

1. Types of transit advertising—Three types of transit advertising are most commonly employed: a. Inside cards are found on the insides of buses, taxis or commuter trains. b. Outside posters are those found on the backs and tops of taxis, and/or on the backs, sides and fronts of buses, trains, and trolley cars. c. Station, platform, and terminal posters are found in bus and train stations, airport terminals, and on train platforms.

2. Advantages and disadvantages of OOH advertising. ●

Advantages include: o

Wide coverage of local markets—With proper placement, a broad base of exposure is possible in local markets.

o

Frequency—Because purchase cycles are typically for 30-day periods, consumers are usually exposed a number of times, resulting in high levels of frequency.

o

Geographical flexibility—OOH can be placed along highways, near stores, or on mobile billboards, almost anywhere that laws permit.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

●

o

Creativity—OOH can be placed along highways, near stores, or on mobile billboards, almost anywhere that laws permit.

o

Ability to create awareness—OOH can lead to a high level of awareness.

o

Efficiency—OOH usually has a very competitive CPM when compared to other media.

o

Effectiveness—In a study reported by BBDO advertising, 35 percent of consumers surveyed said they had called a phone number they saw on an OOH ad.

o

Production capabilities—Digital technologies allow for rapid turnaround time and messages that can be changed in minutes.

o

Timeliness—Many outdoor ads appear in or near shopping areas or on or in the vehicles taking customers there, thus resulting in timely exposures.

Disadvantages include: o

Waste coverage—It is not likely that everyone driving past a billboard is part of the target market.

o

Limited message capabilities—Exposure time is short and messages are limited to a few words.

o

Wearout—Because of the high frequency of exposures, OOH may lead to a quick wearout.

o

High cost—Because of decreasing signage availability outdoor advertising costs have risen.

o

Measurement problems—One of the more difficult problems of OOH advertising lies in the accuracy of measuring reach, frequency, and other effects.

o

Image problems—OOH advertising has suffered some image problems as well as some disregard among consumers.

3. Advantages and disadvantages of transit advertising. ●

●

Advantages include: o

Exposure—Long length of exposure (such as a subway ride) to an ad is one major advantage of indoor transit forms.

o

Frequency—Because our daily routines are standard, those who ride buses, subways, and the like are exposed to the ads repeatedly.

o

Cost—The CPM for transit advertising is low on a relative cost basis.

Disadvantages include: o

Reach—While an advantage of transit advertising is the ability to provide exposure to a large number of people, this audience may have certain lifestyles and/ or behavioral characteristics that are not true of the target market as a whole.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

o

Mood of audience—Sitting or standing on a crowded subway may not be conducive to reading advertising, let alone experiencing the mood the advertiser would like to create.

McGraw-Hill Connect ®: Support Media Advantages and Limitations Type of Activity: Click and Drag Activity Summary: Students will match the support media with the advantages and limitations associated with advertising in each.

Activity Learning Objective: 13-03 Compare the advantages and disadvantages of support media.

Concept Review: Support media are used to reach those people in the target market the primary media may not have effectively reached and to reinforce, or support, their messages. It is important to remember that some of these media are not used only for support, but for some companies may be the primary or sole medium used. Support media offer a variety of advantages. Cost, ability to reach the target market, and flexibility are just a few. But each of these support media has disadvantages. Perhaps the major weakness with most is the lack of audience measurement and verification. As the number and variety of support media continue to grow, it is likely the major weaknesses will be overcome.

Difficulty: 2 Medium Bloom‘s: Understand AACSB: Analytical Thinking

F.

Measurement in Out of Home Media—In 2010 the OAAA announced a new audience measurement system that had been in development for the previous five years. OOH Ratings is considered to be an improvement over the traditional measure of opportunity to see, with a ―likely to see‖ metric that can also provide demographic and ethnographic data. The new data included a combination of eye tracking, circulation, and travel survey data all combined into one rating by a coalition of research companies. A number of other sources of audience measurement are provided in the text.

Professor Notes:

III.

PROMOTIONAL PRODUCTS MARKETING

The Promotional Products Association International defines promotional products marketing as:

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

―The advertising or promotional medium or method that uses promotional products such as ad specialties, premiums, business gifts, awards, prizes, or commemoratives‖ Promotional products marketing is the more up-to-date name for what used to be called specialty advertising: ―A medium of advertising, sales promotion, and motivational communication employing imprinted, useful, or decorative products called advertising specialties, a subset of promotional products.

Unlike premiums, with which they are sometimes confused (called advertising specialties), these articles are always distributed free—recipients don‘t have to earn the specialty by making a purchase or contribution.‖ There are thousands of advertising specialties such as ball-point pens, matchbook covers, mugs, or expensive gift items have been used to account for over $23.3 billion per year in expenditures in this medium.

A.

Advantages and Disadvantages of Promotional Products Marketing—Because of the wide variety of forms that this form of advertising might assume this medium offers advertisers a variety of advantages.

Advantages include: ●

Selectivity.

●

Flexibility.

●

Frequency.

●

Cost.

●

Goodwill.

●

High recall.

●

Supplementing other media.

Disadvantages include:

B.

●

Image.

●

Saturation.

●

Lead time.

●

Reach.

Measurement in Promotional Products Marketing—Owing to the nature of the industry, specialty advertising has no established ongoing audience measurement system. The Promotional Products Association International (PPAI) is the trade organization of the industry. While no formal audience measurement organizations or effectiveness measures currently exist, this organization continues to originate and support research in these areas. Some of the findings of these studies are presented in the chapter.

Professor Notes:

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

IV.

OTHER TRADITIONAL SUPPORT MEDIA

Almost every day, a new advertising medium seems to emerge. Ads are appearing on restroom walls, in elevators, on movies and videotapes, and seemingly everywhere a message can be fit. (The instructor might stimulate a lively discussion at this point by asking students where they have seen ads recently. All of those present for this discussion will be surprised!) Some of the more common and more pervasive ones are discussed here.

A.

Advertising in Movie Theaters—One of the fastest growing advertising mediums is ads at the movies. While in the past the practice has come under fire from movie makers and consumers, they are being used more and more for the advertising of new movies as well as products and/or services.

1. Advantages of movie theater advertising: ●

Exposure—Ticket sales are still substantial.

●

Emotional attachment—Studies have shown that movie-ad viewers are more engaged than those watching TV spots.

●

Cost—The cost is relatively low for costs per exposure.

●

Attention—Movie watchers pay attention to the ads shown in theaters.

●

Clutter—Most theaters limit the number of ads shown.

●

Proximity—Since many theaters are located in or adjacent to shopping malls, potential customers are ―right next door.‖

●

Segmentation—A key advantage of movie advertising is the ability to target specific demographic segments.

●

Quality—The high-quality production including sight and sound allow more creative and attention getting ads.

●

Integration—Those who download movies online are actually more likely to attend a movie than is the typical adult.

2. Disadvantages of movie theater advertising: ●

Irritation—A major disadvantage; many people do not wish to see advertising in these media.

●

Cost—CPMs tend to be higher than in other media.

Professor Notes:

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

V.

NONTRADITIONAL SUPPORT MEDIA

As advertisers attempt to find different ways to reach consumers when and where consumers want to be reached, they are turning to a variety of new media. In this section of the chapter we discuss some of these new media.

A.

Branded Entertainment—This form of advertising blends marketing and entertainment through television, film, music talent, and technology. Branded entertainment takes on a variety of forms including: 1. Product placements—Whether one considers product placements an advertising form or a form of promotion, no one can argue the fact that this means of getting exposure to a product is on the increase. Product placements are not a new phenomenon; placements are known to have existed as early as the 1930s and were commonly employed via soap operas in the 1950s. (Again, an interesting discussion can be stimulated by asking students to name products that have appeared in movies or on TV.) Industry analysts expect this trend to continue as placements move from traditional media to alternative media, providing additional communication outlets, and as people continue to attempt to avoid ads and marketers continue to look for more ways to get their products in front of you without actually advertising.

2. Product integration—Product placements are integrated throughout the program, and in some instances are a key part of the script 3. Advertainment—The creation of video or music content in an attempt to entertain viewers while advertising their products. Another form of advertainment is advergames, which are online games designed to promote products through electronic games.

4. Content sponsorship—Advertisers sponsor specific programs, receiving placements, integrations and/or promotions in return for content sponsorships.

5. Ad-supported video on demand (VOD)—VODs are specialized content programs offered online and by some cable TV networks that are developed by advertisers and provided to the cable operators for free.

6. Others—Various other forms of branded media also are increasing in use.

7. Advantages of branded entertainment: ●

Exposure.

●

Frequency.

●

Support for other media.

●

Source association.

●

Cost.

●

Recall.

●

Bypassing regulations.

●

Acceptance.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

●

Targeting.

8. Disadvantages of branded entertainment: ●

High absolute cost.

●

Time of exposure.

●

Limited appeal.

●

Lack of control.

●

Public reaction.

●

Competition.

●

Negative placements.

●

Clutter.

9. Measurement in branded entertainment—While there is no accepted standard of measurements in branded entertainment, a number of companies are now offering measurement services, such as: ● Nielsen Media Research. ● Brandchannel Product Placement Watch. ● Rentrak.

C.

Guerilla Marketing—Often referred to as stealth, street, buzz, ambush or viral marketing, this form of promotion attempts to have the product or brand exposed through a variety of no or lower cost methods that attempt to capitalize on free exposures, benefit from competitors‘ promotional efforts, etc. While these stunts have the potential to go viral, they are often very expensive to produce and are risky.

D.

Miscellaneous Other Media—While the list is too extensive to include all here, some media increasing in usage include parking lot ads, gas station pump ads, and place-based media.

1. Advantages and disadvantages of miscellaneous alternative media. ●

●

Advantages include: ●

Awareness and attention.

●

Cost-efficiencies.

●

Targeting.

Disadvantages include: ●

Irritation.

●

Wearout.

Professor Notes:

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

McGraw-Hill Connect ®: Measuring Support Media and Citynet Type of Activity: Case Analysis Activity Summary: Citynet is a West Virginia-based provider of telecommunications services. They provide a host of Internet and phone services throughout the state and surrounding areas including Pittsburgh, PA. This activity will have students select the best answer for each question related to their support media strategy.

Activity Learning Objective: 13-04 Describe how audiences for support media are measured.

Concept Review: Perhaps the major weakness with most support media is the lack of audience measurement and verification that is done. Unlike many other types of media, most nontraditional or support media do not provide audience measurement figures. So the advertiser is forced to make decisions by finding and using the best available data.

Difficulty: 1 Easy; 2 Medium Bloom‘s: Analyze AACSB: Analytical Thinking

McGraw-Hill Connect ®: Non-Traditional Support Media Type of Activity: Matching Activity Summary: Students are tasked with matching the non-traditional support media tool with a description of the effective use of these expanding media choices.

Activity Learning Objective: 13-04 Describe how audiences for support media are measured.

Concept Review: This is a good opportunity to review and differentiate between the various types of non-traditional support media including advergames, product placement, guerilla marketing, content sponsorship, and product integration.

Difficulty: 2 Medium Bloom‘s: Apply AACSB: Analytical Thinking

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Teaching Suggestions As the instructor is no doubt aware, there is a lot of information that can be (and needs to be) conveyed regarding support media. When students think about advertising, they usually think about broadcast and print media. In fact, there is a great deal of money spent to advertise in these alternative support media— both traditional and nontraditional. More and more advertisers are shifting their monies previously spent on traditional media like TV and newspapers, to the various forms of support media and the Internet.

Some of these media will also readily come to mind—for example, outdoor—while others are less likely to do so. Coverage of the characteristics of some of the media presented in this chapter can lead to interesting discussions. As indicated, discussions of product placements and integrations, advertising in movie theaters, and new places where ads are appearing generally get students involved, and may lead to heated discussions. Students may be encouraged to engage in a debate over the merits and/or ethics of some of these advertising forms.

Our lectures generally follow the outline set forth in the text. We discuss the characteristics of the various media, the advantages and disadvantages, and some of the sources of information that are available. We then tie these materials back to the media strategy chapter and the communications models chapter to demonstrate how and when such media might be employed. It is also possible to integrate films, videos, and guest speakers into this coverage. The Yellow Pages Advertising Association, the PPAI, and many outdoor advertising agencies offer guest speaker programs and/or a variety of videotapes that can be effectively used.

Finally, outside sources such as Ad Age and Adweek write extensively about these media, and are a great place to acquire information. The YPPA and PPAI also offer print media directed to the trade and professors who teach these topics in their classes to keep them up to date.

Answers to Discussion Questions 1. Due to the variety of support media types, it is very difficult to provide a measure of effectiveness of these media as a whole. Discuss some of the various measures used to attempt to measure the effectiveness of various types of support media. Are these measures useful to marketers? (LO 13-5)

Out-of-Home (OOH) Advertising: Previously, the Outdoor Advertising Association of America (OAAA) and advertisers used an ―opportunity to see‖ to measure the reach and effectiveness of OOH advertising. This essentially included an educated estimate of how many persons walked or drove by a particular outdoor outlet and had the opportunity to see it. In 2010, the OAAA announced a new measurement system that provided more concrete measurement analytics including demographic and ethnographic information about consumers of out-of-home media. This new system also included the use of eye tracking measures, circulation data, and travel survey data to inform advertisers about the effectiveness of various OOH media. Other effectiveness measurement tools for outdoor advertising include: Competitive Media Reports information on outdoor media expenditures of major advertisers; Experian Simmons Market Research Bureau and GfK-Mediamark Research & Intelligence (MRI) providing information on audience demographics and exposure; and the American Public Transportation Association providing information on riders and transit usage, among others.

Promotional Products Marketing: While specialty advertising such as promotional products marketing has no established audience measurement system, the Promotional Products Association International is the major trade organization in this field. This organization helps marketers to develop and use specialty advertising forms and provides statistical and educational information to advertisers on the use and efficacy of promotional products marketing.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Nontraditional Support Media (Branded Entertainment, Guerilla Marketing, Miscellaneous Support Media): No universally accepted standard currently exists for measuring the impact of advertising using nontraditional support media. However, several organizations have begun to offer effectiveness and impact information to advertisers when using nontraditional support media. These organizations include: Nielsen‘s Media Research which provides information on product placements on network television; Brandchannel Product Placement Watch which provides information on the happenings in the branded entertainment industry; and Rentrak which provides branded entertainment measurement and product integration valuation services.

While work is certainly still needed in the development of effectiveness measures for various support media, all of the information obtained from the services described above would be beneficial for advertisers.

Whether demographic information on consumers, information on the effectiveness of branded entertainment, or tracking information on transit riders, advertisers can use the data provided by these companies to inform their media planning, buying, and evaluation efforts.

2. The lead in-to this chapter discussed a number of new ways that marketers are trying to reach consumers. While some consider these media innovative, others are concerned that they may be an intrusion on consumers’ privacy. What do you think? Should these methods be considered unethical? (LO 13-1) While tech companies and packaged good sellers believe that these new ways of reaching consumers, particularly at their point of purchase, will lead to a better shopping experience for consumers, others are not certain of this new technology‘s benefits to consumers. Some are concerned that the use of technology such as camera-based ad placements at the point of purchase might lead to discriminatory practices. Another concern of consumers is that they are not notified when technology such as this is being utilized and some view this as a problematic lack of transparency that carries with it very serious privacy concerns. These cameras could absolutely lead to discriminatory practices and may restrict consumer‘s freedom of choice in their product decision-making process. If a particular brand is all that keeps getting promoted, they will likely consider this brand and not others that they would normally consider. While this is good for advertisers, it does limit consumer‘s freedom of choice.

3. The proliferation of places where ads now appear seems endless. From manhole covers to people’s bodies, it seems like there is nowhere you can go without seeing an ad. Discuss some of the unusual places you have seen ads recently. Do you think this trend is likely to continue?

Explain why or why not. (LO 13-3) Advertisements are in a number of unique places. Some interesting places for advertisements include car-wraps on individual consumers‘ cars, in elevators, on shopping bags, in drive-thru windows, on coffee cups, baggage claim carousels, or checkout conveyor belts. The examples are endless and ads are everywhere. This trend will very likely continue. Integrated marketing communications is about having a conversation with consumers and meeting them where they are. This involves thinking outside of the box and thinking about different places where consumers are and how brands can have a conversation with consumers in those spaces.

4. Advances in technology have allowed for the innovations that were discussed in the opening of this chapter as well as in the digital perspective. From billboards that track you on the highway to your digital home assistant, which may be tracking your conversations, it seems that our privacy is being infringed upon more and more. While some consumers do not care, others are outraged at what they consider to be an intrusion. Explain why this may be the case and give arguments on both sides. (LO 13-4)

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Advertisers boast that more consumer tracking will lead to more personalized shopping experiences and convenience for consumers. If advertisers know what consumers want, they can put those items or similar ones in front of consumers‘ eyes. This provides consumers with a more streamlined shopping experience but also one that does not allow consumers to explore as many choices or make a decision on their own. It‘s as if advertisers are simply leading consumers to the product they want them to buy rather than allowing consumers to have a choice.

Consumers are concerned that there‘s no opportunity for them to have conversations or thoughts that advertisers aren‘t exposed to. They‘re afraid their freedom of choice is being taken away as well as their sense of privacy. Rather than having brands shout at them or intrude on them, they would likely prefer a brand to engage them in a conversation rather than simply tell them how to think about a brand and what brand to choose.

5. When commercials first appeared in movie theaters, many movie goers were outraged. Now one expects to see numerous commercials before the movie starts, with seemingly little pushback.

Do you think commercials before the movie should be allowed? Why or why not? (LO 13-1) The pros or advantages of movie theater advertising outweigh the negatives or drawbacks. Moviegoers are a captive audience and if the ads are specific to the audience of the movie being shown, they are really a good way to learn about products that consumers might be interested in. If they are done right and targeted to the movie and the audience seeing that movie, they should be allowed.

Additionally, if the advertisements don‘t add to the time before the movie, they are not harmful or a real irritant. However, consumers have become accustomed (because of streaming services) to the idea that if they are paying for something, it should not include advertising which could be a major reason for consumers‘ irritation with cinema advertising.

6. Discuss some recent examples of product placements and/or integrations. Describe the context in which they were used, and how they intended to reach their target markets. Explain where these placements and/or integrations would fit on Hudson's branded entertainment continuum.

(LO 13-4) Today, product placements are used to gain exposure by numerous companies large and small and are a very important part of the IMC strategy for companies like Under Armour, adidas, Triumph Motorcycles, and Anheuser-Busch. Much of the logic behind product placement is that since the placement is embedded in the script or program setting, it cannot be avoided, thereby increasing exposure. Given the lack of intrusiveness of the placement, consumers may not have the same negative reactions to it as they may have to a commercial. Further, research has demonstrated that association with a program or movie—or particularly with a celebrity—may enhance the image of the product and, in some instances, lead to increased engagement and sales. As noted by Simon Hudson, there exists a continuum of product placement branded entertainment types ranging from a verbal- or visual-only placement to product integration, where the brand is woven into the plot of the film. On one end of the continuum are product placements, which Hudson describes as only a visual or verbal passive placement of the brand, with no integration into the program, movie, and so on. At the other end is branded entertainment, in which the brand is woven into the story line at a much higher level of integration. At the same time, the effectiveness of the strategy chosen (placement vs. branded entertainment) will be impacted by the media used, the brand characteristics, consumer attitudes toward brand placements, and other factors, including regulations.

7. Place-based advertising has continued to expand to a variety of locations. Discuss some of the advantages and disadvantages of this medium. (LO 13-3)

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Advantages of outdoor advertising include wide coverage of local markets, frequency, geographical flexibility, creativity, ability to create awareness, efficiency, effectiveness, production capabilities, and timeliness.

Disadvantages include waste coverage, limited message capabilities, wearout, high cost, measurement problems, and image problems.

8. The Yellow Pages, once a staple in one’s home, is all but ceasing to exist. Explain why the Yellow Pages are barely surviving, and why those that still exist continue to do so. Will the Yellow Pages soon cease to exist? (LO 13-1) There is little doubt that the Yellow Pages as we know them will need to undergo significant changes to continue to exist. Changing media habits and lifestyles have affected all print media, and the YP are no exception. A quick glance through your local YP will indicate some of the problems. Notice the number of empty spaces on each page, where there could be ads. Many of these are due to space constraints, others due to advertisers pulling their ads. Long lead time, production limitations, etc. are also contributing to the decline of this medium.

The online Yellow Pages are also an issue. As more and more people go online to conduct their activities, including search, they are less likely to turn to the print versions. Stanley Steemer the carpet cleaner, recently announced in San Diego that they will no longer advertiser in the print YP, as most of their customers come from online—should this be the rule rather than the exception, it will not bode well for the print pages.

At this point, the Yellow Pages are still a viable print medium. However, there is little doubt that they are facing a crossroads and changes in their existing practices will have to occur for them to survive.

9. Discuss some of the advantages and disadvantages of branded entertainment and give examples of both good and bad uses of this medium. (LO 13-4) Advantages of branded entertainment include: exposure, frequency, support for other media, source association, cost, recall, bypassing regulations, advertising junk foods to kids through placements, acceptance, and targeting.

Disadvantages of Branded Entertainment include: high absolute cost, time of exposure, limited appeal, lack of control, public reaction, competition, negative placements, and clutter.

10. There are some who predict that traditional outdoor ads like billboards may soon cease to exist, in part due to the rapid growth of digital signage. Take a position in support of or opposition to this prediction, supporting your argument with examples. (LO 13-1) Clearly, digital billboards are experiencing rapid growth, usually replacing traditional forms. While they may account for the majority of outdoor forms in the near future, all traditional forms will not be gone. One very good reason is that there are still various communities that have regulations that do not permit digital, and may never will. Also, the variety of forms of boards may not be suited to digital, particularly the larger sized boards. Then there is the fact that not everyone wants a digital board as their message may not be suited to it—for example a beach scene. Then, depending on how you define boards, forms like wall murals or signs on barns, etc. are not likely to evolve into a digital format.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Additional Discussion Questions (Not in text) 11. Advertising in video games is becoming more popular. Discuss some of the reasons this medium is attractive. Do you see any downside to advertising through video games? (LO 13-3) Once again, it all comes down to the target market. The size of the videogame target market continues to increase. Likewise, the video gamers‘ lifestyles make the advertising of certain products a natural for this medium. Finally, the gamers obviously have money, or they wouldn‘t be buying games.

In addition to the advertising, product placements in video games is on the increase. Like movies and TV, advertisers claim that the placements add a touch of a more natural environment. The placements actually enhance the atmosphere, they say.

The potential downside is the same as product placements and/or movie ads. Some gamers may not like the fact that ads appear and the backlash may be negative for the marketer. Over a period of time, these ads and placements—like product placements in movies or on TV—will become so routine as to lose all effectiveness.

12. Transit advertising takes a variety of forms, and many advertisers may be reluctant to use these media. Discuss some of the various forms of transit advertising and their relative advantages and disadvantages. Give examples of which products and/or services might effectively utilize this medium. (LO 13-3) As noted in the text, there are a variety of types of transit advertising including (1) inside cards (ads inside of busses, subways, etc.); (2) outside posters (those that appear on the sides of busses, trains, trolleys, etc., and on the tops of taxis; and (3) station, platform and terminal posters (those appearing in the terminals of trains, subways, etc.). The advantages of transit advertising include many of those associated with out of home advertising in general. In addition, transit offers the advantages of long length of exposure and frequency of exposure. The disadvantages of transit advertising include poor reach and audience mood.

13. Content sponsorship has been on the increase in a variety of mediums. Give examples of sponsorships in different media and explain why their use is increasing. (LO 13-3) Content sponsorship, in which advertisers sponsor specific content or even create it, for example, on the Internet or in magazines, has been on the increase due in large part to the advertisers‘ fascination with engagement as a measure of effectiveness. Many advertisers believe that by getting consumers engaged they are moving them one step closer to purchase.

The logic is that if someone is reading specific content, then they must be interested in it. For example, if I am reading about new cameras, then I must be interested in them. So advertisers figure that by placing an ad for their camera, or even creating an advertorial, they are more likely to reach the target audience they want to reach. Why else would one be reading about cameras?

Where this becomes a problem is when the advertiser does not make clear that the content is being influenced by—or even provided by—them. This is when potential deception may occur. There are many agencies now examining the use of content sponsorships and there will soon be guidelines as to when an advertiser crosses the legal limits.

14. Explain why marketers have increased their use of product placements and integrations. Do you think that product placements and integrations are effective? Explain your answer. (LO 13-2) While product placements are really nothing new, their recent increase in use is somewhat amazing.

Some companies like Apple and BMW have extensively increased their placements, and likely will

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

continue to do so. Others have just entered the game, and are finding placements an inexpensive way to get product exposure.

Product placements offer the client a number of positive aspects. The exposure is not obtrusive, it is usually inexpensive, and the product and or brand can benefit from source association. To this point, the placements are not considered as intrusive as commercials, and thus have not met with too much negative feedback (though there is evidence that this may be changing).

The fact that many segments are getting more difficult to reach (for example, teens) through traditional media, has also led to the increased adoption of placements—particularly in the movies.

For now, it appears that product placements will continue to be a darling of many companies. At the same time, increasing irritation, clutter resulting from too many placements, and blatant placements may lead to consumer backlash and decrease the attractiveness of this form of marketing.

Once considered forbidden turf, placements in television programs have become much more common. The text discusses the Apple iPad placement (actually an integration) in Modern Family.

Watch NCIS-Los Angeles and you will see NCIS agents driving a Cadillac. Programs have become very popular places to place one‘s products.

15. Digital advertising media seem to be more and more effective, but at the same time, more and more controversial. Explain why both of these situations have arisen. (LO 13-2) This question will be based only on the digital media discussed in the chapter. Chapter 15 will discuss additional digital media. Digital outdoor like boards, shelters, etc. are one form of digital media. In addition, digital media in office buildings, stores and other locations have also become much more common.

Because they can be more eye catching, and interesting than traditional media, digital outdoor media have become more popular among advertisers. The numerous advantages associated with these media including visibility, the ability to change messages quickly, and the ability of utilizing GPS to strategically locate ads offers advertisers options not previously available. When done well, these media can be much more effective than their traditional counterparts.

At the same time, digital media have their pitfalls. Many people are not enamored with the glitz and glare of the lighted digital displays—particularly when in non-urban settings. Imagine driving on a road with no lights, outside of the city, and all of a sudden, a brightly lit neon sign appears. Such an event could well be perceived as offensive.

Privacy is another issue. The Las Vegas outdoor kiosk that can read your profile while you stand in front of it and recommend products or places to go; the outdoor billboard that recognizes your demographic as you go by and calls out to you; or other types of similar media are considered by many to infringe on one‘s privacy, and thus may be less effective than desired.

Many people are just tired of the intrusiveness of ads. Digital ads are appearing in so many more places—subways, transit stops, buses, sports venues, elevators—the list goes on. The result is an increase in clutter that is increased through digital capabilities.

16. Why has the use of guerrilla marketing been on the increase? Take a position as to whether or not this form of marketing has become controversial, and explain whether or not this criticism is warranted. (LO 13-2) Guerilla marketers have attempted everything from giving out free hats at sporting events to gain free exposure to paying tolls at the Lincoln Tunnel to painting sidewalks with ads. While many of these

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

may be harmless (they can pay my toll anytime!) others have led to defaced property, potential for injury, and other negative possibilities.

In the chapter on publicity, we discuss one such effort gone awry which led to the closing down of traffic in Boston for hours, and hundreds of thousands of dollars in emergency equipment deployment. While all ended well, it could have been worse. The involved company had to pay a million-dollar compensation fine.

The Dead Man Down example in the chapter provides another good example. Frightening people, or catching them off guard is not only inconsiderate, it could be rude and dangerous. While many guerrilla tactics may be cute and possibly beneficial to the consumer, others may be unfair to the advertisers, products or even audiences they are trying to reach and/or take advantage of.

While guerilla tactics may be harmless in some instances, in others they are—at the very least— unethical and potentially illegal. Marketers seem to be continuing to push the limits as to when we cross over that line. The net result is likely to be laws passed limiting such practices.

The reason underlying some of these tactics seems to be the over anxious quest for publicity. Many marketing stunts are designed specifically to get in the news at free o minimal costs. In addition, some marketers believe that any publicity is good publicity (not true) and will push the envelope to get in the news and in front of potential consumers. Their overzealous acts will eventually make it more difficult for everyone to engage in guerilla marketing.

17. What are some of the advantages and disadvantages of promotional products? What are some of the situations in which promotional products may be most valuable to marketers? (LO 13-2) The text discusses the advantages and disadvantages of promotional products. These include: •

Selectivity. Because specialty advertising items are generally distributed directly to target customers, the medium offers a high degree of selectivity. The communication is distributed to the desired recipient, reducing waste coverage.

•

Flexibility. As the variety of specialty items in Figure 13–5 demonstrates, this medium offers a high degree of flexibility. A message as simple as a logo or as long as is necessary can be distributed through a number of means. Both small and large companies can employ this medium for a variety of objectives limited only by their own creativity.

•

Frequency. Most forms of specialty advertising are designed for retention. Key chains, calendars, and pens remain with the potential customer for a long time, providing repeat exposures to the advertising message at no additional cost.

•

Cost. Some specialty items are rather expensive (for example, leather goods), but most are affordable to almost any size organization. While they are costly on a CPM basis when compared with other media, the high number of repeat exposures drives down the relative cost per exposure of this advertising medium.

•

Goodwill. Promotional products are perhaps the only medium that generates goodwill in the receiver. Because people like to receive gifts and many of the products are functional (key chains, calendars, etc.), consumers are grateful to receive them. The products also lead to a favorable impression of the advertiser.

•

High recall. Specialties lead to high recall of both the advertisers‘ name and message.

Some disadvantages may include:

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

•

Image. While most forms of specialty advertising are received as friendly reminders of the store or company name, the firm must be careful choosing the specialty item. The company image may be cheapened by a chintzy or poorly designed advertising form.

•

Saturation. With so many organizations now using this advertising medium, the marketplace may become saturated. While you can always use another ballpoint pen or scratch pad, the value to the receiver declines if replacement is too easy, and the likelihood that you will retain the item or even notice the message is reduced. The more unusual the specialty, the more value it is likely to have to the receiver.

•

Lead time. The lead time required to put together a promotional products message is significantly longer than that for most other media.

•

Reach. Use of other media—such as television—leads to greater reach.

IMC Exercise Have students find examples of branded entertainments, including product placement and product integrations used by marketers. They should explain the objectives they believe are being sought through the use of these techniques, who they are targeting, and whether they feel these techniques will be effective.

CHAPTER 14 DIRECT MARKETING Chapter Overview One of the most rapidly growing areas in marketing is direct marketing. A variety of direct response media are used to convey the communications message. In this chapter we examine the role of direct marketing in the promotional mix. We discuss the objectives sought in direct marketing programs (noting that these may often differ from the communications objectives discussed earlier). We also discuss direct marketing strategies, direct selling, and evaluation of the direct marketing program. We conclude the direct marketing discussion with a discussion of its advantages and disadvantages. In Chapter 15 we discuss two additional direct marketing media, the Internet and interactive media. Since both of these include more than direct response, they warrant a separate chapter.

Learning Objectives 1.

Define direct marketing.

2.

Discuss the role of direct marketing in an IMC program.

3.

Identify strategies and tactics in the use of direct marketing.

4.

Compare the advantages and disadvantages of direct marketing.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Chapter and Lecture Outline I.

DIRECT MARKETING

A.

Defining Direct Marketing—Direct marketing involves a system of marketing by which organizations communicate directly with target customers to generate a response or transaction with the goal of getting consumers to respond through making an inquiry, a purchase, or even a vote. As such, it employs many aspects of marketing, including marketing research, segmentation, advertising, evaluation, etc. A distinction is made between direct marketing and direct marketing media. The former includes the total set of marketing activities involved in obtaining a direct response. Direct-response media are the tools by which direct marketers implement the communications process.

B.

The Growth of Direct Marketing—Direct marketing has grown tremendously in the past few years as a result of a number of contributing factors: ●

Consumer credit cards—There are now more than 1.5 billion cards billion credit cards— bank, oil company, retail, and so on—in circulation in the United States. This makes it feasible for consumers to purchase both low- and high-ticket items through direct-response channels and assures sellers that they will be paid

●

The changing structure of the American market—One of the major factors contributing to the success of direct marketing is that so many Americans are now ―money-rich and time-poor,‖ which has increased the attractiveness of direct purchases.

●

Technological advances—The rapid technological advancement of the electronic media and the Internet has made it easier for consumers to shop and for marketers to be successful in reaching the desired target markets.

●

Miscellaneous factors—Changing values and lifestyles, more sophisticated marketing techniques, more options, and the industry‘s improved image have all contributed to the suture success of direct marketing.

McGraw-Hill Connect ®: Direct Marketing as a Communication Tool Type of Activity: Matching Activity Summary: This activity asks students to match the correct features of direct marketing and sources of growth of direct marketing activities with the descriptions provided.

Activity Learning Objective: 14-01 Define direct marketing.

Concept Review: This is a good opportunity to review the reasons for the growth of direct marketing including increased consumer credit cards, technological advances, the changing structure of American society and the market, and other miscellaneous factors discussed in the text.

Difficulty: 1 Easy

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Bloom‘s: Understand AACSB: Analytical Thinking

C.

The Role of Direct Marketing in the IMC Program—Direct marketing activities support and are supported by other elements of the promotional mix.

1. Combining direct marketing with advertising—Direct marketing is in itself a form of advertising. Whether through mail, print, or TV, the direct-response offer is an ad. Sometimes the ad supports the direct selling effort (i.e. Victoria Secret runs image ads to support its store and catalog sales.)

2. Combining direct marketing with public relations—Private companies may use telemarketing activities to solicit funds for charities or cosponsor charities that use these and other direct response techniques to solicit funds.

3. Combining direct marketing with personal selling—Nonprofit organizations often use telemarketing to solicit funds. Companies use telemarketing to screen and qualify potential prospects and generate leads.

4.

Combining direct marketing with sales promotions—For example, many local merchants send out mailers announcing sales and promotional offers.

5.

Combining direct marketing with support media—Adding a promotional product to a direct mailer has proven to increase response rates. Promotional products like refrigerator magnets, bookmarkers, and other items that can be easily inserted into the mailer are commonly used.

To successfully implement direct-marketing programs, companies must make a number of decisions. As in other marketing programs, they must determine (1) what the program‘s objectives will be, (2) which markets to target (through the use of a list or marketing database), (3) what direct-marketing strategies will be employed, and (4) how to evaluate the effectiveness of the program.

D.

Direct-Marketing Objectives—Direct marketers most often seek a direct response. This response need not necessarily be a behavioral response, as direct marketing is now used for other purposes: to build an image, maintain customer satisfaction, and inform and/or educate customers in an attempt to lead to future actions.

E.

Direct Marketing Strategies and Media—Direct marketers generally pursue either a (1) one-step approach or a (2) two-step approach in developing media strategies. In the one-step approach, the medium is used to directly obtain an order (for example, direct response television ads where the goal is to generate an immediate sale when the ad is shown). In the two-step approach, more than one medium may be used, with the first effort designed to screen or qualify buyers and the second designed to generate the response. A number of direct response media are available to the marketer including: 1. Direct mail—Also often called ―junk mail.‖ Mail order sales were $76 billion in 2017, meaning that more monies have been spent in this medium than almost any other advertising medium. Keys to the success of direct mail are the mailing list and the ability to segment markets. This medium has been seriously threatened by the Internet. The lower cost of e-mail and the convenience of the Internet have raised concerns among traditional direct-mail marketers.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

2. Catalogs—The number of catalogs mailed out and the number of catalog shoppers has decreased each year down from 18.5 billion in 2006 to 10 to 12 billion in 2016. The text lists some interesting examples of articles available through catalogs.

3. E-mail—Direct mail on the Internet (e-mail) is essentially an electronic version of regular mail. Like regular mail it is highly targeted, relies heavily on lists, and attempts to reach consumers with specific needs through targeted messages. The use of e-mail marketing by both business-to-business and business-to-consumer marketers continues to grow; both the low cost and the higher effectiveness than traditional direct mail appeal to marketers. The electronic equivalent of junk mail, these messages are referred to as spam.

4. Broadcast media—Two broadcast media are available to direct marketers: TV and radio. The majority of direct marketing broadcast advertising now occurs on TV, which receives the bulk of our attention in the text. Direct marketing in broadcast includes direct-response advertising (the product or service is offered and a sales response is solicited, through either the one- or two-step approach) and support advertising (designed to support other forms of advertising). Direct-response TV takes the form of TV spots, infomercials, and home shopping shows (teleshopping).

5. TV spots—Referred to in the direct-marketing industry as short-form programs, these spots include direct-response commercials commonly seen on television for products such as drugs and toiletries, audio and video supplies, household products, and more.

6. Infomercials—The lower cost of commercials on cable and satellite channels has led advertisers to a new and very effective form of advertising. An infomercial is a long commercial designed to fit into a 30-minute or 1-hour time slot and last from 12 seconds to 2 minutes.

7. Home shopping—The major shopping channels in the United States are QVC and the Home Shopping Network. QVC has also purchased Zulily—a leading e-commerce site that targets millennial moms.

8. Print media—Magazines and newspapers are difficult media to use for direct marketing because of clutter and the relative expense. In addition, the benefit of an immediate response is not as apparent.

9. Telemarketing—While business-to-business companies continue to employ this strategy with some success, in recent years the telemarketing industry has suffered from a decline due to a number of factors. Problems associated with telemarketing include its potential for fraud and deception and its potential for annoyance. These developments have led to the development of a Do Not Call list for both landline and cell phones and the resulting decline in sales in the consumer market.

Professor Notes:

McGraw-Hill Connect ®: Direct Marketing Objectives

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Type of Activity: Timeline Activity Summary: Acura and Pinehurst resort partnered to offer consumers a special three hour use of an Acura—the ―Preferred Vehicle of Pinehurst‖—and a special package price for their vacation getaway. The two companies believe that they share a common target market profile and similar business philosophies.

Students will place the seven steps involved in the Acura–Pinehurst direct marketing partnership in the correct order.

Activity Learning Objective: 14-02 Discuss the role of direct marketing in an IMC program.

Concept Review: The direct marketer usually seeks a direct response. The objectives of the program are normally behaviors—for example, test drives, votes, contributions, and/or sales. A typical objective is defined through a set response, perhaps a 2 to 3 percent response rate. Not all direct marketing seeks a behavioral response, however. Many organizations use direct marketing to build an image, maintain customer satisfaction, and inform and/or educate customers in an attempt to lead to future actions.

Difficulty: 1 Easy Bloom‘s: Understand AACSB: Analytical Thinking

McGraw-Hill Connect ®: Direct Marketing Strategies Type of Activity: Click and Drag Activity Summary: In this activity, students will match the direct marketing media option with the characteristics of each strategy.

Activity Learning Objective: 14-03 Identify strategies and tactics in the use of direct marketing.

Concept Review: Direct marketing continues to outpace other advertising and promotional areas in growth; many of the Fortune 500 companies now use sophisticated direct-marketing strategies. As with all other communications programs, marketers must decide the message to be conveyed, the size of the budget, and so on. Perhaps the major difference between direct-marketing programs and other promotional mix programs regards the use of media. Direct marketing employs a number of media, including direct mail, telemarketing, direct-response broadcasting, the Internet, and print. Each medium is used to perform specific functions, although they all generally follow a one- or two-step approach.

Difficulty: 2 Medium Bloom‘s: Understand

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

AACSB: Analytical Thinking

II.

DIRECT SELLING

Direct selling involves the direct, personal presentation, demonstration and sales of products and services to consumers in their homes. The text discusses three forms of direct selling, including: •

Repetitive person-to-person selling—Amway/Mary Kay.

•

Nonrepetitive person-to-person selling—Cutco.

•

Party plans—Tupperware/PartyLite Gifts.

A demographic profile of the direct salesperson is provided in the chapter.

Professor Notes:

III.

EVALUATING THE EFFECTIVENESS OF THE DIRECT MARKETING PROGRAM

In addition to some of the effectiveness measures employed by other marketers, direct marketers also employ a measure based on cost per order (CPO). Using CPO the marketer knows almost instantly whether or not the advertisement is working. Another commonly employed measure of effectiveness is Customer Lifetime Value (CLTV). CLTV is a simple formula that is used to assist marketers in determining the dollar value associated with a long-term relationship with a customer, thus evaluating his or her worth. Many companies use an RFM analysis (recency, frequency, monetary), a marketing technique used to determine quantitatively which customers are the most profitable by examining how recently a customer has purchased (recency), how often he or she purchases (frequency), and how much the customer spends (monetary).

A.

Advantages and Disadvantages of Direct Marketing Advantages including: 1. Selective reach—Direct marketing lets the advertiser reach a large number of people and reduces or eliminates waste coverage.

2. Segmentation capabilities—Marketers can rent or purchase lists of recent product purchasers, car buyers, bank-card holders, and so on. These lists may allow segmentation on the basis of geographic area, occupation, demographics, and job title, among others.

3. Frequency—Depending on which medium is used, building frequency may be possible.

4. Testing—Direct marketing allows for a strong ability to test the effectiveness of the overall program as well as specific elements.

5. Timing—Direct-response advertising can be very timely.

6. Personalization—Direct media can offer the most personalized messages.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

7. Costs—While costs may be higher in direct advertising than other media, direct methods may be more profitable.

8. Measures of effectiveness—No other medium can measure the effectiveness of its efforts as well as direct response. Feedback is often immediate and almost always accurate.

Disadvantages include: 1. Image factors—Reputation as junk mail or low-budget productions of TV ads.

2. Accuracy— The accuracy of lists used to target potential customers is very low.

3. Content support—In direct-response advertising, mood creation is limited to the surrounding program and/or editorial content 4. Rising costs—The rising costs of postal rates and print costs and low cost of e-mail serve as a disadvantage of this platform.

5. Do Not Call lists—Do Not Call lists now exist for both landline and cell phones. A ―Do Not Contact‖ list in which consumers can choose not to receive junk mail is now available.

Professor Notes:

McGraw-Hill Connect ®: The New Home Shopping Network Type of Activity: Video Case Activity Summary: The Home Shopping Network, a major shopping channel in the United States offers over 1,000 products a week for sale, broadcasting 24 hours/day. While Internet e-commerce sales have hurt the TV home shopping channels, in the first quarter of 2010 HSN realized significant growth. Part of this is due to a change in programming focus and overall strategy. Students will watch a short video and then answer the questions that follow.

Activity Learning Objective: 14-04 Compare the advantages and disadvantages of direct marketing.

Concept Review: The development of toll-free telephone numbers, combined with the widespread use of credit cards, has led to a dramatic increase in the number of people who shop via their TV sets through home shopping channels. Jewelry, kitchenware, fitness products, insurance, household products, and a variety of items are now promoted (and sold) this way. The success of home shopping networks has led to a proliferation of shopping channels including Shop@homeTV, Shop NBC, and the Liquidation Channel to name just a few.

Difficulty: 2 Medium Bloom‘s: Understand

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

AACSB: Analytical Thinking

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Teaching Suggestions As noted, direct marketing is a rapidly growing field. Students typically think of this area in terms of direct mail, and sometimes the (800) and (888) number ads that appear on television. It is a helpful and interesting exercise to start the class with a discussion as to what direct responses students are familiar with, and to point out the fact that some very large firms are engaging in this form of marketing (not just the George Foreman Grill, Snuggies, and the Magic Bullet).

Students are no doubt familiar with online buying (Amazon, etc.) and home shopping channels, but are probably not as informed about the size and growth of these industries. Direct-response TV still accounts for billions of dollars of sales revenue.

Answers to Discussion Questions 1. The lead-in to this chapter discusses how legacy brands like P&G are now going direct to consumers. Explain how they are doing this and offer some reasons why they are doing so. (LO 14-3) Market conditions have changed and many companies have recognized that they need to better understand consumers. By dealing with their customers directly and establishing digital relationships, companies like P&G feel they can develop a more personal relationships with consumers than was ever possible when the retailer was making contact with consumers. Some reasons for this shift include that consumers are demanding a better experience and companies must work to make the purchase decision process simpler. Another reason for the shift is the need for relationship building.

In the past, dealing direct could lead to the retailer refusing to carry a brand. Now that retailers are feeling the pinch of increased competition from other retailers, Amazon, and others, they are much more amenable to increased marketing support from manufacturers. The third reason for the shift is big data. Many big companies, such as P&G, are practically obsessed with gathering as much information about their customers and potential customers as they can. DTC allows manufacturers to access data on buyers directly, more efficiently, and maybe more effectively than when there is a retailer involved.

2. Discuss the different methods direct marketers use to measure the effectiveness of their programs. Are there other methods that might be considered? Explain. (LO 14-3) Measuring the effectiveness of direct-marketing efforts is not difficult as they often generate a direct response. One method direct marketers use to measure the effectiveness of their efforts is assessing the cost per order, which involves taking the cost of the ad and determining how many calls/orders they would need to solicit in order for the ad to be considered effective. Another way marketers measure the effectiveness of their efforts is Customer Lifetime Value (CLTV). CLTV is a simple formula that is used to assist marketers in determining the dollar value associated with a long-term relationship with a customer, thus evaluating his or her worth. Assessing CLTV helps companies learn to focus their attention on the most profitable customers while spending less marketing efforts on those with a low CLTV score. Another method for measuring effectiveness is RFM (Recency, Frequency, Monetary) analysis. This is a marketing technique used to determine quantitatively which customers are the most profitable by examining how recently a customer has purchased (recency), how often he or she purchases (frequency), and how much the customer spends (monetary). General response counts such as measuring how many postcards are mailed back from consumers or measuring how many consumers attend an event to which direct marketing efforts have attempted to solicit attendance could be some other ways to measure the effectiveness of direct marketing efforts, particularly on a more local level.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

3. Explain what is meant by Customer Lifetime Value. How do marketers apply this formula to determine the effectiveness of their direct marketing programs? (LO 14-4) CLTV is a formula used by direct marketers to determine the dollar value associated with a long-term relationship with a customer, thus evaluating her or her net worth. Direct marketers will use this formula in an attempt to determine whether or not a customer should be acquired, and how much attention they should receive. By estimating the potential return they will receive from a customer, direct marketers can determine how much attention they should dedicate to the customer, what kinds of deals they should offer, etc. Obviously, the more potential sales and profits they see, the more attention the customer will get.

4. What are some advantages and disadvantages to direct marketing? There are some pundits that believe that direct marketing is in the decline stage of its product life cycle, while others believe that it will continue to be a successful means for marketing products. Discuss both of these positions. (LO 14-2) Advantages of direct marketing include its selective reach as it allows the advertiser to reach a large number of people and reduces or eliminates waste coverage; its segmentation capabilities that allow marketers to reach people based on their geographic location, occupation, and demographics; and its allowance for simple effectiveness testing. Some other advantages include its ability to build frequency, its timeliness, its ability for personalization, its profitability despite its high costs, and the measures of effectiveness for direct marketing efforts. Some disadvantages include its negative image as junk, the inaccuracy of lists used to target audiences, the inability for the content in the promotions to create certain moods in consumers, the rising costs of postage and mailers and catalogs, and the existence of Do Not Call lists. Direct marketing will likely continue to increase due to self-policing of the industry and involvement by large, sophisticated companies, which have led to significant improvements in the industry.

5. When many people think of direct marketing they think of junk mail, infomercials, telemarketers, and catalogs that they don’t want to receive. Given that so many people hold this attitude toward direct marketing, why does it continue to be so effective? (LO 14-4) There are a few reasons for the continued growth of direct marketing despite its negative image. The increase of consumer credit cards makes it feasible for consumers to purchase both low- and highticket items through direct-response channels and assures sellers that they will be paid. Additionally, the changing structure of American society and the market contributes to the success of direct marketing. Many Americans are ―money-rich and time-poor,‖ which has increased the popularity of direct purchases. Technological advances have also made it easier for consumers to shop and for marketers to be successful in reaching the desired target markets. Finally, other miscellaneous factors such as changing values and lifestyles, more sophisticated marketing techniques, more options, and the industry‘s improved image have helped direct marketing maintain its effectiveness.

6. What is an infomercial? What are some of the reasons that infomercials have been so successful? Which types of products and services do you think are likely to be candidates for successful infomercials? (LO 14-3) Infomercials—often referred to as long-form commercials—typically range from 30 to 60 minutes, and are often made to appear as television programs. Infomercials have continued to increase in popularity since their inception in the 1980s to now include a wide variety of products and services.

Once despised by retailers, the infomercial has become a partner in the selling effort. While the infomercial once was used non-Fortune 500 companies, now companies like BMW, Volvo, Coca Cola, and Disney are just a few of the many big companies employing this form of communication.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Infomercials are effective for the advertiser as the media cost is minimal. The infomercial is usually shown late at night, early in the morning, or other hard to sell time slots. As a result, the rates are very low, and the breakeven can be easily met. In regard to why they are successful with consumers, IMC Perspective 14-1 provides very good insight as to what makes for a successful infomercial.

7. Explain the role that direct marketing can play in the IMC program. Can direct marketing be used for anything other than a behavioral response? If so, give examples. (LO 14-4) While some organizations rely on direct marketing solely to generate a behavioral response, for many others direct marketing is an integral part of the IMC program. They use direct marketing to achieve other than sales goals and integrate it with other program elements. We first examine the role of direct marketing in the IMC program and then consider its more traditional role. a. Combine direct marketing with advertising b. Combine direct marketing with public relations c. Combine direct marketing with personal selling d. Combine direct marketing with sales promotions e. Combine direct marketing with support media Of course, the Internet is a direct marketer‘s nirvana. Ecommerce on the internet is seemingly taking over shopping as retail stores lose business. Honda now sells as much a large percentage of cars on the Internet as do other dealers, particularly in urban areas. Direct marketing is now being used to achieve other communications objectives such as awareness, trial, etc.

8. What is the future of the traditional home shopping channels like QVC and HSN? Given the decline in television viewership, what will these channels have to do to survive? (LO 14-3) The major shopping channel in the United States (QVC) broadcasts on TV 24 hours a day and online.

While Internet e-commerce sales have hurt the TV home shopping channels, they have succeeded through adaptation: Both QVC and Home Shopping Network (HSN) have upgraded their product lines to include designer brand names and luxury goods at a lower price point. QVC has also purchased Zulily—a leading e-commerce site that targets millennial moms. Zulily, according to The Wall Street Journal, is "the web's version of QVC." The success of home shopping networks has led to a proliferation of shopping channels, including the Gem Shopping Network, America's Auction Network, and the Liquidation Channel, to name just a few. As the demographics of shopping channel buyers continue to move younger and more upscale, the products offered on these channels continue to change as well. It is now possible to shop on QVC on one's Apple Watch.

9. Some marketers believe that traditional catalogs are on the way out and that they will be replaced by digital catalogs. Explain why digital catalogs will or will not drive the traditional catalog into extinction. Cite some of the advantages of maintaining a traditional print catalog.

(LO 14-3) Although some predicted that catalogs would cease to exist with more use of the Internet and the number of catalogs mailed continues to decrease, traditional catalogs are still an effective way to reach consumers. The emotional appeal of the traditional catalog exceeds that of online catalogs and ultimately is one of the best ways to drive consumers online. The convenience of using printed catalogs everywhere and anywhere cannot be matched by digital, thus insuring its future success.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Many companies use catalogs in conjunction with their more traditional sales and promotional strategies. For example, companies like Pottery Barn, Bloomingdale's, Nordstrom, and Illuminations sell directly through catalogs but also use them to inform consumers of product offerings available in the stores. Some companies (for example, Oriental Trading Company) rely solely on catalog sales.

Others that started out exclusively as catalog companies have branched into retail outlets, among them Road Runner Sports, Eddie Bauer, Banana Republic, and Illuminations. The products being offered through this medium have reached new heights as well.

10. To many consumers, shopping through direct channels offers a number of distinct advantages over traditional shopping methods. At the same time, there are distinct disadvantages to this form of shopping. Give examples of the advantages and disadvantages of each form of shopping. (LO 14-4) Advantages of direct marketing include selective reach, segmentation capabilities, frequency, testing, timing, personalization, costs, and measures of effectiveness.

Disadvantages include image factors, accuracy, content support, rising costs, and Do Not Call lists.

Additional Discussion Questions (not in text) 11. Describe the various forms of direct-response advertising. Discuss some of the reasons for the success of direct-response advertising. (LO 14-3) The text discusses the various direct response media. Without repeating this discussion here, a. Direct mail—everything from postcards to mailers for supermarkets detailing weekly sale items b. Catalogs—traditional print and online varieties c. Broadcast—direct response TV spots, infomercials, home shopping channels and radio ads d. Print—direct response ads in magazines, newspapers, etc. e. Telemarketing—direct response solicitations through the telephone f.

Online—direct response ads on the Internet, interactive and wireless

There are a number of reasons for the growth and success of direct response media, including: Consumer credit cards—The use of consumer credit cards continues to increase, reaching all time highs. The ease of use of these cards increases the ability to conduct direct marketing activities. So long as this use remains high, and there are no indications that it will change, direct marketing will continue to thrive.

Syndicates—Companies that specialize in direct marketing activities also continue to increase, particularly with the advent of the Internet. As these syndicates become more effective, direct marketing will reap the rewards.

The changing structure of American society—Consumers are better off than perhaps any time in history. At the same time, they continue to be ―time poor.‖ The combination of these factors is very positive for the continued growth of direct marketing.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Technological advances—the Internet is an excellent example of how technology benefits direct marketing. Direct marketers are delighted that the Internet has come along, as it provides a new and very effective medium for direct marketing activities. Interactive TV will do the same.

Miscellaneous factors—all of the miscellaneous factors discussed in the chapter continue to hold true in regard to their impact on direct marketing. No less important is the image of direct marketing itself. Unfortunately, the industry still has image problems, and the Internet has contributed to these problems through fraud and deception.

12. Direct marketers are some of the most successful when it comes to measuring the effectiveness of their programs. Give reasons why this may be true. (LO 14-4) Because most direct marketing seeks a behavioral response, it is easier for direct marketers to determine if their messages are working or not. Simply put, direct marketers figure out what it costs for the product, add in the commercial message cost and media, and then put it in the marketplace. If the sale orders exceed the costs, the campaign has been successful. Many direct marketers test all aspects of their programs. They will track the response from different stations, different time slots, and different spokespersons. They will also track the response to different offers to see which works best. Adjustments to the programs are constantly made to insure the optimal results.

13. What is the difference between direct marketing and direct selling? Describe the various forms of direct selling and some of the characteristics of the industry that make it unique. (LO 14-3) Direct selling might best be considered as a form (or subset) of direct marketing. Both deal directly with the customer, seeking a response. However, direct marketing assumes a broader variety of media rather than just sales. (Keep in mind, direct sales people may still use promotions, leave behinds, etc.)

Direct marketing includes direct mail, telemarketing, direct response print, etc. Direct selling deals specifically with the selling effort.

There are three forms of direct selling including: Repetitive person-to-person selling—The salesperson visits the buyer‘s home, job site or other location to sell frequently purchased products or services (for example, Amway).

Non-repetitive person-to-person selling—The salesperson visits the buyer‘s home, job site or other location to sell infrequently purchased products or services (for example, World Book Encyclopedia).

Party plans—The salesperson offers products or services to groups of people through home or office parties and demonstrations (for example, Tupperware).

The chapter reveals that the direct selling sales force is quite unique. Almost eighty percent of the sales force are females, almost 100 percent are independent contractors and for most of them it is not a full-time job. Over one half of the direct selling sales force spends less than 10 hours a week at their job—treating it as an opportunity to earn extra money rather than a career. For them, it is as much a hobby as a job.

14. What are the characteristics of the infomercial watcher? In viewing this profile, does it surprise you? Explain why or why not. (LO 14-1) Typically, when we think of the infomercial watcher, we think of someone with a lot of time on his or her hands, insomniacs, or very heavy TV watchers. Given the times of day infomercials are shown (early morning, very late at night, Sunday morning, etc.), this would seem to make sense.

Interestingly, the infomercial buyer may be none of the above. Those who watch (and buy from)

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

infomercials tend to be a bit more upscale, homeowner, and white-collar workers. They are most often female. Overall, the infomercial shopper represents a broad demographic base.

This really should not come of much of a surprise. While it may be true that people who buy from infomercials watch TV more, the fact is that they are not necessarily couch potatoes or shut-ins. Many people who work find themselves ―money rich and time poor,‖ and the infomercial is a means of learning about products and purchasing without having to go to the store. Secondly, many products advertised through this medium may not be available in stores, while still satisfying a need or want of the buyer. Finally, with the profile of the infomercial advertiser changing—with more large companies like Volvo, Mercedes, AT& T, etc., advertising this way, the infomercial has become a good medium for providing information to prospective buyers in the comfort of their living rooms.

15. A study by the Harvard Business School has shown that e-mail marketing is much more effective than traditional direct mail in that it provides a much greater return on investment (ROI) Explain some of the reasons this would be. (LO 14-4) While the cost of direct mail is not that expensive, the cost of sending an e-mail is ridiculously low.

While both of these methods have very low response rates, the fact that e-mail messages cost so little makes it more profitable.

Secondly, the younger generation clearly disregards direct mail pieces. The message goes directly from the mailbox to the trash, never to be seen. While click-throughs on emails are only slightly better, they are essentially better than nothing.

16. Direct marketing has been an effective tool for marketers for a long time. Provide some reasons why direct marketing has been so effective. Do you think this trend will continue? (LO 14-1) There are a number of reasons why direct marketing has been successful. Many of these bode well for its future success as well. Reasons for the rising success of direct marketing can be attributed to a number of factors: ●

The changing marketing environment. The increased use of credit cards, lack of time, and acceptance of mail-order products by consumers have all increased the effectiveness of the direct marketing medium.

●

Cost efficiencies. The continued high cost of mass media, and the lack of availability of time and space in some of these media have forced advertisers to consider alternative ways of advertising. Likewise, the increasing costs of personal selling directly favor the use of telemarketing and direct mail.

●

Target marketing. As marketers more narrowly define their markets, direct marketing media offer a more effective way of reaching them through the reduction of waste circulation.

●

Database technologies. More effective database marketing techniques also promote more specific targeting. Companies are now able to know more and more about their customers (and potential customers) by building more effective databases. Kimberly Clark can literally track babies through childhood, changing the products advertised and the appeals as the child gets older.

●

Advances in technology. Direct marketing no longer means just catalogs and direct mail.

Home shopping channels, the Internet, and other innovations have allowed for more successful direct marketing efforts. Even the success of cable television has aided the direct marketer, who now has a more specific target audience at which to target direct marketing

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

efforts. Advances in technology have also increased the value of the databases, as names can be added and purged, and information can be updated much more quickly. ●

Effectiveness measures. Perhaps the greatest value of direct marketing is the ability to measure the effectiveness of the program. As noted in the text, direct marketers have very sophisticated measures of effectiveness, which can tell them almost immediately how their programs are working.

There is little doubt that direct marketing has achieved acceptance. At the same time, many marketers are still bothered by the image of the industry. While companies such as Porsche and American Express benefit the industry through direct marketing participation, negative stereotypes of ―rip-off‖ artists still persist. Every time such a rip-off occurs, the industry takes a step backward.

17. While a very effective medium, direct marketing also has a number of distinct disadvantages.

Discuss some of these, and what marketers could do to decrease them. (LO 14-4) Perhaps the major problem associated with direct marketing is its image. Putting aside all of its other advantages, image problems continue to plague the industry, making it difficult to shed the ―junk mail‖ role.

These problems stem from all direct media. In direct mail, one‘s mailbox is full of unwanted catalogs, ads and solicitations. The very mention of telemarketers evokes negative images, and around election time are still incredibly intrusive and annoying. Infomercials, despite their advances in sophistication, are still offering ―psychics,‖ ―amazing discoveries,‖ and other offerings that many perceive as being questionable if not deceptive. The industry still suffers fallout from, and the potential for fraud. While the vast majority of direct marketers are not guilty of such actions, it is the few that reflect negatively on the image of the many. Each news story of fraud and/or deceit associated with direct marketing hurts the overall image.

A number of steps have been taken to improve upon this image. The DMA—the direct marketing trade association—has established guidelines for appropriate actions and has worked closely with academia and industry as well as the government to help eliminate many of the problems. Recent legislation such as the do not call list goes a long way in solving some of the problems, but obviously will not solve all. As more and more large companies become involved, the costs of infomercials will be beyond the reach of many, and this, too will help. But like any other medium, there will always be those that will attempt to make money in a less than honest fashion. They will never be eliminated, they can only be reduced in numbers. Until these numbers are under control, additional legislative steps are likely, and the industry will suffer.

IMC Exercise Infomercials can be extremely effective or extremely obnoxious. Have students identify a number of infomercials that they feel fit in either category. Show the infomercials in class, then discuss why students feel the way they do.

CHAPTER 15 THE INTERNET: DIGITAL AND SOCIAL MEDIA

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Chapter Overview Perhaps the most intriguing of all media—at least to students—are the Internet and digital media— particularly social media. Since the inception of the World Wide Web, the Internet has created quite a stir in marketing. Likewise, in the advertising and promotions area, the Internet has been hyped as the ―be all and end all‖ for communications, the end of traditional media as a means of communications and even as a replacement for all brick and mortar stores. While there has been astronomical growth in advertising on the Internet, the predictions of the demise of traditional stores, etc. has not come to pass. We see the Internet as an extremely valuable tool for marketers and an important part of the IMC program. There are advantages and disadvantages of the Internet just as there are for other media, and the astute marketer will know when to employ this medium.

The chapter starts off with an insight as to why the Internet has been adopted so quickly. The objectives for using the Internet in an IMC program are then discussed. The chapter explores Web 1.0 and Web 2.0 strategies and the role of the Internet in the IMC program. Web strategies such as search, various advertising forms, and behavioral targeting are defined. A discussion of Web 2.0 including a section on who uses social media and why and how marketers use media such as Facebook, Twitter, and YouTube and their value to the IMC program are considered, as are other popular tools including Instragram, Pinterest, etc. Current methods of measuring effectiveness are discussed (we say current, because by the time you read this, they may be gone!). Advantages and disadvantages of the Internet and sources of information follow.

Learning Objectives 1.

Describe the role of the Internet and digital and social media in an IMC program.

2.

Discuss the use of Web 1.0 and Web 2.0 platforms in the IMC process.

3.

Explain how to evaluate the effectiveness of communications through the Internet and digital and social media.

4.

Compare the advantages and disadvantages of the Internet and digital and social media.

5.

Discuss the social and ethical issues associated with the Internet and digital and social media.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Chapter and Lecture Outline I.

THE GROWTH OF THE INTERNET

A.

Why the Rapid Adoption of the Internet?—The growth and relevance of the Internet begins the chapter. In addition, insight into the rapid adoption of the Internet is presented.

B.

Web Objectives—Objectives sought in using the Internet include communications and sales objectives, as well as the development and maintenance of the website.

The Internet is a communications medium, allowing companies to create awareness, provide information, and influence attitudes, as well as pursue other communications objectives. Figure 15–2 shows the many ways that marketers now use the Internet to reach out to consumers.

The Internet and digital and social media can be used in an attempt to attain a number of communications objectives. These include: 1. Create awareness—Advertising on the Web can be useful in creating awareness of an organization as well as its specific product and service offerings.

2. Generate interest—The goal of many online efforts is to create interest that will bring visitors back to learn more about the products—and, of course, to sell stuff.

3. Disseminate information—One of the primary objectives for using the Web is to provide indepth information about a company‘s products and services.

4. Create an image—Many websites are designed to reflect the image a company wants to portray.

5. Create a strong brand—The Internet as part of an integrated marketing communications program can be a useful tool for branding.

6. Stimulate trial—Many marketers have found the Internet to be an effective medium for stimulating trial of their products or services.

7. Create buzz—The viral nature of social networking and other sites makes them attractive to marketers intending to spread the word and use word of mouth.

8. Gain consideration—Many marketers believe that the Internet is an effective medium for achieving communications objectives such as consideration and/or evaluation.

C.

E-Commerce—The transaction of sales over the Internet has been given the designation of ecommerce. E-commerce was discussed in Chapter 14.

McGraw-Hill Connect ®: Pampered Baby Social Media Marketing Objectives Type of Activity: Matching Activity Summary: This activity provides students with a case for a brand of disposable diapers. Students are asked to match the digital marketing objective with the descriptions of activities and tools that are part of the Pampered Baby brand‘s social media marketing.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Activity Learning Objective: 15-01 Describe the role of the Internet and digital and social media in an IMC program.

Concept Review: This is an opportune time to review the objectives marketers attempt to achieve in digital spaces. These include creating awareness, generating interest, disseminating information, creating an image, creating a strong brand, stimulating trial, creating buzz, and gaining consideration.

Difficulty: 2 Medium Bloom‘s: Understand AACSB: Analytical Thinking

II.

THE INTERNET AND INTEGRATED MARKETING COMMUNICATIONS

The role of the Internet in the IMC program is discussed. The Internet both supports and is supported by an IMC program. A distinction between Web 1.0 and Web 2.0 is introduced.

A.

Advertising on the Internet—A variety of forms of advertising on the Internet are available, including: 1. Banner ads—The most common form of advertising with the average Internet user seeing over 1,700 banner ads per month.

2. Sponsorships—Both regular sponsorships (a company pays to sponsor a section of a site) and content sponsorships (sponsor provides dollars in return for name association and participates in providing the content itself) are available.

3. Pop-ups/pop-unders—Small message boxes that appear on a screen. Pop-ups are usually larger than banner ads but smaller than a full screen. Pop-unders are ads that appear underneath the web page and become visible only when the user leaves the site.

4. Interstitials—Full-page ads that appear on the screen while content is downloading.

5. Searches—The various types of searches are discussed in this section including organic search results, nonorganic (paid) search results, pay-per-click, and search engine optimization (SEO).

6. Behavioral targeting—Based on advertisers‘ targeting consumers by tracking their website surfing behaviors, such as which websites they have visited and/or searches they have made.

Recently, advertisers have increased their use of retargeting, which involves a user visiting a website either on his or her desktop or mobile phone and leaving without purchasing the product. Subsequently, a specifically targeted ad will display on participating subsequent websites the user visits.

7. Contextual ads—Contextual advertising includes ads placed to take advantage of the surrounding content of the site. Native advertising is a form of paid media where the ad experience follows the natural form and function of the user experience in which it is placed.

8. Rich media—A broad range of interactive digital media that exhibit dynamic motion and employing features such as video, audio, and animation. The various types of rich media are

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

discussed including online commercials, video on demand (VOD), and webisodes.

Additional forms of rich media include interactive banners ads, expandable ads, rich media ads placed in video games, instant messaging, podcasts, and video ads within blogs.

McGraw-Hill Connect ®: Google Inc.: The Right Ads at the Right Time Type of Activity: Video Case Activity Summary: Students are asked to watch a video that outlines Google Inc.‘s use of paid search or search engine advertising. Then, students are tasked with answering questions relating to the advantages of online advertising, types of online ads, paying for online ad space, and measuring online behaviors and the effectiveness of online advertising.

Activity Learning Objectives: 15-02 Discuss the use of Web 1.0 and Web 2.0 media platforms in the IMC process.

15-03 Explain how to evaluate the effectiveness of communications through the Internet and digital and social media.

15-04 Compare the advantages and disadvantages of the Internet and digital and social media.

Concept Review: This is an opportunity to review the use of IMC on the Internet. Instructors should review the types of online ad space available, the methods of purchasing ad space on the Internet, and the measurement of the effectiveness of advertising in online spaces.

Difficulty: 2 Medium Bloom‘s: Understand AACSB: Analytical Thinking

McGraw-Hill Connect ®: Advertising on the Internet Type of Activity: Click and Drag Activity Summary: Students are tasked with matching the Internet advertising method with the characteristics of each strategy.

Activity Learning Objective: 15-02 Discuss the use of Web 1.0 and Web 2.0 media platforms in the IMC process.

Concept Review:

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Instructors should discuss the advertising opportunities available on the Internet including banners, sponsorships, pop-ups/pop-unders, interstitials, behavioral targeting, search, contextual ads, and mixed media.

Difficulty: 2 Medium Bloom‘s: Understand AACSB: Analytical Thinking

B.

IMC Using Social and Other Media: Web 2.0—The birth of Web 2.0 has led to the development of many new media. Strategies that take advantage of the interactive capabilities are discussed.

Social media refer to sites that allow the user to share information with others within their network. The most popular of these are social networking sites, which are platforms for networks or social relations among people who share interests, activities, backgrounds, or reallife connections.

1. Who uses social media and why—About 80 percent of people who are on the Internet worldwide are on social media. A number of motivations for using social media have been identified (sharing ideas, activities, and events with others; community involvement, etc.).

Although the networks are appealing to a range of demographics, they are particularly appealing to those between the ages of 18 and 29, and some are more appealing to women.

2. How marketers use social media—A plethora of marketers include social media in their marketing plans. The primary reasons for using social media are to (1) drive traffic to one‘s site, (2) communicate with customers, and (3) gain brand exposure. The most important benefit these marketers believe they derive from the use of social media is increased exposure. Because consumers use different social media for different reasons, marketers find different media more effective for achieving specific objectives.

3. The most popular social media.

•

Facebook—The largest of all social networks with over 2.3 billion subscribers worldwide. Facebook is the second most widely used social media website (YouTube has more). While the site has been somewhat controversial over the years as a result of frequently changing its privacy agreements and other privacy-related issues, businesses have found Facebook to be a valuable communications medium. Based on advertising revenues, marketers consider Facebook to be the most important social platform for advertising; the site accounted for approximately 21 percent of all digital ad revenues, with revenues of $55 billion.

•

Twitter—Twitter is an online social network microblogging network that enables users to send and receive text-based messages (tweets) up to 280 characters in length. Twitter has about 274 million active users worldwide. Many marketers have found Twitter to be a useful tool for communicating with customers and potential customers. Twitter has made changes to their site to better enable advertising and gain ad revenues. These opportunities for marketers are discussed in the text.

•

Instagram—Instagram is the fastest-growing social network, particularly among younger audiences and is considered to be the most engaging of all social networks by marketers.

Instagram Stories has become a very attractive component to both members and

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

marketers and has accounted for much of Instagram‘s success. Instagram has proven to be an effective site for micro-influencers due to their closer personal networks and perceived authenticity and loyalty. Marketers in numerous industries worldwide have found Instagram useful for a variety of communications activities. Instagram's visual content allows companies to post pictures and video news, events, new product introductions, and other company- or brand-related activities to increase exposure, showcase products in a creative way, establish visual brand identity, and more.

•

Snapchat—From its beginnings as an app with disappearing pictures, Snapchat now has private messaging and public content. While Snapchat suffered for a time after a new user interface was introduced, by mid-2019 Snapchat was showing a sign of resurgence after further design changes.

•

Pinterest—Pinterest is a pinboard-style photo-sharing website that allows users to create and manage theme-based image collections such as events, interests, and hobbies. It is most attractive to females. Pinterest offers the opportunity for marketers to see pinners‘ product preferences, plans, and aspirations.

•

LinkedIn—With over 260 million members, this site is used by professionals to network.

On the site, businesses have used banner ads in an attempt to reach this professional audience to promote their products and services.

•

YouTube—YouTube is a content aggregator, hosting content for information and entertainment and, while a social network, is not a traditional one like Facebook or Snapchat. Users can upload and share their own videos, as well as those placed by others (including companies). YouTube is so effective for marketers because of the ability to use the site as an advertising medium or as a search platform.

•

Other Social Sites—There are many other social media sites that are useful to marketers.

These are used by marketers for marketing research, public relations, promotions, and a variety of other strategies.

4. Podcasting—Podcasting is a medium that uses the Internet to distribute audio or video files for downloading onto desktops as well as iPods, iPads, tablets, and other portable devices, though smartphones are the most commonly used. Listeners of podcasts tend to be more affluent and thus attractive to marketers.

5. Blogs—A blog is a Web-based publication consisting primarily of periodic articles, normally presented in reverse chronological order. Some marketers are excited about the potential of blogs to reach large or targeted audiences at a small cost. Besides banner ads, companies can buy pay per click ads and/or become an affiliate. Additionally, personal bloggers often write about brands that they love or hate and have a considerable influence on consumers.

6. Other 2.0 media forms.

•

Virtual/augmented reality—Thousands of augmented reality apps are now being used by marketers and consumers. Companies such as National Geographic and Coca-Cola have used VR for marketing purposes.

•

QR codes—A large percentage of print ads now carry the bar codes, but they have not been as utilized by consumers as much as anticipated. QR codes are being threatened by a new technology, near field communication (NFC). NFC enables marketers to deliver

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

content through an embedded chip that allows wireless communications just by touching the material or being in close proximity to the NFC tag.

C.

Sales Promotions on the Internet—Companies have found the Internet to be a very effective medium for disseminating sales promotions. Sweepstakes, contests, and other forms of sales promotions are commonly used on the Internet. In addition, a number of companies are now offering online coupons.

D.

Personal Selling on the Internet—The Internet has a number of ways of being combined with personal selling. Many business to business companies are using the net to prospect for new customers, qualify potential customers, and provide product information. Others have used it effectively to assist the salesforce by removing many of the more mundane tasks such as reordering, etc. Consumer markets have used the Internet to stimulate trial, provide information, and assist personal selling through e-mails, samples, and the like.

E.

Public Relations on the Internet—As discussed in this chapter and chapter 17, the Internet has become a very valuable tool for disseminating public relations information and achieving PR objectives. Some examples of the effective use of PR on the Internet are provided.

F.

Direct Marketing on the Internet—Early on, many considered the Internet to be a direct marketing medium. The broader perspective notes that a number of direct media are employed with and for the Internet.

III.

MOBILE

As dramatic an impact that the Internet had on companies‘ IMC programs, it almost pales in comparison to the changes brought about by mobile. Spawned by the rapid adoption of smartphones and tablets, mobile is now receiving strong attention from marketers, and ad revenues continue to climb, primarily through applications (apps). The appeal of mobile stems in part from the fact that younger generations media usage habits have changed.

A.

The Role of Mobile in the IMC Process—In this section, numerous examples of successful mobile marketing tactics are provided.

B.

Disadvantages of Mobile—Some disadvantages include:

IV.

•

Creative challenges—Small screens often limit what advertisers can do creatively.

•

Time—Advertisers have less time to get consumers‘ attention on mobile.

•

Sharing—People don‘t want to share what they see on their mobile devices.

•

Irritation—Consumers are irritated with the number of ads being sent to smartphones.

SOCIAL MEDIA MANAGEMENT PROGRAMS

There are a number of companies that provide social media management tools. Companies like Hootsuite, Hubspot, SocialPilot, and others provide management services for small, medium, and large companies, including media management, content development, publishing, monitoring the environment, and more.

Typically, these companies will provide a dashboard to assist clients in the management of services to integrations with the major social networks

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

V.

INTERNET METRICS

Companies measuring the effectiveness of digital and social media employ a variety of methods, most of which are done electronically. A number of companies provide Internet measures as part of a package; that is, they provide audience measurement information (demographics, psychographics, etc.) as ―upfront‖ information as well as some of the effectiveness measures.

A.

Audience Measures and Measures of Effectiveness—This section provides some of the relevant metrics for social media applications.

1. Internet-specific measures—One of the perceived advantages of the Internet is a company‘s ability to measure commercial effectiveness, due in part to its ability to measure activity in real time. Facebook and Google are two popular brands for analytic tools. Facebook Analytics ―allows users to understand and optimize your complete customer journey across mobile, web, bots, offline, and more. . . ― Google Analytics ―is a web analytics service offered by Google that tracks and reports website traffic, currently as a platform inside the Google Marketing Platform brand.‖ 2. Traditional measures—Companies also employ traditional marketing and communications measures, such as: ●

Recall and retention—More traditional in nature, these measures have been used to pretest online commercials.

●

Surveys—Conducted through traditional methods as well as online, these surveys track attitudes toward the site, responses to e-mails, etc.

●

Sales—The primary measure employed for e-commerce sites.

●

Tracking—Another traditional measure, tracking is employed to gather information regarding brand awareness, recall, message association, and purchase intent.

●

ROI—Measuring return on investment of online sales.

A number of sources of digital measurement data are discussed in the chapter, such as Advertising Digital Identification (Ad-Id). Attempts to measure the effectiveness of social media are noted in Figure 15-11.

VI. ADVANTAGES AND DISADVANTAGES OF THE INTERNET AND DIGITAL AND SOCIALMEDIA Advantages of the Internet include: •

Target marketing—The ability to target very specific groups of individuals with a minimum of waste coverage.

•

Message tailoring—As a result of precise targeting, messages can be designed to appeal to the specific needs and wants of the target audience, much of which comes from behavior tracking.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

•

Interactive capabilities—Because these media are interactive, they provide strong potential for increasing customer involvement, engagement, and satisfaction and almost immediate feedback for buyers and sellers.

•

Information access—Users can find a plethora of information about almost any topic of their choosing.

•

Sales potential—The Internet has of course generated astronomical sales numbers and is expected to continue to do so.

•

Creativity—Creatively designed sites have many major advantages for companies.

•

Exposure—The Internet enables smaller companies to gain exposure that would have been impossible in the past.

•

Speed—For those requesting information on a company, its products, and/or its service offerings, the Internet is the quickest means of acquiring and providing this information.

•

Complement to IMC—The Internet and digital and social media complement and are complemented by other IMC media. As such, they serve as vital links in the integrative process.

•

Timeliness—Provides businesses with the ability to communicate quickly.

Disadvantages of the Internet include: •

Measurement problems—One of the greatest disadvantages of the Internet and new media is the lack of reliability of the research numbers generated.

•

Clutter—As the number of ads proliferates, the likelihood of one‘s ad being noticed drops accordingly. Some ads may not get noticed.

•

Potential for deception—Data collection without consumer‘s knowledge and attempting to reach vulnerable populations are concerns on the Internet.

•

Privacy—One of the many issues of concern for Internet users is that of privacy. Perhaps of most concern is the collection of personal data, which are subsequently provided to marketers, sometimes without the users‘ knowledge.

•

Irritation—Consumers are irritated with clutter, e-mail spam, pop-ups, and pop-unders.

Professor’s Notes:

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Teaching Suggestions This chapter may be one of the most interesting in the text for students. At the same time, it may be one of the more difficult for instructors to teach. Much of the difficulty will come from the fact that the Internet 2.0 world is changing so rapidly, that by the time something is committed to print, it has changed. Many of the companies we discuss in this chapter may no longer be in existence by the time the text comes out.

Others will have merged or changed their names. Even more will be added. Another factor that makes the chapter difficult to teach is the high level of knowledge and interest of the students. Many of them will know more about the working of the Internet than we do.

We recommend getting the students involved in the discussion from the beginning. Showing examples of effective websites—as defined by the communications and sales objectives—is a good starting point.

Then a discussion of some of the uses of both old and new Internet media could follow—particularly the use of social networks, content sharing sites and mobile. Of particular value is to discuss the role of the Internet in the IMC program. Students will quickly see the value of this medium as a complement to the IMC program rather than a stand-alone medium. The large number of companies providing information and/or measuring effectiveness offer excellent examples to bring to classroom.

Answers to Discussion Questions 1. In this chapter Muntinga discusses motivations for using social media using the acronym COBRAs. Explain what these motivations are and discuss their meanings. Provide examples of each. (LO 15-1) Muntinga‘s studies examined consumer‘s motivations for using social media. Specifically, the studies assessed why consumers 1) consumer, 2) contribute to, and/or 3) create brand-related content. The results showed that consumer‘s three primary motivations included 1) gaining information, 2) entertainment, and 3) remuneration. Consumers use social media to gain information prepurchase, gaining information about brands, and new ideas. An example of this is how many young men and women use social media such as Instagram to shop for popular brands and products and seek to find information from friends, celebrities, and influencers on the most popular brands. Consumers use social media for entertainment such as enjoyment, relaxation, and passing time. An example of this would be how many consumers use the Facebook messenger app to relax and communicate and connect with friends and family. Remuneration involves the potential to get something in return such as rewards, money, or job-related benefits. An example of this would be consumers using LinkedIn to connect with potential employers in their field.

2. The appeal of Facebook is universal. However, in recent years growth in new members has leveled off. Give some of the reasons for this apparent maturing of the market. Where is the new growth coming from? Where will future growth come from? (LO 15-2) As with the introduction of any new technology or product, the adoption is always quick but eventually levels off. This is what is happening to Facebook as they have begun struggling to reach and attract 18 to 24 and 25 to 34 year olds. One contributor to the decline in the use of social media such as Facebook is a concern about consumer privacy issues, misuse of consumer data, and misinformation. Additionally, consumers have expressed concerns about the number of ads they see on social media and the inauthentic brand engagement they experience on social media. To combat this, some have suggested marketers focus on more effective ad spending, create better and more engaging content, use chatbots to simulate human conversation, provide content that contains images and video, and use more subscription services where consumers pay for social content. Others suggest that brands focus on microinfluencers, work to regain consumer trust in social media, and leverage

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

community building on social platforms. These are likely opportunities for future growth for Facebook and other social media platforms.

3. With all of its appeal, there are many who feel that social media are having negative consequences for society. Explain some of the reasons that people feel this way, citing examples.

Take a position as to whether you believe their concerns have, or do not have merit. (LO 15-4) One of consumer‘s major issues with social media relates to privacy concerns. Consumers are concerned about the collection of personal data which are then provided to marketers, and this is often done without the user‘s knowledge. Facebook has faced numerous privacy issues in the past and has had to react by developing a new privacy setting that allows consumers to have more control over how their information is tracked, utilized, and shared. Another reason consumers are concerned about the potential for social media to have negative impacts on society is because of the potential for deception. Some feel that the Internet, and social media specifically, attempts to target children and other vulnerable audiences. Additionally, consumer concerns about hacking and credit card theft through social media or other online platforms has consumers concerned. These concerns are certainly merited. More and more companies, such as Facebook, have begun to be called out for their misuse of consumer data/information. Facebook‘s response to these privacy concerns shows that more and more companies are going to need to begin addressing these consumer concerns or risk losing more users.

4. Explain some of the ways digital marketers attempt to measure the effectiveness of their programs. Discuss both digital and traditional measures and when each might be more appropriate to use. (LO 15-3) Marketers use both internet-specific measures and traditional measures to determine the effectiveness of their programs. For Internet-specific measures, many companies look to Facebook Analytics and Google Analytics. Both of these programs offer a variety of valuable insights into how the product or brand is performing. A number of other measures are provided in Figure 15-10. These types of measures would be useful to track the success of an integrated campaign. More traditional measures utilized include recall and retention, surveys, sales, tracking, and ROI. Recall and retention would be useful with a single ad, surveys would be useful in determining how people use a site, sales are beneficial for e-commerce merchants, tracking is useful for measuring brand awareness, ad recall, message association, and purchase intent; and ROI is also helpful for e-commerce merchants.

5. Discuss some of the advantages and disadvantages of digital media. Give examples of each. (LO 15-4) Advantages include the ability to identify very specific target markets, the ability to create very tailored messages, the interactivity available, the vast amount of information available, the sales potential, the creativity online spaces allow for, exposure for brands that might not otherwise be found, the speed with which information can be produced and distributed, its complementarity to other IMC efforts, and the timeliness with which brands can communicate with consumers.

Disadvantages include measurement problems in assessing the efficacy of online efforts, the clutter of the Internet, the potential for deception in online spaces, privacy concerns, and irritation on the part of consumers about things such as clutter and e-mail spam.

6. What is native advertising? Why do some believe that this form of advertising is deceptive?

Explain what you think. (LO 15-5) Native advertising is a form of paid media where the ad experience follows the natural form and function of the user experience in which it is placed. The goal of native ads is to be less intrusive

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

while catching the attention of the reader who is likely interested in the content matter he or she is reading. Some feel that native advertisements are deceptive because viewers are less likely to perceive them as ads. The FTC agreed with this concern claiming that ―Misleading representations or omissions about an advertisement‘s true nature or source, including that a party other than the sponsoring advertiser is the source of the advertising, are likely to affect consumers‘ behavior with regard to the advertised product or the advertisement.‖ The way that certain native advertisements are presented really do make them difficult to distinguish from the content that the reader is there to view or read. Because of the blurring of lines between advertising and content, native advertising should likely be more carefully monitored and regulated.

7. Marketers seem to be increasing their use of bloggers, vloggers, and influencers. Explain what these terms mean. Why do some consider the use of these as potentially deceptive? (LO 15-5) Bloggers write content in a variety of areas and publish their content on a blog which is a Web-based publication consisting primarily of periodic articles, normally presented in reverse chronological order. Vloggers do the same thing but only in video form. Influencers promote products and brands on their personal social media pages. Similar to native advertising, blogging, vlogging, and influencers blur the lines between entertainment content and advertising and may make it more difficult for consumers to distinguish between what is an advertisement and what is content.

Influencers in particular have received scrutiny in the last few years and will likely continue to face further regulation in the future.

8. Explain why some companies seem to be fascinated by digital and social media. What are some of the factors that might support this thinking? What are some that might lead to considering it misdirected? (LO 15-4) In a study by Social Media Examiner, they found that 97 percent of the marketers surveyed include social media in their marketing plans. The primary reasons for using social media are to (1) drive traffic to one‘s site, (2) communicate with customers, and (3) gain brand exposure. The most important benefit these marketers believe they derive from the use of social media is increased exposure. While marketers see digital and social opportunities as a gold mine, many consumers have indicated that they are trying to spend less time online and on social media. However, the number of Internet users and social media, while somewhat stagnant in growth, have held constant at extremely high numbers which provides marketers with an opportunity to reach consumers from a variety of demographic backgrounds.

9. In the chapter we said that social media and mobile are both part of an IMC program, and also that they use other media in their own programs. Explain what this means and give examples.

(LO 15-1) Social media and mobile are just one part of an IMC program but within these platforms, there are other ways marketers can reach consumers. Sales promotions, QR codes, virtual reality, personal selling, public relations, and direct marketing, are just some of the communication methods available through social media and mobile marketing. Companies, nonprofit organizations, and political parties have become quite adept at using the Internet for public relations purposes. Social media and mobile have increased the opportunities available through personal selling, and numerous companies have tied sales promotions into their websites and/or through other forms of digital and social media.

10. Explain the differences between Web 1.0 and Web 2.0. Give examples of how marketers use both. (LO 15-1) Web 1.0 consists mainly of static sites resulting in a one-way flow of communication. Web 2.0 has led to dramatic changes in the World Wide Web, primarily as a result of decentralization of

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

communications and interactivity, with information provided by users as contributors of content such as user-generated ads content and so on. Web 1.0 puts the power of communication in the hands of the company or brand while Web 2.0 allows for consumer input and conversations. Advertisers use promotions on traditional websites where consumers cannot provide any input of engage with the content. Additionally, advertisers utilize social media and things such as chat bots which provide an example of the capabilities of Web 2.0 where consumers are able to engage with the company or brand.

Additional Discussion Questions (not in text) 11. Explain how the Internet has changed the practice of public relations. Pick a website as an example of this change. (LO 15-1) Traditional tools for public relations include press conferences, exclusives, press releases, etc. In addition, other media are employed in times of crises, for example, disasters, product recalls, etc.

While these activities still are employed, given the Internet, they have taken on more or less importance, or have changed in respect to formatting.

For example, think about a product recall. In the past, the announcement might be made on television, an 800 number would be set up, and frequent updates might be provided to the print and broadcast media. Now the same thing might happen, but real time updates would occur online, information would be posted in regard to what to do, and updates would be posted as they happen. All of the same tools, but with a higher level of frequency and more timeliness.

In addition to the above example, websites are quite effective for publishing information about philanthropic efforts, events, and just general news about the company or organization that might never get seen or only appear in a company‘s annual report or newsletters. One visit to a site demonstrates the value of this capability.

For example, visit the Ford website (https://www.ford.com). Once there, one can find information about Ford‘s corporate governance, events, projects, philanthropy, etc. For public relations people, the Internet has become a major tool to go along with the traditional public relations mix.

12. The chapter discusses a variety of new Internet advertising forms including Podcasting and blogs. Explain what each of these are. What are some of the potential advantages and disadvantages associated with the use of each? (LO 15-1) The chapter provides a number of new advertising forms that have are now common on the Internet.

Without listing all of these here, it is possible to discuss their advantages and disadvantages, as they are pretty consistent across all. Given their novelty, there will no doubt be more to add to these lists over time.

The primary advantage to these forms probably lies in the fact that they are consumer driven—i.e,, that they can be accessed by the receiver wherever and whenever they want. One can access a podcast that appeared earlier in the day, yesterday, or at some other time when and where they want to hear it.

Likewise, access to a blog and the information provided therein is also up to the receiver.

The new forms are also useful in reaching younger consumers, many of whom are less tuned in to traditional media forms. The penetration of iPods among younger age groups makes the information provided through podcasts available to this market segment at any time.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

All of these forms also provide information and insights that may not be available through traditional media. For example, blogs may carry information not known to some media or provide very different perspectives on a subject.

At the same time, there are some problems associated with these media. One is the issue of credibility. There seems to be some underlying assumption that if the information appears on a blog it is credible. Yet, blogs are often not monitored, and to date, not regulated. Thus the information that appears there may not always be correct or unbiased. Some companies—like McDonalds—have been accused of creating blogs for purely advertising purposes, without identifying the fact that they are the sponsors. Many other companies create blogs talking about the great aspects of their products, when, in fact, they are nothing more than advertising messages.

There is also concern about the monitoring of blogs for research purposes by large companies. While blogs are supposedly free speech, companies can learn a lot about what people think about them and their products, plant writers on the blogs, and denigrate the competition. To date, these new advertising forms have shown great promise. The number of people participating in the use of Podcasts, blogs, etc. is still relatively small, but surely on the increase.

13. One of the problems slowing the rate of adoption of the Internet as an advertising medium is the fact that this medium has been slow to adopt traditional advertising metrics. Discuss why this has been the case, and what must be done to overcome the problem. (LO 15-3) When the Internet was in its boom era, many of those involved in the medium felt that it was a completely unique and novel way of conducting business. Since most of them were ―techies‖, they adopted their own methodologies and terminologies—most of which were technical in nature.

As a result, traditional marketers were faced with having to determine what was meant by these new terms such as hits, clicks, unique visitors, etc. In many cases, because they did not understand them— or believe in their validity—these traditional media buyers stayed away from purchasing on the Internet.

Over time, these same buyers started to call for more traditional measures to be provided by the websites. Procter & Gamble was one of the first—and most powerful—to demand traditional measures like CPM be used. While reluctant, at first, it became obvious that if they wanted to sell advertising space, the websites would have to adopt traditional measures.

In recognition of the problem, the Internet Advertising Bureau (IAB)—the Internet‘s largest and most influential trade organization—combined with eight prominent Web publishers and two technology firms to research the methods being used in determining Internet metrics. In 2002 their report was completed and a series of voluntary guidelines was established, providing consistency in terminology and credibility to the measures. In addition, more traditional measures such as CPM were provided.

The combination of these acts has resulted in a higher degree of confidence among traditional advertisers, and less reluctance to purchase advertising on the Web. 14. Many marketers and policy makers believe the Internet and social media may constitute a ―web of deceit‖. Explain what they mean by this comment. Provide examples as to why they have this feeling. (LO 15-4) Ever since its inception, the web has been considered to be the ―wild, wild west‖, referring to the fact that it had and wanted few rules, guidelines and law, and that virtually anything goes. In the initial days of the Internet, traditional metrics, practices and tactics were often ignored, as the digital generation believed that they had created their own new world. That changed reasonably quickly as companies used to traditional media strategies literally forced the use of more traditional practices.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Nevertheless, the Internet of today is fraught with practices that traditional media could never get away with. Of major concern is that of privacy, and the use of personal data, often without the consumer knowing it. The use of behavioral targeting and retargeting are two practices that are not only irritating, but potentially deceptive.

Digital marketers are also now heavily involved with native ads, essentially advertorials under a different name. While advertorials must be identified as ads in print media, so far there are no such guidelines on the web. So the unsuspecting reader may be led to believe that the ads are actual content.

The interactivity of Web 2.0 has made the Internet a dangerous place. Given that virtually anyone can post information—truthful or not, dangerous or not, private or not—reputations have been ruined, companies have been falsely maligned, and much negative publicity has been generated.

15. The new media discussed in this chapter have some distinct advantages over traditional media, but also have some disadvantages. Discuss some of the advantages and disadvantages of traditional and new media. (LO 15-4) While the Internet certainly has its advantages over other media, it also has some disadvantage relatively speaking. Consider, for example TV. At this point, there is perhaps no better medium for reaching audiences and creating interest than television. Recent research has shown that as many as 38 percent of purchasers from Internet sites began their search as a result of seeing the product through a TV commercial. Other studies show that the majority of visits to a brand‘s website are driven by exposure to a traditional medium. Whether it be through an ad, a product placement, or other means of exposure, these media have a distinct advantage over the Internet for this objective.

Additional research has shown that a high percentage of users of search on the internet start the search with a brand name rather than a generic product category. Given the weaker capabilities of the Internet to build strong brands, again, an advantage goes to traditional.

Other media, like outdoor which is more likely to gain exposure, magazines which target people with very specific interest and are easier to read, and catalogs all have some advantages not associated with the Internet.

Of course, personal selling has its own distinct advantages. Dyadic communications, immediate feedback, ability to alter the message are all capabilities that the Internet does not offer as well.

Where digital media may have its greatest impact is lower in the funnel. For example, nothing comes close to the speed and timeliness of dissemination of information as the Internet and particularly social media. Marketers can update information almost instantly. In addition, social media often leads to dissemination for free (good or bad), allowing for exposure to potentially millions at little or no cost.

16. Discuss the role of social media in an IMC program. What can these media contribute in regard to helping marketers achieve communications objectives? (LO 15-2) The primary offering of social media to marketers is exposure. When positive, this can be of great benefit to the marketer. The passing on of information is essentially digital word of mouth, which can lead to many positive benefits. Of course, negative ―going viral‖ can also result in bad publicity to the marketer, which can destroy a product or brand. If it is deserved, this is a direct benefit to the consumer, but not necessarily the marketer.

Social media is now in the process of changing. While most were initially free, almost all are now selling advertising time and space. The bad news is the media are changing themselves. The good

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

news for marketers is that they are likely reaching segments that share similar values, lifestyles, etc.

Consider Facebook for example. One could argue that my ―friends‖ are very likely to be similar to me, and may be interested in the same things. In addition, social media have information on consumers that marketers may not have, but find useful. Facebook has become another VALS or MRI+ in many ways by offering information regarding demographics and lifestyles that might aid marketers in segmentation.

If in the lower stages of the consumer funnel, the marketer can find social media particularly effective in communicating information to consumers, offering specials and/or promotions, etc.

17. Policy makers are concerned that some bloggers may not be disclosing the fact that they are being compensated for product or brand endorsements. Explain why they may be concerned about this and how it may lead to negative impacts on the consumer. (LO 15-5) At the time of writing of this text, there were an estimated 100 million bloggers sending out over 44 billion posts per year. Obviously, they are reaching a number of people in a myriad of areas of interest. Political blogs, advertising blogs, auto repair blogs and just about anything you can think of is now available on a blog.

While this information may be very helpful and relied upon by consumers, it can also be deceptive and misleading. Take mommy bloggers, for example. Many of these bloggers are discussing products and services of interest to consumers, ranging from diapers to automobiles. In some instances these bloggers are provided free products, vacations or even direct pay from companies to speak positively about their brands. One might argue that this compensation leads to bias for or against brands. If the fact that these favors are not disclosed, the unwary consumer may be misled into placing more credibility into the blogs than is warranted.

Haul videos are of the same ilk. Teenage girls going on shopping sprees sponsored by Penney‘s or other retailers and then showing and promoting the items purchased without disclosure of sponsorship must be considered misleading. The teens who watch these videos may not recognize that payments are being made, and trust the blogger as just another peer.

To this date, there are few restrictions on blogging and haul videos. Now you know why it is often called the ―web of deceit‖.

18. The growth of Facebook has had a major impact on the way advertisers attempt to reach their customers. Discuss how Facebook has changed the media environment, citing examples. (LO 15-2) The social networking site has changed and continues to change the media environment. With over 500,000 members, the mere size of the members provides a significant audience. However, Facebook continues to change and grow (Facebook has more monthly unique visitors than MySpace, Twitter, and LinkedIn combined), becoming an advertising medium in and of itself. Besides allowing advertisers to place their ads on the site, individual members can also promote their own causes and businesses.

Facebook also offers the viral component due to the frequent interaction of its members. New ideas, including product launches and information are passed along to other members in a speed that almost defies imagination. Unfortunately, so too does negative information.

Facebook continues to offer new services, such as email, and new tools to continue to improve. It has already become a ―must‖ for marketers to have a presence on the site, and with the capability to now buy media time on the site, it continues to offer potential.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

19. Discuss why mobile has become an attractive medium for advertisers. Provide examples of how companies have used mobile. (LO 15-2) One of the fastest growing of the of the new digital media is mobile—though estimates are that we are still years behind some foreign companies. The fact that over 80% of Americans now have cell phones, and the rapid growth of smart phones with an array of apps is a boon to all types of advertisers. Perhaps most important is the fact that one's mobile device is always with them, allowing for full time exposure.

An attractive aspect of mobile is its target marketing capabilities. Advertisers can tell by the apps used what the owner‘s interests are, and target them directly. (For example, travel apps and sports apps. Lead to the use of travel and sports related products.) A consumer looking for a store or a type of restaurant can receive directions to the closest location, and even get a coupon sent for use when they get there.

The development of new sites like Foursquare in which users tell others where they are, receive ―inside‖ information on menu items, earn points for purchases and a variety of other features have created yet another medium for advertisers to reach consumers and attempt to create sales and loyalty.

20. There are indications that the popularity of blogs may have already reached the maturity stage.

Take a position as to whether this is true or not, providing examples to support your opinion.

(LO 15-1) In 2009 there were an estimated 126 million blogs on the Internet. These blogs range from providing information about news, politics, and products, amid a myriad of other topics. There are beer blogs, cupcake blogs, car blogs—just about anything that you can imagine someone having an interest in.

Blogs have value to marketers in that they can target the blog readers through the websites. For example, do it yourself mechanics are very likely to read auto repair blogs. Makers of cupcake jewelry would reach potential consumers through cupcake blogs, etc. Blogs also provide useful information about products and services that might be hard to find elsewhere, and, if the marketer has a good product or service to offer, they may gain exposure at a minimal cost. Companies have also used blogs for marketing research purposes, watching what subscribers say about their and competitive products. Like other Internet media, blogs are viral.

There is some indication that the value of blogs may be diminishing, however. Reports in the media about deceptive and/or unethical practices has eroded the public‘s trust in the blogosphere. The bloggers have not helped themselves, by contributing or even sponsoring these practices. While blogs are estimated to reach hundreds of millions of people (the exact numbers cannot be determined), each year the number of active blogs decreases. It does appear that blog readers are abandoning the sites, and the bloggers themselves are writing less.

21. A trend among advertisers is to make more use of consumer generated commercials to be placed on YouTube and similar sites. Discuss some of the advantages and disadvantages of employing this strategy. (LO 15-4) YouTube has a lot of reach and an attractive audience for consumer product companies—which is just one of the reasons why consumer generated videos are a potentially popular tool for marketers.

Add to that the fact that the cost of these videos is almost non-existent, and another advantage is offered.

Marketers have become quite enamored with having consumers create videos for them. They run contests and sweepstakes to developers, offering to place their ads in such extremely popular places as the Super Bowl. Sometimes (but rarely) the videos are completely the work of the consumer,

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

though in more occasions they are enhanced and/or edited. Nevertheless, they generate interest both on the part of the developer and the viewing audience. In addition, they often generate free and valued publicity when the media reports on them. Some companies now offer competitions in colleges and universities for video development.

One of the drawbacks of these videos is that they are not always professionally developed, and the quality is less than what might be achieved by an agency or boutique. Many of these fail to attract attention or interest by viewers. In addition, like blogs, consumers are seeing through these ―original‖ videos, recognizing that they are not always what they are made out to be.

22. Some marketers have argued that the strength of the Internet in an IMC program is at the mid stage of the consumer funnel (knowledge, consideration, etc.) Discuss whether you agree or disagree with this position, and support your position with examples. (LO 15-1) As more and more research on the Internet surfaces, it seems to indicate that the Internet is a viable communications tool in an IMC program, but is not the be all and end all some expected. As Internet popularity continues to grow as an advertising medium, so too does evidence of its limited capabilities. Much of the growth of the net as an advertising medium is in search, with the impact of banner ads and other advertising forms still minimal.

Some of the studies now reveal that traditional media like TV and magazines (as well as direct mail and product placements) are the source for visits to the web. Products and brands are seen in these media, and the consumer then visits the Internet for information and evaluation. The exposure on TV, for example, is unrivaled with other media, and has strong effectiveness at the early stages of the consumer funnel.

It is also true that the Internet is unrivaled as a source of information. If there is something a consumer wishes to know about a product or service, s/he can find it faster, easier and in more currency than in any other medium. Likewise, other consumers‘ experiences with the product, satisfaction, or dissatisfaction, and price comparisons are much easier to access.

In summary, the Internet is a valuable marketing tool—particularly with the advent of social media.

However, at this time, it appears to be of mot value to marketers in the middle or bottom of the consumer funnel.

IMC Exercise If they are willing, have students discuss their social media usage. Have them report on which media they now receive ads on, what type of ads they are, and what they think of this practice.

CHAPTER 16 SALES PROMOTION

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Chapter Overview In this chapter, we turn our attention to sales promotion and its role in a company‘s integrated marketing communications program. We examine how marketers use both consumer- and trade-oriented promotions to influence the purchase behavior of consumers as well as wholesalers and retailers. The chapter begins with a discussion of the scope and role of sales promotion and a discussion of the reasons for its increasing importance. Attention is also given to sales promotion objectives including a discussion of consumer franchise-building versus nonfranchise-building promotions and specific promotional objectives. Much of the chapter is devoted to an examination of the various consumer- and trade-oriented sales promotion techniques used by marketers and considerations involved in their use. The chapter concludes with a discussion of how sales promotion and advertising can be integrated with other elements of the promotional mix as well as problems involving marketers‘ over-reliance and even abuse of sale promotion.

Learning Objectives 1.

Describe the role of sales promotion in the IMC program.

2.

Identify the objectives of sales promotion programs.

3.

Explain how marketers use various types of consumer- and trade-oriented sales promotion tools.

4.

Explain how to coordinate sales promotion with advertising.

5.

Discuss potential problems in the use of sales promotion tools.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Chapter and Lecture Outline I.

INTRODUCTION

For many years, advertising constituted the major part of the promotional budget of most consumer product companies. Over the past decade, however, many marketers have come to the realization that advertising alone often is not enough to stimulate demand for their products and are increasingly turning to sales promotion methods targeted at both consumers and the trade. Many companies are developing fully integrated marketing programs that include consumer and trade promotions that are coordinated with advertising, publicity/public relations, and Internet marketing programs as well as sales force efforts. It is important to note these trends and emphasize to students the important role sales promotion plays in the marketing of most consumer products. The opening vignette provides a great example of Burger King‘s effective use of sales promotions to beat out their competition, McDonald‘s.

II.

THE SCOPE AND ROLE OF SALES PROMOTION

Sales promotion is defined as ―a direct inducement that offers an extra value or incentive for the product to the sales force, distributors, or the ultimate consumer with the primary objective of creating an immediate sale.‖ There are several important aspects of sales promotion to note: ●

Sales promotion involves some type of inducement that provides an extra incentive for consumers, wholesalers, and retailers to buy.

●

Sales promotion is essentially an acceleration tool, designed to speed up the selling process and maximize sales volume.

●

Sales promotion activities can be targeted to different parties in the marketing channel.

Sales promotion can be broken into two major categories: ●

Consumer-oriented sales promotion includes promotions directed at the consumers who are final purchasers of goods and services. These include samples, coupons, refunds/rebates, contests, sweepstakes, and others.

●

Trade-oriented sales promotion includes promotional programs and activities designed to motivate distributors and retailers to stock and promote a manufacturer‘s products. These include dealer contests and incentives, trade allowances, point-of-purchase displays, sales training programs, trade shows, and others.

The various activities included under each sales promotional category are shown in Figure 16-1 of the text. This chapter focuses on both consumer- and trade-oriented promotions.

Professor Notes:

III.

THE GROWTH OF SALES PROMOTION

The role and importance of sales promotion in companies‘ integrated marketing communications programs have increased dramatically over the past decade. In 2019, spending on various forms of sales

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

promotion exceeded $300 billion while another $150 billion is spent each year on trade promotions targeted at retailers and wholesalers. Estimates are that marketers spend more than half of their promotional budgets on sales promotion, with the remainder being allocated to media advertising.

A.

Reasons for the Increase in Sales Promotion—The increases in the percentage of the IMC budget allocated to sales promotion over the years concerned many marketers who still viewed media advertising as the primary tool for brand building and saw sales promotion programs as little more than gimmicks that contributed little to brand equity. There are a number of reasons for the increases in spending on sales promotion. A major reason for the increase in spending on sales promotion is that the promotion industry has matured over the past several decades. Increased sophistication and a more strategic role and focus have elevated the discipline and its role in the IMC program of many companies. Other reasons for increases in sales promotion spending include: 1. The growing power of retailers—In recent years, several developments have helped to transfer power from the manufacturers to the retailers. With the advent of optical checkout scanners and sophisticated in-store computer systems, retailers gained access to data concerning how quickly products turn over, which sales promotions are working and which products make money. Retailers use this information to analyze sales of manufacturers‘ products and then demand discounts and other promotional support from manufacturers of lagging brands. Consolidation of the grocery store industry has also resulted in larger and more powerful retailers who can use their purchasing power to demand more trade promotion deals. We discuss how Walmart has become such a powerful retailer and the challenges this creates for marketers who must often develop account specific promotions for the retailing giant.

2. Declining brand loyalty—Consumers have become less brand loyal and are purchasing more based on price, value, and convenience. They are also looking for more deals and will buy whatever brand is on sale or for which they can use a coupon.

3. Increased promotional sensitivity—The percentage of purchases made in conjunction with some sort of promotional offer has increased sharply over the past decade. A recent IRI Market Pulse Survey found that 25 percent of consumers are buying packaged-goods brands that are on sale over their preferred brands and 23 percent are making product selections based on loyalty card discounts. An obvious reason for consumers‘ increased sensitivity to sales promotion offers is that they save money. Marketers issue more than 250 billion coupons each year, or nearly 1,000 per person. They also use rebates, buy-one-get-one-free offers, special sales events, price-off deals, and other discounts to attract price-sensitive consumers.

4. Brand proliferation—Research shows that about 75 percent of consumer packaged goods and retail products fail in their first year—in large part because of ingrained consumer shopping habits. Marketers are relying more on samples, coupons, rebates, premiums, and other innovative promotional tools to achieve trial usage of their new brands and encourage repeat purchase. Supermarkets carry an average of 30,000 SKUs compared to 13,000 in the early ‗80s.

5. Short-term focus—The increase in sales promotion is motivated by marketing plans and reward systems geared to short-term performance and the immediate generation of sales volume. Marketing and brand managers use sales promotions routinely, not only to introduce new products or defend against the competition, but also to meet quarterly or yearly sales and

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

market share goals. Many managers view consumer and trade promotions as the most dependable way to generate short-term sales, particularly when they are price-related.

6. Increased accountability—Many companies are demanding to know what they are getting for their promotional expenditures. Many companies feel that sales promotion programs are more economically accountable than advertising since they often generate a quick and easily measured jump in sales. Marketers also feel pressure from the trade as powerful retailers demand sales performance from their brands.

7. Competition—With the markets for many products growing mature and stagnant, it is increasingly difficult to boost sales through advertising, many marketers are turning to sales promotion to gain or maintain a competitive advantage. A major development in recent years is the use of account-specific marketing (also referred to as comarketing) whereby a marketer collaborates with customizes promotions for individual retailers. Exhibit 16-6 provides an example of an account specific promotion used by WD-40.

9. The growth of digital marketing—Many marketers now use the various forms of digital marketing to implement sales promotion programs as well as measure their effectiveness.

Promotional offers such as coupons and discounts as well as entry forms for contests and sweepstakes appear on marketers‘ websites and media pages. Discounts and promotional offers are important reasons why people follow brands on social media sites such as Facebook and Twitter. In fact, 48 percent of consumers say they connect to brands‘ social accounts because they are interested in buying a brand‘s products, and 44 percent said they connected because there was an incentive (e.g., sweepstakes, discount, or gift card).

B.

Concerns about the Increased Role of Sales Promotion—It is important to note that the increased use of sales promotion is coming at the expense of media advertising. This has led to concern that the increased use of sales promotion is having a negative effect on brand equity. As was noted in Chapter 2, brand equity refers to a type of intangible asset of added value or ―goodwill‖ those results from the favorable image or differentiation that a brand has achieved. Another term used synonymously with brand equity is consumer franchise. There are many examples of situations where marketers have hurt the brand equity of their products by placing more emphasis on consumer and trade promotions than advertising.

C.

Consumer Franchise-Building versus Nonfranchise-Building Promotions—It is important to make the distinction between consumer-franchise building sales promotions and non-franchise building efforts. Consumer franchise-building (CFB) promotions are designed to communicate distinctive brand attributes and contribute to the development and reinforcement of brand image and identity.

Nonfranchise-building (non-FB) promotions are designed to accelerate the purchase decision process and generate immediate increases in sales. They do very little, if any, to contribute to the brand identity and image. The chapter discusses concerns over marketers becoming too dependent upon sales promotion and how this is undermining their brand building efforts.

Professor Notes:

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

IV.

CONSUMER-ORIENTED SALES PROMOTION

Marketers have been using various types of sales promotion for more than a hundred years and have found a variety of ways to give consumers an extra incentive to purchase their products and services.

A.

Objectives for Consumer-Oriented Sales Promotion—As the use of sales promotion techniques continues to increase, companies must consider what they hope to accomplish through their promotions and set clearly defined objectives and measurable goals for their sales promotional programs. While the basic goal of most sales promotion activities is to induce purchase of a brand, there are a number of other objectives a marketer might have for both new and established brands. These include: 1. Obtaining trial and repurchase—One of the most important uses of sales promotion techniques is to encourage consumers to try a new product or service.

2. Increasing consumption of an established brand—Sales promotion can generate some new interest in an established brand to help increase sales or defend market share against competitors. Another strategy for increasing sales of an established brand is to use promotions that attract nonusers of the product category or users of a competing brand.

3. Defending current customers—With more new brands entering the market every day and competitors attempting to take away their customers through aggressive advertising and sales promotion efforts, many companies are turning to sales promotion programs to hold present customers and defend their market share.

4. Targeting a specific market segment—Many marketers are finding that sales promotion tools such as contests and sweepstakes, events, coupons, and samplings are very effective ways to reach specific geographic, demographic, psychographic, and ethnic markets.

5. Enhancing integrated marketing communications and building brand equity—Companies are asking their advertising and promotion agencies to think strategically and develop promotional programs that can do more than simply generate short-term sales. They want promotions that require consumers to become more involved with their brands and offer a way of presenting the brand essence in an engaging way.

Professor Notes:

V.

CONSUMER-ORIENTED SALES PROMOTION TECHNIQUES

The various consumer-oriented sales promotion techniques used by marketers should be discussed along with their advantages and limitations and the role they play in meeting various promotional objectives.

A.

Sampling—Sampling involves a variety of procedures whereby consumers are given some quantity of a product for no charge to induce trial. Sampling is often used as a way of introducing a new brand to the market although it is also used for established products. Manufacturers of packaged-goods products such as food, health care items, cosmetics, and toiletries are heavy users of sampling since their products meet the three criteria for an effective sampling program: ●

The products are of relatively low unit value, so samples do not cost too much.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

●

The products are divisible, which means they can be broken into small sample sizes that are adequate for demonstrating the brand‘s features and benefits to the user.

●

The purchase cycle is relatively short, so the consumer will consider an immediate purchase or will not forget about the brand before the next purchase occasion.

1. Benefits and limitations of sampling.

Benefits: ●

Samples are an excellent way of inducing trial.

●

Sampling allows consumers to experience a product directly and gain an appreciation for its benefits and characteristics.

Limitations: ●

While samples are an effective way to induce trial, the brand must have some unique or superior benefits for a sampling program to be worthwhile.

●

Costs of sampling programs can be very high.

●

The benefits of a brand may be difficult to gauge from a sample.

2. Sampling methods—Decisions must be made concerning the method by which the sample will be distributed. The sampling method is important not only in terms of costs, but also in terms of influencing the type of consumer who receives the sample. Some of the more widely used sampling methods include: ●

Door-to-door sampling—The product is delivered directly to a residence.

●

Sampling through the mail—Common for small, lightweight, nonperishable products.

●

In-store sampling—Particularly popular for food products.

●

On-package sampling—A sample of a product is attached to another item.

●

Event sampling—Quickly growing in popularity. Many marketers are using sampling programs that are part of integrated marketing programs that feature events, media tie-ins, and other activities that provide consumers with a total sense of a brand rather than just a few tastes of a food or beverage or a trial size of a packaged-goods product.

3. Other methods of sampling—There are other sampling methods available such as inserts in magazines and newspapers, requesting samples by phone, and the use of specialized sample distribution services. The Internet is yet another way companies are making it possible for consumers to sample their products. There are several online sampling services in existence today.

B.

Couponing—Couponing is the oldest, yet most widely used and effective sales promotions tool.

The number of coupons distributed to consumers in the United States has increased dramatically, going from 16 billion in 1968 to 332 billion in 2010 during the great recession, with 3.3 billion being redeemed. As the economy recovered, the number of coupons distributed declined to 258 billion in 2018, with 1.7 billion being redeemed. The average face value of coupons redeemed for nonfood consumer packaged goods was $1.94 compared to $1.14 for food products.

1. Advantages and limitations of coupons.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Advantages: ●

Coupons make it possible to offer a price reduction to those consumers who are price sensitive without having to reduce the price for everyone.

●

Coupons allow the offering of a price reduction without having to rely on retailers.

●

Couponing can be an effective promotional device for generating trial of a new brand.

●

Coupons can be used to encourage trial and increase consumption of established brands.

●

Coupons may help coax users of a product to trade up to more expensive brands.

Limitations: ●

It can be difficult to estimate how many consumers will redeem a coupon and when they will do so.

●

Response to a coupon is rarely immediate; it typically takes several months to redeem one.

●

Coupons intended to attract new users of established brands are often redeemed by already loyal users.

●

There tends to be low redemption rates of coupons.

●

Couponing programs can be expensive.

●

Problems of coupon misredemption and fraud exist.

2. Coupon distribution—Coupons can be distributed in a variety of ways including:

3.

●

Media delivery in newspapers and magazines and as free-standing inserts (FSIs).

●

Through direct mail.

●

In or on packages.

●

In stores and at points-of-purchase.

●

Over the Internet through online promotion sites.

●

Through mobile marketing by sending coupons directly to smartphones and other mobile devices.

Couponing trends—Coupons continue to be the most effective sales promotion tool for influencing consumers purchase behavior, as evidenced by the 3 billion that are redeemed each year by U.S. consumers. Some companies have tried to cut back on their use of coupons because of concerns over costs and effectiveness. Marketers also continue to search for new and more effective couponing techniques to get around the problem of ―coupon clutter.‖ In-store coupon distribution techniques are becoming more popular and many companies are attempting to more precisely target consumers when distributing their coupons. Several companies now offer online couponing services. Consumers can access coupons for their local area online through the Valpak.com website. Another form of online couponing that has become very popular over the past decade is through deals and discounts offered by companies such as Groupon and Living Social. The best-known

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

company competing in this promotional space is Groupon, which was founded in 2008 in Chicago and is rapidly expanding throughout the world.

A rapidly growing method of distribution is mobile couponing whereby coupons are sent directly to mobile phones. Consumers seek out coupons from a number of different digital channels including retailer, manufacturer, and coupon websites as well as search engines, coupon-specific apps, e-mails from retailers and coupon companies, push notifications, and QR codes on digital signage or catalogs and through search engines.

C.

Premiums—A premium is an offer of an extra item of merchandise or service either free or at a low price that is used as an incentive for purchase. The two basic types of premiums are: 1. Free Premiums—Usually inexpensive gifts or items that are included in the product package, distributed with a purchase, or sent to consumers who make mail-in-requests along with proof of purchase. One of the fastest-growing types of premiums or incentive offers being used by marketers is airline miles which have become a type of promotional currency. Free premiums have also become very popular in the restaurant industry, particularly among fast-food chains such as McDonald‘s and Burger King, which use premium offers in their kids‘ meals to attract children.

2. Self-liquidating premiums—Those that require the consumer to pay some or all of the cost of the premium plus handling and mailing costs. Self-liquidating premiums can be used to create interest in a brand as well as generate goodwill that enhances the image of a brand.

Advantages of premiums: o •

Premiums have high impulse value and can provide consumers with extra incentives to purchase a product.

Premiums are consumers most preferred types of promotions.

•

Premiums can be used to create interest in a brand as well as goodwill that may enhance the brand‘s image.

•

Premiums can be a way of generating trade interest and support.

Limitations of premiums:

D.

•

Premiums can have high costs.

•

There may be restrictions on the use of premiums.

•

Redemption rates of mail in premiums are low.

•

Consumers may not perceive the premium offer as a value.

Contests and Sweepstakes—A contest is a promotion whereby consumers compete for prizes or money based on skills or ability and winners are determined by judging entries against some predetermined criteria. Contests often provide a purchase incentive by requiring a proof of purchase to enter or to obtain an entry form from a dealer or advertisement. A sweepstakes is a promotion whereby winners are determined purely by chance and cannot require proof of purchase as a condition for entry. Another form of a sweepstakes is a game, which also has a chance element associated with winning.

1. Problems with contests and sweepstakes.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

E.

●

A contest or sweepstakes promotion may overwhelm the ad or brand and may do little to contribute to the brand franchise or image.

●

The presence of professionals or hobbyists who submit large numbers of entries but have no interest in the product can detract from the effectiveness of contests and sweepstakes.

There are many websites on the Internet that inform consumers of all the contests and sweepstakes being held, the entry dates, entry requirements, and other information needed to enter.

●

Numerous legal problems and considerations affect the design and administration of contests and sweepstakes.

Refunds and Rebates—Refunds or rebates are offers to return some portion of the product purchase price after supplying some sort of proof of purchase. Consumers are generally responsive to refund or rebate offers, particularly as the size of the savings offer increases.

Marketers are using rebates extensively, particularly in products categories such as consumer electronics. However, as discussed in the chapter, many consumers have become frustrated with rebates and many marketers, as well as retailers, are taking steps to deal with consumer dissatisfaction and problems created by them.

1. Evaluating refunds and rebates.

Advantages: ●

Refunds and rebates can be effective sales promotional tools for creating new users and for encouraging brand switching, encouraging repeat purchase behaviors, or offering a temporary price reduction.

●

Refunds and rebates are often perceived as offering immediate savings or value even though the money is not received until the offer is redeemed and many consumers never follow through on the offer.

●

Refunds and rebates can allow a marketer to achieve a price reduction for much less than if a direct price deal were utilized.

Limitations:

F.

●

Many consumers do not like the delay and effort required to redeem refund and rebate offers.

●

The terms of some rebate offers are inconvenient or even unrealistic.

●

Consumers may have a negative perception of brands that use rebates.

●

Many retailers do not want to become involved with the administration of rebate programs.

Bonus Packs—Bonus packs offer the consumer an extra amount of a product at the regular price by providing larger containers or extra units. Exhibit 16–23 shows a bonus pack offer for Charmin toilet tissue. Bonus packs result in a lower cost per unit for the consumer and provide extra value as well as more product for the money.

Advantages of bonus packs:

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

●

They provide extra value to consumers without having to get involved with things such as coupons or rebate offers.

●

They can be an effective maneuver against a competitor‘s promotion or introduction of a new brand by loading consumers with the product and making them less susceptible to competitors‘ promotional efforts.

●

Bonus packs often receive favorable responses from retailers.

Limitations of bonus packs:

G.

●

They may require additional shelf space and do not provide extra profit margins to the retailer.

●

They may appeal primarily to current users who may have purchased the brand anyway.

Price-Off Deals—Price-off deals provide a reduction in the regular price of the brand, typically right on the package through specially marked price packs.

Advantages of price-off promotions: ●

They are controlled by the manufacturer, which enables them to ensure that the promotional discount reaches the consumer rather than being kept by the trade.

●

Price-off deals usually present a readily apparent value to consumers, particularly when they have a reference price point for the brand and recognize the value of the discount.

●

Price-offs can provide a strong influence when point-of-purchase comparisons are being made.

●

They can encourage consumers to buy larger sizes.

Limitations of price-off promotions:

H.

●

They can create pricing and inventory problems for consumers.

●

They may appeal primarily to regular users rather than attracting nonusers.

Loyalty Programs—Loyalty programs (also referred to as continuity or frequency programs) are promotional programs that reward customers for continuing to purchase the same brand of a product or service over time. Loyalty programs have become commonplace in a number of product and service categories, particularly travel and hospitality, as well as among retailers.

Many consumer packaged goods companies are also developing frequency programs that offer consumers an opportunity to accumulate points for continuing to purchase their brands. The points can be redeemed for gifts such as merchandise or for discounts. As frequency programs become more common, marketers will be challenged to find ways to use them as a means of differentiating their product, service, business, or retail store.

Advantages of loyalty programs: ●

Marketers view these programs as ways of encouraging consumers to use their products or services on a continual basis and as a way of developing customer loyalty.

●

Many companies are realizing the importance of customer retention, and frequency programs help them build relationships with customers.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

●

Frequency programs provide marketers with the opportunity to develop databases containing valuable information on their customers and which can be used for direct marketing purposes.

Limitations of frequency programs:

I.

●

Finding ways to make them true loyalty programs rather than just frequent-buyer programs

●

Using frequency programs to effectively differentiate a product, service, or retail store, particularly when they are being used by competitors

Event Marketing—Event marketing is a form of promotion where a company or brand is linked to a specific event or a themed activity developed for the purpose of creating experiences for consumers and promoting a product or service. Marketers often do event marketing by associating their product with a popular activity such as a sporting event, concert, fair, or festival.

However, marketers also create their own events to use for promotional purposes. It is important to make a distinction between event marketing and event sponsorships, as the two are often used interchangeably yet refer to different activities. Event sponsorships are promotions whereby a company develops sponsorship relations with a particular event and provides financial support in return for the right to display a brand name, logo, or advertising message and be identified as a sponsor of the event. Event marketing often takes place as part of a company‘s sponsorship of activities such as concerts, the arts, social causes, and sporting events. Event marketing has become a very popular part of the integrated marketing communications programs of many companies as they view them as excellent promotional opportunities and a way to associate their brands with certain lifestyles, interests, and activities. Event sponsorship is discussed further in Chapter 17.

Advantages of event marketing:

J.

●

Events can be used as to create experiences for consumers and associate a company‘s brand with certain lifestyles and activities.

●

Events can be used to distribute samples as well as information about a marketer‘s product or service or to allow consumers to experience the product.

●

Events often provide marketers with access to large numbers of consumers at a relatively low cost and can be an effective part of a grass roots marketing program.

Summary of Consumer-Oriented Promotions and Marketer Objectives—The discussion of the various consumer-oriented promotion techniques shows that marketers use these tools to accomplish a variety of objectives. These techniques provide consumers with an extra incentive or reward for engaging in a certain form of behavior such as purchasing a brand. These incentives or rewards can be either immediate or delayed. Figure 16-5 in the text outlines which sales promotional tools can be used to accomplish various objectives of marketers (such as inducing trial, customer retention/loading, and supporting the IMC program and/or building brand equity) and whether the incentive is immediate or delayed. It should be noted that in Figure 16–5 some of the sales promotion techniques are listed more than once because they can be used to accomplish more than one objective. This chart is a useful way of summarizing the discussion of consumeroriented sales promotion tools.

Professor Notes:

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

McGraw-Hill Connect ®: Scope and Role of Sales Promotion Tools Type of Activity: Matching (Click and Drag) Activity Summary: This activity asks students to match the correct motivation for growth in the use of sales promotions with the following examples of tactics used.

Activity Learning Objective: 16-01 Describe the role of sales promotion in the IMC program.

Concept Review: This is a good opportunity to review the reasons for the increase of use of sales promotions. These include the growing power of retailers, declining consumer brand loyalty, increased promotional sensitivity, brand proliferation, a short-term focus, increased accountability, attempting to gain a competitive advantage, and the growth of digital marketing.

Difficulty: 2 Medium Bloom‘s: Understand AACSB: Analytical Thinking

McGraw-Hill Connect ®: Features of Consumer Promotions Type of Activity: Matching (Click and Drag) Activity Summary: This activity provides students with an example of a consumer-oriented promotion and asks them to select the most appropriate category of consumer-oriented promotions described.

Activity Learning Objective: 16-03 Explain how marketers use various types of consumer- and trade-oriented sales promotion tools.

Concept Review: This is a good opportunity to review the various consumer-oriented promotions such as self-liquidating premiums, contests, couponing, and sampling as well the pros and cons of each.

Difficulty: 1 Easy Bloom‘s: Apply AACSB: Analytical Thinking

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

VI.

TRADE-ORIENTED SALES PROMOTION

A.

Objectives of Trade-Oriented Sales Promotion—As with consumer oriented promotions, sales promotion programs targeted to the trade should be based on well-defined objectives and a consideration of what the marketer wants to accomplish by using trade promotions. Objectives for trade-oriented promotions include: 1. Obtain distribution for new products—Trade promotions are often used to encourage retailers to give shelf space to new products. Marketers also use other types of promotions to get them to push the brand. Merchandising allowances can get retailers to display a new product in high-traffic areas of stores, while incentive programs or contests can encourage wholesale or retail store personnel to push a new brand.

2. Maintain trade support for established brands—Brands that are in the mature phase of their product life cycle are vulnerable to losing wholesale and/or retail distribution, particularly if they are not differentiated or face competition from new products. Trade deals induce wholesalers and retailers to continue to carry weaker products because the discounts increase their profit margins.

3. Encourage retailers to display established brands—Marketers recognize that many purchase decisions are made in the store, and promotional displays are an excellent way of generating sales. An important goal is to obtain retail store displays of a product away from its regular shelf location.

4. Build retail inventories—Manufacturers want to load retailers with their products.

Wholesalers and retailers are more likely to push a product when they have high inventory levels rather than storing it in their warehouses or back rooms. Building channel members‘ inventories also ensures they will not run out of stock and thus miss sales opportunities.

B.

Types of Trade-Oriented Promotions—There are a variety of trade promotion tools that manufacturers can use as inducements for wholesalers and retailers. These include: 1. Contests and incentives—Manufacturers use contests and special incentive programs to stimulate greater selling effort from resellers management or sales personnel. An important target of contests or special incentives is the sales personnel of the middlemen. In addition to using contests, programs targeted to sales personnel may include push money (pm) or spiffs.

2. Trade allowances—Probably the most commonly used trade promotion is some form of trade allowance, which is a discount or deal offered to the retailer or wholesaler to encourage them to stock, promote, or display a manufacturer‘s products. There are several types of trade allowances including: ●

Buying allowances—A deal or discount offered to resellers in the form of a price reduction on product ordered during a fixed time period. These discounts are often in the form of an off-invoice allowance, which means a certain per-case amount or percentage is deducted from the invoice.

●

Promotional allowances—Discounts provided to retailers for performing certain promotional or merchandising activities in support of a manufacturer‘s brand.

●

Slotting allowances—Rather than a discount, these are special fees that retailers charge manufacturers for agreeing to handle a new product and providing a slot or position in their store to accommodate the new product. Some retailers have even

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

been demanding failure fees if a new product does not hit a minimum sales level within a certain time.

3. Displays and point-of-purchase materials—Marketers use a variety of point-of-purchase materials including end-of-aisle displays, posters, banners, shelf cards, motion pieces, standup racks and other material. Point-of-purchase displays are an important promotional tool because they can help a manufacturer obtain more effective in-store merchandising of their products. Products often sell better when they are on display as they are more likely to be noticed by consumers and displays also are often accompanied by price deals. Many manufacturers help retailers use shelf space more efficiently through planograms, which are configurations of products that occupy a shelf section in a store. Some manufacturers are developing computer-based programs that allow retailers to input information from their scanner data and determine the best shelf layouts by experimenting with product movement, space utilization, profit yields, and other factors.

4. Sales training programs—Another important form of manufacturer-sponsored promotional assistance is sales training programs for reseller sales personnel. Manufacturers provide sales training assistance to retail salespeople in a number of ways including having formal classes, having their sales reps work with resellers and providing sales manuals, brochures, videos, and other selling aids.

5. Trade shows—A trade show is a type of exhibition or forum where manufacturers display their products to current as well as prospective buyers. Trade shows provide a major opportunity to display and demonstrate products, interact with customers, identify new prospects, gather customer and competitive information and even write new orders. The social aspects of trade shows are also important as many customers use them to entertain key customers and to develop and maintain relationships.

6. Cooperative advertising—Cooperative advertising, whereby the cost of advertising is shared by more than one party, is another important form of trade promotion. There are three types of cooperative advertising: ●

Horizontal cooperative advertising—Advertising sponsored in common by a group of retailers, companies, or other organizations providing products or services to a market.

Automobile dealerships that are concentrated in a specific location in many large metropolitan areas often use this form of cooperative advertising.

●

Ingredient-sponsored cooperative advertising—Advertising supported by a raw materials or component manufacturer to help establish end products using the company‘s materials or ingredients. The popular ―Intel Inside‖ campaign is an example of this form of cooperative advertising. Intel provides cooperative advertising funds to personal computer manufacturers, which totals five percent of the total dollar amount of microprocessors they purchase from the company.

●

Vertical cooperative advertising—This is the most common type of co-op ad program used as part of a trade-oriented promotional program. Under a vertical co-op program, the manufacturer pays for a portion of the advertising a retailer runs to promote its product and its availability in the retailer‘s place of business. The limit or amount of co-op funds the manufacturer provides to the retailer is usually based on a percentage of dollar purchases made from the manufacturer.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Professor Notes:

McGraw-Hill Connect ®: Features of Trade Promotions Type of Activity: Matching (Click and Drag) Activity Summary: This activity provides students with an example of a trade-oriented promotion and asks them to select the most appropriate category of trade promotions described.

Activity Learning Objective: 16-05 Discuss potential problems in the use of sales promotion tools.

Concept Review: This is a good opportunity to review the various trade-oriented promotions such as slotting allowances, trade shows, off-invoice allowances, POP displays, spiffs, and vertical cooperative advertising, as well the pros and cons of each.

Difficulty: 2 Medium Bloom‘s: Apply AACSB: Analytical Thinking

McGraw-Hill Connect ®: Sales Promotion Tools for Various Objectives Type of Activity: Click and Drag Activity Summary: In this activity, students will read about a marketing manager who must decide which consumer sales promotion tools will best help his firm achieve each of their desired objectives. Students will then match each sales promotion tool with its correct marketing objectives.

Activity Learning Objective: 16-03 Explain how marketers use various types of consumer- and trade-oriented sales promotion tools.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Concept Review: Over the past two decades, marketers have been allocating more of their promotional dollars to sales promotion. There has been a steady increase in the use of sales promotion techniques to influence consumers' purchase behavior. The growing power of retailers, erosion of brand loyalty, increase in consumers' sensitivity to promotions, increase in new product introductions, fragmentation of the consumer market, short-term focus of marketing and brand managers, and increase in advertising clutter are some of the reasons for this increase.

Difficulty: 2 Medium Bloom‘s: Understand AACSB: Analytical Thinking

McGraw-Hill Connect ®: Mazzio’s Cost per Coupon Redeemed Type of Activity: Case Analysis Activity Summary: Mazzio's Italian Eatery is a network of fast-casual Italian food restaurants offering award-winning pizzas, made-to-order pastas, hot toasted sandwiches, fresh specialty salads, appetizers, and desserts. With 165 restaurants in nine states, Mazzio's is rapidly growing and gaining popularity. This activity will have the students select the best answer for each question related to their marketing strategy.

Activity Learning Objective: 16-03 Explain how marketers use various types of consumer- and trade-oriented sales promotion tools.

Concept Review: Couponing program expenses include the face value of the coupon redeemed plus costs for production, distribution, and handling of the coupons. Former Procter & Gamble chairman Durk Jager, who led efforts to rein in the company's use of coupons in the late 90s, has argued that they are extremely inefficient. He contends that it may cost as much as $50 to move a case of goods with coupons that may generate only $10 to $12 in gross profit. Marketers should track coupon costs very carefully to ensure their use is economically feasible.

Difficulty: 2 Medium Bloom‘s: Analyze AACSB: Analytical Thinking

VII. COORDINATING SALES PROMOTION WITH ADVERTISING AND OTHER IMC TOOLS Sales promotion techniques usually work best when used in conjunction with advertising. Conversely, a consumer sales promotion program can enhance the effectiveness of an ad campaign. When properly planned and executed to work together, sales promotion can provide a synergistic effect that is much greater than the response that would be generated from either promotional mix element used alone. Proper

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

integration of advertising and sales promotion requires the coordination of several decision areas including: A.

Budget Allocation—This allocation depends on a number of factors: ●

The promotional objectives of the campaign.

●

The market and competitive situation.

●

The brand‘s stage in its life cycle.

B.

Coordination of Ad and Promotion Themes—To integrate the advertising and sales promotion programs successfully, the theme of consumer promotions should be tied in with the advertising and positioning themes wherever possible. The Axe Apollo sweepstakes that was promoted using the ad in Exhibit 16-34 is a good example of this.

C.

Media Support and Timing—Media support for a sales promotion program is critical as promotions and should be coordinated with the media schedule used for the advertising campaign. Using a promotion without prior or concurrent advertising can limit its effectiveness and risk damaging the brand‘s image. Conversely, the effectiveness of media advertising can be enhanced by a coupon, a premium offer, or an opportunity to enter a sweepstakes or contest.

Professor Notes:

VIII.

SALES PROMOTION ABUSE

The increasing use of sales promotion in the marketing program represents a change in IMC strategy regarding how companies market their products and services. However, many experts have questioned the logic of this increased emphasis on sales promotion. Concerns include the following: ●

Marketers becoming too dependent on using sales promotion to produce short-term or immediate increases in sales.

●

Investing in sales promotion at the expense of advertising and thus not building the long-term value of the brand franchise.

●

Brands losing their perceived value from the perspective of consumers when they are purchased because of a promotional offer.

In many situations, there is the potential for companies to fall into a sales promotion trap or spiral whereby all competitors are making extensive use of promotions. Figure 16-8 shows this dilemma and how the only way out of it is for both parties to cooperate by cutting back on promotions.

Professor Notes:

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Teaching Suggestions In this chapter, we examine the very important area of sales promotion including the promotional activities directed at consumers as well as trade. This is a very long chapter as it covers both consumerand trade-oriented sales promotion very thoroughly. We strongly suggest that this material be covered over a two-class period. The first lecture can provide an overview of the sales promotion area, and reasons for the shift in marketing dollars to sales promotion and consumer-oriented sales promotion. The second lecture can cover trade promotion, the coordination of sales promotion with advertising and other promotional mix elements, and the problems of sales promotion abuse. In covering sales promotion, you may want to refer students back to Chapter 4 and the discussion of behavioral learning theory. The discussion of shaping procedures is particularly relevant to the use of sales promotion. A discussion of the shaping process is particularly helpful in showing how sales promotion techniques can be valuable in leading a consumer from trial of a new brand to regular purchase through the use of samples and coupons.

It is very important to discuss the increasing emphasis many companies are placing on sales promotions targeted to both consumers and trade and how it has come at the expense of media advertising. The instructor should point out the fact that sales promotion accounts for anywhere from 60 to 75 percent of the promotional budget of many consumer-product companies. It is also helpful to review some of the reasons for the increase in sales promotion and discuss whether this trend will continue. The instructor should review the various consumer- and trade-oriented sales promotion techniques along with their advantages and limitations. Students should be encouraged to evaluate these techniques as strategic and tactical promotional tools and to consider the reasons why marketers use them. We also feel that it is very important to discuss how sales promotion can and should be coordinated with the advertising program.

Figure 16-7 shows how the role of sales promotional agencies is changing and provides insight into how many firms are attempting to coordinate their advertising and promotional efforts.

It is important to clarify the differences between event marketing and event sponsorship, as the two are often confused. We discuss event marketing as a form of sales promotion, while event sponsorships are discussed in Chapter 17 as part of the public relations program. You might also want to review the information in Figure 16-5, which shows how sales promotion tools can be used to accomplish various marketing objectives and whether the extra consumer reward or incentive is immediate or delayed. Some attention should be given to the problem of sale promotion abuse and the number of companies that are becoming over-reliant on sales promotion for a short-term ―sales fix‖ rather than investing in the longterm image of the brand. Time should also be spent discussing the sales promotional trap shown in Figure 16-8.

To keep abreast of development in the sales promotion area you might refer to sources such as the Brand Activation Association, which is now part of the Association of National Advertisers (ANA) and has a very informative website (www.ana.net/content/show/id/brand-activation-info). Also available on their website is a link to the current years Reggie Awards winners, which provide a detailed analysis of these award-winning promotions including a marketing overview, objectives, strategy and tactics, results achieved, and a summary. They also contain examples of many of the ads and other types of promotional materials used in the promotion, and thus are an excellent source of information.

Answers to Discussion Questions 1. The chapter opener discusses the ―Whopper Detour‖ promotion used by Burger King to compete against McDonald’s. Analyze the strategy behind this promotion and the reasons it was so successful. Do you think Burger King could use this type of promotion again to attract business from other competitors in the fast food industry? (LO 16-1, 16-3)

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Burger King‘s Whopper Detour promoted the sale of Burger King‘s famous Whopper sandwiches by allowing any customer who had the Burger King app and was within 600 feet of their biggest competitor, McDonald‘s, to order a typically $4 sandwich for just one penny. Consumers had to place their order in the Burger King app, which then directed them to their nearest Burger King. This strategy took a great deal of tech savvy for Burger King‘s agency to implement as they had to geofence almost every McDonald‘s in the country and ensure that the GPS technology would work successfully once the promotion was launched. Since there are fewer Burger King stores in the country than McDonald‘s, Burger King‘s strategy leveraged the vast number of McDonald‘s stores but directed customers away from McDonald‘s and toward a Burger King. The campaign saw great success and showed that the brand was capable of powerful, big, creative ideas. While it may not have as significant of an impact, this is a promotion that Burger King could implement again with other competitors in the fast food industry, if their budget would allow for it. Geofencing, especially on such a large scale, is quite expensive so the budget feasibility would be something the brand would need to consider if attempting to implement another promotion such as this in the future.

2. IMC Perspective 16-1 discusses how many retailers have become overly dependent on discounts and promotions and the problems this has created for them. Discuss the reasons retailers have increased their reliance on discounts and promotions. How might they reduce their dependency on them to drive store traffic and sales? (LO 16-1, 16-5) A number of reasons have contributed to marketers overreliance on discounts and promotions. High levels of student and auto loan debts, rapidly increasing housing prices, and income inequality have all contributed to consumers shopping differently and preferring brands that offer promotional deals.

There has also been a consumer ―shift to thrift‖ where consumers are much more value- and priceconscious and are often not willing to pay a premium for brands in nearly any product category. Some marketing professionals have even said that the recession in the mid-2000s led to a permanent change in consumers‘ buying behaviors. Consumers no longer frequent malls and supercenters to spend excessively. When they do shop, consumers are now looking for a promotion, discount, or other way to save money. Some retailers have attempted to reduce their reliance on promotions and discounts by moving to everyday low pricing approaches. While some have been successful, others have seen closures or mergers to keep afloat. Marketers may attempt to very slowly move away from discounts and coupons, as the results of doing so quickly have been realized by retailers such as JCPenney.

3. Discuss the difference between consumer-oriented promotions and trade-oriented promotions and the role each plays in a marketers’ IMC program. What are the various objectives for each category of sales promotion? (LO 16-1, 16-2, 16-3) Consumer-oriented sales promotions are those targeted directly to consumers who are the ultimate buyers of products and services and are designed to provide them with an extra incentive to buy.

Trade-oriented promotions target marketing channel members such as distributors and retailers and are designed to motivate them to stock, display, and promote a product. Both consumer- and tradeoriented promotions are an important part of a firm‘s IMC program. In a very competitive market, consumers must often be provided with an extra incentive such as a coupon, bonus pack, premium, or price reduction to encourage them to choose one brand over another. Consumer-oriented promotions, along with advertising, are a very important part of marketers‘ ―pull strategy,‖ which creates demand for their brands. With the increasing amount of advertising clutter and many purchase decisions being made in the store, marketers must do more than just advertise to gain and hold market share. Tradeoriented promotions are also very important, as marketers must give attention to getting the channel members to stock, display and promote their brands. Much of the power in channels of distribution has shifted to the retailer and competition as limited amounts of shelf space have intensified. Thus, marketers must focus attention and effort on ―pushing‖ their products through the channels of distribution. Trade-oriented promotions are an important part of this strategy. The text discusses

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

objectives for both consumer and trade-oriented promotions and provides examples of specific sales promotion tools for achieving them.

4. Do you agree with those who argue that the use of sales promotion detracts from brand equity for many companies and/or brands? Evaluate the arguments on both sides of this issue. (LO 161, 16-5) There are some who claim that sales promotions detract from brand equity while others sing its praises. For those that believe it improves brand equity have been spending more on sales promotion as the promotion industry has matured over the past several decades. Increased sophistication and a more strategic role and focus have elevated the discipline and its role in the IMC program of many companies. There are also a number of other factors that have led to the increase in the importance of sales promotion and the shift in marketing dollars from media advertising to consumer and trade promotions. Among them are the growing power of retailers, declining brand loyalty, increased promotional sensitivity, brand proliferation, and fragmentation of the consumer market, short-term focus of many marketers, increased accountability, competition, and growth of digital and social media. However, there are some that argue that allocating more of the marketing budget to sales promotions may negatively affect brand equity. They say trade promotions in particular contribute to the erosion of brand equity as they encourage consumers to purchase primarily on the basis of price.

Marketers need to evaluate consumer responses to their use of sales promotion. They could evaluate consumer perceptions of the brand prior to and after the implementation of a promotional program to determine how the promotion could have impacted brand equity.

5. Retailer JCPenney encountered resistance when it tried to cut back on the use of promotions and move toward a "fair and square‖ everyday low pricing model. Why do you think JCP customers reacted so negatively to the retailer’s reduction in promotions? Do you think JCPenney should have given the new strategy more time so consumers could adapt before abandoning it? (LO 16-1, 16-5) The problem JCPenney encountered when it tried to abandon the use of coupons and other types of promotional discounts was more than likely a result of doing so too quickly rather than slowly weaning consumers off of them. Consumers had become accustomed to getting huge discounts from the retailer as JCP had been running nearly 600 sales and promotional events per year and nearly 75 percent of the company‘s revenue came from merchandise that was discounted by at least 50 percent, more than double the industry average. JCP‗s heavy reliance on promotions made consumers very dependent upon them. Thus, they were very upset when JCP tried to change its promotional program and move to a new pricing and promotion model that was being promoted as "fair and square‖ and designed to provide them with lower everyday prices rather utilizing so many promotions. The failure of JCPenney‘s effort to cut back on promotions is yet another example of the challenge retailers face when they try to wean consumers off promotions and discounts. Another problem to note with JCP‘s failed strategy is that it may have been too complex for consumers to understand the three-tiered pricing and promotion model the company was trying to implement. Consumers do not want to keep track of all of the promotion schedules for retailers and may have been upset when they were not receiving promotional offers and/or went to the store and learned that they were not getting the usual discounts they expected.

It is difficult to estimate how long it might have taken the new pricing and promotion strategy to take hold and make JCP shopper less reliant on promotions and more responsive to the everyday low pricing model. Some retailers such as Nordstrom‘s only run a few sales a year and thus consumers know that if they want to purchase an item sold there, they are going to have to pay full price or wait several months for it to go on sale, and of course run the risk that it may no longer be available.

JCPenney was still offering consumers a number of promotions and felt that the new strategy would

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

actually benefit most consumers by offering lower prices on a regular basis. JCP executives defended the new strategy and responded to investor concerns by arguing that it would take time for consumers to adjust to the changes as they had been conditioned to purchase merchandise that was on sale, offered at a discount, or for which they had a coupon. Students might argue that JCP needed to give the new strategy more than a few months and that the company pulled the plug on it too quickly.

However, it should be noted that JCP sales declined by 23 percent in 2012 while same-store sales (which is a very important metric for assessing retailer performance) declined by 25 percent. Thus, the company really had no choice but to terminate the ―fair and square‖ pricing strategy and to back to using more promotions and discounts. The company has continued to struggle even after going back to the heavy use of promotions and many analysts question whether JCP will be able to survive.

JCP hired a new CEO in 2016 and his goal is to make the retailer smarter and more efficient at keeping customers loyal and selling more merchandise to each one. His strategy includes getting JCP‘s 87 million active customers to spend more time shopping in its stores, building on its in-house brands, and overhauling its websites and shopping app to make it easier for in-store customers to find discounts and deals.

6. What is the difference between a consumer franchise-building promotion and a nonfranchisebuilding promotion? Find an example of a promotional offer being used by a company or brand that you believe contributes to the its equity of a brand and explain discuss how it does so. (LO 16-2) Consumer franchise-building promotions are those that are designed to communicate distinctive brand attributes and contribute to the development and reinforcement of brand identity and image.

They build long-term brand loyalty or preference and help the marketer achieve the ultimate goal of full-price purchase. Nonfranchise-building promotions are those that are designed to accelerate the purchase decision process and generate an immediate increase in sales. These promotions do little or nothing to communicate information about a brand‘s unique features or benefits and contribute very little, if any, to the building of brand identity and image.

Sales promotion has traditionally been viewed as an IMC tool that used to generate short-term sales increases, while brand building was viewed as the exclusive domain of media advertising. In fact, sales promotion was often criticized as undermining brand-building efforts as various tools such as coupons, price-off deals, and refunds or rebates were seen as encouraging consumers to buy based on price. Moreover, many marketers shifted their marketing dollars from media advertising to trade promotion over the past two decades. Much of these trade promotion discounts and allowances were never passed on to consumers while those that did were generally in the form of lower prices or special deals that again encouraged them to buy on the basis of price rather than brand equity.

Marketers have been changing the way they view sales promotion and realize that various forms of consumer promotion in particular can be used as a part of their brand-building efforts. As more marketers approach brand building from an IMC perspective, they are recognizing that sales promotion techniques can be used to help create and maintain brand equity. Marketers are developing contests and sweepstakes with themes that are consistent with the image of the brand. Premium offers are now designed to tie into the theme of an advertising campaign and the positioning strategy for a brand. Many marketers are now using frequency or loyalty programs that encourage repeat purchase but also provide opportunities to develop long-term relationships with customers. Event marketing is another form of promotion that has become very popular and provides marketers with the opportunity to associate their brands with certain lifestyle, activities, and experiences. As noted in the chapter, sales promotion specialists are now becoming an integral part of the brand-building team and work alongside the advertising group rather than being brought into the process after key strategic branding decisions have been made.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Students should find promotional offers that they feel are examples of each type and explain why.

Examples of nonfranchise-building promotions are not difficult to find as price-off deals, coupons, and refund offers usually fall into this category. Examples of franchise-building efforts might include a contest or sweepstakes that helps develop and strengthen a brand‘s image or position or promotional programs that encourage repeat purchase.

7. IMC Perspective 16-2 discusses the contest developed by Quaker Foods North America for Life cereal whereby parents could have their child considered for casting in a remake of the iconic ―Mikey Likes It!‖ commercial. Evaluate this promotion and its potential to contribute to brand equity for Life cereal. Do you think the promotion and the remake of the commercial will help increase sales for Life? (LO 16-2, 16-3) This promotion associates the brand with one of their most classic and high-performing campaigns. If the brand is still attempting to position themselves as a nutritious cereal that is tasty and kids enjoy eating, this will likely be another successful promotion. The use of crowdsourcing for talent with consumers rather than going to a traditional talent agency will help create buzz for the brand and interest in the advertising campaign. Additionally, as parents have to share personal information to enter the contest, the Quaker brand will be able to build their database and use the information obtained from this promotion to inform future marketing programs. For these reasons, a remake of the original commercial will likely be a beneficial effort for the Quaker brand.

8. Discuss the type of company or business that would be likely to offer discounts to consumers using Groupon. What are the pros and cons of a company using Groupon to make promotional offers and discounts to consumers? (LO 16-3, 16-5) Many businesses use Groupon and other services such as Living Social as a way to attract first-time customers in hope that they will return and become loyal customers who purchase at full price. For a deal to be profitable for a business, it must result in additional spending by consumers or repeat business and/or referrals. Groupon is moving from a demand fulfillment model, such as where it might try to increase a low level of demand for a product or service by pushing deals to consumers, to a demand-generation model where consumers go to its website, Facebook page, or mobile app to search for deals. The model is particularly popular among local businesses as it provides an incentive to consumers who might not otherwise purchase from them. Companies that have high profit margins can still make money as long as they cover the variable costs associated with the offer.

Local retailers, restaurants, health and beauty clubs and services, and entertainment companies can benefit from using Groupon as it can help drive traffic to a business and many of these customers will make additional purchases (such as alcoholic beverages in a restaurant). The downside of using Groupon is that it is expensive, as businesses that participate in the program must pay a percentage of their sales generated by the promotional deal, which can range from 30 to 50 percent. Many retailers and restaurants also are concerned over the type of consumers who use deals found on Groupon or Living Social, as they are often deal-prone consumers who do not spend additional money and do not make additional purchases at full price.

9. A report by a rebate fulfillment service showed that the average redemption rate for a $50 rebate on a product that costs $200 is only 35 percent. Why do you think redemption rates for rebates are so low? How might a low redemption rate affect a marketer’s decision to use rebates as a promotional tool? (LO 16-3) Redemption rates for rebates are low for a number of reasons. The primary reason is that many consumers simply do not submit the rebate forms as they view the process as a hassle. Most rebates require consumers to submit UPC codes printed on the packaging along with receipts (sometimes originals) by a certain time period. Consumers may lose their receipts, toss out the package with the

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

UPC code, or forget about the rebate. Some consumers simply decide they do not want to through the process of filing for a rebate, even when the amount is large. In some situations, consumer rebate applications may be denied because the forms were not filled out properly or there are problems with the receipt or UPC code. Rather continuing to pursue the rebate, they give up and do apply for it again. Finally, many rebate checks are never cashed as they may be lost or mistaken for junk mail and never opened.

The low redemption rates for rebates is encouraging more marketers to use them as they recognize that they can get consumers to focus on the discounted price for a product, but pay the full price.

Since a high percentage of rebates are not redeemed, this is essentially free money for the marketers.

Marketers recognize that many consumers never file for rebates and many rebate checks will not be cashed. Thus, a marketer who offers a $50 rebate for which the redemption rate is only 35 percent can achieve this price reduction for only $17.50 with the remaining $32.50 being extra profit. Marketers are now working with rebate fulfillment companies to estimate redemption rates and consider them in pricing their products and determining the amount of rebate offers.

10. Discuss the various types of trade promotions used by marketers, giving attention to the objectives as well as the pros and cons of each. (LO 16-3) Marketers use a variety of trade promotion tools to encourage channel members to carry and promote their products. These include contests and incentives, trade allowances, in-store and point-of-purchase displays, sales training programs, trade shows, and cooperative advertising programs. The use of the various types of trade promotions depends on the objectives of the marketer. These might include obtaining distribution for new products, maintaining distribution and trade support for established brands, encouraging retailers to display their brands at the retail level through in-store and point-ofpurchase displays, and building wholesaler and retailer inventories, which will encourage them to promote or push a brand to reduce inventory levels. The chapter discusses how the various trade promotion tools can be used to achieve these objectives.

11. What are the three major forms of cooperative advertising? Discuss how and when marketers might use each form of cooperative advertising. (LO 16-3) Cooperative advertising refers to advertising efforts where the cost of those efforts are shared by more than one party. The first type of cooperative advertising is horizontal cooperative advertising. This is advertising sponsored in common by a group of retailers or other organizations providing products or services to the market. It would be beneficial for marketers to use this type of advertising when they are close in proximity to one another. For example, a group of automobile dealers who are located right next to each other might benefit from cooperative advertising which simply seeks to bring or attract customers to the area. The second type of cooperative advertising is ingredient-sponsored cooperative advertising. The goal of this type of advertising is to help establish end products that include the company‘s materials and/or ingredients. Marketers would likely want to use this promotion if their product is something that is used by or in another product. The third type of cooperative advertising is vertical cooperative advertising. This is when a manufacturer pays for a portion of the advertising a retailer runs to promote the manufacturer‘s product and its availability in the retailer‘s place of business. An example of this might be a retailer such as a grocery store running an advertisement for a particular brand of cat food in a local newspaper and sharing the cost of that advertisement with the retailer.

12. What is meant by a sales promotion trap or spiral? Find an example of an industry or market where a promotional battle is taking place. What are the options for marketers companies in deciding whether to participate in the promotional battle? (LO 16-5)

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

A sales promotion trap or spiral occurs when competitors in an industry are making extensive use of sales promotions and an individual firm receives no differential advantage from doing so, but cannot stop because its competitive position will be affected. When firms are caught in a sales promotional trap, no one company gains from the use of promotions but the sales of an individual firm may decline if it does not continue to offer the promotional incentive. The fast food industry is a good example of an industry where promotional wars often occur. Nearly all fast-food chains now have dollar menus or 99 cent specials on items such as Whoppers (Burger King), Double Cheeseburgers or Chicken Sandwiches, (McDonald‘s), Jumbo Jacks (Jack in the Box), and tacos (Taco Bell). Since the fast-food chains have lowered their prices on these items, they have found it difficult to raise them back to normal levels. One of the competitors is always trying to use low priced specialty items as a draw for customers and as a way to increase market share.

Companies involved in a sales promotion trap have two basic options—cut back on promotions or maintain them. As shown in the matrix in Figure 16-8, if the company cuts back on promotions and other firms follow, the result should be higher profits for all. However, if the company cuts back on promotions and competitors maintain them, the company risks losing sales and market share to the other firms. If the company maintains promotions and other companies cut back, it may see a gain in sales or market share (assuming the market is promotionally sensitive). If all competitors maintain their promotions, market shares should stay constant and profits may be negatively impacted by the costs all companies are incurring to offer the promotional incentive.

Additional Discussion Questions (not discussed in text) 13. Discuss how sales promotion can be used as an acceleration tool to speed up the selling and/or purchasing process and maximize a company’s sales volume. (LO 16-1) There are several ways sales promotion can be used as an acceleration tool to speed up the sales process and maximize sales volume. Consumer promotion tools such as premiums, bonus packs, and price-off deals provide an extra incentive that may motivate consumers to take more immediate action. Coupons usually have expiration dates that require consumers to use them during a specific time period, which is another way of accelerating the purchase process. Marketers often use techniques such as in-store sampling programs that may be accompanied by a discount coupon and thus encourage immediate purchase. Trade promotions can also accelerate the selling process with retailers. For example, retailers who take advantage of an off-invoice allowance often pass the savings on to consumers in the form of a price reduction, which encourages them to purchase the brand. Promotional allowances are given to retailers for performing certain promotional or merchandising activities such as providing special displays, running in-store promotional programs, or including the marketer‘s brand in an ad. These activities will help generate sales volume and encourage immediate purchases by consumers.

14. Discuss how samples and coupons can be used to generate trial of a new product or increase consumption of an established brand. (LO 16-3) Both samples and coupons are very effective for generating trial of a new brand of a product or service. Samples are obviously effective as the majority of consumers who receive one either use it immediately or save it to use sometime later. Samples of a new brand provide consumers a risk-free opportunity to use and experience the benefits and outcomes of the product. This can be very important when product‘s features and benefits are difficult to describe through advertising. Coupons are also an effective way to generate trial of a new brand and are second only to sampling for this purpose. Coupons are effective because they lower the price of a product, thus reducing the consumers‘ perceived risk associated with trial of the product. Samples and coupons are often used

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

together to encourage trial and repeat purchase as coupons are often included with samples delivered to consumers. The free sample provides consumers with an opportunity to try a brand with no obligation while a coupon encourages them to purchase the brand at a reduced cost, which provides even more opportunity to experience the benefits associated with it.

Samples can also be a way to increase consumption of an established brand. Marketers are often interested in attracting nonusers or users of a competitive brand and getting them to try their products.

This is often done if a significant modification and/or improvement is made to the brand such as improving its taste, performance, efficacy, and the like. Samples are an effective way of getting consumers to try a brand and compare it against the one they currently use. Coupons can also be a way to increase consumption of an established brand. They can be used to encourage nonusers to tray a brand, encourage repeat purchase among current users, and get consumer to try an improved version of a brand. They can also be an effective way to encourage consumers to trade up to more expensive brands.

15. What is a slotting allowance or fee? Evaluate the arguments for and against retailers charging slotting fees to manufacturers. (LO 16-3) A slotting allowance is a fee that must be paid to retailers to provide a ―slot‖ or position to accommodate a new product in their stores. Retailers argue slotting fees are justified because there are costs associated with taking on a new product such as redesigning store shelves, entering the product into their computers, finding warehouse space, and informing store employees of the new item. They also argue that they are assuming some risk in taking on a new product since a high percentage of new product introductions fail.

Manufacturers argue that slotting fees are not justified, as it really does not cost manufacturers that much money to take on a new product. Critics argue that these fees are excessive and end up going to the bottom line of the retailers. They argue that these fees are another way retailers are extracting money from manufacturers and really are a form of bribery or blackmail that has to be paid to get a new brand on the retailer‘s shelves.

16. Discuss how mobile marketing is impacting marketers’ use of sales promotion. (LO 16-1, LO 16-2) Marketers have been bombarding consumers with promotional offers for years, with most of the coupons and promotional offers being made through traditional methods such as FSIs in Sunday newspapers, media advertising, and direct-mail packets sent directly to consumers‘ homes. However, with the growth on the Internet most companies are integrating their sales promotion efforts with their digital marketing efforts and using the Internet and social media to make various promotional offers available to consumers. Marketers promote contests and sweepstakes on their websites, as well as through their Facebook and Twitter pages, and consumers can enter them online. These companies promote their contests and sweepstakes offline through traditional media and encourage consumers to visit their websites or social media pages to learn more about these promotions and to enter. Many companies also include premium offers on their websites and consumers can order merchandise online. Some companies such as airlines, car rental companies, and hotel/motel chains run special offers that are only available online and provide consumers with extra incentives to make reservations or purchases through the Internet. Marketers also use sales promotion offers as a way to encourage consumers to like their company and/or brands on Facebook or follow them on Twitter. Studies have shown that a high percentage of consumers like a company or brand on Facebook or follow them on Twitter to receive discounts and promotions.

Many marketers are now sending promotional offers such as coupons and discount codes directly to mobile devices such as smartphones. They recognize that consumers have become very reliant upon

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

their smartphones to assist them in the shopping process and will seek out coupons and discounts from a number of sites, often while in a store. Mobile marketing also relies heavily on sales promotion by providing consumers with discounts or deals based on their location. Mobile marketing will become an even more important part of marketers‘ IMC programs because they recognize that mobile now represents nearly two-third of all digital media time for people online, with mobile apps dominating that usage.

17. The chapter discusses the contest Unilever and its ad agency developed to launch the new Axe Apollo men’s personal care product line. Evaluate this contest as a consumer franchise-building promotion for the Axe Apollo brand. (LO 16-2) Building and/or maintaining brand equity is an important goal for marketers as they develop their sales promotion strategies and many companies are finding that contests are an excellent way to accomplish these objectives. Contests are a very good way to engage consumers with about a brand and get them to think about how it might be of value to them or to pay attention to specific features and benefits. They also can be a way of creating interest and excitement in a brand and get them to focus on the brand and what it represents or can do rather than just the prize they might win. One way a contest can be used to build brand equity is by developing a theme that is consistent with the image of the brand and helps reinforce the positioning or branding message.

The contest developed for the launch of Unilever‘s new Axe Apollo line of men‘s grooming products is a very good example of a consumer franchise building promotion as it played a central role in the branding and positioning of the new product. The branding strategy behind the new Axe Apollo line was built around the emerging reality of space tourism and the traditional perception many people have of astronauts as heroes. The advertising and promotion for the Axe line has always been about giving young men confidence and showing how using the brand can make them more attractive to women. Unilever took this idea even further by aligning the new Axe brand with the space theme and branding it as Apollo, which is the name for the third American human spaceflight program sponsored by NASA. The global IMC campaign used to introduce the Apollo product line included a contest offering consumers a chance to win a flight on the Lynx suborbital plane, which will last about one hour, reach an altitude of 64 miles, and provide a weightlessness experience of about five minutes before descending back to Earth This promotion is an excellent example of how marketers can develop a sales promotion such as a contest that contributes to the development of brand identity and reinforces the positioning theme for a product.

18. Evaluate the effectiveness of coupons as a sales promotion tool. How would you respond to critics who argue that they are inefficient since less than 2 percent of coupons are redeemed?

(LO 16-3) Coupons are one of the most popular and most effective sales promotion tools used by marketers.

However, their efficiency is often criticized as the redemption rates for coupons is very low and there are significant costs associated with their use. There are a number of reasons why marketers have been questioning the economic feasibility of coupons. Coupons have become very expensive to print, distribute and process and a number of marketers have begun taking a very close look at their efficiency. As shown in Figure 16-3, the costs of a couponing program is very high as it may cost as much as $1.90 per product moved. Many marketers also feel that consumers are less willing to take time to clip and save coupons and during good economic times, they are even less likely to use them.

Many companies only use coupons because their competitors do so. Companies may continue to cut back on coupons as their competitors do the same. Another important factor is the reactions of the trade. Many supermarkets are on board with companies who are cutting back on the use of coupons and are interested in eliminating the costly operational aspect of processing coupons in exchange for other types of programs that better meet their needs. Many marketers feel they can compete without

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

coupons by shifting their promotional dollars to other areas such as sampling or in-store distribution or by offering consumers every day lower prices.

It is unlikely that marketers will totally eliminate their use of coupons, as they are still very important in generating new-product trial and brand conversion. In fact, during the recent recession coupons became very popular with consumers as 332 billion were distributed and 3.3 billion redeemed in 2010. As the economy recovered, the number of coupons distributed declined to 258 billion in 2018, with 1.7 billion being redeemed. However, there is still a large segment of consumers who are regular coupon users and might switch to another brand that offers coupons. Marketers must continue to strive to improve the efficiency of their couponing programs by using techniques such as universal coupons, shorter expiration periods and more effective targeting when distributing coupons. They are also likely to use coupons more as part of account specific marketing programs developed in conjunction with a particular retailer.

19. What are some of the problems marketers face in using contests and sweepstakes? Discuss steps they can take to avoid these problems. (LO 16-3) While the use of contests and sweepstakes continues to increase, there are some problems associated with these types of promotions. Many sweepstakes and/or contest promotions do little to contribute to consumer franchise building for a product or service and may even detract from it. The sweepstakes or contest often becomes the dominant focus rather than the brand, and little is accomplished other than giving away substantial amounts of money and/or prizes. Many promotional experts question the effectiveness of contests and sweepstakes. Some companies have cut back or even stopped using them because of concern over their effectiveness and fears that consumers might become dependent on them.

Another problem with contests and sweepstakes is the participation in them by hobbyists who submit entries but have no real interest in the product or service. Because most states make it illegal to require a purchase as a qualification for a sweepstakes entry, consumers can enter as many times as they wish. Entrants may enter a sweepstakes numerous times, depending on the nature of the prizes and the number of entries allowed. There are numerous websites on the Internet such as sweepsadvantage.com that inform consumers of all of the contests and sweepstakes being held, the entry dates, estimated probabilities of winning, how to enter, and solutions to any puzzles or other information that might be needed. The presence of the professional entrants not only defeats the purpose of the promotion but also may discourage entries from consumers who feel that their chances of winning are limited.

Numerous legal considerations affect the design and administration of contests and sweepstakes.

These promotions are regulated by several federal agencies, and each of the 50 states has its own rules. The regulation of contests and sweepstakes has helped clean up the abuses that plagued the industry for many years and has improved consumers‘ perceptions of these promotions. However, companies must still be careful in designing a contest or sweepstakes and awarding prizes.

CHAPTER 17 PUBLIC RELATIONS, PUBLICITY, AND CORPORATE ADVERTISING

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Chapter Overview Public relations (PR), publicity, and corporate advertising are ways by which information about the organization, its products, and/or its services may be communicated. Like the program elements discussed thus far, the marketer will attempt to use these tools to benefit the firm and its offerings. At the same time, these promotional mix elements are generally used in a different way in that they are not always designed to promote a specific product or service. Rather, they may be used to promote the organization as a whole, a cause or position advocated by the organization, or to create goodwill in the marketplace. In addition, at least one of these elements—publicity—is not always in the control of the marketer. Thus, while it may be possible to affect publicity in some situations, in many others the marketer may have to assume a reactive posture. This chapter discusses each of these program elements, and expands on the changing role of public relations.

Learning Objectives 1.

Describe the roles of public relations, publicity, and corporate advertising in the promotional mix.

2.

Compare the advantages, disadvantages, and effectiveness of public relations and publicity.

3.

Discuss the advantages, disadvantages, and effectiveness of corporate advertising.

4.

Compare the different forms of corporate advertising.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Chapter and Lecture Outline I.

PUBLIC RELATIONS

A.

The Traditional Definition of PR—The chapter begins by differentiating between the traditional role of public relations and the new one. Public relations (PR) is defined as the management function which evaluates public attitudes, identifies the policies and procedures of an organization with the public interest, and executes a program of action (and communication) to earn public understanding and acceptance. The text also outlines the series of stages required in the practice of public relations including: 1) the determination and evaluation of public attitudes; 2) the identification of policies and procedures of an organization with a public interest; and 3) the development and execution of a communications program designed to bring about public understanding and acceptance.

B.

The New Role of PR—The new role assumes a much broader, and more marketing-oriented, perspective. In the new orientation, the public relations department operates in close communication with the marketing department (rather than as separate entities) to develop programs and policies.

C.

Integrating PR into the Promotional Mix—The chapter takes the position that the activities of the public relations department must be coordinated with marketing, and integrated into the overall promotional mix.

D.

Marketing Public Relations (MPR) Functions—Public relations activities designed to support marketing objectives are called marketing public relations (MPR) functions. The text discusses the numerous ways that MPR adds value to the integrated marketing program: ●

Building marketplace excitement before media advertising breaks—The announcement of a new product, for example, is an opportunity for the marketer to obtain publicity and to dramatize the product, thereby increasing the effectiveness of ads.

●

Improving ROI—By reducing overall marketing costs, while at the same time delivering meaningful marketing outcomes, MPR helps improve ROI.

●

Creating advertising news where there is no product news—Ads themselves can sometimes be the focus of publicity.

●

Introducing a product with little or no advertising—A strategy that has been successfully implemented by a number of major brands.

●

Providing a value-added customer service—Providing additional services to aid consumers in the purchase and consumption of a product.

●

Building brand-to-customer bonds—Events and contests that help build a relationship with the brand.

●

Influencing the influentials—Providing information to opinion leaders.

●

Defending products at risk and giving consumers a reason to buy—By taking constructive actions to defend or promote a company‘s products, PR can actually give consumers a reason to buy the products.

A number of advantages and disadvantages of MPR are shown in Figure 17-2.

Professor Notes:

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

II.

THE PROCESS OF PUBLIC RELATIONS

The actual process of conducting public relations will require a number of tasks. These tasks will involve both traditional and new role activities.

A.

Determining and Evaluating Public Attitudes—The first step in the public relations process is to determine the public‘s existing attitudes toward the firm and/or its products or about specific issues. Four reasons are given to explain why this step is necessary: ●

It provides input into the planning process. Once the firm has determined public attitudes, they become the starting point in the development of programs designed to maintain favorable positions or change unfavorable ones.

●

It serves as an ―early warning system.‖ In conducting research, firms are able to identify problems or potential problems and handle them before they become more serious issues.

●

It secures support internally. If a problem exists and is identified early on, PR practitioners will be able to more easily garner internal support to fix the problem.

●

It increases the effectiveness of the communication. The better it understands a problem, the better the firm can design communications to deal with it.

B.

Establishing a PR Plan—Too many firms do not establish a formalized public relations plan. As a result, actions tend to be more reactive than proactive. A formal plan—coordinated with marketing—needs to be developed. Figure 17-3 outlines a number of questions to ask in the planning process and a proposed four-step planning process is identified including: (1) defining public relations problems, (2) planning and programming, (3) taking action and communicating and (4) evaluating the program.

C.

Developing and Executing the PR Program—A number of activities must be conducted once the plan has been established.

1. Determining relevant target audiences—Target audiences may be categorized as internal or external.

Internal audiences include: •

Employees of the firm.

•

Stockholders and investors.

•

Community members.

•

Suppliers and customers.

External audiences are those people not closely connected with the organization and may include: •

The media.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

•

Educators.

•

Civic and business organizations.

•

Governments.

•

Financial groups.

A number of examples for communicating with both internal and external audiences are provided in this section of the chapter.

2. Implementing the PR program—Once the target audience has been established, and objectives established, a number of tools may be used for implementation or delivery including:

D.

●

The press release—A press release communicates with the press and public and can do certain things to improve the likelihood that the ―news‖ will be disseminated, such as ensuring that it reaches the right target audience, making it interesting, and making it easy to pass along.

●

Press conferences—Companies often call press conferences when they have significant news to announce, such as the introduction of a new product or advertising campaign.

●

Exclusives—Exclusives involve offering one particular medium exclusive rights to the story if that medium reaches a substantial number of people in the target audience.

●

Interviews—Personal interviews with spokespeople or top management.

●

Community involvement—Community involvement may take many forms, including membership in local organizations like the Kiwanis or Jaycees and contributions to or participation in community events.

●

The Internet—Many companies have used the Web to establish media relations and government, investor, and community relationships; to deal with crises; and even to conduct cause marketing. Companies have also used their websites to address issues, as well as to provide information about products and services, archive press releases, link to other articles and sites, and provide lists of activities and events.

●

Social networks and blogs—Many employed in PR consider themselves employed in a new form of PR referred to as digital public relations, which is an intersection between traditional public relations activities and new activities that incorporate digital marketing functions like SEO, social media, and influencer marketing.

Advantages and Disadvantages of Public Relations—The text lists a number of advantages and disadvantages associated with the use of public relations.

Advantages include: •

Credibility—Because public relations communications are not perceived in the same light as advertising, they tend to have more credibility.

•

Cost—The cost of PR is very low, especially when possible effects of PR are considered.

•

Avoidance of clutter—Because they are typically perceived as news items, public relations messages are not subject to the clutter of ads.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

•

Lead generation—Information about technological innovations, medical breakthroughs, and the like results almost immediately in a multitude of inquiries. These inquiries may give the firm some quality sales leads.

•

Ability to reach specific groups—If the firm does not have the financial capabilities to engage in promotional expenditures, the best way to communicate to niche or specific groups is through public relations.

•

Image building—Effective public relations helps develop a positive image for the organization.

The key to effective public relations is to establish a good program, worthy of public interest, and to manage it properly. To determine if this program is working, the firm must measure the effectiveness of the PR effort.

E.

Measuring the Effectiveness of PR—As with the other promotional program elements, it is important to evaluate the effectiveness of the public relations efforts. In addition to determining the contribution of this program element to attaining communications objectives, the evaluation offers other advantages: •

It tells management what has been achieved through public relations activities.

•

It provides management with a way to measure public relations achievements quantitatively.

•

It gives management a way to judge the quality of public relations achievements and activities.

According to the Public Relations Society of America, organizations that understand and subscribe to the benefits of public relations evaluation can effectively: ●

Validate the results of their efforts.

●

Link the results to business outcomes that further the realization of organizational goals.

●

Credibly merchandise the impact of the results to those who fund PR programs.

●

Set smarter objectives, develop better strategies, and employ more compelling and engaging tactics.

●

Make midcourse adjustments and corrections.

●

Regularly adapt their measurement approaches based on changing objectives, new competitors, and emerging best practices.

Professor Notes:

McGraw-Hill Connect ®: Managing Google’s Public Relations

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Type of Activity: Case Analysis Activity Summary: In this activity, students are provided with a case about Google‘s use of public relations. Then, students are tasked with answering questions relating to the traditional and new roles of PR. Activity Learning Objective: 17-02 Compare the advantages, disadvantages, and effectiveness of public relations and publicity.

Concept Review: This is a good opportunity to review the traditional definition of PR and PR‘s new role, as described in the beginning of the chapter.

Difficulty: 2 Medium Bloom‘s: Apply AACSB: Analytical Thinking

McGraw-Hill Connect ®: Advantages and Disadvantages of Corporate Advertising Type of Activity: Matching (Click and Drag) Activity Summary: This activity asks students to match the applications provided with the advantages and disadvantages of corporate advertising.

Activity Learning Objective: 17-03 Discuss the advantages, disadvantages, and effectiveness of corporate advertising.

Concept Review: The advantages of corporate advertising include that it is an excellent vehicle for positioning the firm; it takes advantage of the benefits derived from PR; and it reaches a select target market. The disadvantages include questionable effectiveness, and constitutionality and/or ethics of corporate advertising.

Difficulty: 2 Medium Bloom‘s: Apply AACSB: Analytical Thinking

III.

PUBLICITY

The text provides a definition of publicity and notes that the distinction between publicity and public relations is not always clear. Publicity refers to the generation of news about a person, product, or service that appears in broadcast digital or print media. The dissemination of publicity is a task that is the

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

responsibility of the public relations department, as is the development of programs to deal with publicity originating from other sources. At the same time, public relations activities are under the control of the firm. The same cannot always be said for publicity.

A.

The Power of Publicity—The text provides information for discussion of how companies handle negative publicity. At one point, BP‘s stock dropped to less than one-half of what it was prior to the Gulf spill. Samsung's value declined by billions of dollars when it suffered negative publicity as a result of its exploding cell phone batteries. For example, publicity regarding a breakthrough in the durability of golf balls will go far to promote them if it is reported by Golf magazine. Car & Driver‘s award for car of the year reflects the magazine‘s perception of the quality of the auto selected. Given this power, the firm must have programs in place to capitalize on or control and minimize the effects of these messages.

B.

The Control and Dissemination of Publicity—While the marketer may not be able to control all publicity, it is possible to impact these communications in a number of ways. For example, press releases, or ―leaks‖ may be used to make sure that the information gets out. Publicity can also be managed or turned around to be used as an advantage. Publicity also works for marketers.

Marketers like to have as much control as possible over the time and place where information is released. One way to do this is with the video news release (VNR), a publicity piece produced by publicists so that stations can air it as a news story. The videos almost never mention that they are produced by the subject organization, and most news stations don‘t mention it either.

C.

Advantages and Disadvantages of Publicity.

1. Lack of control—In the viral world today, there is little control of what information is conveyed. Social networks, blogs, and so on have expanded the number of recipients of messages, while at the same time opening up the information stream to sources that are not confined by standards that may be imposed on traditional media.

2. Timing—The timing of a press release is entirely up to the media.

3. Accuracy—Issues with translation from press release to publicity piece often result in inaccurate information.

Professor Notes:

IV.

CORPORATE ADVERTISING

A firm‘s advertising is not always designed to promote a specific product or service. Corporate advertising is designed to promote the firm overall—either by enhancing its image, assuming a position on a social issue or cause, or seeking direct involvement from the market. As noted in the text, this form of advertising is often considered controversial and/or of dubious benefit to the firm. A number of reasons for the controversial perception of corporate advertising are provided in this section of the chapter.

A.

Objectives of Corporate Advertising—Two specific objectives for using corporate advertising have been provided: (1) creating a positive image for the firm and (2) communication of the organization‘s views on social, business and environmental issues. In addition, three more specific applications are listed including:

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

●

Boosting employee morale and smoothing labor relations.

●

Helping newly deregulated industries ease consumer uncertainty and answer investor questions.

●

Helping diversified companies establish an identity for the parent firm rather than relying solely on brand names.

McGraw-Hill Connect ®: Types of Corporate Advertising Type of Activity: Click and Drag Activity Summary: In this activity, students will read an overview of corporate advertising. Then they will match the types of corporate advertising with the characteristics of each strategy.

Activity Learning Objective: 17-04 Compare the different forms of corporate advertising.

Concept Review: Corporate advertising was described as controversial, largely because the source of the message is top management, so the rules for other advertising and promoting forms are often not applied. This element of communication definitely has its place in the promotional mix. But to be effective, it must be used with each of the other elements, with specific communications objectives in mind.

Difficulty: 2 Medium Bloom‘s: Understand AACSB: Analytical Thinking

B.

Types of Corporate Advertising—Various types of corporate advertising are described.

1. Image advertising—Advertising designed to promote the organization‘s overall image may include: •

General image or positioning ads—Ads designed to create an image of the firm in mind.

•

Sponsorships—Firms often run corporate image advertising on TV programs or specials.

•

Recruiting—Image advertising designed to attract new employees.

•

Generating financial support—Some corporate advertising is designed to generate investments in the corporation.

2. Event sponsorships—Anything from apparel and equipment (Under Armour sponsors men‘s and women‘s teams in a variety of sports, and at all levels) to concerts, stadiums, and college football bowl games are now commonly used for corporate sponsorship. Like any other relationship, however, risks must be assumed by both sides in such agreements.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

3. Advocacy advertising—This form of advertising is designed to promote the organization through the taking of a position on an issue rather than through the promotion of the firm directly. Exhibit 17-17 is an example of the use of this form of advertising. Another form of advocacy advertising, issue ads, are increasingly appearing in the media and an example is shown in Exhibit 17-18.

4. Cause-related advertising—An increasingly popular method of image building is causerelated marketing, in which companies link with charities or nonprofit organizations as contributing sponsors (see Exhibit 17-20).

C.

Advantages and Disadvantages of Corporate Advertising—As noted, corporate advertising is not considered to be of value by all advertisers. Those citing advantages of this form of advertising argue that it offers an excellent means for positioning the firm, that it takes advantage of the benefits derived from public relations and is a way of reaching target markets not reached through other forms of advertising. Critics charge that it is of questionable effectiveness, and that it may be ethically wrong.

D.

Measuring the Effectiveness of Corporate Advertising—The effectiveness of corporate advertising may be measured through the employment of some of the methods discussed earlier in the chapter. In addition, attitude surveys, studies relating corporate advertising and stock prices, and focus group research may also be employed in this regard.

Professor Notes:

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Teaching Suggestions As in the previous chapter, this chapter can be supplemented and developed in more detail according to the needs of the instructor. A number of good public relations texts are available. In addition to lecturing on the three topics, it is possible to generate a great deal of class discussion. A multitude of public relations and corporate advertising examples can be found, and the discussion of the impact (and examples) of publicity can also stimulate a great deal of student interest.

We have found that the issue of corporate advertising, particularly advocacy advertising, provides a great topic for debate. Students might be encouraged to take one position or another and discuss the issues, providing examples to support their arguments.

Finally, some time should be spent on the discussion of the new role of public relations. While there has been more and more emphasis on this IMC program element, is it as powerful a tool as many contend? A good discussion of the Ries and Ries book The Fall of Advertising and the Rise of PR could follow.

Answers to Discussion Questions 1. Discuss the three levels of effectiveness described in the framework provided by Cision in Figure 17-4. Give an example of each of the three levels. (LO 17-2) Cision‘s framework involves a communication funnel consisting of three levels. The first is brand impact, which examines how one‘s brand is perceived in the marketplace. Brand impact consists of three categories including awareness, mindshare, and reputation. An example of assessing mindshare would be tracking trends in online mentions and share of voice such as through counting competitors‘ mentions compared to your own mentions. The second facet of Cision‘s communications funnel for digital public relations includes digital impact, which refers to the PR coverage driving traffic to the brand‘s website or other digital properties. In other words, what actions are the visitors taking? These actions include assessing website traffic, SEO impact, and social amplification. An example of website traffic would be tracking how many visits PR specifically drives to the website such as by measuring the percentage PR drives to the site versus overall site traffics and using these traffic measures to determine if a PR effort should be considered effective. The third facet of Cision‘s communications funnel for digital public relations is an assessment of the bottom line. This involves taking behavioral measures such as sales, donations, and business transactions to determine whether they were influenced by the PR effort. An example of this would be using analytics provided from systems such as Hubspot or Marketo to determine conversions, revenue, etc.

2. Discuss why publicity (positive or negative) can be so powerful. Cite examples of both positive and negative publicity’s impact on brands, products, etc. (LO 17-1) Publicity has the unique ability to generate communication at a much more powerful rate than any other program elements. There are several reasons cited for publicity‘s powerful influence. Publicity is highly credible and not seen as being sponsored by a company and therefore consumers evaluate the information as more objective. Marketers, however, have not always realized the power of publicity. Additionally, publicity information may be perceived as endorsed by the medium in which it appears. Finally, another reason for publicity‘s power is its news value and the frequency of exposure it generates. BP‘s response to their oil spoil in the Gulf in 2010, Samsung‘s response when their phone batteries were exploding, and Papa John‘s CEO‘s actions after he was ousted for making a racial slur are all examples of negative publicity‘s impact on brands/products. Tree Top‘s response using publicity amid allegations that one of their chemicals used by their growers caused cancer, and

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Budweiser‘s response when they were accused of watering down their beer provide good examples of the positives stemming from the proper use of publicity.

3. Exhibit 17-18 shows an issue ad in opposition to JUUL, the vaping brand. It also shows JUUL’s ad supporting a raise in the legal age necessary to purchase vapor products. Both ads were run at approximately the same time. Give your opinion as to the motivations behind the JUUL ad.

(LO 17-4) The Campaign for Tobacco-Free Kids ran an advertisement in many newspapers calling out the JUUL brand for targeting kids with their products and flavor varieties. At the same time, JUUL themselves ran an advertisement saying that it was time to raise the legal age for purchasing tobacco products, including vapor. The advertisement appears to be defensive in nature or was perhaps an attempt to get ahead of the release of the Campaign for Tobacco-Free Kids campaign. These are both examples of advocacy advertising, which is concerned with propagating ideas and elucidating controversial social issues of public importance in a manner that supports the interests of the sponsor.

JUUL could have been using this ad as part of their corporate social responsibility efforts to show that they really aren‘t trying to target children with their products, but rather are attempting to do quite the opposite and are advocating for the age to be raised.

4. Provide a number of examples of issue ads. Were these ads effective? Why or why not? (LO 174) Issue ads are similar to advocacy advertising except issue ads may have no affiliation with a corporate or trade sponsor but may be sponsored by an organization to bring attention to what they consider to be an important issue. One example of an issue ad was the Humane Society of the United States ad that they placed with the headline, ―Why Won‘t Trader Joe‘s Give an Inch.‖ This issue ad was extremely effective as Trader Joe‘s customers got involved and led the company to publicly announce that it would convert all of its brand eggs to cage free within three months. Another example of social issue ads could be ads against school shootings or drunk driving sponsored by parental groups in support of advocating for these particular issues. The JUUL example provided in the text is another example of issue advertising that was likely effective as the legal age to purchase tobacco and vaping products has now been raised to 21 instead of 18.

5. Companies that establish very positive reputations tend to maintain these reputations over time. What are some of the things that these companies do to maintain these positions? (LO 171) Image advertising seeks to promote the organization‘s overall image and aids in accomplishing important objectives such as creating good will both internally and externally, creating a position for the company, and generating human and financial resources. The methods used in effective image advertising include general image or positioning ads that attempt to create an image of the firm in consumer‘s minds; sponsorships in which firms run corporate image advertising on TV programs or specials or sponsoring sporting events; recruiting talented employees; and generating financial support through the use of corporate advertising that is designed to generate investments in the corporation.

6. The chapter discusses a number of public relations blunders, many of which might have been avoided with due diligence. Explain why these mistakes occur and who is ultimately responsible. (LO 17-2) In some instances, it is the firm‘s own blunder that allows information to leak out. Companies such as VW, Samsung and BP could do nothing to stop the media from releasing negative information about them. When publicity becomes news, it is reported by the media, sometimes despite efforts by the

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

firm. In these instances, the organization needs to react to the potential threat created by the news.

Unfortunately, simply ignoring the problem will not make it go away. Marketers like to have as much control as possible over the time and place where information is released. A number of persons are responsible for these events. For example, in the 2017 Pepsi commercial blunder, apparently no one pretested the ad. It was then signed off on and the results were quite negative. In the same year, a phone video was shown of a man being dragged off a United Airlines plane for refusing to give up his seat in an oversold flight. While the flight attendants followed protocol, they didn‘t use common sense. United has lost millions of dollars as a result.

7. What impact do you think the millennial generation will have on cause marketing, issue advertising, and advocacy advertising? Explain your reasoning. (LO 17-1) Millennials appear to be more environmentally sensitive than other cohorts. They also appear to be more conscious of what they eat. If this is true, one would expect them to be much more active in these forms of advertising, protesting, etc. They litter less, smoke less, buy more organic foods, and in general are concerned about others. On the other hand, they do not appear to be as newsworthy. It is hard to say what the overall impact will be, but if they live up to what everyone thinks they will be, we should see an increase in this form of marketing.

8. Explain the differences between traditional and the new public relations objectives (MPRs).

What are the advantages and disadvantages of each? (LO 17-2) The Traditional Definition of PR—The chapter begins by differentiating between the traditional role of public relations and the new role. The traditional role reflects a management function that has as its primary responsibility the goal of communicating and the gaining acceptance of the organization‘s policies and programs within its various communities.

The new role assumes a much broader, and more marketing-oriented, perspective. In the new orientation, the public relations department operates in close communication with the marketing department (rather than as separate entities) to develop programs and policies.

As shown in Figure 17–2, Harris notes that there are a number of advantages and disadvantages of using MPRs. 9. Describe some of the measures used to measure public relations effectiveness. Critique these and provide an overall critique of their validity. (LO 17-4) Once the research has been conducted and the target audiences identified, the public relations program must be developed and delivered to the receivers. A number of PR tools are available for this purpose, including the press release, press conferences, exclusives, interviews, community involvement, the Internet, and social networks and blogs.

In addition to determining the contribution of this program element to attaining communications objectives, the evaluation offers other advantages: ●

It tells management what has been achieved through public relations activities.

●

It provides management with a way to measure public relations achievements quantitatively.

●

It gives management a way to judge the quality of public relations achievements and activities.

According to the Public Relations Society of America, organizations that understand and subscribe to the benefits of public relations evaluation can effectively:

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

●

Validate the results of their efforts.

●

Link the results to business outcomes that further the realization of organizational goals.

●

Credibly merchandise the impact of the results to those who fund PR programs.

●

Set smarter objectives, develop better strategies, and employ more compelling and engaging tactics.

●

Make midcourse adjustments and corrections.

●

Regularly adapt their measurement approaches based on changing objectives, new competitors, and emerging best practices.

10. Describe the conflict between traditional PR agencies and those that see PR as more of a marketing function. Cite reasons why each of these groups holds the position it does. Who is right? (LO 17-1) The lead-in to this chapter demonstrates the changing role that public relations now plays in the IMC programs of small companies to major corporations. In the examples provided, you can see that from a more traditional and philanthropic perspective, marketers stand to gain through the use of this medium. At the same time, public relations has now assumed a much more important role in IMC programs. This role is less philanthropic and much more marketing-oriented. Like every other aspect of IMC, the public relations function has been changed significantly by digital and social media.

Simply put, news travels faster and wider now for most companies and organizations. As a result, the role of public relations and the importance of managing publicity has taken an increased importance.

Additional Discussion Questions (not in text) 11. The chapter discusses the lack of coordination that often exists between marketing and public relations departments. Discuss some of the reasons this might occur. What can be done to reduce this conflict to achieve greater coordination? (LO 17-1) One of the difficulties in implementing an IMC program is the fact that many of the communications functions operate as silos rather than in an integrated manner. Perhaps the best example of this is the marketing-public relations divide.

Marketers are trained in business schools; PR people in Journalism and/or Communications schools.

They do not always perceive the world the same. Not only that but they have been educated to do different jobs. PR people (rightfully) do not see their responsibilities as including marketing products.

A problem associated with MPR is that it dilutes the credibility of PR, or at least has the potential to do so. Therefore, many would argue that marketing and public relations should remain separate.

While there are good arguments on both sides, the bottom line is what is best for the organization or corporation. In a well-functioning organization, PR needs to understand the role of marketing and vice versa. Both must recognize that working together is for the betterment of the organization. Thus by getting both parties to understand what the others do and why, many of the barriers to effective communications will be eliminated.

12. Examine a number of examples of different types of sponsorships corporations are currently engaging. Analyze the reason for the sponsorship, and evaluate whether it employs a wise strategy or not. (LO 17-3)

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Sponsorships are clearly on the increase—particularly in sports and entertainment. Many companies sponsor NASCAR. Others sponsor NCAA college football games (PlayStation Fiesta Bowl, Capital One Orange Bowl, AdvoCare Texas Bowl). Buick sponsors golf tournaments and Verizon sponsors concerts. The list goes on.

Thinking about reasons why companies sponsor these events, it becomes evident that they believe their target markets will recognize these associations and they will gain value from this association.

Sometimes the sponsorships are to gain awareness and/or recognition (for example, NASCAR), other times there are even more involved marketing strategies—Cadillac promotes rock concerts in an attempt to make their cars more attractive to younger people. Buick attempted the same positioning using Tiger Woods to appeal younger audience (before his scandal), and then did the same with Peyton Manning. NCAA football sponsors use the same tactic. They reach a desirable audience demographically and socioeconomically, building up goodwill along the way.

Verizon‘s sponsorship of rock concerts also seems obvious. Who attends rock concerts—young people. Who does Verizon most want to reach—all those young smartphone users. Take a look at any sponsorship (Monster Energy drink and the X Games) and you will see a similar pattern.

13. There is a saying that ―any publicity is good publicity.‖ Discuss what you think about this statement. (LO 17-2) This often-heard statement obviously seems to reflect a misunderstanding of the power of publicity.

One would certainly get a strong argument against this statement from Audi, Tylenol, Texaco, Wendy‘s, and Walmart, to name a few of the companies that have suffered the consequences of negative publicity.

Publicity is a very powerful tool, and while some companies have benefited from the power of positive publicity, numerous others have lost sales or even been driven from business by negative publicity. Any publicity is definitely not necessarily good publicity. Measuring effectiveness—the measures used to determine the effectiveness by marketing standards may be more difficult to employ. Traditional PR measures may not be as useful. Many companies have experienced the impact of negative publicity over the past few years as a result of product recalls, marketing blunders, etc.

Give some example of some instances where companies experienced negative publicity and how they handled it. Evaluate their means of dealing with negative publicity.

The power of publicity emanates directly from its high credibility. Because the source of the communication is generally perceived as being objective, or at least as not having a vested interest, the information is often treated differently than that of advertising and/or promotions. As a result, this information is passed on more readily, and in general is considered more believable.

A contributing factor is the way that the media handle publicity. Unfortunately for many firms, negative publicity often receives more attention than does that of a positive nature. Audi, for example, experienced negative publicity on the TV show 60 Minutes regarding its Audi 5000 and accelerator sticking problems. While Audi won a subsequent court battle, the brand image was tarnished and the 5000 never recovered. Jack-in-the Box and Suzuki have also experienced the strong negative impact of negative publicity. Texaco, Firestone, Mattel, and many other companies have been hurt by bad publicity, each attacking the problem in a different manner, and with different outcomes Examples of the power of publicity are common in both regards. BP, Toyota, Tylenol, and Odwalla are all examples of the power of negative publicity. On the other hand, Aspirin and red wine are examples that demonstrate the impact of how publicity can be used positively. While there are many ways to deal with negative publicity, one thing is certain—the company must face up to it and deal with it. It will not go away.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

14. Research studies have indicated that cause marketing can actually lead to an increased intention to purchase a brand. Explain why this is the case and provide examples that you feel may pertain. (LO 17-5) Cause marketing can be a win-win situation for the supporter and the recipient. For the receiver, much needed assistance in the form of monies, etc. will help the cause. For the supporter, consumers may take a positive attitude toward the actions, with the goodwill carrying over to the brand and/or organization. For example, in February 2014, CVS pharmacies announced they would no longer sell cigarettes in their stores. The positive publicity led to enormous exposure on local and national news.

Consumers texted and tweeted their praise for taking this position, and much goodwill was created for CVS. Other companies that have been supporters of various causes, like TOMS shoes, P&G, and Nika Water, among many others, have directly benefited by their support of causes that consumers identified with.

15. Putting one’s name on a stadium can be an expensive proposition, and the prices continue to increase. Discuss whether this would be a good investment for a company, and why or why not.

Give examples of companies for which this would be a good investment. (LO 17-3).

The following chart shows some of the costs of naming rights for stadiums. As you can see, these costs can be extensive, yet it seems there is no shortage of companies lining up to put their names out there.

Largest naming-rights deals Top 20 major league stadium deals Stadium

City

Sponsor

Farmers Field*

Los Angeles

Farmers Insurance $600 million

30

$20.0 million TBD

MetLife Stadium

East Rutherford, N.J.

Metropolitan Life $425 million$625 million Insurance

25

$17 million$20 million

Citi Field

Queens, N.Y.

Citigroup

$400 million

20

$20.0 million 2028

Reliant Stadium**

Houston

Reliant Energy

$310 million

31

$10.0 million 2032

Gillette Stadium^

Foxboro, Mass. Gillette

$240 million

15

$8.0 million

FedEx Field

Landover, Md. FedEx

$205 million

27

$7.59 million 2025

Minute Maid Park

Houston

$178 million

28

$6.36 million 2029

University of Phoenix Stadium

Glendale, Ariz. Apollo Group

$154.5 million 20

$7.72 million 2026

Bank of America Stadium

Charlotte

Coca-Cola Co.

Price

Bank of America $140 million

No. of Avg. annual years value

20

$7.0 million

Expirati on year

2036

2031

2023

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Lincoln Financial Field

Philadelphia

Lincoln National

$139.6 million 20

$6.98 million 2022

Lucas Oil Stadium

Indianapolis

Lucas Oil Products

$121.5 million 20

$6.07 million 2027

Citizens Bank Park Philadelphia

Citizens Bank

$95 million

25

$3.8 million

2029

M&T Bank Field

M&T Bank

$79 million

15

$5.0 million

2017

Great American Insurance

$75 million

30

$2.5 million

2032

Home Depot Center Carson, Calif. Home Depot

$70 million

10

$7.0 million

2013

U.S. Cellular Field

Chicago

U.S. Cellular

$68 million

23

$2.96 million 2025

Chase Field

Phoenix

JPMorgan Chase

$66.4 million

30

$2.2 million

2028

Comerica Park

Detroit

Comerica Bank

$66 million

30

$2.2 million

2030

Petco Park

San Diego

Petco

$60 million

22

$2.73 million 2025

Sports Authority Field at Mile High

Denver

Sports Authority

$60 million

10

$6.0 million

CenturyLink Field

Seattle

CenturyLink

$60 million$100 million

15-20 $4.0 million- 2019$5.0 million 2024

Baltimore

Great American Ball Cincinnati Park

2035

For some companies, the exposure, recognition and repetition of the brand name makes this a good deal. For example, when Qualcomm signed on to be the name for San Diego‘s sports teams (Padres, Chargers, Aztecs) many thought the $18 million was a waste of money. However, the contract ran for twenty years (1997-2017). Think of the national exposure created each time one of these teams (and two NCAA bowl games/year) were on TV. The signage can be seen from two major freeways, a trolley, and on incoming airplane flights. Clearly this was a great deal!

Naming rights don‘t always work out. Many stadiums have had their names change as companies changed their names, went out of business or just withdrew their support. In this case no one wins.

If you look at the names in the above chart, it would seem that the keys to success may be to have brands that are purchased by many segments, good exposure, and visibility and brand recognition.

16. The chapter discusses cause marketing, advocacy advertising, and issue ads. Explain the differences between these forms of communication and give examples of each. (LO 17-5) All of these forms of communication fall under the rubric of corporate advertising. While each is similar in that the ads are not designed to sell products or services, but rather support causes, there are differences in intent: Advocacy advertising ―is concerned with propagating, ideas and elucidating controversial social issues of public importance in a manner that supports the interests of the sponsor‖. The sponsor may

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

advocate a position such as supporting Obamacare, saving water, environmental concerns, etc. While the sponsor may not have a direct link, they usually do.

While essentially a form of advocacy ads, issue ads usually do not identify the sponsor, and may be paid for by unions, social and or political groups, etc. Their purpose for sponsoring these ads is to bring pubic attention to an issue they consider important or have a stake in.

The least controversial of the three, cause-related ads show a company, organization or group‘s support for a cause—no reciprocity involved. Exhibit 17-20 provides an excellent example of a causerelated ad. Others include support for the Leukemia Society, American Cancer Society, Make-a Wish Foundation, etc.

17. Social media have had a profound impact on the power of publicity. Explain what this means and whether you believe it to be true or not. Provide examples to support your position. (LO 172) Social media is like word of mouth on steroids. Regardless of whether it is positive or negative, when something goes viral on social media, millions of people are exposed. Brands have become successful almost entirely on the basis of going viral. Brands and people have suffered from both positive (Gangnam Style) and negative (Lindsay Lohan, Justin Bieber) publicity through social media.

Clearly marketers would love to be able to capitalize on positive publicity, and control negative postings. Unfortunately for them they cannot.

There are numerous examples of persons, brands, and companies brought down and succeeding through traditional PR channels. The advent of social media and the extreme speed and size of the market reached just magnifies this exposure. Just ask Tiger Woods or Lance Armstrong.

IMC Exercise Instruct students to find examples of various types of public relations activities engaged in by organizations. These include both traditional and nontraditional methods of public relations. Also, have them find an example of a company engaged in sponsorship of an event such as a music concert tour or sporting event. They should be asked to evaluate the company‘s sponsorship of the event with regard to issues such as the target audience they are trying to reach and how they might benefit from the sponsorship of the event.

CHAPTER 18 MEASURING THE EFFECTIVENESS OF THE PROMOTIONAL PROGRAM Chapter Overview This chapter discusses one of the most critical—yet controversial—issues in all of advertising. While it seems perfectly logical that managers on both the advertising and client side would like to know whether the programs they have implemented are effective, in reality, the majority of advertising and promotional

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

programs go untested. Compounding this is the fact that many of those programs that are evaluated use inadequate or inappropriate measures in making this determination.

The purpose of this chapter is to discuss why organizations need to measure the effectiveness of their programs, and when, where, and how such measures should be used. The chapter begins with a discussion of the reasons why advertising effectiveness measures should be taken and why they commonly are not.

A discussion of how, when, what, and where such measures should be used follows, with a description of many of the techniques commonly used also provided. The chapter concludes with a discussion of some of the problems involved in measuring the effectiveness of these programs and establishes some of the essentials for proper testing.

Learning Objectives 1.

Compare reasons for and against measuring the effectiveness of promotional programs.

2.

Describe the tools and processes available for assessing promotional program effectiveness.

3.

Discuss the limitations of current methods for measuring advertising effects.

4.

Compare different methods of measuring effectiveness of other promotional programs.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Chapter and Lecture Outline I.

ARGUMENTS FOR AND AGAINST MEASURING EFFECTIVENESS

As noted in the beginning of this IM chapter, it seems logical that research on the effectiveness of the promotional program would be conducted, yet we also find that this is not always the case. Reasons why research should be conducted and reasons why it is not are presented.

A.

Reasons to Measure Effectiveness—Four major reasons are offered for why measures of effectiveness should be taken. These include: 1. Avoiding costly mistakes—A lot of money is spent on advertising each year. If a program is not achieving its objectives, the marketing manager needs to know so he or she can stop spending (wasting) money on it.

2. Evaluating alternative strategies—Measuring a program‘s effectiveness helps a firm determine which strategy among all of the alternatives they should pursue.

3. Increasing the efficiency of advertising in general—Conducting research helps companies develop more efficient and effective communications. Additionally, an increasing number of clients are demanding accountability for their promotional programs and putting more pressure on the agencies to produce.

4. Determining if objectives are achieved—An assessment of how program elements led to the attainment of the goals should take place, and/or reasons for less-than-desired achievements must be determined.

B.

Reasons Not to Measure Effectiveness—A variety of reasons (and excuses) are offered to explain why the effectiveness of the advertising/promotional campaign is not taken. Perhaps the most common of these are: 1. Cost—Costs associated with testing is the number one cited reason for not testing. Good research can be expensive in terms of both time and money. Many managers decide that time is critical and they must implement the program while the opportunity is available. Many believe the monies spent on research could be better spent on improved production of the ad, additional media buys, and the like.

2. Research problems—It is often difficult to isolate the effects of promotional elements because each variable in the marketing mix affects the success of a product or service.

3. Disagreement on what to test—The objectives sought in the promotional program may differ by industry, by stage of the product life cycle, or even for different people within the firm.

There are numerous ways to measure these and not always a consensus as to what measure should be used.

4. The objections of creative—It has been argued by many (and denied by others) that the creative department does not want its work to be tested and many agencies are reluctant to submit their work for testing. This is sometimes true.

5. Time—Managers believe they already have too much to do and just can‘t get around to testing, and they don‘t want to wait to get the message out because they might miss the window of opportunity.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

While some of these arguments have merit, others result from excuse making, lack of proper planning, politics, or a lack of understanding of the value associated with conducting such research.

Professor Notes:

McGraw-Hill Connect ®: Reasons Not to Measure Advertising Effectiveness Type of Activity: Matching Activity Summary: Students are provided with varying situations and are asked to select the most appropriate rationale for not measuring the effectiveness of the IMC program that is explained in the situation provided.

Activity Learning Objective: 18-01 Compare reasons for and against measuring the effectiveness of promotional programs.

Concept Review: Many reasons for not measuring the effectiveness of promotional programs are provided in the text. These include the high costs associated with testing, research problems, disagreement on what to test, objections from creative, and a lack of time or concern for lack of time for testing.

Difficulty: 2 Medium Bloom‘s: Understand AACSB: Analytical Thinking

II.

CONDUCTING RESEARCH TO MEASURE ADVERTISING EFFECTIVENESS

This section discusses how research to measure effectiveness should be conducted. More specifically, it addresses the issues of what to test, as well as where and how such evaluations should take place.

A.

What to Test—Each of the elements of the promotional program should be examined. Research should be designed to determine the effectiveness of: 1. Source factors—An important question is whether the spokesperson being used is effective and how the target market will respond to him or her or if the spokesperson has maintained their effectiveness over time.

2. Message variables—Both the message and the means by which it is communicated are bases for evaluation and could impact message effectiveness, including the headline, illustrations, text, and layout.

3. Media strategies—Research may be designed to determine which media class (broadcast vs. print) generate the most effective results, the location within a particular medium (front page

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

or back page), and size or length of time the ad or commercial runs. Another factor is the vehicle option source effect—the differential impact that the advertising exposure will have on the same audience member if the exposure occurs in one media option rather than another.

4. Budgeting decisions—The relationship between the ad budget and sales is often hard to determine because using sales as an indicator of effectiveness ignores the impact of other marketing mix elements.

B.

When to Test—Effectiveness testing can generally be classified as: 1. Pretesting—Pretests are those that occur prior to the implementation of the campaign.

Pretests may occur at a number of points, from as early on as idea generation to rough execution to testing the final version before implementing it, and more than one type of pretest may be used.

2. Posttesting—Posttests are those that are taken once the program has been implemented.

Posttesting is designed to (1) determine if the campaign is accomplishing the objectives sought and (2) serve as input into the next period‘s situation analysis.

Figure 18-2 lists some of the classifications of testing methods.

C.

Where to Test—There are certain advantages and disadvantages associated with where effectiveness tests take place. Again, two different testing environments are discussed.

1. Laboratory—Laboratory tests are conducted in a specific location to which consumers are brought—for example, testing labs, theaters, etc. The major advantage is control. The major disadvantage is a lack of realism and the potential for testing bias.

2. Field tests—Field tests are those taken under more natural viewing situations, such as phone surveys, inquiry tests, etc. The major advantage is that they offer a more realistic viewing situation. At the same time, a lack of control and a number of other distracting conditions are disadvantages associated with these methods.

C.

How to Test—Figure 18-3 lists nine principles of advertising testing that have been endorsed by the nation‘s largest advertising agencies. PACT, or Positioning Advertising Copy Testing, principles were developed by advertisers and their agencies to provide guidelines on conducting appropriate advertising effectiveness studies.

Professor Notes:

III.

THE TESTING PROCESS

The actual testing of ads may take place throughout the campaign. Four types of tests are discussed.

A.

Concept Generation and Testing—Figure 18-5 describes the process involved in concept testing.

As noted, concept testing takes place very early on in the development of the campaign and is designed to explore consumers' responses to ads and/or campaigns being considered. Focus groups and mall intercepts are commonly employed methods at this stage.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

B.

Rough Art, Copy, and Commercial Testing—Because of the high costs associated with testing, completed advertisements and commercials, many advertisers (or their agencies) conduct such tests prior to the completion of the final product. Figure 18-7 describes some of the terminology used to describe these tests. Results of these tests have been shown to correlate highly with those taken after the ads have been completed. Two types of popular tests include: •

Comprehension and reaction tests, which assess whether an ad is offensive and whether it conveys the meaning intended.

•

Consumer juries, which ask consumers to rate a selection of layouts or copy versions presented in pasteups on separate sheets. A number of issues with consumer juries are discussed including that the consumer may become a self-appointed expert, that the number of ads that can be evaluated is limited, that a halo effect is possible (participants like a few aspects and overlook other weaknesses), and that preferences for specific types of advertising may overshadow objectivity.

1. A/B testing—The process of A/B testing involves the testing of two versions of an advertisement or homepage to see which will be more effective prior to launch. In the vast majority (if not all) of these cases, the ads or web pages are finished products.

C.

Pretesting of Finished Ads—Many advertisers prefer to test the ad in its finished form. A variety of both print and broadcast measures may be used.

1. Pretesting finished print messages—A number of methods for pretesting print messages are provided. Some of the more common of these are: a. Portfolio tests—A laboratory methodology designed to expose a group of respondents to a portfolio consisting of both control and test ads. Respondents are then asked what information they recall from the ads. The assumption is that the ads that yield the highest recall are the most effective. A variety of the portfolio test is the mock magazine test, in which an ad is placed in an actual magazine and a similar methodology is employed. b. Readability tests—A popular readability test is the Flesch formula, which is named after its developer, Rudolph Flesch. It assesses readability of the copy by determining the average number of syllables per 100 words. c. New print pretesting measures—Many companies have introduced new methodologies that improve on existing methods. Many of these involve hybrid measures that either measure effectiveness in different ways, or in different channels.

2. Pretesting finished broadcast ads—Some of the more popular methods for pretesting broadcast ads are: a. Theater tests—One of the most popular lab methods for pretesting finished commercials where participants are invited to view pilots of proposed TV programs. b. On-air tests—Some of the firms conducting theater tests also insert the commercials into actual TV programs in certain test markets, which often include single-source ad research. c. Physiological measures—These involve a laboratory setting and the measures indicate the receiver‘s involuntary response to the ad. Some include:

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

D.

●

Pupil dilation—Research in pupillometrics is designed to measure dilation and constriction of the pupils of the eyes in response to stimuli.

●

Galvanic skin response (GSR)—Also known as electrodermal response (EDR), GSR measures the skin‘s resistance or conductance to a small amount of current passed between two electrodes.

●

Eye tracking—Eye tracking involves asking viewers to view an ad while a sensor aims a beam of infrared light at the eye.

●

Brain waves—Electroencephalographic (EEG) measures can be taken from the skull to determine electrical frequencies in the brain. These electrical impulses are used in two areas of research: alpha activity, which refers to the degree of brain activation, and hemispheric lateralization, which distinguishes between alpha activity in the left and right sides of the brain.

Market Testing of Ads—Many of the methods already mentioned are also used in the posttesting of advertisements. The text once again discusses methods of market testing ads of both the print and broadcast varieties.

1. Posttests of print ads—Three of the most common forms of posttesting print ads include: a. Inquiry tests—Inquiry tests are designed to measure advertising effectiveness on the basis of inquiries generated from ads appearing in various print media. More complex methods of measuring effectiveness through inquiries may involve (1) running the ad in successive issues of the same medium; (2) running split-run tests, in which variations of the ad appear in different copies of the same newspaper or magazine; and/or (3) running the same ad in different media. b. Recognition tests—The most common posttest of print ads. The recognition method lets the advertiser assess the impact of an ad in a single issue of a magazine, over time, and/or across different magazines. Some researchers have criticized aspects of recognition measures on the basis of problems of false claiming, interviewer sensitivities, and unreliable scores. c. Recall tests—Recall tests attempt to measure recall of specific ads. Several measures for the recall of print ads are discussed in this section of the text.

2. Posttests of broadcast commercials. a. Day-after recall tests—The most popular method of posttesting employed in the broadcasting industry for decades was the Burke Day-After Recall test. A number of disadvantages to recall tests are discussed in the text. b. Persuasive measures—Include purchase, intent, and frequency-of-purchase criteria. c. Diagnostics—These measures are designed to garner viewers‘ evaluations of the ads, as well as how clearly the creative idea is understood and how well the proposition is communicated. Rational and emotional reactions to the ads are also examined. d. Comprehensive measures—Some companies provide comprehensive approaches in which each of the three measures just described can be obtained through one testing program.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

e. Test marketing—Many companies conduct tests designed to measure their advertising effects in specific test markets before releasing them nationally. f.

Single-source tracking studies—These track the behaviors of consumers from the television set to the supermarket checkout counter.

g. Tracking print/broadcast ads—Tracking studies have been used to measure the effect of advertising on awareness, recall, interest, and attitudes toward the ad and/or brand as well as purchase intentions.

Professor Notes:

McGraw-Hill Connect ®: Methods of Testing Completed Ads Type of Activity: Matching Activity Summary: In this activity, students are provided with a description of a method to test the effectiveness of ads and are asked to match the correct identification of these descriptions to the methods provided.

Activity Learning Objective: 18-02 Describe the tools and processes available for assessing promotional program effectiveness.

Concept Review: A number of methods for testing finished ads are provided in the text. These include portfolio tests, readability tests, theater tests, on-air tests, and a number of physiological measures.

Difficulty: 2 Medium Bloom‘s: Apply AACSB: Analytical Thinking

McGraw-Hill Connect ®: Classification of Testing Methods Type of Activity: Click and Drag Activity Summary: In this activity, students will identify each testing method as either a laboratory or field method.

Activity Learning Objective: 18-02 Describe the tools and processes available for assessing promotional program effectiveness.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Concept Review: In laboratory tests, people are brought to a particular location where they are shown ads and/or commercials. The testers either ask questions about them or measure participants' responses by other methods—for example, pupil dilation, eye tracking, or galvanic skin response. The major advantage of the lab setting is the control it affords the researcher. The major disadvantage is the lack of realism. Field tests are tests of the ad or commercial under natural viewing situations, complete with the realism of noise, distractions, and the comforts of home. Field tests take into account the effects of repetition, program content, and even the presence of competitive messages. The major disadvantage of field tests is the lack of control.

Difficulty: 1 Easy Bloom‘s: Understand AACSB: Analytical Thinking

IV.

ESTABLISHING A PROGRAM FOR MEASURING ADVERTISING EFFECTS

To this point in the chapter, a number of methods of testing the effectiveness of print and broadcast ads have been presented. In each case, these measures were discussed in respect to their contributions as well as their limitations. In this section, the chapter discusses how the marketer might establish a sound program for conducting effectiveness research.

A.

Problems with Current Research Methods—A number of problems with existing research methods are discussed, with the PACT program discussed earlier used as a standard against which to measure these methods. In this section, each of the PACT principles are discussed, with suggestions as to how each principle might be met.

B.

Essentials of Effective Testing—Again referring to the PACT program, four suggestions are offered that we believe will improve the effectiveness of the evaluation program. These include: ●

Establish communications objectives.

●

Use a consumer response model.

●

Use both pretests and posttests.

●

Use multiple measures.

●

Understand and implement proper research.

Professor Notes:

V.

MEASURING THE EFFECTIVENESS OF OTHER PROGRAM ELEMENTS

The majority of this chapter has focused on the measurement of advertising effectiveness. Obviously, measuring the effectiveness of other program elements is important as well. The final section of this

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

chapter discusses the measurement of effectiveness of sales promotions programs, sponsorships and nontraditional media.

A.

Measuring the Effectiveness of Sales Promotion— Sales promotions are not limited to retailers and resellers of products. A number of organizations measure sales promotions and are discussed in this section of the chapter.

B.

Measuring the Effectiveness of Nontraditional Media—Some progress has been made in the measurement of the media discussed in Chapter 13. ●

The effectiveness of print versus online flyers—This study examined the difference between online and traditional flyers effects on memory and purchase behaviors.

●

The effectiveness of ski-resort-based media—The Traffic Audit Bureau is tracking the effectiveness of this form of advertising to give advertisers more reliable criteria on which to base purchase decisions.

●

The effects of parking lot-based media—The Traffic Audit Bureau (TAB) is tracking the effectiveness of this form of advertising to give advertisers more reliable criteria on which to base purchase decisions.

●

The effects of in-store radio and television—Interactive Market Systems (IMS) introduced software that enables clients to measure the effectiveness of in-store radio. The company planned to introduce similar software designed to measure in-store television advertising effectiveness.

●

The effectiveness of other media—A number of companies provide effectiveness measures to determine the impact of package designs, POP displays, trade show exhibits, and the like.

C.

Measuring the Effectiveness of Sponsorships—Many organizations have increased their investments in sponsorships. Essentially, measures of sponsorship effectiveness can be categorized as exposure-based methods or tracking measures.

D.

Measuring the Effectiveness of other IMC Program Elements—Many of the organizations mentioned in this chapter offer research services to measure the effectiveness of specific promotional program elements. A number of studies have been conducted in an attempt to measure the combined effects of combining IMC elements. These studies continue to increase in scope and methodology employed.

Professor Notes:

McGraw-Hill Connect ®: The Testing Process Type of Activity: Click and Drag Activity Summary: In this activity, students will match the appropriate test and output with the correct step where it would typically be used in the testing process.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Activity Learning Objective: 18-02 Describe the tools and processes available for assessing promotional program effectiveness.

Concept Review: All marketing managers want to know how well their promotional programs are working. This information is critical to planning for the next period, since program adjustments and/or maintenance are based on evaluation of current strategies. Problems often result when the measures taken to determine such effects are inaccurate or improperly used. Assessing the effectiveness of ads both before they are implemented and after the final versions have been completed and fielded offers a number of advantages.

Difficulty: 2 Medium Bloom‘s: Understand AACSB: Analytical Thinking

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Teaching Suggestions Due to the importance and amount of information presented in this chapter, we suggest that the lecture cover at least two time periods. The first session might be used to discuss the importance of conducting effectiveness studies, some of the reasons why such studies are not conducted, and some of the pretest measures. The second session could cover posttests and the PACT guidelines. In addition, the second session should discuss ways of measuring communications objectives.

As in some of the previous chapters, this subject matter can be presented in a very interesting fashion. The media frequently provide information that can be used to keep the student current, and to provide ―real world‖ applications. Sources such as Ad Age, AdWeek, and The Wall Street Journal often have articles relating to this subject matter as does the online site eMarketer. In addition, the single-source systems are often in the news.

We have found through our experiences that academics seem to place more emphasis on the importance of measuring effectiveness than do practitioners. We believe that this may be one of the more important elements of the entire decision sequence model of promotional planning and suggest that this importance be stressed to students as they will soon be the practitioners.

Answers to Discussion Questions 1. In the decision sequence model presented in Chapter 1, the final stage is measuring effectiveness of the IMC program to provide feedback. This feedback is critical to the future planning process. Yet research shows that many companies do not conduct effectiveness research. Explain why they do not and why it is important that they do. (LO 18-1) There are several reasons why brands choose not to conduct effectiveness research. One of the major reasons cited for not conducting effectiveness research include costs associated with testing, research problems, disagreement on what to test, objections from creative, and the time required for proper testing. Good research can be quite expensive both in terms of both time and money. Many managers decide that time is critical and they must implement the program while the opportunity is available and many believe the monies spent on research could be better spent on improved production of the ad, additional media buys, and the like. Another reason for not measuring effectiveness is that it is often difficult to isolate the effects of promotional elements. Each variable in the marketing mix affects the success of a product or service. Because it is often difficult to measure the contribution of each marketing element directly, some managers become frustrated and decide not to test at all.

Additionally, the objectives sought in the promotional program may differ by industry, by stage of the product life cycle, or even for different people within the firm. There are numerous ways to measure these and not always a consensus as to what measure should be used. Problems also arise for testing ad effectiveness when there are objections from creative. Sometimes the creative department does not want its work to be tested and many agencies are reluctant to submit their work for testing. Finally, there are often time constraints in which advertisers don‘t prioritize testing. Managers believe they already have too much to do and just can‘t get around to testing, and they don‘t want to wait to get the message out because they might miss the window of opportunity. Marketers should care about testing because it can help them in avoiding costly mistakes, it aids them in evaluating alternative strategies, helps to increase the efficiency of advertising in general, and aids in determining if the objectives set have been achieved.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

2. Digital and Social Media Perspective 18-1 discusses the fact that some marketers do not trust the effectiveness measures that are available to them, and thus do not attempt to measure the impact of their programs. Are they right, or wrong? Provide examples to support your position.

(LO 18-3) While there are some issues with measuring ad effectiveness, as discussed in the chapter, the advantages of measuring ad effectiveness far outweigh any issues. One of the major issues with effectiveness measures is that there is often not universal agreement on what measures should be used to measure the effectiveness of ads, particularly in digital and social media. Some examples of when this lack of uniform measurement have negatively impacted brands are discussed in the text. A commonly used metric in digital spaces includes click-through rates. Some media planners have suggested that focusing on one‘s digital media performance and could even be promoting bad campaigns due to a flawed measure. Another common method of online measurement includes video ad views. Video ad revenues make up more than half of Twitter‘s ad revenues, half of Snapchat‘s, and 30 percent of Facebook‘s. Yet there is no consistency among them as to what constitutes a view.

Therefore, if you are buying an ad on these platforms, you are dealing with different standards for each. While issues exist with uniformity and agreement on measures of ad effectiveness, marketers are testing and utilizing a mix of old and new measurement methods to determine the best ways to measure effectiveness in new online spaces.

3. Creatives have long argued that measuring the effectiveness of their ads would stifle the creative process and lead to less creativity and more objective seeking ads. The outstanding creative ads of the past would no longer be part of the future, they say. Some recent articles have contended that the ads of today are not creative and tend to copy each other. Take a side on this position, and cite examples to support it. (LO 18-1) Advertisement effectiveness testing does not aim to stifle creativity, but instead works to ensure that the creative ideas conceptualized by the creative team resonate with target audience members.

However, ad agencies‘ creative departments argue that tests are not true measures of the creativity and effectiveness of ads, that applying measures stifles their creativity, and that the more creative the ad is, the more likely it is to be successful. They want permission to be creative without the limiting guidelines marketing may impose. Apple‘s 1984 commercial is a good example of a very creative idea and concept that was not tested for its effectiveness with audience members but is still recognized as one of the best and most memorable advertisements of all time even today. At the same time, the marketing manager is ultimately responsible for the success of the product or brand. Given the substantial sums being allocated to advertising and promotion, it is the manager‘s right, and responsibility, to know how well a specific program—or a specific ad—will perform in the market.

Many successful brands rely on testing creative concepts to ensure their efficiency and resonation with the intended target audience.

4. Digital and Social Media Perspective 18-2 discusses the agreement by practitioners and academics that physiological measures of effectiveness are valid and a value to advertisers.

Discuss some of these physiological measures and the value they bring to marketers attempting to measure effectiveness. Cite examples. (LO 18-2) Several new as well as well-established physiological measures are now used to measure the effectiveness of advertisements. One such measure is the use of fMRI data (i.e. brain scans of brain activity) and measures of participants‘ heart rates and breathing. These methods have been used to measure consumers‘ responses to various advertisements, including Super Bowl ads. Another fairly popular physiological measure used by both academics and practitioners includes eye-tracking. In the early days of the use of eye-tracking, practitioners used this technology to determine where consumers focused when looking at an advertisement. Today, eye-tracking research is used to inform

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

retail displays and window designs; to determine the effectiveness of various visual and copy elements; and in informing and improving web design and user interface. Another physiological measure includes electroencephalographic (EEG) measures, which are measures that can be taken from the skull to determine electrical frequencies in the brain. Alpha activity, a type of electroencephalographic measure, measures a consumer‘s alpha level while viewing a commercial.

This allows researchers to assess the degree to which attention and processing are likely to occur.

Other physiological measures include pupil dilation and galvanic skin response measures. Measures of pupil dilation have been used by advertisers to evaluate product and package design as well as to test ads. In addition, measures of galvanic skin responses have been used to measure consumer‘s reactions to advertising.

5. What is single source measurement? Why does it appear to offer marketers an advantage over other measures of effectiveness? Are there any disadvantages to using single source measures?

(LO 18-4) Single source measurement methods or tracking methods track the behaviors of consumers from the television set to the supermarket checkout counter. Participants in a designated area who have cable TV and agree to participate in the studies use optical scanning equipment that identifies their household and gives the research company their demographics. The households are split into matched groups; one group receives an ad while the other does not, or alternate ads are sent to each. Their purchases are recorded from the bar codes of the products bought. Commercial exposures are then correlated with purchase behaviors. This type of measurement can be used in the pre-testing and posttesting of ads. Many advertisers believe these single-source measures will change the way research is conducted due to the advantages of control and the ability to measure directly the ads‘ effects on sales. A number of major corporations and ad agencies are now employing this method, including companies and their agencies in the automotive, entertainment, financial services, packaged goods, and pharmaceutical industries among others. While this tool has its benefits, it also has some problems. Some say that this type of measurement focuses on short-term sales effects and thus only capture a small portion of what advertising does. Additionally, some complain that data are too complicated to deal with as there are often mass amounts of data readily available.

6. A/B testing has been used by marketers for decades to evaluate two different versions of finished ads and/or web pages. Some experts now believe that A/B testing would be more effective if employed earlier in the campaign development process. Explain what they mean by this, and argue for or against this position. (LO 18-1) A/B testing is about testing different versions of finished ads. Unfortunately, once ads are finished it has cost a lot of money, and companies are often not willing to assume that cost with no final product should both test poorly. By testing earlier, it is possible to see that some ads are just not going to be effective, and the company can cut their losses with mush less monetary outlay. Once again, think about the Pepsi commercial that we have said should have been killed or changed in the pretesting stage. Had this been done, many dollars would have been saved as well as a lot of bad PR. The downside is that emotional ads—like the Pepsi commercial intended to be—often do not test well in earlier stages of development, so a potentially effective commercial may have been discarded.

However, this is less likely to be the case than the likelihood of eliminating or changing an ad that has tested very poorly early on.

7. Explain why it is so difficult to measure the overall IMC program effectiveness. (LO 18-3) Think about the argument used to describe why it is so hard to measure the effectiveness of an IMC program using sales as the dependent measure. Other marketing program elements also contribute to the sales result, and it is often difficult to parcel out this effect.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

The same is true when one uses multiple program elements. It is difficult to separate out the impact of advertising, the Internet, direct marketing, etc., as consumers are not always aware of where they heard the message, they may have been exposed in multiple mediums, etc. The lack of control of the environment makes it difficult to determine if and when consumers were exposed.

Some attempts at making these measures have taken place. The XMOS studies of a few years back is one example. More recent studies have examined the fact that traditional media like TV and magazines are effective in driving consumers to the Internet, and that direct marketing and mass advertising often support each other. However, conclusive results of the overall impact of IMC is still a way off.

8. This chapter discussed the Ogilvy Awards. Describe what these awards are and how they have changed over time. Give examples of companies that have won these awards (you can find past winners online) and why they have won them. (LO 18-1) Have students go to the website https://www.warc.com/Topics/ARFOgilvyAwards.topic and view award winners, as well as download the case studies. When reviewing any of these case studies, you will see a number of criteria used to evaluate the program‘s success. You many also see some criteria that may not be used as properly as it should. Can we really attribute sales and market share gains directly to the IMC program?

Students should be asked to evaluate the metrics used in the cases, and at the same time discuss whether all of these used are appropriate. They should also compare the effectiveness programs used to those criteria in the book that determine essentials for proper measurement.

9. Explain why it is important to pretest. When should this testing take place? Give examples of what might make ads or commercials that are pretested more successful. (LO 18-1) Pretests are those tests that take place before the advertisement or commercial is made available for viewing by the public. These tests may take place at a number of points from as early on as idea generation to testing the final version before showing it. There are a variety of pretests available, including both lab and field tests. Examples of pretests include focus groups, consumer juries, physiological measures, in-home tests, and theater tests.

Marketers pretest ads so that they can avoid mistakes and fine tune them before they are exposed to the public at large. Before spending great deals of money for an ad that doesn‘t work, they will get some idea of their potential effectiveness prior to going to the market. If there are specific elements of the ad that are not working, corrections can be made.

The reasons cited for not pre-testing include cost and time factors. Many marketers do not want to spend the additional dollars required to test. This can be a risky strategy, and the costs of making a mistake may exceed those of testing. Others feel that the cost is not warranted, as the ad has no elements of controversy, is simple, etc. Some marketers skip the pretest phase as they have only a short window of opportunity, and do not have time to pretest.

10. Digital advertisers seem to want to have their own effectiveness measures, while eschewing those of traditional advertisers. What are the pros and cons of this position? Argue for one side or the other. (LO 18-4) Many of these measures are new, some have been around for a while, and some are a combination of old and new. New techniques like eye tracking, facial recognition, and neuroscience applications are being used alongside traditional recall and attitude measurement techniques. More and more retailers are using attribution modeling to attempt to determine how various media touch points are performing, and there has been an increase in measuring the effectiveness of emotional versus

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

cognitive ads, the impact of creativity, storytelling versus hard sell, and so on. At the same time, many of the digital metrics do little, if anything, to help us understand why ads work or do not work, and as such, do not go very far in helping us understand true ad effectiveness.

Additional Discussion Questions (not in text) 11. Some companies test their commercials in rough formats described in the chapter. Others only test the commercials in finished form. Discuss some of the advantages and disadvantages of conducting tests at both stages. (LO 18-2) The clear advantage of rough testing is the cost savings. Given that roughs correlate so highly with finished ads, many advertisers will use them to explore the potential effectiveness of them before too much money has been spent.

For some types of commercials—particularly those involving emotion—roughs may not be as effective. Cartoon versions may not capture the emotions the message intends to communicate. For this reason, advertisers will test finished ads.

The major problem with testing finished ads comes from the fact that as more money is spent to produce the commercial, more pressure will follow to use it, given the investment. Thus, commercials may be used when they test less than effective, rather than going back and starting over.

One might speculate that testing all commercials in rough form might provide some insights into whether it makes sense to proceed.

12. Most of this chapter focuses attention on the measurement of traditional forms of advertising.

How are companies measuring nontraditional advertising forms? (LO 18-2) As noted in earlier chapters, there have not been a lot of new methodologies provided to measure the impact of the newer media options. Of course, the Internet has its measurement criteria, some of which are unique to the medium (and some of which have questionable validity and reliability), while others are traditional (tracking, recall, etc.).

For most of the other media—particularly those discussed in Chapter 13 under branded entertainment—few new measures have been developed. Most of the determination is made by looking at impressions or potential impressions likely to be generated by placements, etc. As you know, impressions are not true measures of effectiveness.

As also noted, many of those using branded entertainment don‘t seem to be concerned about effectiveness. Of those who attempt to determine the impact of the placements, integrations, etc., they continue to hold out for the Holy Grail—sales. Still others track the number of hits to their website after the placement has occurred—perhaps a more revealing metric than sales.

Partly because of management attitude, and partly because of the novelty of these new media, there are not a lot of measures of effectiveness in place. Hopefully, as the media mature, these measures will follow.

13. Explain why it is so difficult to measure the effectiveness of an IMC program that uses multiple program elements. (LO 18-3) One of the arguments for not using sales as an indicator of advertising success is the fact that other marketing factors—price, product and distribution as well as external factors will contribute to the sales of a product. A similar argument exists for measuring the contribution of IMC elements.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

One of the benefits to be derived from an IMC program is the cumulative impact that occurs through multiple media, points of contact, etc. that likely results in a Gestalt effect—that is, the whole is greater than the sum of its parts. As marketers have discovered, it if very difficult to separate the individual contributions that each medium makes in such a program.

One of the reasons for this problem is that consumers may not know or remember where they have seen a communication. In tracking advertising for 17 years for a bank, we often found misreporting of media sources—that is people saying they recall an ad from TV, when there were not TV commercials being run, etc. Consumers just aren‘t that attuned to where they see messages.

Another factor is that while one might be able to recall which medium the message appeared in, it is much more difficult to determine the degree of impact of that medium. In addition, message factors, and source factors—just like price and product will also confound the studies.

14. Studies indicate that the combined effects of advertising in various media may lead to more effectiveness than just using one medium. Explain why you think this might occur, using some of the examples cited in the chapter. (LO 18-1) Various elements of the IMC program each make their own contributions to the overall impact of the campaign. A combination of the program elements is likely to have a greater impact than the effect of the element used alone. Some examples cited in the text: The Online Publishers Association‘s study showed that combining Internet and television lead to higher recall than using each alone. The test was designed to test recall and memorability of an ad.

Using an advertisement for the US Air force, three different groups were exposed to the ad: (1) those visiting a web page; (2) those watching the TV program Who Wants to Be a Millionaire; and (3) those watching the TV program and visiting the website. The results indicated that brand awareness was higher and day after recall was more than double that of a control group with no exposure; online ads were more likely to be seen than TV advertising; and the people exposed to both ads were more likely to recall the TV commercial. The overall study concluded that there was a synergistic effect when TV and online are used in combination leading to a 9 percent higher recall and a 48 percent increase in recognition of the online ads.

An MSN online study also examined the effect when online ads are used in conjunction with traditional advertising. Aided and unaided awareness, brand associations, and purchase intent were measured for Dove and Dove Nutrium soaps using individual media and combinations of online with TV and print. The results indicated that increasing the frequency of online advertising efficiently improved branding results and that combining online advertising with the more traditional TV and print media increased the effectiveness of the entire campaign.

In an examination of four product categories, it was found that TV was the most used medium for all four product categories and that is was most useful for providing information on low involvement products, while the Internet was more useful for high involvement products. TV was also shown to be more useful for providing information on affective versus rational decisions. The study concluded that the Internet should be considered in conjunction with other traditional media alternatives.

15. How have marketers employed the methodology of eye tracking? Give examples of companies that have employed this methodology. When does eye tracking seem to be most useful? (LO 183) Eye tracking has been used to observe viewers‘ eyes to see where they go in watching a commercial or print ad, and where they focus and how much time is spent there. This form of tracking has been used for quite some time has been proven to offer valuable insights.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

The methodology has now been extended to other areas of communications research. Package designers have experimented with various label designs to determine which will stand out on store shelves. Print researchers have examined the movement of the eye when one is reading a newspaper or magazine.

A popular use of this methodology now is to see where ones‘ eyes go when viewing a website, and how long certain aspects of a site attract attention. Results show that viewers start at the top left (consistent with previous research) and then proceed through the rest of the site. Different banner or ad types will hold the eye‘s attention, etc.

Again, as a physiological measure, eye tracking provides some insights as to effectiveness— particularly attention. And, again, this measure needs to be combined with others to determine the ―why‖ of such movements.

16. Describe the Starch Ad Readership Report and the measures provided therein. Discuss how Starch has had to adapt this report due to changing market conditions, and the new metrics now provided. (LO 18-2) The Starch report has been relied upon for decades as a standard for testing print ads. The measures taken include the noting score, brand associated score and the read most score. These scores have been employed since the reports started.

Recently, Starch has added additional measures. These include: brand disposition, purchase behavior or intention, actions taken, and publication and advertising engagement.

Like many other companies that have measured traditional media advertising effectiveness, Starch has had to adapt their methodology and measures provided to adapt to the changing media environment. As an example, is the addition of the measure of advertising engagement. As noted in the text, engagement is the new ―hot‖ measure. Even though there are a number of problems associated with this measure, clients nevertheless demand it. Should Starch not offer this (or other measures) clients demand, the company runs the risk of being considered outdated and business will move elsewhere.

17. Explain why different metrics may be more useful to marketers in determining the effectiveness of their advertising at different times. Give examples of which metrics may be useful as consumers go through the purchase decision process. (LO 18-4) Chapter 7 discussed advertisers‘ use of consumer funnels to understand the consumer decision making process and to establish communications objectives. Using these traditional funnels or some of the newer decision making scenarios proposed requires an advertiser attempting to measure the effectiveness of his/her campaign to employ different media at various stages of the decision-making process. Using different media requires the use of different metrics to determine their effectiveness.

For example, at the top of the funnel, where awareness is important, the advertiser may want to use TV. Recall of the ad would perhaps be the most effective measure. Further down the funnel, comprehension would be a critical measure. Tests that measure recognition, and comprehension of the message may be more important at this point. To measure the ability of the ad or website to gain attention, the marketer may wish to use eye tracking. To get the best measure of the campaign‘s effectiveness, tracking methods may be the most valuable metric.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

IMC Exercise Have students find an example of a current or recent advertising campaign being used by a company.

Have them explain the various measures of effectiveness that might be used by the company to track effects of the campaign over time or through the consumer purchase funnel. They should explain why particular testing methods would be appropriate and how the information they provide can be used by the marketer at various stages of the funnel.

CHAPTER 19 INTERNATIONAL ADVERTISING AND PROMOTION Chapter Overview The purpose of this chapter is to introduce the student to the role of advertising and promotion in a company‘s international marketing program. We discuss the growing importance of companies being able to compete in the global marketplace and the importance of international advertising and promotion. The international environment and the major factors influencing marketing and promotional decisions in foreign markets are discussed and attention is given to the issue of global or standardized versus local or customized marketing and advertising. This chapter also examines how companies organize for international advertising, select agencies, and make decisions in various areas such as research, creative strategy, and media selection. While the primary focus of this chapter is on international advertising, attention is also given to how other IMC tools are used in international marketing, including sales promotion, public relations, and digital/social media.

Learning Objectives 1.

Describe the role and importance of international marketing and promotion.

2.

Discuss how economic, cultural, legal, and other factors in the international environment affect advertising and promotional decisions.

3.

Compare global versus localized advertising and promotion.

4.

Discuss the decision areas of international advertising.

5.

Describe the role of other elements of the promotional mix in the international IMC program.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Chapter and Lecture Outline I.

THE IMPORTANCE OF INTERNATIONAL MARKETS

Throughout this book, attention is focused primarily on the development of promotional programs for products and services sold to the U.S. market. However, many companies are recognizing the opportunities that foreign markets offer for new sources of sales and profits as well as the necessity of marketing their products internationally. Today, world trade is driven by global competition among global companies for global consumers. It has become increasingly important for U.S. companies to adopt an international marketing orientation since imports are taking a significant amount of the domestic market for many products and are likely to continue doing so. The balance-of-trade deficit (when the monetary value of imports exceeds that of exports) and movement toward a global economy is requiring companies to become more adept at marketing their products and services to other countries.

Professor Notes:

II.

THE ROLE OF INTERNATIONAL ADVERTISING AND PROMOTION

Advertising and promotion are important parts of the international marketing program of firms competing in the global marketplace. In 2019, $240 billion was spent on advertising in the U.S. While the United States still leads the world in terms of advertising spending, expenditures outside of the U.S. have increased dramatically over the past decade and are now over $400 billion annually. It is worth noting and discussing the importance of advertising and promotion for large foreign-based multinationals such as Unilever, Nestle, Volkswagen, AT&T, and Amazon. Figure 19-1 shows the top 10 companies by worldwide advertising spending.

Advertising and promotion are the most visible as well as the most culture-bound of a firm‘s marketing functions. Companies planning on marketing and advertising their products or services abroad are faced with an unfamiliar marketing environment and consumers with different customs, values, consumption patterns, and habits, as well as different purchase motives and abilities. Media options are often more limited in foreign countries than in the U.S. and different creative and media strategies, as well as changes in other promotional mix elements, are often required for foreign markets.

Professor Notes:

III.

THE INTERNATIONAL ENVIRONMENT

Just as with domestic marketing, companies engaging in international marketing must carefully analyze and consider the major environmental factors of each market in which they compete. Consideration of environmental factors is important, not only in evaluating the viability and/or potential of each country as a market, but also in designing and implementing a marketing and promotional program. Figure 19-2 shows some of the forces marketers must consider in each category when analyzing the environment of a country or market. Major environmental factors that must be considered include:

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

A.

The Economic Environment—A country‘s economic conditions indicate its present and future potential for consuming. Marketers must consider the economic infrastructure or the communications, transportation, financial, and distribution networks needed to conduct business in a particular country. The global recession affected many countries around the world and is a very good example of how the economic environment influences demand for products and services. The European Union has been behind many other countries and regions in recovering from the recession and unemployment remains high in many countries such as Spain and Portugal. China and India are two countries that are transforming the global economy, as both countries have strong economies with annual GDP growth ranging from 6 to 7 percent.

B.

The Demographic environment—International marketers must also examine the demographic characteristics of a country including factors such as income levels and distribution, age and occupation distributions, household size, literacy, education, and employment rates. Many marketers are turning their attention to third world countries at the bottom of the economic pyramid where consumer markets are slowly emerging.

C.

The Cultural Environment—An aspect of the international marketing environment that is very important to advertising and promotion is the culture of each country. Among the most important aspects of culture are the language, customs, tastes, attitudes, lifestyle, values, religion, and ethical/moral standards of each society. Marketers must be sensitive not only in determining what products and services they can sell to foreign cultures but also in communicating with them.

Advertising is often the most effective way to communicate with potential buyers and create markets in other countries. But it can also be one of the most difficult aspects of the international marketing program because of problems in developing messages that will be understood in various countries. Another aspect of culture that is very important for international marketers to understand is values. Cultural values are beliefs and goals shared by members of a society regarding ideal end states of life and modes of conduct. Society shapes consumers‘ basic values, which affect their behavior and determine how they respond to various situations. Various examples are provided in the chapter of brands recognizing the cultural values of a particular country.

D.

The Political/Legal Environment—The political and legal environment is one of the most important factors influencing advertising and promotional programs of international marketers.

Government regulations and restrictions can affect a variety of aspects of a company‘s advertising program, including: ●

The types of products that may be advertised.

●

The content or creative approach that may be used.

●

The media that all advertisers (or different classes of advertisers) are permitted to employ.

●

The use of social and digital media.

●

The amount of advertising a single advertiser may use in total or in a specific medium.

●

The use of foreign languages in ads.

●

The use of advertising material prepared outside the country.

●

The use of local versus international advertising agencies.

●

The specific taxes that may be levied against advertising.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Professor Notes:

McGraw-Hill Connect ®: International Marketing Environment Type of Activity: Click and Drag Activity Summary: In this activity, students will read about the international marketing environment and then place each factor with the appropriate environmental force.

Activity Learning Objective: 19-02 Discuss how economic, cultural, legal, and other factors in the international environment affect advertising and promotional decisions.

Concept Review: Many U.S. companies are recognizing not only the opportunities but also the necessity of marketing their products and services internationally because of saturated markets and intense competition from both domestic and foreign competitors. International marketers must carefully analyze the major environmental forces in each market where they compete, including economic, demographic, cultural, and political/legal factors. These factors are important not only in assessing the potential of each country as a market but also in designing and implementing advertising and promotional programs.

Difficulty: Medium Bloom‘s: Understand AACSB: Analytical Thinking

IV.

GLOBAL VERSUS LOCALIZED ADVERTISING

In recent years a great deal of attention has been focused on the concept of global marketing whereby a firm utilizes a standard marketing plan for all countries in which it markets its product or service. Global advertising falls under the umbrella of global marketing as a means of implementing this strategy by using the same advertising approach in all markets. The theorizing of Harvard professor Theodore Levitt helped popularize the concept of global marketing. However, not everyone agrees with Levitt‘s global marketing theory, particularly with respect to advertising, as they argue that products and advertising messages must be designed and/or adapted to meet the differing needs of consumers in various countries.

The advantages and limitations of global marketing and advertising in particular should be discussed.

A.

Advantages of Global Marketing and Advertising—The use of a global marketing and advertising program offers numerous advantages to a company including: ●

Economies of scale in production and distribution.

●

Lower marketing and advertising costs as a result of reductions in planning and control.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

B.

●

Lower advertising production costs.

●

Abilities to exploit good ideas on a worldwide basis and introduce products quickly into various world markets.

●

A consistent international brand and/or company image.

●

Simplification of coordination and control of marketing and promotional programs.

Problems with Global Advertising—While the concepts of global marketing and advertising have received a great deal of attention recently, not everyone agrees with this strategy. Some of the problems with global marketing and advertising include: ●

Differences in culture, market, and economic development.

●

Consumer needs and usage patterns.

●

Media availability.

●

Legal restrictions.

These disadvantages often make it extremely difficult to develop an effective universal approach to marketing and advertising.

C.

●

Advertising in particular is difficult to standardize because of cultural differences in circumstances, language, values, beliefs, lifestyle, and so on.

●

Usage patterns and perceptions of a product may vary from one country to another and require adjustments in the marketing and advertising program rather than just using a global campaign.

●

Many experts believe that marketing a standardized product the same way all over the world can turn off consumers, alienate employees, and blind a company to diversities in customer needs.

When Is Globalization Appropriate?—While many advertisers view globalization of advertising as a difficult task, some progress has been made in learning what products and services are best suited to worldwide appeals. Products and services that can take advantage of global marketing and advertising opportunities include: 1. Brands or messages that can be adapted for a visual appeal, avoiding the problems of trying to translate words into dozens of languages.

2. Brands that are promoted with image campaigns that play to universal needs, values, and emotions.

3. High-tech products and new products coming to the world for the first time, not steeped in the cultural heritage of a country.

4. Products with nationalistic flavor if the country has a reputation in the field. These products capitalize on the country-of-origin effect, which refers to consumers‘ general perceptions of quality for products made in a given country

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

5. Products that appeal to a market segment with universally similar tastes, interests, needs, and values.

D.

Global Products, Local Messages—While the pros and cons of globalized marketing and advertising continue to be debated, many companies are taking what might be called an inbetween approach by standardizing their products and basic marketing strategy but localizing their advertising messages to appeal to the local realities and conditions of each market. This approach has been given different labels such as ―Think global, act local‖ or ―Global vision with a local touch.” Although some marketers use global ads with little or no modification, most companies adapt their messages to respond to differences in language, market conditions and other factors. Many global marketers use a strategy called pattern advertising whereby their ads follow the same basic approach, but themes, copy and sometimes even visual elements are adapted to differences in local markets. The TAG Heuer ads shown in Exhibit 19-11 are an example of pattern advertising as different celebrities are used for various countries but the various creative elements of the ad such as design and layout remain the same. Another way marketers adapt their campaigns to local markets is by producing a variety of ads with a similar theme and format and allowing managers in various countries or regions to select those messages they feel will work best in their markets.

Professor Notes:

McGraw-Hill Connect ®: When to Globalize/When to Localize Type of Activity: Grouping Activity Summary: In this activity, students are asked to select the most appropriate category of localization versus globalization for the situations provided that an IMC manager might face.

Activity Learning Objective: 19-03 Compare global versus localized advertising and promotion.

Concept Review: This is a good opportunity to review the advantages and disadvantages of a globalized approach versus a localized approach as discussed in this portion of the chapter.

Difficulty: 2 Medium Bloom‘s: Apply AACSB: Analytical Thinking

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

V.

DECISION AREAS IN INTERNATIONAL ADVERTISING

As with domestic marketing, certain organizational and functional decisions must be made by companies developing advertising and promotional programs for international markets. This section examines these decision areas.

A.

Organizing for International Advertising—The initial decision a company must make when it decides to market its products to other countries is how to organize the international advertising and promotion function. There are three basic options for organizing this function.

1. Centralization—All decisions are made and planning is done at the firm‘s home office.

Complete centralization is likely when market and media conditions are similar from one country to another, when the company has only one or a few international agencies, when it uses global marketing and advertising, or when it desires a consistent image worldwide.

2. Decentralization—Under a decentralized organizational structure, marketing and advertising managers in each market have the authority to make their own decisions such as selecting agencies, developing budgets, conducting research, approving creative themes and executions, and selecting media.

3. Combination—Many companies actually use a combination of the first two approaches whereby the home office will have the most control over advertising policy, guidelines and operations in all markets, while managers in local offices will be responsible for submitting advertising plans and budgets for their markets which must be reviewed and approved by the international advertising manager. This approach allows for consistency and uniformity in a firm‘s international advertising program yet still permits local input and adaptation of the promotional program.

B.

Agency Selection—One of the most important decisions a firm engaged in international marketing must make is the selection of an advertising agency. The three basic alternatives in selecting an agency include: ●

Choosing a major agency with both domestic and overseas office. A number of multinational companies are consolidating their advertising with one large agency to develop a consistent global image. IBM was one of the first to do this in 1994 and many large companies have followed. Another example includes Mars whose businesses include snack foods, pet care, and confectionery products and brands such as M&M‘s, Snickers, Skittle, Pedigree, and Orbit gum. In 2019, they consolidated all of its global media business with WPP‘s GroupM media network.

●

Choosing a domestic agency affiliated with agencies in other countries or belonging to a network of foreign agencies. Many of the large agency holding companies such as the WPP Group, Publicis Groupe, Omnicom, and Interpublic Group own agencies throughout the world that can handle their clients‘ advertising in various countries.

●

Selecting a local agency for each national market in which the company sells its products or services. In many countries, smaller agencies may, because of their independence, be more willing to take risks and develop the most effective, creative ads. This also increases the morale and involvement of local managers by giving them input into the agency selection process.

1. Criteria for agency selection—The selection of an agency or agencies to handle a firm‘s international advertising depends on how the firm is organized for international marketing

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

and the type of assistance it needs to meet its goals and objectives in foreign markets.

Specific criteria a company might use in selecting an agency are shown in Figure 19-3.

C.

Creative Decisions—Creative strategy development for international advertising is basically similar in process and procedure to domestic advertising as communication objectives must be set based on the marketing strategy and market conditions for each market, major selling ideas must be developed, and specific appeals and execution styles must be chosen. An important factor influencing the development of creative strategy for international markets is the issue of global versus localized advertising.

Global advertising uses the same basic appeal and execution style in all countries and requires the development of advertising that will transcend cultural differences and communicate effectively in every country. Companies following a localized advertising strategy must determine what type of selling idea, appeal and execution will work in each market. A product or service may have to be positioned differently in each market depending on consumers‘ usage patterns and habits.

D.

Media Selection—One of the most difficult decision areas for international advertisers is that of media strategy and selection. U.S. firms usually find that there are major differences in media outside this country and media conditions may vary considerably from one area to another, particularly in developing countries. Problems and differences include the types of media available, the characteristics of media, availability of media information, and restrictions from one country to another. Media planners have two basic media options available.

1. Local media—Using the local media of a country to reach its consumers, such as local magazines, newspapers, radio, billboards, direct mail and, where available and/or permitted, television. Many advertisers choose the local media of a country to reach its consumers.

There are varying media opportunities internationally than there are in the U.S. For example, print media still perform quite well in the U.S. while struggling in other countries.

2. International Media—International advertisers can also reach audiences in various countries through the use of international media that have multimarket coverage. The primary types of international media are magazines and newspapers. Some multinational commercial television stations and networks such as STAR India are operating in Europe and Asia and are likely to continue to expand with the growth of direct broadcast by satellite (DBS) in homes.

Professor Notes:

VI. THE ROLES OF OTHER PROMOTIONAL-MIX ELEMENTS IN INTERNATIONAL MARKETING The focus of this chapter has been on advertising since it is usually the primary element in the promotional mix of the international marketers. However, as in domestic marketing, promotional programs for foreign markets will generally include other elements such as personal selling, sales promotion and public relations. The role of these other promotional mix elements will vary depending on the firm‘s marketing and promotional strategy in foreign markets.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

A.

Sales Promotion—Many companies rely on sales promotion tools and techniques to help sell their products in foreign markets. Promotional tools that are effective in the U.S. such as free samples, premiums, contests, and gifts may also work well in other markets. One form of promotion that has become very popular among many U.S. firms for use in foreign markets is sponsorship of sporting events, concerts, and other music-oriented radio and television programs.

Unlike advertising, which often can be done on a global basis, sales promotion must often be adapted to local markets. Kashani and Quelch note several important differences among countries that must be considered in developing a sales promotion program including: ●

Economic development—The ability to use various sales promotion tools can be influenced by the stage of economic infrastructure and stage of development of a country.

●

Market maturity—The stage of development of the market for the product or service within a country can dictate that different types of sales promotion tools are needed to introduce a product or service versus competing in a mature market.

●

Consumer perceptions—Consumer perceptions of and willingness to use various sales promotion tools varies by country.

●

Trade structure—The willingness and ability of channel members to accommodate sales promotion programs. Retailers in many countries do not want to take time to process coupons, post promotional displays, or deal with premiums or packaging that require special handling or storage.

●

Regulations—Legal restrictions and regulations on sales promotion vary by country and can be very restrictive, affecting the type of promotions that can be used.

B.

Public Relations—Public relations plays an important role in supporting and enhancing the marketing and advertising efforts of companies involved in international advertising. Public relations activities are needed to deal with local governments, media, trade associations and the general public. The job of PR agencies in foreign markets is not only to help the company sell its products or services but also to present the firm as a ―good corporate citizen‖ who is involved with and concerned about the future of the country. Companies must have a favorable reputation and image if they are to be successful in foreign markets, as groups may feel threatened by the presence of a foreign multinational in their country. Public relations efforts may also be needed to deal with specific problems a company faces in international markets. Many multinational companies are choosing ad agencies that offer public relations capabilities so their entire communication program can be integrated and conducted on a global basis. The chapter discusses major public relations problems companies such as McDonald‘s and KFC have encountered in foreign markets.

C.

Digital and Social Media.

1. Worldwide growth of the Internet—The Internet is coming of age as a global marketing medium as well as an important IMC tool for companies around the world. As of 2019, there were more than 4.3 billion internet users around the world. Internet usage is highest in China, which now has more than 829 million people online followed India with 560 million, the United States with 293 million and Japan with 118 million. Internet use in international markets is still limited in some countries but is expected to develop quickly as telecommunications companies move into emerging markets such as Eastern Europe, India, and Latin America and improve the communications infrastructure.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

2. Use of digital and social media in international marketing—Digital media are now an integral part of the IMC program for most international marketers as they have websites for specific countries and/or regions which allow them to tailor the information they provide to the needs, interests, and lifestyles of consumers in these markets. The use of social media is also becoming prevalent in countries around the world. Facebook has become the first truly global social networking brand that has now has more than 2.3 billion users around the world.

Twitter has also become a global social media platform. In 2019, the micro-blogging site had 336 million monthly active users. As the digital revolution continues, marketers will be making greater use of digital and social media in their global as well as regional and local IMC programs. The use of social networking sites will become more prevalent, and marketers are also expected to increase their use of mobile marketing techniques since more consumers are now using their smartphones and other mobile devices to access and surf the Internet.

Professor Notes:

McGraw-Hill Connect ®: Implementing Global Non-Advertising Promotional Tools Type of Activity: Matching Activity Summary: In this activity, students are tasked with matching the correct issue the IMC manager might encounter in implementation of non-advertising tools in the foreign market with the descriptions provided.

Activity Learning Objective: 19-05 Describe the role of other elements of the promotional mix in the international IMC program.

Concept Review: This is a good opportunity to review Kamran Kashani and John Quelch‘s considerations of differences among countries that marketers must consider in developing a sales promotion program. These include economic development, market maturity, consumer perceptions, trade structure, and regulations.

Difficulty: 2 Medium Bloom‘s: Apply AACSB: Analytical Thinking

McGraw-Hill Connect ®: Global Marketing Featuring Kraft Type of Activity: Video Case

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Activity Summary: Kraft's Oreo is the most popular cookie in the world, enjoyed in over 100 countries across the world. The video gives students a summary of their international advertising and promotional strategies to improve the brand performance across the globe. Students will answer questions about the video.

Activity Learning Objective: 19-02 Discuss how economic, cultural, legal, and other factors in the international environment affect advertising and promotional decisions.

Concept Review: In recent years, much attention has focused on global marketing, where a standard marketing program is used in all markets. Part of global marketing is global advertising, where the same basic advertising approach is used in all markets. Opponents of the global (standardized) approach argue that differences in culture, market and economic conditions, and consumer needs and wants make a universal approach to marketing and advertising impractical. Many companies use an in-between approach, standardizing their basic marketing strategy but localizing advertising messages to fit each market.

Difficulty: 2 Medium Bloom‘s: Understand AACSB: Analytical Thinking

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Teaching Suggestions This chapter focuses on international advertising and promotion. It is very important to cover this topic as many companies, including those based in the U.S., Japan, and Europe, recognize that their domestic markets offer limited opportunity for expansion due to slow population growth, saturated markets, and intense competition. Moreover, imports are taking a larger share of the domestic market for many products and are likely to continue to do so. Companies must learn how to defend against foreign inroads into their domestic markets and how to market their products and services to foreign countries. We are living in very fascinating and rapidly changing time with respect to developments in the international arena. It is important that students are encouraged to keep abreast of these social, political, and economic changes, how they are affecting the global marketplace, and their implications for international marketing and advertising. While most of the chapter discusses issues of relevance to international advertising, it also covers the role of other integrated marketing tools in international marketing including sales promotion, public relations and the use of the internet and digital/social media. An excellent source of information on international advertising is Advertising Age as the online version has a section on global news.

Answers to Discussion Questions 1. The chapter opener discusses the growth and prevalence of digital marketing in China. Discuss the challenges and opportunities this presents to Western companies from the U.S. and Europe who are marketing their products and services in China. (LO 19-1, 19-2, 19-5) There are a number of factors that contribute to China‘s growing attractiveness to marketers in digital spaces. While most countries have struggled to grow their economies, China has averaged nearly 7 percent GDP growth since 2010. The Middle Kingdom has become the world‘s largest automotive market—with 28 million vehicles sold in the country in 2018 versus 17 million in the United States and 15 million in the European Union—and now accounts for nearly 30 percent of global sales. In addition to automobiles, China has become the biggest market in the world for many other products, including shoes; apparel; smartphones; and luxury goods such as watches, jewelry, and fashion accessories. While there are a plethora of opportunities for marketers in China, many marketers are struggling to seize these opportunities because U.S. marketers have found that China‘s market is very different from the U.S. Marketers must recognize that China has moved away from traditional media and has become a digital and mobile first market. U.S. marketers must work to adopt a mobile first mindset as Chinese consumers are spending nearly 7 hours a day on their mobile alone. Additionally, marketers must focus more attention on social media and utilize opinion leaders through viral marketing efforts. Both the size and emerging middle class of China make it a space where international brands must be. However, the realities of competing in China have changed because rather than evolving, the digital revolution in China has leapfrogged that of other countries, and a different marketing approach and set of competencies are needed to compete there.

2. Why are international markets so important to U.S. companies as well as companies located in other countries? Discuss the factors that companies must consider in developing IMC programs for various countries. (LO 19-1) There are several reasons why international markets are becoming so important to U.S. companies as well as corporations based in other nations. Many markets such as the U.S., Japan, and most European countries offer limited growth potential for many products and services because of slow population growth, saturated markets, and intense competition. In addition, in some industries such as alcoholic beverages, soft drinks, and tobacco, sociocultural and regulatory trends are causing many markets to stagnate or even decline. U.S. companies are also losing market share to imports and are

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

likely to continue to do so in the future. As the standard of living and economic situation improve in many foreign markets, U.S. companies will want to take advantage of the marketing opportunities in these areas. In some countries, such as Japan, changing values and lifestyles are also resulting in more consumption and spending by consumers and represent an opportunity to many U.S. companies. A key demographic segment for many companies is the teen market as they are heavy users of soft drinks, fast food, movies, and music. Many foreign countries have a very young population with a large number of teens and young adults who are very receptive to Western ways and products. Thus, companies targeting teens have an opportunity to grow by penetrating foreign markets.

For European companies such as Nestle, Unilever, Nokia, and Samsung, foreign markets are vital to their success. These companies are based in Switzerland, the Netherlands, Finland, and South Korea, respectively, which are relatively small, and without foreign markets, they would not have a large enough market nor economies of scale to survive against larger U.S. and Japanese companies.

Advertising and promotion play a very important role in many firms‘ international marketing programs as they must communicate information about their products and services to foreign markets and convince and inform consumers of their particular attributes, features and benefits. Advertising and promotion are the most visible of a firm is marketing activities as well as the most culture bound.

There are a number of factors marketers must consider in developing IMC programs for various countries. They must carefully analyze the major environmental factors of each market in which they compete or plan to enter including economic, demographic, cultural, and political/legal factors.

Companies must also consider whether they can use a global marketing and advertising strategy or adapt their IMC programs for various countries and/or regions. Decisions also must be made regarding how to organize for IMC, agency selection, creative strategy and execution, media planning and selection, and the role of various other IMC tools such as sales promotion, public relations, and digital/social media.

3. Discuss how global marketers might use the 2022 FIFA World Cup being held in Qatar as an integrated marketing communications opportunity. Do you think the controversy surrounding Qatar’s hosting of the Word Cup will impact companies’ decisions to become involved with the tournament as a marketing platform? (LO 19-1, 19-2) The FIFA World Cup is held once every four years and features 32 qualifying nations. It is the largest single sporting event competition in the world as nearly 3 billion people worldwide follow the monthlong tournament on television and over 3 million spectators attend the 64 matches played. The World Cup, like the summer and winter Olympic Games, is an excellent integrated marketing communications opportunity for companies as soccer (or football as it is referred to in most countries) is the most popular sport in the world and has a very large and passionate fan base. Marketers use the World Cup in various ways as an IMC opportunity ranging from simply advertising during the televised games to using it as a global partnership or sponsorship opportunity. For example, for the 2014 World Cup in Brazil, FIFA had six global partners, eight global sponsors, and eight local supporters. The six global partners paid an average of $31 million each per year over a four-year period from 2010 through 2014 while the eight sponsors paid an average of $15 million and six national supporters are laid out $8 million each. Companies that pay to be official partners or sponsors can refer to themselves as such in their marketing and promotional materials over the fouryear period and use the FIFA World Cup logo. Since they were selected to host the FIFA World Cup, Qatar has dealt with a number of issues and concerns over its ability to host such a major supporting event. Concerns were also raised over holding the tournament during the summer given the intense heat in Qatar. Because of these concerns, FIFA moved the game to November and December. This has created issues for TV networks who appreciated that the game was traditionally held in summer as it did not interfere with football season. Despite these issues, among others such as political instability in the Middle East, it is unlikely that this will deter advertisers from participating in the

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

game. Given the high cost of being a World Cup partner or sponsor, major global companies generally pay the monies for this opportunity such as Adidas, Sony, Coca-Cola, Hyundai/Kia, and Emirates Airlines. These companies will often develop special IMC campaigns around the World Cup and activate their sponsorships in a variety of ways including advertising during the games, contests and sweepstakes, digital marketing through their websites and social media, on-site promotions at the games, and major public relations campaigns. Many marketers also become involved with the World Cup by being sponsors of their countries national teams and advertising during the games on networks such as ESPN that has the contract to televise the tournament in the United States.

4. What are some of the political/legal factors that marketers must consider in developing advertising and promotional programs in a foreign market? Choose one of these political/legal factors and discuss how it has created a problem or challenge for a company in developing an advertising or promotional program in a specific country. (LO 19-2) A number of political and legal factors must be considered by those developing advertising and promotional programs in foreign markets. These include considerations of the types of products that may be advertised, the content or creative approach that may be used, the media that all advertisers are permitted to use, and the use of social and digital media. Some other considerations include the amount of advertising a single advertiser might be limited to in a specific medium, the use of foreign languages in ads, the use of advertising material prepared outside the country, the use of local versus international advertising agencies, and the specific taxes that may be levied against advertising. An example of the political and legal factors impacting tobacco packaging in Australia is provided in the text. In 2012 Australia‘s high court upheld the country‘s Plain Packaging Act, making it the first country to ban brand logos on all tobacco packages. The new law requires tobacco and cigarettes to be sold in plain green packages that feature graphic pictures of the negative health effects of smoking such as blindness; mouth, throat, and lung cancer; and the dangers of secondhand smoke. The new law is being challenged by tobacco companies through the World Trade Organization; they have concerns that it could set a marketing precedent that is adopted by other countries. Tobacco companies wishing to enter the Australian market would certainly need to be aware of this legal restriction.

5. What is meant by a country-of-origin effect? Choose a product category for which there is a country-of-origin effect and discuss how a company or brand might use it in developing an advertising message. (LO 19-3) A country-of-origin effect refers to consumers‘ general perceptions of quality for products made in a given country. For example, Germany is known for excellent automotive engineering, and brands such as Mercedes or BMW are generally perceived as being of higher quality because they are from this country. BMW and Mercedes would likely want to utilize consistent high-end positioning of the product in the creative to maintain this image.

6. Global Perspective 19–2 discussed the ―Taste the Feeling‖ global marketing campaign launched by the Coca-Cola Company. Evaluate the creative strategy being used for this campaign as well as the ―one-brand‖ approach that unites various brands such as Coca-Cola Light/Diet Coke, Coke Zero, and Coca-Cola Life under one image, rather than positioning each brand differently. (LO 19-1, 19-2) In 2016, Coca-Cola‘s new CMO, Marcos de Quinto, announced that the company would be making a major shift in its marketing strategy whereby all Coke trademark brands would be united in one global creative campaign called ―Taste the Feeling.‖ This approach worked to put the Coca-Cola product at the center of every ad. The ―Taste the Feeling‖ campaign is designed to bring to life the idea that drinking a Coca-Cola product is a simple pleasure that makes everyday moments more

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

special and celebrates the experience of doing so. Coke also feels that this new approach focuses more on the actual product. The one-brand approach that Coca-Cola is pursuing includes a global packaging shift. All of the new cans will feature the brand‘s signature ―Red Disc‖. This concept of a one-brand approach is simplistic for consumers and unifying for the brand. Consumers will associate any Coke products with the concept of tasting the feeling. This is much more unifying than creating a separate brand for each product line which might confuse consumers.

7. Discuss the advantages and disadvantages of using a global advertising campaign for a company or brand. For what type of products or services is a global advertising approach appropriate? (LO 19-3) A global marketing strategy and advertising program offers certain advantages to a company, including the following: ●

Economies of scale in production and distribution

●

Lower marketing and advertising costs as a result of reductions in planning and advertising production

●

Abilities to exploit good ideas on a worldwide basis and introduce products quickly into various world markets

●

A consistent international brand and/or company image

●

Simplification of coordination and control of marketing and promotional programs

Some of the problems with global marketing and advertising include: ●

Differences in culture, market and economic development, consumer needs, media availabilities and legal restrictions make it extremely difficult to develop an effective universal approach to marketing and advertising.

●

Advertising in particular is difficult to standardize because of cultural differences in circumstances, language, values, beliefs, and lifestyle.

●

Usage patterns and perceptions of a product may vary from one country to another and require adjustments in the marketing and advertising program rather than just using a global campaign.

While many in the advertising industry view globalization of advertising as difficult, some progress has been made in learning what products and services are best suited to global appeals: 1. Brands or messages that can be adapted for a visual appeal, avoiding the problems of trying to translate words into dozens of languages.

2. Brands promoted with image campaigns that play to universal needs, values, and emotions.

3. High-tech products and new products coming to the world for the first time and not steeped in the cultural heritage of a country.

4. Products with nationalistic flavor if the country has a reputation in the field.

5. Products that appeal to a market segment with universally similar tastes, interests, needs, and values.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

8. What are the three options available to marketers when organizing for international advertising and promotion? Discuss factors that will influence which option a marketer might use. (LO 19-4) One of the first decisions a company must make when it decides to market its products internationally is how to organize the international advertising and promotion function. This decision is likely to depend on how the company is organized for international marketing and business. There are three general options for organizing for international advertising. The first option is centralization. This option centralizes the international advertising and promotion function so that all decisions about agency selection, creative strategy, campaign development, media strategy, and budgeting are made at the firm‘s home office. Organizations are likely to organize via centralization when market and media conditions are similar from one country to another, when the company has only one or a few international agencies handling all of its advertising, when the company can use standardized advertising, or when it desires a consistent image worldwide. Centralization may also be best when a company‘s international business is small and it operates through foreign distributors or licensees who do not become involved in the marketing and promotional process.

The second option is decentralization. Under a decentralized organizational structure, marketing and advertising managers in each market have the authority to make their own advertising and promotional decisions. Local managers can select ad agencies, develop budgets, conduct research, approve creative themes and executions, and select advertising media. Organizations are likely to utilize a decentralized option when companies believe local managers know the marketing situation in their countries the best. They may also be more effective and motivated when given responsibility for the advertising and promotional program in their markets. Decentralization also works well in small or unique markets where headquarters‘ involvement is not worthwhile or advertising must be tailored to the local market.

The third option is combination. This involves a combination of a centralized and decentralized approach. In this approach, the home office has the most control over advertising policies, guidelines, and operations in all markets. The international advertising or marketing communication manager works closely with local or regional marketing managers and personnel from the international agency (or agencies) and sets advertising and promotional objectives, has budgetary authority, approves all creative themes and executions, and approves media selection decisions, especially when they are made on a regional basis or overlap with other markets. This approach is best utilized when a company seeks consistency in a company‘s international advertising yet permits local input and adaptation of the promotion program. Most consumer-product companies find that local adaptation of advertising is necessary for foreign markets or regions, but they want to maintain control of the overall worldwide image they project.

9. Discuss some of the differences in media that exist across various countries and how they might impact the media strategy used by marketers. (LO 19-4) Companies face a number of problems in developing media strategies for different countries. First, the types of media available in each country are different. For example, TV sets are not as prevalent in many homes in developing countries and even if they are, the amount of commercial time available may be limited. Companies who using the Internet and social media a major part of their integrated marketing communications strategy must consider the penetration of personal computers and smartphone in homes and businesses in foreign markets. The characteristics of media also differ from country to country in terms of coverage, cost, and quality of reproduction, restrictions and the like.

Multinational companies also face problems in getting reliable media information such as circulation figures of magazines, audience profiles, and costs. Media rates may also fluctuate because of unstable

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

currencies and economic conditions. There also may be differences in consumer characteristics and media usage patterns due to factors such as literacy rates or media preferences.

10. Discuss the evolving role of digital marketing in the IMC program of international marketers.

How can marketers make effective use of digital and social media in marketing their products and services in various countries? (LO 19-5) The Internet has become an important IMC tool for companies around the world as more businesses and homes become connected to it. There are nearly 3.4 billion Internet users around the world with the largest number in Asia followed by Europe and North America. Digital media are becoming an integral part of international marketers IMC programs at a global, regional, and local level as they are using the Internet to promote their companies and brands and engage in e-commerce. Most multinational marketers now have websites for specific countries or regions that allow them to tailor the information they provide to the needs, interests, lifestyles, and consumption patterns of consumers in these markets. The use of social media is also becoming prevalent in many countries as Facebook now has more nearly 2 billion users around the globe. The company now owns Instagram, which has over 400 million active users, 75 percent off whom live outside the U.S., while Twitter has over 300 million users. Many countries have their own social networking sites, which are upgrading their capabilities to remain competitive as other sites enter their markets. It is likely that the use of social networking sites will become more prevalent and marketers will increase their use of them. Marketers are also expected to increase their use of mobile marketing techniques as more consumers use smartphones and other mobile devices to access the Internet.

Additional Discussion Questions (not in text) 11. Discuss the arguments for and against the use of global marketing and advertising. What types of products and services are best suited for global advertising? What developments have taken place in recent years that support the use of global advertising and what factors might make this approach more difficult to use effectively? (LO 19-3) There are several advantages to global advertising including lower advertising production costs, the ability to exploit good creative ideas on a worldwide basis, the opportunity to have a consistent brand and/or company image all over the world, and the simplification of coordination and control of advertising programs. Problems with global advertising are that differences in culture, market and economic development, consumer needs and usage patterns, media availability and regulations make it extremely difficult to develop an effective universal approach to advertising. Advertising is very difficult to standardize because of cultural differences such as language, traditions, value, lifestyles, customs, and the like. Another problem with the use of global advertising is that consumer usage patterns and perceptions of a product may vary from one country to another and may require adjustments in marketing and advertising approaches. Marketers must also recognize that the use of a global advertising campaign can alienate consumers as well as local employees if they feel their individual differences or cultural diversities are being ignored.

Advances in technology such as the Internet, digital media, cable and satellite television, travel and other areas are making the use of global marketing more feasible. Consumers around the globe are exposed to the same music, movies, TV shows, sporting events and websites. Advances in travel are making it possible for consumers to visit other countries and experience their culture. One thing that is making global marketing more difficult is the trend in many countries to return to more localized music, TV shows and other forms of entertainment. Some countries are trying to preserve their local culture and national identity and may be less receptive to brands from foreign countries that are advertised globally. Global advertising is likely to be inappropriate when there are strong cultural

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

differences among consumers that may influence their interpretation of, and responses to, advertising or when consumer usage patterns and perceptions of a product or service may vary from one country to another. However, these cultural differences are disappearing rapidly, particularly among certain markets such as young people.

12. What is meant by the ―think globally, act locally‖ approach to global marketing and advertising? Discuss some of the ways marketers can adapt their advertising to local markets.

(LO 19-3) Proponents of global marketing such as Professor Theodore Levitt argue that the worldwide marketplace has become homogenized and the basic needs, wants and expectations of consumers transcend geographic, national and cultural boundaries. They argue that consumers around the world are very similar with regard to tastes, needs, wants, preferences and emotional desires and motives.

More recently, support for the idea of global marketing has come from advocates of global consumer culture theory who argue that the globalization of markets had led to the existence of a global consumer culture in which many consumers share consumption values, regardless of where they reside. Obviously much has happened over the past two decades that lends greater support to the call for global marketing. There have been significant developments in communications and technology that are leading to the globalization of markets. Satellite-delivered programming has resulted in the television shows being seen by consumers around the world, as governments can no longer control what shows are seen in their countries. The Internet is clearly a new global medium that provides companies with access to consumers around the globe. Social media sites such as Facebook, Instagram, YouTube, Snapchat and Twitter are also popular in most countries. Entertainment such as sporting events, movies, TV shows, and concerts are now seen by consumers around the world and having an impact on them. Thus, products and services can be marketed in a similar fashion around the world using global marketing approaches.

Not everyone agrees with the concept of pure global marketing arguing that total standardization is unrealistic and changes are required for local markets. They advocate a ―think globally, act locally‖ approach whereby the same basic advertising theme or approach is used in each country but modifications are made to adapt to differences in culture, language, market conditions and other factors. Marketers use this approach by adapting their campaigns to local markets by producing ads with a similar theme or positioning platform but with copy, visual, models and other executional elements that are adapted to the local market.

13. Many large multinational companies are consolidating all of their worldwide advertising with one large agency. Evaluate the pros and cons of this approach. (LO 19-4) A number of factors are driving this consolidation trend. Major corporations recognize they must develop a consistent global image for the company and/or its brands and speak with one coordinated voice. This can be very difficult to do if a company is working with numerous agencies around the world. For example, Dell entered into a partnership with the WPP Group to form a new global integrated marketing and communications agency that serves the company‘s global marketing needs.

Dell had been working with more than 800 different marketing communication firms around the world and wanted to simplify its agency structure. IBM was the first major company to consolidate its global advertising with one agency. The reason given by IBM for consolidating its advertising with Ogilvy & Mather Worldwide was that the company had been projecting too many images with its advertising divided among so many agencies. IBM recognizes that it is competing in a global market for computers and feels it is important to deliver clear, consistent messages that take advantage of the high amount of equity in the IBM name. The agency consolidation allows IBM to gain greater control over, and facilitate coordination of, its worldwide advertising. IBM also thinks that high-tech products such as computers can be advertised using a global advertising campaign since the reasons

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

for purchasing them are similar the world over. Companies are also consolidating their global advertising in an effort to increase efficiency and save money. Finally, advances in technology such as fax machines, e-mail, video conferencing, and airline connections make it much easier to manage accounts around the globe.

The risk of the consolidation decision is that one centralized agency may not be able to develop as effective advertising in many foreign markets as a local agency. Local agencies often have a better understanding of the marketing and advertising environment in their country or region and thus may be able to develop more effective advertising than a large multinational agency. Using a single agency also means that a marketer has no backup agency to turn to if there are problems such as ineffective ad campaign. Companies who consolidate also face the problem of selling the idea to regional offices and local country managers who may not like having control of advertising taken from them.

14. What are the three basic options a company has for organizing its international advertising and promotion function? Discuss the pros and cons of each. (LO 19-4) There are three basic options for organizing the international advertising and promotion function including centralization, decentralization or a combination of the two. The centralized organizational structure involves having all advertising and promotional decisions such as agency selection, research, creative strategy and campaign development, media strategy and budgeting done at a company‘s home office. Under a decentralized organizational structure, marketing and advertising managers in each market have the authority to make their own advertising and promotional decisions for their local markets. Under the combination approach, the home office or headquarters will have the most control over advertising policy, guidelines and operations in all markets. However, the local advertising managers will submit advertising plans and budgets and play a major role in working with the agency in adapting the advertising appeals to their particular markets and making media selection decisions.

Centralization works well when market and media conditions are similar from one country to another, when, the company has only one or a few international agencies handling its advertising, when the company can use standardized advertising or when it desires a consistent image worldwide.

Centralization also works best when a company‘s international business is small and it operates through foreign distributors or licensees. The decentralized approach is used when companies want to give more control and authority to local managers and believe they know the situations in their markets the best. Decentralization also works best in small or unique markets where advertising must be adapted to fit the conditions of the local market. The combination approach allows for standardization and consistency in a company‘s international advertising yet allows for local input or adaptation.

15. Discuss the role of sales promotion tools such as sampling and coupons in international marketing. What challenges might marketers face in using these tools in various countries around the world? (LO 19-5) Sales promotion tools such as sampling and coupons generally play the same role in international marketing as they do in a domestic marketing program. Samples can be a very effective way to get consumers in foreign markets to try a new product and realize the benefits of using it. As noted in the text, a number of companies such as WD-40, Haagen-Dazs, and Nestle have used extensive sampling programs to generate trial of their products. Coupons can be very important in encouraging consumers to try a new product or an established brand. However, while most consumers may be willing to accept a sample of a product, coupons might face more hurdles as consumers in some countries have negative attitudes toward them and retailers may not be willing to accept coupons as

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

readily as in the United States and other countries where there are systems in place to handle and process them. Retailers in many countries do not want to handle coupons and other types of promotions that may require additional effort on their part. Thus, marketers must carefully evaluate the marketing situation in each country before developing and implementing a sales promotion program.

16. What are some of the cultural variables that marketers must considering in developing advertising and promotional programs in a foreign market? Choose one of these cultural variables and discuss how it has created a problem or challenge for a company in developing an advertising and promotional program in a specific country. (LO 19-2) Cultural factors influence the development of advertising and promotional programs for foreign markets in a number of ways. Advertisers must consider the language, customs, tastes, attitudes, lifestyle, values, religion, and ethical/moral standards of each society when developing an advertising campaign. Cultural factors determine what products and services marketers can sell to foreign markets as well as how they can communicate with consumers. They must understand not only the language of the country but also its nuances, idioms, and subtleties. They must also be aware of the connotations of words and symbols they use in their ads and how advertising messages, including copy, images and slogans, will be translated. Students should choose a particular cultural variable such as customs, values, language or ethical/moral standards and find an example of how it has created a specific challenge or problem for marketers in a specific country.

17. Why do you think Facebook has become so popular in countries around the world? Discuss the importance of social media in the IMC programs of international marketers. (LO 19-5) The use of social media is becoming prevalent in countries throughout the world as Facebook now has nearly 2 billion users and is the leading social media site in the most countries while Instagram now has over 400 million active users. As discussed throughout the text, social media sites are becoming very popular with the growth of the internet and broadband connections, particularly through wireless. The growth of smartphones and other mobile devices are also driving the growth of social media in countries through the world as the majority of people now go online through their phones and this is likely to increase in the future. Facebook has been working to improve its platform and interface on mobile devices while Twitter already lends itself to mobile given its characteristics.

The use of social media sites is also on the rise because people enjoy using them to communicate, stay in touch with friends, share pictures and other media, and to entertain themselves.

Social media will continue to be an important part of the IMC programs of international marketers as companies recognize the value of using Facebook, Instagram, YouTube, Twitter, and other sites to communicate with consumers and are finding more ways to do so. Companies around the world recognize that having a Facebook page or YouTube page is as important as having a website and now a necessity as consumers expect to be able to connect with companies through social media.

Moreover, it is important for marketers to monitor social media to see what consumers are saying about their companies and brands and be able to respond in a timely manner. There are still countries where Facebook, Instagram, YouTube, and Twitter do not have a presence, such as China, which present them with growth opportunities. However, China has its own social media sites such as Sina Weibo and Renren, which are very popular and provide a possible IMC platform for global marketers.

The importance of social media in the IMC program of marketers is likely to increase as additional sites are developed and adopted by consumers as part of their daily lives.

CHAPTER 20

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

REGULATION OF ADVERTISING AND PROMOTION Chapter Overview The purpose of this chapter is to examine the regulatory environment in which advertising and promotion operate including industry self-regulation and regulation by federal and state agencies. The chapter begins by examining the various ways the advertising industry attempts to police itself through the use of selfregulation by various parties including advertisers and agencies, trade associations, the business community, and the media. Attention is also given to appraising the value and effectiveness of selfregulation. The remainder of this chapter focuses on governmental regulation of advertising, particularly at the federal level. We discuss the background of federal regulation of advertising and examine the role and functioning of the Federal Trade Commission, including its handling of deceptive advertising.

Additional federal regulatory agencies that have some influence or power over advertising are also discussed along with advertising regulation at the state level. The chapter concludes with an examination of regulations affecting other promotional areas such as sales promotion, direct marketing, and marketing on the Internet.

Learning Objectives 1.

Explain the role and function of various regulatory agencies.

2.

Evaluate the effectiveness of self-regulation of advertising.

3.

Describe how advertising is regulated by federal and state regulatory bodies.

4.

Discuss the regulation of sales promotion, direct marketing, and Internet marketing.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Chapter and Lecture Outline I.

INTRODUCTION

Advertisers operate in a complex environment of local, state, and federal rules and regulations.

Additionally, there are a number of advertising and business-sponsored associations, consumer groups, organizations, and media that attempt to police advertising through various self-regulatory programs and guidelines. While in most situations the various rules and regulations primarily influence individual advertisers and their messages, there are situations where advertising for an entire industry can be affected. The tobacco industry has already been banned from advertising on broadcast media, while there is currently strong sentiment to impose restrictions on the advertising and promotion of alcoholic beverages and direct-to-consumer drug advertising.

A.

Overview of Regulation—Regulatory concerns can play a major role in the advertising and promotion decision-making process. Regulation and control over advertising come from internal or self-regulation by various groups within the advertising industry and business community as well as from external federal and state regulatory agencies such as the Federal Trade Commission. While only the governmental agencies have the force of law, most advertisers will abide by the guidelines and decisions of internal or self-regulatory bodies. It is important for all of those involved in the advertising decision making process, both on the client and agency side, to have an understanding of various rules and regulations that affect advertising and promotion and how the regulatory bodies operate.

Professor Notes:

II.

SELF-REGULATION

For many years, the advertising industry has practiced and promoted the use of voluntary self-regulation as a means of regulating and controlling advertising. Most advertisers and their agencies as well as the media recognize the importance of maintaining consumer trust and confidence in advertising. Selfregulation has also been viewed as a way of limiting government interference and control over advertising. Self-regulation and control of advertising emanate from all segments of the advertising industry, including individual advertisers and their agencies, business and advertising associations, and the media.

A.

Self-Regulation by Advertisers and Agencies—The self-regulatory process actually begins with the interaction of the client and agency when creative ideas are considered and evaluated. Most advertisers recognize that their ads are a reflection of the company and want to be sure that their advertising claims are truthful, verifiable, and do not mislead or deceive consumers. Internal control and regulation also come from advertising agencies, which are responsible for verifying all product claims made by the advertiser. Agencies generally take formal steps to protect themselves from legal and ethical perils through agency-client contracts. However, agencies have been held legally responsible for fraudulent for deceptive claims along with the client in some cases.

B.

Self-Regulation by Trade Associations—Many industries have developed self-regulatory programs and guidelines or codes for advertising. This is particularly true in industries where advertising is prone to controversy such as liquor and alcoholic beverages, drugs, and various

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

products marketed to children. Many professions also maintain advertising guidelines through local, state, and national organizations such as the Motion Picture Association of America or the Wine Institute. While industry associations‘ guidelines and codes are meant to show that member firms are concerned with the impact and consequences of their advertising, they have no legal basis for enforcing them and must rely on peer pressure or other sanctions to gain compliance.

The issue of advertising hard liquor on television and the litigation surrounding this discussion is provided in this section.

C.

Self-Regulation by Business—A number of self-regulatory mechanisms have been established by the business community in an effort to control advertising practices. The largest and best known of these is through the Better Business Bureau (BBB), which promotes fair advertising and selling practices in all industries in local areas. The parent organization of the local BBB offices is the BBB National Programs, Inc., which plays a major role in the monitoring and control of advertising at a national level through the Advertising Self-Regulatory Council. This council includes five investigative units: the National Advertising Division (NAD), the Children‘s Advertising Unit (CARU), the Electronic Retailing Self-Regulation Program (ERSP), the Direct Selling Self Regulatory Council (DSSRC), and the Online Interest-Based Advertising Accountability Program. The BBB National Programs also has an appellate unit, the National Advertising Review Board (NARB). Staffed primarily by attorneys, the NAD, CARU, ERSP, and Accountability Program review advertising claims that are national in scope. CARU reviews advertising directed to children under the age of 12, and ERSP examines advertising claims in direct-response advertising, including infomercials and home shopping channels, while the Accountability Program regulates online behavioral advertising (OBA) across the Internet.

D.

The BBB National Programs and the NAD/NARB—The BBB National Programs, working through the NAD/NARB/CARU/ERSP and the DSSRC, is a valuable and effective selfregulatory body. The BBB National Program‘s mission is to sustain high standards of truth and accuracy in national advertising and the organization has a formal process that they follow for self-regulation. and constitute the advertising industry‘s most effective self-regulatory mechanism. The Advertising Self- Regulatory Council (ASRC) was merged into BBB National Programs in 2019.

The NAD (National Advertising Division) has examined advertising for truth and accuracy since 1971 and has published more than 5,000 decisions, focusing on areas that include product performance claims, superiority claims against competitive products, and all kinds of scientific and technical claims. Figure 20-1 outlines the sources of the majority of the complaints received by the NAD with the majority of these complaints coming from marketers who are simply challenging the claims made by their competitors.

The Children‘s Advertising Review Unit‘s activities include the review and evaluation of childdirected advertising in all media, as well as online privacy issues that affect children. The CARU also provides a general advisory service for advertisers and agencies and has developed selfregulatory guidelines for children‘s advertising. The Electronic Retailing Self-Regulation Program is sponsored by the electronic retailing association and its mission is to enhance consumer confidence in electronic retailing (e-commerce) and discourage advertising and marketing practices in the industry that contain unsubstantiated claims and promote effective selfregulation. In 2012, the ASRC became an independent enforcement mechanism for a new selfregulatory program, the Interest-Based Advertising Accountability Program, which regulates online behavioral advertising across the Internet. The new program, which was developed by the Digital Advertising Alliance, applies consumer-friendly standards to online behavioral advertising across the Internet. The Self-Regulatory Principles for Online Behavioral Advertising,

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

shown in Figure 20-2, are designed to address consumer concerns regarding the use of personal information for interest-based advertising and focus on transparency and consumer control issues.

1. Advertising associations—Various groups in the advertising industry have also been proponents of self-regulation. These include the two major national organizations, the 4As, which is the major trade association representing U.S. advertising agencies, and the American Advertising Federation (AAF). These associations have established guidelines for truthful and responsible advertising and have been active in the legislative area of advertising and in influencing agencies to abide by their codes and principles. The 4A‘s creative code is provided in Figure 20-3.

E.

Self-Regulation by Media—Another very important self-regulatory mechanism in the advertising industry is that of the media. Most media maintain some form of advertising review process and may reject any ads they regard as objectionable. Newspapers and magazines have their own set of advertising standards, requirements, and restrictions that will often vary depending on the size and nature of the publication.

Advertising on television and radio has been regulated for years through codes developed by the industry trade association—the National Association of Broadcasters (NAB). While the NAB suspended all of its code provisions in 1982, many individual broadcasters, such as the major TV networks, have incorporated major portions of the code provisions into their own standards.

Probably the most stringent review process and standards of any media are those of the four major television networks through their ―Standards and Practices‖ divisions, which carefully review all commercials submitted to the network or affiliate stations. Figure 20-4 shows a sampling of the TV network‘s guidelines for children‘s advertising. The four major networks receive nearly 50,000 commercials a year for review; nearly two-thirds are accepted and only 3 percent are rejected. Most problems with the remaining 30 percent are resolved through negotiation, and the ads are revised and resubmitted. Some digital advertising platforms also have restrictions regarding the advertising of certain types of products and services such as Facebook‘s restrictions on private gun sales.

F.

Appraising Self-Regulation—The three major participants in the advertising process—the advertisers, agencies, and media—all work both individually and collectively to encourage truthful, ethical, and responsible advertising. The advertising industry views self-regulation as an effective mechanism for controlling advertising and prefers this form of regulation to government intervention. The president-CEO of the ASRC notes that the self-regulatory system protects consumers from misleading advertising claims; points the way on new media issues; levels the playing field for all advertisers by holding them to high standards of truthfulness and requiring claim substantiation; and provides support for the development of new self-regulatory programs.

Self-regulation has been effective and has probably led to the development of standards and practices that are higher than those imposed by law and beyond the scope of proper legislation.

There are, however, limitations to self-regulation and this process has been criticized in a number of areas. Concern has been expressed over the time it takes the NAD to resolve a complaint, and over staffing and budgeting constraints, which limit the NAD/NARB system‘s ability to investigate more cases and complete them more rapidly. Self-regulation has also been criticized for being self-serving to the advertisers and the advertising industry and for lacking the power to be a viable alternative to federal or state regulation.

Professor Notes:

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

III.

FEDERAL REGULATION OF ADVERTISING

Governmental control and regulation of advertising comes from various federal, state and local laws and regulations with enforcement being the responsibility of various government agencies. The most important source of external regulation of advertising comes from the Federal Trade Commission (FTC). In addition, depending on the advertiser‘s industry and product or service, other federal agencies such as the Federal Communications Commission, the Food and Drug Administration, the U.S. Postal Service, and the Bureau of Alcohol, Tobacco, Firearms and Explosives may have regulations that affect advertising.

A.

Advertising and the First Amendment—Freedom of speech or expression, as defined by the First Amendment, is the most basic federal law governing advertising in the United States. The courts have extended First Amendment protection to commercial speech, which is speech that promotes a commercial transaction. The text discusses some of the landmark cases where the federal courts have issued rulings supporting the coverage of commercial speech by the First Amendment. We also discuss a more recent case involving Nike and whether the First Amendment protects statements the company made to defend its labor practices. The development of the Central Hudson Test for determining restrictions on commercial speech is discussed in this section of the chapter.

B.

Background on Federal Regulation of Advertising—Federal regulation of advertising originated in 1914 with the passage of the Federal Trade Commission Act, which created the FTC. This act was originally passed to help enforce antitrust laws, and false advertising was not prohibited unless there was evidence of injury to a competitor. Another important piece of legislation was the Wheeler-Lea Amendment, which Congress passed in 1938. It amended Section 5 of the FTC Act and empowered the FTC to act against unfair or deceptive acts or practices if there was evidence of injury to the public. Proof of injury to competition was not necessary.

C.

The Federal Trade Commission—The FTC is charged with the responsibility of protecting both consumers and businesses from anticompetitive behavior and unfair and deceptive practices. The major divisions of the FTC include the Bureaus of Competition, Economics, and Consumer Protection. The Bureau of Consumer Protection investigates and litigates cases involving acts or practices alleged to be deceptive or unfair to consumers. Since the 1970s, the FTC made enforcement of laws regarding false and misleading advertising a top priority. Several new programs were instituted, budgets were increased, and the commission became a very powerful regulatory agency. However, many of these programs, as well as the expanded powers of the FTC to develop regulations on the basis of ―unfairness,‖ became controversial. At the root of this controversy is the fundamental issue of what constitutes unfair advertising.

D.

The Concept of Unfairness—Under Section 5 of the FTC Act, the Federal Trade Commission has the mandate to act against unfair and deceptive advertising practices. While the FTC has taken steps to define and clarify the meaning of deception, for many years the Commission was less clear with regard to the meaning of unfairness. In response to this problem, the FTC sent Congress a statement in 1980 that contained an interpretation of unfairness. According to the FTC policy, the basis for unfairness is that a trade practice (a) causes substantial physical or economic injury to consumers (b) could not be reasonably avoided by consumers, and (c) must not be outweighed by countervailing benefits to consumers or competition. Practices considered unfair are claims made. without prior substantiation, claims that might exploit such vulnerable groups as children and older adults, and instances where consumers cannot make a valid choice because the

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

advertiser omits important information about the product or competing products mentioned in the ad.

E.

Deceptive Advertising—Deceptive advertising can take a number of forms ranging from intentional false or misleading claims by an advertiser to ads that may be true in a literal sense but leave consumers with a false or misleading impression. Regulatory agencies must make a distinction between false or misleading messages and those that rely on puffery, which refers to the use of subjective claims or statements about a product or service. The chapter discusses the battle between Pizza Hut and Papa John‘s over the latter‘s use of puffery as a defense for its ―Better Ingredients. Better Pizza‖ tagline and how Domino‘s Pizza joined the war by running a commercial poking fun at Papa John‘s puffery defense (see Exhibit 20-9).

While unfair or deceptive acts or practices in advertising are the primary focus of the FTC, these terms have never really been precisely defined. In 1983, the FTC put forth a new working definition of deception, which argued that the commission will find deception ―if there is a misrepresentation, omission or practice that is likely to mislead the consumer acting reasonably in the circumstances to the consumer‘s detriment.‖ There are three essential elements to this definition or deception. The first element is that the misrepresentation, omission or practice must be likely to mislead the consumer. The second element is that the act or practice must be considered from the perspective of the reasonable consumer. The third key element is materiality, which means that the act influenced the consumer‘s decision-making process in a detrimental way. The FTC does have several programs for helping in the evaluation of an ad for deception.

1. Affirmative disclosure—The FTC may require advertisers to include types of information in their ads so consumers will be aware of all the consequences, conditions, and limitations associated with the use of the product or service. The goal of affirmative disclosure is for consumers to have sufficient information to make an informed decision. Another area where the FTC is seeking more specificity from advertisers concerns country of origin claims. In 1998 the FTC issued new guidelines for advertising or labeling a product as ―Made in USA‖ which requires that all significant parts and processing that go into the product must be of U.S. origin and the product should have no or very little foreign content.

2. Advertising substantiation—The FTC‘s advertising substantiation program requires advertisers to have documentation to support the claims in their ads and to prove they are truthful. The program requires substantiation of claims made with respect to safety, performance, efficacy, quality, or comparative price. The FTC‘s challenge of the claims made

by Reebok and Skechers for their toning shoes on grounds that that lacked proper substantiation or the FTC‘s challenge of POM Wonderful‘s claims regarding unsubstantiated claims made about their pomegranate juice can be discussed here.

F.

The FTC‘s Handling of Deceptive Advertising Cases.

1. Consent and cease-and-desist orders—Allegations that a firm is engaging in unfair or deceptive advertising come to the attention of the FTC from a variety of sources including complaints from competitors, from consumers, from other governmental agencies, or from the commission‘s own monitoring and investigations. Once the FTC decides that a complaint is justified and warrants further action, it notifies the offender, who then has 30 days to respond to the complaint. The FTC complaint procedure will then depend on the response and actions taken by the advertiser. An advertiser charged with deceptive advertising can agree to a settlement with the FTC by signing a consent order, which is an agreement to stop the practice or advertising in question. This agreement is for settlement purposes only and does

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

not constitute an admission of guilt by the advertiser. Most FTC inquiries are settled by consent orders. If the advertiser chooses not to sign the consent decree, a hearing can be requested before an administrative law judge. The judge‘s decision can be appealed to the full five-member commission by either side. If the commission upholds the complaint, the advertiser can appeal the case to the federal courts. Since the appeal process may take some time, the FTC has the power to issue a cease-and-desist order requiring the advertiser to stop the specified advertising claim until a hearing is held. Violation of a cease and desist order is punishable by a fine of up to $10,000 a day. Figure 20-5 summarizes the FTC complaint procedure.

2. Corrective advertising—A problem may exist even if an advertiser ceases using a false or deceptive advertisement since consumers may still retain some or all of the deceptive claim in memory. To address this problem of residual effects of prior deceptive advertising, the FTC developed a program in the 1970s known as corrective advertising. Under this program, an advertiser found guilty of deceptive advertising can be required to run additional advertising (corrective ads) designed to remedy the deception or misinformation contained in previous ads. Corrective advertising is probably the most controversial of all the FTC programs as advertisers have argued that it infringes on First Amendment rights of free speech. The effectiveness of corrective advertising campaigns has also been questioned, as has the FTC‘s involvement in specifying the content of corrective messages. The text discusses the landmark corrective advertising case involving Listerine mouthwash and another case involving Campbell Soup. While the FTC‘s authority to order corrective advertising has been challenged in several cases, its right to do so has been upheld by appellate courts.

G.

Developments in Federal Regulation by the FTC—Over the past decade, the FTC has focused its attention on the enforcement of existing regulations, particularly in areas such as telemarketing and Internet privacy. The FTC also has focused on eliminating false e-mail advertising and has stepped up its enforcement against senders of deceptive or misleading claims via e-mail. The commission also scrutinized the use of testimonial ads more carefully, particularly with respect to the use of a ―results not typical‖ disclosure in situations where the outcomes are more likely to vary substantially than be typical for most consumers. The FTC has been active in bringing enforcement action against deceptive health claims as well as companies and principals in the mortgage lending industry for deceptive and unfair practices in servicing mortgage loans. The FTC has also become more involved in the area of environmental marketing and the use of ―green‖ claims for carbon offset, landfill reduction, and sustainable packaging. Under the Obama administration, the FTC was very active in the regulation of advertising as well as of other marketing practices. The FTC is also focusing attention on protecting consumers‘ online privacy and the collection of sensitive information, particularly for those using social media such as Facebook and Twitter. The commission will continue to be the primary regulator of advertising and marketing practices in the United States, although the direction of the FTC is likely to be influenced by the political party of the presidential administration.

H.

Additional Federal Regulatory Agencies.

1. The Federal Communications Commission—The FCC has jurisdiction over the radio, television, telephone, and telegraph industries. Its authority over the airways gives it the power to control advertising content and to restrict what products and services can be advertised on radio and television. It can also eliminate obscene and profane programs and/or messages and those it finds in poor taste. The FCC generally works closely with the FTC in the regulation of advertising. For example, the FCC and FTC have been investigating the advertising of long-distance phone services, as they are concerned that many of these ads deceive consumers. In recent years, the FCC has become very active in enforcing laws

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

governing the airing of obscene, indecent and profane material. For example, in 2004 the FCC levied fines against shock-jock Howard Stern for indecent content and Clear Channel Communications, which carried his syndicated radio show. The FCC has also become involved in issues affecting the area of publicity and public relations such as making sure that broadcasters screen news releases to ensure that they clearly disclose the nature, source, and sponsorship of material. The crackdown is designed to address a marketing practice whereby promotional videos sent to TV stations are represented as news stories. The FCC is also currently considering the regulation of the use of product placements in television shows.

Unlike some countries, the United States does not prohibit product placements in the broadcast or motion picture industries. Some are calling on the FCC to require the TV networks to disclose product placements by using some form of onscreen notification system.

2. The Food and Drug Administration—Now under the jurisdiction of the Department of Health and Human Services, the FDA has authority over the labeling, packaging, branding, ingredient listing, and advertising of packaged foods and drug products. The FDA has limited authority over nutritional claims made in food advertising and can set rules for promoting food and drug advertising. In 1996, President Clinton signed an executive order declaring that nicotine is an addictive drug giving the FDA broad jurisdiction to regulate cigarettes and smokeless tobacco. However, the U.S. Supreme Court ruled in March 2000 that the FDA has no power to regulate the manufacture and sale of cigarettes. This decision blocked the FDA rules that would have restricted tobacco advertising from taking effect. However, in 2009 Congress passed a tobacco-control bill giving the FDA sweeping new powers over the packaging, manufacturing, and marketing of tobacco products. The Family Smoking Prevention and Tobacco Control Act was signed into by President Obama and imposes many restrictions on the advertising and promotion of tobacco products, as discussed in the chapter.

The American Legacy Foundation was established as part of the Master Settlement Agreement with the charge to reduce tobacco use. The ALF has developed a number of successful programs such as the Truth® campaign that was launched in 2000 to reduce smoking among youth. In 2016, the Food and Drug Administration was given the authority to regulate electronic cigarettes (e-cigarettes) as well as other tobacco products. Another area where the FDA has become more involved includes the advertising of prescription drugs with some groups calling for a total ban on direct-to-consumer advertising. Additionally, cannabis or marijuana advertising also now falls under the jurisdiction of the FDA. 3. The U.S. Postal Service—The U.S. mail is a major advertising medium, as a large number of marketers use the mail to deliver advertising and promotional messages. The U.S. Postal Service has control over advertising involving the use of mail and ads involved with lotteries, fraud, and obscenity regulations. The regulation against fraudulent use of the mail has been used to control deceptive advertising by numerous direct-response advertisers.

4. Bureau of Alcohol, Tobacco, Firearms and Explosives—The ATF is an agency within the Treasury Department that enforces laws, develops regulations, is responsible for tax collection in the liquor industry, and regulates and controls the advertising of alcoholic beverages. This agency is also responsible for including warning labels on alcohol advertising and banning the use of active athletes in beer commercials.

I.

The Lanham Act—While most advertisers have relied on self-regulatory mechanisms and the FTC to deal with the problem of deceptive or misleading advertising by their competitors, many companies are becoming more active in filing lawsuits against competitors who they feel are making false claims under the Lanham Act. This act, which was originally written in 1947 as the Lanham Trade-Mark Act, was amended to encompass false advertising and provides individual advertisers with the opportunity to file a civil suit against a competitor. Many companies are

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

using the Lanham Act to sue competitors for their advertising claims, particularly since comparative advertising has become so common. The Trademark Law Revision Act of 1988 closed some loopholes in the Lanham Act and has made it even easier to sue competitors for making false advertising claims. Under the Lanham Act you are required to prove five elements to win a false advertising lawsuit containing a comparative claim. You must prove that: •

False statements have been made about the advertiser‘s product or your product.

•

The ads actually deceived or had the tendency to deceive a substantial segment of the audience.

•

The deception was ―material‖ or meaningful and is likely to influence purchasing decisions.

•

The falsely advertised products or services are sold in interstate commerce.

•

You have been or likely will be injured as a result of the false statements, by either loss of sales or loss of goodwill.

Professor Notes:

IV.

STATE REGULATION

In addition to the various federal rules and regulations, advertisers must also concern themselves with numerous state and local controls over advertising. For many years, state regulation of advertising was based on the Printers’ Ink model statutes. Many states have since modified the original statutes and adopted laws similar to those of the Federal Trade Commission Act that serve as a basis for false and misleading advertising.

As the federal government became less involved in the regulation of advertising during the 1980s, many state attorneys general began to enforce state laws regarding false or deceptive advertising. The National Association of Attorneys General (NAAG) made concerted moves against a number of national advertisers because of inactivity by the FTC during the Reagan administration. The foray of the NAAG into the regulation of national advertising raised the issue of whether states working together can create and implement uniform national advertising standards that supersede federal authority. However, the American Bar Association panel that examined the FTC concluded that the Federal Trade Commission is the proper regulator of national advertising and recommended that the state attorneys focus their attention on practices that harm consumers in a single state. It remains to be seen how the NAAG will proceed and fare in its efforts to regulate national advertising. However, it has become evident that states will become involved in the policing of national, as well as local, advertising. Advertisers are concerned over this trend toward increased regulation of advertising at the state and local levels, as they do not want to have to modify national advertising campaigns to comply with regulations of individual states. In recent years, state attorneys general have been working with the FTC and other federal government agencies on false advertising cases.

Professor Notes:

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

McGraw-Hill Connect ®: Understanding the Federal Regulatory Agencies Type of Activity: Grouping Activity Summary: In this activity, students will read about federal regulatory agencies and then group each type of regulation with the government entity responsible for its oversight.

Activity Learning Objectives: 20-02 Evaluate the effectiveness of self-regulation of advertising.

20-03 Describe how advertising is regulated by federal and state regulatory bodies.

Concept Review: Traditionally, the federal government has been the most important source of external regulation. While the FTC is the major regulator of advertising for products sold in interstate commerce, several other federal agencies and departments also regulate advertising and promotion. These include the Federal Communications Commission, the Food and Drug Administration, and the U.S. Postal Service.

Difficulty: 2 Medium Bloom‘s: Understand AACSB: Analytical Thinking

V.

REGULATION OF OTHER PROMOTIONAL AREAS

A.

Sales Promotion—Both consumer- and trade-oriented promotions are subject to various regulations. The FTC regulates many areas of sales promotion through the Marketing Practices Division of the Bureau of Consumer Protection. The state attorney general offices and local regulatory agencies police many promotional practices. Various aspects of trade promotion, such as allowances, are regulated by the Robinson-Patman Act, which gives the FTC broad powers to control discriminatory pricing practices. Specific sales promotion tools that are subject to regulations include: 1. Contest and sweepstakes—Marketers must be careful to ensure that their contest or sweepstakes is not classified as a lottery, which is considered a form of gambling. A second important requirement is that the marketer must provide full disclosure of the promotion regarding issues such as the number of prizes to be awarded, odds of winning, duration and dates of termination, and availability of lists of prize winners. Many marketers are now using the Internet and social media sites to run their contests and sweepstakes. This is creating additional issues that marketers must consider, such as whether automated or repetitive electronic submissions will be accepted, content of submissions, and online data privacy laws if the promotion is being marketing using e-mail. Marketers that post audio/visual entries on YouTube or feature a contest on Facebook or Twitter must comply with each site‘s guidelines for on-site promotions.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

2. Premiums—Marketers must make a fair representation of the value of a premium offer.

Marketers must also be careful in the use of premium offers for special audiences such as children. The Children‘s Advertising Review Unit has voluntary guidelines concerning the use of premium stating that advertising promoting a premium must emphasize the product rather than the premium offer.

3. Trade allowances—Marketers using various types of trade allowances must be careful not to violate any stipulations of the Robinson-Patman Act, which prohibits any form of price discrimination. Certain sections of the Robinson-Patman Act prohibit a manufacturer from granting wholesalers and retailers various types of promotional allowances unless they are made available to all customers on proportionally equal terms. The Robinson-Patman Act also regulates vertical cooperative advertising.

4. Direct marketing—The Federal Trade Commission enforces laws in a number of areas that relate to direct marketing including mail-order offers, the use of 900 telephone numbers, and direct-response television advertising. In addition to the FTC, the United States Postal Service enforces laws dealing with the use of the mail to deliver advertising and promotional messages or receive payments and orders that have been delivered by other means such as print or broadcast advertising. Both the FTC and Postal Service police direct-response advertising very closely to ensure that the ads are not deceptive or misleading or misrepresent the product or service being marketed. Laws also forbid mailing unordered merchandise to consumers and rules govern the use of negative option plans whereby a company proposes to send merchandise to consumers and expects payment unless the consumer sends a notice of rejection or cancellation. The FTC also has rules requiring that direct marketers promptly ship merchandise.

Another area of direct marketing facing increased regulation is telemarketing. With the passage of the Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991, marketers who use telephones to contact consumers must follow a complex set of rules developed by the Federal Communications Commission. Under these rules, telemarketers are required to maintain an in-house list of residential telephone subscribers who do not want to be called and consumers who continue to receive unsolicited calls can sue for damages. This law also bans unsolicited ―junk fax‖ ads.

The FTC has also been actively involved in the regulation of advertising that encourages consumers to call telephone numbers with a 900 prefix, whereupon they are automatically billed for the call. In 1993, the FTC issued its 900-Number Rule for advertising directed at children. The rule restricts advertisers from targeting children under the age of 12 with ads containing 900 numbers unless they provide a bona fide educational service. The rule also requires that 900-number ads directed to those under the age of 18 must contain a clear and conspicuous disclosure statement that requires the caller to have parental/guardian permission to complete the call. The name of this legislation was changed to the Pay-Per-Call Rule and in 1998, it was revised to give the FTC the authority to broaden its scope and add new provisions.

In 2003 Congress approved the FTC‘s proposal for a National Do Not Call Registry under which consumers can sign up to be put on a list that will bar them from receiving calls from telemarketers. The National Do Not Call Registry has withstood several legal challenges by the direct marketing industry and in 2005, the FTC, FCC and individual states began enforcing it. Companies can be fined $11,000 for each call that violates the FTC provisions.

The National Do Not Call Registry contains nearly 250 million phone numbers.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

The direct-marketing industry is also scrutinized by various self-regulatory groups such as the Direct Marketing Association and the Direct Selling Association that have specific guidelines and standards firms are expected to adhere to and abide by. However, many critics argue that these groups are not doing enough to keep consumers from receiving unwanted marketing messages, such as calls from telemarketers and direct-mail offers and solicitations.

B.

Marketing on the Internet—Two major areas of concern with regard to marketing on the Internet are privacy and security issues and online marketing to children.

1. Privacy and Security—Consumer privacy and security have become major issues among government regulators as a result of high profile data breaches and concerns over the collection and use of consumer data for marketing purposes. The major privacy issue regarding the Internet that has emerged involves undisclosed profiling whereby online marketers can profile a user on the basis of name, address, demographics, and online/offline purchasing data. Marketers argue that profiling offers them an opportunity to target specific niches and reach consumers with custom-tailored messages. However, the FTC has stated that Internet sites that claim they don‘t collect information but permit advertisers to surreptitiously profile viewer sites are violating consumer protection laws and are open to a charge of deception. Companies that collect Internet usage data and information have joined together under the banner of the Network Advertising Initiative and developed a selfregulatory code that requires websites to disclose their use of ad servers and permit consumers to opt out of data collection that could be used for profiling. Consumer privacy and security have become major issues with the FTC in recent years. The agency has requested that marketers voluntarily step up the disclosures they make about data they collect and seek permission from consumers before tracking their Internet surfing behavior. Many marketers now adhere to the Digital Alliance Ad Choices program, which is a self-regulatory initiative that was implemented by the Advertising Self-Regulatory Council as part of its Interest-Based Advertising Accountability Program.

2. Online Marketing to Children—One of the biggest concerns regarding the Internet is how to restrict marketers whose activities or websites are targeted at children. Concerns over online marketing to children led to the passage of the Children’s Online Privacy Protection Act of 1998, which the FTC began enforcing in April 2000. This law requires posted privacy policies and verifiable parental consent before marketers can collect personally identifiable information from children, such as names and email addresses. As of July 1, 2013, the FTC began enforcing updates to the COPPA to bring the law in line with changes that have occurred in the market including the growth of mobile device usage among children and the data collections that goes along with it.

An FTC investigation brought against YouTube in 2019 regarding the violation of children‘s privacy is discussed in this section of the chapter. The complaint filed against them could require YouTube to change its practices to better protect children and is also seen as a signal that the FTC plans to step up its enforcement of the child-privacy law.

3. Online Endorsements and Native Ads—The FTC has also taken action to address the issue of endorsements made through social media sites and blogs. In 2009, the agency passed a new set of guidelines for online endorsements that require online endorsers and bloggers to disclose any material connection to an advertiser. Under the new guidelines, paid endorsers who post on social media sites such as Facebook, or post product reviews on e-commerce sites such as Amazon, can be held liable if they do not identify themselves as such. The Digital and Social Media Perspective 20–1 discusses how the FTC has become more active recently in enforcing rules regarding influencer marketing.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

4. Spamming—Another Internet related area receiving regulatory attention is spamming, which is when a marketer sends unsolicited multiple commercial electronic messages to consumers.

A number of states have enacted anti-spamming legislation and a federal antispam bill (CANSPAM) act went into effect on January 1, 2004. While the CAN-SPAM Act carries severe penalties for violators, thus far it has done little to stop unsolicited e-mail messages.

Professor Notes:

McGraw-Hill Connect ®: Lemon Scooter-Sharing and the Regulation of NonAdvertising Promotions Type of Activity: Case Analysis Activity Summary: Students are provided with a case about the Lemon brand and the shared-scooter market. They are then tasked with answering questions surrounding the regulation of the various modes of communicating with the brand‘s consumers.

Activity Learning Objective: 20-04 Discuss the regulation of sales promotion, direct marketing, and Internet marketing.

Concept Review: Students will make decisions and apply different promotions in the IMC given the manner in which they are regulated in a sample case study.

Difficulty: 2 Medium Bloom‘s: Understand AASCD: Analytical Thinking

McGraw-Hill Connect ®: Navigating the FTC Complaint Procedure Type of Activity: Case Analysis Activity Summary: Abby works in Marketing for a major cell phone provider. As a market analyst, one of Abby's jobs is to monitor the ads of competitors to check for strategic shifts and possibly deceptive advertising. This activity will have the students select the best answer for each question.

Activity Learning Objectives: 20-02 Evaluate the effectiveness of self-regulation of advertising.

20-03 Describe how advertising is regulated by federal and state regulatory bodies.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Concept Review: Allegations of unfair or deceptive advertising come to the FTC's attention from a variety of sources, including competitors, consumers, other government agencies, or the commission's own monitoring and investigations. Once the FTC decides a complaint is justified and warrants further action, it notifies the offender, who then has 30 days to respond.

Difficulty: 2 Medium; 3 Hard Bloom‘s: Analyze AACSB: Analytical Thinking

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Teaching Suggestions Regulatory factors are a major concern for marketers and consideration should be given to the various laws, rules and regulations that can constrain and restrict advertising and other forms of promotion. While students may have some knowledge of the area of advertising regulation, it is unlikely that they will understand the extent to which advertisers must deal with regulatory concerns from various governmental agencies or self-regulation by various business, advertising, and media organizations. For example, the chapter opener discusses how the Federal Trade Commission (FTC) has revised its Guides Concerning the Use of Endorsements and Testimonials in Advertising to reflect the increasing use of endorsements and testimonials being done online, particularly through social media. The guidelines indicate that marketers using digital media are subject to the same truthful advertising laws that other forms of advertising always have been. One of the goals of the FTC has been to clarify or establish when a blogger or even a consumer promoting a product on a social media platform or a review site such as Amazon or Yelp becomes an endorser. It is also important to discuss the Federal Trade Commission and the changes that have occurred in its power and role over the past decade. You might refer student to the Advertising Self-Regulatory Council website, (now a part of the BBB National Programs, Inc.), which can be found at www.asrcreviews.org and contains information on the ASRC‘s various self-regulatory programs.

Several of the landmark cases supporting protection of advertising as a form of commercial speech under the First Amendment are covered in this chapter. You may also find it helpful to research some of the important cases involving advertising regulation in more detail and discuss them in class. These include some of the older and well-known deceptive advertising cases such as Profile Bread, Ocean Spray Cranberry Juice, STP, and Listerine. There is an excellent article in the October 17, 1994 issue of Advertising Age on the landmark legal battle between Campbell Soup Co. and the FTC that was the impetus for the FTC program on corrective advertising. An interesting area for discussion is just how involved the government and FTC should be in the regulation of advertising and whether programs such as advertising substantiation or corrective advertising are necessary. Attention should also be given to discussing the Lanham Act, which has become a very significant development in the area of advertising regulation. Competitors are now suing one another under this act rather than just complaining to the NAD/NARB or the FTC. An excellent article on the Lanham Act and its implications for advertising is ―Us vs. Them: The Minefield of Comparative Ads,‖ by Bruce Buchanan and Doron Goldman, Harvard Business Review, May/June 1989, pp. 38–50.

Attention should also be given to legal developments affecting other IMC tools such as direct marketing, sales promotion, and the Internet. For example, in February 2003, Congress approved the FTC‘s proposal for the formation of a National Do Not Call Registry and this program is now in effect. Direct marketing groups such as the Direct Marketing Association have filed several lawsuits against the FTC registry.

However, thus far, the courts have upheld the registry‘s validity and it has reduced the number of households to which telemarketers can make phone calls. We suggest that you stay abreast of developments concerning the status of the Do Not Call Registry by referring to publications such as Advertising Age or going to the DMA website at https://thedma.org.

Answers to Discussion Questions 1. Discuss the major issues facing digital marketing platforms such as Google, Facebook, and Instagram with regard to privacy. How will impending regulations affect the use of digital marketing by marketers? (LO 20-1, 20-4) There have been a number of developments over the past few years that have left governmental agencies and consumers taking note of privacy issues in digital spaces. A major concern for many is how advertisers and marketers gather and use personal information of consumers. A major scandal

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

erupted when it was determined that a large research firm had been harvesting personal information of many Facebook users without their knowledge in order to create personal profiles for them and target them with political ads for Donald Trump‘s campaign. Similar issues that have exposed the private posts or information of users have occurred in recent years. In Europe, there have been serious strides made to prevent these types of issues. This includes the creation of the General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR), which requires each major company in the world that offers goods or services to European consumers to have a strategy that is deemed GDPR compliant. Facebook and Google had issues with GDPR compliance that cost them a great deal of money and forced them to rethink their GDPR strategy. Similar strides are occurring on a state-by-state basis in the United States as California passed the most sweeping online privacy rights in the nation and also includes some of the most stringent rules for companies. Google and Facebook, as well as many other companies, are taking steps to address the new privacy regulations because they really have no choice but to do so. Facebook has adapted by outlining plans for Facebook that includes less data permanence on its platform. Google has also increased the number of privacy features on its platforms in order to give consumers clear and meaningful choices around their data, although the company has been criticized for putting more of the burden on users who often do not read privacy policies.

2. Discuss the need for regulation of advertising and other IMC tools. Do you advocate more or less regulation of advertising and other forms of promotion by governmental agencies such as the Federal Trade Commission and the Food and Drug Administration? (LO 20-1, 20-3, 20-4) There is a need for regulation of advertising and other IMC tools as consumers rely on the information provided by marketers to make consumption decisions. If this information is false and/or misleads the consumer then, the advertising and other forms of promotion are not fulfilling this basic function. Consumers also have a right to know that the claims made in advertising and other forms of promotion such as the efficacy, performance, quality or safety of a product can be supported by the companies that make them. They also should be aware of any consequences, conditions, and/or limitations associated with the use of a product or service. While most marketers are honest and truthful in their advertising and promotion messages, there are still many who use deceptive messages to persuade consumers to purchase their product or service. Thus, there is a need for governmental agencies such as the FTC and FDA to become involved in the regulation of advertising to ensure that consumers are receiving accurate and truthful information and can make informed choices.

Opponents of government regulation argue that the advertising industry does a very good job of regulating itself through voluntary self-regulation. They also note that legislation such as the Lanham Act serves as a deterrent to companies who might engage in deceptive advertising as they can be sued by competitors for doing so. While self-regulation of advertising and promotion has been effective, it is unrealistic to think that it is sufficient for regulating this complex industry. Thus, regulation by government agencies is necessary to protect consumers and to ensure that they are receiving truthful and accurate information upon which they can base their purchase decisions and choose among the myriad of brands available in most product/service categories.

3. Discuss the role the BBB National Programs, Inc. plays in the self-regulation of advertising and other forms of marketing communication. Evaluate the arguments for and against voluntary self-regulation as an effective way of protecting consumers from misleading or deceptive advertising and other marketing practices. (LO 20-2) The Advertising Self-Regulatory Council (formerly known as the National Advertising Review Council) was formed by the three leading advertising industry associations—the American Association of Advertising Agencies, American Advertising Federation and the Association of National Advertisers—along with the Council of Better Business Bureaus to sustain high standards of truth, accuracy, and social responsibility in national advertising. In 2009, the CEOs of three other

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

major marketing associations—the Direct Marketing Association, Electronic Retailing Association and the Interactive Advertising Bureau—joined the NARC Board of Directors. For many years, the advertising industry, business community, and the media have promoted the use of voluntary selfregulation as a means of regulating and controlling advertising. These organizations recognize the importance of maintaining consumer trust and confidence and for advertising to be perceived as truthful and non-offensive. It can be argued that self-regulation has resulted in advertising standards and practices higher than those imposed by law. On the other hand, critics of self-regulation argue that it is self-serving to the advertisers and advertising industry as groups such as the NAD/NARB lack the power and authority to properly regulate and control advertising. These agencies do not have the staff or budget to investigate cases and it takes them too long to resolve them.

The incentive for advertisers to cooperate with self-regulatory bodies is based on several factors.

First, it is in the best interest of all advertisers to maintain consumer trust and interest in advertising.

Peer group pressure and sanctions may also provide an incentive to cooperate with self-regulation.

Finally, most advertisers view self-regulation as preferable to government interference and control over advertising as the latter may result in more stringent and troublesome regulations. In 2015, an American Bar Association working group released a report that reviewed and suggested improvements to the advertising industry‘s self-regulatory system. The ABA report concluded that that current system administered by the NAD works well but did find areas needing improvement.

4. Do you agree with the DISCUS argument that advertising for hard liquor should be treated the same as advertising for beer and wine? Should advertising for spirits be confined to late night programs on the networks or should the ads be permitted to run earlier in the evening as well as during major sporting events such as National Football League (NFL) games? (LO 20-2) The decision by the Distilled Spirits Council of the United States (DISCUS) to overturn the selfimposed ban on broadcast advertising has been very controversial. DISCUS has argued that marketers of distilled spirits want to break down the public perception that spirits are stronger or more dangerous than beer and wine and thus deserving of harsher social and political treatment. The vicepresident for marketing and strategy at Seagram, the company that actually ended industry‘s ban by airing an ad for Crown Royal Canadian whiskey, has argued that distilled spirits should have the same access to broadcast media as beer and wine. He noted that ―the average consumer talks about liquor as being hard…so therefore liquor has to have sort of specialness or evilness about it.‖ The distilled spirits companies argue that the alcohol content of standard drinks of beer, wine, or distilled spirits (either straight or in a mixed drink) are equivalent. It should be noted that the Federal Trade Commission argues that there is no basis for treating liquor ads differently than advertising for other types of alcohol.

It is likely that distilled spirits are at a competitive disadvantage to beer and wine if marketers of the products cannot advertise on television. This is particularly true in today‘s media environment as narrowcasting is now possible through television, which means distilled spirits marketers can target their advertising to specific segments of the adult population. Moreover, image advertising is very common in the marketing of alcoholic beverages and television is an excellent medium for creating brand images. However, critics argue that that television advertising provides marketers with a very effective way to advertise hard liquor and will encourage young people to drink. They also argue that allowing ads for hard liquor on network television shows, particularly during prime time, will result in many young people under the legal drinking age of 21 seeing them, which may encourage them to drink. However, limiting ads for hard liquor to late night programs will reduce the likelihood that young people will view them. It is likely that the level of advertising for hard liquor will continue to increase on cable networks and local affiliates of the four major networks. However, it is still in the best interest of the four major networks to refrain from accepting commercials for hard liquor during prime time shows. Accepting hard liquor ads will lead to more controversy and increase the

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

likelihood that public advocacy groups such as MADD and the Center for Science in the Public Interest will step up their efforts to ban all alcohol advertising from television and radio.

This issue can be the basis for an interesting class discussion, as you should ask students to discuss whether they are influenced by advertising for alcoholic beverages and if they think advertising for hard liquor should be viewed differently than beer or wine.

5. The chapter discusses how Skechers and Reebok were fined for making advertising claims for their toning shoes that the Federal Trade Commission argues were false and misleading and not substantiated. Evaluate the claims made by these companies in their toning shoe ads from a deceptive advertising perspective. Why do you think they agreed to pay large fines to settle their cases rather than appeal them? (LO 20-1, 20-2) As discussed in the chapter, the Federal Trade Commission, along with attorneys general from nearly all 50 states, launched an investigation of the advertising claims being made by both Skechers and Reebok for their toning shoes and found them to be deceptive. Both companies were making claims in their advertising touting benefits from wearing the shoes such increased muscle activation, improved circulation, greater muscle tone, reduced cellulite, weight loss and firmer, toner butts.

Following an investigation, the FTC alleged that neither company could substantiate the claims being made in advertising for their shoes. Skechers was charged with selectively ―cherry-picking‖ results from its studies and failed to substantiate its advertising claims. Moreover, the FTC noted that the Skecher ads included an endorsement from a chiropractor who was married to a marketing executive in the company and that the independent clinical study conducted by the chiropractor did not support the results claimed. The advertising used by both companies would meet the FTC‘s definition of deception which focuses on whether there is a misrepresentation, omission or practice that is likely to mislead the consumer acting reasonably in the circumstances. A key element to deceptive advertising is materiality or whether the misrepresentation or practice influences the reasonable consumer‘s decision making process. Obviously, the various claims being made by both companies for their toning shoes were material in nature.

There are several reasons why both Reebok and Skechers agreed to settle their cases rather than appeal them. First, the companies wanted to avoid a prolonged legal battle that would likely have resulted in a significant amount of negative publicity for both companies. Also, as discussed in the chapter, many deceptive advertising cases brought by the FTC are settled by having companies sign a consent order, which is an agreement to stop the practice or advertising in question. This type of agreement is for settlement purposes only and does not constitute an admission of guilt by the advertiser. However, the FTC required Rebook to pay $25 million to resolve the charges while Skechers had to pay $40 million. The companies were required to put most of the money into a fund so it could be returned to consumers who bought toning shoes based on the unsubstantiated claims. It is important to note that the FTC also focused on the lack of proper substantiation or support for the claims Skechers and Reebok were making for their toning shoes. Under the settlement, the companies can still sell the shoes but cannot make specific claims and assertions without proper substantiation to support them.

6. Find several examples of advertising claims or slogans based on puffery rather than substantiated claims. Discuss whether these advertising claims can be defended on the basis of puffery. (LO 20-3) Puffery has been defined as ―advertising or other sales presentations which praise the item to be sold with subjective opinions, superlatives, or exaggerations, vaguely and generally, stating no specific facts.‖ For example, POM Wonderful advertises its juices as ―Crazy Healthy‖, Nestle claims that it ―makes the very best chocolate,‖ and Bayer aspirin calls itself the ―wonder drug that works wonders.‖

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

The use of puffery is very common and students should be asked to find additional examples of ads that use puffery and evaluate them. They should have no problem finding ads in magazines or on television that use puffery.

Defenders of puffery argue that it represents a form of ―poetic license‖ or allowable exaggeration and does no harm as consumers can recognize it and do not really believe the claims. However, critics of puffery argue that consumers cannot distinguish between puffery and verifiable, fact-based claims.

Preston argues that puffery burdens consumers with untrue beliefs and has a negative effect on their purchase decisions. The argument over puffery concerns how much latitude advertisers should be given for use of superlatives and subjective claims. One could take the position that puffery may make advertising more interesting; however, it may also have the capacity to mislead consumers.

7. Evaluate the charges the Federal Trade Commission brought against Volkswagen Group of America for deceptive advertising associated with its ―Clean Diesel‖ campaign. How might the decision by Volkswagen to settle the deceptive advertising charges and pay $25 million in fines, penalties and restitution affects consumer perceptions of the company and its vehicles? (LO 201, 20-3) In a major case involving inadequate advertising substantiation, the FTC took action against Volkswagen Group of America in 2016 charging that the company's ―clean diesel‖ advertising campaign was deceptive. The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency discovered that special software installed in Volkswagen diesel-powered vehicles was designed to defeat emissions testing, making the cars seem far cleaner and safer for the environment than they actually were as the cars were emitting up to 40 times more toxic fumes than permitted. In its complaint, the FTC alleges that during a seven-year period, Volkswagen deceived consumers by selling or leasing more than 550,000 diesel cars based on false claims that the cars were low-emission, environmentally friendly, met emissions standards, and would maintain a high resale value. The FTC sought a court order requiring Volkswagen to compensate consumers who bought or leased any of the affected vehicles between late 2008 and late 2015, as well as an injunction to prevent Volkswagen from engaging in this type of conduct again.

The deceptive advertising done by Volkswagen has cost the company more than $15 billion thus far.

In October 2016, a U.S. district court approved a $14.7 billion settlement requiring Volkswagen to mail notifications to all current affected owners and lessees of their diesel 2.0-liter cars informing them of a $10 billion buyback program. TDI owners who purchased their cars before September 17, 2015 could sell them back to Volkswagen for between $12,500 and $44,000, depending on model, age, trim, and region. Lessees would receive a cash value between $$2,600 and $4,900. The settlements have provided compensation to consumers who bought Volkswagen diesel cars and may have been impacted by the deceptive claims. However, the controversy greatly damaged Volkswagen‘s image in the U.S. market and it may take years for the company to fully rebuild credibility and trust among consumers.

8. Discuss the regulations governing the advertising and promotion of cannabis or marijuana in the United States and the challenges they present for marketers of cannabis products. Do you think the government should loosen the restrictions on how cannabis can be advertised? Defend your position. (LO 20-3, 20-4) The regulation of cannabis or marijuana falls under the jurisdiction of the Food and Drug Administration (FDA). While marijuana is legal for medicinal purposes in 33 states, as well as recreational use in 11 states, the FDA still classifies it as a dangerous drug. The marketing for marijuana falls under the Food, Drug and Cosmetic Act. Once a state legalizes medicinal and/ or recreational use of marijuana, state regulators must decide how dispensaries and retailers can market

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

their product to consumers. Regulations can affect everything from store signage, the content of advertisements, permissible locations and platforms for ads, and required disclosures. Some of the states that have legalized marijuana have regulations that cover all of these areas while there are others that have not addressed advertising of the product at all. Further, some states model their advertising regulations on similar products such as alcohol, whereas others have decided to treat marijuana advertising uniquely. There is not much conformity between states with respect to marijuana advertising regulation, which may be due, in part, to the continuing conflict between state and federal law relating to legalization. Most social media platforms do not allow for the promotion of drugs, including marijuana. Another challenge facing marketers is that there is still a stigma associated with marijuana because users are often perceived as ―stoners‖ who are lazy, unproductive, and even criminal. It appears that if the majority of states in the U.S. have made marijuana legal for use for medicinal purposes, the FDA should likely do away with its classification of marijuana as a dangerous drug. Once it does this, it is likely that remaining states will make it legal for medicinal consumption. The FDA should then establish uniform legislation for the regulation of cannabis advertising. If advertisers are left to their own devices in some areas of the country, it could lead to problems similar to those experienced in the early days of alcohol and tobacco advertising.

9. What are some of the regulatory issues marketers must take into consideration in using sales promotion and direct marketing as part of their IMC programs? (LO 20-4) Many marketers are now developing contests, sweepstakes, and other types of promotions that are implemented online over on their websites or social media pages. There are a number of issues that must be considered regarding a marketer‘s own rules that govern the promotion, such as whether automated or repetitive electronic entries will be accepted, how the contest or sweepstakes website will detect violations and restrictions on length, size, or format of content submitted. If the promotion is being marketing using e-mail, marketers must comply with the CAN-SPAM Act. If the online entry form collects personal information from persons under the age of 13, marketers must comply with the Children‘s Online Privacy Protection Act. Marketers using promotions on YouTube, Instagram, Snapchat, Facebook, or Twitter must comply with each social media site‘s guidelines for online promotions. For contests that involve usergenerated content such as photos, videos, or short stories, the rules must contain specific language granting the company the necessary rights to use the content. Some social media sites also have their own restrictions on how marketers can conduct contests and sweepstakes on their platforms.

10. Digital and Social Media Perspective 20-1 discusses the rules and regulations the Federal Trade Commission (FTC) has developed for online endorsements. Evaluate the guidelines used by the FTC requiring bloggers and social media influencers to disclose any material connection to a company whose product or service they are endorsing. How might this affect companies that use influencers as part of their digital marketing programs? (LO 20-1, 20-3) In 2009, the FTC revised its rules and regulations regarding the use of endorsements and testimonials in advertising for the first time since 1980. One of the goals of the revised guidelines is to clarify what an endorser such as a celebrity or blogger can say about a product or service in a testimonial.

The new FTC rules state that celebrity endorsers can be held liable for false statements about a product or service, and all endorsements must include results or outcomes consumers can generally expect from using it. The other major area covered in the revision to the FTC guidelines applies to the use of endorsements and testimonials made online, particularly through social media. The Guides point out that marketers using digital media are subject to the same truthful advertising laws that other forms of advertising always have been. With these new regulations, the FTC has sought to clarify and establish when a blogger or consumer promoting something on social media becomes an endorser of the product. The FTC Guides for endorsements and testimonials state that if there is a ―material

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

connection‖ between the endorser and the seller of the product or service, full disclosure is required.

What this basically means is that any time an endorser receives money or something of value, such as free products or services, it must be clearly and conspicuously disclosed when they are discussing or promoting the brand on social media. The FTC Guides also dictate how much disclosure is required and if these rules apply to short-form platforms like Twitter. For companies using influencers, this will require that they know what constitutes an endorsement because they do not always require explicit wording by the endorser stating that they approve of a product or service. Marketers will also need to track how they are creating material connections such as by paying someone, providing them with free products, or offering entries into a sweepstakes or contest. Marketers must also train their employees on the ways in which endorsers may be used.

Additional Discussion Questions (not in text) 11. Discuss the role the media play in the self-regulation of advertising. Do you view self-regulation as an effective way of protecting consumers from offensive or misleading advertising? (LO 202) The media are an important self-regulatory mechanism in the advertising industry. Most major media have some type of review process for advertising and can reject ads they find objectionable. Some media exclude ads for an entire product class such as Reader’s Digest’s ban on tobacco and liquor ads. Many magazines and newspapers have standards regarding the type of advertising they will accept. However, these standards vary depending on the nature and size of the publication. Large, established publications may have more stringent standards than those less financially secure and in need of advertising revenue. The major television networks have incorporated many of the provisions of the codes used by the National Association of Broadcasters into their own standards. The networks have the most stringent advertising review process of any media as their standards and practices division reviews all commercials before they can be aired on the network or an affiliate. Commercials that are considered too offensive or potentially misleading are sent back to the advertiser for revision and resubmission. However, most of the cable channels do not have the same standards as the networks and advertisers often will run ads on cable to circumvent the review more stringent requirements of the networks. Media self-regulation plays an important role in protecting consumers from offensive or misleading advertising. However, given the myriad of magazines and newspapers, as well as the increasing number of cable channels, it is possible for advertisers to find a way to reach consumers with their messages.

12. The text discusses the decision by the California Supreme Court in the Nike case to view statements about a company’s labor policies or operations in ads or press releases as commercial, rather than political in nature and thus not subject to First Amendment protection. Do you agree or disagree with this ruling? Discuss how this ruling might affect various forms of integrated marketing communications used by Nike and other companies in California? (LO 20-1) Freedom of speech or expression is the most basic federal law governing advertising in the United States. For many years, freedom of speech protection did not include advertising and other forms of speech that support a commercial transaction. However, the courts have extended First Amendment protection to advertising as a form of commercial speech. There have been a number of landmark cases where the federal courts have issued ruling supporting the coverage of commercial speech such as advertising under the First Amendment. However, the courts have ruled that only truthful commercial speech is protected, not advertising or other forms of promotion that are false, misleading or deceptive.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

In the case involving Nike, the California Supreme Court reversed the decisions of two lower courts and ruled that Nike‘s public relations campaign defending its labor policies and working conditions inside its factories in Asia should be considered commercial speech, even though it was not talking specifically about its shoes. The court ruled that corporations know that issues such as labor conditions and policies contribute to the public‘s perception of a company and consumers‘ willingness to buy its products. At issue here is how to distinguish between political and commercial speech. The U.S. Supreme Court has ruled that the First Amendment protects political speech, even when inaccurate. However, this is not true for advertising and other forms of commercial speech used to sell a product or service. Nike has argued that its public relations activities defending its labor practices and working conditions, which have included the issuing of press releases and writing letters to colleges faced with student activists calling for the boycott of Nike products, are not the same as advertising and cannot be considered commercial in nature. However, the California Supreme Court ruled that if Nike could misrepresent the conditions under which its shoes are made without any punishment through its public relations efforts, then any company could use the First Amendment to make false statements about its products or practices with the intent of increasing sales. It is important to note that the California Supreme Court did not decide whether Nike really was guilty of abusing workers or misleading consumers, leaving these issues for an eventual trial court.

The U.S. Supreme Court heard oral arguments and reviewed 34 briefs regarding the case but dismissed it for lack of jurisdiction and sent it back to California for trial. Rather than risk a costly and protracted trial, Nike decided to settle the case and the California Supreme Court decision now stands. Thus, companies doing business in the state run the risk of attracting a lawsuit if their public relation campaigns touch upon their products or operations. The outcome alters the definition of commercial speech and leads to new restrictions on claims that companies can make about their policies, practices and behavior. Treating press releases, letters, and other public statements defending a company‘s actions as equivalent to advertising could also result in companies being less willing to speak out on important public issues and have a profound impact on their public relations activities. It will be interesting to see if additional cases regarding the PR activities of a company result in lawsuits in California as well as other states.

13. What is meant by advertising substantiation? Should advertisers be required to substantiate their claims before running an ad or only be required to provide documentation only if their advertising claims are challenged? (LO 20-3) Advertising substantiation is a FTC program requiring advertisers to have supporting documentation for their claims and to be able to prove that they are truthful before running their ads. Proponents argue that advertisers should be required to substantiate their claims before running an ad so that they have a reasonable basis for making the claim. Prior substantiation provides consumers with a basis for believing advertising claims such that they can make rational and informed decisions. It also deters companies from making claims that they cannot adequately substantiate. Opponents of prior substantiation argue that it is too expensive to have a company document all of their claims and that most consumers would not be interested in the technical data and evidence used to substantiate them.

Requiring formal, prior substantiation might also result in advertisers resorting in puffery rather than making specific performance or efficacy claims.

14. What is corrective advertising? Why do you think corrective advertising is so controversial?

Evaluate the arguments for and against corrective advertising? (LO 20-3) Corrective advertising is a Federal Trade Commission program whereby and advertiser found guilty of deceptive advertising can be required to run additional ads designed to remedy the deception resulting from consumer exposure to the previous ads. The purpose of corrective advertising is to remedy the misinformation, incorrect beliefs or perceptions that consumers may have developed as a

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

result of deceptive or misleading advertising. Corrective advertising is also designed to help restore competition to the stage that prevailed before the deceptive advertising occurred. The FTC can determine the extent of corrective advertising effort required of an advertiser by considering the length of time for which the deceptive ads were run and the extent to which the market holds misperceptions or incorrect beliefs because of the deceptive ads. Consumer research may be needed to determine the prevalence of the misperceptions in the market, their impact on purchase behavior, and how strongly these false beliefs are held. Regarding media in which corrective ads should appear, the FTC considers the media the advertiser used in running the deceptive ads and requires that corrective ads be run in these vehicles.

Corrective advertising is very controversial because advertisers view it as a drastic remedy that infringes on First Amendment right of freedom of speech by requiring them to run the corrective messages. They argue that corrective advertising puts the FTC in the business of creating ads when they require particular content in corrective messages. Moreover, the monies that must be spent to run corrective messages comes out of the advertiser‘s media budgets and means they have less funds available for messages promoting their brands. They also question whether corrective messages are effective.

15. A number of states are considering legislation that would create Do Not Mail list registries, which would allow consumers to keep unsolicited direct mail out of their mailboxes. Discuss the arguments for and against legislation that would prohibit marketers from sending direct mail to consumers. (LO 20-4) There are several arguments in favor of legislation that would create Do Not Mail list registries. The typical American household receives nearly 40 pounds of direct mail each year, most of which is unsolicited, never opened and rarely generates a response. The response rate for direct mail solicitations is only about 2 percent, which makes this a very inefficient process. Most consumers also find it very annoying as most of the direct mail offers that consumers receive come from companies they have never bought anything from and/or have no interest in buying from them. Environmental groups argue that the vast amount of direct mail solicitations and catalogs that consumers receive have a major environmental impact as it takes 53 million trees to product the 3.6 million tons of paper in all of the catalogs and direct mail pieces. Advocates of the creation of Do Not Mail registries argue that consumers should have the right to decide if they want to receive catalogs and other types of direct mail rather than have to sift through all of the unwanted solicitations they receive.

The creation of Do Not Mail registries is opposed by marketers as well as the Direct Marketing Association, which is the primary trade organization for the direct marketing industry. The DMA argues that there are already provisions available for those consumers who do not want to receive unsolicited direct mail as they can pay $1 and have their name put on Do Not Mail list for three years.

They note that the service is supported by the United States Postal Service and has more than 4.5 million subscribers. However, the online service prevents companies from adding a person‘s name to their list but does not stop catalogs and other mail solicitations they are already receiving. The DMA also refutes the environmental impact of direct mail by noting that the trees are planted to replace those cut down for wood and paper products and that Americans can save over 3 billion miles of driving by eliminating trips to retailers and shopping by catalog instead. Finally, the DMA argues that direct mail is important to businesses that rely on it to communicate with consumers and creates nearly $700 billion in economic activity annually. Thus, there would be a major economic impact if Do Not Mail legislation were to be enacted.

16. The chapter discusses the controversy surrounding the direct-to-consumer (DTC) advertising of prescription drugs. Evaluate the arguments both for and against pharmaceutical companies being allowed to advertise their drug products directly to consumers. (LO 20-3)

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

In 1997, the Food and Drug Administration (FDA) issued new guidelines making it easier for pharmaceutical companies to advertise their prescription drugs directly to consumers. Reasons given for easing the restrictions are that increased advertising will help educate consumers by providing them with more information about their options and encourage people to see doctors about medications who might not have done so otherwise. However, physician, consumer, and health groups have questioned whether some of the ads are accurate and inform consumers of the risks associated with taking these drugs and have raised concern over the increase in drug advertising.

Consumer groups have asked the FDA to enforce the ―fair balance‖ provision that requires drug ads to give both the benefits and risks of taking a medication. Critics argue that much of the advertising done by pharmaceutical companies only shows the benefits of taking a drug and that the disclaimers and cautionary voiceovers are not sufficient in getting consumers to research the potential side effects associated with many drugs. Insurance companies and employers who pay for medical coverage of their employees have also raised concern over the increase in prescription drug advertising. They argue that the ads will drive up the costs of health care since advertising is expensive and added to the costs of drugs and encourages consumers to request higher-cost brand names rather than less expensive generic alternatives. Concerns over DTC drug advertising escalated in late 2004 when Merck had to pull its popular Vioxx medication from the market after it was determined that the drug increased the risk of heart attack in some people. This led critics to call for a moratorium on the DTC advertising of new drugs following their approval until the product is in the marketplace long enough for the FDA to have confidence that it is as safe as thought to be when it was approved. The argument for an even longer moratorium gained momentum recently after it was announced that Merck and Schering-Plough, which co-market Vytorin, delayed for 21 months the results of a study that showed the cholesterol medication did not reduce plaque buildup in arteries as claimed.

The pharmaceutical industry is recognizing that it needs to address the problems with DTC advertising. In 2005, the industry‘s trade association released voluntary guidelines calling for better presentation of risk information. However, critics have argued that the industry developed these standards to preempt stricter guidelines that might be imposed by the FDA. In 2007, Congress passed legislation giving the FDA more power to regulate DTC drug advertising. The new bill gives the FDA power to require drug companies to submit TV ads for review before they run, but it can only recommend changes, not require them. It also gives the FDA the power to impose fines if a drug company‘s ads are found to be false and misleading. Many argue that the FDA needs even more authority to regulate DTC advertising of prescription drugs. They note that the U.S. is one of only two countries that permit the DTC advertising of prospection drugs and many feel the practice should be banned entirely.

17. Do you think the U.S. Food and Drug Administration should consider adopting the type of cigarette packaging being used in Australia that requires graphic images and removes all branding elements? How effective do you think this type of packaging would be in reducing cigarette smoking? (LO 20-3) In late 2012, Australia became the first country to require cigarettes to be sold in uniform plain packages. The Australian law requires cigarettes to be sold with no company logos and with the same font for all brands on a dark brown background. Graphic health warnings cover 90 percent of the back of the packaging and 70 percent of the front. The Australian government enacted the law as part of its effort to deter smoking as it estimates that diseases related to tobacco have killed nearly a million people in the country over the past 50 years and annual health costs from the habit are nearly $33 billion each year. A number of other countries are considering implementing similar legislations such as New Zealand and the United Kingdom. Mandatory picture warnings were first introduced in Canada in 2010 and are now used in 47 countries. Legislation requiring the use of graphic images was supposed to go into effect in the U.S. in late 2012, but has been delayed by challenges from the tobacco companies on First Amendment grounds. However, this legislation would not go as far as

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Australia‘s law, which takes away cigarette companies‘ ability to use its trademarks and other branding elements. Supporters of the approach being used in Australia argue the use of the graphic images will deter smoking by showing the health risk associated with the habit and taking away the brand identity and image of cigarette brands, which have been built through years of advertising and other forms of IMC. However, the tobacco industry is vehemently opposed to the legislation, arguing it violates their First Amendment rights. Many other companies are opposed to the idea as there is concern that it could set a precedent that might eventually spread to other industries where there are public health concerns such as alcohol or food and beverage products that are high in sugar.

Opponents also question whether the graphic images will really deter smokers since most are addicted to tobacco and thus will purchase cigarettes in the plain packages and just put them in some type of case or sleeve to hide the images.

18. Discuss how the National Do Not Call Registry developed by the Federal Trade Commission is impacting the direct marketing industry. What arguments might direct marketers use in trying to have this program rescinded? (LO 20-4) Congress approved the FTC‘s proposal for the formation of a National Do Not Call Registry in February 2003 and this program contains nearly 250 million phone numbers. Marketers face penalties of $11,000 per incident for calling someone on the list. The new federal rules do not cover telemarketing activities that occur within a state and, thus, do not involve interstate commerce.

However, many states now have their own Do Not Call registries and these will continue to be important to protect consumers from unwanted calls originating from companies doing business within the state where they reside. The creation of the National Do Not Call Registry has greatly reduced the number of households that telemarketers can call. However, it has not had the negative effect anticipated by the telemarketing industry. Telemarketers can still call consumers with whom they have an established relationship and many companies have shifted their focus from cold-calling for prospects to managing existing customer relationships. These customers are generally receptive to calls from telemarketers, which has increased the efficiency of the business.

The primary arguments direct marketers can use in trying to implement this program is that it violates their First Amendment rights and that such a program is not needed. The Direct Marketing Association, which is the primary trade group for the direct marketing industry, has argued that consumers already have a number of do-not-call options. They can already ask to be excluded from an individual company's telemarketing list at the same time they can sign up with state lists or pay $5 to sign up on the voluntary national list maintained by the Direct Marketing Association. The DMA argues that the national registry will impose more bureaucracy on the direct marketing industry and that the industry that the same goal can be achieved by the industry itself with better education and enforcement. The Direct Marketers Association and the American Teleservices Association, which represents callers, each has separately sued the Federal Trade Commission over its Do Not Call telemarketing rules. The DMA's lawsuit contends the FTC has overstepped its legal authority to prevent fraud by attempting to ban legitimate telemarketing, and that its action also violates marketers' First Amendment rights at free speech. The American Teleservices Association, which represents callers, made similar claims in its suit. However, in February 2004, the U.S. Court of Appeals upheld the validity of the National Do Not Call Registry, ruling that it is a valid commercial speech regulation. The two major trade associations may yet appeal the case to the U.S. Supreme Court.

19. Discuss how regulatory agencies such as the FTC are responding to the increased use of digital and social media by marketers. What are the key areas that are requiring regulation to protect consumers from online marketing practices of companies? (LO 20-4)

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

The rapid growth of the Internet as a marketing tool has created a new area of concern for regulators.

Concerns over privacy and security have increased with the explosion in the popularity of social media sites such as Facebook, Twitter, Instagram, and others. For example, the FTC settled a complaint against Twitter charging it deceived consumers and put their privacy at risk by failing to safeguard their personal information, marking the agency‘s first such case against a social networking service. The FTC ordered Twitter to establish a security program subject to government monitoring for the next 10 years. Twitter agreed to the terms in exchange for the FTC not pursuing a civil lawsuit against the company. Facebook has also announced significant changes to its privacy policies giving users more control over their content, reducing the amount of their information that is available to others, and making it easier to control whether applications and websites can access their information.

Consumer privacy and security have become major issues among government regulators because of high-profile data breaches and concerns over the collection and use of consumer data for marketing purposes. Marketers must ensure that their online marketing programs comply with consumer privacy and data security guidelines; failure to do so can lead to government enforcement actions, expensive litigation, and negative publicity that can be very damaging to their reputations and have long-term effects. The FTC won an important case against Wyndam Hotels in 2015 when it charged the company‘s security practices unfairly exposed credit card information of hundreds of thousands of consumer to hackers in three separate data breaches.

Another major privacy issue regarding the Internet that has emerged involves undisclosed profiling whereby online marketers can profile a user based on name, address, demographics, and online/offline purchasing data. Marketers argue that profiling offers them an opportunity to target specific niches and reach consumers with custom-tailored messages. However, the FTC has stated that Internet sites that claim they do not collect information but permit advertisers to surreptitiously profile viewer sites are violating consumer protection laws and are open to a charge of deception.

While various proposals are aimed at protecting the privacy rights of adults, one of the biggest concerns is over restricting marketers whose activities or websites target children. These concerns over online marketing to children led to the passage of the Children‘s Online Privacy Protection Act (COPPA) of 1998, which the FTC began enforcing in April 2000. This act places tight restrictions on collecting information from children via the Internet and requires that websites directed at children and young teens have a privacy policy posted on their home page and areas of the site where information is collected. The law also requires websites aimed at children under age 13 to obtain parental permission to collect most types of personal information and to monitor chat rooms and bulletin boards to make sure children do not disclose personal information there. When the law was enacted in 2000, it was left to the FTC to determine how to obtain the required permission, and the FTC temporarily allowed websites to let parents simply return an e-mail to approve certain information. Since then no other solution to the permission issue has surfaced, and the FTC has made the solution permanent. However, the issue continues to be an area of concern since many marketers close their websites to children under the age of 13, but children under this age will often lie about their ages to gain access to the sites. As of July 1, 2013 the FTC began enforcing updates to the COPPA to bring the law in line with changes that have occurred in the market including the growth of mobile device usage among children and the data collections that go along with it.

CHAPTER 21 EVALUATING THE SOCIAL, ETHICAL, AND ECONOMIC ASPECTS OF ADVERTISING AND PROMOTION

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Chapter Overview The purpose of this chapter is to evaluate the social, ethical and economic aspects of advertising.

Advertising is a very powerful and influential force in our society, and this text would not be complete without considering the various perspectives and criticisms regarding its social and economic effects. The first half of the chapter focuses on the various criticisms of advertising from an ethical and societal perspective. Attention is then given to appraising the effects of advertising on the economy including its effect on consumer choice, competition, and product costs and prices. Perspectives regarding the economic effects of advertising are summarized by considering two principal models or schools of thought: the Advertising = Market Power and Advertising = Information perspectives. It should be noted that the primary focus in this chapter is on social and economic aspects of advertising, as this is the promotional mix variable that is the subject of the most concern, controversy, and regulation.

Learning Objectives 1.

Discuss various ethical perspectives on advertising and promotion.

2.

Discuss various social perspectives on advertising and promotion.

3.

Evaluate the social criticisms of advertising.

4.

Discuss the effect of advertising on consumer choice, competition, and prices.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Chapter and Lecture Outline I.

INTRODUCTION

Because of its high visibility and pervasiveness, along with its persuasive character, advertising has been the subject of a great deal of controversy and criticism. Various parties and scholars have attacked advertising for a variety of reasons including its excessiveness, the way it influences society, the methods used by advertisers, its supposed exploitation of consumers, and its effect on our economic system. The role of advertising and other forms of marketing communication in society is a controversial one and a discussion of the area would not be complete without considering the various criticisms regarding its social and economic effects as well as some of the responses to these charges.

Professor Notes:

II.

ADVERTISING AND PROMOTION ETHICS

While many laws and regulations determine what advertisers can and cannot do, not every issue is covered by a rule or guideline. In many situations, advertisers must make decisions regarding appropriate and responsible actions based on ethical considerations rather than what is legal or within industry guidelines. Ethics are moral principles or values that govern the actions and decisions of an individual or group. While a particular action or practice may be within the law, this does not necessarily mean it is ethical. Ethical issues must be considered in making integrated marketing communication decisions as a lapse in ethical standards or judgment can result in actions that are highly visible and can be damaging to a company‘s reputation and image.

Advertising is subject to considerable criticism because it is judged by a variety of groups with different norms, values, and ethical standards. Arguments on both sides of controversial ethical and social issues will be presented in this chapter. However, students may have to draw their own conclusions as to which position is right or wrong. A discussion of the ethics of promoting alcoholic beverages to college students, particularly underage college students, and the potential hazards for promoting alcohol consumption to consumers in general can be discussed with students here.

Professor Notes:

III.

SOCIAL AND ETHICAL CRITICISMS OF ADVERTISING

Much of the controversy over advertising stems from the ways it is used by many companies as a selling tool and because of the impact advertising has on society‘s tastes, values, and lifestyles. There are a number of criticisms of specific techniques used by advertisers as well as charges against its impact on society in general.

A.

Advertising as Untruthful or Deceptive—One of the major attacks against advertising is that many ads are misleading or untruthful and end up deceiving consumers. The issue of what

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

constitutes deception, as we discussed in Chapter 20, is a very difficult one. However, a concern of many critics is the extent to which advertisers are deliberately untruthful or misleading in their advertising. Figure 21–1 shows that while there has been a slight increase in the level of trust in the media in the United States, the trust in media internationally remains the lowest of any institution trusted worldwide. Most large companies are unlikely to risk their reputation and image or subject themselves to prosecution by various regulatory groups by making overtly false or misleading advertising claims. Many of the companies involved in outright fraud or deception are often smaller, local companies or those using direct mail to advertise their products and services. However, national advertisers will often test the limits of various industry and governmental rules and regulations and make claims that may give their brands an advantage in highly competitive markets.

Critics of advertising often question whether consumers are receiving proper information to make an informed choice since advertisers usually only present information that is favorable to their brands. Many critics feel that advertising should be primarily informative in nature and not be permitted to use puffery or embellished messages. Others argue that advertisers should have the right to present the most favorable case for their products and services. They note that most consumers can protect themselves from being persuaded against their will and that various regulatory bodies and mechanisms are sufficient to keep advertisers from deceiving or misleading consumers. Figure 21–2 shows the advertising ethics and principles of the American Advertising Federation, which many advertisers use as a guideline in preparing and evaluating their ads.

B.

Advertising as Offensive or in Bad Taste—Another common criticism of advertising, particularly by consumers, is that ads are offensive, tasteless, irritating, boring, obnoxious, and so on. A number of studies have found that consumers feel most advertising insults their intelligence and that many ads are in poor taste.

1. Sources of distaste—Consumers can be offended or irritated by advertising in a number of ways. Some are offended that a product or service is even advertised at all (such as contraceptives or personal hygiene products). A research study of prime-time commercials found a strong product class effect with respect to the type of ads consumers perceived as distasteful or irritating. Another way advertising can offend consumers is by the type of appeal or the manner of presentation. Ads that use fear appeals or exploit consumer anxieties, such as fear of social rejection, are often the target of criticism.

2. Sexual appeals—The type of advertising appeals that have received the most criticism for being offensive or in poor taste are those using sexual appeals and/or nudity. In fact, a study in Australia of TV viewership found that the issue resulting in the most complaints to the country‘s advertising Standards Bureau involved sex, sexuality, and/or nudity—almost three times more than any other issue. These techniques are often used as ways of gaining consumers‘ attention and in some cases may not even be appropriate to the product being advertised. Even if the sexual appeal is appropriate for the product, many people may still be offended. Advertisers who use nudity and sexual suggestiveness argue that their ads are not offensive and are consistent with contemporary values and lifestyles that are more accepting of this type of advertising. Another common criticism of sexual appeals is that they can be demeaning to women (and men as well) by depicting them as sex objects. An interesting study is discussed here that examined differences between men and women in their attitudes toward sex in advertising. This study found interesting differences in how the two sexes view the use of sexual appeals, including that half of men said they liked sexual ads while only 8 percent of women said they felt the same way.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

3. Shock advertising—Many advertisers are relying on shock advertising by using nudity, suggestiveness, and/or other startling images to gain consumers attention and shock them.

Companies that have been known for using shock advertising over the years include Benetton, Calvin Klein, and American Apparel. Clothing retailer Abercrombie & Fitch has also been criticized in recent years for the sexual-laden content in its quarterly catalogs. The company recently toned down its catalogs and eliminated the racy ads and sexual images that offended many parents.

Advertisers often complain about the double standard that exists for TV programs and commercials, noting that even the most suggestive commercials are bland compared with what is shown in many television programs. The networks argue, however, that they have to scrutinize commercials more carefully because they encourage people to imitate behaviors, whereas programs are merely meant to entertain. Not all shock ads are designed to gain one‘s attention to commercial products. Exhibit 21-12 is an excellent example of how cause marketers are now employing this tactic.

C.

Advertising and Children—One of the most controversial topics advertisers must deal with is the issue of advertising to children. A study conducted by the Campaign for a Commercial-Free Childhood estimated that children ages 2 to 11 see more than 25,000 commercials a year on TV alone, not to mention the ones they may see on the Internet, cell phones, video games, and so on.

Concern has also been expressed over marketers‘ use of other promotional vehicles and techniques such as radio ads, point-of-purchase displays, premium offers, and the use of commercial characters as the basis for television shows. Arguments can be presented on both sides of this controversial issue. More recently, there has been strong public criticism of companies marketing vapes to children and teens (Exhibit 21–13). The scrutiny that vaping brand Juul has faced in proposals that the brand has made their product more attractive to children is discussed here.

Arguments against advertising to children include: ●

Children, especially young ones, are vulnerable to advertising because they lack the necessary experience and knowledge to understand and evaluate the purpose of persuasive advertising appeals.

●

Children cannot differentiate between commercials and television programs, do not perceive the selling intent of commercials, and cannot distinguish between fantasy and reality.

●

Children must be able to understand how advertising works and develop a skeptical or critical attitude to defend themselves against it.

●

Advertising to children is inherently unfair or deceptive.

Arguments in favor of advertising to children include: ●

Advertising is a part of life and children must learn to deal with it as part of the consumer socialization process of acquiring the skills needed to function in the marketplace.

●

Studies have shown that children are capable of perceiving persuasive intent and the inability to perceive such intent does not necessarily lead to incorrect beliefs about a product.

●

There is no evidence of a relationship between television advertising of sugary foods and tooth decay.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

●

Parents should be involved in helping children interpret advertising and can refuse to purchase products they feel are undesirable for their children.

●

Advertisers have a right under the First Amendment to communicate with consumers who make up their primary target audience

Concerns over advertising and other forms of promotion directed at children diminished somewhat during the late 1990s and the early part of the new decade. However, the issue has once again begun receiving a considerable amount of attention as various groups are calling for restrictions on advertising targeted to children. The American Psychological Association (APA), the nation‘s largest organization of psychologists, issued a report criticizing the increasing commercialization of childhood and calling for new curbs on marketing aimed at children. There are also growing concerns about increases in the number of ads that encourage kids to call 900 numbers, visit websites, and the content of children‘s programming. Advertising to children will remain a controversial topic. Some groups feel that the government is responsible for protecting children from the potentially harmful effects of advertising and other forms of promotion, while others argue that parents are ultimately responsible for doing so.

D.

Social and Cultural Consequences—Concern is often expressed over the impact of advertising on society, particularly with respect to its influence on values and lifestyles. Opinions regarding the value of advertising as an important social influence agent are often very negative and it is criticized for a number of reasons.

1. Advertising encourages materialism—Many critics claim that advertising has an adverse effect on consumer values by encouraging materialism, which refers to a preoccupation with material things rather than intellectual or spiritual concerns. Advertising can create materialism in many ways such as: ●

Seeking to create needs rather than merely showing how a product or service fulfills them.

●

Surrounding consumers with images of the good life and suggests the acquisition of material possessions leads to contentment and happiness and adds to the joy of living.

●

Suggesting material possessions are symbols of status, success, and accomplishment and/or will lead to greater social acceptance, popularity, sex appeal, and so on.

The criticism of advertising on the basis of creating materialism assumes that materialism is undesirable and done at the expense of nonmaterialistic goals. But many believe materialism is an acceptable part of the Protestant ethic, which stresses hard work and individual effort and initiative and views the accumulation of material possessions as evidence of success.

Others argue that the acquisition of material possessions has positive economic impact by encouraging consumers to keep consuming after their basic needs are met. Many Americans believe economic growth is essential and materialism is both a necessity and an inevitable part of this progress.

2. Advertising makes people buy things they don't need—Another common criticism of advertising is that it has the power to manipulate consumers and make them buy things they do not need. Persuasive advertising which plays on consumers‘ emotions, anxieties, social and psychological needs and desires is viewed as undesirable. This type of advertising is seen as going beyond basic needs or necessities in appeals to sell products and services. Only informational advertising, which reports factual, functional information such as price performance, and other objective criteria, is viewed as acceptable and desirable.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Defenders of advertising offer a number of rebuttals to these criticisms. They argue that a substantial amount of advertising is essentially informational in nature and that it is difficult to separate desirable, informational advertising from undesirable, persuasive advertising.

They also note that most lower-level needs in our society are satisfied and it is natural for consumers to be concerned with higher order needs, and for advertising to appeal to these wants and desires. They also note that advertising cannot make consumers do things against their will and they can defend themselves against advertising. Consumers do have a choice and can ignore ads for products and services that they do not really need.

3. Advertising and stereotyping—Advertising is often accused of creating and perpetuating stereotypes through its portrayal of certain groups including women, ethnic minorities, and other groups. a. Women—Advertising has received a great deal of criticism for its stereotyping of women. Critics charge that advertising generally depicts women as being preoccupied with beauty, household duties, and/or motherhood or shows them as decorative objects or sexually provocative figures. Critics also argue that advertisers have failed to acknowledge the changing role of women in society. While sexism and stereotyping of women still exist, advertising‘s portrayal of women is improving in many areas as more advertisers recognize the changing role of women in our society and the importance of portraying them realistically. One reason for these changes is the emergence of females in key agency roles. Women advertising executives are likely to be more sensitive to the portrayal of their own gender and to strengthen the role of women beyond stereotypical housewives or a position of subservience to men. b. African Americans and Hispanics—African Americans and Hispanics have also been the target of stereotyping in advertising. For many years, advertisers ignored all nonwhite ethnic groups as identifiable subcultures and viable markets and ads were either not targeted to them and the use of black or Hispanic models and spokespersons was very limited. In recent years, however, not only has the use of blacks and Hispanics in advertising increased, but so too has the depiction of their social and role status.

Advertisers are also finding that advertising developed specifically for the African American market, such as the Levi‘s ad shown in Exhibit 21-19, is an effective way of reaching this ethnic market. c. Other groups—Some advertisers have been criticized for portraying senior citizens as feeble, foolish, inept, or in desperate need of help. It has become increasingly difficult for advertisers not to offend some segment of the public. However, advertisers must be sensitive to the portrayal of specific types of people in their ads. One area where changes are occurring is in advertising targeted to LGBTQ consumers. Many major advertisers are turning to gay themes in their mainstream commercials, though often subtly.

4. Advertising and the media—The fact that advertising plays such an important role in financing the media has led to concern on the part of many that advertisers can influence or even control the media. The text discusses how the media sometimes face challenges from advertisers who stop advertising in a publication when they find their editorial coverage objectionable or unfavorable to the company. a. Arguments supporting advertiser control: ●

The media‘s dependence on advertising revenue makes them susceptible to various forms of influence such as exertion of control over editorial content, biasing editorial

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

opinions, limiting coverage of controversial topics or stories, and influencing the program content of television. ●

Newspapers and magazines receive most of their total revenue from advertising, whereas commercial television and radio derive nearly all of their income from advertising. Thus, the media may be reluctant to carry stories detrimental to companies who purchase large amounts of advertising time or space.

●

There have been several situations where advertisers have brought pressure to the media and influenced content or programming decisions. Some of these situations have been in response to pressure or the threat of boycotts from consumer groups opposed to program content.

b. Arguments against advertiser control: ●

It is in the best interest of the media that advertisers not influence them too much. To retain public confidence, they must report the news fairly and accurately and not be perceived as biased or attempting to avoid controversial issues. Media executives point to the vast amount of topics they cover and the investigative reporting they do as evidence of their objectivity.

● It can be argued that advertisers need the media more than the media need any individual advertiser, particularly when the medium reaches a large audience or does a good job of reaching a specific market segment.

● The media in the U.S. are basically supported by advertising, which allows

consumers to enjoy media for a fraction of what it would cost without advertising.

Although not perfect, a system of advertising-supported media provides us with the best option for receiving information and entertainment and is probably more desirable than the alternatives of paying higher subscription costs, pay-per-view, or having government-supported media.

E.

Summarizing Social Effects—Negative opinions regarding advertising have been around just as long as the field itself and it is very unlikely that they will ever disappear. It is important that the advertising industry remains cognizant of, and continually addresses the various issues and concerns over, the effects of advertising on society. Advertising is a very powerful institution, but it will only remain so as long as consumers have faith and trust in the ads they see and hear every day.

It is important to note that advertising and other integrated marketing communication tools, such as direct marketing and public relations, are also used to promote worthy causes and to deal with problems facing society such as drunk driving, drug abuse, and the AIDS crisis. Many advertising agencies do pro bono work for nonprofit organizations and various causes and the media often donate free advertising time and space for these ads.

Professor Notes:

McGraw-Hill Connect ®: Social and Ethical Criticisms of Advertising

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Type of Activity: Grouping (Click and Drag) Activity Summary: In this activity, students are asked to match the correct offense provided with the descriptions of how IMC managers untruthfully and distastefully employ them.

Activity Learning Objective: 21-02 Discuss various social perspectives on advertising and promotion.

Concept Review: This is a good opportunity to review the criticisms of advertising that say it is offensive or in bad taste.

These include targeting children with ads, producing fraudulent or deceptive messages, promoting distasteful products, and using shock advertising or sex appeal.

Difficulty: 2 Medium Bloom‘s: Understand AACSB: Analytical Thinking

IV.

ECONOMIC EFFECTS OF ADVERTISING

Considerable attention has been given to examining the economic impact of advertising. Advertising plays an important role in a free-market system such as that found in the U.S. and other countries by making consumers aware of products and services and providing them with information that can be used to make purchase decisions. However, advertising‘s economic role goes beyond this basic function of information provision, as it is a very powerful force that can affect the functioning of an entire economic system. It is viewed by many as a positive force that encourages consumption and fosters economic growth. On the other hand, many critics of advertising view it as having detrimental economic effects, by not only failing to perform its basic function of information provision adequately, but also adding to the costs of products and services and discouraging competition. A number of major issues regarding the economic effects of advertising are considered.

A.

Effects on Consumer Choice—Some critics argue that advertising has a negative effect on consumer choice, as large advertisers use their power to limit our options to a few well-advertised brands. Economists argue that advertising is used by large national advertisers to achieve differentiation and brand loyalty, usually at the expense of smaller brands. These large companies often end up charging a higher price and are able to achieve a more dominant position in the market than smaller companies that cannot compete against their large advertising budgets.

When this occurs, advertising restricts choices and becomes a substitute for competition based on price or product quality.

Defenders of advertising argue that it does not create brand monopolies and reduce the opportunities for new brand or product introduction. The opportunity to advertise gives companies the incentive to develop new brands and improve existing ones. Advertising is instrumental in helping companies inform consumers about their new products.

B.

Effects on Competition—One of the most common criticisms economists have with advertising concerns its effect on competition. They argue that large firms with huge advertising budgets create a barrier to entry, which makes it difficult for other firms to enter the market. This, in

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

turn, leads to less competition and higher prices. Large advertisers enjoy certain competitive advantages such as economies of scale in advertising, particularly with respect to factors such as media costs.

Large advertisers clearly enjoy certain competitive advantages. There are economies of scale in advertising, particularly with respect to factors such as media costs. Additionally, Large advertisers usually sell more of a product or service, which means they may have lower production costs and can allocate more monies to advertising, so they can afford the costly but more efficient media like network television.

While advertising may have an anticompetitive effect on a market, there is no clear evidence that advertising alone reduces competition, creates barriers to entry and thus increases market concentration. Defenders of advertising note that it is unrealistic to attribute a firm‘s market dominance solely to advertising as there are a number of other factors to consider such as price, product quality, distribution effectiveness, production efficiencies, and competitive strategies.

While market entry against large established competitors is difficult, companies with a quality product offered at a reasonable price find that advertising actually facilitates their market entry by make it possible to communicate with consumers.

C.

Effects on Product Costs and Prices—A major area of debate among economists, advertisers, consumer advocates and policymakers concerns the effects of advertising on product costs and prices. Critics offer several reasons why advertising results in higher prices: ●

The large sums of money spent on advertising and promotion are an expense that is passed on to consumers in the form of higher prices.

●

Advertising increases product differentiation and adds to the perceived value of the product in the mind of the consumer, which allows advertised brands to command premium prices.

●

There are often large differences in prices between national brands and private label brands that are physically and functionally similar, which is evidence of the added value created by advertising. Consumers pay higher prices for this added value.

Proponents of advertising offer several counter-arguments to the claim that advertising increases prices:

D.

●

Price insensitivity and brand loyalty can be created by a number of nonadvertising factors such as product quality, packaging, favorable usage experience, and market position.

●

They acknowledge that advertising costs are at least partly paid for by consumers. But advertising may help lower the overall cost of a product more than enough to offset them.

●

Advertising can make a market more competitive, which often leads to greater price competition. Several studies have found lower consumer prices in markets permitting advertising for a product versus those that did not.

Summarizing Economic Effects—Economists‘ perspectives regarding the effects of advertising can be divided into two principal models or schools of thought, each of which makes different assumptions regarding the influence of advertising on the economy: 1. Advertising equals market power—This model reflects traditional economic thinking and views advertising as a way of changing consumers‘ tastes, lowering their sensitivity to price, and building brand loyalty among buyers of advertised brands. This results in higher profits and market power for the large advertiser, reduces competition, and leads to higher prices and

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

fewer choices for consumers. Proponents of this viewpoint are generally negative in their assumptions regarding the economic impact of advertising.

2. Advertising equals information—This model takes a more positive viewpoint of advertising‘s economic effects, as it views advertising as providing consumers with useful information; increasing their price sensitivity, which moves them toward lower-priced products; and increasing competition in the market. Advertising is viewed as a means of communicating with consumers and telling them about a product and its major features and attributes. More informed consumers put pressures on firms to lower prices and improve quality. Proponents of this model assume that the economic effects of advertising are favorable and view it as contributing to efficient and competitive markets.

These two perspectives take very divergent views regarding the economic impact of advertising as shown in Figure 21-4. It is unlikely that the debate over the economic effects of advertising will be resolved soon. Many economists will continue to take a negative view of advertising and its effects on the functioning of the economy, while advertisers will continue to view it as an efficient way for companies to communicate with their customers and an essential component of our economic system.

Professor Notes:

McGraw-Hill Connect ®: Social and Cultural Consequences of Advertising Type of Activity: Click and Drag Activity Summary: In this activity, students will match ads or ad campaigns with the specific criticism against advertising that they might receive.

Activity Learning Objective: 21-02 Discuss various social perspectives on advertising and promotion.

Concept Review: Advertising is a very powerful institution and has been the target of considerable criticism regarding its social and economic impact. The criticism of advertising concerns the specific techniques and methods used as well as its effect on societal values, tastes, lifestyles, and behavior. Critics argue that advertising is deceptive and untruthful; that it is often offensive, irritating, or in poor taste; and that it exploits certain groups, such as children. Many people believe advertising should be informative only and advertisers should not use subjective claims, puffery, embellishment, or persuasive techniques.

Difficulty: 2 Medium Bloom‘s: Understand

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

AACSB: Analytical Thinking

McGraw-Hill Connect ®: Market Power vs. Information Type of Activity: Click and Drag Activity Summary: In this activity, students will match characteristics of advertising to the appropriate school of thought that either ―advertising equals market power‖ or ―advertising equals information.‖ Activity Learning Objective: 21-04 Discuss the effect of advertising on consumer choice, competition, and prices.

Concept Review: The belief that advertising equals market power reflects traditional economic thinking and views advertising as a way to change consumers' tastes, lower their sensitivity to price, and build brand loyalty among buyers of advertised brands. The belief that advertising equals information takes a more positive view of advertising's economic effects. This model sees advertising as providing consumers with useful information, increasing their price sensitivity (which moves them toward lower-priced products), and increasing competition in the market.

Difficulty: 1 Easy Bloom‘s: Understand AACSB: Analytical Thinking

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Teaching Suggestions In this chapter we evaluate advertising from a societal, ethical, and economic perspective. Advertising is a very powerful institution in this country and has been the target of considerable criticism regarding its social and economic impact. Much of the criticism of advertising concerns the specific techniques and methods used by advertisers, as well as advertising‘s effect on societal values, tastes, lifestyles, and behavior. We examine these various criticisms of advertising along with the responses of advertisers to these attacks. It is important to recognize that there are usually two sides to each of these issues and we try to recognize the arguments of the critics as well as of the advertising industry. For example, one of the classic debates over the social impact of advertising concerns the issue of whether advertising is responsible for creating undesirable consumer values, such as materialism, or whether advertising merely reflects or mirrors the values of society rather than molding or shaping them. Arguments can be made on both sides of this issue and it makes an interesting topic for student discussion. A very good exchange of arguments regarding this issue can be found in articles by Richard W. Pollay, ―The Distorted Mirror: Reflections on the Unintended Consequences of Advertising,‖ Journal of Marketing, April 1986 and Morris B. Holbrook, ―Mirror, Mirror on the Wall, What‘s Unfair in the Reflections on Advertising,‖ Journal of Marketing, July 1987 and a rejoinder by Pollay, ―On the Value of Reflections in ‗The Distorted Mirror,‖ which also appeared in the July 1987 issue of JM. Stephen Fox‘s book The Mirror Makers: A History of American Advertising and Its Creators (New York: Morrow 1984) also provides an excellent discussion of arguments concerning the impact of advertising on society.

Numerous controversial issues regarding advertising are raised in this chapter and can be used as a basis for discussion or debate. These include the issues of targeting promotional programs to schools; advertising to children; advertising‘s portrayal of women as well as various ethnic and social groups; the ability of large advertisers to exert influence on, or even control over, the media; and the economic impact of advertising. You may want to have your students visit websites or advertising watchdog organizations such as Commercial Alert (www.commercialalert.org) to learn more about how this group works to keep advertising and other commercial activities within their proper sphere.

Answers to Discussion Questions 1. The war on cigarette smoking by teens has now been replaced by the war on vaping— particularly flavored vaping products. There are those who say that it is the responsibility of the government to protect teens, while others feel that teens must make their own decisions.

Take a position on this issue and argue in support of that position. (LO 21-3) Lately there has been strong public criticism of companies marketing vapes to children and teens because the e-cigarettes come in a variety of flavors, many of which people say appeal to children and teens. Critics argue that children, particularly young ones, are especially vulnerable to advertising because they lack the experience and knowledge to understand and critically evaluate the purpose of persuasive advertising appeals. At the other extreme are those who argue that advertising is a part of life and children must learn to deal with it in the consumer socialization process of acquiring the skills needed to function in the marketplace. They say existing restrictions are adequate for controlling children‘s advertising and that marketplace knowledge plays an important role in adolescents‘ skepticism toward advertising. They contend that greater knowledge of the marketplace appears to give teens a basis by which to evaluate ads and enables them to recognize the persuasion techniques used by advertisers. Teens are extremely impressionable and many say this vape argument is not dissimilar to the tobacco issues of former decades. Teens can easily be impacted by ads and may not be thinking about the long-term health effects of their current health behaviors. For these reasons, the

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

government should continue to regulate the promotion of these products to impressionable teens and younger children.

2. There is little doubt that the use of sexy advertising like that employed by Calvin Klein and Carl’s Junior has declined over the past few years. Is this a result of #MeToo, or just advertisers changing attitudes toward the effectiveness of this form of advertising? Support your position. (LO 21-2) The Me Too Movement was a movement against sexual assault and sexual harassment that gained traction internationally around 2017. Consumers call the stereotypical portrayals of women that have been around for many decades and that often still surface regressive. Several researchers have suggested that recent changes in advertising away from these more stereotypical and overtly sexual portrayals can be attributed to the Me Too movement. While more changes to advertising came about in the prior two years since this movement, other societal trends have led to more progressive ads. For example, increases in two-way communication through digital media have made consumers more vocal and thus brands more conscious. Additionally, sex no longer has the selling power it used to.

Addedly, brands have become extremely aware of the potential negative impacts from representing a group in a negative way. Many brands fear backlash on social media and thus are much more careful of the messages they disseminate. While #MeToo likely had a significant impact on advertising, there are certainly other factors that have contributed to the maturation of advertising.

3. Does advertising make college students drink, or drink more? Explain both sides of this issue and provide your decision. (LO 21-1) The role of advertising in society is controversial and has sometimes resulted in attempts to restrict or ban advertising and other forms of promotion to certain groups or for certain products. College students are one such group. Many alcohol related problems such as binge-drinking and high levels of consumption are prevalent on college campuses and have resulted in more serious issues such as sexual abuse, assault, and death. Many have advocated for a ban on alcohol-related advertising and promotion to college students. Many colleges and universities have imposed restrictions on the marketing of alcoholic beverages to their students. Companies marketing alcoholic beverages such as beer and liquor recognize the need to reduce alcohol abuse and drunk driving, particularly among young people, as do government agencies. Many of these companies have developed programs and ads designed to address this problem. However, many advertisements for alcohol feature young looking models in situations that are very familiar or attractive to college students. They show social acceptance and desirable lifestyles which likely encourage college students to engage in drinking more often.

4. Many people believe that there should be severe restrictions placed on advertising to children under the age of 13. Others believe that children must learn to discriminate truth from lies and that it is part of the learning process. Discuss both sides of this issue. (LO 21-3) Many have raised concerns regarding advertising to children over the past several decades and concerns continue as children can now be reached by advertisers in more platforms than ever before.

Concern have been expressed about marketers‘ use of promotional vehicles and techniques such as radio ads, point-of-purchase displays, premiums in packages, product placements, and commercial characters as the basis for TV shows in reaching children. Critics also argue that children, particularly young ones, are especially vulnerable to advertising because they lack the experience and knowledge to understand and critically evaluate the purpose of persuasive advertising appeals. On the other hand, some argue that advertising is a part of life and children must learn to deal with it in the consumer socialization process of acquiring the skills needed to function in the marketplace. They say existing restrictions are adequate for controlling children‘s advertising and that marketplace knowledge plays

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

an important role in adolescents‘ skepticism toward advertising. They contend that greater knowledge of the marketplace appears to give teens a basis by which to evaluate ads and enables them to recognize the persuasion techniques used by advertisers. Advertising to children will likely remain a controversial topic. Some groups feel that the government is responsible for protecting children from the potentially harmful effects of advertising and other forms of promotion, while others argue that parents are ultimately responsible for doing so.

5. Various studies have indicated that younger consumers are less likely to watch TV, listen to the radio, or read magazines and newspapers. If this is true, one might expect a reduction in sales of heavily advertised products. Is this happening? If so, provide examples. If not, explain why this is not happening, again providing examples. (LO 21-4) While younger consumers may not be consuming or exposed to these more traditional forms of advertising, advertisers have found other ways to reach young consumers. Estimates are that children between the ages of 7 and 16 in the United States spend approximately 3.0 hours a week online on the average, with those 15 to 16 spending 4.8. The Internet has now become one of the primary ways through which consumers are now reaching children and teens. Reports have accused marketers of taking advantage of an ever-fragmenting media landscape of cable channels and the Internet to target children. There is also growing concern over how marketers are using social media to communicate with and sell to children. Sales of heavily advertised products have not decreased among younger consumers. While they no longer get information through those more traditional platforms, many argue that children and youth can be reached through games, ads, brand pages, and social networking sites, and as a result, marketers have increased their efforts to reach these groups and that these efforts may be even more fruitful than TV given the stronger attraction to online activities.

6. What are some of the different ways companies use shock ads? Do you think they are designed to create sales, or to bring attention to specific issues? Do they work? Give examples. (LO 21-2) With the increasing clutter in the advertising environment, advertisers continue to use sexual appeals and other techniques that offend some people but catch the attention of consumers and may even generate publicity for their companies. In recent years, there has been an increase in what is often referred to as shock advertising, in which marketers use nudity, sexual suggestiveness, or other startling images to get consumers‘ attention.

Many advertising experts argue that what underlies the increase in the use of shock advertising is the pressure on marketers and their agencies to do whatever it takes to get their ads noticed—we have seen this in earlier chapters. However, critics argue that the more advertisers use the tactic, the more shocking the ads have to be to get attention. How far advertisers can go with these appeals will probably depend on the public‘s reaction. When consumers think the advertisers have gone too far, they are likely to pressure the advertisers to change their ads and the media to stop accepting them.

While marketers and ad agencies often acknowledge that their ads push the limits with regard to taste, they also complain about a double standard that exists for advertising versus editorial television program content. The creative director for Abercrombie & Fitch‘s agency argued that there is a double standard and hypocrisy in the shock advertising debate: ―When advertising uses sex, everybody complains—when editorial does it, nobody cares.‖ Advertisers and agency creative directors argue that even the most suggestive commercials are bland compared with the content of many television programs.

Answers will vary.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

7. The chapter discussed the empowerment of females in advertising. Give examples of some of the companies that have used this form of advertising. Why do you think they have done this?

Is it for altruism or financial gain? (LO 21-1) Advertising has received much criticism for stereotyping women and failing to recognize the changing role of women in our society. Critics have argued that advertising often depicts women as preoccupied with beauty, household duties, and motherhood or shows them as decorative objects or sexually provocative figures. Various research studies conducted through the years show a consistent picture of gender stereotyping that has varied little over time. Portrayals of adult women in American television and print advertising have emphasized passivity, deference, lack of intelligence and credibility, and punishment for high levels of effort. In contrast, men have been portrayed as constructive, powerful, autonomous, and achieving.

The chapter provides a number of examples of changes in how women are depicted, ranging from the depiction of young girls to full bodied women. There are now award programs for ads featuring women that do not meet the previous ―model‖ stereotype. These should be used as examples 8. The chapter discusses how many marketers are struggling with their multicultural marketing efforts and suggests that one reason may be the lack of diversity in advertising agencies. What are some of the reasons for the low number of minorities, such as African Americans, working in advertising? How can the industry address this problem? (LO 21-2) There is little question that advertising has been guilty of stereotyping women and ethnic groups in the past and, in some cases, still does so. But as the role of women changes, advertisers are changing their portrayals to remain accurate and appeal to their target audience. Advertisers are also trying to increase the incidence of minority groups in ads while avoiding stereotypes and negative role portrayals. They are being careful to avoid ethnic stereotyping and striving to develop advertising that has specific appeals to various ethnic groups. Increases in the size and purchasing power of ethnic minorities are leading companies to give more attention to multicultural marketing.

Advertising is often accused of creating and perpetuating stereotypes through its portrayal of women, ethnic minorities, and other groups.

A number of companies now run interracial ads—but not without risk. Advertisers are also finding that advertising developed specifically for the African American market, such as the Levi‘s ad shown in Exhibit 21–19, is an effective way of reaching this ethnic market. A study by Corliss L. Green found that ads targeting African Americans through racially targeted media, especially with racebased products, benefit from featuring African American models with a dominant presence in the ad.

9. The CEOs of Abercrombie & Fitch and American Apparel have both been variously characterized as either manipulators of the media for their ability to generate publicity for their companies or petulant. Both have lost their jobs in the face of declining sales. Are they geniuses or just sexist? Support your argument. (LO 21-1) There CEO of A&F, Mike Jeffries, and has made efforts to gain attention through shock advertising.

The question is whether this is still an effective strategy given the many years this method of gaining publicity has been employed.

While at first some may have considered Jeffries as a great marketer, this may be changing. The latest efforts may have backfired, as there was more backlash than in previous years. In addition, positive attitudes toward the brand in its key demographic, 18- to 34-year-olds have declined, while those of competitor H&M have gone up.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Further evidence is provided by the fact that in January 2014 Jeffries was replaced as Chairman of A&F upon recommendation of the Board of Directors. His shock antics were certainly a part of this decision. While shock ads may work in the short run, it appears that over time, they are of little value.

10. Companies like Old Navy and General Mills have employed the use of interracial ads, and have stirred up both controversy and support. Comments have been made that while some believe that we are in a postracism era, others disagree. Provide arguments for both sides and explain the potential impact on the brands. (LO 21-3) Clearly, the public appears to be more open to ads and commercials that employ interracial couples, groups of peers, etc. It appears that some of the walls of established color barriers are coming down.

At the same time, this is not a universal truth. While news reports of protests of interracial ads may be uncommon, this does not mean that bigotry has ceased to exist. Many incidents of racial discrimination are reported, and one can be sure that many more are not. In recent years (particularly since the Trump administration took office) accounts of such incidents are on the rise. One can assume that while the U.S. may be more racially liberal, we cannot assume that interracial ads are now accepted by everyone.

Additional Discussion Questions (not in text) 11. Discuss the arguments for and against advertiser influence and/or control over the media. How might a newspaper or magazine avoid being influenced by advertisers? (LO 21-4) There are a number of reasons why critics argue that advertisers have influence over the media and that the advertising and financial side of the publishing business controls or influences the editorial content of magazines and newspapers. The main factor in support of this position is that the media are either totally or highly dependent upon advertising revenue. Television and radio networks and stations receive nearly all their revenue from advertising, while newspapers and magazines receive nearly 70 percent of their total revenue from the ads they sell. Smaller, less financially secure media are the most prone to influence and pressure from advertisers, particularly companies who account for a large amount of the medium‘s advertising revenue. Thus, they may be reluctant to print an unfavorable story about a company or industry that accounts for a large percentage of their advertising revenue. There is concern that some magazines and newspapers may be lowering ―The Wall‖ which separates their news and business departments in their search for new ways to increase readership and revenue as competition from the Internet and other media increases and their audience or circulation numbers decline. The lowering of the Wall has serious implications for the media as journalists argue there must be not be any pressure from the advertising and financial side of the business so they are free to cover any story and be objective in their reporting. They argue that decisions on the writing, editing, and publishing of stories should be made on their journalistic merit rather than whether they will attract or repel advertisers.

There are several arguments against advertisers‘ ability to control the editorial content of media such as television stations, magazines and newspapers. First, it is in the best self-interest of the media that they not be influenced too much by advertisers. To retain public confidence, they must report the news fairly and accurately and not be perceived as biased or attempting to avoid controversial issues.

Many TV stations, magazines, and newspapers also note the vast amount of topics they cover and the investigative reporting they often do on companies as evidence of their objectivity. They also note that the advertiser needs the media more than they need an individual advertiser, particularly when the medium has a large audience or reaches a specific market segment. Many television stations, newspapers, and magazines have a very broad base of advertising support and can afford to lose an advertiser who might attempt to exert too much influence or control over them.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

12. Discuss the role of ethics in advertising and promotion. How do ethical considerations differ from legal considerations in developing an integrated marketing communications program?

(LO 21-1) While many laws and regulations determine what advertisers can and cannot do, not every issue is covered by a rule or guideline. Ethics involve the use of moral principles and values in evaluating a decision or action. Ethical considerations are very important in advertising as the use of a particular type of ad or the targeting of a specific group may be legal but may not be ethical. Ethical issues must be considered in making advertising and promotion decisions as a lapse in ethical standards or judgment can result in actions that are highly visible and often very damaging to a company‘s image or reputation.

Ethical considerations differ from legal considerations in that ethics involves individual or group moral principles or values and can be very subjective while legal considerations are generally much more objective. Legal considerations can be enforced through the regulatory process while ethical problems can only be remedied by voluntary actions of those who are responsible for the unethical actions.

13. With which position do you agree? ―Advertising determines American consumers’ tastes and values and is responsible for creating a materialistic society.‖ ―Advertising is a reflection of society and mirrors its tastes and values.‖ (LO 21-2) This question presents the classic dilemma of whether advertising is responsible for creating materialistic values in consumers or whether it merely reflects or mirrors the values of society rather than molding or shaping them. Those who agree with the first position argue that advertising encourages materialistic values by seeking to create needs rather than merely showing how a product or service fulfills them; surrounding consumers with images of the good life and suggesting that the acquisition of material possessions leads to contentment and happiness and adds to the joy of living; and suggesting that material possessions are symbols of status, success and accomplishment and/or will lead to greater social acceptance, popularity, sexual appeal, and so on.

Those supporting the second position argue that consumers‘ values are defined by the society in which they live and value systems are the result of extensive long-time socialization or acculturation.

They argue that advertisers develop ads in response to prevailing values and are thus reflecting tastes and values rather than molding or shaping them.

14. Discuss how advertising can affect product costs and the prices consumers pay for products and services. (LO 21-4) Arguments that advertising increases the costs of products and services include the fact that the large sums of money spent on advertising constitute a business expense that must be covered and thus is passed on to consumers in the form of higher prices. Advertising can also result in higher prices by increasing product differentiation and adding to the perceived value of the product in the mind of the consumer. Brands that have achieved high levels of differentiation or perceived value can command a premium price. Proponents of advertising argue that it can actually result in lower costs of products and services by helping firms achieve economies of scale in production, distribution, and marketing by stimulating demand among mass markets. Advertising can also lead to lower prices by making a market more competitive, which usually leads to greater price competition. Studies of several industries have shown that advertising results in lower consumer prices.

Some critics argue that advertising has a negative impact on consumer choice, as large advertisers use their power to limit consumers‘ options to a few heavily advertised brands. They argue that advertising is used to achieve differentiation and brand loyalty, which occurs at the expense of

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

smaller brands. Defenders of advertising argue that it does not create brand monopolies and reduce opportunities for new companies and/or brands to enter the market. The opportunity to advertise gives companies the incentive to introduce new brands and improve existing ones. Advertising is viewed as playing a critical role in informing consumers about new products and making it possible for new companies to enter the market. Thus, it helps expand consumer choice rather than limiting it.

15. The use of ads that use interracial and gay and lesbian themes appear to be on the increase.

There seems to be a relaxed atmosphere regarding the use of these groups in advertising.

Explain the benefits and pitfalls inherent in this strategy. (LO 21-2) A 2013 study reported on by Susan Heavey of Reuters News indicated that there are very mixed emotions regarding the acceptability of homosexuality around the world. While there seems to be a growing acceptance in the United States, Canada, Europe, and South America, but still staunch resistance in the Mideast. The Olympic Games of 2014 demonstrated the strong sentiment against gays and lesbians in Russia. Other studies have indicated that for those with more acceptance of homosexuality, ads depicting this more liberal view were perceived favorably, while more conservative positions led to more negative evaluations.

It seems tautological that those holding different perspectives would evaluate these ads differently.

Thus marketers who run these forms of advertising run the risk of alienating those who oppose gay and lesbian depictions, but at the same time may stand to gain favor among those with a more liberal bent.

Marriage equality laws are being passed by more and more states in the U.S. and polls have shown that the majority of U.S. citizens no longer take a negative stance on homosexuality. This certainly reduces the risk of running these ads.

At the same time, a Coca-Cola ad shown on the 2014 Super Bowl showing people in different languages singing ―America the Beautiful‖ led to thousands and thousands of negative comments on Social Media protesting the commercial. All of this was over language. It should be clear to advertisers that some are not quite as liberal as they might expect, and that running any type of potentially negative ads may have consequences.

16. There are conflicting positions as to whether the government should get involved in issues regarding issues such as obesity, cigarette smoking, and vaping by passing regulations, restrictions, and/or taxes. Present both sides of the argument and take a position, providing support for your opinion. (LO 21-3) Food marketers spend approximately $40 billion per year to market their products to children. These marketing efforts include media advertising, promotions, the use of licensed characters to promote food products, web sites and online promotions, and many other techniques. Critics argue that the marketing efforts of the food industry are spent to promote foods that are high in calories, sugar and/or fat content such as candy, soda and snack foods. They note that the ads and other forms of promotion encourage people to eat more than they should and to consume unhealthy food and beverage products. The opening of school doors to various advertising and promotional programs by companies such the granting of pouring rights to soft drink companies has also created a major controversy. The soft drink companies do offer alternative beverages such as fruit juices, juice drinks, and bottled water to alleviate this concern. However, critics still argue that our schools are not a proper venue for any types of commercial messages and that school administrators should not have to strike marketing deals with companies to fund education programs.

The food industry recognize that they are under attack and are taking steps to address the problem such as developing more healthy products and changing their advertising and promotion practices.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Companies such as Kraft Foods have stopped advertising popular snack-food items to children under the age of 12 while Coca-Cola updated its guidelines to eliminate advertising and sampling to kids under 12 and not show young children consuming soft drinks unless they are accompanied by an adult. The industry recognizes that they need to be proactive in addressing the problem or face the possibility of more stringent government regulation of the marketing of their products. A significant development occurred in 2007 when a group of 11 major companies that account for two-thirds of all food advertising targeted at children pledged to stop advertising products that do not meet certain nutritional standards to children under the age of 12. However, it is likely that the food industry will continue to come under attack by various consumer groups such as the Center for Science in the Public Interest and others. These groups argue that food and beverage marketers have not gone far enough and there should be even more restrictions on the advertising and promotional efforts to children. It is likely that the food and beverage companies will continue to develop new product and modify existing brands to keep them compliant with their own new guidelines and provide children with more healthy options. Companies such as PepsiCo and Coca-Cola have diversified their product portfolios and added items such as vitamin water, juices and even reduced calorie sport drinks to lower their dependency on soft drinks and provide more options to consumers.

17. Groups such as Commercial Alert are concerned about the intrusion of advertising and other types of marketing messages into all aspects of consumers’ lives. Discuss some of the reasons consumer watchdog groups are critical of advertising and other types of marketing practices.

(LO 21-2) Many marketers are obliterating the line between marketing communications and entertainment by creating and delivering ads and other messages that appear to be part of popular culture. Branded content refers to the practice of creating various forms of entertainment into which brands can be integrated such as music, movies, short films, video games, and music videos. The practice goes beyond traditional product placement as it seeks to make brand a more integral part of the entertainment. Many companies are making their brands part of reality TV shows. These practices are becoming popular among marketers for several reasons. Many companies feel that traditional TV commercials are losing their effectiveness and are looking for new ways to reach consumers. They are also realizing that with advances in technology, such as digital video recorders, audiences are able to skip over ads, and they must make find more entertaining genres of advertising in order to capture and hold the attention of consumers.

Critics are concerned over the use these techniques as they view them as stealth messages and argue that consumers are often unaware of their persuasive intent. Groups such as Commercial Alert are concerned over the use of branded content as they feel that movies and television shows are being corrupted by commercialization that goes beyond mere product placement and now includes the altering of scripts to integrated advertising and branding messages into films and television shows.

Consumer groups are also concerned over the impact that advertainment and branded content will have on children who cannot identify or properly process advertising messages that are embedded into movies and TV shows. Critics also argue that consumers should have places in their lives that are free from advertising and marketing messages rather than being constantly persuaded by marketers.

18. Discuss how attitudes toward the use of sex in advertising differ between men and women.

Discuss the implications of these attitudinal differences for marketers who are developing ads for each sex. (LO 21-1) One major study of men and women revealed that general opinions about sex in advertising revealed that it is a very polarizing issue. While almost half of men indicated that they like sexual ads, very few women felt this way. Nearly two-thirds of the men indicated that sexual ads have high stopping power and get their attention while only a quarter of the women thought the same. Women were also

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

more likely to feel that there is too much sex in advertising, that sexual ads promote a deterioration of moral and social values, and that ads with sexual themes are demeaning of the female models that appear in them. Only a small percentage of both men and women indicated that ads with sexual themes make them purchase a product. However, a higher percentage of men than women indicated that ads with sexual themes make them look at them and remember a brand.

The results of this survey indicate that men are much more receptive to the use of sexual appeals than are women. Men are much more likely than women to notice an ad that has a sexual theme and remember the brand. They also like sexual ads more and are less likely to view them as demeaning to women. These finding suggest that ads with sexual appeals may be an effective way to get the attention of males and to register a brand name. However, the findings do not suggest that a sexual themed ad will be effective in getting either sex to purchase a product. For women, the results suggest that sexual appeals may not be as effective as they are less likely to notice the ad, even less likely to remember the brand and purchase interventions are extremely low. Moreover, the results show that women do not like ads with sexual themes and find them demeaning to women. Of course it would be interesting to analyze these findings by age to determine if younger women were more open to sexual themed ads than older women.

19. Economists argue that advertising can be a barrier to entry for many companies that simply cannot come up with the money required to initiate an effective advertising campaign. At the same time, SPANX has succeeded without spending any money to promote the product. Explain how a company like SPANX can be successful with little or no advertising. (LO 21-4) The Advertising = Market Power perspective reflects traditional economic thinking and views advertising as a way of changing consumers‘ tastes, lowering their sensitivity to price, and building brand loyalty among buyers of advertised brands. This results in higher profits and market power for large advertisers, reduces competition in the market, and leads to higher prices and fewer choice alternatives for consumers. High prices and excessive profits give advertisers even more incentive to advertise their products and output is restricted compared with conditions of perfect competition.

Proponents of this model are generally negative in their perspective regarding the economic impact of advertising.

The Advertising = Information perspective views advertising as providing consumers with useful information, increasing their price sensitivity which moves them toward lower-priced products, and increasing competition in the market. Advertising is viewed as a means of communicating with consumers and telling them about a product and its major features and benefits. More informed and knowledgeable consumers will put pressure on companies to provide high quality products at lower prices, and efficient firms remain in the market, whereas inefficient firms leave as new entrants appear. Proponents of this model assume that the economic effects of advertising are favorable and view it as contributing to more efficient and competitive markets.

In general, many marketers believe that companies with large advertising budgets have an advantage of those who do not. But along comes a SPANX who succeeds with no ad budget, seemingly defying this perspective.

While SPANX represents the exception rather than the rule, it does appear that companies are more able to become successful in this day and age with less ad spending. Some of this can be attributed to the power of social media, some to the effective use of public relations, and some to effectively using product placements—all of which SPANX did well.

At the same time, the SPANX speaks to another component of the Marketing 4p‘s—product. The fact is that the product met the needs of the consumer, and when women found out about it, they looked for it and bought it—any form of communications worked.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

IMC Exercise Have students find several ads that they feel are examples of negative social consequences of advertising discussed in the text such as the following: ●

Ads that are offensive or in poor taste because of the product or service they advertise, the type of appeal they use, or the manner of presentation used.

●

Ads that use one of the shock advertising techniques discussed in the chapter.

●

Ads that may have an adverse effect on consumer values by encouraging materialism.

●

Ads that encourage consumers to purchase a product that they really do not need.

●

Ads that stereotype women, men, or ethnic groups such as African Americans, Hispanics, AsianAmericans, or some other group, such as the elderly.

Explain why you feel these ads are examples of negative advertising. How do you think the advertisers might justify the use of the ads you have chosen?

CHAPTER 22 PERSONAL SELLING Chapter Overview While certainly an integral part of the promotional mix, personal selling is generally the responsibility of the sales department rather than the advertising or promotional departments. Given this fact, personal selling receives less attention in this text than in some others. This does not mean, however, that we consider this function to be of less importance. Rather, we feel that selling roles and responsibilities may be better covered in other courses. Personal selling involves selling through a person-to-person communications process. The importance placed on this element of the promotional mix will vary from firm to firm and/or industry to industry. In this chapter we examine the role of personal selling in the promotional mix, the costs involved, and the responsibilities associated with this promotional mix element. We also examine the advantages and disadvantages associated with personal selling, how the personal selling effort can be combined with other promotional tools and criteria for evaluating personal selling contributions to the promotional program.

Learning Objectives 1.

Describe the role of personal selling in the IMC program.

2.

Compare the advantages and disadvantages of personal selling as a promotional tool.

3.

Explain how to combine personal selling with other elements in an IMC program.

4.

Discuss how to measure the effectiveness of the personal-selling effort.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Chapter and Lecture Outline I.

THE SCOPE OF PERSONAL SELLING

An increased emphasis on customer relationship management (CRM), which includes monitoring social media, is just one of the many ways that changes in the marketplace are forcing marketers to reconsider the role of personal selling in the marketing program. Personal selling involves selling through a person-to-person communications process and offers the marketer a number of advantages not offered by other advertising and promotional media. Personal selling will take on a more or less important role depending upon the characteristics of the firm and the marketplace in which it is competing. While personal selling is the responsibility of the sales department, the efforts of the sales force should be coordinated with those of the advertising and promotions department. To achieve maximum success of the marketing program, the two departments need to work together to achieve marketing goals.

Professor Notes:

II.

THE ROLE OF PERSONAL SELLING IN THE IMC PROGRAM

The dyadic communication (between two people or groups) process allows for direct feedback, tailoring of the message and increased attention getting capabilities. At the same time, as noted, the efforts of the personal sales force must be supported and integrated into the overall promotional program. This section of the chapter discusses the integration of these elements.

A.

Determining the Role of Personal Selling—The marketing manager needs to consider the role that personal selling will assume relative to other promotional mix elements, and the specific responsibilities that personal selling will assume. To determine what this role should be, four specific questions must be asked. These questions, as well as how marketers attempt to answer them, are discussed in this portion of the chapter: 1. What specific information must be exchanged between the firm and potential customers?

2. What are the alternative ways of carrying out these communications objectives?

3. How effective is each alternative in carrying out the needed exchange?

4. How cost-effective is each alternative?

B.

The Nature of Personal Selling—Figure 22-2 shows the stages in the evolution of selling from relationship selling, to needs-analysis selling, to symbiotic selling.

1. The new role of personal selling—The business world is going through a rapid transition as (1) individuals and corporations gain more knowledge and economic power, (2) value is replacing efficiency, and (3) industry boundaries are changing—for example, competitors are joining forces to achieve more buying power. Along with retaining their traditional roles, salespeople will have to acquire new roles to remain effective. That is, in addition to being information providers, influencers through proximity (i.e., through personal contact), and demonstrators, salespeople will engage in:

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

●

Surveying—Educating themselves more about their customers‘ businesses and regularly assessing these businesses and their customers to achieve a position of knowledgeable authority.

●

Mapmaking—Outlining both an account strategy and a solutions strategy (for the customer). This means laying out a plan, discussing it with a customer, and revising it as changes require.

●

Guiding—Bringing incremental value to the customer by identifying problems and opportunities, offering alternative options and solutions, and providing solutions with tangible value.

●

Fire starting—Engaging customers and driving them to commit to a solution.

2. Relationship marketing—The idea behind relationship marketing is the salesperson serves as a partner to the client, engaging in problem solving, need satisfaction, etc. The concept is to develop a long-term mutually profitable relationship. Adoption of a relationship marketing and CRM approach will require sales managers to develop nontraditional sales strategies.

Companies will need to move to a more strategic, less tactical approach, using emerging technologies to support this effort.

3. The costs of personal selling—Personal selling is a very expensive means of communicating with the consumer. Estimates now are that it costs as much as $518 per call, and that it may take an average of five calls to close a sale for a total of $2,590. These costs are even higher when you realize that one sales call is not likely to be enough to close a sale. As a result, personal selling is generally considered one of the most expensive of the promotional mix elements.

4. Personal selling responsibilities—Personal selling involves a wide range of responsibilities.

The eight steps in the personal selling process are outlined in Figure 22-5 and include: ●

Prospecting—Locating prospective customers. Salespeople must follow up on leads (those who may become customers) and prospects (those who need the product or service). They must also determine whether these prospects are qualified prospects— that is, able to make the buying decision and pay for the product.

●

Preapproach—Determining customers‘ needs and wants that are not being satisfied and collecting as much relevant information as possible prior to the sales presentation.

●

Approach—Recommending a way to satisfy these needs and/or wants by focusing on the features, advantages, and benefits of the product or service to the buyer.

●

Sales presentation—Demonstrating the capabilities of the firm and its products for providing this satisfaction; presenting vocally and persuasively, and answering questions.

●

Closing the sale and taking the order—The key ingredient in any sales presentation is the close—getting the prospects‘ commitment.

●

Following up and servicing the account—The responsibilities of the sales force do not end once the sale has been made. It is much easier to keep existing customers than to attract new ones. Maintaining customer loyalty, generating repeat sales, and getting the opportunity to cross sell—that is, sell additional products and services to the same customer—are some of the advantages of keeping customers satisfied through follow-up activities.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Professor Notes:

III

ADVANTAGES AND DISADVANTAGES OF PERSONAL SELLING

Advantages include: ●

Allowing for two-way interaction—The ability to interact with the receiver allows the sender to determine the impact of the message.

●

Tailoring of the message—Because of the direct interaction, messages can be tailored to the receiver

●

Lack of distractions—In many personal-selling situations, a one-to-one presentation is conducted. The likelihood of distractions is minimized and the buyer is generally paying close attention to the sales message.

●

Involvement in the decision process—Through consultative selling and relationship marketing, the seller becomes more of a partner in the buying decision process, acting in conjunction with the buyer to solve problems. This leads the buyer to rely more on the salesperson and his or her products and services.

●

Source of research information—In a well-integrated marketing/sales department, the sales force can be the ―eyes and ears‖ of the firm. Sales reps can collect information on competitor‘s products and services, promotions, pricing, and so on firsthand.

Disadvantages include: ●

Inconsistent messages—Salespeople may alter the message in a way that changes the intent of the message.

●

Sales force/management conflict—Often because of failure to communicate, corporate politics, and a myriad of other reasons, the sales force and marketing may not be working as a team.

●

High cost—When the cost per sales call continues to climb, the marketer may find other forms of communication a more cost-effective alternative.

●

Poor reach—Due mainly to time and personnel constraints, personal selling cannot reach as many members of the target audience as other elements.

●

Potential ethical problems—Because the manager does not have complete control over the messages the salespeople communicate and because income and advancement are often directly tied to sales, sometimes sales reps bend the rules.

Professor Notes:

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

McGraw-Hill Connect ®: Stages of Personal Selling Evolution Type of Activity: Click and Drag Activity Summary: Five distinct stages of personal selling evolution have been identified and it is important for marketers to understand what goes on in each stage. Students will match the characteristics with the appropriate stage of the personal selling evolution.

Activity Learning Objective: 22-01 Describe the role of personal selling in the IMC program.

Concept Review: Five distinct stages of personal selling evolution have been identified and it is important for marketers to understand what goes on in each stage. Firms evolving through these five stages have to assume different market orientations, as well as different organizational designs, staffing, and compensation programs. The different stages require different promotional strategies, each integrated with personal selling to achieve the maximum communications effect.

Difficulty: 2 Medium Bloom‘s: Understand AACSB: Analytical Thinking

IV.

COMBINING PERSONAL SELLING WITH OTHER PROMOTIONAL TOOLS

As stated earlier, personal selling must be integrated into the promotional mix to achieve success.

Personal selling efforts should support, and be supported by, other promotional mix elements.

A.

Combining Personal Selling and Advertising—A complementary relationship should exist in which advertising is used to support personal selling efforts and vice versa. The text demonstrates how both parties could benefit from such a relationship.

B.

Combining Personal Selling and Public Relations—Personal salespersons must often perform public relations activities. For example, public appearances, speaking engagements, etc. are all beneficial to the organization, and can be carried out by the sales staff. In return, public relations sponsored by the firm support the image of the salesperson. Several examples of this complementary relationship are provided in the text.

C.

Combining Personal Selling and Direct Marketing—One way marketers have found to reduce the costs of personal selling is by supporting this function with direct marketing. Letters and/or phone calls may be designed to solicit leads, screen potential customers, close sales, or as a follow-up to the salespersons efforts. The net result is a more effective, and cost conscious program. As shown in the chapter, there has been a rapid growth in the use of the telemarketing/sales combination. In addition to selling and supporting the sales efforts, the telemarketing staff also provides a public relations dimension. Communicating with buyers more often creates goodwill, improving customer satisfaction and loyalty while enhancing the CRM effort

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

D.

Combining Personal Selling and Sales Promotion—Sales promotions targeted at resellers (discussed earlier) benefit the sales force as well. Likewise, many sales promotions (such as contests, motivational programs, etc.) are targeted directly at the sales staff.

E.

Combining Personal Selling with the Internet—Many of the roles of personal selling are now done on the Internet. For some companies, the Internet has all but replaced order takers. For others, many of the activities performed by the sales force are now done online. Many managers have increased usage of the Internet to fulfill the more mundane tasks of order fulfillment and providing information. This, in turn, will allow the sales force to be more effective in closing orders, prospecting, problem solving, and cross selling and focusing more attention on high-value and/or new customers.

Professor Notes:

McGraw-Hill Connect ®: The Advantages Incorporating Personal Selling into the IMC

and

Disadvantages

of

Type of Activity: Grouping Activity Summary: Students are asked to identify the examples provided as an advantage or disadvantage of using personal selling as part of the IMC plan.

Activity Learning Objective: 22-02 Compare the advantages and disadvantages of personal selling as a promotional tool.

Concept Review: This is a good opportunity to review the advantages and disadvantages of personal selling. The advantages include that it allows for two-way interaction, allows for tailoring of the message, lacks distractions of other platforms, involves both the buyer and the seller in the decision process, and allows salespersons to serve as sources of research information for the company. Some disadvantages include the potential for inconsistent messages, sales force and management conflict, high costs, poor reach, and the potential for ethical problems as salespeople attempt to reach sales goals.

Difficulty: 1 Easy Bloom‘s: Understand AACSB: Analytical Thinking

V.

EVALUATING THE PERSONAL-SELLING EFFORT

The chapter shows a variety of criteria that can be used to evaluate personal selling contributions. While these criteria are generally offered as an evaluation of the sales force itself, an evaluation should be made regarding contributions to the promotional program objectives also.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

A.

Criteria for Evaluating Personal Selling—Criteria that may be used in this regard are: ●

Provision of marketing intelligence—The ability of the sales force to feed back information regarding competitive programs, customer reactions, market trends, and other factors that may be important in the development of the promotional program.

●

Follow-up activities—The use and dissemination of promotional brochures and correspondence with new and existing customers, providing feedback on the effectiveness of various promotional programs.

●

Program implementations—The number of promotional programs implemented; the number of shelf and/or counter displays used, and so forth; the implementation and assessment of cooperative advertising programs.

●

Attainment of communications objectives—The number of accounts to whom presentations were made (awareness, evaluation), the number of trial offers accepted, and the like.

Professor Notes:

McGraw-Hill Connect ®: Sweetwater’s Sales Success Type of Activity: Video Case Activity Summary: Sweetwater is one of the premier retailers of sound equipment and technology in the world. Sweetwater has over $150 million in sales and over 1.3 million customers in their database. It sells a wide range of gear to a lot of very loyal clients. Sweetwater's personal selling strategy is a key driver to the overall success of the organization. Students will watch a short video and answer the questions.

Activity Learning Objective: 22-01 Describe the role of personal selling in the IMC program.

Concept Review: Personal selling offers the marketer the opportunity for a dyadic communications process (a two-way exchange of information). The salesperson can instantly assess the situation and the effects of the communication and adapt the message if necessary. Evaluation of the personal selling effort is usually under the control of the sales department, since sales is the most commonly used criterion. The promotions manager must assess the contribution of personal selling with nonsales-oriented criteria as well, integrating this element into the overall IMC program.

Difficulty: 2 Medium Bloom‘s: Understand AACSB: Analytical Thinking

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

Teaching Suggestions A key determinant of how this chapter will be taught is the orientation that the instructor wishes to assume. Some instructors like to emphasize personal selling more than we have done here. Others care only to address it as a promotional mix element, and demonstrate how this element should be integrated into the overall promotional plan. For those wishing to assume the former orientation, we suggest supplementing this chapter with materials from other texts.

A variety of materials can be obtained to use as illustrations of those discussed in the text. Personal salespeople always seem to be willing to share their promotional aids, and others can be picked up in local stores. In addition, many students who graduate with marketing degrees get sales jobs. Having them back as guest lecturers to discuss their activities and supporting programs is always received quite favorably by students.

Answers to Discussion Questions 1. Battling between the sales and marketing departments has existed for years and shows no sign of letting up. Even though both sides know that the battles are dysfunctional, there seems to be no end in sight. Explain some of the reasons for these departmental conflicts and what might be done to resolve the issue. (LO 22-1) While both employed by the same company, and usually in the same department, there has always been a conflict between sales and marketing. A number of reasons exist for this divide, most of which can be explained by a lack of understanding of what each other does. Sales people are ―on the street.‖ Marketers sit in offices. Marketing positions often require advanced degrees. Sales positions are less likely to do so. Salespeople think markets work in ―the Ivory Tower‖ and know nothing about what they do. Marketers think salespeople only care about selling and know nothing about what marketing is.

As the knowledgeable salesperson is no longer just selling, but learning how to use various tools like the Internet, social media, etc. to increase his/her effectiveness, they are beginning to get a better understanding of what marketers really do. They now get a better understanding as to why prices may be set the way they are, how promotions work, and why the company spends money on various tools like advertising and direct marketing. When they see these tools used effectively, they gain an understanding and appreciation for what marketing is doing.

Likewise, as marketers have more communications with the sales force, they learn more about the everyday doings of this team. Establishing effective marketing programs that benefit the sales team is now easier. Creating webinars and conducting sales meetings leads to more frequent interactions and allows for more feedback and an enhanced understanding.

2. Figure 22-12 lists some of the criteria used to evaluate the performances of the sales force.

Many salespeople contend that they should only be judged by quantitative measures, such as meeting their sales goals. Explain whether you agree or disagree and why. (LO 22-4) This chapter opens by discussing the increasing importance of customer relationship management (CRM), which has had a major impact on how personal-selling activities are conducted. Salespeople are no longer expected to simply make the call and make the sale. They are also evaluated on a number of other qualitative criteria such as their selling skills and sales-related activities. The selling skills and sales-related activities outlined in Figure 22-12 really go hand-in-hand with helping salespeople reach their quantitative sales metrics. For example, one of the qualitative sales-related

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

activities for salespeople includes territory management, sales call preparation, scheduling, routing, and time utilization. Those types of activities would directly relate to and support quantitative selling outputs such as those outlined in the sales volume, customer accounts, and customer service metrics outlined in the quantitative portion of Figure 22-12. For these reasons, salespeople should certainly be evaluated on both quantitative and qualitative metrics.

3. What is relationship marketing? How does relationship marketing differ from CRM? (LO 22-2) Relationship marketing is defined as a type of marketing that focuses on cultivating deeper, more meaningful relationships with customers to ensure long-term satisfaction and brand loyalty. Rather than focusing on a short-term sale, the sales rep tries to establish a long term bond. And rather than just selling, the sales department works with marketing to use techniques like database marketing, message differentiation to different target markets, and tracking of promotional effects to improve the relationship. Relationship marketing, while similar and related to CRM, has a few distinct factors.

While relationship marketing is a sales and marketing concept, CRM refers to the tools used to carry out the concept. Relationship marketing is implemented as a strategy and includes activities such as identifying long-term sales and retention goals, public relations, marketing and advertising campaigns. The adoption of a relationship marketing and CRM approach will require sales managers to develop nontraditional sales strategies in which companies will need to move to a more strategic, less tactical approach, using emerging technologies to support this effort.

4. What is meant by the term ―cost per lead‖? Why would the cost per lead differ in different industries? Provide some examples. (LO 22-1) One of the major responsibilities of personal selling involves prospecting or locating prospective customers. In this prospecting process, salespeople must follow up on leads (those who may become customers) and prospects (those who need the product or service). They must also determine whether these prospects are qualified prospects—that is, able to make the buying decision and pay for the product. A cost per lead then is the price it takes to reach someone who may become a customer.

Various software are available to aid salespersons in determining this cost. The cost to generate a lead through personal sales is often quite high. In fact, Figure 22-6 demonstrates that the cost of obtaining a sales lead can range substantially, from under $50 in some industries to over $300 in others.

5. Figure 22–8 lists a number of traits common to successful salespeople. Describe each of these traits and provide an example of a business transaction where it might be important. (LO 22-4) Ten traits of successful salespeople are provided in Figure 22-8. The first is that they must be knowledgeable. Customers will feel much more comfortable giving their business to a company in which the salespeople are knowledgeable about the product and the industry as a whole. Next, they must be professional. They must ensure that each account is handled in an appropriate, respectful, and profitable way. They must also be thorough. Salespeople should work to make pre-call research part of their process, so they can offer solutions that speak directly to each prospect‘s specific needs. They should also be results-oriented by working to quantify the type of ROI their prospects can expect and provide some reference points so prospects can see how much money they stand to lose by not agreeing to do business with this salesperson. They should also be problem solvers; not simply offering a product or service, but solutions to problems. Additionally, salespeople should be relationship-oriented. They should work to build the type of relationship where loyal customers think of them as an extended member of their corporate family. Next, they should of course be customerfocused. They should work as an advocate whom the buyer can trust to create a working relationship where everyone walks away a winner. They should also be responsive, taking personal accountability for handling customer requests, and following up with each customer personally to ensure he/she is satisfied with the outcome. Salespeople should also be good communicators. They could do this by

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

determining which mode of communication the prospect prefers (e.g., e-mail, cell phone, text) and using that as a way to stay in contact. Finally, salespeople should be reliable. They should let customers know they can count on them to get the job done—and get it done better than anyone else.

6. The growth of the Internet has brought about many changes that have had a direct impact on the sales force. Give examples of these and discuss how salespeople have had to react. (LO 22-1) According to the Sales Board article, every time a customer buys something online, no salesperson is needed. The more transactions that take place, the fewer salespeople are required. In some cases, entire sales forces have been eliminated. Online relationships are of significantly lower cost to conduct, and, as buyers become more comfortable with technology, they are more amenable to doing business this way. Videoconferences and/or sales calls are almost as effective as face-to-face calls, and more such calls can take place in a day than in the outside sales arena. IBM learned this years ago and replaced most of its outside salespersons with inside ones.

7. Discuss some of the advantages and disadvantages of personal selling versus other media—both traditional and nontraditional. (LO 22-3) Advantages include allowing for two-way interaction, tailoring of the message, lack of distractions, involvement in the decision process, and source of research information.

Disadvantages include inconsistent messages, sales force/ management conflict, high cost, poor reach, and potential ethical problems.

8. Where in the consumer decision process would personal selling likely be most effective? Explain why. (LO 22-1) Personal selling involves selling through a person-to-person communications process. The emphasis placed on personal selling varies from firm to firm depending on a variety of factors, including the nature of the product or service being marketed, size of the organization, and type of industry.

Personal selling often plays the dominant role in industrial firms, while in other firms, such as makers of low-priced consumer nondurable goods, its role is minimized. In many industries, these roles are changing to a more balanced use of promotional program elements. In an integrated marketing communications program, personal selling is a partner with, not a substitute for, the other promotional-mix elements.

9. There are many in the marketing industry who feel that the sales force may cease to exist in the future. Discuss some of the reasons that support this prediction. Then provide reasons why this is not likely to be the case. (LO 22-1) Two major trends are occurring that are impacting the role of sales today: (1) traditional outside sales jobs are diminishing and (2) nontraditional sales jobs are emerging. The report shows that outside salespeople—the ones who call on clients at their locations—are becoming rarer and are being replaced by inside salespeople. The inside people work from the companies‘ locations, usually using technologies to make calls. The second trend, the emergence of nontraditional sales teams, consists of persons whose jobs are not in sales, and may even dislike the thought of selling. For all intents and purposes, they could be anyone in the organization. How could that be? Like the previous study discussed, the Sales Board article cited a study from the Journal of Science that indicated that outside sales jobs were the fastest-growing occupation during the period from 1950 to 1980, slowed in the 1990s, and began to shrink considerably with the introduction of the Internet. So now almost anyone can maintain the relationship.

So, is the traditional outside sales job going to cease to exist? Not very likely—at least in the short run. Particularly in the business-to-business marketing environment, the outside salesperson is still a

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

critical—maybe the most critical—contact in the purchase decision process. But in other areas, the change is eminent. Remember when we referred to the ―blame game‖? In the future, this schism between sales and marketing is going to have to be eliminated. In a study conducted by Demand Metric, managers indicated that sales meetings that included sales and marketing were often considered critical for sales success or failure. Bad sales meetings led to more sales failures and increased blame on who was at fault. The study concluded something companies have known forever—there must be better communications between the two departments.

10. One might expect that personal salespeople are evaluated strictly on how much they sell.

Discuss the other criteria presented in the chapter and explain why they might or might not be useful for evaluating the sales force. (LO 22-4) Steve Deist and Rick Johnson suggest that an evaluation of the sales force should focus on ―doing the right things, not just doing things right.‖ They propose a number of criteria that should be used in the sales force evaluation, as shown in Figure 22-12. They also note that the process is critical to the success of the salesperson and that the review should be an opportunity to create enthusiasm, not a session for reprimand or criticism. Other sales-related criteria such as new account openings and personal traits are also sometimes considered and may be increasing in importance as the emphasis on relationship building continues to increase.

Additional Discussion Questions (not in text) 11. It has been said that the importance of the sales force varies at various stages in the communication hierarchies. Discuss this idea, providing examples to support your position. (LO 22-1) Various elements of the IMC program assume more or less importance at various stages of the communications hierarchies. For example, advertising may take on the most important role in the first stage of the hierarchies, as awareness is the primary objective, and cost per exposure is low with this medium. Personal selling may be used more in the later stages to demonstrate products, stimulate trial and close the deal. When these elements are combined, they compensate for each other‘s weaknesses and complement each other. For example, for a new product introduction, advertising will be used to reach consumers to make them aware of the product. Specific benefits of new products may not be obvious and the advertising could be useful in creating this awareness. This can be useful to the sales force when the advertising message is received before the sales call. A number of studies have shown the complementary relationship between personal selling and advertising. For example, a study by Theodore Levitt showed that sales reps from well-known companies are better received than those from companies that do not spend advertising dollars to create awareness. In another study, John Morill found that selling costs were 2 to 28 percent lower if the buyer had received an advertising message before the salesperson‘s arrival. In another example, Gateway recently launched a $50 million dollars IMC campaign using advertising, direct marketing, sales promotions, and the Internet to create awareness that Gateway is interested in companies‘ business, that is, that they are also in the business to business market. This effort may lead to sales leads through the newly created awareness.

McGraw-Hill, in a review of 54 studies, concluded the combination of advertising and personal selling is important since ―less that 10 percent of industrial decision makers had been called upon by a salesperson from a specific company about a specific product in the previous two months.‖ Combining advertising and personal selling is likely to improve reach, reduce costs, and increase the probability of sales.

Thus, as one moves consumers down through the hierarchy, the IMC mix will change. At lower levels, such as awareness and interest, advertising may play the dominant role. As one moves to

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

evaluation, the Internet may play an increased role, and to stimulate trial or complete the sale (particularly in high involvement or business to business sales) personal selling may take on the dominant role.

12. Social media has been shown to play an important role in business to consumer markets, and now is being used for assisting personal selling effort in business to business markets. Explain how marketers are using social media in this regard. (LO 22-3) At first, it was thought that social media would be a powerful marketing tool for business to consumer (B2C) markets, but perhaps not as powerful for use in business to business markets (B2B). Marketers have now discovered that social media are important to B2B companies as well.

Perhaps more now than in the past, relationships are critical in B2B dealings. Trust, communications, and reliability are critical in business dealings. In addition, market information regarding competitors‘ pricing, product offerings, and promotions need to be exchanged in a short period of time, and social media allow for this. Likewise, business news can be communicated much more rapidly than in the past.

B2B marketers will watch the happenings in the B2C social media community and adapt many of the strategies to their own markets.

13. The cost of a personal sales call is very high relative to one exposure in other media, and continues to rise. Explain how effective utilization of the Internet can help bring these costs down. (LO 22-4) The salesperson of old is very different than today‘s. In the past, many salespeople made personal sales calls to attempt to find new customers, make the sales pitch, take orders, and close sales. In addition, servicing accounts often required a personal sales call. When telemarketing began to show its usefulness for marketing, some companies stayed away from this tool, while others embraced it as a way to cut costs, improve sales performance, etc.

The value of the Internet seems to have been discovered much more rapidly, particularly by the B2B marketer. Sales teams quickly realized how this medium could save them time and money, resulting in more effective and efficient sales persons.

Rather than make expensive personal calls to find potential customers, the Internet allows for customers to find the company. Search allows the buyer to find companies with products and services they need, and initiate the contact requesting a sales call. This makes the salesperson much more effective as the customer has already expressed an interest.

Product updates, recalls, etc. can also be updated on the Internet, as can instructions as to what needs to be done to amend the situation.

Sales promotions, new product introductions and ads can now be provided on the Internet at a fraction of the cost of being communicated in person.

Many companies now ask their customers to order and/or reorder online, saving the salesperson time that can be used to find new customers, and conduct more valuable activities that require personal visits.

Webinars are now being successfully employed to keep customers up to date, informed and knowledgeable about what is going on in their industries.

All of these tactics free up the sales person to do what s/he does best—sell.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

14. Describe how personal selling has become more involved with the use of other media in the IMC program. Explain how successful salespersons will use these media to their advantage.

(LO 22-3) Let‘s start with advertising. Personal selling and advertising both offer their own advantages and disadvantages to the IMC program. While advertising may be more effective for reach and at lower stages of the response hierarchies, for closing the sale and/or providing in-depth information, personal selling may be more effective. Advertising is also more affordable on a cost per contact basis.

Personal selling, on the other hand, while less cost efficient, is more effective for closing the sale, helping the customer understand the product and/or service offering and relationship building.

Personal selling can also be more effective for cross selling.

By combining personal selling with advertising, the marketer may more effectively and efficiently reach customers and or potential customers. As noted, advertising can be used at the early stages of the response process to achieve the objectives of reach, creating interest, etc. Personal selling can then be used once prospects have expressed an interest, been qualified and sent information. The one to one personal selling effort can then be used to close the sale.

Studies have shown that advertising can be effective in creating brand image and awareness of products. Additional studies have shown that once the prospective buyer knows about the brand through advertising, it makes it easier for the salesperson to get an appointment and presentation.

While advertising may not mean that the salesperson gets the sale, it at least gets them in the door to have the opportunity to do so.

Another example is public relations. Companies have involved the sales force in a variety of public relations activities including: A number of examples are cited, and a few more can be added: 1. A number of insurance sales agents assisted flood victims in the Midwest, helping them get reorganized, file claims, etc.

2. Computer sales teams helped earthquake victims get re-established by assisting them in setting up new computer systems, installing networks, etc.

3. Media salespeople often engage in public relations activities ranging from fence painting to cleaning up neighborhoods to aiding local charities to better the media image.

4. Companies encourage their employees to become involved in community efforts through the Little League, joining organizations, and supporting charities.

5. Salespersons are encouraged to speak at schools, colleges, and/or other functions to provide knowledge about sales careers and the specific company.

The chapter provides numerous additional examples of how selling can integrate public relations into their programs. The answers to other discussion questions show how other tools can be used.

15. CRM is not new to marketers. However, the text shows that the definition as well as the requirements of CRM have changed over the years. Explain the differences in the way companies employ CRM now versus previous years. (LO 22-1) Just a few decades ago, relationship marketing was defined as ―an organization‘s effort to develop a long-erm, cost-effective link with individual customers for mutual benefit.‖ Rather than focusing on a short-term sale, the sales rep tries to establish a long-term bond. And rather than just selling, the sales

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

department works with marketing to use techniques like database marketing, message differentiation to different target markets, and tracking of promotional effects to improve the relationship. Forrester now offers an updated definition of customer relationship management (CRM) as ―the business processes and supporting technologies that support the key activities of targeting, acquiring, retaining, understanding and collaborating with customers.‖ Note how this definition has changed over the years. The newer version reflects how CRM has changed to focus on the balance of benefits to both buyer and seller. CRM tools have been used by a number of companies. These companies make extensive uses of their databases on purchase behavior and frequency and duration of customer interactions to estimate profitability at the individual account level.

Solution Manual for Advertising and Promotion an Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective 12th Edition

by George Belch, Michael Belch

IMC Exercise Have students make a sales presentation to the class for a product/service of their choice. In the presentation, promotional materials (ads, sales promotions, and advertising specialties) should be included to aid the presentation. Have the students discuss how other tools support the sales effort. Have other class members critique the presentation.